UME INGEPAC EF ZT Eng PDF

DISTANCE PROTECTION
INGEPAC EF-ZT
User Manual
UME_INGEPAC_ZT_eng Rev. H (06/18)
© All rights reserved. No part of this

publication may be reproduced, by whatever
means, without the prior written permission of
Ingeteam Technology.
Ingeteam Power Technology reserves the

right to make changes without prior notice.
INDEX 
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION............................................................................................................. 11
1.1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................... 11
1.2 MODEL ENCODING .................................................................................................................................... 12
1.3 USER INTERFACE ...................................................................................................................................... 14
1.4 INTERCONNECTIONS ................................................................................................................................ 14
1.4.1 CPU ..................................................................................................................................................... 14
1.4.2 Power supply ....................................................................................................................................... 15
1.4.3 Input/output cards ................................................................................................................................ 15
1.4.4 Analogue inputs ................................................................................................................................... 18
2. HARDWARE ............................................................................................................................. 24
2.1 CONSTRUCTION FEATURES .................................................................................................................... 24
2.1.1 Half chassis (½ 19”)............................................................................................................................. 24
2.1.2 19” chassis .......................................................................................................................................... 25
2.2 REAR TERMINALS ..................................................................................................................................... 25
2.2.1 Configuration options........................................................................................................................... 25
2.2.2 Half chassis (½ 19”)............................................................................................................................. 25
2.2.3 19” chassis .......................................................................................................................................... 26
2.2.4 Closed Terminals................................................................................................................................. 27
2.2.5 Wire section ......................................................................................................................................... 27
2.3 FRONT INTERFACE.................................................................................................................................... 28
2.3.1 Half chassis (½ 19”)............................................................................................................................. 28
2.3.2 19” chassis .......................................................................................................................................... 28
2.4 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS ............................................................................................................. 29
2.4.1 Power supply voltage .......................................................................................................................... 29
2.4.2 Digital outputs ...................................................................................................................................... 30
2.4.3 Digital inputs ........................................................................................................................................ 31
2.4.4 IRIG-B input and PPS.......................................................................................................................... 31
2.4.5 Current and voltage circuits ................................................................................................................. 32
2.4.6 Front communication ........................................................................................................................... 33
2.4.7 Rear communications .......................................................................................................................... 33
2.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS .............................................................................................................. 35
2.5.1 Tropicalized ......................................................................................................................................... 35
2.6 TESTS .......................................................................................................................................................... 36
2.6.1 Climatic test ......................................................................................................................................... 36
2.6.2 Insulation and electrical safety tests.................................................................................................... 36
2.6.3 Electromagnetic tests .......................................................................................................................... 36
2.6.4 Mechanical tests .................................................................................................................................. 36
3. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS ..................................................................................................... 37
3.1 DISTANCE UNITS (21) ................................................................................................................................ 37
3.1.1 Mho ...................................................................................................................................................... 44
3.1.2 Quadrilateral ........................................................................................................................................ 47
3.1.3 Timing Type for Tripping ..................................................................................................................... 51
3.1.4 Zone 1 Extension................................................................................................................................. 54
3.1.5 High Speed zone ................................................................................................................................. 55
3.1.6 Phase selector ..................................................................................................................................... 59
3.1.7 Fault detection ..................................................................................................................................... 62
3.1.8 Mho and Quadrilateral Unit Supervision.............................................................................................. 63
3.1.9 Capacitive Voltage Transformer (CVT) Lines ..................................................................................... 73
3.2 SIGNALS AND COMMANDS ...................................................................................................................... 75
3.2.1 Signals ................................................................................................................................................. 75
3.2.2 Commands .......................................................................................................................................... 76
3.3 CURRENT UNITS ........................................................................................................................................ 78
3.3.1 General overcurrent description .......................................................................................................... 78
3.3.2 Directional characteristics ................................................................................................................... 82
3.3.3 Polarization memory monitoring .......................................................................................................... 98
Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

User Manual III
INDEX 
3.3.4 Series compensation ......................................................................................................................... 101

3.3.5 Phase overcurrent ............................................................................................................................. 102
3.3.6 Neutral overcurrent ............................................................................................................................ 103
3.3.7 Grounding overcurrent....................................................................................................................... 104
3.3.8 Unbalanced overcurrent .................................................................................................................... 105
3.3.9 2nd harmonic restraint ....................................................................................................................... 106
3.3.10 Broken conductor ............................................................................................................................ 109
3.3.11 Thermal image................................................................................................................................. 111
3.3.12 Undercurrent .................................................................................................................................... 116
3.3.13 Stub bus .......................................................................................................................................... 117
3.4 VOLTAGE UNITS ...................................................................................................................................... 121
3.4.1 General description ........................................................................................................................... 121
3.4.2 Phase overvoltage ............................................................................................................................. 123
3.4.3 Zero sequence overvoltage ............................................................................................................... 125
3.4.4 Negative sequence overvoltage ........................................................................................................ 126
3.4.5 Phase undervoltage........................................................................................................................... 127
3.4.6 Minimum voltage ............................................................................................................................... 129
3.5 FREQUENCY UNITS ................................................................................................................................. 130
3.5.1 Frequency .......................................................................................................................................... 130
3.5.2 Frequency rate of change ................................................................................................................. 133
3.6 POWER UNITS .......................................................................................................................................... 136
3.6.1 General .............................................................................................................................................. 136
3.6.2 Minimum real power .......................................................................................................................... 137
3.6.3 Maximum real power ......................................................................................................................... 138
3.6.4 Real power inversion ......................................................................................................................... 138
3.6.5 Reactive power inversion .................................................................................................................. 138
3.6.6 Minimum apparent power .................................................................................................................. 139
3.6.7 Maximum apparent power ................................................................................................................. 139
3.7 LOAD ENCROACHMENT ......................................................................................................................... 140
3.8 FUSE FAILURE ......................................................................................................................................... 141
3.9 POWER SWING ......................................................................................................................................... 143
3.10 SWITCH ONTO FAULT ........................................................................................................................... 148
3.11 BREAKER FAILURE ............................................................................................................................... 152
3.11.1 Single pole breaker Failure ............................................................................................................. 152
3.11.2 Breaker failure with low load ........................................................................................................... 156
3.12 TRIP LOGICS........................................................................................................................................... 159
3.12.1 67NQ Teleprotection Schemes ....................................................................................................... 159
3.12.2 Z Teleprotection Schemes .............................................................................................................. 175
3.12.3 Direct trip ......................................................................................................................................... 199
3.12.4 External trip ..................................................................................................................................... 200
3.12.5 Teleprotection serial communication ............................................................................................... 201
3.12.6 Trip logic .......................................................................................................................................... 203
3.13 CT SUPERVISION ................................................................................................................................... 206
3.14 VT SUPERVISION ................................................................................................................................... 207
4. BREAKER .............................................................................................................................. 208
4.1 BREAKER LOGICS ................................................................................................................................... 208
4.1.1 Breaker status ................................................................................................................................... 208
4.1.2 Breaker failure and operating logic .................................................................................................... 212
4.1.3 Locking logic ...................................................................................................................................... 213
4.1.4 Open pole detector ............................................................................................................................ 214
4.1.5 Pole discordance ............................................................................................................................... 218
4.2 BREAKER OPERATION SUPERVISION ................................................................................................. 220
4.3 TRIP AND CLOSE CIRCUITS SUPERVISION ......................................................................................... 224
5. DISCONNECTOR ................................................................................................................... 227
6. AUTOMATISMS...................................................................................................................... 229

User Manual IV
INDEX 
6.1 SYNCHRONISM......................................................................................................................................... 229

6.1.1 Undervoltage permission ................................................................................................................... 231
6.1.2 Synchronism permission ................................................................................................................... 231
6.1.3 Two breakers application .................................................................................................................. 235
6.1.4 Application auxiliary voltage .............................................................................................................. 238
6.2 RECLOSER ................................................................................................................................................ 240
6.2.1 Settings, signals and commands ....................................................................................................... 240
6.2.2 General operation .............................................................................................................................. 247
6.2.3 Post-trip reclosure permission mask ................................................................................................. 250
6.2.4 Fault type selection............................................................................................................................ 254
6.2.5 Breaker open timeout ........................................................................................................................ 254
6.2.6 Number of reclosures available ......................................................................................................... 254
6.2.7 Reference voltage monitoring ........................................................................................................... 255
6.2.8 Re-initiation of reclosure time ............................................................................................................ 256
6.2.9 Pausing of reclosure time .................................................................................................................. 256
6.2.10 Incomplete sequence block ............................................................................................................. 256
6.2.11 Synchronism monitoring .................................................................................................................. 257
6.2.12 Closure block by trip circuit monitoring............................................................................................ 257
6.2.13 52 closure timeout ........................................................................................................................... 257
6.2.14 Recloser statuses ............................................................................................................................ 258
6.2.15 Application with two breakers .......................................................................................................... 267
6.3 FREQUENCY RECLOSER ........................................................................................................................ 271
7. BREAKER AND A HALF CONFIGURATION ......................................................................... 277
7.1 PROTECTION FUNCTIONS ...................................................................................................................... 277
7.1.1 Distance functions ............................................................................................................................. 279
7.1.2 General protection functions ............................................................................................................. 279
7.1.3 Breaker .............................................................................................................................................. 280
7.1.4 Breaker and a half supervision .......................................................................................................... 281
8. FAULT LOCATOR .................................................................................................................. 283
8.1 LOCATOR OPERATION ........................................................................................................................... 285
8.1.1 Fault detection ................................................................................................................................... 285
8.1.2 Pre-fault and post-fault filtering ......................................................................................................... 285
8.1.3 Determination of the fault type .......................................................................................................... 285
8.1.4 Distance calculation........................................................................................................................... 285
8.2 PRESENTATION OF THE RESULTS ....................................................................................................... 286
8.3 CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE ................................................................................................................... 287
9. MONITORING ......................................................................................................................... 289
9.1 EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY MONITORING ......................................................................................... 289
9.2 TEMPERATURE MONITORING................................................................................................................ 290
9.3 DIS BLOCKING BY LACK OF VAUX ....................................................................................................... 290
9.4 INTERNAL BATTERY FAILURE MONITORING ...................................................................................... 291
9.5 UNIT CHECKS ........................................................................................................................................... 292
10. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................................. 295
10.1 CID ........................................................................................................................................................... 295
10.1.1 Data Storage ................................................................................................................................... 295
10.1.2 Updating CID ................................................................................................................................... 295
10.2 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................ 295
10.3 FRECUENCY, MEASUREMENT AND TRANSFORMERS .................................................................... 297
10.3.1 Current ............................................................................................................................................. 297
10.3.2 Frequency and voltage .................................................................................................................... 298
10.3.3 Power and energy ........................................................................................................................... 298
10.4 INPUTS/OUTPUTS .................................................................................................................................. 299
10.4.1 Inputs ............................................................................................................................................... 299
10.4.2 Outputs ............................................................................................................................................ 300

User Manual V
INDEX 
10.4.3 Treatment of digital input flicker ...................................................................................................... 301

10.5 LEDS ........................................................................................................................................................ 301
10.5.1 Via GEN/IHMI node ......................................................................................................................... 301
10.5.2 Via CTRL/IHMI node ....................................................................................................................... 302
10.6 CONFIGURATION WITH INREF ............................................................................................................. 302
10.7 GENERIC COMMAND ............................................................................................................................. 302
10.8 NAMES ..................................................................................................................................................... 303
10.9 IPRV NODES CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................ 303
10.9.1 General IPRV settings ..................................................................................................................... 303
10.9.2 IEC 61850 clients IPRV settings ..................................................................................................... 304
10.10 Measurement’s range automatic configuration ................................................................................ 305
11. SYNCHRONIZATION.............................................................................................................. 307
11.1 GENERAL SETTINGS ............................................................................................................................. 307
11.2 IEEE 1588v2 ............................................................................................................................................ 309
11.2.1 Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 309
11.3 IRIG-B ...................................................................................................................................................... 309
11.4 SNTP ........................................................................................................................................................ 309
11.4.1 Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 310
11.5 QUALITY FLAGS IEC 61850 .................................................................................................................. 311
12. DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS ........................................................................................ 312
12.1 STATUS REPORT ................................................................................................................................... 312
12.2 PRIMARY MEASUREMENTS REPORT ................................................................................................. 315
12.3 FAULT REPORT ...................................................................................................................................... 316
12.4 INCIDENT REPORT................................................................................................................................. 318
12.5 HISTORICAL MEASUREMENT REPORT .............................................................................................. 319
12.6 STATISTICAL DATA REPORT ............................................................................................................... 320
12.7 MAXIMETER/MINIMETER REPORT ....................................................................................................... 321
12.8 OSCILLOGRAPHY .................................................................................................................................. 322
13. USB ACCESS ......................................................................................................................... 326
13.1 DOWNLOADING REPORTS ................................................................................................................... 326
13.2 LOADING CID .......................................................................................................................................... 327
13.3 LOADING FIREWALL CONFIGURATION .............................................................................................. 327
13.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE .............................................................................................................................. 328
13.5 USB ENABLING ...................................................................................................................................... 328
14. FTP ACCESS ......................................................................................................................... 329
14.1 ACCESS CONTROL ................................................................................................................................ 330
15. MAPPING THE UNIT’S SIGNALS, MEASUREMENTS AND METERS .................................. 331
15.1 SIGNALS .................................................................................................................................................. 331
15.1.1 Type A signals ................................................................................................................................. 331
15.1.2 Type B signals ................................................................................................................................. 332
15.1.3 Type C signals ................................................................................................................................. 333
15.1.4 Type D signals ................................................................................................................................. 334
15.2 MEASUREMENTS ................................................................................................................................... 335
15.3 COUNTERS ............................................................................................................................................. 336
16. LOGICS .................................................................................................................................. 338
16.1 CONTROL LOGICS ................................................................................................................................. 338
16.2 PROTECTION LOGICS ........................................................................................................................... 339
16.3 DATABASE SIGNALS ............................................................................................................................ 340
17. IEC 61850 COMMANDS ......................................................................................................... 341
17.1 RUNNING IEC 61850 COMMANDS ........................................................................................................ 341
17.1.1 DIRECT_WITH_NORMAL_SECURITY (1) ..................................................................................... 344

User Manual VI
INDEX 
17.1.2 SBO_WITH_NORMAL_SECURITY (2)........................................................................................... 344

17.1.3 DIRECT_WITH_ENHANCED_SECURITY (3) ................................................................................ 345
17.1.4 SBO_WITH_ENHANCED_SECURITY (4) ...................................................................................... 345
17.2 COMMAND BLOCKS .............................................................................................................................. 347
17.2.1 Command blocks by inconsistent parameters ................................................................................ 347
17.2.2 Command blocks by switching hierarchy ........................................................................................ 347
17.2.3 Command 1 of n blocks ................................................................................................................... 352
17.2.4 Command blocks by mode (Mod/Beh) ............................................................................................ 352
17.2.5 Command blocks by Heatlh ............................................................................................................ 353
17.2.6 Command blocks by Interlocking .................................................................................................... 353
17.2.7 Commands blocks due to invalid/reached position ......................................................................... 353
17.3 COMMANDs for other positions ........................................................................................................... 354
17.4 COMMAND SADDRESS ......................................................................................................................... 354
18. RIO MODULES ....................................................................................................................... 356
18.1 CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................................................... 356
18.2 OPERATION ............................................................................................................................................ 356
19. CHANGES REQUIRING THE REBOOTING OF THE DEVICE ............................................... 358
20. RECEPTION GOOSES ........................................................................................................... 359
20.1 GOOSE SUBSCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................ 359
20.2 GOOSE SIMULATION ............................................................................................................................. 360
20.3 TEST MODE............................................................................................................................................. 361
20.3.1 Logical devices management hierarchy .......................................................................................... 362
20.4 SERVICE TRACKING .............................................................................................................................. 363
20.5 SUBSTITUTION MODEL ......................................................................................................................... 366
20.6 EDITION1 SUBSCRIPTION. LGOS MODEL. ......................................................................................... 367
20.6.1 Configuration values ........................................................................................................................ 367
20.6.2 Supervision values .......................................................................................................................... 368
20.6.3 Checked values ............................................................................................................................... 368
21. TCP/IP NEWORK CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................... 370
21.1 DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................................................... 370
21.2 COMMUNICATIONS REDUNDANCY ..................................................................................................... 371
21.2.1 PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL (PRP) ............................................................................ 371
21.2.2 HIGH-AVAILABILITY SEAMLESS REDUNDANCY (HSR) ............................................................. 371
21.2.3 SWITCH MODE............................................................................................................................... 372
21.2.4 LINK FAILOVER REDUNDANCY ................................................................................................... 372
21.3 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS ABOUT NETWORK CONFIGURATION ............................................. 372
21.4 GOOSES .................................................................................................................................................. 373
21.5 FIREWALL ............................................................................................................................................... 373
22. COMMUNICATION BETWEEN DEVICES .............................................................................. 374
22.1 DIRECT CONNECTION (POINT-TO-POINT) .......................................................................................... 374
22.1.1 Multimode Optical Fibre................................................................................................................... 374
22.1.2 Single-mode optical fibre ................................................................................................................. 374
22.2 CONNECTION WITH COMMUNICATIONS DEVICES (MULTIPLEXER) .............................................. 375
22.2.1 IEEE-C37.94 Interface .................................................................................................................... 375
22.3 EXAMPLE OF CONNECTING A C37.94 - G.703 CONVERTER ........................................................... 375
22.3.1 C37.94 - G.703 E1 2Mb Converter. ................................................................................................. 375
22.3.2 C37.94 - G.703 E0 Converter. ......................................................................................................... 377
23. KEYBOARD AND GRAPHIC DISPLAY ................................................................................. 378
23.1 GENERAL OPERATION ......................................................................................................................... 378
23.1.1 Display structure .............................................................................................................................. 378
23.1.2 Organization of the pages ............................................................................................................... 378
23.1.3 Treatment of the functional keys ..................................................................................................... 379
23.1.4 Graphics pages ............................................................................................................................... 381

User Manual VII
INDEX 
23.1.5 I/O pages ......................................................................................................................................... 383

23.1.6 Event pages ..................................................................................................................................... 384
23.1.7 Protection event pages .................................................................................................................... 385
23.1.8 Alarm pages .................................................................................................................................... 386
23.1.9 Device status pages ........................................................................................................................ 387
23.1.10 Fault pages .................................................................................................................................... 390
23.1.11 Measurement pages ...................................................................................................................... 395
23.1.12 Menu to other screens page .......................................................................................................... 396
23.1.13 Shortcut menu page ...................................................................................................................... 397
23.2 CONTROL AND PROTECTION MENUS PAGES .................................................................................. 398
23.2.1 Operation of the menus ................................................................................................................... 398
23.2.2 Password management ................................................................................................................... 403
23.3 NETWORK CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................... 406
23.3.1 Ethernet Configuration .................................................................................................................... 406
23.3.2 Gateway Configuration .................................................................................................................... 410
23.4 OTHER SCREENS................................................................................................................................... 412
23.4.1 Contrast setting ............................................................................................................................... 412
23.4.2 USB treatment ................................................................................................................................. 412
23.4.3 System Information.......................................................................................................................... 413
23.4.4 CID validation .................................................................................................................................. 414
23.4.5 Security Logs ................................................................................................................................... 414
23.4.6 Test Screens ................................................................................................................................... 414
23.4.7 Other Communications Menu Screens ........................................................................................... 415
24. WEB APPLICATION ............................................................................................................... 416
24.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 416
24.2 WEB application login ........................................................................................................................... 416
24.2.1 Login ................................................................................................................................................ 416
24.3 Tabs ......................................................................................................................................................... 417
24.3.1 Reports ............................................................................................................................................ 417
24.3.2 Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 420
24.3.3 Maintenance .................................................................................................................................... 421
24.3.4 SW/Configuration ............................................................................................................................ 422
24.3.5 Logout .............................................................................................................................................. 423
25. DNP PROTOCOL ................................................................................................................... 424
25.1 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 424
25.2 CONFIGURATION SETTINGS ................................................................................................................ 424
25.3 TABLES ................................................................................................................................................... 429
25.3.1 Digital status table ........................................................................................................................... 429
25.3.2 Analog values table ......................................................................................................................... 429
25.3.3 Counters table ................................................................................................................................. 430
25.3.4 Commands table ............................................................................................................................. 430
25.4 DEVICE PROFILE.................................................................................................................................... 432
25.4.1 OBJECT TABLE .............................................................................................................................. 433
26. IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL ................................................................................................ 435
26.1 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 435
26.3 Tables ...................................................................................................................................................... 437
26.3.1 Digital signals table.......................................................................................................................... 437
26.3.2 Measurements table ........................................................................................................................ 438
26.3.3 Commands table ............................................................................................................................. 438
27. SLAVE PROCOME PROTOCOL ............................................................................................ 439
27.1 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 439
27.3 TABLES ................................................................................................................................................... 441

User Manual VIII
INDEX 
27.3.1 Digital status table ........................................................................................................................... 441

27.3.2 Analog values table ......................................................................................................................... 441
27.3.3 Counters table ................................................................................................................................. 441
27.3.4 Commands table ............................................................................................................................. 441
28. MODBUS MASTER PROTOCOL ........................................................................................... 442
28.1 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 442
28.3 DATA TYPES ........................................................................................................................................... 444
28.3.1 Digital signals .................................................................................................................................. 444
28.3.2 Measurements ................................................................................................................................. 444
28.3.3 Counters .......................................................................................................................................... 445
28.3.4 Commands ...................................................................................................................................... 445
28.3.5 Request of events to Ingeteam Power Technology devices ........................................................... 445
28.3.6 Synchronization ............................................................................................................................... 445
28.4 IMPLEMENTED FUNCTIONS ................................................................................................................. 445
28.5 RTU TYPES ............................................................................................................................................. 446
28.6 SW CONFIGURATION TOOL ................................................................................................................. 447
28.6.1 Fields to be configured .................................................................................................................... 447
28.6.2 Configuration example .................................................................................................................... 455
28.7 SERIAL MESSAGES ............................................................................................................................... 457
28.7.1 Format ............................................................................................................................................. 457
28.7.2 Examples ......................................................................................................................................... 458
29. MODBUS SLAVE PROTOCOL .............................................................................................. 462
29.1 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 462
29.3 PROTOCOL PROFILE ............................................................................................................................ 465
29.3.1 Implemented functions in Modbus RTU .......................................................................................... 465
29.3.2 Implemented functions in Modbus TCP/IP ...................................................................................... 465
29.3.3 Exception codes .............................................................................................................................. 466
29.4 CONTROL PROCESSES ........................................................................................................................ 466
29.4.1 Request for equipment status ......................................................................................................... 466
29.4.2 Request for digital signals ............................................................................................................... 466
29.4.3 Request for measurements and counters ....................................................................................... 466
29.4.4 Request for digital signal changes .................................................................................................. 467
29.4.5 Requesting data via memory map................................................................................................... 468
29.4.6 Synchronization ............................................................................................................................... 469
29.4.7 Command execution........................................................................................................................ 469
29.5 EQUIPMENT ADDRESS MAP ................................................................................................................ 470
29.6 DATA FORMAT ....................................................................................................................................... 471
29.7 CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE TOOL .................................................................................................. 472
29.7.1 Fields to be configured .................................................................................................................... 472
29.7.2 Configuration example .................................................................................................................... 475
29.8 SERIAL MESSAGES ............................................................................................................................... 477
29.8.1 Format ............................................................................................................................................. 477
29.8.2 Examples ......................................................................................................................................... 477
29.9 TCP/IP MESSAGES................................................................................................................................. 482
29.9.1 Format ............................................................................................................................................. 482
29.9.2 Examples ......................................................................................................................................... 483
30. CURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS .......................................................................... 484
30.1 CEI 255-4 / BS142 CURVES ................................................................................................................... 484
30.2 ANSI CURVES ......................................................................................................................................... 497
30.3 IEC 60255-151 curves ............................................................................................................................. 506
30.4 USER CURVES........................................................................................................................................ 513
31. MEASUREMENT LIST............................................................................................................ 515

User Manual IX
INDEX 
32. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE .............................................................................................. 522

32.1 ERROR DETECTION ............................................................................................................................... 523
32.2 ERROR HANDLING PROCEDURE ........................................................................................................ 524
33. PROTECTION DEVICES WITH SAMPLED VALUES ............................................................. 525
33.1 DEVICE MODELS .................................................................................................................................... 526
33.2 MERGING UNIT DECLARATION ............................................................................................................ 526
33.3 SAMPLED VALUES SUBSCRIPTION .................................................................................................... 526
33.3.1 Configuration ................................................................................................................................... 526
33.3.2 ADD-IN of subscription .................................................................................................................... 527
33.3.3 Monitoring ........................................................................................................................................ 528
33.4 cONFIGURABLE LOCAL MEASURES .................................................................................................. 530

User Manual X
GENERAL DESCRIPTION 
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Table 1 Functions depending on model
ZT0 ZT1 (52 ½)

Distance functions
Quadrilateral Characteristic (5 zones)  
Mho Characteristic (5 zones)  
21 High Speed  
Zone 1 Extension  
Double Lines  
Lines with Series Compensation  
CVT: Lines with Capacitive Voltage Transformers  
Common protection functions
SOTF Switch onto fault  
27 Undervoltage  
59 Overvoltage  
59N Zero sequence overvoltage  
47 V2 overvoltage  
Minimum voltage  
Frequency (81M/m)  
Frequency rate of change (81R)  
3x50/51 (67)  
50N/51N (67N)  
50G/51G. Earthing overcurrent  
46TOC (67Q), 46IOC(67Q)  
46BC Broken conductor  
50CSC Second harmonic restraint  
37 Undercurrent
49 Thermal image  
32 Power units  
Stub bus  
Stub bus differential 
50BF breaker failure (Single-pole/Three-pole)  
Teleprotection
Teleprotection (21)  
Teleprotection (67/67Q)  
Monitoring Units
68LE Load encroachment  
68FF Fuse failure  
78 Power Swing  
Fault locator  
Breaker Monitoring
Breaker monitoring per pole  
Closing and trip circuit monitoring  
Excessive number of trips  
Open pole / Dead line detector  
Breaker status logic  
Pole discordance  
Automatisms
Synchronism  
Recloser (Single-pole/Three-pole)  
Frequency recloser  
Data acquisition functions
Current and voltage measurements  
Active and reactive power and energy  
Historical event, protection event and fault recording  
Oscillography  
Historical reports  
CT and VT supervision  

User Manual 11
1.2 MODEL ENCODING
COM1
COM2
COM3
COM4
COM5
COM6
ETH1
ETH2
I/O 1
I/O 2
I/O 3
I/O 4
I/O 5
I/O 6
I/O 7
I/O 8
INGEPAC EF ZT MODEL INGEPAC EF- Z T - A - - -
MODEL
21, 85 (21), 85 (67/67Q), SOTF, 68LE, 68PS, 68FF, 67, 67N, 50/51, 50N/51N, 50G/51G, 67Q,
46BC, 37, 49, 59, 27, 59N, 47, 81O/u, 81R, 32, 25, 79, 79 (81), 74TC/CC, 50BF, Stub bus, Fault 0
Locator
21, 85 (21), 85 (67/67Q), 52 ½, SOTF, 68LE, 68PS, 68FF, 67, 67N, 50/51, 50N/51N, 50G/51G,
67Q, 46BC, 37, 49, 59, 27, 59N, 47, 81O/u, 81R, 32, 25, 79, 74TC/CC, 50BF, Stub bus, Fault 1
Locator
EXTENDED CONTROL FUNCTIONS

No A
Yes B
HOUSING
1/2 chassis 19" 5U with configurable keyboard A
1/2 chassis 19" 5U with predefined keyboard Note 1 B
Chassis 19" 4U with configurable keyboard C
Chassis 19" 4U with predefined keyboard Note 1 D
POWER SUPPLY MODULE

Single PS 85-300 Vdc+ 6DI 125 Vdc + 4DO A
Single PS 85-300 Vdc+ 6DI 220 Vdc + 4DO B
Single PS 18-60 Vdc+ 6DI 24 Vdc + 4DO C
Single PS 18-60 Vdc+ 6DI 48 Vdc + 4DO D
Redundant PS 48 Vcc / 48Vcc F
Redundant PS 125 Vcc / 125Vcc G
REAR SERIAL COMMUNICATION PORTS

A GFO COM-1 (Note 7)
B PFO COM-2 (Note 7)
C RS232C COM-3
D RS485 COM-4
E FO singlemode 60km (ST) Note 8 COM-5
F FO singlemode 60km (LC) Note 8 COM-6
I C37.94 FO multimode (ST) Note 8
M FO singlemode 20-120km (ST) Note 8
N FO singlemode 20-120km (LC) Note 8
X No port
REAR ETHERNET COMMUNICATION PORTS

E GFO ETH-1
F RJ45 ETH-2
I GFO (Link failover redundancy) Note 6
J RJ45 (Link failover redundancy) Note 6
K LC (Link failover redundancy) Note 6
L LC
O LC (ETH with PRP/HSR/Switch) Note 9
P RJ45 (ETH with PRP/HSR/Switch) Note 9
X No port
TERMINALS
Pin type standard terminals A
Closed terminals Note 2 B
Closed terminals for analog inputs and pin type standard terminals for the rest C
I/O BOARD CONFIGURATION

BOARD SELECTION (Note 3)
-A No board Board 2
-B 11 DI (24V dc) + 9 DO Board 3
-C 11 DI (48 Vdc) +9 DO Board 4 (Note 4)
-D 11 DI (125 Vdc) + 9 DO Board 5 (Note 4)
-E 11 DI (220 Vdc) + 9 DO Board 6 (Note 4)
-F 32 DI (24Vdc) Note 10 Board 7 (Note 4)
-G 32 DI (48Vdc) Note 10
-H 32 DI (125 Vdc) Note 10
-I 32 DI (220 Vdc) Note 10
-J 16 DI (24Vdc)-8 independent DO
-K 16 DI (48 Vdc)-8 independent DO
-L 16 DI (125 Vdc)-8 independent DO
-M 16 DI (220 Vdc)-8 independent DO
-N 16 DI (24 Vdc)- 16DO
-O 16 DI (48Vdc)- 16 DO
-P 16 DI (125 Vdc)- 16DO
-Q 16 DI (220 Vdc)- 16DO
-R 16 DI (24Vdc)-8 AI Note 5
-S 16 DI (48Vdc)-8 AI Note 5
-T 16 DI (125 Vdc)-8 AI Note 5
-U 16 DI (220 Vdc)-8 AI Note 5
-V 16 DI (24 Vdc)- 8 AI (4 isolated) Note 5
-W 16 DI (48Vdc)- 8 AI (4 isolated) Note 5
-X 16 DI (125 Vdc)- 8 AI (4 isolated) Note 5
-Y 16 DI (220 Vcc)- 8 AI (4 isolated) Note 5
-0 8DI (24Vcc) + 4DO (h.b.c.o.) + 4DO
-1 8DI (48Vcc) + 4DO (h.b.c.o.) + 4DO
-2 8DI (125Vcc) + 4DO (h.b.c.o.) + 4DO
-3 8DI (220Vcc) + 4DO (h.b.c.o.) + 4DO
-4 8DI (24Vcc) + 8DO
-5 8DI (48Vcc) + 8DO
-6 8DI (125Vcc) + 8DO
-7 8DI (220Vcc) + 8DO
ZB 8DI (24Vcc) + 4DO (fast+h.b.c.o.) + 4DO Note 10
ZC 8DI (48Vcc) + 4DO (fast+h.b.c.o.) + 4DO Note 10
ZD 8DI (125Vcc) + 4DO (fast+h.b.c.o.) + 4DO Note 10
ZE 8DI (220Vcc) + 4DO (fast+h.b.c.o.) + 4DO Note 10
- Reservado
- Reservado
- Reservado
Note 1: Only selectable with extended control functions.

Note 2: The terminals for the power supply inputs are pyn type standard terminals.
Note 3:To know the order of the boards in the rack, consult the number of the terninals on the rear views of each chassis.
Note 4: Only available for 19" chassis.
Note 5: Standard analogue inputs configuration: +/-5mA, +/-5mA, +/-2.5mA, +/-2.5mA, +/-2.5mA, +/-2.5mA, +/-20mA, +/-20mA. Consult other configurations.
Note 6:This option requires selecting both ETH1 as ETH2 and supports any combination of options I , J and K.
Note 7: Teleprotection ports only can use COM1 and COM2
Note 8: Only for Teleprotection ports.
Note 9: This options replace options G, H, M, N. To use replaced options consult Ingeteam.
Note 10: Not available on board I/O 7. If REAR ETHERNET COMMUNICATION PORT is "O" or "P", not available on board I/O 2 (4U housing) neither on board I/O 3 (5U housing).
It´s available an external accessory (FC2910) to allow BNC connection with coaxial cable in Irig-B and PPS input.

User Manual 12
ZT1 model is specific for breaker and a half. The analog input 7 can be selected between Polarization current and Parallel line
Neutral current 2
Available analog inputs in models
Model T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12

ZT0 IA IB IC I neutral Ipol In2 Vs2 Vs1 V neutral VA VB VC
ZT1 I A1 I B1 I C1 I A2 I B2 I C2 In2/Ipol Vs2 Vs1 VA VB VC
Figure 1 Board position according to model encoding 19” chassis
Figure 2 Board position according to model encoding ½ 19” chassis”
Figure 3 Redundant power supply ½ 19” chassis Figure 4 Redundant power supply 19” chassis

User Manual 13
Figure 5 PRP Redundancy (2RJ45) Figure 6 PRP Redundancy (2RJ45 + 2LC)
1.3 USER INTERFACE
Local. The front board is equipped with:
 10-digit numerical keyboard with decimal point, plus R key

 4 scroll keys:  (Up),  (Down),  (Left),  (Right)
 3 general keys  (Enter), ESC (Escape), MENU
 Function keys depending on the model:
 5 function keys (I, O, DES, SEL, INF)
 7 function keys (I, O, F1...F5)
 12 function keys (I, O, DES, SEL, INF, F1…F7)
 16 function keys (I, O, F1…F14)
 19 fully assignable LEDs
 1 unit operation LED
 USB 2.0 front port for downloading reports and loading CID
 Front RJ45 port for communications
1.4 INTERCONNECTIONS
Interconnections depend on the modules selected. The connections associated with each of the modules are indicated, and
thus the diagram will depend on the modules installed.
1.4.1 CPU
Figure 7 3-contact relay and IRIG-B Figure 8 With BNC accessory

User Manual 14
1.4.2 Power supply

The two options are a redundant power supply and a simple power supply with inputs/outputs.
Figure 9 Simple power supply
Figure 10 Double power supply
1.4.3 Input/output cards

The I/O modules available are:
 Module 1 (Figure 11): Equipped with 11 digital inputs and 9 digital outputs grouped as follows:
 Inputs: 4 independent + 3 with a common point + 4 with a common point.
 Outputs: 5 independent + 3 with a common point + 1 switched (3 contacts).
Figure 11 Module 11 digital inputs and 9 digital outputs
 Inputs: 16 with a common point.
 Outputs: 16 with a common point.
 Outputs: 8 independent.

User Manual 15
 Module 4 (Figure 14): Equipped with 32 digital inputs grouped as follows:

 Inputs: 16 with a common point + 16 with a common point.
Figure 14 Module 32 inputs
 Module 5 (Figure 15): Equipped with 16 digital inputs and 8 analogue inputs grouped as follows:
 Analogue: 8 independent. The analogue inputs have standard configuration, that could be changed
among the options: ±1mA, ±2.5mA, ±5mA, ±20mA, ±5V, ±10V
Standard configuration of analogue inputs
Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8

+/- 5mA +/- 5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 20mA +/- 20mA
Figure 15 Module with 16 digital inputs and 8 analogue inputs
 Module 6 (Figure 16): Equipped with 16 digital inputs and 8 analogue inputs (4 isolated) grouped as follows:
 Analogue: 8 independent, 4 of them are isolated and 4 have a common point. The analogue inputs
have standard configuration, that could be changed among the options: ±1mA, ±2.5mA, ±5mA,
±20mA, ±5V, ±10V
Standard configuration of analogue inputs
Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8

Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4
(isolated) (isolated) (isolated) (isolated)
+/- 5mA +/- 5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 2.5mA +/- 20mA +/- 20mA
Figure 16 Module with 16 digital inputs and 8 analogue inputs (4 isolated)

User Manual 16
 Module 7 (Figure 17): Equipped with 8 digital inputs, 4 high breaking capacity outputs (hbco) and 4 digital
outputs grouped as follows:
 Inputs: 8 independent.
 Outputs: 8 independent: the 4 hbco outputs are 1 to 4 (pins 1 to 8) and the 4 standard outputs are 5 to
8 (pins 10 a 17).
Figure 17 Module 8 inputs, 4 outputs (hbco) y 4 digital outputs
 Module 8 (Figure 18): Equipped with 8 digital inputs, 8 digital outputs grouped as follows:
 Outputs: 8 independent.
Figure 18 Module 8 inputs, 8 outputs
 Module 9 (Figure 19): Equipped with 8 digital inputs, 4 fast and high breaking capacity outputs (hbco) and 4
digital outputs grouped as follows:
 Outputs: 8 independent: the 4 fast and hbco outputs are 1 to 4 (pins 1 to 8) and the 4 standard outputs
are 5 to 8 (pins 10 a 17).
Figure 19 Module 8 inputs, 4 outputs (fast and hbco) y 4 digital outputs

User Manual 17
1.4.4 Analogue inputs

The following diagram shows the configuration of the analogue inputs:
ZT0 ZT1

User Manual 18
1.4.4.1 Wiring diagrams

The following figures show different interconnection options for the analogue inputs, in accordance with the available
inputs.
Figure 20 Wiring diagram Iphase, In, Ipol, Vphase, Vsyn

User Manual 19
Figure 21 Wiring diagram Iphase, In, Vphase, Vsyn

User Manual 20
Figure 22 Wiring diagram Iphase, In, Ipol, Vphase, V0 and Vsyn

User Manual 21
Figure 23 Wiring diagram Iphase, In, Vphase, V0 and Vsyn

User Manual 22
Figure 24 Wiring diagram 52 ½
Figure 25 Topology 52 ½

User Manual 23
HARDWARE 
2. HARDWARE
EF devices can be used as autonomous devices or as part of a protection and control system. The devices are implemented
based on a microprocessor and a DSP linked through shared RAM and communication lines.
The digital processing is done by a high accuracy 16 bit converter. Each signal reaches this converter after being conditioned,
filtered and amplified. A high frequency sampling is done at 144 samples per cycle (at 8640 Hz for 60 Hz systems or at 7200Hz
for 50 Hz systems). This sampling is transformed into 24 samples per cycle through a digital process before reaching the
protection functions.
INGEPAC EF devices have non-volatile flash memory where the user settings, configurations and application are stored. This
kind of memory allows software updates and modifications without needing to manipulate the device hardware.
2.1 CONSTRUCTION FEATURES
Two options can be selected:
 Half chassis ½ 19” and 5U

 Chassis 19” and 4U
2.1.1 Half chassis (½ 19”)

User Manual 24
HARDWARE 
2.1.2 19” chassis
2.2 REAR TERMINALS
The rear section will vary in accordance with the options selected for the unit. The following figures show various possible
configurations.
2.2.1 Configuration options

The rear section options may vary depending on the options selected:
 Power supply unit. There are two options available:

 Simple with inputs/outputs. Equipped with a 3-contact terminal with power supply with screw and a 17-
contact terminal with screw (Figure 26).
 Redundant. Equipped with two 3-contact terminals for each of the power supplies.
 Inputs/outputs cards. All the input/output modules have two 17-contact terminals with screw.
 CPU. Equipped with a 6-contact terminal with screw for the digital output of 3 contacts and the IRIG-B inputs
(Figure 7). Equipped with different Ethernet and standard communications module options.
 Analogue. Equipped with two 12-contact terminals with screw.
 Communications. To choose between:
 Ethernet: RJ45 and G.F.O.
 Standard: RS232, RS485, G.F.O. and P.F.O.
Pin type or closed type terminals may be chosen for the analogue and input/output terminals.

Different options which modify the view of the rear section may be selected (from top to bottom):
 Simple/redundant power supply

 1 or 2 I/O modules
 Communication ports in the CPU

User Manual 25
HARDWARE 
 Analogue card with up to 12 transformers

Figure 26 shows rear section with the options:
 Simple power source with inputs/outputs

 2 input/output cards
 CPU with communication ports:
 Ethernet GFO + RJ45
 Standard RS232+RS485+GFO+PFO
Figure 26 Rear section with analogue and simple source
2.2.3 19” chassis

Different options which modify the view of the rear section may be selected (from top to bottom and left to right):
 Simple/redundant power supply

 1 or no I/O modules
 Communication ports in the CPU
 Number of I/O modules
In Figure 27 the next options can be seen:
 Simple power source with inputs/outputs

 5 input/output cards
 CPU with communication ports:
 Ethernet GFO + RJ45
 Standard with 3 RS232 + 2 GFO + PFO

User Manual 26
HARDWARE 
Figure 27 Rear section with analogue and simple source
2.2.4 Closed Terminals

The next figures show the closed terminals used in the digital I/O boards (Figure 28) and the transformer inputs (V/I)
(Figure 29).
Figure 28 Closed Terminals I/O boards
Figure 29 Closed Terminals transformer inputs (V/I)
2.2.5 Wire section

The wires for the terminals should be copper with a section AWG 12 to 18 ( 4 mm2 to 0.8mm2) .
 Supply terminals:
Wire section AWG 16 to 14 (1.5 to 2 mm2)
 I/O terminals:
Wire section AWG 16 to 14 (1.5 to 2 mm2)
 Current and voltage terminals:

Wire section AWG 12 (4 mm2)

User Manual 27
HARDWARE 
2.3 FRONT INTERFACE

There are two half-chassis front options (½ 19” and 5U):
 Configurable functional keys (Figure 30)

 Fixed functional keys (Figure 31).
The front interfaces are equipped with:
 Graphic display
 19 general use LEDs with interchangeable labels
 1 2-colour unit status LED
 Numeric keypad
 7 operational keys
 Ethernet communication
 Master USB communication
 Depending on the model, the following are available:
 5 functional keys for selecting with interchangeable labels + 2 operational keys
 3 fixed function keys + 2 operational keys.

Figure 30 Configurable functional keys Figure 31 Fixed functional keys
2.3.2 19” chassis

There are two 19” and 4U chassis front options:
 Configurable functional keys (Figure 32)

 Fixed functional keys (Figure 33)
The front interfaces are equipped with:
 Graphic display
 19 general use LEDs with interchangeable labels
 1 2-colour unit status LED
 Numeric keypad
 7 operational keys
 Ethernet communication

User Manual 28
HARDWARE 
 Master USB communication

 Depending on the model, the following are available:
 14 functional keys for selecting with interchangeable labels + 2 operational keys
 3 fixed function keys + 2 operational keys + 7 functional keys with interchangeable labels for selecting.
Figure 32 Configurable functional keys
Figure 33 Fixed functional keys
2.4 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
2.4.1 Power supply voltage

125/220 Vdc models: 110Vdc-20% up to 250Vac + 10%:
 Operating range:
 Direct: 88Vdc up to 300Vdc
 Alternating: 85Vac up to 265Vac
24/48 Vdc models: 24Vdc-20% up to 48Vdc + 20%:
 Operating range:
 Direct: 18Vdc up to 60Vdc
Burden. Depends on the cards connected.
 20W + 0,5W for each relay activated

Battery failure signal. Minimum voltage to activate the signal
Power supply 24Vcc 48Vcc 125Vcc 220Vcc
Activation level 16V 37V 86V 170V
The wires for the terminals should be copper with a section AWG 16 to 14 (1.5 to 2 mm2).

User Manual 29
HARDWARE 
2.4.2 Digital outputs

The wires for the I/O terminals should be copper with a section AWG 16 to 14 (1.5 to 2 mm2).
Independent standard and trip outputs:
The characteristics of the independent contact outputs are as follows:
 Permanent current: 8 A at 25ºC

 Make: 30 A 1sec
 Connection capacity 2500W at 250Vdc
 Open or break capacity:
200Vdc 125Vdc 48Vdc
With resistive load 1.0A 1.5A 2.0A
With inductive load L/R=40ms 0.7A 1.0A 1.5A
 Operating time: 5ms activation and 8ms deactivation

Signal outputs:
The characteristics of the 3-contact switched, common point signal outputs are:

 Make:
 30 A ½ sec.
 20 A 1 sec.
200Vdc 125Vdc 48Vdc
With resistive load 0.2A 0.4A 1.0A
With inductive load L/R=40ms 0.1A 0.2A 0.5A
 Operating time: 8ms activation and deactivation

The compliance of the common point outputs is the same as that of the independent outputs. However, due to sharing a
common point, only 2 relays can be activated simultaneously.
High break contact outputs (h.b.c.o) and Fast + high break contact outputs (fast + h.b.c.o):
The characteristics of the independent contact outputs are the same except the activation times:

 Make: 30 A 1sec
 Connection capacity 2500W at 250Vdc
200Vdc 125Vdc 48Vdc
With resistive load 10A 10A 10A
With inductive load 10A L/R=20ms 10A L/R=40ms 10A L/R=40ms
 Cyclic capacity: 4 cycles in 1 second, 2 minutes waiting for thermal dissipation

 Operating time:
 h.b.c.o outputs
 5ms activation and 5ms deactivation with resistive load
 5ms activation and 14ms deactivation with L/R = 40ms
 Fast + h.b.c.o outputs: 3µs activation and 8ms deactivation with resistive load

User Manual 30
HARDWARE 
2.4.3 Digital inputs

The input burden is lower than 3mA at nominal voltage.
The inputs do not have polarity.
The wires for the I/O terminals should be copper with a section AWG 16 to 14 (1.5 to 2 mm2).
They have a fixed range with 4 nominal voltage options:

Rated V Characteristics
Not activated below 9 Vdc.
24Vdc Activated above 12 Vdc.
Maximum voltage 72 Vdc
125Vdc They are activated above 87 Vdc.
2.4.4 IRIG-B input and PPS

Equipped with an input for synchronization by GPS, using IRIG-B time codes (Figure 34) and a pulse per second (PPS)
input for synchronization with:
 Demodulated input (TTL levels).

 Cable type: 2-wire, shielded
 Insulation: 2000 V
The input circuit is a 440 ohm serial resistance with an opto-isolator; for a 5 V signal, the approximate burden is 10 mA.
The number of units that can be connected in parallel to a generator depends on the output current supply capacity; a
typical value is 70 mA, which would enable the connection of 6 units (although the length and the type of cable can also
influence). The cable must be shielded and twisted.
According to configuration, it synchronizes with frames B002 , B003 , B006 , B007 type . It also synchronizes with
IEE1344.
Optionally, with an external adapter inputs IRIG- B and PPS can be BNC type. The connection must use a 50 Ω coaxial
cable with a male BNC connector.
Figure 34 Connection example

User Manual 31
HARDWARE 
2.4.5 Current and voltage circuits

Phases, neutral and polarization. Single rated current 1/5 A.
 Measurement range: 0.02A to 200A.

 Thermal capacity
 Permanent 20 A
 Short duration 150 A (10 sec.)
500 A (1 sec.)
 Very short duration 1250 A (half cycle)

 Burden at In= 5 A <0.2VA
 Burden at In= 1 A <0.02VA
Voltage:
 Measurement range: 1V to 200V.

 Rated voltages: 63.5/120 Vac
 Thermal capacity
 Permanent 2 Un
 Short duration 5 Un (1 sec.)
3.5 Un (1 min)
 Burden at 63.5 V <0.015 VA

 Burden at 100 V <0.03 VA
The wires should be copper with a section AWG 12 (4 mm2).
2.4.5.1 Accuracy
 Current
 Measurement range (0 to 1.2*In)
 With In = 1: class 0.5 (0.5% of FS)
 With In = 5: class 0.5 (0.5% of FS)
 Protection range (0 to 200 A)
 1 % over the measurement or 2 mA (greater)
 Voltage
 Measurement range (0 to 1.2*Vn)
 Accuracy 0.5% of FS
 Protection range (0 to 200 Vac)
 1 % over the measurement or 50 mV (greater)
 Dephase angle
 Accuracy  1º
 Power
 Measurement range (0 to 1.2*In*1.2*Vn)
 With In = 1: class 1 (1% of Pn)
 With In = 5: class 0.5 (0,5% of Pn)
 Frequency: ±10MHz
Time accuracy:
 Additional time = 0ms

User Manual 32
HARDWARE 
 Measurement/start value:
 From 1 to 1,5 times: Up to 40ms (typical 35ms). Up to 35ms with fast outputs.
 2 times: Between 30-35ms. Up to 30ms with fast outputs.
 From 3 times: Under 30ms. Under 25ms with fast outputs.
 Additional time higher than 50ms
 30ms or 3% of the theorical value (the higher of the two)
Currents must be above 100mA.
2.4.6 Front communication

Ethernet (IEC8802-3) via RJ45 cable
 RJ45 connector (female)

 Cable type: Shielded
 Cable length: 100 m maximum
 Baud rate: 10/100 Mb.
 Insulation 500V
USB
 USB 2.0 compatible version

 Master operating mode
 Speed: 480Mbps (high-speed), 12Mbps (full-speed) or 1.5Mbps (low-speed)
 Insulation 500V
2.4.7 Rear communications

2.4.7.1 Ethernet communication
The device has two Ethernet port (IEC8802-3) with options of RJ45 or optical fiber.
Ethernet via RJ45 cable
 RJ45 connector (female)

 Baud rate: 10/100 Mb.
 Insulation 500V
Ethernet via glass optical fiber (ST and LC)
 Connector
 ST
 LC
 Wavelength: 1310nm
 Multimode glass optical fiber: 62.5 /125 µm and 50/125 µm
 Permitted attenuation
 8 db with 50/125 µm
 11 db with 62.5/125 µm
 Typical transmitter optical power: -20dBm to -14dBm
 Receiver optical sensitivity: -31dBm
 Baud rate: 100 Mb.

User Manual 33
HARDWARE 
 Maximum distance: 2 km
2.4.7.2 Serial communications

Glass optical fiber
 ST connector
 Multimode glass optical fiber: 62.5 /125 µm and 50/125 µm
 Permitted attenuation
 9 db with 50/125 µm
 11 db with 62.5/125 µm
 Typical transmitter optical power: -17dBm to -11dBm
 Maximum distance: 2 km
Plastic optical fiber
 V-Pin connector (HP standard)

 Multimode optical fiber HCS (silica) with 200 µm and plastic with 1mm
 Permitted attenuation:
 24.7db with 1mm plastic cable
 22db with 200 µm silica cable
 Typical transmitter optical power
 -17dBm to -8dBm with 1mm plastic cable
 -13,5dBm to -4,5dBm with 200 µm silica cable
 Maximum distance: 115m with 1mm plastic cable and 1.9km with 200 µm silica cable
RS232
 DTE 9 pin female D type

 Insulation 500V
RS485
 DTE 9 pin female D type

 Cable type: Shielded crossed pair
 Cable length: 1.000 m maximum.
 Insulation 500V
For communications between devices can be used:
FO single-mode (60km)
 Connector LC duplex or ST
 Wavelength: 1310nm, Laser
 Singlemode: 9/125 nm
 Permitted attenuation: 30db
 Typical transmitter optical power: -5dBm a 0dBm
 Receiver maximun optical power: 0dBm

User Manual 34
HARDWARE 
 Maximum distance: 60km

 Minimum distance: 1km
FO single-mode (20-120km)
 Connector LC duplex or ST
 Wavelength: 1550nm, Laser
 Singlemode: 9/125 nm
 Permitted attenuation: 40db
 Typical transmitter optical power: 0dBm a 5dBm
 Receiver maximun optical power: 0dBm
 Minimum distance: 20km. It cannot be used below 20km.
C37.94 glass optical fiber
 ST connector
 Multimode glass optical fiber: 50/125µm and 62.5/125 µm
 Permitted attenuation:
 13db with 62,5/125 µm
 9dB with 50/125 µm
 Typical transmitter optical power: -16dBm a -11dBm
 Receiver maximun optical power: -32dBm
2.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Operating temperature:
 Continuous: -25°C a +60 ºC

 <96h: -25°C a +70 °C
 <16h: -40°C a +85ºC
 HMI and MTBF may be affected outside the continuous operating temperature range
 The maximum operation temperature for LC communication ports is +70º
Storage temperature: -40 to 85 ºC
Relative humidity: Up to 95% without condensation
2.5.1 Tropicalized
Printed circuit boards are lacquered to protect against corrosion and biological factors in humid environments. Depending
on the type of card different methods are used, dipping or selective varnishing and different varnishes. It is a treatment
that deposits a layer of low surface energy that repels moisture and some types of dirt. This procedure is made by
demand, in the order

User Manual 35
HARDWARE 
2.6 TESTS
2.6.1 Climatic test

Climatic test Standard
Cold IEC -60068-2-1 -40°C, 16 hours
Dry Heat IEC -60068-2-2 +85°C, 16 hours
Damp heat steady state IEC -60068-2-78 +40°C/93%RH, 96 hours
Damp heat cyclic IEC -60068-2-30 55ºC / 95% HR 6 cycles of 12+12 hours
Rapid change of temperature IEC -60068-2-14 -20ºC/+70ºC 5 cycles of 3+3 hours
External protection level IEC60529 IP30
2.6.2 Insulation and electrical safety tests

Insulation and electrical safety test Standard
Dielectric test IEC 60255-27 2 kVac
Insulation resistance test IEC 60255-27 > 100 MΩ at 500Vdc.
±5kV CM
Impulse voltage test IEC 60255-27
±1kV DM
2.6.3 Electromagnetic tests

Electromagnetic test Standard
Measurements of radiated disturbance field strength EN 55022 A Class
A Class PS
Measurements of conducted radioelectric disturbances EN 55022
B class: Ethernet port
±2.8kV CM
Damped oscillatory waves immunity test IEC 61000-4-18
±1kV DM
Electrostatic discharge immunity test IEC 61000-4-2 ±8kV/±15kV
Electrical Fast transients immunity test IEC 61000-4-4 ±4kV,5kHz
±4kV CM
Surge immunity test IEC 61000-4-5
±2kV DM
100% 130 ms
DC power supply interruptions, dips and variations immunity test IEC 61000-4-29 60% 200 ms
30% 5s
Ripple immunity test IEC 61000-4-17 15% (50 and 100 Hz)
Power frequency immunity test IEC 60255-22-7 300 V CM/ 150 V DM
Radiated radiofrequency electromagnetic field immunity test IEC 61000-4-3 10V/m
Conducted disturbances induced by radiofrequency fields immunity test IEC 61000-4-6 10Vrms
50 Hz magnetic fields immunity test IEC 61000-4-8 100 A/m 1000 A/m (2 s)
Pulse magnetic fields immunity test IEC 61000-4-9 1000 A/m
Damped oscillatory magnetic fields immunity test IEC 61000-4-10 100 A/m
Radiated Electromagnetic Interference from Transceivers IEEE 37.90.2 35 V/m
2.6.4 Mechanical tests

Mechanical test Standard
Vibration (sinusoidal): Response IEC 60255-21-1 Class 2
Vibration (sinusoidal): Endurance IEC 60255-21-1 Class 1
Shocks and bumps IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1
Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Class 2

User Manual 36
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
3. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
3.1 DISTANCE UNITS (21)
Protections have measurement units per phase combination (AN, BN, CN, AB, BC, and CA), per characteristic (quadrilateral
and Mho) and per zone of operation (5 zones).
A distance protection measurement unit compares the voltage and current to calculate the impedance and the distance from
the relay to the fault to determine whether the fault is inside or outside the protected zone.
The protection has 5 zones of operation that can be configured independently with different characteristics. The
overreaching zones are useful as backup protection of the adjacent lines. The typical configuration uses three forward zones
and one backwards.
 The first zone typically covers up to 80% of the protected line, causing instantaneous trips for faults in this zone.
 The second zone covers the rest of the line and part of the following one, usually up to 120% of the line. It provides trips
or signalling, depending on how it is programmed. The trips are not instantaneous, there is an additional programmable
time for giving another protection time to clear the fault if it is outside of its line.
 The third zone covers the rest of the overreach line and part of the next one. It provides trips or signalling, depending on
how it is programmed. The trips are not instantaneous, there is an additional programmable time available.
 The fourth zone covers the reverse line. It provides trips or signalling, depending on how it is programmed. The trips are
not instantaneous, there is an additional programmable time available.
 The fifth zone is used as backup and covers all the zones. It provides trips or signalling, depending on how it is
programmed. The trips are not instantaneous, there is an additional programmable time available.
The distance unit is supervised by the following functions:
 A directional function which provides the direction of the fault.

 A phase identifier which discriminates the phases involved in the fault, to prevent certain units from overreaching.
 Current supervision. This allows fixing the minimum value so that there are distance trips.
The Mho and/or quadrilateral characteristic can be used for both the single phase to ground faults and for phase - phase
faults, depending on which setting is selected.
The distance units for ground faults correct the current measured in each phase with the zero sequence using different
compensation factors for each zone.
In parallel lines, the distance units for ground faults correct the current measured in each phase with the neutral current
using a mutual compensation factor for each zone.
There are independent settings for each of the five zones (Table 2 and Table 3). Zone 1 has inductive tilting settings which
do not exist in the other zones (Table 2).
The reach of zone 1 can vary depending on the "Zone 1 extension" function.
 Nodes:
 Zone 1: PROT/PDIS1
 Zone 2: PROT/ZPDIS2
There are 6 settings tables.
The settings used in these functions (Table 2 for zone 1 and Table 3 for the other zones) are as follows:
 Directional Mode. Indicates the direction of the characteristics. The directional supervision indicates the direction.
 Non directional (0). The unit acts as non-directional, in other words, directional supervision is disabled. In the
quadrilateral characteristic it operates forward and backwards, and in the Mho characteristic it operates
forward without being limited by directional supervision.

User Manual 37
 Forward trip (1). It only operates with forward faults.

 Reverse trip (2). It only operates with backwards faults.
 Reverse start (3). It only operates with backwards faults. It does not generate trips, only starts.
 Forward start (4). It only operates with forward faults. It does not generate trips, only starts. This option is not
found in settings for zone 1.
 Characteristic angle (º). Indicates the characteristic angle.
 General trip. Indicates if this unit produces general trip or not. For additional details, see the section
corresponding to the recloser (3.12.6).
 Reclose Permission. Indicates whether each trip type can be reclosed or not, in accordance with the recloser's
closing cycle (See 6.2.3).
 Enable Events record. Allows the generation of protection events associated to the function. If set to “NO”, the
function’s protection events are not generated. If set to “YES”, the function’s specific mask is contemplated.
 Phase Enabled (Ph). Indicates whether or not the phase-phase characteristic is enabled.
 Phase Characteristic (Ph). Selects the phase-phase characteristic:
 Mho (0). Only the mho characteristic is enabled.
 Quadrilateral (1). Only the quadrilateral characteristic is enabled.
 Mho and Quad (2). Both characteristics are enabled.
 Phase Time (ms) (Ph). Indicates the time during which the conditions for the tripping must be met.
 Mho Reach (Ph). Indicates the reach of the mho phase-phase characteristic.
 Resistive Reach (Ph). Indicates the resistive reach of the quadrilateral phase-phase characteristic.
 X Reach Forward (Ph). Indicates the inductive reach forward of the quadrilateral phase-phase characteristic. If
the "Directional Mode" is set to reverse, the setting “X Reach Reverse (Ph)”is used.
 X Reach Reverse (Ph). Indicates the inductive reach backwards of the quadrilateral phase-phase characteristic.
If the "Directional Mode" is set to forward, the setting “X Reach Forward (Ph)”is used.
 R Blinder Angle (Ph). Indicates the slope angle of the resistive reach of the quadrilateral phase-phase
characteristic.
 Block phase units (Ph). Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the phase-phase units.
 Enabled (Gnd). Indicates whether the phase-ground characteristic is enabled or not.
 Gnd Characteristic (Gnd). Selects the phase-ground characteristic:
 Mho (0). Only the mho characteristic is enabled.
 Quadrilateral (1). Only the quadrilateral characteristic is enabled.
 Mho and Quad (2). Both characteristics are enabled.
 Phase-ground time (ms). Indicates the time during which the conditions for the tripping must be met.
 Kn Module. Indicates the zero sequence compensation factor module.
 Kn Angle (º). Indicates the zero sequence compensation factor angle.
 Km Module. Indicates the mutual compensation factor module of the parallel lines.
 Km Angle (º). Indicates the parallel lines mutual compensation factor angle.
 Mho Reach (Gnd). Indicates the reach of the mho phase-ground characteristic.
 Resistive Reach (Gnd). Indicates the resistive reach of the quadrilateral phase-ground characteristic.
 X Reach Forward (Gnd). Indicates the inductive forward reach of the quadrilateral phase-ground characteristic. If
the "Directional Mode" is set to reverse, the setting “X Reach Reverse (Gnd)”is used.
 X Reach Reverse (Gnd). Indicates the inductive backwards reach of the quadrilateral phase-ground
characteristic. If the "Directional Mode" is set to forward, the setting “X Reach Forward (Gnd)”is used.
 R Blinder Angle (Gnd). Indicates the slope angle of the resistive reach of the quadrilateral phase-ground
characteristic.
 Tilt Angle Gnd (º). Indicates the tilting angle of the resistive reach of the quadrilateral phase-ground
characteristic. This setting is only available for zone 1.

User Manual 38
 Tilt Type (Gnd). Indicates the tilting type selected for the quadrilateral phase-ground characteristic. This setting is
available for zone 1.
 Disabled (0). Tilting is disabled.
 Time delayed (1). Enabled for the time selected, after fault detected.
 Continuous (2). Continuously enabled.
 Tilt Time Gnd (ms). Indicates the time during which inductive tilting of the phase-ground quadrilateral
characteristic is applied. This setting is available for zone 1.
 Quad. Type (Gnd). Indicates the quadrilateral unit polarization of the quadrilateral phase-ground characteristic.
 I0 (0). Zero sequence polarization.
 I2 (1). Negative sequence polarization.
 Max (I0, I2) (2). Polarization by the greater of the two (zero sequence and negative sequence).
 Block Gnd units. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the phase-ground units.
 Block zone. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the zone, in other words, the phase-ground and phase-
phase units.
 Timing type. Allows you to select how each zone's trip is delayed after the unit picks up (only zones 2, 3, 4 and
5). The various modes are described in the section entitled "Timing Type".

User Manual 39
Table 2 Zone 1 Settings
Data Setting Minimum Maximum Step Remarks Type

Non Directional (0)
DirMod (OpType in Forward Trip (1)
Directional Mode enum
Ed2) Reverse Trip (2)
Reverse Start (3)
LinAng Characteristic Angle (º) 0 90 0.1 float
GenTrip General Trip NO / YES Boolean
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (1P) (1)
Reclose 1 (3P) (2)
Reclose 1 (1P/3P) (3)
ReclPerm Reclose permission 0 7 ING
Reclose 2-3-4 (4)
Reclose1(1P)-2-3-4 (5)
Reclose1(3P)-2-3-4 (6)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (7)
MaskEna Enable Events Record NO / YES Boolean
PhEna Phase Enabled (Ph) NO / YES Boolean
Mho (0)
PhType Phase Characteristic (Ph) Quadrilateral (1) enum
Mho and Quad (2)
PhDlTmms Phase Time (ms) (Ph) 0 600000 10 int32
PhPoRch Mho reach (Ph) 0,05 500 0,01 float
RisPhRch Resistive Reach (Ph) 0,05 500 0,01 float
XPhRch X Reach Forward(Ph) 0,05 500 0,01 float
XPhRchB X Reach Reverse (Ph) 0,05 500 0,01 float
PhBlArg R Blinder Angle(Ph) 45 90 0.1 float
LogInPhBlk Block phase units (Ph) uint32
GndEna Enabled (Gnd) NO / YES Boolean
Mho (0)
GndType Gnd Characteristic (Gnd) Quadrilateral (1) enum
Mho and Quad (2)
GndDlTmms Phase-ground time (ms) 0 600000 10 int32
K0Fact Kn Module 0 10 0,01 float
K0FactAng Kn Angle (º) 0 359.9 0.1 float
K0MFact Km Module 0 10 0,01 float
K0MFactAng Km Angle(º) 0 359.9 0.1 float
GndPoRch Mho reach (Gnd) 0,05 500 0,01 float
RisGndRch Resistive Reach (Gnd) 0,05 500 0,01 float
XGndRch X Reach Forward(Gnd) 0,05 500 0,01 float
XGndRchB X Reach Reverse (Gnd) 0,05 500 0,01 float
GndBlArg R Blinder Angle(Gnd) 45 90 0.1 float
GndBaArg Tilt Angle Gnd (º) -10 10 1 float
Disabled (0)
GndTmType Tilt Type (Gnd) Time delayed (1) enum
Continuous (2)
GndBalTmms Tilt Time Gnd (ms) 0 500 10 int32
I0 (0)
GndPolType Quad. Type (Gnd) I2 (1) enum
Max(I0,I2) (2)
LogInGndBl Block Gnd units uint32
LogInBlk Block zone uint32

User Manual 40
Table 3 Zones 2, 3, 4, and 5 Settings

Non Directional (0)
Forward Trip (1)
DirMod (OpType in
Directional Mode Reverse Trip (2) enum
Ed2)
Reverse Start (3)
Forward Start (4)
LinAng Characteristic Angle (º) 0 90 0.1 float
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (3P) (2)
ReclPerm Reclose permission 0 7 ING
Reclose 2-3-4 (4)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (7)
PhEna Phase Enabled (Ph) NO / YES Boolean
Mho (0)
PhType Phase Characteristic (Ph) Quadrilateral (1) enum
Mho and Quad (2)
PhDlTmms Phase Time (ms) (Ph) 0 600000 10 int32
PhPoRch Mho reach (Ph) 0,05 500 0,01 float
RisPhRch Resistive Reach (Ph) 0,05 500 0,01 float
XPhRch X Reach Forward (Ph) 0,05 500 0,01 float
XPhRchB X Reach Reverse (Ph) 0,05 500 0,01 float
PhBlArg R Blinder Angle(Ph) 45 90 0.1 float
LogInPhBlk Block phase units (Ph) uint32
GndEna Enabled (Gnd) NO / YES Boolean
Mho (0)
GndType Gnd Characteristic (Gnd) Quadrilateral (1) enum
Mho and Quad (2)
GndDlTmms Phase-ground time (ms) 0 600000 10 int32
K0Fact Kn Module 0 10 0,01 float
K0FactAng Kn Angle(º) 0 359.9 0.1 float
K0MFact Km Module 0 10 0,01 float
K0MFactAng Km Angle(º) 0 359.9 0.1 float
GndPoRch Mho reach (Gnd) 0,05 500 0,01 float
RisGndRch Resistive Reach (Gnd) 0,05 500 0,01 float
XGndRch X Reach Forward(Gnd) 0,05 500 0,01 float
XGndRchB X Reach Reverse (Gnd) 0,05 500 0,01 float
GndBlArg R Blinder Angle(Gnd) 45 90 0.1 float
I0 (0)
GndPolType Quad. Type (Gnd) I2 (1) enum
Max(I0,I2) (2)
LogInGndBl Block Gnd units uint32
LogInBlk Block zone uint32
Independent (0)
TimTyp Timing Type enum
Not Delayed (1)
 Commands There are 3 commands per zone:

 “DOrdBlk”: Block and unblock zone. Only acts when the function is enabled.
 “DOrdGBlk”: Block and unblock phase-ground units. Only acts when the function is enabled.
 “DOrdPhBlk”: Block and unblock phase-phase units. Only acts when the function is enabled.
 Outputs: Table 4 shows the function's output data (x can be 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5).
 Start Zx. Pickup by QUAD and/or MHO, where x is the zone. Indicates the distance unit (AN, BN, CN, AB, BC
or CA) which has started up. It is independent for each zone.
 Trip Zx. Trip by QUAD and/or MHO, where x is the zone. Indicates the distance unit (AN, BN, CN, AB, BC or
CA) which has tripped. It is independent for each zone.
 Start Mho Zx Y. Pickup by MHO, where x is the zone. Y indicates the distance unit (AN, BN, CN, AB, BC or
CA) which has started up It is independent for each zone.
 Trip Mho Zx Y. Trip by MHO, where x is the zone. Y indicates the distance unit (AN, BN, CN, AB, BC or CA)
which has tripped. It is independent for each zone.
 Start Quad Zx Y. Pickup by QUAD, where x is the zone. Y indicates the distance unit (AN, BN, CN, AB, BC or
CA) which has started up It is independent for each zone.

User Manual 41
 Trip Quad Zx Y. Trip by QUAD, where x is the zone. Y indicates the distance unit (AN, BN, CN, AB, BC or
CA) which has tripped. It is independent for each zone.
 Start Zx single-phase. Single phase pickup by QUAD and/or Mho, where x is the zone. It is independent for
each zone.
 Start Zx Phase-phase. Two phase pickup by QUAD and/or Mho, where x is the zone. It is independent for
each zone.
 Trip Zx single-phase. Single phase trip by QUAD and/or Mho, where x is the zone. It is independent for each
zone.
 Trip Zx Phase-phase. Two phase trip by QUAD and/or Mho, where x is the zone. It is independent for each
zone.
 Zx start. Pickup by QUAD and/or Mho, where x is the zone. It is independent for each zone.
 Zx trip. Trip by QUAD and/or Mho trip, where x is the zone. It is independent for each zone.
 Mho zone x ph-gnd Status. Indicates the Mho phase-ground function’s status, where x is the zone. It is active
when enabled and not blocked. It is independent for each zone.
 Mho zone x ph-ph Status. Indicates the Mho phase-phase function’s status, where x is the zone. It is active
 Quad zone x ph-gnd Status. Indicates the Quad phase-ground function’s status, where x is the zone. It is
active when enabled and not blocked. It is independent for each zone.
 Quad zone x ph-ph Status. Indicates the Quad phase-phase function’s status, where x is the zone. It is active

User Manual 42
Table 4 Mho and Quad Function Outputs
Signal Data (Edition 1) Attribute (Edition 1) Data (Edition 2) Attribute (Edition 2)

Start Zx AN Str phsA Str phsA
Start Zx BN Str phsB Str phsB
Start Zx CN Str phsC Str phsC
Start Zx AB Str phsAB StrAB general
Start Zx BC Str phsBC StrBC general
Start Zx CA Str phsCA StrCA general
Trip Zx AN Op phsA Op phsA
Trip Zx BN Op phsB Op phsB
Trip Zx CN Op phsC Op phsC
Trip Zx AB Op phsAB OpAB general
Trip Zx BC Op phsBC OpBC general
Trip Zx CA Op phsCA OpCA general
Start Mho Zx AN MStr phsA MStr phsA
Start Mho Zx BN MStr phsB MStr phsB
Start Mho Zx CN MStr phsC MStr phsC
Start Mho Zx AB MStr phsAB MStrAB general
Start Mho Zx BC MStr phsBC MStrBC general
Start Mho Zx CA MStr phsCA MStrCA general
Trip Mho Zx AN MOp phsA MOp phsA
Trip Mho Zx BN MOp phsB MOp phsB
Trip Mho Zx CN MOp phsC MOp phsC
Trip Mho Zx AB MOp phsAB MOpAB general
Trip Mho Zx BC MOp phsBC MOpBC general
Trip Mho Zx CA MOp phsCA MOpCA general
Start Quad Zx AN QStr phsA QStr phsA
Start Quad Zx BN QStr phsB QStr phsB
Start Quad Zx CN QStr phsC QStr phsC
Start Quad Zx AB QStr phsAB QStrAB general
Start Quad Zx BC QStr phsBC QStrBC general
Start Quad Zx CA QStr phsCA QStrCA general
Trip Quad Zx AN QOp phsA QOp phsA
Trip Quad Zx BN QOp phsB QOp phsB
Trip Quad Zx CN QOp phsC QOp phsC
Trip Quad Zx AB QOp phsAB QOpAB general
Trip Quad Zx BC QOp phsBC QOpBC general
Trip Quad Zx CA QOp phsCA QOpCA general
Start Zx single-phase GndStr general StrGnd general
Start Zx Phase-phase PhStr general StrPh general
Trip Zx single-phase GndOp general OpGnd general
Trip Zx Phase-phase PhOp general PhOp general
Start Zx Str general Str general
Trip Zx Op general Op general
Mho zone x ph-gnd Status PgndEna general PgndEna general
Mho zone x ph-ph Status PPhEna general PPhEna general
Quad zone x ph-gnd Status PgndEna general PgndEna general
Quad zone x ph-ph Status PPhEna general PPhEna general

User Manual 43
3.1.1 Mho
The Mho characteristic is used with a cosine type phase comparator with Sop and Spol input phasors.
Hence, the signals used in each phase of the Mho characteristic are shown in Table 5. The operation zone must fulfil:
−90º ≤ angle (Sop/Spol) ≤ 90º

Table 5 Mho Characteristic Signals
Unit Sop (Operation signal) Spol (Polarization signal)

AN [ Ia + 3·I0  knx +IN2  kMx ] (|ZxGF|ZxAº) – Va Va1: current or memorized
BN [ Ib + 3·I0  knx +IN2  kMx ] (|ZxGF|ZxAº) – Vb Vb1: current or memorized
CN [ Ic + 3·I0  knx +IN2  kMx] (|ZxGF|ZxAº) – Vc Vc1: current or memorized
AB Iab  (|ZxF|ZxAº) – Vab Vab1: current or memorized
BC Ibc  (|ZxF|ZxAº) – Vbc Vbc1: current or memorized
CA Ica  (|ZxF|ZxAº) – Vca Vca1: current or memorized
Where:
 ZxGF: Phase-ground reach impedance, where x is the zone (one setting per zone). Set in ohms.
 ZxF: Phase-phase reach impedance, where x is the zone (one setting per zone). Set in ohms.
 ZxAº: Line characteristic angle, where x is the zone (one setting per zone). Set in degrees.
 Knx: Zero compensation constant, where x is the zone (one setting per zone).
1 zl0
K n = ( − 1)
3 zl1
 Kmx: Mutual compensation constant (double lines) where x is the zone (one setting per zone).
𝑍𝑚0
𝐾𝑚 =
3 · zl1
 Ia, Ib, Ic: Phase currents.

 Iab, Ibc, Ica: Phase - phase currents (Iab = Ia - Ib, Ibc = Ib - Ic, Ica = Ic - Ia).
 3 I0: Calculated neutral current.
 IN2: Measured neutral current of the parallel line. Only for double lines.
 Va, Vb, Vc: Phase voltages.
 Vab, Vbc, Vca: Phase - phase voltages.
 Va1, Vb1, Vc1: Positive sequence voltages referred to each of the phases. The value will be determined by the
supervision of the memorization voltage (See section 3.3.3).
Equation 1
Va1 1
π
1j·240
(Vb1) = (e 180 ) · V1
π
Vc1 e1j·120180
 Vab1, Vbc1, Vca1: Positive sequence voltages referred to phase - phase voltages. The value will be determined
by the supervision of the memorization voltage (See section 3.3.3).
Equation 2
𝜋
𝑉𝑎𝑏1 𝑒1𝑗·30180
𝜋
( 𝑉𝑏𝑐1 ) = √3 (𝑒1𝑗·270180 ) 𝑉1
𝑉𝑐𝑎1 𝜋
𝑒1𝑗·150180
The voltages and currents used correspond to the type of fault being analysed; for example, for an A phase to ground
fault, the corresponding phasors will be Ia and Va, for an A and B phase - phase fault, they will be Iab and Vab.
The phase current used for single phase faults correspond to the current measured in each phase compensated with the
zero sequence. Double lines are also compensated with neutral current (mutual compensation factor).

User Manual 44
Important: To operate, the phase current analysed has to be greater than 10% of the rated current when the rated
current is 1A and greater than 5% of the rated current when the rated current is 5A.
All of the Mho units are supervised by a reactance unit (Inductive X limit). In this way, the tendency for the Mho units to
overreach is prevented due to the influence of the load beforehand.
Zero compensation for double lines (km) is only applicable if the neutral current in the parallel line (IN2) is less than 1.35
times the neutral current of the protected line (3I0).
If a pole is opened (from the trip), the positive sequence voltage will be calculated without taking into account the open
pole's phase voltage to avoid the distortion from discharging the line capacitors on this open phase. In other words,
normally (with 3 poles closed) V1=1/3·(Va+a·Vb+a²·Vc)
If pole A is opened, V1 is calculated as V1=1/2·(0+a·Vb+a²·Vc) even if there is voltage in Va.
Memory is used according to polarization memory supervision. See section 3.3.3.
Figure 35 shows the forward, backwards and non-directional Mho characteristics.
Figure 36 shows the logic diagram of the Mho characteristic for units AN and AB forward.
 The other units function in a similar way.

 If the unit is configured backwards, the "Reverse" permissions are used.
 If the unit is configured as "Non directional", neither "Forward" nor "Backwards" permissions are used.
The input signals of this scheme are:
 Pole A open, Pole B open, Pole C open: Activated when the pole "x" is open. They are outputs of the function
open pole detector.
 Phase A open (I<), Phase B open (I<), Phase C open (I<): Indicates that the phase current is below the open
pole detector level. They are outputs of the function open pole detector.
 Perm. I>ZA Forward. It allows the protection unit AN for the zones configured as forward. It is output of the “MHO
and QUAD unit supervision”.
 Perm. I> ZAB Forward. The same as precious for phase AB.
 Selector AN. It is the signal “AN/BCN Selector” of the "Phase selector".
 Selector AB. It is the signal “CN/ABN Selector” of the "Phase selector".
 Fuse failure start. Blocked by the fuse failure start signal.
 Power swing blocking. Blocked by the Power swing detector.
 Open Pole. Indicates, there´s any pole open. It is output of the function open pole detector.
 Load Encroachment. Blocked by the load Encroachment signal.

User Manual 45
Figure 35 Mho Characteristics

User Manual 46
Figure 36 Mho Logic Diagram
3.1.2 Quadrilateral
The Quadrilateral characteristic is used by making two comparisons for each zone and for each single phase component:
 The resistive component of each impedance with the corresponding "Resistive Reach" setting.
 The inductive component of each impedance with the corresponding "X Reach forward" or "X Reach reverse"
(depending on the sign and on the "Directional Mode" setting).
The resistive component of the impedance is calculated as follows:

Vpol
R = Re ( )
Ieq
The inductive component of the impedance is calculated as follows:

User Manual 47
Im[Vpol · ̅̅̅̅̅
Ipol]
X = Im(ZL1) ·
̅̅̅̅̅)]
Im[ZL1 · (Ieq · Ipol
For single phase units in zone 1, the inductive component is calculated as follows:
̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
Im[Vpol · (Ipol · 1∠Z1BASCA˚)]
X = Im(ZL1)Ÿ ·
̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
Im [ZL1 · (Ieq · (Ipol · 1∠Z1BASCA˚))]
Where:
 Vpol: Unit's voltage.

 Ieq: Unit's current in the case of single phases corresponding to the compensated current.
 ZL1: Line impedance characterised by the "Characteristic angle (º)" (setting).
 Z1BASCAº : "Tilt Angle Gnd (º)" (setting). Only for zone 1 and single-phase units.
 Ipol: Polarization current.
The intervention of the tilt angle is regulated by two settings (only zone 1 and single phase units):
 Tilt type (Gnd): If defined as "Disabled", this angle's value is always 0. If defined as "Time delayed", this angle
maintains its setting value during the time indicated in the setting "Tilt time Gnd (ms)". If defined as "Continuous"
it always keeps its setting value.
 Tilt time Gnd (ms): Time, in ms, for applying the tilt angle after the fault detection, only if the setting "Tilt type
(Gnd)" is set as "Time delayed".
Important: To operate, the phase current analysed must be greater than 10% of the rated current.
Figure 37 shows the forward, backwards and non-directional quadrilateral characteristics.
The signals used in each phase of the Quadrilateral characteristic are shown in Table 6. The operation zone must be
such that these two components are less than the set reach.
Table 6 Quadrilateral Characteristic Signals
Unit Ieq Vpol Ipol

AN [ Ia + 3·I0  knx +IN2  kMx ] Va 3I0, 3I2 or Max(3I0, 3i2)
BN [ Ib + 3·I0  knx +IN2  kMx ] Vb 3I0, 3I2·a or Max(3I0, 3I2·a)
CN [ Ic + 3·I0  knx +IN2  kMx] Vc 3I0, 3I2· a2 or Max(3I0, 3I2·a2)
AB Iab Vab I2· a2 or Iab
BC Ibc Vbc I2 or Ibc
CA Ica Vca I2· a or Ica
Where:
 Knx: Zero compensation constant, where x is the zone (one setting per zone). Same setting as for Mho.
 Kmx: Mutual compensation constant (double lines), where x is the zone (one setting per zone). Same setting as
for Mho.
 Va, Vb, Vc: Phase voltages.
 Vab, Vbc, Vca: Phase - phase Voltages.
 I2: Negative sequence of the current calculated using the phase currents.
In the case of single phases faults, the polarization current (Ipol) for each phase is chosen according to the "Quad. type
(Gnd)" setting. There are three possible options: zero sequence, negative sequence, and the maximum of both.

User Manual 48
In the case of the phase - phase ones, the polarization current applied is always the negative sequence current, unless
the value of the negative sequence is less than the 10% of the positive sequence or less than the 5% of the rated
current. In that case, the current between the two phases is used.
The zero compensation and the memory are applied following the same conditions as for the Mho characteristic.
The Figure 38 shows the logic diagram of the quadrilateral characteristic for units AN and AB forward.
The other units function in a similar way.
 If the unit is configured backwards, the "Reverse" permissions are used.

 If the unit is configured as "Non directional", neither "Forward" nor "Backwards" permissions are used.
open pole detector.
 Perm. I>ZA Forward. It allows the protection unit AN for the zones configured as forward. It is output of the “MHO
and QUAD unit supervision”.
 Perm. I> ZAB Forward. The same as precious for phase AB.
 Selector AN. It is the signal “AN/BCN Selector” of the "Phase selector".
 Selector AB. It is the signal “CN/ABN Selector” of the "Phase selector".
 Perm. dir IA Forward. Forward directional permission for phase A. Function "Directional supervision".
 Perm. dir IAB Forward. The same as precious for phase AB.
 Load Encroachment. Blocked by the Load Encroachment signal.

User Manual 49
Figure 37 Quad Characteristics
Forward Reverse
Non directional

User Manual 50
Figure 38 Logic Diagram for the Quad Characteristic
3.1.3 Timing Type for Tripping

The timing type for tripping indicates how the timing takes place from the start to the trip. This setting can only be
selected in the timed zones: 2, 3, 4 and 5.
There are two ways of tripping the distance units:
 Not delayed. This means that different starts in different phases do not delay the trip. For example, if a start
takes place in phase A and the start condition disappears in this phase, but phase B starts, timing continues.
Hence, the trip is not delayed.

User Manual 51
 Independent. Each phase has an independent timer. For example, if a start takes place in phase A and the start
condition disappears in this phase, but phase B starts, timing for tripping starts again.
In zone 1 (not timed), the "Independent" mode is always applied.
The condition for activating a unit (prior to the trip) is activated if there is a startup in any of the units (this is the case in
"Not delayed" mode) or in the specific unit (this is the case in the "Independent" mode) and the corresponding timing is
fulfilled.
In the case of the "Independent" mode, once the corresponding condition for activating the unit has been activated, a
seal is applied so that the condition is not deactivated while there is an overcurrent (only in zones 2, 3, 4 and 5).
In order for a unit to trip, besides the unit having to be activated, there must be a closed phase or V1>80%Vrated for 1/4
cycle.
Figure 39 shows the logic diagram for trip mode without a delay between phases.
open pole detector.
 Selector AN/BCN. Enables AN and BC units and blocks the other units. It is the signal “AN/BCN Selector” of the
"Phase selector".
 Selector BN/CAN. Enables BN and CA units and blocks the other units. It is the signal “BN/CAN Selector” of the
"Phase selector".
 Selector CN/ABN. Enables CN and AB units and blocks the other units. It is the signal “CN/ABN Selector” of the
"Phase selector".
 Zone n start AN. Indicated that the AN unit of the zone has started.
 Zone n start BN. The same as precious for phase BN.
 Zone n start CN. The same as precious for phase CN.
 Zone n start AB. The same as precious for phase AB.
 Zone n start BC. The same as precious for phase BC.
 Zone n start CA. The same as precious for phase CA.
 IA>IA Forward. It is the signal "Perm. IA Forward" of the function Overcurrent supervision.
 IB>IB Forward. The same as precious for phase B.
 IC>IC Forward. The same as precious for phase C.
 IAB>IAB Forward. The same as precious for phase AB.
 IBC>IBC Forward. The same as precious for phase BC.
 ICA>ICA Forward. The same as precious for phases CA.
Figure 41 shows the logic diagram for the independent trip mode for zone 1 in single phase units.
Figure 40 shows the logic diagram for the independent trip mode for zone 1 in two phase units.

User Manual 52
Figure 39 Logic Diagram for Tripping without a Delay between Phases.
Figure 40 Logic Diagram for Two Phase Independent Trip

User Manual 53
Figure 41 Logic Diagram for Single Phase Independent Trip
3.1.4 Zone 1 Extension

The zone 1 extension makes possible to vary the reach of the zone 1 in the first trip, returning to the set reach for the
successive trips. The zone 1 extension is applied when it is enabled and the recloser is in standby and it is not extended
after the first reclose.
Zone 1 cannot be extended when the recloser is disabled or blocked.
It is applied to the mho and quadrilateral characteristics, there is an independent compensation factor for ground faults
and for phase - phase faults.
The settings are as follows:
 Enabled: Enables and disables the function.

 Gnd extension ratio: Factor by which the phase-ground reach setting of zone 1's Mho and Quad characteristics
are multiplied.
 Ph - ph extension ratio: Factor by which the phase-phase reach setting of zone 1's Mho and Quad characteristics
are multiplied.
 Blocking input: Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the zone extension.
There are settings, commands and outputs:

User Manual 54
 Node: PROT/RZEX1
 Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For details, see Table 7.
 Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Blocks and unblocks the function. Only acts when the function is enabled.
 Outputs: Table 8 shows the function's output data.
 Zone 1 Extension: Indicates that the zone extension is activated.
 Zone 1 Extension Status: Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 7 Zone 1 Extension Settings

Ena Enabled NO / YES enum
Z1GVal Gnd extension ratio 0,1 3 0,001 float32
Z1Gval Ph-Ph extension ratio 0,1 3 0,001 float32
LoghBlk Blocking input uint32
Table 8 Zone 1 Extension Outputs
Signal Data Attribute

Zone 1 Extension Z1Ext general
Zone 1 Extension Status StEna general (stVal in Ed2)
Figure 42 shows the logic diagram corresponding to the zone 1 extension.
The recloser signals used in this function are:
 Recloser in standby. Indicates the recloser is in standby status.

 Reclosing 1 in progress. Indicates the recloser´s cycle 1 is ongoing.
 Safety time 1st reclosing. Indicates the recloser is in safety time after the first reclose.
 Recloser Blocked. Indicates the recloser is blocked.
Figure 42 Zone 1 Extension Logic Diagram
Setting
ENABLED = YES
DIGITAL INPUT
Blocking input
DIGITAL SIGNAL
Recloser in standby WORKING SETTING
Working Z1GF=Z1GF·Gnd extension ratio
DIGITAL SIGNAL Working Z1F =Z1F·Ph-Ph extension ratio
Reclosing 1 in progress
WORKING SETTING
DIGITAL SIGNAL Working Z1GF=Z1GF
Safety time 1st reclosing Working Z1F =Z1F
DIGITAL SIGNAL
Recloser Blocked
3.1.5 High Speed zone

There is a high speed operation unit for zone 1 (only forward) and another one for zone 4 (only backwards), based on the
half cycle DFT, for both characteristics (Mho and Quad).
The high speed zone 1 can only be active if zone 1 is programmed forward and enabled.
The high speed zone 4 will only be active if zone 4 is programmed backwards and enabled.

User Manual 55
The high speed zone is made by including an internal zone in zone 1 and zone 4 such as that |X|<80%ZxF, |R|<20%ZxF,
where ZxF is the reach of the corresponding zone.
 Zone 1 enabled: Indicates whether the high speed zone 1 is enabled or not.
 Zone 4 enabled: indicates whether the high speed zone 4 is enabled or not.
 Zone 1 Blocking input: Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the high speed zone 1.
 Zone 4 Blocking input: Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the high speed zone 4.
There are settings and outputs.
 Node: PROT/PHSZ1
 High speed zone 1: Indicates whether or not the high speed zone 1 is enabled and not blocked.
 High speed zone 4: Indicates whether or not the high speed zone 4 is enabled and not blocked.
Table 9 High Speed Operation Zone Settings

Z1QEna Zone 1 enabled NO / YES enum
Z4QEna Zone 4 enabled NO / YES enum
LogInZ1Bl Zone 1 Blocking input uint32
LogInZ4Bl Zone 4 Blocking input uint32
Table 10 High Speed Zone Outputs Edition 1

High speed zone 1 StEna1 general
High speed zone 4 StEna4 general
Table 11 High Speed Zone Outputs Edition 2

High speed zone 1 StEna1 stVal
High speed zone 4 StEna4 stVal
Figure 43 shows the Mho and Quad characteristics of the high speed zone 1.

User Manual 56
Figure 43 High speed zone Mho and Quad Characteristics
Figure 44 shows the functional logic diagram of the high speed operation Mho characteristic.
The input signals of this function are the indicated in the mho and quadrilateral units.

User Manual 57
Figure 44 Logic Diagram for the High Speed Mho Characteristic

User Manual 58
3.1.6 Phase selector

The phase selector determines the fault type, allowing the trip as a result of this and blocking the others. The phases
involved in the fault are selected as follows:
Two conditions are defined:
Condition 1 (3 · I0 > 5% ∙ 𝐼𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑝ℎ𝑎𝑠𝑒)&(3 · 𝐼0 > 10% ∙ 𝐼1) (1)
Zero sequence current greater than 5% of Irated (0.25A for Irated=5A and 0.05A for Irated=1A) and the percentage must
be greater than the 10% of the maximum phase current.
Condition 2 (3 · I2 > 5% ∙ 𝐼𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑝ℎ𝑎𝑠𝑒)&(𝐼2 > 10% ∙ 𝐼1) (2)
Negative sequence current greater than 5% of Irated (0.25A for Irated=5A and 0.05A for Irated=1A) and the percentage
must be greater than the 10% of the positive sequence.
THREE PHASE FAULTS
It has to fulfil at least one of the following conditions:
 If neither (1) nor (2) are fulfilled.

 The values of the phase-phase currents minus their prefault values are analysed. The three of them must be
greater than the 70% of the maximum value.
The three zones Zxab, Zxbc, Zxca must be simultaneously failing for a three-phase fault to be signalled (even if the three
phase-phase units are enabled, it will not be signalled unless this condition is fulfilled).
TWO PHASE FAULTS
If only (2) is fulfilled, the fault is phase-phase.
When the fault detector is disabled, all the phase-phase units are enabled.
When the fault detector is enabled, the angle is analysed to determinate the faulted phases:
𝐴𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 = a𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝐼2 ) − a𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(∆𝐼1 )
Where:
 I1 is the positive sequence current. Fault current minus prefault current.

 I2 in the negative sequence current.
The prefault value is captured from the fault detector. When the fault is detected, the previous 2 cycles of the current are
captured. This value is subtracted to the fault positive sequence.
Figure 45 Two phases fault identifier
SINGLE PHASE OR TWO PHASE TO GROUND FAULTS
If (1) and (2) are fulfilled, the fault is to ground (single phase or phase - phase). In this case, the angular selector
becomes involved.
If the angles are not involved, the detection is made by voltages.
If a single phase / two phase fault to ground is detected, only the units involved will be enabled. If it is a CN/ABN, units
CN and AB are enabled and the others are blocked.

User Manual 59
Figure 46 Phase Identifier
UNDETERMINED IDENTIFICATION
If (1) is fulfilled but (2) is not, all of the units will be enabled, since the relay cannot determine what type of fault is
processed.
67NQ SINGLE PHASE FAULTS1
In the 67NQ teleprotection scheme, single pole trips are allowed. In case of single phase or two phase to ground faults,
another selector is used to determinate the fault type.
The angle is analysed to determinate the fault type:
𝐴𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 = a𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝐼2 ) − a𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(∆𝐼1 )
Where:
 I1 is the positive sequence current. Fault current minus prefault current.

 I2 in the negative sequence current.
Figure 47 AN and BCN fault identifier Figure 48 BN and CAN fault identifier Figure 49 CN and ABN fault identifier
All of the units will be enabled if there is an open pole, in other words, if a single-pole opening has occurred.
Outputs are available.
 Node: PROT/DISPTRC1
 Outputs: Table 12 shows the output data.
 AN/BCN Selector: Enables the AN and BC units and blocks the others.
 BN/CAN Selector: Enables the BN and CA units and blocks the others.
 CN/ABN Selector: Enables the CN and AB units and blocks the others.
 Unknown Fault: Enables all of the units.
1
Available from firmware version 6.0.8.0 and ICD version 8.1.0.4

User Manual 60
 ABC Fault: Enables units AB, BC and CA. This is only indicated if there has been a simultaneous fault in AB,
BC and CA.
 Phase - Phase Fault: Enables the phase-phase units.
 Ground fault: It is activated when there is a ground fault.
 AN Selector1: Enables the AN unit and blocks the others.
 BN Selector1: Enables the BN unit and blocks the others.
 CN Selector1: Enables the CN unit and blocks the others.
 AB Selector1: Enables the AB unit and blocks the others.
 BC Selector1: Enables the BC unit and blocks the others.
 CA Selector1: Enables the CA unit and blocks the others.
Table 12 Phase Identifier Outputs

AN/BCN Selector PhId PhANBCN PhAnBCn stVal
BN/CAN Selector PhId PhBNCAN PhBnCAn stVal
CN/ABN Selector PhId PhCNABN PhCnABn stVal
Unknown Fault UnFa general UnFa general
ABC Fault ABCFaDet general ABCFltDet general
Phase - Phase Fault PhFaDet general PhFltDet general
Ground Fault GndFaDet general GndFltDet general
AB Selector PhAB stVal PhAB stVal
BC Selector PhBC stVal PhBC stVal
CA Selector PhCA stVal PhCA stVal
AN Selector PhAN stVal PhAN stVal
BN Selector PhBN stVal PhBN stVal
CN Selector PhCN stVal PhCN stVal
Figure 50 shows the phase identifier’s logic diagram.
open pole detector.
If any of the poles is open, the phase selector is not taken into account. In this case, the loops containing the open pole
are blocked. E.g.: If the open pole is A, loops AB, CA and AN are blocked. The trip will be three-pole.
In the case of a three-phase opening, if only the breaker status generic input is programmed (not by pole); the phase
selector continues being used. In other words, only the phase selector is disabled in the case of a single-phase opening.
In this case, the fault type is defined by the active distance units. If any of the phase-phase distance units is activated, a
phase-phase fault will be indicated.

User Manual 61
Figure 50 Phase Identifier's Logic Diagram
3.1.7 Fault detection

This function detects the start of the fault by checking the differences in the actual zero sequence, positive sequence and
negative sequence currents, with those in two cycles before.
It is activated when:
 The difference between the actual measurement of the current's positive sequence (I1) and the measurement
two cycles beforehand exceeds the 10% of the rated current and one of the following conditions is fulfilled:
 The difference between the current measurement of the negative sequence of the current (I2) and the
measurement two cycles before exceeds 4% of the rated current.
 The difference between the current measurement of the zero sequence of the current (I0) and the
measurement two cycles before exceeds 4% of the rated current.
 The positive sequence of the current (I1) increases by more than 25% compared to two cycles before.
When one of these thresholds is exceeded or if the phase selector identifies a fault which is not three-phase, the fault
detector is activated. The fault detector stays active for 30ms after the previous situation disappears. If a distance unit or
an overcurrent startup occurs while the fault detector is active, the fault detector will stay active for 30 ms after the trip
disappears.
Table 13 shows the output data.
 Outputs. Table 13 shows the output data.
 Fault detection: Indicates a fault has been detected.
Table 13 Fault Detector Outputs.

Fault detection FaDet general FltDet general

User Manual 62
Figure 51 shows the functional logic diagram of the fault detector.
 2 Phase Fault. It is the signal "Phase - Phase Fault" of the Phase selector.
 Ground fault. It is the signal "Ground fault" of the Phase selector.
 Start signals. Indicates that any of the started units generate the general start signal.
Figure 51 Fault Detector's Logic Diagram
3.1.8 Mho and Quadrilateral Unit Supervision

The supervision unit disables the startup of the MHO and QUAD units, differentiating between single-phase and phase-
phase units.
Figure 52 shows the supervision logic diagram for single-phase units.
Single-Phase Units. The blocking conditions for phase-ground units are as follows:
 If the phase identifier does not detect the fault in the corresponding loop.

User Manual 63
 If ((3·I0>5%·Irated phase) AND (3·I0>10%·I1)) is not fulfilled. Phase identifier condition 1.

 No current can be seen in the single-phase unit's phase ("detection logic of the open pole by current").
 Ia, Ib, Ic (as corresponds) must be 10% greater than Irated for In=1A and 5% for In=5A, even if the supervision
by means of overcurrent is not been used.
 If the power swing function is activated and if it is programmed for this.
 If the fuse failure function is activated.
 If the polarization voltage is less than 2V. Supervision is in directional supervision mode.
 If the overcurrent supervision (only single phase units) is enabled, when the phase current or the neutral current
(3·I0), are less than the phase threshold and neutral threshold of the selected direction for that zone.
 If there is no directional permission. The phase-ground units are supervised by the polarised directional units by
phase currents, by negative sequence and by zero sequence. In the case of an open pole, only phase current
polarizations are used.
The input signals of these schemes are:
open pole detector.
 Load Encroachment. Blocked by the Load Encroachment signal.

User Manual 64
Figure 52 Logic Diagram from Single-Phase Unit Supervision
Figure 53 shows the supervision logic diagram for phase-phase units.
Phase-phase units. The blocking conditions for phase-phase units are as follows:
 If the phase selector does not detect the fault in the corresponding loop.
 No current is detected in one of the unit phases. If there is no current in A, neither unit AB nor CA unit are
activated ("detection logic for open pole by current").
 Iab, Ibc, Ica must be 10% greater than Irated for In=1A and 5% for In=5A, even if the overcurrent supervision is
not been used.
 If the power swing function is activated and if it is programmed for this.
 If the fuse failure function is activated.
 If the polarization voltage is less than 2V. Supervision is in directional supervision mode.
 If phase-phase unit overcurrent supervision has been enabled. If the phase-phase overcurrent of the direction
corresponding to the zone is not exceeded. The threshold must be exceeded in each phase of the ones involved
in the unit (e.g. in unit AB, currents of phases A and B and AB.
 If the "load encroachment" unit is activated.

User Manual 65
 If there is no directional permission.

Figure 53 Logic Diagram from Phase-Phase Unit Supervision
There are settings and outputs.

User Manual 66
 Outputs: Table 15 shows the output data.

 Permission I>ZA Forward. Indicates that it allows the AN distance unit to operate for zones programmed
forward.
 I>ZB Forward Permission. Indicates that it allows the BN distance unit to operate for zones programmed
forward.
 I>ZC Forward Permission. Indicates that it allows the CN distance unit to operate for zones programmed
forward.
 I>ZAB Forward Permission. Indicates that it allows the AB distance unit to operate for zones programmed
forward.
 I>ZBC Forward Permission. Indicates that it allows the BC distance unit to operate for zones programmed
forward.
 I>ZCA Forward Permission. Indicates that it allows the CA distance unit to operate for zones programmed
forward.
 I>ZA Reverse Permission. Indicates that it allows the AN distance unit to operate for zones programmed
backwards.
 I>ZB Reverse Permission. Indicates that it allows the BN distance unit to act. For zones programmed
backwards.
 I>ZC Reverse Permission. Indicates that it allows the CN distance unit to operate for zones programmed
backwards.
 I>ZAB Reverse Permission. Indicates that it allows the AB distance unit to operate for zones programmed
backwards.
 I>ZBC Reverse Permission. Indicates that it allows the BC distance unit to operate for zones programmed
backwards.
 I>ZCA Reverse Permission. Indicates that it allows the CA distance unit to operate for zones programmed
backwards.
Table 14 MHO and QUAD Unit Supervision Settings

Table 15 MHO and QUAD Unit Supervision Outputs

Perm. I> ZA Forward ZFw phsA ZFw phsA
Perm. I> ZB Forward ZFw phsB ZFw phsB
Perm. I> ZC Forward ZFw phsC ZFw phsC
Perm. I> ZAB Forward ZFw phsAB ZFwAB general
Perm. I> ZBC Forward ZFw phsBC ZFwBC general
Perm. I> ZCA Forward ZFw phsCA ZFwCA general
Perm. I> ZA Reverse ZRv phsA ZRv phsA
Perm. I> ZB Reverse ZRv phsB ZRv phsB
Perm. I> ZC Reverse ZRv phsC ZRv phsC
Perm. I> ZAB Reverse ZRv phsAB ZRvAB general
Perm. I> ZBC Reverse ZRv phsBC ZRvBC general
Perm. I> ZCA Reverse ZRv phsCA ZRvCA general
3.1.8.1 Overcurrent Supervision

This unit supervises the startup of the MHO and QUAD units. If a series of conditions, which depend on the settings,
are not fulfilled, it disables the startup of the corresponding units. The settings are independent for phase-ground,
phase-phase, forward and backwards.
Single-Phase Units:
Supervises the phase-ground units of the distance characteristics (mho and quadrilateral).

User Manual 67
It is used to measure each phase measurement and neutral measurement (In or 3I0 as selected).
It compares the current of each phase with the threshold established as the setting, activating when it is exceed and
deactivating when it is lower than 95%. The analysis is made for each phase independently, generating an output per
phase, which allows the distance units of each phase to operate if the current measured is greater than the threshold
and disables it otherwise.
To have permission in a phase, both the measurements of the phase and of the neutral (3I0) must exceed their
corresponding thresholds.
 Enabled: Enables and disables the function:

 Phase Forward threshold (A): the phase current must be above this value, to allow the corresponding phase-gnd
unit of the distance zones selected as forward.
 Phase Reverse threshold (A): the phase current must be above this value, to allow the corresponding phase-gnd
unit of the distance zones selected as backwards.
 3I0 Forward threshold (A): the neutral current (3I0) must be above this value, to allow the phase-gnd distance
zones selected as forward.
 3I0 Reverse threshold (A): the neutral current (3I0) must be above this value, to allow the phase-gnd distance
zones selected as backwards.
 Blocking input: Selects the signal which, when active, blocks single-phase overcurrent supervision.
 Node: PROT/GRZOS1
 Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Blocking and unblocking of single-phase overcurrent supervision. Only acts when the function is
enabled.
 IA Forwards Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the AN distance unit to act (for
zones programmed forward).
 IB Forwards Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the BN distance unit to act (for
 IC Forwards Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the CN distance unit to act (for
 IA Reverse Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the AN distance unit to act (for
zones programmed backwards).
 IB Reverse Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the BN distance unit to act (for
 IC Reverse Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the CN distance unit to act (for
 Gnd supervision status. Indicates that phase-ground overcurrent supervision is activated and not blocked.
Table 16 Single-Phase Overcurrent Settings

FwPhVal Phase Forward threshold (A) 0,05 150 0,01 float32
RvPhVal Phase Reverse threshold (A) 0.05 150 0,01 float32
FwNVal 3I0 Forward threshold (A) 0.05 150 0.01 float32
RvNVal 3I0 Reverse threshold (A) 0.05 150 0.01 float32

User Manual 68
Table 17 Single-Phase Unit Overcurrent Outputs

Perm. IA Forward IFw phsA
Perm. IB Forward IFw phsB
Perm. IC Forward IFw phsC
Perm. IA Reverse IRv phsA
Perm. IB Reverse IRv phsB
Perm. IC Reverse IRv phsC
Gnd Supervision Status StEna general (stVal in Ed2)
Phase-Phase Units:
Supervises the phase-phase units of the distance characteristics (mho and quadrilateral).
It compares the phase - phase current of each two phases and the current of each phase with the threshold
established as the setting, activating when it exceeds it and deactivating when it is lower than 95%. The analysis is
made for each phase combination independently, generating an output per combination, which allows the distance
units of each combination to act if the current measured is greater than the threshold and disables it otherwise.
The threshold must be exceeded for the phase - phase current and for each phase involved in the phase - phase
current.
 Enabled: Enables and disables the function:

 Forward threshold (A): each phase combination current must be above this value, to allow the corresponding
phase-phase distance unit of the zones selected as forward.
 Reverse threshold (A): each phase combination current must be above this value, to allow the corresponding
phase-phase distance unit of the zones selected as forward.
 Blocking input: Selects the signal which, when active, blocks phase-phase overcurrent supervision.
 Node: PROT/PHRZOS1
 Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Blocking and unblocking of phase-phase overcurrent supervision. Only acts when the function is
enabled.
 IAB Forwards Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the AB distance unit to act (for
 IBC Forwards Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the BC distance unit to act (for
 ICA Forwards Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the CA distance unit to act (for
 IAB Reverse Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the AB distance unit to act (for
 IBC Reverse Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the BC distance unit to act (for
 ICA Reverse Permission. Indicates that the overcurrent supervision allows the CA distance unit to act (for
 Ph-Ph supervision status. Indicates that phase-phase overcurrent supervision is activated and not blocked.

User Manual 69
Table 18 Phase-Phase Unit Overcurrent Settings

FwPhVal Forward threshold (A) 0,05 150 0,01 float32
RvPhVal Reverse threshold (A) 0.05 150 0,01 float32
Table 19 Phase-Phase Unit Overcurrent Outputs

Perm. IAB Forward IFw phsAB IFwAB general
Perm. IBC Forward IFw phsBC IFwBC general
Perm. ICA Forward IFw phsCA IFwCA general
Perm. IAB Reverse IRv phsAB IRvAB general
Perm. IBC Reverse IRv phsBC IRvBC general
Perm. ICA Reverse IRv phsCA IRvCA general
Ph-Ph Supervision Status StEna general StEna stVal
3.1.8.2 Directional supervision

It supervises the direction of the fault such that it only allows faults that occur in the direction programmed in each
zone. This is applicable to all distance units (Mho and Quad).
Functioning is conditioned by polarization memory supervision. Hence, if the logic indicates that the memorised
voltage must be used, this is used during the set time. See section 3.3.3.
Table 20 shows the comparisons for determining the direction of the different types of faults:
Table 20 Directional Supervision Comparisons.
Unit S1 S2 Calculus
Ia  ZGDIRA set Va1 mem
AN |Angle(S1)-Angle(S2)| < ZGAMPA/2
& I2_A  ZGDIRA set
Ib  ZGDIRA set Vb1 mem
BN |Angle(S1)-Angle(S2)| < ZGAMPA/2
& I2_B  ZGDIRA set
Ic  ZGDIRA set Vc1 mem
CN |Angle(S1)-Angle(S2)| < ZGAMPA/2
& I2_C  ZGDIRA set
AB Iab  ZDIRA set Vab1 mem |Angle(S1)-Angle(S2)| < ZAMPA/2
BC Ibc  ZDIRA set Vbc1 mem |Angle(S1)-Angle(S2)| < ZAMPA/2
CA Ica  ZDIRA set Vca1 mem |Angle(S1)-Angle(S2)| < ZAMPA/2
Where:
 ZGDIRA set: Phase-ground angle. Set in degrees.

 ZGAMPA: Phase-ground amplitude. Set in degrees.
 ZDIRA set: Phase-phase angle. Set in degrees.
 ZAMPA: Phase-phase amplitude. Set in degrees.
 Vx1 mem: Positive sequence of the phase or combination of corresponding phases. The value is conditioned by
polarization memory supervision (See section 3.3.3). Where x indicates the corresponding unit.
In order for the directional to function, the voltage must be greater than 2V and the currents must be greater than 5%
of the rated current.
The direction is determined by the comparison between the positive sequence voltage and current (See Figure 54).
It is indicated as forward if:

|angle(S1) − angle(S2)| < 𝐴𝑚𝑝𝑙𝑖𝑡𝑢𝑑𝑒/2

User Manual 70
There is a 5º zone between the non-trip zone and the trip zone in which the current directional status is maintained.
The torque angle is the directional setting angle with the setting amplitude.
This directional is used in all zones and fault types.

Figure 54 Directional Supervision
In the case of an open pole, only phase current polarizations are used, not by I2.
The maximum torque angle will correspond to the directional angle set with an adjustable margin.
This directional is applied to all zones and types of phases.
 Ph-Ph angle (º). Indicates the directional angle for phase-phase supervision.
 Ph-Ph amplitude (º). Indicates the angle that covers the trip zone for phase-phase supervision.
 Gnd angle (º). Indicates the directional angle for single-phase supervision.
 Gnd amplitude (º). Indicates the angle that covers the trip zone for single-phase supervision.
Figure 55 shows the supervision logic diagrams for single-phase and phase-phase directional supervision.
The input signal of this scheme is:

User Manual 71
Figure 55 Single-Phase and Phase - Phase Zone Supervision
There are settings and outputs:
 Node: PROT/RDIR1
 Permission dir IA Forward. Indicates that directional supervision allows distance unit AN to act (for zones
programmed forward).
 Permission dir IB Forward. Indicates that directional supervision allows the distance unit BN to act (for zones
 Permission dir IC Forward. Indicates that directional supervision allows the distance unit CN to act (for zones
 Permission dir IAB Forward. Indicates that directional supervision allows the distance unit AB to act (for
 Permission dir IBC Forward. Indicates that directional supervision allows the distance unit BC to act (for
 Permission dir ICA Forward. Indicates that directional supervision allows the distance unit CA to act (for
 Permission dir IA Reverse. Indicates that directional supervision allows the distance unit AN to act (for zones
programmed backwards).
 Permission dir IB Reverse. Indicates that directional supervision allows the distance unit BN to act (for zones

User Manual 72
 Permission dir IC Reverse. Indicates that directional supervision allows the distance unit CN to act (for zones
 Permission dir IAB Reverse. Indicates that directional supervision allows the distance unit AB to act (for
 Permission dir IBC Reverse. Indicates that directional supervision allows the distance unit BC to act (for
 Permission dir ICA Reverse. Indicates that directional supervision allows the distance unit CA to act (for
Table 21 Directional Supervision Settings

PhDirArg Ph-Ph angle (º) 0 359 1 float32
PhAmp Ph-Ph amplitude (º) 90 170 1 float32
GndDirArg Gnd angle (º) 0 359 1 float32
GndAmp Gnd amplitude (º) 90 170 1 float32
Table 22 Directional Supervision Outputs

Permission dir IA Forward DirFw phsA DirFw phsA
Permission dir IB Forward DirFw phsB DirFw phsB
Permission dir IC Forward DirFw phsC DirFw phsC
Permission dir IAB Forward DirFw phsAB DirFwAB general
Permission dir IBC Forward DirFw phsBC DirFwBC general
Permission dir ICA Forward DirFw phsCA DirFwCA general
Permission dir IA Reverse DirRv phsA DirRv phsA
Permission dir IB Reverse DirRv phsB DirRv phsB
Permission dir IC Reverse DirRv phsC DirRv phsC
Permission dir IAB Reverse DirRv phsAB DirRvAB general
Permission dir IBC Reverse DirRv phsBC DirRvBC general
Permission dir ICA Reverse DirRv phsCA DirRvCA general
3.1.9 Capacitive Voltage Transformer (CVT) Lines

With the use of capacitive voltage transformers (CVTs), in the event of a very sharp voltage drop, faults very close to the
relay or with high SIR (Source Impedance Ratio), give rise to very serious transients in the voltage, which tend to cause
overreaches in the distance units. In conditions in which the current is very small, generally when the value of the SIR is
very high with respect to the line impedance, this problem will arise. To avoid it, the voltages are filtered when the
seriousness of the transients is very acute.
3.1.9.1 Capacitive Voltage Transformer Logic

If capacitive voltage transformers are being used, this function will be enabled by the settings.
In order to determine when the voltages must be filtered, two conditions must be fulfilled: A fault has occurred and
there is a risk of overreaching (for which the SIR estimation will be used).
To estimate the SIR, the lowest value obtained from amongst all the units indicated by the phase identifier will be
used. They are compared with a threshold which will depend on the CVT type (which can be selected through the
settings). If the SIR value calculated is greater than the threshold specified and a fault is detected using the fault
detector, then the filtered voltages will be used. Otherwise, the voltages will be calculated as usual.
The filtered voltages are only used in zone 1 of the distance functions (unit 21). A digital bandpass filter is used.
 Enabled: Indicates whether the function is enabled or not.

 CVT type: Selects the type of supervision and with it, the threshold used to compare the SIR calculated to
determine whether or not filtered voltages should be used.
 Passive: SIR 10 threshold.
 Active: SIR 1 threshold.

User Manual 73
 Blocking input: Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the CVT function.
 Node: PROT/RCVT1
 Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function blocking and unblocking. Only acts when the function is enabled.
 Outputs: See Table 24.
 “CVT enabled”: Indicates that the CVTs are active and not blocked.
 "Voltages filtered": This is activated while filtered voltages are being used.
Table 23 CVT Settings

CVTType CVT Type Passive / Active enum
LogInBlk Blocking input uint32
Table 24 CVT Output

CVT Enabled StEna general (stVal in Ed2)
Voltages filtered FilterV general
3.1.9.2 SIR Calculation

SIR is understood as the source impedance ratio with respect to the line impedance.
It is calculated with the half cycle dft. The calculation is performed on the units indicated by the phase identifier. The
SIR value to bear in mind will always be the one corresponding to the one with lowest value amongst the units
indicated by the phase identifier.
The SIR and the option to use or not to use filtered voltages is assessed when the fault detector is activated.
Depending on the CVT supervision type ("Passive" or "Active"), different thresholds will be used to determine whether
or not to used filtered voltages.
If the SIR is greater than 1 for the actives or 10 for the passive ones, the high speed tripping is blocked and filtered
voltages are used in Zone 1, for both MHO and QUAD characteristics.
The formulation for calculating the SIR is shown in Table 25:

Table 25 Calculating the SIR for Different Units.
SIR for single phase faults SIR for single phase-phase faults
(Vrated/((Ia+3·I0  kn1 +IN2  kM1 )·Z1))-1 (Urated/(Iab·Z1))-1
(Vrated/((Ib+3·I0  kn1 +IN2  kM1 )·Z1))-1 (Urated/(Ibc·Z1))-1
(Vrated/((Ic+3·I0  kn1 +IN2  kM1 )·Z1))-1 (Urated/(Ica·Z1))-1
Where:
 Urated: Rated phase-phase voltage (3·Vrat).

 Vrated: Rated phase-ground voltage.
 Z1: The module of the positive sequence impedance of the line.
 Kn1: Zero-sequence compensation for zone 1.
1 zl0
K n = ( − 1)
3 zl1

User Manual 74
 Km1: Mutual compensation constant for zone 1 (double lines).

𝑍𝑚0
𝐾𝑚 =
3 · zl1

3.2 SIGNALS AND COMMANDS
In this section all the protection functions are shown, the ones included in each model are indicated in the functional
description.
3.2.1 Signals
There are available general signals that group data from several functions (See Table 26). These signals are in the node
PROT/PTRC1. In every model will be only the signals of the available functions.
 General Start. Indicates that one of the units that causes a general trip is started.
 General Trip. Indicates that one of the units that causes a general trip is activated.
 Pole A General Trip. Indicates that one of the units that causes a general trip of pole A is activated.
 Pole B General Trip. Indicates that one of the units that causes a general trip of pole B is activated.
 Pole C General Trip. Indicates that one of the units that causes a general trip of pole C is activated.
 OC General Start. Indicates that one of the overcurrent units is started.
 OC General Trip. Indicates that one of the overcurrent units is activated.
 51 Start. Indicates that any of the time delay phase overcurrent unit is started.
 51N Start. Indicates that one of the time delay neutral overcurrent units is started.
 51ES Start. Indicates that one of the time delay earth system overcurrent units is started.
 51UN Start. Indicates that one of the time delay unbalance overcurrent units is started.
 51 Trip. Indicates that one of the time delay phase overcurrent units is activated.
 51N Trip. Indicates that one of the time delay neutral overcurrent units is activated.
 51ES Trip. Indicates that one of the time delay earth system overcurrent units is activated.
 51UN Trip. Indicates that one of the time delay unbalance overcurrent units is activated.
 50 Start. Indicates that one of the instantaneous phase overcurrent units is started.
 50N Start. Indicates that one of the instantaneous neutral overcurrent units is started.
 50ES Start. Indicates that one of the instantaneous earth system overcurrent units is started.
 50UN Start. Indicates that one of the instantaneous unbalance overcurrent units is started.
 50 Trip. Indicates that one of the instantaneous phase overcurrent units is activated.
 50N Trip. Indicates that one of the instantaneous neutral overcurrent units is activated.
 50ES Trip. Indicates that one of the instantaneous earth system overcurrent units is activated.
 50UN Trip. Indicates that one of the instantaneous unbalance overcurrent units is activated.
 Voltage Start. Indicates that one of the voltage units is started.
 IOV Start. Indicates that one of the instantaneous overvoltage units is started.
 IUV Start. Indicates that one of the instantaneous undervoltage units is started.
 Minimum F Start. Indicates that one of the underfrequency units is started.

User Manual 75
 Maximum F Start. Indicates that one of the overfrequency units is started.

 dfdt Start. Indicates that one of the df/dt units is started.
 Voltage Trip. Indicates that one of the voltage units is activated.
 IOV Trip. Indicates that one of the instantaneous overvoltage units is activated.
 IUV Trip. Indicates that one of the instantaneous undervoltage units is activated.
 Minimum F Trip. Indicates that one of the underfrequency units is activated.
 Maximum F Trip. Indicates that one of the overfrequency units is activated.
 dfdt Trip. Indicates that one of the df/dt units is activated.
Table 26 General signals

General Start Str general
General Trip Op general
Pole A General Trip Op phsA
Pole B General Trip Op phsB
Pole C General Trip Op phsC
OC General Start StrOC stVal
OC General Trip OpOC stVal
51 Start Str51 stVal
51N Start Str51N stVal
51ES Start Str51ES stVal
51UN Start Str51UN stVal
51 Trip Op51 stVal
51N Trip Op51N stVal
51ES Trip Op51ES stVal
51UN Trip Op51UN stVal
50 Start Str50 stVal
50N Start Str50N stVal
50ES Start Str50ES stVal
50UN Start Str50UN stVal
50 Trip Op50 stVal
50N Trip Op50N stVal
50ES Trip Op50ES stVal
50UN Trip Op50UN stVal
Voltage Start StrV stVal
IOV Start StrIOV stVal
IUV Start StrIUV stVal
Minimum F Start StrFmin stVal
Maximum F Start StrFmax stVal
dfdt Start StrDfDt stVal
Voltage Trip OpV stVal
IOV Trip OpIOV stVal
IUV Trip OpIUV stVal
Minimum F Trip OpFmin stVal
Maximum F Trip OpFmax stVal
dfdt Trip OpDfDt stVal
3.2.2 Commands
Certain commands enable actions to be taken on the protection functions. Each function specific characteristics are listed in
the corresponding section. This section lists the general functions. Table 27 shows the functions affected by the general
commands.
The blocking/ unblocking commands are stored so that they are maintained when the device is switched off. If a function is
enabled by the settings and blocked by a command, the status shows that is deactivated. All the functions blocked by a
command are unblocked with the command associated to the function, each time an ICD is sent or by the general
unblocking command (DOrdRstBlk node PROT/LLN0). Available from firmware version 5.18.15.4 and ICD version 6.1.13.31.
The general protection commands are in the PROT/PTRC node, allowing the blocking/unblocking of the associated
functions:

User Manual 76
 DOrdPrBl. Protection block. Affects all the protection functions.

 DOrdPhBl. Phase block. Affects all the phase functions.
 DOrdInsBl. Instantaneous block. Affects all the instantaneous functions.
 DOrdInsPhBl. Instantaneous phase block. Affects all the phase instantaneous functions.
 DOrdTmPhBl. Timed phase block. Affects all the timed phase functions.
 DOrdINBl. Instantaneous neutral block. Affects all the neutral instantaneous functions.
 DOrdVBl. Voltage block. Affects all the voltage functions.
 DOrdDirBl. Directional block. Affects all the directional functions. Equivalent to giving directional permission.
Table 27 Command by functions
DOrdPrBl DOrdPhBl DOrdInsBl DOrdInsPhBl DOrdTmPhBl DOrdINBl DOrdVBl

Distance units
Zone 1 Gnd 
Zone 1 Phase-Phase 
Zone 2 Gnd 
Zone 3 Gnd 
Zone 4 Gnd 
Zone 5 Gnd 
Current units
Phase instantaneous (50)    
Phase timed (51)   
Neutral instantaneous (50)   
Neutral timed (51) 
Ground instantaneous (50)   
Ground timed (51) 
Unbalance instantaneous  
Unbalance block 
46FA Open phase  
37 Undercurrent  
50CSC Second harmonic restraint 
49 Thermal image 
Voltage/ Frequency / Power units
Phase overvoltage timed    
Phase instantaneous overvoltage     
Zero sequence overvoltage timed  
Zero sequence instantaneous overvoltage    
V2 overvoltage timed  
V2 instantaneous overvoltage   
Phase undervoltage timed    
Phase instantaneous undervoltage     
Frequency (81M/m) 
Frequency rate of change (81R) 
Minimum real power 
Maximum real power 
Real power inversion 
Reactive power inversion 
Minimum apparent power 
Maximum apparent power 
Remaining protection functions
Load encroachment 
Fuse failure 
SOFT Switch onto fault 
Line fault 
50BF Breaker failure 

User Manual 77
3.3 CURRENT UNITS
3.3.1 General overcurrent description

3.3.1.1 Timed characteristics
When enabled and unblocked, the unit acts when the setting value is exceeded during the programmed time.
To reset, the current must fall below 95% of the setting value.
The different curve options are shown in the curve appendix.
The timed unit can be configured with a minimum response time, that is, a limit that prevents any unit from tripping
below a minimum time when the trip time corresponding to the curve in use is met. This is done to prevent timed trips
from being faster than instantaneous trips. It is configured with an additional time setting, so that if it is set to zero,
there is no such limit.
The settings used in these functions (Table 28) are:
 Enabled. Indicates whether the function is enabled or not.

 Operation type. To be selected between:
 “Trip” generates function trips.
 “Start”, in which the function generates a pickup but no trips.
 “Block by IOC1”. The timed unit’s trip is blocked if the instantaneous unit 1 has picked up. The timed pickup is
not deactivated.
 “Block by IOC1, 2”. The timed unit’s trip is blocked if the instantaneous unit 1 or 2 has picked up. The timed
pickup is not deactivated.
 “Block by IOC1, 2, 3”. The timed unit’s trip is blocked if the instantaneous unit 1, 2 or 3 has picked up. The
timed pickup is not deactivated.
 Start value (A). Set in secondary amperes. It indicates the current value for which the function is activated.
 Operating Curve Type Indicates the type of curve selected from the options:
 ANSI-EI Extreme. Inverse (1)
 ANSI-MI Very inverse (2)
 ANSI-I Normal inverse(3)
 ANSI-MODI Moderately inverse (4)
 IEC-I Normal inverse (9) or Inverse (11)
 IEC-MI Very inverse (10)
 IEC-EI Extreme. Inverse (12)
 IEC-IC Short inverse (13)
 IEC-IL Long inverse (14)
 IEC-MIEs Very inverse special (50)
 User curves 1 (33)
 Definite time (49)
 IEEE Moderate Inverse (89)
 IEEE Very Inverse (90)
 IEEE Extremely Inverse (91)
 Time dial. Indicates the time curve within the selected characteristic.
 Delay/minimum time (ms). It has a different functionality depending on the type of the curve selected:

User Manual 78
 When the selected curve is a definite time, it indicates the time during which the conditions for the tripping of
the function must be met.
 In the rest of the curve, it indicates the minimum response time. i.e., in order for a trip to be produced, the
time used will be the greater between this setting and the time associated to the curve.
 Torque control. Selects the function’s directional type:
 “NO”. Acts as non-directional.
 “Forward”. Acts when the directional indicates forward.
 “Reverse”. Acts when the directional indicates reverse.
 Behaviour with Fuse fail. Defines the function’s action if a fuse failure is detected.
 "Idle". The fuse failure does not affect the function.
 "Non Directional". The function acts as non-directional when a fuse failure is detected.
 "Block". The function blocks, i.e., it does not act, when a fuse failure is detected.
 "Enable". The function is enabled when a fuse failure is detected.
 Reset type. Allows the emulation of the induction operation. The following options are available:
 "Instantaneous". If the current drops below 95% of the setting value, both the trip and the pickup reset
instantaneously.
 "Timed". If the current drops below 95% of the setting value, the trip drops out instantaneously, while the
pickup reset time will depend on the selected curve (family and index) and the current. If a definite time curve
is selected, the pickup will reset upon the completion of the time programmed for the pickup as of the
moment in which it falls below the pickup current, regardless of the current value.
 Operating Quantity. Indicates the measurement used by the function (52 ½ models only allow "Phasor"):
 "Phasor". Uses the fundamental measurement, without including harmonics.
 "RMS". Uses the effective value, including harmonics.
 Blocking Input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the function.
 Time delay cancel Input. Selects the signal which, when active, generates an instantaneous trip regardless of the
set time.
 Trip Permission by recloser. Indicates the trip and block permission in accordance with the recloser status:
standby, blocked, safety time after reclosing, after closing. It is configured bit by bit; for additional details, see
section corresponding to the recloser (3.12.6.3).
 Reclose perm.(R1,R2,R3,R4). Indicates whether each trip type can be reclosed or not, in accordance with the
recloser's closing cycle (see reclosure permission mask).
function’s protection events are not generate. If set to “YES”, the function’s specific mask is contemplated.

User Manual 79
Table 28 Timed overcurrent unit settings
Data Setting Min. Max. Step Remarks Type

PTOCEna Enabled NO / YES enum
Trip (1)
Start (2)
Optype Operation type Block by IOC1 (3) enum
Block by IOC1,2(4)
Block by IOC1,2,3(5)
StrVal Start value (A) 0,02 150,0 0,01 float32
ANSI-EI Extreme. Inverse (1)
ANSI-MI Very inverse (2)
ANSI-I Normal inverse(3)
ANSI-MODI Moderately inverse (4)
IEC-I Normal inverse (9) / Inverse (11)
IEC-MI Very inverse (10)
IEC-EI Extreme. Inverse (12)
IEC-IC Short inverse (13)
IEC-IL Long inverse (14)
TmACrv Operating Curve Type enum
IEC-MIEs Very inverse special (50)
User curves 1 (33)
User curves 2 (34)
User curves 3 (35)
User curves 4 (36)
Definite time (49)
IEEE Moderate Inverse (89)
IEEE Very Inverse (90)
IEEE Extremely Inverse (91)
ANSI: 0,5 - 30 step 0,1
TmMult Time dial 0,025 30 0,005 IEC: 0,025-1,5 step 0,005 float32
IEEE: 0,025-15 step 0,005
OpDlTmms Delay/minimum time (ms) 0 600000* 10 int32
NO (0)
DirMod Torque control Forward (1) enum
Reverse (2)
Idle (0)
Non Directional (1)
FFailBeh Behaviour with Fuse fail enum
Block (2)
Enable (3)
Instantaneous (0)
RstTyp Reset type enum
Timed (1)
Phasor (0)
MesTyp Operating Quantity enum
RMS (1)
LogInBlk Blocking Input uint32
LogInCaTm Time delay cancel Input uint32
GenTrip General trip NO / YES Boolean
TripPerm Trip Permission by recloser 0 255 1 Bit meaning (1) ING
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (1)
Reclose 2 (2)
Reclose 1-2 (3)
Reclose 3 (4)
Reclose 1-3 (5)
Reclose 2-3 (6)
Reclose 1-2-3 (7)
ReclPerm Reclose perm.(R1,R2,R3,R4) 0 15 enum
Reclose 4 (8)
Reclose 1-4 (9)
Reclose 2-4 (10)
Reclose 1-2-4 (11)
Reclose 3-4 (12)
Reclose 1-3-4 (13)
Reclose 2-3-4 (14)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (15)
MaskEna Enable Events record NO / YES Boolean
3.3.1.2 Instantaneous characteristics

When enabled and unblocked, the unit operates when the setting value is exceed during the programmed time.

User Manual 80
To reset, the current must fall below 95% of the setting value.
The settings used in these functions (See Table 29) are:

 “Trip” generates function trips.
 “Start”, in which the function generates a pickup but no trips.
 Start value (A). Set in secondary amperes. It indicates the current value for which the function is activated.
 Delay time (ms). Indicates the time during which the conditions for the tripping of the function must be met.
 Torque control. Selects the function’s directional type:
 “NO”. Acts as non-directional.
 “Forward”. Acts when the directional indicates forward.
 “Reverse”. Acts when the directional indicates reverse.
 Behaviour with Fuse fail. Defines the function’s action if a fuse failure is detected.
 "Idle". The fuse failure does not affect the function.
 "Non Directional". The function acts as non-directional when a fuse failure is detected.
 "Block". The function blocks, i.e., it does not act, when a fuse failure is detected.
 "Enable". The function is enabled when a fuse failure is detected.
 Operating Quantity. Indicates the measurement used by the function:
 "Phasor". Uses the fundamental measurement, without including harmonics.
 "RMS". Uses the effective value, including harmonics.
 Time delay cancel Input. Selects the signal which, when active, generates an instantaneous trip regardless of the
setting time.
recloser's closing cycle (See 6.2.3).

User Manual 81
Table 29 Instantaneous overcurrent unit settings

PIOCEna Enabled NO / YES enum
Trip (1)
Optype Operation type enum
Start (2)
StrVal Start value (A) 0,02 150,0 0,01 float32
OpDlTmms Delay time (ms) 0 600000* 10 int32
NO (0)
DirMod Torque control Forward (1) enum
Reverse (2)
Idle (0)
Non Directional (1)
FFailBeh Behaviour with Fuse fail enum
Block (2)
Enable (3)
Phasor (0)
MesTyp Operating Quantity enum
RMS (1)
LogInBlk Blocking Input uint32
LogInTIn Time delay cancel input uint32
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (1)
Reclose 2 (2)
Reclose 1-2 (3)
Reclose 3 (4)
Reclose 1-3 (5)
Reclose 2-3 (6)
Reclose 1-2-3 (7)
Reclose 4 (8)
Reclose 1-4 (9)
Reclose 2-4 (10)
Reclose 1-2-4 (11)
Reclose 3-4 (12)
Reclose 1-3-4 (13)
Reclose 2-3-4 (14)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (15)
3.3.2 Directional characteristics

The overcurrent units have a setting (torque control) for selecting the unit’s directionality:
 No: the unit acts as non-directional.

 Forward: the unit acts as directional in a forward direction.
 Reverse: the unit acts as directional in a reverse direction.
There are logical trip direction inversion inputs that allow the different units' trip direction to be inverted.
There are logical “function X directional inhibition” inputs that allow the directional units to which they are applied to be
converted into non-directional. These inputs allow for a unit's conversion into non-directional in the case of a fuse failure,
for example.
The negative sequence unit can be used in phases and in neutral.
3.3.2.1 Phase directional

The operation can be selected among: quadrature, quadrature 2 out of 3, positive sequence (S1) and positive +
negative sequences (S1+S2). The S2 directional has its own settings.
This function’s general settings and those applied in the quadrature, quadrature 2 out of 3 and positive sequence
criteria are in the PROT/RDIR1 node:
 Directional method. Indicates the directional criterion used.

 “Quadrature”. Analyses each phase independently.

User Manual 82
 “Quad. 2 out of 3”. Analyses each phase independently. However, in order to grant permission it must see
the direction in at least two phases.
 “Positive sequence”. Analyses the positive sequence.
 “S2 and S1 sequence”. Analyses the negative and positive sequences. The positive sequence is analysed
only when the negative sequence indicates polarization failure.
 Torque angle (º). Indicates the directional angle. Applies to quadrature, quadrature 2 out of 3 and positive
sequence.
 Minimum V polarization (V). Indicates the minimum voltage for polarization; the direction cannot be reliably
determined below this value.
 Zone amplitude (º). Indicates the angle covered by the trip zone.
 Permission with low Vpol. Indicates the functioning of the directional when the polarization voltage is below the
threshold. If set to “YES”, it enables an overcurrent trip if the memorized polarization voltage is lower than the
minimum polarization voltage; if set to “NO”, the overcurrent trip is not allowed under those conditions.
 67 directional Inversion. Selects the signal which, when active, inverts the trip direction.
 Phase directional blocking. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the function. When the directional is
blocked, it is issues permission for the trip.
Table 30 Phase directional settings (Quadrature and positive sequence)

Quadrature
Quad. 2 out of 3
PolQty (PolSel in Ed2) Directional method enum
Positive sequence
S2 and S1 sequence
ChrAng Torque angle (º) 0 360359 1 float32
Vpol Minimum V polarization (V) 1 200 0,1 float32
Amp (AmpVal in Ed2) Zone amplitude (º) 90 170 1 float32
EnaOpn (TripVpol in Ed2) Permission with low Vpol NO / YES Boolean
LogInInvDir 67 directional Inversion int32
LogInBlDir Phase directional blocking int32
The minimum polarization current is considered as 50% of the minimum setting of the three timed and instantaneous
phase units (50/51) that are enabled. When all units are disabled, the minimum polarization current is considered as
50% of the phase rated current.
The quadrature and positive sequence units settings, commands and outputs.
 Node: PROT/RDIR1
 Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function blocking and unblocking.
 “DOrdInvDir”. Inverts the directional trip direction.
 Outputs: Table 31 shows the function’s output data.
 67 Forward X. The detected direction indicates forward. It is independent for each phase.
 67 Reverse X. The detected direction indicates reverse. It is independent for each phase.
 Polarization Failure X. Indicates that the direction has not been detected due to a polarization failure. It is
independent for each phase.
 Phase directional inhibition. Indicates that the directional is inhibited.
 Phase direction inversion. Indicates that the direction is opposite to the setting.

User Manual 83
Table 31 Phase directional outputs (quadrature and positive sequence)

67-Forward A Fw67 phsA
67-Forward B Fw67 phsB
67-Forward C Fw67 phsC
67-Reverse A Rv67 phsA
67-Reverse B Rv67 phsB
67-Reverse C Rv67 phsC
Polarization Failure A FailPol phsA
Polarization Failure B FailPol phsB
Polarization Failure C FailPol phsC
Phase Directional Inhibition BlkDir general
Phase Direction Inversion InvDir general
3.3.2.1.1 Quadrature
For the detection of directionality in phases, the polarization voltage corresponds to the quadrature connection
(90º), in which each phase’s current is compared with the phase to phase voltage between the other two phases
(See Figure 56).
π π
−j∙( −MTA_FASES)∙
Phase Ia: Spol = Vbc Sop = Ia ∙ e 2 180
π π
Phase Ib: Spol = Vca Sop = Ib ∙ e 2 180
π π
Phase Ic: Spol = Vab Sop = Ic ∙ e 2 180
Where, MTA_FASES is the setting "Torque angle (º)"
Signals forward when
Amplitude º
|angle(Spol) − angle(Sop)| < ( )
2
Where, Amplitude is the setting "Zone amplitude (º)"
The “Quad. 2 out of 3” means that the unit only signals forward if this direction is seen in 2 phases. Avoids cases
in which, with a reverse fault, certain of the phases detect a forward fault (e.g., weak infeed). In the case of weak
infeed due to the opening of a transformer, there is only zero sequence current and therefore the three phases
detect the same current. In this case, one of the 3 phases will detect the fault in the opposite direction to the other
two.
It operates as three single phase units in which polarization voltages are the phase to phase voltages of the
healthy phases.
In the case of an ABC phase sequence, polarization is effected with Vab, Vbc and Vac, for Ic, Ia and Ib. In the
case of a CBA phase sequence, polarization is effected with Vba, Vcb and Vac, for Ic, Ia and Ib.
There is a 5º zone between the non-trip zone and the trip zone in which the current directional status is
maintained.
This unit’s signals are independent for each of the phases (See Table 31).
Memory
The polarization voltage is the voltage of the previous 3 cycles. If the voltage falls below the setting "Minimum V
polarization (V)", the value memorized in accordance with the memory management explained in the polarization
memory monitoring is used (See 3.3.3). It is also affected by the series compensation logic in so far that if it is set
to “YES” the memorized voltage is used as of the moment in which a fault or a voltage inversion is detected.

User Manual 84
Trip permission with low polarization voltage
When the polarization voltage is below the setting "Minimum V polarization (V)" or the operating current is below
the minimum polarization current “Polarization Failure X” is indicated. In this situation, if the trip permission
without polarization V is set to “YES”, the trip is permitted; while if set to “NO”, it is blocked.
Figure 56 Phase directional (Quadrature)
3.3.2.1.2 Positive sequence

The direction is determined by the comparison between the positive sequence voltage and current (See Figure
57).
S1pol = V1
π
S1op = I1 ∙ ej∙MTA_FASES∙180
Where, MTA_FASES is the setting "Torque angle (º)"
It signals forward when
Amplitude º
|angle(S1pol) − angle(S1op)| < ( )
2
maintained.
This unit’s signals are the same as those of the quadrature, with the difference that the three phases are always
given simultaneously (See Table 31).
Memory
The polarization voltage is the positive sequence voltage of the previous 3 cycles. If it falls below the setting
"Minimum V1 (V)", the value memorized in accordance with the memory management explained in the
polarization memory monitoring is used (See 3.3.3). It is also affected by the series compensation logic in so far
that if it is set to “YES” the memorized voltage is used as of the moment in which a fault or a voltage inversion is
detected.
Trip permission with low Vpol
When the V1 polarization voltage is below the setting “Minimum V polarization (V)” or the operating current is
below the minimum polarization current “Polarization Failure X” is indicated.
The directional block is used when the operating current is below the minimum polarization current.
If V1 is below the setting “Minimum V polarization (V)” but the operating current is above the minimum polarization
current, if the trip permission without polarization V is set to “YES”, the trip is permitted; while if set to “NO”, it is
blocked.

User Manual 85
Figure 57 Phase directional (Positive sequence)
3.3.2.1.3 Negative and positive sequence

Both methods are used to determine the direction, first by analysing the negative sequence:
 If the negative sequence indicates the direction, the positive sequence is not consulted.
 If the negative sequence indicates a polarization failure, the positive sequence is consulted.
3.3.2.2 Negative sequence

It is used both in phase and neutral directional.
The direction is determined by the comparison between the negative sequence voltage and current, with 3V2 greater
than the threshold "Minimum V polarization (V)" and I2 greater than the thresholds "Minimum I2 / I1 Ph (%)" and
"Minimum 3I2 / Irated (%)" (See Figure 58).
In the case of lines with series compensation, a Z2offset setting, which modifies the polarization voltage, is included.
𝜋
S2pol = −3 ∙ V2 + 3 ∙ I2 ∙ Z2Offset ∙ ej∙MTA_S2∙180
π
S2op = 3 ∙ I2 ∙ ej∙MTA_S2∙180
Where, MTA_S2 is the setting "Torque angle (º)"
Amplitude º
2
There is a 5º zone between the non-trip zone and the trip zone in which the current directional status is maintained.
If Z2offset is not used:
S2pol is -3·V2
If Z2offset is used:
 With series compensation:

 S2pol is calculated with Z2Offset.
 Without series compensation:
 S2pol depends on the relation between S2pol and the setting "Minimum V polarization (V)". If the S2pol
calculated with Z2Offset is greater than "Minimum V polarization (V)", the calculated S2pol is used. On the
other hand, if "-3·V2" is greater than "Minimum V polarization (V)", S2pol = -3·V2 is used.

User Manual 86
When the S2pol polarization voltage is below the setting "Minimum V polarization (V)" or the negative sequence
current (I2) is below any of the thresholds "Minimum I2 / I1 Ph (%)" or "Minimum 3I2 / Irated (%)", “Polarization
Failure S2” is indicated.
The directional block is used when the negative sequence current (I2) is below any of the thresholds "Minimum I2 / I1
(%)" or "Minimum I2 / Irated (%)".
If S2pol is below the setting "Minimum V polarization (V)" and I2 is greater than the thresholds "Minimum I2 / I1 Ph
(%)" and "Minimum 3I2 / Irated (%)", if the trip permission without polarization V is set to “YES”, the trip is permitted;
while if set to “NO”, it is blocked.
For the phase overcurrent units, the negative sequence directional uses the "Permission with low Vpol" setting which
is on the node PROT/RDIR1 (Phase directional).
For the neutral overcurrent units, the negative sequence directional uses the "Permission with low Vpol" setting which
is on the node PROT/GRDIR1 (Ground directional).
For the unbalanced overcurrent units, the negative sequence directional uses the "Permission with low Vpol 67Q"
setting which is on the node PROT/S2RDIR1(Negative sequence directional).
This function’s general settings and those applied in the quadrature and positive sequence criteria are in the
PROT/S2RDIR1 node:
 Torque angle (º). Indicates the directional angle.

 Offset Z2 (Ohm). Offset impedance for the negative sequence directional unit. In multifunction, it must be set to
0.
 Minimum I2 / I1 Ph (%).Indicates the minimum value of I2 in relation to the percentage of I1.
 Minimum 3I2 / Irated (%). Percentage of rated I. Indicates the minimum value of I2 in relation to rated I.
 Blocking Input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the function. When the directional is blocked, it is
issues permission for the trip.
 S2 Directional inversion. Selects the signal which, when active, inverts the trip direction.
 Permission with low Vpol 67Q2. Indicates the functioning of the directional when the polarization voltage is below
the set threshold. If set to “YES”, it enables an unbalance overcurrent trip if the polarization voltage is lower than
the "Minimum V polarization (V)" setting; if set to “NO”, the unbalance overcurrent trip is not allowed under those
conditions.
Table 32 Negative sequence directional settings

ChrAng Torque angle (º) 0 359 1 float32
Vpol Minimum V polarization (V) 1 200 0,1 float32
Ofs Offset Z2 (Ohm) 0 100 1 float32
BlkValI1 Minimum I2 / I1 Ph (%) 1 100 1 Value % of I1 float32
BlkValIn Minimum 3I2 / Irated (%) 1 100 1 Value % of In float32
LogInInvDir S2 Directional inversion int32
LogInBlDir Blocking input int32
TripVpol Permission with low Vpol 67Q NO / YES Boolean
The negative sequence unit has settings, commands and outputs:
 Node: PROT/S2RDIR1
2
Avaliable from firmware version 6.0.8.0 and ICD version 8.1.0.4

User Manual 87
 Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. See Table 32.
 Commands:
 “DOrdInvDir”. Inverts the directional trip direction
 67-S2 Forward. The detected direction indicates forward.
 67-S2 Reverse. The detected direction indicates reverse.
 Polarization Failure S2. Indicates that the direction has not been detected due to a polarization failure.
 S2 Directional Inhibition. Indicates that the directional is inhibited.
 S2 Direction Inversion. Indicates that the direction is opposite to the setting.
Table 33 Negative sequence directional outputs

67-S2 Forward Fw67S2 general
67-S2 Reverse Rv67S2 general
Polarization Failure S2 FailS2 general
S2 Directional Inhibition BlkDir general
S2 Direction Inversion InvDir general
Figure 58 Negative sequence directional

User Manual 88
Figure 59 Negative sequence directional scheme
3.3.2.3 Ground directional

Affects neutral units, allowing or blocking the trip in accordance with the configuration.
The operation can be selected from among: angular, cosine, sine and watt-metric. Various options can be selected
from within the angular criteria.
This unit’s settings are in the PROT/GRDIR node. In accordance with the selected mode, they affect:
General settings.
 Ground directional method. Indicates the directional criterion used.

 “Angular criteria”.
 “I·cos phi”
 “I·sin phi”
 “Wattmetric”
 Minimum 3I0/Irated gnd (%). Percentage of rated neutral current. Indicates the minimum value of 3 I0 in relation
to rated I. It is used in zero sequence “I·cos” and “I·sin” mode.
 Ground directional block. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the function. When the directional is
blocked, it is issues permission for the trip.
 67N directional Inversion. Selects the signal which, when active, inverts the trip direction.
Settings with "Ground directional method" as Angular:
 Polarization method. Selected the polarization type from the options:

 V. By voltage.
 IPOL. By current
 IPOL  V. By current and, in the event of uncertainty, by voltage.
 IPOL or V. By current or by voltage.
 IPOL and V. By current and by voltage.
 Voltage directional Type. Only applied if the polarization voltage has been selected.

User Manual 89
 S0. Zero sequence.

 S2. Negative sequence.
 S2 and S0. Negative and zero sequence.
 S2 or S0. Negative or zero sequence.
 S2 S0. Negative sequence and, in the event of uncertainty, zero sequence.
 S0 S2. Zero sequence and, in the event of uncertainty, negative sequence.
 Torque angle (º). Indicates the directional angle.
 Permission with low Vpol. Indicates the functioning of the directional when the polarization voltage is below the
threshold. If set to “YES”, it enables an overcurrent trip if the memorized polarization voltage is lower than the
minimum polarization voltage; if set to “NO”, the overcurrent trip is not allowed under those conditions.
 Minimum Ipol/Irated gnd (%). Indicates the minimum current for polarization; the direction cannot be reliably
 Offset Z0 (Ohm). Offset impedance for the zero sequence directional unit.
 Minimum 3I0/I1 (%). Percentage of I1. Indicates the minimum value of I0 in relation to I1.
Settings with "Ground directional method" as Watt-metric, I·cos, I·sin
 Minimum power: Isin, Icos, W: Power value P=Vn·In·cos(-c), in which =Angle between Vn and In. If the
power negative and higher than this value, a forward fault is registered. If it is positive and higher than this value,
a reverse fault is registered.
 Icos/Isin method switch. If a signal is assigned to this input, it indicates the directional type used (independent of
the setting) I·cos if the input is 0 (deactivated) and I·sin if the input is 1 (activated). If no signal has been
assigned, the criterion selected for the setting is used.
The neutral units have settings, commands and outputs:
 Node: PROT/GRDIR1
 Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. See Table 34 for details.
 Commands:
 “DOrdInvDir”. Inverts the directional trip direction.
 67N-Forward. The detected direction indicates forward.
 67N-Reverse. The detected direction indicates reverse.
 Polarization Failure In. It indicates that the direction has not been detected due to a polarization failure.
 Gnd directional inhibition. Indicates that the directional is inhibited.
 Ground direction inversion. Indicates that the direction is opposite to the setting.

User Manual 90
Table 34 Neutral directional settings

“Angular criteria”
DirTyp “Icos phi”
Ground Directional method enum
“Isin phi”
“Wattmetric”
ChrAng Torque angle(º) 0 359 1 float32
BlkValV Minimum V polarization (V) 1 200 0,1 float32
BlkValIn Minimum 3I0/Irated gnd (%) 1 100 1 Value % of I1 float32
LogInInvDir 67N directional Inversion int32
LogInBlDir Ground directional block int32
LogInChSC Icos/Isin method switch int32
V
IPOL
PolTyp
Polarization method IPOL  V enum
IPOL or V
IPOL and V
S0
S2
S2 and S0
PolQty (PolSel in Ed2) Voltage directional Type S2 or S0 enum
S2 S0
S0 S2
Ofs Offset Z0 (Ohm) 0 100 1 float32
BlkValI1 Minimum 3I0/I1 (%) 1 100 1 Value % of In float32
EnaOpn (TripVpol in Ed2) Permission with low Vpol NO / YES Boolean
BlkValIpol Minimum Ipol/Irated gnd (%) 1 100 1 Value % of I1 float32
BlkValW Minimum power: Isin,Icos,W 0 100 0,01 float32
Table 35 Neutral directional outputs

67N-Forward Fw67G neut
67N-Reverse Rv67G neut
Polarization Failure In FailIn neut
Gnd Directional Inhibition BlkDir neut
Ground Direction Inversion InvDir neut
3.3.2.3.1 Combinations with angular criteria

The In=3·I0 measurement can be calculated as the sum of the phase currents or as the measurement of the
neutral transformer, depending on the setting "I0 type: measured/calculated" in the node "PROT/TCIN1".
Polarizations
The various combinations according to the setting "Polarization method" are:
If Ineutral is less than "Minimum 3I0/Irated gnd (%)" of the neutral rated current or less than "Minimum 3I0/I1 (%)"
of the positive sequence current (I1), a “Polarization Failure In” is issued and no other actions are taken.
It is polarized by voltage. Depending on the setting "Voltage directional Type", the polarization voltage can be the
zero sequence, negative sequence or both.
Ipol
It is polarized by the ground current (Ipol). See 3.3.2.3.3.

User Manual 91
IV
If the I unit does not determine the polarization fault direction, the voltage signal combination is analysed.
If the result is “Without VPOL”, that is, the polarization voltage is below the setting "Minimum V polarization (V)",
the trip permission depends on the setting "Permission with low Vpol".
I and V
Both units (Ipol and V) are analysed. If both give the same result, a forward or reverse indication is made. It the
result is different, there is no permission.
If any of them does not determine the direction, a “Polarization Failure In” message is indicated and a decision is
taken in accordance with the “Permission with low Vpol” setting.
This combination is applicable to autotransformer when there is a malfunction of Ipol.
I or V
Both units (Ipol and V) are analysed. If any of them indicates forward or reverse, the corresponding signal is
activated. If one indicates forward and the other reverse, both directions are activated.
If they do not determine the direction, a “Polarization Failure In” message is indicated and a decision is taken in
accordance with the “Permission with low Vpol” setting.
Voltage directional Type
Furthermore, with this setting it can be selected among the following options:
S0
The direction is determined with the neutral current and the neutral voltage as polarization (See 3.3.2.3.2).
S2
The direction is determined with the negative sequence current and the negative sequence voltage as
polarization (See 3.3.2.2).
S0 and S2
Both units (S2 and S0) are analysed. If both give the same result, a forward or reverse indication is made. It the
result is different, there is no permission.
If any of them (S0 or S2) does not determine the direction, a "Polarization Failure In” or "Polarization Failure S2"
message is indicated and a decision is taken in accordance with the “Permission with low Vpol” setting.
Specific situations:
One unit set in reverse and one set forward. S0 indicates reverse and S2 forward. No output is given.
V0 V2 Result
F F F
F R Nothing
R R R
R F Nothing
F Without Vpol Without Vpol
R Without Vpol Without Vpol
Without Vpol F Without Vpol
Without Vpol R Without Vpol
Without Vpol Without Vpol Without Vpol

User Manual 92
S0 or S2
Both units (S2 and S0) are analysed. If any of them indicates forward or reverse, the corresponding signal is
activated. If one indicated forward and the other reverse, both directions are activated.
If both of them (S0 or S2) do not determine the direction, a "Polarization Failure In” or "Polarization Failure S2"
message is indicated and a decision is taken in accordance with the “Permission with low Vpol” setting.
Specific situations:
V0 V2 Result
F F F
F R F&R
R R R
R F F&R
F Without Vpol F
R Without Vpol R
Without Vpol F F
Without Vpol R R
S2  S0
If the S2 unit does not determine the direction, a “Polarization Failure S2” signal is activated and S0 is analysed.
If the conditions for determining the direction are still not given, a “Polarization Failure In” signal is activated and a
decision is taken in accordance with the “Permission with low Vpol” setting.
Example of specific situations:
One unit set in reverse and one set forward. S2 indicates reverse and S0 forward. Only reverse would be
signalled (due to S2).
S2 S0 Result
F F or R or Without Vpol F
R F or R or Without Vpol R
Without Vpol F F
Without Vpol R R
S0  S2
If the S0 unit does not determine the direction, a “Polarization Failure In” signal is activated and S2 is analysed.
If the conditions for determining the direction are still not given, a “Polarization Failure S2” signal is activated and
a decision is taken in accordance with the “Permission with low Vpol” setting.
Example of specific situations:
One unit set in reverse and one set forward. S0 indicates reverse and S2 forward. Only reverse would be
signalled (due to S0).
S0 S2 Result
F F or R or Without Vpol F
R F or R or Without Vpol R
Without Vpol F F
Without Vpol R R
3.3.2.3.2 S0 polarization
The direction is determined by comparing the neutral current with the neutral voltage as polarization. The angle
determines the range in which the fault is considered as a forward fault and as a reverse fault. A Z0offset setting,
which modifies the polarization voltage, is included.
π
S0pol = −VN + IN ∙ Z0Offset ∙ ej∙MTA_S0∙180
π
S0op = IN ∙ ej∙MTA_S0∙180
Where, MTA_S0 is the setting "Torque angle (º)"

User Manual 93
Amplitude º
2
The VN=3·V0 voltage can be calculated using the phase to earth voltages of the phases or it can be measured by
a transformer, in accordance with the “3V0 Operating quantity” setting in the PROT/PVGE1 node.
If Z0offset is not used:
S0pol is -3·V0
If Z0offset is used:
 With series compensation:

 S0pol is calculated with Z0Offset
 Without series compensation:
 S0pol depends on the relation between S0pol and the setting "Minimum V polarization". If the S0pol
calculated with Z0Offset is greater than "Minimum V polarization (V)", the calculated S0pol is used. On
the other hand, if "-3·V0" is greater than "Minimum V polarization (V)", S0pol = "-3·V0 is used.
maintained.
Figure 60 Zero sequence directional
When the S0pol polarization voltage is below the setting "Minimum V polarization (V)" or the neutral current is below
to any of the thresholds "Minimum 3I0 / Irated (%)" and "Minimum 3I0 / I1 (%)", “Polarization Failure In” is indicated.
The directional block is used when the neutral current is below to any of the thresholds "Minimum 3I0 / Irated (%)"
and "Minimum 3I0 / I1 (%)".
If S0pol is below the setting "Minimum V polarization (V)" and the operation current is greater than the thresholds
"Minimum 3I0 / Irated (%)" and "Minimum 3I0 / I1 (%)", if the trip permission without polarization V is set to “YES”, the
trip is permitted; while if set to “NO”, it is blocked.

User Manual 94
Figure 61 Zero sequence directional scheme
3.3.2.3.3 I polarization
The direction is determined by comparing the ground current (Ipol) with the neutral current. To be able to verify
the direction, Ipol must be greater than the percent of neutral rated current indicated in the setting "Minimum
Ipol/Irated gnd (%)".
Figure 62 Directional with current polarization
maintained, both for voltage and for current polarization.
When the neutral current is below any of the thresholds "Minimum 3I0 / Irated (%)" and "Minimum 3I0 / I1 (%)",
“Polarization Failure In” is indicated.
When the Ipol is below to the percent of neutral rated current indicated in the setting "Minimum Ipol/Irated (%)",
“Polarization Failure In” is indicated. In this case, there is “NO” trip permission.
3.3.2.3.4 Watt-metric directional

This is for lines with Petersen coil compensation.

User Manual 95
The In=3·I0 measurement can be calculated as the sum of the phase currents o as the measurement of the
neutral transformer, depending on the setting "I0 type" in the node "PROT/TCIN1".
a transformer, in accordance with the “V0 measurement type” setting in the PROT/PVGE1 node.
In order to allow the directional unit to pickup, the following must be met:
 Vn exceeds the setting "Minimum V polarization (V)".

 For forward faults, the angle between the current and the displaced voltage, the maximum torque angle
must be between 95 and 265.
95º < 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝐼0) − 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝑉0) + 𝑇𝑜𝑟𝑞𝑢𝑒 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 < 265º
 For reverse faults, the angle between the current and the displaced voltage, the maximum torque angle
275º < 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝐼0) − 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝑉0) + 𝑇𝑜𝑟𝑞𝑢𝑒𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 < 85º
 The power P=Vn·In·cos(-c) must exceed the minimum power "Minimum power: Isin, Icos, W" by the
absolute value. If the sign of P is negative, the fault is forward. If positive, the fault is reverse.
The equation to be implemented for calculating P is as follows:
P = [Re(V0) ∙ cos c + Im(V0) ∙ sin c] ∙ Re(I0) + [Im(V0) ∙ cos c − Re(V0) ∙ sin c] ∙ Im(I0)
c = Torque angle
 = 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝑉0) − 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝐼0)
Figure 63 Directional with watt-metric polarization
Trip permission without V polarization
If the voltage VN is lower than "Minimum V polarization (V)", "Polarization Failure In" is indicated. If "Permission
with low Vpol" is set to "YES", the trip is allowed, if it is set to "NO", it is blocked.
3.3.2.3.5 I*cos() / I*sin() directional

The In=3·I0 measurement can be calculated as the sum of the phase currents o as the measurement of the
neutral transformer, depending on the setting "I0 type" in the node "PROT/TCIN1".
a transformer, in accordance with the “V0 measurement type” setting in the PROT/PVGE1 node.
An input can be programmed (“Icos/Isin method switch”) such that when activated the operating mode of I*cos()
changes to I*sin(). If programmed, this input cancels the setting: if deactivated, it runs the I*cos() algorithm. If
activated, the I*sin() algorithm is run, independently of the setting. It does not affect either the angular of the
watt-metric directional.
I*cos() directional
 Vn exceeds the setting "Minimum V polarization (V)".

User Manual 96
 For forward faults, the angle between the current and the displaced voltage, the maximum torque angle
95º < a𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝐼0) − a𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝑉0) + 𝑇𝑜𝑟𝑞𝑢𝑒 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 < 265º
275º < a𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝐼0) − a𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝑉0) + 𝑇𝑜𝑟𝑞𝑢𝑒 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 < 85º
 The minimum current "I minimum= In·cos(-c)" must exceed the minimum threshold "Minimum 3I0 /
Irated (%)" by the absolute value. If the sign is negative, the fault is forward. If positive, the fault is
reverse.
[Re(V0) ∙ cos c + Im(V0) ∙ sin c] ∙ Re(I0) + [Im(V0) ∙ cos c − Re(V0) ∙ sin c] ∙ Im(I0)
I0 ∙ cos( − c) =
|V0|
c = Torque angle
 = angle(V0) − angle(I0)
Figure 64 Directional with cosine polarization
As the neutral units allow trip permission to be issued with forward and with reverse faults, in reality the
characteristics will be as follows.
Figure 65 Forward/Reverse with cosine polarization
67N I*sin() directional

User Manual 97
 Vn exceeds the setting "Minimum V polarization (V)". For forward faults, the angle between the current
and the displaced voltage, the maximum torque angle must be between 185 and 355.
185º < 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝐼0) − 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝑉0) + 𝑇𝑜𝑟𝑞𝑢𝑒 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 < 355º
5º < 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝐼0) − 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝑉0) + 𝑇𝑜𝑟𝑞𝑢𝑒𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 < 175º
 The minimum current "I minimum=In·sin(-c)" must exceed the minimum threshold "Minimum 3I0 / Irated
(%)" by the absolute value. If the sign is negative, the fault is forward. If positive, the fault is reverse.
[Im(V0) ∙ cos c − Re(V0) ∙ sin c] ∙ Re(I0) − [Re(V0) ∙ cos c + Im(V0) ∙ sin c] ∙ Im(I0)
I0 ∙ sin( − c) =
|V0|
c = Torque angle
 = 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝑉0) − 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒(𝐼0)
Figure 66 Directional with sine polarization
3.3.3 Polarization memory monitoring

It is used in the polarization of the phase directional (positive sequence and quadrature) and in the distance units
(mho characteristics).
Allows the memorized voltage to be used during the configured time when the current voltage is not apt.
This unit’s operating scheme for the distance unit is:
 If V1> Minimum V1 is met during at least 4 cycles, the memorized voltage is captured once again.
 V1mem is then update to the V1 value registered 3 cycles previously. Thus, in the moment in which the
conditions for using it are met, the value registered 3 cycles previously will be taken.
 Mho units are polarized with the V1 of the previous 3 cycles (Vpol = V1). V1mem is captured in the moment the
voltage is above the setting Minimum V1 and is used during the time set in "V1 maintenance time".
 If the breaker is open (open pole logic) with the V1 above the setting "Minimum V1", the voltage V1 without
memory is used.
 If the series compensation logic is enabled, node PROT.PSEC1, the memorized voltage is used when the fault
detection is activated.
 If the "Blocking by power swinging" signal is activated, the actual V1 is used (not memorized)
 The logic input "Force V1 with memory" forces the use of memorized voltage in the positive sequence
polarization.

User Manual 98
 The logic input "Force V1 without memory" forces the use of non-memorized voltage in the positive sequence
polarization.
This unit’s operating scheme for the overcurrent directional units is:
 If Vx> Minimum Vx is met during at least 4 cycles, the memorized voltage is captured once again.
 Vxmen is then update to the Vx value registered 3 cycles previously. Thus, in the moment in which the conditions
for using it are met, the value registered 3 cycles previously will be taken.
 The 67-50/51 units are normally polarized without memory. The memorized voltage is used in the moment in
which the actual Vx voltage drops below Minimum Vx. The memory time is indicated in the maintenance time
setting.
 If the series compensation is enabled, node PROT.PSEC1, the memorized voltage is used when the fault
detection is activated.
 The logic input "Force Vx with memory" forces the use of memorized voltage in the positive sequence
polarization.
 The logic input "Force Vx without memory" forces the use of non-memorized voltage in the positive sequence
polarization.
The positive sequence voltage (V1) and the quadrature voltages are analysed separately (Vab, Vbc and Vac).
The function’s logic diagram is shown in Figure 67 (distance units), Figure 68 (overcurrent units, positive sequence)
and Figure 69 (overcurrent units, quadrature).
This unit’s settings are:
 Minimum V1 (V). Indicates the minimum V1 value for employing the memorized voltage.
 V1 Memory Time (ms). Indicates the time during which the memorized voltage is used in the polarization by
positive sequence.
 Minimum Ph-ph voltage (V). Indicates the minimum quadrature voltage for employing the memorized voltage.
 Vc Memory Time (ms). Indicates the time during which the memorized voltage is used in the polarization by
quadrature.
 Force V1 with memory. Forces the use of memorized voltage in the positive sequence polarization.
 Force V1 without memory. Forces the use of non-memorized voltage in the positive sequence polarization.
 Force Vc with memory. Forces the use of memorized voltage in the quadrature polarization.
 Force Vc without memory. Forces the use of non-memorized voltage in the quadrature polarization.
Table 36 Directional memory monitoring settings

ValV1 Minimum V1 (V) float
MemV1Tmms V1 Memory Time (ms) int32
ValVc Minimum Ph-ph voltage (V) float
MemVcTmms VC Memory Time (ms) int32
LogInFV1M Force V1 without memory. int32
LogInFV1NM Force V1 with memory int32
LogInFVcM Force Vc without memory. int32
LogInFVcNM Force Vc with memory int32
The memory monitoring units have settings and outputs:
 Node: PROT/MSUPPTRC1
 Outputs:
 Memorized Ph-Ph Voltage. It is activated while the memorized phase-phase voltage is being used.
 V1 memorized. It is activated while the memorized V1 is being used.

User Manual 99
 V1 memorized distance. It is activated while the memorized V1 is being used in the distance units.
The input signals of these schemes are:
 Fault detection. It´s the output of the Fault detection unit.

 The digital inputs are the settings of the function:
 Force V1 with memory
 Force V1 without memory
 Force VAB with memory. It is the setting "Force Vc with memory".
 Force VAB without memory. It is the setting "Force Vc without memory"
Table 37 Memorized voltage monitoring outputs

Memorized Ph-Ph Voltage Vcomp general
V1 memorized V1mem general
V1 memorized distance V1dist general
Figure 67 Distance units. Positive sequence memorized monitoring

User Manual 100
Figure 68 Positive sequence memorized monitoring
Figure 69 Memorized quadrature monitoring
3.3.4 Series compensation

It affects the polarization signal of the distance and overcurrent units.
If it is enabled, the memorized voltage is used when the voltage is below the threshold set or when the fault detection
is activated. This unit applies to the distance and the phase overcurrent units.
 Enabled: Enables the function.

There are settings and outputs:
 Node: PROT/PSEC1
 Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For details, see Table 38
 Outputs: Table 39 shows the function's output data
 Series compensation status: Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.

User Manual 101
Table 38 Series Compensation settings

SeCoEna Enabled NO / YES enum
Table 39 Series compensation Outputs

Series compensation status StEna general (stVal in Ed2)
3.3.5 Phase overcurrent

3.3.5.1 Instantaneous
There are 3 independent units for each of the phases.
Each of the three units has independent settings, commands and outputs.
 Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/PIOC1
 Commands:
 IOC1 Start phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has picked up. It is independent for each phase. Where X
is the phase.
 IOC1 Trip phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has tripped. It is independent for each phase. Where X is
the phase.
 IOC1 Phase Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked. This is general
for all three phases.
 IOC1 phase Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up
 IOC1 phase Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
Table 40 Instantaneous phase function outputs
Signal PIOC1 Signal PIOC2 Signal PIOC3 Data Attribute

IOC1 Start phase A IOC2 Start phase A IOC3 Start phase A Str phsA
IOC1 Start phase B IOC2 Start phase B IOC3 Start phase B Str phsB
IOC1 Start phase C IOC2 Start phase C IOC3 Start phase C Str phsC
IOC1 Trip phase A IOC2 Trip phase A IOC3 Trip phase A Op phsA
IOC1 Trip phase B IOC2 Trip phase B IOC3 Trip phase B Op phsB
IOC1 Trip phase C IOC2 Trip phase C IOC3 Trip phase C Op phsC
IOC1 Phase Status IOC2 Phase Status IOC3 Phase Status StEna stVal
IOC1 Phase Start IOC2 Phase Start IOC3 Phase Start Str general
IOC1 Phase Trip IOC2 Phase Trip IOC3 Phase Trip Op general
3.3.5.2 Timed

User Manual 102
 Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/PTOC1
 Commands:
 TOC1 Start phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has picked up. It is independent for each phase. Where
X is the phase.
 TOC1 Trip phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has tripped. It is independent for each phase. Where X is
the phase.
 TOC1 Phase Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked. This is
general for all three phases.
 TOC1 Phase Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up
 TOC1 Phase Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
Table 41 Timed phase function outputs
Signal PTOC1 Signal PTOC2 Signal PTOC3 Data Attribute

TOC1 Start phase A TOC2 Start phase A TOC3 Start phase A Str phsA
TOC1 Start phase B TOC2 Start phase B TOC3 Start phase B Str phsB
TOC1 Start phase C TOC2 Start phase C TOC3 Start phase C Str phsC
TOC1 Trip phase A TOC2 Trip phase A TOC3 Trip phase A Op phsA
TOC1 Trip phase B TOC2 Trip phase B TOC3 Trip phase B Op phsB
TOC1 Trip phase C TOC2 Trip phase C TOC3 Trip phase C Op phsC
TOC1 Phase Status TOC2 Phase Status TOC3 Phase Status StEna stVal
TOC1 Phase Start TOC2 Phase Start TOC3 Phase Start Str general
TOC1 Phase Trip TOC2 Phase Trip TOC3 Phase Trip Op general
3.3.6 Neutral overcurrent

Uses the neutral transformer input or 3·I0, depending on the setting "I0 type: measured/calculated" in the node
"PROT/TCIN1". In the 52 ½ models only 3·I0 is allowed.
There are 3 independent units.
 Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/GPIOC1
 Commands:
 GIOC1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 GIOC1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.

User Manual 103
 IOC1 Ground Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 42 Neutral instantaneous function outputs
Signal GIOC1 Signal GIOC2 Signal GIOC3 Data Attribute

GIOC1 Start GIOC2 Start GIOC3 Start Str neut
GIOC1 Trip GIOC2 Trip GIOC3 Trip Op neut
IOC1 Ground Status IOC2 Ground Status IOC3 Ground Status StEna stVal
3.3.6.2 Timed
 Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/GPTOC1
 Commands:
 GTOC1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 GTOC1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 TOC1 Ground Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 43 Timed neutral function outputs
Signal GTOC1 Signal GTOC2 Signal GTOC3 Data Attribute

GTOC1 Start GTOC2 Start GTOC3 Start Str neut
GTOC1 Trip GTOC2 Trip GTOC3 Trip Op neut
TOC1 Ground Status TOC2 Ground Status TOC3 Ground Status StEna stVal
3.3.7 Grounding overcurrent

Not available on all models (see model functions).
Employs the polarization current transformer input as a measurement.
This unit is not directional.
 Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/ESPIOC1
 Commands:

User Manual 104

 ESIOC1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 ESIOC1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 IOC1 Earthing System Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 44 Instantaneous grounding function outputs
Signal ESIOC1 Signal ESIOC2 Signal ESIOC3 Data Attribute

ESIOC1 Start ESIOC2 Start ESIOC3 Start Str general
ESIOC1 Trip ESIOC2 Trip ESIOC3 Trip Op general
IOC1 Earthing System Status IOC2 Earthing System Status IOC3 Earthing System Status StEna stVal
3.3.7.2 Timed
 Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/ESPTOC1
 Commands:
 ESTOC1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 ESTOC1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 TOC1 Earthing System Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 45 Timed grounding function outputs
Signal ESTOC1 Signal ESTOC2 Signal ESTOC3 Data Attribute

ESTOC1 Start ESTOC2 Start ESTOC3 Start Str general
ESTOC1 Trip ESTOC2 Trip ESTOC3 Trip Op general
TOC1 Earthing System Status TOC2 Earthing System Status TOC3 Earthing System Status StEna stVal
3.3.8 Unbalanced overcurrent

Employs 3 times the negative sequence as a measurement:
3·I2 = (Ia+a2·Ib+a·Ic) In which a = 1|120º
The calculation of the sequence takes into phase succession order setting (ABC/ACB).
The negative sequence directional is used by this unit.
The measurement type setting is not used, as the fundamental is always used.
 Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/UNPIOC1

User Manual 105
 Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. It employs the settings in Table 29, with the exception of
the measurement type.
 Commands:
 UNIOC1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 UNIOC1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 IOC1 Unbalanced Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 46 Instantaneous unbalanced function outputs
Signal UNIOC1 Signal UNIOC2 Signal UNIOC3 Data Attribute

UNIOC1 Start UNIOC2 Start UNIOC3 Start Str general
UNIOC1 Trip UNIOC2 Trip UNIOC3 Trip Op general
IOC1 Unbalanced Status IOC2 Unbalanced Status IOC3 Unbalanced Status StEna stVal
3.3.8.2 Timed
 Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/UNPTOC1
 Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. Employs the settings in Table 28, with the exception of
the measurement type.
 Commands:
 UNTOC1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 UNTOC1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 TOC1 Unbalanced Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 47 Timed unbalanced function outputs
Signal UNTOC1 Signal UNTOC2 Signal UNTOC3 Data Attribute

UNTOC1 Start UNTOC2 Start UNTOC3 Start Str general
UNTOC1 Trip UNTOC2 Trip UNTOC3 Trip Op general
TOC1 Unbalanced Status TOC2 Unbalanced Status TOC3 Unbalanced Status StEna stVal
3.3.9 2nd harmonic restraint

It permits the instantaneous and timed phase, neutral and unbalanced overcurrent units to be blocked (51, 50, 51N, 50N
and 67Q).
Restraint by phase or for all the phases is available for the 50/51 units. The units to be blocked are selected by settings.
To activate the restraint, the following must be met simultaneously:
 The fundamental current must exceed the minimum inrush value.

User Manual 106
 The relationship between the 2nd harmonic value and the fundamental must exceed a set threshold.
 The 2nd harmonic current must exceed 1% of In (50mA with In=5A and 10ma with In=1A).
To deactivate the restraint, the following must be met:
 The current must be less than 95% of the minimum current threshold, or
 The current must be below 95% of the restraint percentage threshold.
The restraint is calculated independently for each phase and neutral.
The phase units’ restraint can act per phase (the restraint in any one phase only blocks the phase in question) or it can
be general (the restraint in any one phase blocks all the phases).
For the unbalanced unit restraint, it is sufficient that the conditions are given in a phase or in the neutral.
The units’ restraint settings are:
 Enabled. Indicates whether the function is enabled or not. The options available are:
 YES. It is enabled.
 NO. It is disabled.
 Only in close. It is enabled for a second after closing.
 I 2nd/fund. Threshold (%). Indicates the percentage of the 2nd harmonic in relation to the fundamental above
which the restraint is produced.
 Minimum current (A). Minimum value of the fundamental current in order for the restraint to be produced. No
restraint is indicated below this value, even when the % I 2nd/Ifund is above the setting.
 Restraint. Enables the units on which the restraint is to act to be indicated. There are separate settings for each
unit. In general, the setting is "NO / YES", except in those phases that can be:
 NO. Restraint is not permitted.
 Phase. The restraint in one phase only blocks the phase in question.
 General. The restraint in one phase blocks all the phases.
 Harm.Restraint Blocking. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the function.
There are independent settings, commands and outputs in each restraint unit.
Phases
 Node: PROT/PHAR1
 Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For details, see Table 49. There is restraint setting for
each timed and instantaneous phase overcurrent unit (NO / Phase / General) and unbalanced (NO / YES)
 Commands:
 Outputs:
 2nd harmonic restraint Ix. Indicates that the restraint has been activated in this phase. It is independent for
each phase.
 2nd harmonic restraint ph. Indicates that the restraint has been activated in one of the phases.
 Harm. Ph. restraint Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked. This is

User Manual 107
Table 48 Phase restraint outputs

2nd harmonic restraint Ia Op phsA
2nd harmonic restraint Ib Op phsB
2nd harmonic restraint Ic Op phsC
2nd harmonic restraint ph Op general
Harm. Ph. restraint Status StEna stVal
Table 49 Phase 2nd harmonic restraint settings
Data Setting Min. Max Step Remarks Type

NO (0)
PHAREna Enabled YES (1) Boolean
Only in close (2)
StrVal I 2nd/fund. Threshold (%) 10 100 1 float32
BlkValA Minimum current (A) 0,1 150,0 0,01 float32
NO (0)
Restr51U1 Restraint 51 Unit 1 Phase (1) enum
General (2)
Restr51U2 Restraint 51 Unit 2 NO/Phase/General enum
Restr67QT1 Restraint 67QT Unit 1 NO / YES Boolean
Restr67QI1 Restraint 67QI Unit 1 NO / YES Boolean
LogInBlk Harm.Restraint Blocking int32
Neutral
 Node: PROT/GPHAR1
 Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For details, see Table 51. There is restraint setting for
each timed and instantaneous neutral overcurrent unit (NO / YES).
 Commands:
 2nd harmonic restraint In. It indicates that the neutral restraint has been activated.
 Harm. Gr. restraint Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 50 Neutral restraint outputs

2nd harmonic restraint In Op neut
Harm. Gr. restraint Status StEna stVal

User Manual 108
Table 51 Neutral 2nd harmonic restraint settings

NO (0)
PHAREna Enabled YES (1) Boolean
Only in close (2)
StrVal I 2nd/fund. Threshold (%) 10 100 1 float32
BlkValA Minimum current (A) 0,1 150,0 0,01 float32
Restr51N1 Restraint 51N Unit 1 NO / YES Boolean
LogInBlk Harm.Restraint Blocking int32
3.3.10 Broken conductor

This is a definite time protection unit.
The pickup value to be set is, expressed as a decimal, and it depends on the setting "Operation type".
There are two modes of operation, selectable by setting. The relay trips once the programmed time has elapsed if the
following conditions are met:
 “Always”:
 The positive sequence is greater than 3% of I rated.
 The negative sequence is greater than 3% of I rated.
 I2/I1 ratio exceeds the setting value.
𝐼2 𝐼𝑎 + 𝑎2 · 𝐼𝑏 + 𝑎 · 𝐼𝑐
= 𝐼𝑛 𝑤ℎ𝑖𝑐ℎ, 𝑎 = 1∟120º
𝐼1 𝐼𝑎 + 𝑎 · 𝐼𝑏 + 𝑎2 · 𝐼𝑐
 Current value of one phase is greater than the setting "Minimum Phase I (%Irated)".
 “Yes with 52”:

 The positive sequence is greater than 3% of I rated.
 The negative sequence is greater than 3% of I rated.
 I2/Irated exceeds the setting value.
𝐼2 1 𝐼𝑎 + 𝑎2 · 𝐼𝑏 + 𝑎 · 𝐼𝑐
= ( ) 𝐼𝑛 𝑤ℎ𝑖𝑐ℎ, 𝑎 = 1∟120º
𝐼𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑 3 𝐼𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑
 I0/Irated: I0/Irated is bellow than the setting value. If set to 0, this setting will not be taken into account.
 If the breaker is closed, the current value of one or two phases is lower than the setting "Minimum Phase I
(%Irated)".
Figure 70 shows the logic scheme of the function.
The settings used in these functions are:

 “Always”
 “Yes with 52”
 Start value (%). If "Operation Type" is "Always", indicates the ratio I2/I1. In case of "Yes with 52", it indicates
I2/Irated.

User Manual 109
 Minimum Phase I (%Irated). Minimum phase current value.

 Max. Threshold I0/Irated (%). Maximum I0/Irated value (%) necessary to act.
recloser's closing cycle (See 6.2.3).
There are independent settings, commands and outputs.
 Node: PROT/OPPTOC
 Commands:
 Broken conductor Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 Broken conductor Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 Broken conductor Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 52 Broken conductor settings
Data Setting Min Max Step Remarks Type

OPPTOCEna Enabled NO / YES enum
Always (1)
Yes with 52 (2)
StrVal Start value (%) 5 100 0,1 float32
OpDlTmms Delay time (ms) 0 600000 10 int32
BlkIph Minimum Phase I (%Irated) 5 200 0,1 float32
BLkI0I1 Max. Threshold I0/Irated (%) 0 20 0,1 float32
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (1)
Reclose 2 (2)
Reclose 1-2 (3)
Reclose 3 (4)
Reclose 1-3 (5)
Reclose 2-3 (6)
Reclose 1-2-3 (7)
Reclose 4 (8)
Reclose 1-4 (9)
Reclose 2-4 (10)
Reclose 1-2-4 (11)
Reclose 3-4 (12)
Reclose 1-3-4 (13)
Reclose 2-3-4 (14)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (15)

User Manual 110
Table 53 Broken conductor function outputs

Broken conductor Start Str general
Broken conductor Trip Op general
Broken conductor Status StEna stVal
Figure 70 Broken conductor logic
3.3.11 Thermal image

There are independent units for phase and neutral.
This function calculates a thermal capacity in accordance with the protected unit’s recent and current load conditions.
The thermal capacity is displayed as a % of the trip value. If the function is enabled, a warning signal is activated when
the programmed value is reached. When 100% is reached, the thermal image trip signal is activated. Once tripped as a
result, it does not drop-out while the calculated thermal capacity remains above the reset threshold setting and the rest of
the locking conditions are fulfilled. The calculated thermal capacity can be reset by logic input or by command.
The time which elapses before the trip is determined by the following curves, which establish the time in accordance with
the ratio between the current and the programmed rated current, and the programmed heating constant. According to the
following formula (starting from thermal capacity 0):

User Manual 111
In which:
t: trip time
ζ1: heating constant
I: measured current
I0: programmed rated current
Once it has tripped, there is another programmable time constant for the cooling.
The heating curve is calculated using the following formula:
In which:
Tf: final thermal capacity
Ti: initial thermal capacity
t: time
ζ1: heating time constant
For Ti = 0 the formula is reduced to
As
The heating curve is
The cooling curve is calculated using the following formula:
In which:
Tf: final thermal capacity
Ti: initial thermal capacity
t: time
ζ2: cooling time constant
Starting from Ti = 1 (100 in %), which is the thermal capacity at which the trip is produced, the formula used to obtain a
thermal capacity of Tf = 0 (i.e., current I = 0) is as follows
The current measurements used in the units are:
 Phases

User Manual 112
Ieq2=Imax2
Where:
Imax is the maximum current of the three phases.
 Neutral. The transformer grounding current is used. If this transformer does not exist, the neutral current is used.
The settings of each of these units are:

 Heating constant (s). Heating constant in seconds.
 Cooling constant (s). Cooling constant in seconds.
 Alarm threshold (%). Value at which a thermal image warning is issued.
 Trip threshold (%).3 Value at which a thermal image trip is issued. It should be greater than the “Alarm threshold
(%)”. If it is smaller it is fixed to 100.
 Reset threshold (%). Thermal image reset value.
 Start current (A). Rated current for the calculation of the thermal image.
 Init input. Resets the thermal image value.
 Calculus store. Allows the value calculated for the thermal image to be stored in the non-volatile memory. If set
to “YES”, the stored value will be the initial thermal image value used when the unit is booted; if set to “NO”, the
initial thermal image value is zero.
There are independent settings, commands and outputs.
 Nodes:
 Phases: PROT/PTTR
 Neutral: PROT/GPTTR
 Commands:
 “DOrdIn”: Resetting to zero of thermal image value.
 Outputs: Table 55 shows the phase function’s output data and Table 56 shows ground function’s output data.
 Thermal Image X Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up. Where X is phase or ground.
 Thermal Image X Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped. Where X is phase or ground.
 Thermal Image X Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked. Where X
is phase or ground.
3
Available from firmware version 5.17.15.3 and ICD 6.1.13.29

User Manual 113
Table 54 Thermal image settings

PTTREna Enabled NO / YES Boolean
ConsTms1 Heating constant (s) 30 18000 5 int32
ConsTms2 Cooling constant (s) 30 18000 5 int32
AlmVal Alarm threshold (%) 50 100 1 float32
TripVal Trip threshold (%) 50 100 1 float32
RepVal Reset threshold (%) 50 95 1 float32
Artg (ARtg in Ed2) Start current (A) 0,1 150,0 0,01 float32
LogInIn Init input uint32
PTTREna General trip NO / YES Boolean
ValStore Calculus Store NO / YES Boolean
Table 55 Phase Thermal image function outputs

Thermal Image Phase Start Str general
Thermal Image Phase Trip Op general
Thermal Image Phase Status StEna stVal
Table 56 Neutral Thermal image function outputs

Thermal Image Ground Start Str general
Thermal Image Ground Trip Op general
Thermal Image Ground Status StEna stVal
3.3.11.1 Calculation Example

Figure 71 shows the trip times according to different heating constants.
Figure 72 shows an example of heating curves with a 3 minute time constant for I/I0 = 1 and for I/I0 = 2
Figure 71 Trip times
Figure 72 Heating curve example

User Manual 114
Figure 73 shows an example of a cooling curve with 3-minute constant.

Figure 73 Cooling curve example
Examples: Combined examples of cooling and heating

Supposing that it is heated with I/I0 =1 for 200sec, I/I0 =2 for the next 200 sec (without tripping) and, as of that point,
it returns indefinitely to I/I0 = 1 (both with 3 minute time constants):
2. Supposing that it is heated with I/I0 =0.5 for 200sec, I/I0 =1.5 until reaching 100%, at which point the trip is
produced, as of that point, it cools with I/I0 = 0 (both with 3 minute time constants):

User Manual 115
3.3.12 Undercurrent
There are two independent undercurrent units.
They employ the phases’ fundamental measurements. The unit picks up when the current falls below the setting and
drops out when the current rises above 105% of the setting.
The pickup is generated for each phase, regardless of the setting “Operation type”. However, the unit’s trip takes the
operation type into account.
The settings of each of these units are:

 “All (A,B,C)”. The unit trips when all the phases meet the undercurrent conditions
 “Any (A,B,C)”. The unit trips when at least one of the phases meets the undercurrent conditions
 Start value (A). Set in secondary amps. It indicates the current value for which the function is activated.
Table 57 Undercurrent settings

PTUCEna Enabled NO / YES enum
All (A,B,C) (1)
Any (A,B,C)(2)
StrVal Start value (A) 0,02 10 0,01 float32
There are independent settings, commands and outputs in each unit.
 Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/PTUC1
 Unit 2: PROT/PTUC2
 Commands:

User Manual 116

 TUC1 phase X Start. Indicates that the unit's phase has picked up. It is independent for each phase and does
not consider the setting “Operation type”.
 TUC1 phase Start. Pickup of at least one phase. Indicates that at least one of the unit's phases has picked
up. It does not take into account the setting “Operation type”.
 TUC1 Start. Taking into account the setting “Operation type”, it indicates that the unit has picked up.
 TUC1 Trip. Taking into account the setting “Operation type”, it indicates that the unit has tripped.
 Undercurrent Unit 1 Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked. This is
Table 58 Phase undercurrent function outputs
PTUC1 Signals PTUC2 Signals Data Attribute

TUC1 phase A Start TUC2 phase A Start Str phsA
TUC1 phase B Start TUC2 phase B Start Str phsB
TUC1 phase C Start TUC2 phase C Start Str phsC
TUC1 Start TUC2 Start StrUC general
TUC1 Trip TUC2 Trip OpUC general
Undercurrent Unit 1 Status Undercurrent Unit 2 Status StEna stVal
TUC1 phase Start TUC2 phase Start Str general
3.3.13 Stub bus

Stub bus protection is an instantaneous overcurrent unit, but it order for it to be activated, the switch needs to be open.
This function is useful in breaker and a half configurations. It can be used as a fixed time overcurrent unit with its own
settings or any of the units available can be used with a logic which ensures that they are continuously blocked until the
line switch is opened.
The settings used are as follows:

 Phase threshold (A): It is set as secondary amperes. It indicates the phase current value for which the function is
activated.
 Phase Delay Time (ms): Indicates the time during which the conditions for tripping the phase function must be
met.
 Neutral threshold (A): It is set as secondary amperes. It indicates the neutral current value for which the function
is activated.
 Neutral Delay Time (ms): Indicates the time during which the conditions for tripping must be met.
 Blocking input: Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the function.
Table 59 Stub Bus function settings

PhStrVal Phase threshold (A) 0.02 200 0.01 float32
PhOpTmms Phase Delay Time (ms) 0 600000 10 uint32
NStrVal Neutral threshold (A) 0.02 200 0.001 float32
NOpTmms Neutral Delay Time (ms) 0 600000 10 uint32
There are independent settings, inputs, commands and outputs in each unit:
 Node: PROT/PSTB
 Settings. There are 6 settings tables. For details, see Table 59.

User Manual 117
 Logic inputs:
 89 Open/closed input. It indicates the disconnector status
 Commands:
 Stub Bus phase x Start. Indicates that the stub protection is started up by a phase. It is independent for each
phase.
 Stub Bus neutral Start. Indicates that the stub protection is started up by the neutral.
 Stub Bus phase X Trip. Indicates that the stub protection is tripped by a phase. It is independent for each
phase.
 Stub Bus neutral Trip. Indicates that the stub protection is tripped by the neutral.
 Stub Bus Start. Indicates that the stub protection is started up by a phase or by the neutral.
 Stub Bus Trip. Indicates that the stub protection is tripped by a phase or by the neutral.
 Stub Bus Status. Indicates whether the stub protection is enabled or not.
 "Disconnector 1 Status (DI) = OPEN". It is the general status of the disconnector (SXWI)
Table 60 Stub Bus function outputs.

Stub Bus phase A Start Str phsA
Stub Bus phase B Start Str phsB
Stub Bus phase C Start Str phsC
Stub Bus neutral Start Str neutral (neut in Ed2)
Stub Bus phase A Trip Op phsA
Stub Bus phase B Trip Op phsB
Stub Bus phase C Trip Op phsC
Stub Bus neutral Trip Op neutral (neut in Ed2)
Stub Bus Start Str general
Stub Bus Trip Op general
Stub Bus Status StEna general
Figure 74 Stub Bus function diagram

User Manual 118
3.3.13.1 Differential Stub bus

In the 52 ½ configuration, a differential stub bus protection is available, but in order for it to be activated, the
disconnector needs to be open.
With the function enabled by setting, it is only active when the 3 phases of the disconnector are open
With the disconnector open at one end, the protection is affected:
 The phase measurements of the local end are zero; therefore, the measures sent to the remote end are zero.
 The line differential of the end with the disconnector open does not trip
 It doesn´t allow direct trip commands from the other end.
It is calculated on each of the phases and on 3I0. The differential current and restraint of the two breakers are used,
following the curve of Figure 75.
𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓 = |𝐼𝐵𝑟1 + 𝐼𝐵𝑟2 |
|𝐼𝐵𝑟1 | + |𝐼𝐵𝑟2 |
𝐼𝑝𝑎𝑠𝑜 =
2
Where
𝐼𝐵𝑟1 breaker 1 current
𝐼𝐵𝑟2 breaker 2 current
Figure 75 Stub differential protection curve with 2 slopes
Idifferential
Trip zone
2
Sensitivity 1
Irestraint
Ires1 Ires2
There are two independent units for phases and neutral (3I0) with settings, commands and outputs:
 Phases: Node DIF/PSTB

 Neutral: Node NDIF/PSTB
Table 61 shows the settings of each unit:

 Sensitivity (p.u.): Indicates the minimum value of the pickup of the differential characteristic in p.u. of rated
current.
 Rest.current step 1 (p.u.): Indicates the restraint current for which the slope 1 starts in p.u. of rated current.
 Rest.current step 2 (p.u.): Indicates the restraint current for which the slope 2 starts in p.u. of rated current
 Slope 1 (%): Indicates the value of the slope 1.
 Slope 2 (%): Indicates the value of the slope 2.
 Delay time (ms): Indicates the time during which the conditions for the tripping of the function must be met.

User Manual 119
 Blocking input: Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the function.
 General trip: General trip. Indicates if this unit produces general trip or not. For additional details, see the section
 Enable Events record: Allows the generation of protection events associated to the function. If set to “NO”, the
Outputs: Table 62 and Table 63 show the output data of the function.
 Phase unit:
 Start Stub diff. X. Indicates that the differential stub protection is started up by a phase. It is independent for
each phase.
 Trip Stub diff. X. Indicates that the differential stub protection is tripped up by a phase. It is independent for
each phase.
 Diff Phases stub status. Enabled and not blocked.
 Neutral unit:
 Start Stub diff.Neutro. Indicates that the differential stub protection is started up by neutral.
 Trip Stub diff.Neutro. Indicates that the differential stub protection is tripped up by neutral.
 Diff Neutral stub status. Enabled and not blocked.
Every unit has blocking commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function blocking and unblocking. Only acts when the function is enabled.
Table 61 Differential stub bus function settings

Ena Enabled 0 1 1 NO / YES Booleano
LoSet Sensitivity (p.u.) 0,1 10 0,01 float
RstA1 Current step 1 (p.u.) 0 10 0,01 float
RstA2 Current step 2 (p.u.) 0 10 0,01 float
Slope1 Slope 1 (%) 5 100 1 float
Slope2 Slope 2 (%) 5 200 1 float
OpDlTmms Aditional Time (ms) 0 60000 1 float
LogInBlk Blocking input -1 8388607 1 uint32
GenTrip General Trip 0 1 1 NO / YES Booleano
MaskEna Enable Events Record 0 1 1 NO / YES Booleano
Table 62 Phase differential stub bus output.

Diff Phases stub status StEna general
Start Stub diff.A Str phsA
Start Stub diff.B Str phsB
Start Stub diff.C Str phsC
Trip diff stub A Op phsA
Trip diff stub B Op phsB
Trip diff stub C Op phsC
Table 63 Neutral differential stub bus output.

Diff Neutral stub status StEna general StEna general
Start Stub diff.Neutro Str neutral Str neut
Trip diff stub Neutral Op neutral Op neut

User Manual 120
3.4 VOLTAGE UNITS
3.4.1 General description

When enabled and unblocked, the overvoltage units act when the setting value is exceed during the programmed time.
In order to reset, the voltage must fall below the pickup value return percentage. For example, if the pickup threshold is
50V and the reset percentage is 10%, the unit must register voltage above 50V in order to pickup and voltage below 45V
in order to reset (50-0.1 50).
When enabled and unblocked, the undervoltage units act when the voltage is inferior to the setting value during the
programmed time. In order to reset, the voltage must exceed the pickup value return percentage. For example, if the
pickup threshold is 50V and the reset percentage is 10%, the unit must register voltage below 50V in order to pickup and
voltage above 55V in order to reset (50+0.1 50).
The voltage units are not directional.
The voltage unit’s general settings are available in the PROT/PVGE1 node (return percentages and VO measurement
type):
 Phase overV drop out (%). Indicates the pickup setting percentage below which the voltage must fall in order that
the instantaneous and timed phased units reset.
 Phase underV drop out (%). Indicates the pickup setting percentage above which the voltage must rise in order
that the instantaneous and timed phased units reset.
 3V2 drop out (%). Indicates the pickup setting percentage below which the voltage must fall in order that the
instantaneous and timed V2 units reset.
 3VO drop out (%). Indicates the pickup setting percentage below which the voltage must fall in order that the
instantaneous and timed VO units reset.
 3VO Operating quantity. Indicates the measurement used for the VO overvoltage:
 Calculated: The 3 V0 measurement is used, i.e., the vector sum of the 3 ground to earth phases.
3V0=Va+Vb+Vc
 Measured: The measurement from the transformer configured as Vn is used.
Table 64 General voltage settings

RepValOVp Phase overV drop out (%) 50 99 1 float32
RepValUVp Phase underV drop out (%) 101 110 1 float32
RepValOV2 3V2 drop out (%) 50 99 1 float32
RepValOV0 3VO drop out (%) 50 99 1 float32
Calculated (0)
SelV0 3VO Operating quantity enum
Measured (1)
3.4.1.1 Instantaneous characteristics

When enabled and unblocked, the unit acts when the setting value is exceed during the programmed time.

 Operation type. Consult in each unit.
 Start value (V). Indicates the voltage value (in secondary volts) at which the function is activated.

User Manual 121
Table 65 Instantaneous voltage unit settings

PIOVEna Enabled NO / YES enum
Standard (0)
Vphase-ground FUND(1)
Optype Operation type Vphase-ground FUND(2) enum
Vphase-ground RMS (3)
Vphase-phase RMS (4)
StrVal Start value (V) 0,5 200 0,01 float32
3.4.1.2 Timed characteristics

The different curve options are shown in the curve appendix.
The timed unit can be configured with a minimum of response time, that is, a limit that prevents any unit from tripping
below a minimum time when the trip time corresponding to the curve in use is met. This avoids timed trips which are
quicker than the instantaneous trips. It is configured with additional time setting, so that if it set to zero, there is no
such limit.

 Start value (V). Set in secondary volts. Indicates the voltage value at which the function is activated.
 Operation type. Consult in each unit.
 Operating Curve Type Indicates the type of curve selected from the options:
 ANSI-EI Extreme. Inverse (1)
 ANSI-MI Very inverse (2)
 ANSI-I Normal inverse(3)
 ANSI-MODI Moderately inverse (4)
 IEC-I Normal inverse (9) or Inverse (11)
 IEC-MI Very inverse (10)
 IEC-EI Extreme. Inverse (12)
 IEC-IC Short inverse (13)
 IEC-IL Long inverse (14)
 IEC-MIEs Very inverse special (50)
 Definite time (49)
 Time dial. Indicates the time curve within the selected characteristic.
 Delay/minimum time (ms). It has a different functionality depending on the type of curve selected:

User Manual 122
 When the selected curve is a definite time, it indicates the time during which the conditions for the tripping of the
function must be met.
 In the rest of the curve, it indicates the minimum response time. i.e., in order for a trip to be produced, the time
used will be greater between this setting and the time associated to the curve.
Table 66 Timed voltage unit settings

PTVEna Enabled NO / YES enum
Standard (0)
Vphase-ground FUND (1)
Optype Operation type Vphase-ground FUND (2) enum
Vphase-ground RMS (3)
Vphase-phase RMS (4)
StrVal Start value (V) 0,5 200 0,01 float32
ANSI-EI Extreme. Inverse (1)
ANSI-MI Very inverse (2)
ANSI-I Normal inverse(3)
ANSI-MODI Moderately inverse (4)
IEC-I Normal inverse (9) / Inverse (11)
IEC-MI Very inverse (10)
IEC-EI Extreme. Inverse (12)
TmVCrv Operating curve type IEC-IC Short inverse (13) enum
IEC-IL Long inverse (14)
IEC-MIEs Very inverse special (50)
User curves 1 (33)
User curves 2 (34)
User curves 3 (35)
User curves 4 (36)
Definite time (49)
TmMult Time dial 0,05 30,0 0,01 float32
OpDlTmm
Delay/minimum time (ms) 0 600000 10 int32
s
3.4.2 Phase overvoltage

The phase overvoltage acts on the phase voltage transformers. If the unit is configured with phase to ground voltages,
the protection is wired with phase to ground measurements (Va, Vb and Vc), while if it is configured with phase to phase
voltages, the protection is wired with phase to phase measurements (Vab, Vbc and Vca).
The return percentage can be configured by the user in the PROT/PVGE1 node.
The setting “Operation type” allows for a selection to be made from among the following:
 “Vphase-ground FUND”. Acts with the phase-ground voltage and fundamental value without harmonics.
 “Vphase-phase FUND”. Acts with the phase-phase voltage and fundamental value without harmonics.

User Manual 123
 “Vphase-ground RMS”. Acts with the phase-ground voltage and rms value with harmonics.
 “Vphase-phase RMS”. Acts with the phase-phase voltage and rms value with harmonics.
 “Standard”. Acts with the phase-ground voltage and fundamental value without harmonics.
If the PROT/TVTR voltage phase setting indicates that at least one of the phase-phase voltage options, the operation
type can only be selected as VFAs-phase Fund or Vphase-phase RMS. If any other type is selected, the unit will
correct itself internally.
The return percentage is user-configurable (PVGE1).
 Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/PIOV1
 Unit 2: PROT/PIOV2
 Commands:
 Outputs: Table 67 shows the function’s output data
 IOV1 Start phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has picked up. It is independent for each phase. Where X
is the phase.
 IOV1 Trip phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has tripped. It is independent for each phase. Where X is
the phase.
 IOV1 Phase Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked. This is general
 IOV1 phase Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up
 IOV1 phase Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
Table 67 Instantaneous phase overvoltage function outputs
PIOV1 Signals PIOV2 Signals Data Attribute

IOV1 Start phase A IOV2 Start phase A Str phsA
IOV1 Start phase B IOV2 Start phase B Str phsB
IOV1 Start phase C IOV2 Start phase C Str phsC
IOV1 Trip phase A IOV2 Trip phase A Op phsA
IOV1 Trip phase B IOV2 Trip phase B Op phsB
IOV1 Trip phase C IOV2 Trip phase C Op phsC
IOV1 Phase Status IOV2 Phase Status StEna stVal
IOV1 Phase Start IOV2 Phase Start Str general
IOV1 Phase Trip IOV2 Phase Trip Op general
3.4.2.2 Timed
There is a single timed unit, which is independent for each of the phases.
 “Vphase-ground FUND”. Acts with the phase-ground voltage and fundamental value without harmonics.
 “Vphase-phase FUND”. Acts with the phase-phase voltage and fundamental value without harmonics.
 “Vphase-ground RMS”. Acts with the phase-ground voltage and rms value with harmonics.
 “Vphase-phase RMS”. Acts with the phase-phase voltage and rms value with harmonics.
 “Standard”. Acts with the phase-ground voltage and fundamental.

User Manual 124
If the PROT/TVTR voltage phase setting indicates that at least one of the phase-phase voltage options, the operation
type can only be selected as VFAs-phase Fund or Vphase-phase RMS. If any other type is selected, the unit will
correct itself internally.
There are settings, commands and outputs.
 Nodes: PROT/PTOV1
 Commands:
 TOV Start phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has picked up. It is independent for each phase. Where X
is the phase.
 TOV Trip phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has tripped. It is independent for each phase. Where X is
the phase.
 TOV Phase Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked. This is general
 TOV1 phase Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up
 TOV1 phase Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
Table 68 Timed phase overvoltage function outputs

TOV Start phase A Str phsA
TOV Start phase B Str phsB
TOV Start phase C Str phsC
TOV Trip phase A Op phsA
TOV Trip phase B Op phsB
TOV Trip phase C Op phsC
TOV Phase Status StEna stVal
TOV Phase Start Str general
TOV Phase Trip Op general
3.4.3 Zero sequence overvoltage

There is a timed and an instantaneous unit.
The following can be configured in the PROT/PVGE1 node:
 The measurement used between Vn transformer measurement or the vector sum of the three voltage phases (3
V0).
 The return percentage is user-configurable (PVGE1).
The setting “Operation type” is not used, as the fundamental frequency measurement is always used.
There is one unit.
It has independent settings, commands and outputs.
 PROT/GPIOV1 node
 Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For details, see Table 64 and Table 65.
 Commands:

User Manual 125

 GIOV1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 GIOV1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 IOV V0 Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 69 Instantaneous zero sequence overvoltage function outputs

GIOV1 Start Str neut
GIOV1 Trip Op neut
IOV V0 Status StEna stVal
3.4.3.2 Timed
There is one timed unit.
 Nodes: PROT/GPTOV1
 Commands:
 GTOV1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 GTOV1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 TOV (V0) Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 70 Timed zero sequence overvoltage function outputs

GTOV1 Start Str neut
GTOV1 Trip Op neut
TOV (V0) Status StEna stVal
3.4.4 Negative sequence overvoltage

There is a timed and an instantaneous unit.
Employs 3 times the negative sequence as a measurement:
3 · V2 = (Va + a2 · Vb + a · Vc) In which a = 1|120º
The calculation of the sequence takes into phase succession order setting (ABC/ACB).
The setting “Operation type” is not used, as the fundamental frequency measurement is always used.
There is one unit.
It has independent settings, commands and outputs.
 Node: PROT/UNPIOV1
 Commands:

User Manual 126
 UNIOV1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 UNIOV1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 IOV V2 Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 71 Instantaneous V2 overvoltage function outputs

UNIOV1 Start Str general
UNIOV1 Trip Op general
IOV V2 Status StEna stVal
3.4.4.2 Timed
There is one timed unit.
 Node: PROT/UNPTOV1
 Commands:
 UNTOV1 Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 UNTOV1 Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
 TOV V2 Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 72 Timed V2 overvoltage function outputs

UNTOV1 Start Str general
UNTOV1 Trip Op general
TOV V2 Status StEna stVal
3.4.5 Phase undervoltage

The phase undervoltage acts on the phase voltage transformers. If the unit is configured with phase to ground voltages,
the protection is wired with phase to ground measurements (Va, Vb and Vc), while if it is configured with phase to phase
voltages, the protection is wired with phase to phase measurements (Vab, Vbc and Vca).
The setting “Operation type”allows for a selection to be made from among the following:
 “Standard”. Acts with the phase-ground voltage and fundamental

 “Vphase-ground FUND”. Acts with the phase-ground voltage and fundamental value without harmonics
 “Vphase-phase FUND”. Acts with the phase-phase voltage and fundamental value without harmonics
 “Vphase-ground RMS”. Acts with the phase-ground voltage and rms value with harmonics
 “Vphase-phase RMS”. Acts with the phase-phase voltage and rms value with harmonics
The return percentage is user-configurable (PVGE1).

User Manual 127
 Nodes:
 Unit 1: PROT/PIUV1
 Unit 2: PROT/PIUV2
 Commands:
 IUV1 Start phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has picked up. It is independent for each phase. Where X
is the phase.
 IUV1 Trip phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has tripped. It is independent for each phase. Where X is
the phase.
 IUV1 Phase Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked. This is general
 IUV1 phase Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up
 IUV1 phase Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
Table 73 Instantaneous phase undervoltage function outputs
PIUV1 Signals PIUV2 Signals Data Attribute

IUV1 Start phase A IUV2 Start phase A Str phsA
IUV1 Start phase B IUV2 Start phase B Str phsB
IUV1 Start phase C IUV2 Start phase C Str phsC
IUV1 Trip phase A IUV2 Trip phase A Op phsA
IUV1 Trip phase B IUV2 Trip phase B Op phsB
IUV1 Trip phase C IUV2 Trip phase C Op phsC
IUV1 Phase Status IUV2 Phase Status StEna stVal
IUV1 Phase Start IUV2 Phase Start Str general
IUV1 Phase Trip IUV2 Phase Trip Op general
3.4.5.2 Timed
There is a single timed unit, which is independent for each of the phases.
 “Standard”. Acts with the phase-ground voltage and fundamental

 “Vphase-ground FUND”. Acts with the phase-ground voltage and fundamental value without harmonics
 “Vphase-phase FUND”. Acts with the phase-phase voltage and fundamental value without harmonics
 “Vphase-ground RMS”. Acts with the phase-ground voltage and rms value with harmonics
 “Vphase-phase RMS”. Acts with the phase-phase voltage and rms value with harmonics
 Nodes: PROT/PTUV1
 Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For details, see Table 65and Table 58.
 Commands:
 TUV1 Start phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has picked up. It is independent for each phase. Where X
is the phase.
 TUV1 Trip phase X. Indicates that the unit's phase has tripped. It is independent for each phase. Where X is
the phase.

User Manual 128
 TUV Phase Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked. This is general
 TUV1 phase Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up
 TUV1 phase Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
Table 74 Timed phase undervoltage function outputs

TUV1 Start phase A Str phsA
TUV1 Start phase B Str phsB
TUV1 Start phase C Str phsC
TUV1 Trip phase A Op phsA
TUV1 Trip phase B Op phsB
TUV1 Trip phase C Op phsC
TUV Phase Status StEna stVal
TUV1 Phase Start Str general
TUV1 Phase Trip Op general
3.4.6 Minimum voltage

It analyzes the voltages of the two sides of the breaker, generating a trip when both voltages are below the threshold
during the set time
With the "General Trip" setting, the breaker opening command can be generated. The trip generated by this unit is not
reclosabled.
In the 52 ½ configuration, two units are available, one for each synchronism voltage (Vs1 and Vs2). In both units the
voltage of the A side is the one selected in the synchronism (node RSYN):
 Vsyn1: Node VS/PIUV1

 Vsyn2: Node VS/PIUV2
Table 75 shows the settings used in this function:
 Enabled. Indicates whether the function is enabled or not

 Threshold A (V). Indicates the voltage value (in secondary volts) below which is considered undervoltage on the
A side.
 Threshold B (V). Indicates the voltage value (in secondary volts) below which is considered undervoltage on the
B side.
 Delay time (ms). Indicates the time during which the conditions for the tripping of the function must be met
Outputs: Table 76 shows the function’s output data of the two units. The signals are the same for both units
 Low voltage status U1. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
 VSPIUV Start A – U1. Indicates that the voltage on the A side is below the “Threshold A” setting.
 VSPIUV Start B – U1. Indicates that the voltage on the B side is below the “Threshold B” setting.
 VSPIUV Start U 1. Indicates that the voltage of both sides is below the threshold setting.
 VSPIUV Trip U 1. Indicates that the voltage of both sides is below the threshold setting during the “Delay time”
setting.
Each unit has blocking commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function blocking and unblocking. Only acts when the function is enabled.

User Manual 129
Table 75 Minimum voltage settings

AStrVal Threshold A (V) 0,5 200 0,01 float32
BStrVal Threshold B (V) 0,5 200 0,01 float32
GenTrip Blocking input NO / YES Boolean
LogInBlk General Trip int32
Table 76 Minimum voltage outputs.
VS/PTUV1 VS/PTUV2 Data Attribute

Low voltage status U1 Low voltage status U2 StEna general
VSPIUV Start A – U1 VSPIUV Start A – U2 StrA general
VSPIUV Start B – U1 VSPIUV Start B – U2 StrB general
VSPIUV Start U 1 VSPIUV Start U 2 Str general
VSPIUV Trip U 1 VSPIUV Trip U 2 Op general
3.5 FREQUENCY UNITS
The frequency is measured each cycle and refreshed each half cycle, as shown in Figure 76.
Figure 76 Frequency Calculation
The voltage used in the frequency measurement is calculated as "2·Va-Vb-Vc". The algorithm is executed in the event of the
voltage registering zero. The frequency is calculated if the voltage measurement is greater than 5V.
Both the positive and negative registers are measured, although the frequency measurement is carried out for complete
cycles.
3.5.1 Frequency
This function is composed of 8 steps, which are programmable as maximum or minimum frequencies.
The function’s node, PROT/PTGF1, has independent settings for each step and common settings for all.
The common settings for all steps are as follows:
 Minimum voltage (V). Indicates the minimum voltage value below which the frequency protection does no act,
the unit is not permitted to pickup.
 Number of cycles (Start). Indicates the number of cycles during which the frequency conditions necessary for the
unit to pickup must be met.
 Number of cycles (Reset). Indicates the number of cycles during which the drop conditions necessary for the unit
to reset must be met in the event of the unit's not having tripped.
 OverFreq. Reset time (ms). Once tripped by overfrequency, this is the time during which the reset conditions
must be met in order to clear the trip from the unit. It is applied to all the steps configured as overfrequency.

User Manual 130
 UnderFreq. Reset time (ms). Once tripped by underfrequency, this is the time during which the reset conditions
must be met in order to clear the trip from the unit. It is applied to all the steps configured as underfrequency.
The independent settings for each of the 8 steps are:
 Enabled. Indicates whether the step is enabled or not.

 Start value (Hz). Indicates the frequency value at which the function is activated.
 Function type. Indicates whether its acts on overfrequency or underfrequency.
 Blocking Input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the step.
The form in which it acts varies in accordance with type of step selected.
 Minimum frequency. Each step picks up when the frequency falls below the set value during a number of cycles
equal or higher than the “No. of pickup cycles” setting. Once it picks up, the programmed time must elapse in
order for a trip to be produced. If the unit has tripped, it drops out if the frequency is correct during the
underfrequency reset time. If it has picked up but has not tripped, it drops out if the frequency is correct during
reset cycles.
 Maximum frequency. Each step picks up when the frequency exceeds the set value during a number of cycles
equal or higher than the “No. of pickup cycles” setting. Once it picks up, the programmed time must elapse in
order for a trip to be produced. If the unit has tripped, it drops out if the frequency is correct during the
overfrequency reset time. If it has picked up but has not tripped, it drops out if the frequency is correct during
reset cycles.
 Nodes: PROT/PTGF1
 Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function blocking and unblocking. It only acts on the enabled steps. If acts on the 8 steps
 “DOrdFminB”. Blocking and unblocking of the steps configured as minimum frequency. It only acts on the
enabled steps.
 “DOrdFmaxB”. Blocking and unblocking of the steps configured as maximum frequency. It only acts on the
enabled steps.
 “DOrdFL1Bl”. Blocking and unblocking of step 1. It only acts if the step is enabled
 “DOrdFL2Bl”… “DOrdFL8Bl”. As above, but acts on steps 2 to 8.
 Outputs: Table 78 shows the function’s output data. They are independent for each step
 Level X Frequency Start. Indicates that the step has picked up. It is independent for each step.
 Level X Frequency Trip. Indicates that the step has tripped. It is independent for each step.
 Level X Frequency Status. Indicates the step’s status. Active when enabled and not blocked. Independent for
each step.

User Manual 131
Table 77 General frequency protection settings
Data Parameter Min Max Step Remarks Type

BlkValV Minimum voltage (V) 15 200 1 float32
StrNumCyc Number of cycles (Start) 3 15 1 int32
RepNumCyc Number of cycles (Reset) 0 10 1 int32
OFRsDlTmms OverFreq. Reset time (ms) 0 600000 10 int32
UFRsDlTmms UnderFreq. Reset time (ms) 0 600000 10 int32
PTGFEna1 Step 1 enabled NO / YES Boolean
StrVal1 Step 1. Start value (Hz) 45 65 0,01 float32
OpDlTmms1 Step 1. Delay time(ms) 0 600000 10 int32
StTyp1 Step 1. Function type Maximum/Minimum enum
LogInBlk1 Step 1. Blocking input uint32
PTGFEna2 Step 2. Enabled NO / YES Boolean
PTGFEna6 Step 6. enabled NO / YES Boolean
Table 78 Frequency function outputs

Level 1 Frequency Start Str1 general
Level 1 Frequency Trip Op1 general
Level 1 Frequency Status StEna1 stVal
Same for the rest of the steps
Level 8 Frequency Start Str8 general
Level 8 Frequency Trip OP8 general
Level 8 Frequency Status StEna8 stVal

User Manual 132
3.5.2 Frequency rate of change

This unit has 8 steps. In each step, a relay is activated if the frequency variation per time unit is higher than the set
value. The variation can represent a reduction and/or an increase in the frequency, depending on the setting
“Operation type”.
The function’s node, PROT/PFRC1, has independent settings for each step and common settings for all.
The common settings for all steps are as follows:
 Enabled. Indicates whether the unit is enabled or not.

 Operation type. Indicates the whether the frequency variation is a reduction (Negative), and increase (Positive)
or both (Negative and positive).
 Minimum current level (A). Indicates the minimum current value below which it does no act, the unit is not
permitted to pickup.
 Number of cycles (Start). Indicates the number of cycles during which the conditions necessary for the unit to
pickup must be met.
 Number of cycles (Reset). Indicates the number of cycles during which the drop conditions necessary for the unit
to reset must be met in the event of the unit's not having tripped.
 Reset delay time (ms). Once tripped, this is the time during which the reset conditions must be met in order to
clear the trip from the unit.
 Blocking Input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the unit.
 Minimum allowed voltage (V). The setting as used in the frequency protection (PTGF1). Indicates the minimum
voltage value.
The independent settings for each of the 8 steps are:
 Supervision f max. Indicates the maximum frequency above with the frequency rate of change is not measured.
 f start value (Hz/s). Indicates the frequency variation value at which the function is activated.
 Trip lock. Selects the signal which, when active, locks the activation of the function; so, once activated, the signal
is kept until the lock signal and the rate of change signal are deactivated.
 Nodes: PROT/PFRC1
 Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function blocking and unblocking. It only acts on the enabled steps. If acts on the 8 steps
 Outputs: Table 80 shows the function’s output data. They are independent for each step
 ROCOF df/dt Status. It is active when enabled and not blocked. Common for all steps.
 Level X df/dt Start. Indicates that the step has picked up. It is independent for each step. Where X indicates
the level from 1 to 8.
 Level X df/dt Trip. Indicates that the step has tripped. It is independent for each step. Where X indicates the
level from 1 to 8.

User Manual 133
Table 79 Frequency rate of change settings
Data Parameter Min. Max Step Remarks Type

PFRCEna Enabled NO / YES Boolean
Negative(0)
Positive (1)
Optype Operation type uint32
Negative and
Positive (2)
BlkValA Minimum current level (A) 0 100,0 0,1 float32
StrNumCyc Number of cycles (Start) 3 15 1 int32
RepNumCyc Number of cycles (Reset) 0 10 1 int32
RsDlTmms Reset delay time (ms) 0 600000 10 int32
BlkValHz1 Step 1: Supervision f max 40 70 0,01 float32
StrVal1 Step 1: f start value (Hz/s) 0,20 10 0,05 float32
OpDlTmms1 Step 1:Delay time (ms) 0 2000 10 int32
LogInTrLck1 Step 1: Trip Lock uint32
OpDlTmms2 Step 2: Delay time (ms) 0 2000 10 int32
LogInTrLck2 Step 2:Trip Lock uint32

OpDlTmms8 Step 8: Delay time (ms) 0 2000 10 int32
LogInTrLck8 Step 8: Trip Lock uint32
Table 80 Frequency rate of change function outputs

ROCOF df/dt Status StEna stVal
Level 1 df/dt Start Str1 general
Level 1 df/dt Trip Op1 general
Level 8 df/dt Start Str8 general
Level 8 df/dt Trip OP8 general
General operation.
The function is only effective for frequencies inferior to a threshold called “maximum monitoring frequency”, currents
greater than the threshold called “minimum current” and voltages greater than the minimum monitoring threshold:
 Minimum monitoring current. The maximum phase current is compared to this setting. If the minimum current
circulating in all the phases is inferior to the setting, the frequency rate of change unit is not allowed to pickup.
When a current is greater than the set threshold appears in at least one of the phases, the relay waits for 10
cycles before running the frequency rate of change function.
 Minimum monitoring voltage. If the phase B voltage is inferior to the setting, the frequency rate of change unit is
not allowed to pickup. When the voltage exceeds the set threshold, the relay waits for 10 cycles before running
the frequency rate of change function.
The frequency is measured each cycle and reloaded every half cycle, as shown in Figure 76.
The algorithm stores the periods of the signal’s last 4 cycles and calculates the frequency rate of change by comparing
the current cycle’s frequency measurement with the measurement taken from 4 cycles previously, taking into account the
time lapse between both (Figure 77).
df/dt = (f1 − f5)/(T1 + T2 + T3 + T4)
In which:

User Manual 134
f5 =frequency measurement taken 4 cycles previously
f4 =frequency measurement taken 3 cycles previously T4 period of the 4th cycle starting from the end
f3 =frequency measurement taken 2 cycles previously T3 period of the 3rd cycle starting from the end
f2 =frequency measurement taken 1 cycle previously T2 period of the 2nd cycle starting from the end
f1 =Last frequency measurement T1 period of the last cycle
This calculation is repeated, taking into account the measurements separated by two cycles in order to ensure that the
frequency has fallen during the entire period, i.e., to ensure that an incorrect measurement does not lead to a trip. Two
checks are carried out:
 the measurement of the current cycle against that of the cycle minus two cycles
df/dt2 = (fn − fn − 4)/(tn − tn − 4)
 the measurement of the cycle minus two cycles against that of the cycle minus four cycles
df/dt3 = (fn − 4 − fn − 8)/(tn − 4 − tn − 8)
Figure 77 Frequency rate of change calculation
For the unit to pickup, the frequency rate of change must be exceeded by an absolute value during the set number of
cycles. The pickup is only produced if the frequency rate of change/voltage rate of change value meets the criterion
selected in the setting “Operation type”:
 Negative. The frequency rate of change/voltage rate is negative, i.e., when the current frequency is inferior to
that measured 4 cycles previously.
 Positive. The frequency rate of change/voltage rate is positive, i.e., when the current frequency is greater than
that measured 4 cycles previously.
 Negative and Positive. Acts on frequency rate of change/voltage rate in both directions.
During the pickup process, one measurement is allowed to be out of the pickup range without restarting the process. For
example, if 3 cycles are required to cause a pickup, the threshold need only be exceeded 3 times from a total of 4
consecutive measurements.
In order for a trip to occur once the unit has picked up, the frequency rate of change measurement must remain between
the set frequency rate of change/voltage rate of change value and a reset value to the frequency rate of change/voltage
rate of change minus 0.05Hz/s during the set time.
In order for the unit to reset once it has picked up, the frequency rate of change/voltage rate of change measurement
must be detected as being 0.05Hz/s below the set value during the number of cycles programmes as reset cycles.
In order for the unit to reset once it has tripped, the frequency rate of change/voltage rate of change measurement must
be detected as being 0.05Hz/s below the set value during the reset time. Any sealing signals that have been configured
must register a value of zero in order for the trip to be deactivated.

User Manual 135
Figure 78 Frequency rate of change trip diagram
3.6 POWER UNITS
3.6.1 General
Using the voltage and current measurements, the real and reactive powers and the power factor are calculated. The
values obtained are used for the power protection functions.
The trip thresholds are programmed as a percentage of the rated apparent power, S = 3 · V · I, in which:
 Vn: rated phase to ground voltage (phase-ground) of the PROT/TVTR node.

 In: The rated phase current of the PROT/TCIN node.
The units’ reset threshold is configured in the PROT/PDOP1 node, ranging from 0.1% to 5%:
 P reset threshold (%). Indicates the reset threshold for the real power units.
 Q reset threshold (%). Indicates the reset threshold for the reactive power units.
 S reset threshold (%). Indicates the reset threshold for the apparent power units.
Table 81 Power units reset settings

RepValP P reset threshold (%) 0.1 5 0,1 float32
RepValQ Q reset threshold (%) 0.1 5 0,1 float32
RepValS S reset threshold (%) 0.1 5 0,1 float32
The power units’ settings are similar to each other. Each unit has independent settings:

 Start value (%). Indicates the percentage in relation to the rated power necessary for the unit to pickup.
 Blocking Input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the step.

User Manual 136
Table 82 Power unit settings

PDUPEna (minimum) Boolean
Enabled NO / YES
PDOPEna(maximum) Boolean
PcStrVal Start value (%) 1,0 200,0 0,1 float32
The settings, commands and outputs available are similar in all the units, with the exception of the node:
 Node: Indicated in each specific unit.

 Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function blocking and unblocking. Only acts if the unit is enabled.
 X Status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
 X Start. Indicates that the unit has picked up.
 X Trip. Indicates that the unit has tripped.
Where X indicates the Power protection unit.
Table 83 Power function outputs

X Status StEna stVal
X Start Str general
X Trip Op general
3.6.2 Minimum real power

This unit’s node is PROT/PDUP1.
It provides protection against excessive decreases in the generated power. It compares the real power with the minimum
power given by the setting. In the event of the generated power being inferior to the power established in the setting
during the programmed time, the protection trips the corresponding relay. Any reverse power will be considered as below
the minimum power threshold and will thus activate the function.
In order to reset, the power must exceed the pickup threshold plus the reset percentage. For example, if the reset
percentage is set at 2%, the unit will reset if the power exceeds the 102% of the pickup threshold.
The settings, commands and outputs available are indicated in section 3.6.1.

User Manual 137
Table 84 Minimum real power function outputs
Data Attribute Data Attribute

PDUP1 Signals
(Edition 1) (Edition 1) (Edition 2) (Edition 2)
Minimum P Start Str stVal Str general
Minimum P Trip Op stVal Op general
Minimum P Status StEna stVal StEna stVal
3.6.3 Maximum real power

There are two independent units, whose nodes are PROT/PDOP1 and PROT/PDOP2.
It provides protection against excessive increases in the power generated. It compares the real power with the maximum
power given by the setting. In the event of the generated power being greater than the power established in the setting
during the programmed time, the protection trips the corresponding relay.
In order to reset, the power must be inferior to the pickup threshold less the reset percentage. For example, if the reset
percentage is set at 2%, the unit will reset if the power is inferior to 98% of the pickup threshold.
Table 85 Maximum real power function outputs
Data (Edition Attribute Data Attribute

PDOP1 Signals PDOP2 Signals
1) (Edition 1) (Edition 2) (Edition 2)
High Maximum P Start Low Maximum P Start Str stVal Str general
High Maximum P Trip Low Maximum P Trip Op stVal Op general
Maximum P Level 1 Status Maximum P Level 2 Status StEna stVal StEna stVal
3.6.4 Real power inversion

The protection is activated when the real power flow is inverted (motorization of generators).
In order to act, the real power must be negative; in the event of the real power exceeding the set value during the
programmed time, the protection trips the corresponding relay.
In order to reset, the power must be inferior to the pickup threshold less the reset percentage.
For example, if the threshold is set at 100W, the unit will pickup as of a measured power of -100w. If the reset
percentage is set at 2%, the unit will reset when the power is below -98W (98% of set value).
Table 86 Real power inversion function outputs

High P Inversion Start Low P Inversion Start Str stVal Str general
High P Inversion Trip Low P Inversion Trip Op stVal Op general
P Inversion Level 1 Status P Inversion Level 2 Status StEna stVal StEna stVal
3.6.5 Reactive power inversion

The protection is activated when the reactive power flow is inverted (field loss in generators).
In order to act, the reactive power must be negative; in the event of the real power exceeding the set value during the
programmed time, the protection trips the corresponding relay.
In order to reset, the power must be inferior to the pickup threshold less the reset percentage.

User Manual 138
For example, if the threshold is set at 100W, the unit will pickup as of a measured power of -100w. If the reset
percentage is set at 2%, the unit will reset when the power is below -98W (98% of set value).
Table 87 Reactive power inversion function outputs

High Q Inversion Start Low Q Inversion Start Str stVal Str general
High Q Inversion Trip Low Q Inversion Trip Op stVal Op general
Q Inversion Level 1 Status Q Inversion Level 2 Status StEna stVal StEna stVal
3.6.6 Minimum apparent power

This unit’s node is PROT/PDUP2.
It provides protection against excessive decreases in the power generated. It compares the apparent power with the
minimum power given by the setting. In the event of the generated power being inferior to the power established in the
setting during the programmed time, the protection trips the corresponding relay.
In order to reset, the power must exceed the pickup threshold plus the reset percentage. For example, if the reset
percentage is set at 2%, the unit will reset if the power exceeds the 102% of the pickup threshold.
Table 88 Minimum apparent power function outputs
Data (Edition Attribute Data (Edition Attribute

Signal
1) (Edition 1) 2) (Edition 2)
Minimum S Start Str stVal Str general
Minimum S Trip Op stVal Op general
Minimum S Status StEna stVal StEna stVal
3.6.7 Maximum apparent power

It provides protection against excessive increases in the power generated. It compares the apparent power with the
maximum power given by the setting. In the event of the generated power being greater than the power established in
the setting during the programmed time, the protection trips the corresponding relay.
In order to reset, the power must be inferior to the pickup threshold less the reset percentage. For example, if the reset
percentage is set at 2%, the unit will reset if the power is inferior to 98% of the pickup threshold.
Table 89 Maximum apparent power function outputs

High Maximum S Start Low Maximum S Start Str stVal Str general
High Maximum S Trip Low Maximum S Trip Op stVal Op general
Maximum S Level 1 Status Maximum S Level 2 Status StEna stVal StEna stVal

User Manual 139
3.7 LOAD ENCROACHMENT
This unit specifies a functioning zone in which the phase-phase units of the distance functions are blocked (mho and
quadrilateral). Figure 79 shows this unit's diagram.
For the operation of the load encroachment, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
 The positive sequence impedance is between impedance margins (See Figure 79).
 The positive sequence current exceeds the threshold (setting).
The unit’s settings are as follows:

 Minimum I1 threshold (A). Indicates the minimum current positive sequence value necessary to activate the unit.
 Z forward (Ohm). Indicates the forward load zone impedance module.
 Positive angle Forward (º). Indicates the load zone's positive limit angle forward.
 Negative angle Forward (º). Indicates the load zone's negative limit angle forward.
 Z reverse (Ohm). Indicates the reverse load zone impedance module.
 Positive angle reverse (º). Indicates the load zone's positive limit angle backwards.
 Negative angle reverse (º). Indicates the load zone's negative limit angle backwards.
 Blocking input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the function.
It has independent settings, commands and outputs:
 Node: PROT/PLEC1
 Commands:
 Load Encroachment. Indicates that the unit is active.
 Load Encroachment Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 90 Load zone settings

LoEnEna Enabled NO / YES Boolean
BlkValI1 Minimum I1 threshold (A) 0,05 25 0,01 float32
FwRisLod Z forward (Ohm) 0,01 500 0,01 float32
FwAngLod Positive angle forward (º) 0 90 1 float32
FwNAngLod Negative angle forward (º) 270 359 1 float32
RvRisLod Z reverse (Ohm) 0,01 500 0,01 float32
RvAngLod Positive angle reverse (º) 90 180 1 float32
RvNAngLod Negative angle reverse (º) 180 270 1 float32
Table 91 Load zone function outputs

Load Encroachment Op general
Load Encroachment Status StEna stVal

User Manual 140
Figure 79 Load Zone Diagram
3.8 FUSE FAILURE
The measurement obtained from the half-cycle DFT is used to obtain results before the protection units are activated.
The fuse failure conditions are as follows:
 The three breakers are closed. (Open pole detector). Signals "Open pole (1 or 2)" and "3 open poles" of the scheme. If
the open pole detector is disabled, the three poles are considered closed.
 I1 positive sequence current is greater than 5% of the rated current. 4
 The increase in I1 positive sequence and the IN neutral current in relation to the current measured 1 cycle previously
must be less than 0.1A for 5A rated current or 0.02A for rated current 1A.
 The fault detection unit must be deactivated (Fault detection signal of the scheme).
 Distance units (mho or quadrilateral) and/or overcurrent units (phase, ground, earth system and unbalanced) have not
picked up.
 The angle difference between currents I1 and I0 and those of 1 cycle previous are less than 5º.
 The V1 positive sequence voltage, memorized 1 cycle previously, must exceed VFF and drop below 95% of VFF,
VFF = VN · 80% (V)
With VN as the rated phase to ground voltage (PROT/TVTR node).
If the function detects all the above conditions, or if the “Fuse Failure input” is activated, a fuse failure pickup signal is
produced and used to block the units in question (configurable).
These conditions must be met during a programmable time in order for the fuse failure trip to be activated. Once tripped, the
fuse fault is maintained until the V1 voltage rises above VFF.
If any of the overcurrent functions (phase, ground, earth system and unbalanced) or distance units have picked up or if
during the timeout the relay picks up at least one of these units, the fuse failure output is not activated as the situation is
considered a fault, not a fuse failure.
The fuse failure pickup and trip are also activated when the digital “Fuse Fail input” is activated independently of the
programmed time. The fuse failure is only deactivated when the input is deactivated.
If the “Fuse Fail input” input is activated, the synchrocheck unit is deactivated.
The fuse failure pickup can be used as a blocking signal for other functions by means of each function’s logic signals.
The overcurrent units have settings that configure their functioning in the event of a fuse failure, allowing the enabling of the
function, the inhibition of directional, etc.

 Delay time (ms). Indicates the time during which the conditions must be met in order for the trip to take place.
 Fuse Fail input. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates a fuse failure.
 FF input (B side-sinc1). It selects the signal which, when activated, indicates a fuse failure on breaker 1’s side B
synchronism.
4
From firmware version 5.19.15.7 and ICD version 6.3.1.4 can be set. In previous versions, it was fixed 5%.

User Manual 141
 FF input (B side-sinc2). It selects the signal which, when activated, indicates a fuse failure on breaker 2’s side B
synchronism.
 Minimum I1/Irated(%)4.Indicates the minimum value of I1 in relation to rated I. 4
 Enable Events record. Allows the generation of protection events associated to the function. If set to “NO”, the function’s
protection events are not generated. If set to “YES”, the function’s specific mask is contemplated.
Table 92 Fuse failure settings

RFUFEna Enabled NO / YES Boolean
LogInFF Fuse Fail input uint32
LogInFFB1 FF input (B side-sinc1) uint32
LogInFFB2 FF input (B side-sinc2) uint32
BlkValI1 Minimum I1/Irated(%) 2 10 1 uint32
Figure 80 Fuse failure scheme
 Node: PROT/RFUF1
 Commands:
 Fuse Failure Start. Indicates that the fuse failure has picked up.
 Fuse Failure Trip. Indicates that the fuse failure has tripped, that is, the additional time has elapsed with the unit
picked up.
 Fuse Failure B1 Activation. Indicates that fuse failure is activated on breaker 1’s synchronism B side.
 Fuse Failure B2 Activation. Indicates that fuse failure is activated on breaker 2’s synchronism B side.

User Manual 142
 Fuse Failure Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 93 Fuse failure function outputs

Fuse Failure Start Str general
Fuse Failure Trip Op general
Fuse Failure B1 Activation FFB1 general
Fuse Failure B2 Activation FFB2 general
Fuse Failure Status StEna stVal
3.9 POWER SWING
This unit determines the function conditions according to which distance function trips is disabled for single-phase and/or
phase-phase units and for each zone, depending on the settings.
Differentiation is made between stable and unstable power swing.
 Stable swing: when distance functions can be blocked by generating the "Power Swing Blocked" signal.
 Unstable swing: when some system elements can be tripping to prevent the disturbance extending. To do this,
this function generates the "OST- Out of Step Tripping" signal.
To determine swinging conditions, the complete positive sequence impedance is used (for 3 closed poles) or the minimum
impedance of phase (A, B, C) or phase combination (AB, BC or CA) of the closed poles (if there is 1 open pole). By
calculating the position of this impedance in the R/X diagram, it is possible to measure how and at what speed it is moving.
To do this, on the one hand, some zones are defined in the diagram, and on the other some transfer times from one zone to
another are defined. These zones and times are parameterised by settings.
Figure 81 shows the power swinging characteristic diagram.

Figure 81 Power Swing Characteristic
Figure 83 shows this unit's logic diagram. On the one hand, it shows the "PSB" signal's activation conditions and on the
other, the "OST" signal's activation conditions.
"Power Swing Blocking" (PSB) is activated when any of the following conditions is fulfilled:
 The positive sequence impedance takes a time longer than the "Blocking Time (ms)" (setting) to pass from the
outside zone to the middle zone and the unblocking signal is not activated (See Figure 81).
 The positive sequence impedance goes into the middle zone and the time between going from the outside zone
to the middle zone is longer than the "Trip Time (ms)" (setting) and shorter than the "Blocking Time (ms)"
(setting) and the unblocking signal is not activated. In this case the trip must be enabled and not blocked (See
Figure 81).
If the 3 poles are closed, blocking only affect the phase-phase units. With 1 pole open, blocking affects all single- and phase-
phase units. The breaker status is determined by digital inputs.

User Manual 143
Once activated, the "PSB" signal is maintained for 2 seconds as long as no unblocking conditions are fulfilled and that it is
inside the outer zone. If the "Memory Enabled" setting is "YES", blocking will last 1 second once outside the outer zone. If it
is "NO", there is no blocking once outside the outer zone.
Each of the zones, for both the Mho and Quadrilateral characteristics can be blocked or unblocked by this function
depending on the setting selection: "Zone 1 Blocking"…"Zone 5 Blocking".
It is also possible to block the teleprotection using the setting "Teleprotection Blocking" so that TPR reception and TPT
transmission is ignored.
The activation of "Trip by Power Swing" (OST) is determined depending on the "Trip Enabled" setting. If this setting is
"NO", the trip is never activated.
If the setting is IN_ZMED, the conditions for activation are as follows:
 The positive sequence impedance goes into the middle zone and the time between going from the outside zone
to the middle zone is longer than the "Trip Time (ms)" (setting) and shorter than the "Blocking Time (ms)"
(setting).See Figure 81.
 The unblocking signal is not activated.
If the setting is OUT_ZMED, the conditions for activation are as follows:
 If the case is as above (the positive sequence impedance enters the middle zone and the time it takes to go from
the outer zone to the middle zone is greater than "Trip Time (ms)" and less than "Blocking Time (ms)", the
impedance leaves the middle zone through the opposite side to where it entered. See Figure 81.
 When the previous condition is fulfilled, once the set time "Trip delay" has elapsed, since the impedance leaves
the middle zone and if it does not enter again.
 The unblocking signal is not activated.
The unblocking signal is activated if any of the following conditions is fulfilled:
 The positive sequence threshold is less than "I1 Minimum threshold (A)" (setting).
 There is more than one pole open.
 The fuse fault function is active.
 The impedance stays in the internal zone for a time longer than the one indicated in the "Internal Zone unblock T
(ms)".
 If there are 3 poles closed and the following conditions are fulfilled during "After fault Reset time (ms)" (setting):
 The phase selector detects a two- or single-phase fault using the negative sequence percentage
(I2>0.05xIrated & I2/I1>10%).
 The negative sequence current exceeds "I2 Threshold (A)" (setting).
The unit’s settings are as follows:

 Memory Enabled. Indicates whether or not the swing blocking signal will be maintained for 1 second, after
leaving the outer zone.
 Zone X Blocking. Enables or disables blocking each zone of the unit.
 Teleprotection Blocking. Enables or disables teleprotection blocking.
 Middle zone Right R. Resistive limit of the middle zone for R>=0 (See Figure 81).
 Middle zone Left R. Resistive limit of the middle zone for R>=0 (See Figure 81).
 Middle zone Top Z. Limit impedance of the middle zone for X>=0 (See Figure 81).
 Middle zone Bottom Z. Limit impedance of the middle zone for X<0 (See Figure 81).
 Internal zone Right R. Resistive limit of the inner zone for R>=0 (See Figure 81).
 Internal zone Left R. Resistive limit of the inner zone for R<0 (See Figure 81).
 I1 Minimum threshold (A).This is the minimum I1 required to activate the swing function.
 Slope angle. Indicates the slope angle of the resistive limits (See Figure 81).

User Manual 144
 Power swing detection zone (5Distance between zones). Indicates the width of the outer zone (See Figure 81).
 Blocking time (ms). Time for going between the outer zone and middle zone for activating blocking.
 Trip Enabled. Indicates the way of determining whether there is a trip condition.
 Trip Time (ms). Time for going between the outer zone and middle zone for activating the trip.
 Internal Zone unblock T (ms). Minimum time in milliseconds for which the impedance must remain in the "inner
zone" to unblock operating in all zones.
 I2 threshold (A). With 3 poles closed, if I2 exceeds this threshold and the fault selector is activated, unblocking
occurs.
 After fault Reset time (ms). This is the time that elapses before disabling swing blocking as soon as a phase-
phase or single-phase fault is detected (based on the I2 threshold in the phase selector).
 Trip delay. It is only used, when the power swing trip is enabled with the option “OUT_ZMED”. It is the time since
the impedance leaves the middle zone, without returning into it, until the trip signal occurs.
 Trip Blocking input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the trip by swinging.
Table 94 Power swing settings

OOSEna Enabled NO / YES Boolean
BlkMemEna Memory Enabled NO / YES Boolean
Z1Blk Zone 1 Blocking NO / YES Boolean
: The same for zones 2, 3 , 4
Z5Blk Zone 5 Blocking NO / YES Boolean
TpBlk Teleprotection Blocking NO / YES Boolean
RisMedRi Middle zone Right R 0,05 500 0,01 float32
RisMedLe Middle zone Left R 0,05 500 0,01 float32
ReacMedHi Middlezone Top X 0,05 500 0,01 float32
ReacMedLo Middle zone Bottom X 0,05 500 0,01 float32
RIntRi Internal zone Right R 0,05 500 0,01 float32
RIntLe Internal zone Left R 0,05 500 0,01 float32
I1Val I1 Minimum threshold (A) 0,05 500 0,01 float32
BlArg Slope angle 45 90 0,01 float32
ZDisOhm Power swing detection zone 0,1 100 0,1 float32
SwgTmms Blocking time (ms) 5 100 5 int32
NO (0)
TrEna Trip Enabled IN_ZMED (1) uint32
OUT_ZMED (2)
TrTmms Trip Time (ms) 5 100 5 int32
UnBlTmms Internal Zone unblock T (ms) 60 10000 5 int32
I2Val I2 threshold (A) 0 100 0,01 float32
RstTmms After fault Reset time (ms) 0 1000 5 int32
TrDelay Trip delay 0 1000 5 int32
TrRepNu Repetitions for trip 1 3 1 int32
TrIntTmms Interval time for trip (ms) 0 1000 5 int32
LogInTrBlk Trip Blocking input uint32
 Node PROT/RPSB1
55
Until the version 8.1.0.0 of ICD the name was " Distance between zones "

User Manual 145
 Commands:
 "DOrdOpBlk": Blocking and unblocking of the trip by power swing. Only applicable if the "Trip Enabled"
setting is not set to "NO".
 Z1 Ph-Ph Blocked PSB. Indicates blocking of the phase-phase units in zone 1.
 ….. Same for zones 2 to 5.
 Z1 Gnd Blocked PSB. Indicates blocking of the single-phase units in zone 1.
 ….. Same for zones 2 to 5.
 Teleprotection blocked PSB. Indicates that the teleprotection is blocked by the power swing.
 Power swing blocked. Time conditions are fulfilled when passing from the outer zone to the middle zone
without detecting a fault.
 Power swing Trip. Trip signal by power swing.
 Power swing unblocked. Blocking reset by power swing.
 PSB unblocked internal zone. The impedance has stayed in the inner zone for the time indicated in the "Inner
zone unblocking time" and no other unblocking conditions have been fulfilled.
 Z in ZMED+. The impedance seen is in the middle zone positive. The impedance has a positive resistive
component.
 Z in ZMED-. The impedance seen is in the middle zone negative. The impedance has a negative resistive
component.
 Z in Middle zone. The impedance seen is in the middle zone.
 Z in External zone. The impedance seen is in the external zone.
 Z in Internal zone. The impedance seen is in the internal zone.
 Power swing status. Indicates whether or not the power swing function is enabled.
 Power swing trip status. Indicates whether or not the trip power swing function is enabled.
Table 95 Power Swing Function Outputs

Z1 Ph-Ph Blocked PSB Z1PhBl general
… The same for zones 2, 3 , 4 and 5
Z1 Gnd Blocked PSB Z1GndBl general
… The same for zones 2, 3 , 4 and 5
Teleprotection blocked PSB TPBl general
Power swing blocked Blk general (stVal in Ed2)
Power swing Trip Op general
Power swing unblocked UnBlk general
PSB unblocked internal zone ZMUnBl general
Z in ZMED+ ZMPIn general
Z in ZMED- ZMNIn general
Z in Middle Zone Zmed general
Z in External Zone ZEXT general
Z in Internal Zone Zint general
Power swing Status StEna general (stVal in Ed2)
Power swing trip status TrPt general

User Manual 146
 Breaker status. The breaker status signals are determined by the digital inputs:
 3 poles closed. Indicates the 3 poles are closed.
 52 2 poles open. Indicates 2 poles are open.
 52 3 poles open. Indicates the 3 poles are open.
Figure 82 Power Swing Logic Diagram (Trip).

User Manual 147
Figure 83 Power Swing Logic Diagram (Blocking).
3.10 SWITCH ONTO FAULT
This unit provides an instantaneous three-phase trip when a fault occurs upon the generation of a breaker closure command
(manual or by input).
The function is enabled during a programmable time ("Activation time (ms)") in the following situations:
 Upon the closure of the 3-poles, or

 Following the closure command.
Depending on the “Operation type” setting, the action of the switch onto fault is produced when:
 Programmed as “V and I" or "(V and I) or Z2”: The phase voltage is below a threshold (set in the open pole detector) and
the phase current is above a threshold for ½ cycle.
 Programmed as “Z2” or “(V and I) or Z2”: The zone 2 of the distance units (mho or quadrilateral) is started.
During the "Activation time (ms)" that the function is enabled, an offset of 0.1 ohms is applied to the mho characteristic in
zone 2. On the other hand, the X reach is set to 0.05 ohms, contrary to the programmed direction, in the quadrilateral
characteristic in zone 2. Therefore, the three - phase faults are protected in the origin. Also, the directional supervision is not
used and both directions are allowed.
Depending on the configuration set the switch onto fault can be active with any closing. 6
6
Available from firmware version 5.19.15.7 and ICD version 6.1.13.27 on. Until that version only acts with manual closings.

User Manual 148
 To enable it after a manual closing and to produce a definitive trip (no reclosing allowed):
 Reclose perm. (R1, R2, R3, R4): NO.
 Trip permission by recloser: Only "Recloser lockout" and "Trip permission after manual closing" have to be selected.
 To enable it after any closing and to produce a definitive trip (no reclosing allowed):
 Reclose perm. (R1, R2, R3, R4): NO.
 Trip permission by recloser: Select "Recloser lockout" and the desired trip permissions.
 To allow reclosings:
 Reclose perm. (R1, R2, R3, R4): Select the desired option.
 Trip permission by recloser: Do not select "Recloser lockout" and select the desired trip permissions.
The function’s settings are:

 Operation type. Indicates the unit’s operation type.
 V and I. The V and I measurements are checked in order to determine the switch onto fault.
 Z2 or (V and I). The V and I measurements or the zone 2 start signals are checked in order to determine the switch
onto fault.
 Z2. The zone 2 start signals are checked in order to determine the switch onto fault.
 Operation delay start input. When it is enabled and dead line is detected, it allows switch onto fault function.
 Normalized voltage Reset. Indicates if resetting due to voltage above the threshold is enabled or not. It only works, if the
"Operation type" is "Z2" or "Z2 or (V and I)".
 I phase threshold (A). Indicates the current value for indicating a switch onto fault.
 Activation time (ms). Indicates the time during which the unit is enabled once the start conditions have been met.
 Trip Permission by recloser6. Indicates the trip and block permission in accordance with the recloser status: standby,
blocked, safety time after reclosing, after closing. It is configured bit by bit; for additional details, see section
corresponding to the recloser (3.12.6.3).
 Reclose perm. (R1, R2, R3, R4) 6. Indicates whether each trip type can be reclosed or not, in accordance with the
recloser's closing cycle (see reclose permission mask).
The voltage threshold set in the open pole detector is used.
 Node: PROT/PSOF1
 Commands:
 Switch onto Fault Activation. Indicates that the switch onto fault has been activated.
 Switch onto Fault Status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.

User Manual 149
Table 96 Switch onto fault settings

PSOFEna Enabled NO / YES Boolean
V and I (2)
Optype Operation type Z2 or (V and I) (3) uint32
Z2 (4)
TimAutEna Operation delay start input NO / YES
VNorRst Normalized voltage reset NO / YES
IThr I phase threshold (A) 0,01 200,0 0,01 float32
OpTmms Activation time (ms) 100 1000 10 int32
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (1)
Reclose 2 (2)
Reclose 1-2 (3)
Reclose 3 (4)
Reclose 1-3 (5)
Reclose 2-3 (6)
Reclose 1-2-3 (7)
Reclose 4 (8)
Reclose 1-4 (9)
Reclose 2-4 (10)
Reclose 1-2-4 (11)
Reclose 3-4 (12)
Reclose 1-3-4 (13)
Reclose 2-3-4 (14)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (15)
Table 97 Switch onto fault function outputs

Switch onto Fault Trip Op general
Switch onto Fault Status StEna stVal
Figure 84 shows the complete switch onto fault unit scheme.

 Z2G Start. Indicates that any of the zone 2 phase-ground units have started.
 Z2F Start. Indicates that any of the zone 2 phase-phase units have started.
 52_1 Closure command (Manual). Indicates manual close command of breaker 1
 52_1 breaker closed (without reclosure command). The three poles of breaker 1 have been closed without reclose
command.
 52_2 Closure command (Manual). Indicates manual close command of breaker 2
 52_2 breaker closed (without reclosure command). The three poles of breaker 2 have been closed without reclose
command.
 Deenergized line in phases A, B and C. It´s the signal "DeadLine Phase ABC" of the dead line function.

User Manual 150
Figure 84 Switch onto fault scheme

User Manual 151
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS 
3.11 BREAKER FAILURE
If a fault is detected, it is important to act quickly and for the switch to work correctly. However, it may be that an error occurs
and it is not able to interrupt the fault current.
The breaker failure function checks that there is no current via the switch, for a given time after the trip situation. If it is
detected that the current continues to be above a value established by the setting, a signal is activated so that secondary
switches can act.
3.11.1 Single pole breaker Failure

The protection device has a complete breaker fault functional feature, with single-pole or three-pole functioning.
If the unit is enabled, it functions as follows (see Figure 85 y Figure 86):
 If the equipment indicates a trip signal or an external protection signal is received via a logic input, depending
on the value of the "Start type" setting, it will heed to one or the other to start up a timer.
 If the trip situation disappears or the function is tripping or starting externally, to verify this, the "Time signal
relapse (ms)" must elapse.
 If, following the period programmed as “Retrip time delay (ms)”, the current of one of the phases exceeds the
programmed "Phase current threshold (A)", the retrip signal is activated.
 If the "52 Supervision" setting is "YES", if, following the period programmed as “Retrip time delay (ms)” one of
the poles remains closed, after that time, the retrigger signal and the retrigger signal of that pole are activated.
 If, following the period programmed as “Trip time delay (ms)”, the current of one of the phases exceeds the
programmed "Phase current threshold (A)", the trip signal is activated.
 Regardless of the “Trip time delay (ms)”, if a blocked switch logic input is activated, the trip signal is activated.
 If the "Sealed by current" setting is "YES", the signals are only deactivated when the phase and neutral currents
fall below their drop out values.
In this unit, functioning does not contemplate the breaker status digital input, but rather the current values. The
measurement obtained from the half-cycle DFT of the full-cycle DFT is used (the lowest of both).
Each of the phases and neutral is analysed independently.
It has independent settings and outputs.
 Nodes:
 PROT/FRBRF1. The functions uses the measurements from the transformers 1, 2 and 3 (Ia1, Ib1, Ic1).
 PROT/FRBRF2. The functions uses the measurements from the transformers 4, 5 and 6 (Ia2, Ib2, Ic2). Only
with 52 1/2 configurations.
 Commands:
The settings used by this unit are as follows:

 Start type. The following options are available:
 External trips: the function's start logic inputs are taken into consideration.
 Internal trips: the equipment's internal trip activations are taken into consideration.
 Both: both the external activations (depending on the initial inputs) and the equipment's internal trip
activations are taken into account.
 Operation type. The following options are available:

User Manual 152
 Three-pole: functioning according to the Figure 86 diagram.

 Single-pole: functioning according to the Figure 85 diagram.
 Sealed by current. Indicates whether or not the disappearance of the trigger signal causes the function to
relapse. In other words, if the trip signal has to be permanent or simply a pulse.
 Time signal relapse (ms). Indicates the time for which the start situation is to be maintained, after the
disappearance of the internal trip or input start.
 Supervision by current. Indicates whether or not current is simultaneously needed with the trip order, in order for
the timers to start.
 Phase current threshold (A). Indicates the current value below which the phase is considered as open.
 Gnd current threshold (A). Indicates the current value below which the neutral is considered as open.
 Retrip time delay (ms). Indicates the waiting time for the activation of the retrip signal if the current does not
drop below the drop out level.
 Trip time delay (ms). Indicates the waiting time for the activation of the trip signal if the current does not drop
below the drop out level.
 Pole A BF start input. Selects the signal which, when activated, indicates the start of breaker failure timing for
phase A.
 Pole B BF start input. Selects the signal which, when activated, indicates the start of breaker failure timing for
phase B.
 Pole C BF start input. Selects the signal which, when activated, indicates the start of breaker failure timing for
phase C.
 3 pole BF start input. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the start of the breaker fault timing.
 52 Supervision7. If set to YES, the signals can also be activated if the breaker poles are closed.
Table 98 Breaker failure Settings

RBRFEna Enabled NO / YES Boolean
External Trips (1)
InitType Start type Internal Trips (2) enum
Both (3)
Three-pole (0)
OpType Operation type enum
Single-pole (1)
CurLoc Sealed by current NO / YES Boolean
InRsTmms Time signal relapse (ms) 0 120000 1 Float
CurSpv Supervision by current NO / YES Boolean
DetValAPhs Phase current threshold (A) 0,02 150 0,01 Float
DetValAGnd Gnd current threshold (A) 0,02 150 0,01 Float
RfailTmms Retrip time delay (ms) 0 120000 1 Float
FailTmms Trip time delay (ms) 0 120000 1 Float
LogInBlk Blocking input Int32
LogInBFInA Pole A BF start input Int32
LogInBFInB Pole B BF start input Int32
LogInBFInC Pole C BF start input Int32
LogInBFI3P 3 pole BF start input Int32
SupEna 52 Supervision NO / YES Boolean
The breaker failure function's output signals are as follows:
 50BF Retrigger pole A (Br1). Indicates that there has been a retrip due to a breaker failure in phase A.
 50BF Retrigger pole B (Br1). Indicates that there has been a retrip due to a breaker failure in phase B.
 50BF Retrigger pole C (Br1). Indicates that there has been a retrip due to a breaker failure in phase C.
7
Available from firmware versión 5.18.15.5 and ICDs version 6.1.14.1

User Manual 153
 Retrigger 50BF (Br1). Indicates that there has been a retrip due to a breaker failure in one of the poles.
 Time BF completed (Br1). Indicates that the trip signalling timer has finished.
 Trip 50BF (Br1). Indicates that there has been a trip due to a switch fault. This means that besides complying
with the timing indicated by "BF time finished", the current that circulates through the switch exceeds the
function's activation threshold.
 Start 50BF pole A (Br1). It is activated when the breaker fault conditions for the pole A are met during the set
time.
 Start 50BF pole B (Br1). It is activated when the breaker fault conditions for the pole B are met during the set
time.
 Start 50BF pole C (Br1). It is activated when the breaker fault conditions for the pole C are met during the set
time.
 50BF Ia exceeded (Br1). Indicates that in the breaker's pole A, the current exceeds the programmed fault
detection threshold.
 50BF Ib exceeded (Br1). Indicates that in the breaker's pole B, the current exceeds the programmed fault
 50BF Ic exceeded (Br1). Indicates that in the breaker's pole C, the current exceeds the programmed fault
 50BF In exceeded (Br1). Indicates that in the neutral, the current exceeds the programmed fault detection
threshold.
 Breaker failure status (Br1). Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 99 Breaker failure function outputs
Signal RBRF1 Signal RBRF2 Data Attribute

50BF Retrigger pole A (Br1) 50BF Retrigger pole A (Br2) ReOp phsA
50BF Retrigger pole B (Br1) 50BF Retrigger pole B (Br2) ReOp phsB
50BF Retrigger pole C (Br1) 50BF Retrigger pole C (Br2) ReOp phsC
Retrigger 50BF (Br1) Retrigger 50BF (Br2) ReOp general
Time BF completed (Br1) Time BF completed (Br2) TmBF general
Trip 50BF (Br1) Trip 50BF (Br2) Op general
50BF Start pole A (Br1) 50BF Start pole A (Br2) StrF phsA
50BF Start pole B (Br1) 50BF Start pole B (Br2) StrF phsB
50BF Start pole C (Br1) 50BF Start pole C (Br2) StrF phsC
50BF Ia exceeded (Br1) 50BF Ia exceeded (Br2) StrThr phsA
50BF Ib exceeded (Br1) 50BF Ib exceeded (Br2) StrThr phsB
50BF Ic exceeded (Br1) 50BF Ic exceeded (Br2) StrThr phsC
50BF In exceeded (Br1) 50BF In exceeded (Br2) StrThr Neut
The input signals to this function are:
 Pole A General Trip. Indicates that pole A general trip is operating.

 Pole B General Trip. Indicates that pole B general trip is operating.
 Pole C General Trip. Indicates that pole C general trip is operating.
 Tripolar Trip. Indicates that a 3 poles trip is activated.
 IA measurement. It is the fundamental phase A measurement, using ½ cycle DFT.
 IB measurement. It is the fundamental phase B measurement, using ½ cycle DFT.
 IC measurement. It is the fundamental phase C measurement, using ½ cycle DFT.
 IN measurement. It is the fundamental neutral measurement, using ½ cycle DFT.
 52_x Locked. Indicates that the breaker is locked, where "x" is the breaker number.

User Manual 154
Figure 85 Single-pole phase A breaker Fault Diagram
The scheme for phases B and C is the same, replacing phase A with B or C as appropriate.
Figure 86 Three-pole Complete breaker Fault Diagram

User Manual 155
3.11.2 Breaker failure with low load

It detects breaker failure in three pole trips with low load.
The unit starts when the breaker status or overcurrent and start signal conditions are fulfilled:
 52 status or overcurrent:
 If the "52 Supervision" set to "YES" and any pole is closed. The breaker status is determined with the 52
status digital inputs.
 When enabled “Enable with Ground current”, the neutral current (3I0 for 52 ½ configuration) is greater than
the setting “Gnd current threshold (A)”.
 Start signal:
 Pole x BF start or 3 pole BF start signal lis received.
 If “2 pole trip allowed” is enabled, BF start signal of at least two phases is received.
The setting “Supervision Initial” 8selects the start mode:
 YES. The unit starts when the breaker status or overcurrent conditions are fulfilled and the start signal is
activated.
 NO. The unit starts when the start signal is activated.
The trip is generated when the “Trip time delay (ms)” finishes and none of the start conditions has been deactivated.
The retrip is generated when the “Retrip time delay (ms)” finishes and none of the start conditions has been deactivated.
If the "Supervision by current" setting is "YES", the retrip and trip signals are only activated when the neutral current is
above the “Gnd current threshold (A)” setting.
If the trip situation disappears or the function is tripping or starting externally, to verify this, the "Time signal relapse (ms)"
must elapse
If the "Sealed by current" setting is "YES", the signals are only deactivated when the neutral current falls below their drop
out values.
In 52 ½ configurations, the function is independent for every breaker, using 3I0 because the neutral measurement is not
available.
8

User Manual 156
Figure 87 50BF low load scheme
Two independent functions are available (settings, outputs, commands…). Two nodes are used:
 Nodes:
 PROT/RGBF1. In 52 ½ configurations, the functions uses the measurements from the transformers 1, 2 and
3 (Ia1, Ib1, Ic1).
 PROT/ RGBF2. In 52 ½ configurations, the functions uses the measurements from the transformers 4, 5 and
6 (Ia2, Ib2, Ic2). Only with 52 1/2 configurations.
 Commands:
The settings used by this unit are as follows:

 Start type. The following options are available:
 External trips: the function's start logic inputs are taken into account.
 Internal trips: the equipment's internal trip activations are taken into account.
 Both: both the external activations (depending on the initial inputs) and the equipment's internal trip
activations are taken into account.
 2 pole trip allowed. It allows the start of the unit with phase-phase trips.
 Enable with Ground current. It allows the start of the unit when the neutral current is greater than the setting
“Gnd current threshold (A)”.
 Gnd current threshold (A). Indicates the current value below which the neutral is considered as open.

User Manual 157
 Retrip time delay (ms). Indicates the waiting time for the activation of the retrip signal if the current does not
drop below the drop out level.
 Trip time delay (ms). Indicates the waiting time for the activation of the trip signal if the current does not drop
below the drop out level.
 Pole A BF start. Selects the signal which, when activated, indicates the start of breaker failure timing for phase
A.
 Pole B BF start. Selects the signal which, when activated, indicates the start of breaker failure timing for phase
B.
 Pole C BF start. Selects the signal which, when activated, indicates the start of breaker failure timing for phase
C
 3 pole BF start. Selects the signal which, when activated, indicates the start of breaker failure timing.
 Enable Events Record. Allows the generation of protection events associated to the function. If set to “NO”, the
 52 Supervisión9.If set to YES, the the start of breaker failure can also be activated if the breaker poles are
closed.
 Sealed by current9. Indicates whether or not the disappearance of the trigger signal causes the function to
relapse. In other words, if the trip signal has to be permanent or simply a pulse.
 Time signal relapse (ms)9. Indicates the time for which the start situation is to be maintained, after the
disappearance of the internal trip or input start
 Supervision by current8. If set to "YES", the retrip and trip signal are only activated when the neutral current is
above the setting “Gnd current threshold (A)”.
 Supervision Initial8. It selects whether the start of the unit is monitored by the status of the breaker and
overcurrent or only the start signal is used.
Table 101 shows the function's output signals:
 Retrip BF low load. Indicates that there has been a retrip due to a breaker failure.
 Trip BF low load. Indicates that there has been a trip due to a breaker failure.
 Start BF low load. It is activated when the breaker fault conditions have happened. If this conditions are
activated during the set time, generate the breaker failure signals.
 BF low load status. Indicates the function’s status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
Table 100 50BF low load setting

Ena Enabled YES/NO Bolean
External Trips
InitType Start type 1 3 1 Internal Trips enum
Both
TPhTrEna 2 pole trip allowed YES/NO Bolean
GndDetEna Enable with Ground current YES/NO Bolean
BlkGndA Gnd current threshold (A) 0,02 150 0,01 float
RetrTmms Retrip time delay (ms) 0 60000 1 int32
TrTmms Trip time delay (ms) 0 60000 1 int32
LogInBlk Blocking input 1 int32
LogInBFInA Pole A BF start 1 int32
LogInBFInB Pole B BF start 1 int32
LogInBFInC Pole C BF start 1 int32
LogInBFI3P 3 pole BF start 1 int32
MaskEna Enable Events Record NO/YES Boolean
SupEna 52 Supervision NO/YES Boolean
CurLoc Sealed by current 0 1 int32
InRsTmms Time signal relapse (ms) 0 120000 1 int32
CurSpv Supervision by current NO/YES Boolean
IniSpv Supervisión initial8 NO/YES Boolean
9
Available from firmware version 6.0.8.0 and ICDs version 8.1.0.4

User Manual 158
Table 101 50BF low load signals
RGBF1 RGBF2 Data Attribute

BF low load status U1 BF low load status U2 StEna stVal
Retrip BF low load - Unid 1 Retrip BF low load - Unid 2 ReOp general
Trip BF low load - Unid 1 Trip BF low load - Unid 2 Op general
Start BF low load - Unid 1 Start BF low load - Unid 2 Str general
3.12 TRIP LOGICS
3.12.1 67NQ Teleprotection Schemes

High voltage line protection requires protection systems which are especially fast, selective and reliable with the aim of
not jeopardising the stability of the electrical system. To fulfil these requirements, it is necessary to use teleprotection
systems associated to the protection equipment installed in each end of the line. The protection device is equipped with a
teleprotection system for completely protecting the line with high-speed protection.
They are based upon the use of teleprotection signals between both end terminals of the line. The effect upon the output
relays’ operation is determined according to the signals given by the protection along with the signals given by the other
terminal.
From firmware version 6.0.8.0 and ICD version 8.1.0.4, there is a new setting: "TPTx Delay time (ms)".
From firmware version 6.0.8.0 and ICD version 8.1.0.4, in the 67NQ teleprotection schemes, single pole trips are
allowed. The “Single Pole Trip 67NQ” setting must be set to “YES” in the node PROT/ZPMPT (see chapter "Single pole
Trip") and the phase selector must indicate single phase to ground fault (see chapter "Phase selector").
The signals used in the schemes are:
 TPTx: teleprotection signal sent by a terminal.

 TPRIx: teleprotection signal received by a terminal.
 GSL: security channel loss signal (unblocking scheme).
 GSLRx: security channel loss signal received (unblocking scheme).
Figure 88 Basic Teleprotection Diagram
3.12.1.1 Introduction
3.12.1.1.1 Fault Detection Units
Teleprotection 67NQ scheme will operate on the instantaneous directional unit No. 1 (forward), 2 (forward) and 3
(backwards).
 Zone 1 (forward): Unit 1 with instantaneous, unbalanced and neutral overcurrent (UNPIOC1 and GPIOC1).
 Zone 2 (forward): Unit 2 with instantaneous, unbalanced and neutral overcurrent (UNPIOC2 and GPIOC2).
 Zone 4 (backwards): Unit 3 with instantaneous, unbalanced and neutral overcurrent (UNPIOC3 and GPIOC3).

User Manual 159
Therefore, unit 1 can be assimilated to distance zone 1, unit 2 to zone 2, and unit 3 to zone 4. Unit 3 must be
programmed backwards.
3.12.1.1.2 Scheme Type

The schemes respond to two basic types:
 Blocking schemes: The signal received indicates that the fault is outside the protected zone. A relay can trip on
an overreaching zone if, after a definite time, the blocking signal has not been received.
 Permissive schemes: The signal received allows an instantaneous trip in the overreaching zone. The additional
ECHO, weak infeed and Current Reversal Blocking schemes can be used.
When selecting a particular scheme, it is useful to bear in mind the following characteristics for each of them: In the case
of an internal fault in the protected line and a communication channel fault in permissive schemes, protection is disabled
for tripping, whilst in blocking schemes, tripping is assured. However, in blocking schemes, if there is an external fault
and a communication channel fault, the device can trip.
If the communication system forms an integral part of the energy transport line, as in the case of carrier waves, it is best
to use the blocking schemes, since internal faults may disturb or attenuate the carrier signal. Likewise, it is best to use
blocking schemes in weak infeed configurations as they are more reliable compared to permissive schemes.
Finally, it should be mentioned that permissive schemes are faster than blocking schemes, given that the latter involve
slightly longer fault clear times, due to the security waiting time for receiving the potential blocking signal.
Several schemes are available:
 Step trip (none)

 Permissive overreaching (Overreaching POTT)
 Permissive underreaching (Underreaching PUTT)
 Directional blocking scheme
 Directional comparison unblocking scheme
Additionally, the following can be selected together with the schemes:
 Direct transfer trip

 Echo
 Weak infeed
 Current Reversal Blocking
3.12.1.1.3 Flexible Units
The signals that activate the sending of the teleprotection between the different overcurrent units can be configured for
all the schemes. Two settings are included - "67NQ Permissive Units" and "67NQ Block Units" which enable both logic
inputs to be carried with the starts of the desired units. In this way, the signals carried to the schemes can be made
flexible.
The following logic inputs are configurable using flexible inputs. It is possible to connect any logic input to them:
 Faults forward ("67NQ Permissive Units").

 Faults backwards ("67NQ Block Units").
Figure 89 Permissive Logic Diagram

User Manual 160
Figure 90 Inverse Directional Scheme
3.12.1.1.4 Input / output signals

The following signals are used in the schemes:
 TPTx 67NQ: Teleprotection signal sent by a terminal.

 TPRIx_67NQ: Teleprotection input received by a terminal.
 TPRx_67NQ: Follows the TPRIx input to become activated, but memorises the input during the set time "TPRx
Drop out time (ms)" (RsRTPTmms) to deactivate itself. If this setting is equal to zero, then TPRx coincides with
the input TPRIx. TPRx is used in the teleprotection schemes.
 GSLRx_67NQ: Line security signal loss. Indicates that the data channel established between the two
teleprotection devices is inactive.
Figure 91 Teleprotection Reception
Figure 92 TPTx Block Scheme

User Manual 161
3.12.1.1.5 Three terminal lines

In the case of three terminal lines, the signals taken into account are the signals received from each terminal.
Figure 93 Teleprotection reception in three terminal lines
Permissive Schemes
Blocking Schemes
3.12.1.1.6 Settings and signals

The settings for selecting the protection schemes are:
 Scheme type: Selects the type of scheme. Allows you to select between:
 Step Trip (0)
 Overreaching POTT(1)
 Underreaching PUTT(2)
 Direct.comp. block(3)
 Direct.comp. unbl.(4)
 TPRx Drop out time (ms). Memorization time of the teleprotection received signal (TPRx).
 Block delay time (ms). Additional waiting time for the block signal.
 GSL Minimum time (ms). Minimum security signal loss time to allow trips.
 GSL Maximum time (ms). Maximum time during which the trip permission for loss of security signal is enabled.
 GSL Drop out time (ms). Drop out time following the recovery of the security channel.
 ECHO enabled. Enables the ECHO function.
 ECHO pulse time (ms). The duration of the ECHO signal pulse.
 ECHO Blocking time (ms). Time after the deactivation of the signal 67NQ_FW during which it is considered as
being active.
 ECHO delay time (ms). The time during which the conditions for the activation of the ECHO signal must be met.
 Current Reversal Blocking. Enables trip blocking for a time after seeing a change in the fault's direction.
(Reversal direction memorisation).
 Current rev pickup t. (ms). Reversal direction memorization time.
 Weak Infeed Enabled. Enables the weak infeed function.
 Weak infeed Threshold (V). Voltage threshold to consider weak infeed.
 TPRx_67 line 1. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates that the line 1 teleprotection signal has been
received.

User Manual 162
received.
 GSLRx_67 line 1. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates that the line 1 security signal loss has been
received.
received.
 TP Trip Block. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the teleprotection trip.
 TPTx Blocking input. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the blocking of the TPTX signal
transmission.
 ECHO Start value. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates ECHO pickup for teleprotection schemes.
 Block ECHO (logic input). Selects the signal which, when active, indicates ECHO blocking for teleprotection
schemes.
 67NQ Permissive Units. Allows the selection of an alternative pickup signal for unit 2: selects the signal which
when active, indicates the activation of the 67Q pickup signal used in permissive units. If this signal is
configured, 67NQ functions are not taken into account.
 67NQ Block Units. Allows the selection of an alternative pickup signal for unit backwards: selects the signal
which when active, indicates the activation of the 67NQ pickup signal used in blocking units. If this signal is
configured, 67NQ functions are not taken into account.
 Weak Infeed Blocking. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the blocking of the weak infeed scheme.
 Trip permission by recloser. Indicates the trip and block permission in accordance with the recloser status:
 Reclose permission10. Indicates whether each trip type can be reclosed or not, in accordance with the recloser's
closing cycle (see reclosure permission mask).
 TPTx Delay time (ms). TPTx signal delay time.
10
From firmware version 6.0.8.0 and ICD version 8.1.0.4, single pole reclosures are allowed. Until this version, only three
pole reclosure are allowed.

User Manual 163
Table 102 Teleprotection scheme settings

Step Trip (0)
Overreaching POTT (1)
SchTyp Scheme type 0 4 1 Underreaching PUTT (2) enum
Direct. comp. block. (3)
Direct. comp. unbl.(4)
RsRTPTmms TPRx Drop out time (ms) 0 1000 10 int32
BlkTmms Block delay time (ms) 0 1000 10 int32
LoGMinTmms GSL Minimum time (ms) 0 400 10 int32
LoGMaxTmms GSL Maximum time (ms) 0 400 10 int32
LoGRepTmms GSL Drop off time (ms) 0 400 10 int32
EcEna ECHO enabled 0 1 1 NO / YES enum
EcTmms ECHO pulse time (ms) 0 1000 10 int32
EcBlkTmms ECHO Blocking time (ms) 0 1000 10 int32
EcActTmms ECHO delay time (ms) 0 200 10 int32
RvAEna Current Reversal Blocking 0 1 1 NO / YES enum
RvATmms Current rev. pickup T (ms) 0 1000 10 int32
WIEna Weak Infeed Enabled 0 1 1 NO / YES enum
WeiVal Weak Infeed Threshold (V) 0,1 200 0,01 float
LogInRTP1 TPRx _67 line 1 1 int32
LogInRTP2 TPRx _67 line 2 1 int32
LogInPSG1 GSLRx_67 line 1 1 int32
LogInPSG2 GSLRx_67 line 2 1 int32
LogInBl TP Trip Block 1 int32
LogInETPBl TPTx Blocking input 1 int32
LogInECOSt ECHO Start value 1 int32
LogInECOBl Block ECHO 1 int32
LogInAlU 67NQ Permissive Units 1 int32
LogInBlU 67NQ Block Units 1 int32
LogInWIBl Weak Infeed Blocking 1 int32
GenTrip General Trip 0 1 1 NO / YES Boolean
TripPerm Trip permission by recloser 0 254 1 Bit meaning (1) ING
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (1P) (1)
Reclose 1 (3P) (2)
ReclPerm Reclose permission int32
Reclose 2-3-4 (4)
Reclose 1(1P)-2-3-4 (5)
Reclose 1(3P)-2-3-4 (6)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (7)
MaskEna Enable Events Record 0 1 1 NO / YES Boolean
DlETPTmms TPTx Delay time (ms) 0 1000 10 int32
It has independent settings and outputs:
 Node PROT/OCPSCH1
 There are no commands.
 Outputs: Table 103 shows the function's output data:
 TPRx 67NQ L1. Indicates that the line 1 teleprotection signal has been received.
 TPRx 67NQ L2. Indicates that the line 2 teleprotection signal has been received.
 GSR 67NQ L1. Indicates that the line 1 security signal loss has been received.
 GSR 67NQ L2. Indicates that the line 2 security signal loss has been received.
 TPTx 67NQ. Indicates that the teleprotection signal has been activated.
 ECHO 67NQ. Indicates that the ECHO signal has been activated.
 STOP 67NQ. The directional blocking scheme indicates that there is a fault but that it is not backwards. It is
used to indicate that TPTx is not being sent.
 WI 67NQ Trip. Indicates that the weak infeed conditions have been met during the configured time. There are
independent signals for each phase and a general signal.

User Manual 164
 Teleprotection 67NQ Trip. Indicates that the teleprotection has tripped.

 Weak infeed phase 67NQ. Indicates that the weak infeed conditions have been met in at least one phase.
 Permissive 67NQ Activation. Indicates that the permissive units have been activated.
 Block Inverted Current 67NQ. Indicates that current inversion block has been activated.
 Memory Inverted Current 67NQ: Current inversion block memorized. Indicates that current inversion block
memorization has been activated.
 85_L1_END_perm_GSL_67NQ. End of permission due to security signal loss in line 1.
 85_L2_END_perm_GSL_67NQ. End of permission due to security signal loss in line 2.
 Teleprotection 67NQ status. Indicates whether or not the teleprotection function is enabled. If the "Scheme
type" setting is selected as "Step Trip", it means that teleprotection is disabled. Any other option means that it
is enabled.
 ECHO 67NQ Status. Indicates whether or not the ECHO function is enabled.
 Weak infeed 67NQ status. Indicates whether or not the weak infeed function is enabled.
 Trip 67NQ A. Indicates that the phase A trip is activated, when the "Single Pole Trip 67NQ" setting, located in
the PROT/ZPMPT node, is enabled.
 Trip 67NQ B. Indicates that the phase B trip is activated, when the "Single Pole Trip 67NQ" setting, located in
 Trip 67NQ C. Indicates that the phase C trip is activated, when the "Single Pole Trip 67NQ" setting, located in
Table 103 Teleprotection scheme outputs.

TPRx 67NQ L1 ProRx stVal
TPRx 67NQ L2 ProRx2 stVal
SGR 67NQ L1 GSL1Rx stVal
SGR 67NQ L2 GSL2Rx stVal
TPTx 67NQ ProTx stVal
ECHO 67NQ Echo stVal
STOP 67NQ STOPTx stVal
27WI 67NQ Phase A WeakInF phsA
27WI 67NQ Phase B WeakInF phsB
27WI 67NQ Phase C WeakInF phsC
27WI 67NQ Trip WeakInF stVal
Teleprotection 67NQ Trip Op stVal
Weak Infeed Phase 67NQ StrWeakInF stVal
Permissive 67NQ Activation OpPerUnit stVal
Block Inverted Current 67NQ RvABlk stVal
Memory Inverted Current 67NQ MBlkInvDir stVal
85_L1_END_perm_GSL_67NQ GSL1End stVal
85_L2_END_perm_GSL_67NQ GSL2End stVal
Teleprotection 67NQ status TpSt stVal
ECHO 67NQ Status EchoSt stVal
Weak infeed 67NQ status WeiOpSt stVal
Trip 67NQ A OpNQA stVal
Trip 67NQ B OpNQB stVal
Trip 67NQ C OpNQC stVal

User Manual 165
3.12.1.2 Permissive underreaching

It causes an instantaneous teleprotection trip upon the reception of the teleprotection signal (TPRIx), together with
the pick up of unit 2, as long as the reverse memorization of unit 3 is not activated (Memory Inverted Current). It is
used to accelerate the trips at one end with the other indicates this.
This scheme is based on the idea that at least one of the protection devices at one end of the line will see the fault in
zone 1. If a terminal sees the fault in zone 1 and the other one sees it in zone 2, the fault can be considered as being
inside the line between both devices, in the section of the line close to the terminal which sees it in zone 1.
The terminal that sees the fault in unit 1, besides setting off an instantaneous trip, sends the trip permission signal
(TPTx) to the other end while unit 1 is activated. The terminal which detects the fault in unit 2 generates an
instantaneous trip with the reception of the teleprotection signal (TPRIx) together with the activation of unit 2 as long
as unit 3 is not activated.
Figure 94 Permissive Underreaching Logic Diagram
Figure 94 and Figure 89 show the permissive underreaching protection scheme. This figure is used to analyse how
the protection devices will act in the event of faults in F1, F2 and F3:
Figure 95 Fault examples
 Fault F1: Protection A sees the fault in unit 1, causing an instantaneous trip and sending a permission signal to
protection B. Protection B sees the fault in unit 2 and will set off a high-speed trip when it sees the fault in unit 2
and will receive protection A's permission command.
 Fault F2: Both protection devices see the fault in unit 1, causing a high-speed trip. Furthermore, redundant
commands are given by the communication channels.
 Fault F3: None of the protection devices will trip instantaneously. Protection A sees the fault in unit 2 but B does
not see the fault in the line to protect, not sending the permission signal to protection A. Hence, A's action in unit
2 will take place in unit 2 time.

User Manual 166
Inverse direction block: signal "Memory Inverted Current" can be eliminated from the logic by disabling this function.
In this case, "Memory Inverted Current" would be set permanently to 0.
In lines with more than two terminals, to apply this scheme, checks must be made to ensure that in the event on any
fault in any point in the line, at least the protection of one of the ends is detect in zone 1.
The scheme is applied to three-terminal lines by carrying an OR signal to the three of them from the TPRx of the
other two ends (See Figure 93).
3.12.1.3 Permissive overreaching

It produces an instantaneous teleprotection trip upon the reception of the teleprotection signal (TPRx), together with
the pick up of unit 2, as long as the memorized reverse zone is not activated (Memory Inverted Current).
In this protection scheme, a fault is considered internal to the line if both terminals see the fault in unit 2. An
instantaneous trip is caused if the teleprotection signal is received, together with activation of unit 2 as long as the
memorised unit 3 is not activated.
The teleprotection signal is sent upon the activation of the unit 2, without the detection of a reverse fault (Memory
Inverted Current).
Figure 96 Permissive Overreaching Logic Diagram
Figure 96 and Figure 89 show the permissive overreaching protection scheme. This figure is used to analyse how the
protection devices will act in the event of faults in F1, F2 and F3:
 Fault F1: Protection A sees the fault in zone 1(PIOC1 or GPIOC1), causing an instantaneous trip and sending a
permission signal to protection B, given that it sees the fault in zone 2 (PIOC2 or GPIOC2) (zone 2 includes
zone 1). Protection B trips instantaneously when it sees the fault in zone 2 and receives a permission order from
protection A. Protection B will also send a permission signal to protection A but it has already instantaneously
tripped in zone 1.
 Fault F2: Both protection devices see the fault in zone 1, causing a high-speed trip. Furthermore, redundant
 Fault F3: Protection A sees the fault in zone 2 and sends the permission signal to B, which sees the fault
backwards. When A does not receive the permission signal from B, zone 2's action will take place in zone 2
time. Protection B receives the permission signal from A, but when it sees the fault backwards, it will not trip.
Any fault in unit 3 (PIOC3 or GPIOC3) it will normally be eliminated in unit 3 time.
3.12.1.4 Directional unblocking

The directional unblocking scheme is used in overreaching schemes. Together with the TPRx signal, the channel
loss signal (GSLRx) is received.
In usual conditions, the signal GSLRx has the same value as the TPRx signal. Thus, if the TPRx signal is activated,
GSLRx is also activated. If both signals are deactivated there is not fault and the guard channel signal is not lost.
If the overreaching unit 2 (PIOC2 or GPIOC2) acts, the security signal works as an unblocking signal.
An instantaneous teleprotection trip will be issued by the zone 2 activation:
 If the unblock signals TPRx and GSLRx are received or

 When the device only receives the GSLRx signal, the timers start. When the “GSL minimum time (ms)”
(LoGMinTmms) delay is over without the reception of the TPRx signal, a trip is issued. Once the “GSL

User Manual 167
maximum time (ms)” has elapsed, no trip is enabled. Once the loss off channel signal is deactivated again a
third timer starts. When the “GSL drop out time (ms)” delay is over the previous logic is newly applied.
Figure 97 Treatment of Line 1 channel loss signals

User Manual 168
Figure 99 TPTx and Trip Signal Scheme
The figures show the directional unblocking protection scheme. This figure is used to analyse how the protection
devices will act in the event of faults in F1, F2 and F3:
Figure 100 Directional Unblocking Protection
N.B.: The signals received in GSLRx and TPRx directional blocking can only be received with values (active, active),
(active, inactive) or (inactive, inactive). They can never be (inactive, active) because the transmitter/receiver that
sends the signals, when there is communication and receives TPR gives the signals GSR and TPR and when there
is no communication, gives GSR but not TPR.
The GSLRx signal is active in 2 cases:
 When the security signal is lost or

 When TPRx is received. In this case, it is converted into a non-blocking signal. It behaves in the same way as in
the case of overreaching.
The GSLRx signal is deactivated when there is communication and there is no TPRx.

User Manual 169
Table 104 GSLRx and TPRIx Values in Directional Unblocking
GSLRx TPRIx TRIP Remark

0 0 0 Guard channel is not lost and there is not fault.
1 1 1 Guard channel is not lost and there is fault. GSLRx signal becomes a non-blocking
signal (GSLRx = 1).
1 0 Time Guard channel is not lost and we do not know if there is fault.
window When signal loss of guard channel is activated it opens a time window during which it
can produce GSLRx shot if the signal remains active for the programmed time (TPSG)
without reception of TPRIx
0 1 It is not possible because if we have TPRIx, it is because there is communication
Analysis is made of how the protection devices will act in the event of faults in F1, F2 and F3:
 Fault F1: Protection A sees the fault in zone 1, causing an instantaneous trip and changing the security signal to
an unblocking signal given that it sees the fault in zone 2 (zone 2 includes zone 1). Protection B sees the fault in
zone 2 and when it receives the unblocking signal from A, it will speed up the trip. If the security channel is lost,
when protection B's zone 2 is activated, it will speed up its trip if it receives the channel loss signal for the time
programmed for "security signal loss".
 Fault F2: Both protection devices see the fault in zone 1, causing a high-speed trip.
 Fault F3: Protection A sees the fault in zone 2 but does not speed up its trip given that protection B sees the
fault in zone 4 and therefore will not change the security signal for an unblocking signal.
3.12.1.5 Directional blocking

The TPTx blocking signal is sent if a backwards fault is detected (Memory Inverted Current).
A stop channel signal (STOP 67NQ) is activated if a forward fault is detected (overcurrent units 1 and 2) and it is
maintained during “Block delay time (ms)” (BlkTmms), without the detection of a fault in the unit 3 Memory Inverted
Current).
If the channel interruption signal (STOP 67NQ) is activated and the signal TPRx is not received, the signal
"Teleprotection 67NQ Trip" is activated.
If the input “TPTx Blocking input” is activated the signal TPRx is not sent. Furthermore, if the “TP Trip Block” input is
activated, the signal "Teleprotection 67NQ Trip" is blocked.
Figure 101 Directional Blocking Scheme
The blocking time is an additional delay time to give time for the blocking signal to be received and is programmable
by the user. The transmission time must be as low as possible with the aim of reducing this delay to a minimum.
The Figure 101, Figure 89 and Figure 90 show the directional blocking protection scheme. This figure is used to
analyse how the protection devices will act in the event of faults in F1, F2 and F3:

User Manual 170
Figure 102 Directional Blocking Protection
 Fault F1: Protection A detects the fault in zone 1 causing an instantaneous trip. Protection B detects the fault in
zone 2 and once the blocking time has elapsed, it will trip given that a blocking command is not received from A
since A does not detect the fault in zone 4.
 Fault F3: Protection A detects the fault in zone 2 but does not cause a fast trip given that protection B sees the
fault in zone 4 and will therefore send a blocking signal to A.
Care must be taken with the coordination of the blocking unit backwards (for example, B's zone 4) of each end with
the overreaching unit of the other end (A's zone 2), these being set so that the reach of the reverse unit is always
greater than the overreach's.
Figure 103 Coordinating the Reverse Blocking Unit.
This scheme has the advantage of not being sensitive to noise in the communication channel and has the
disadvantage of possibly causing untimely trips if the communication channel is lost.
The blocking scheme is usually used in long lines when the teleprotection signal is transmitted via the protected line
by the carrier wave and the diminishing of the signal transmitted at the point of fault can be so severe that reception
at the other end of the line cannot always be ensured.
3.12.1.6 ECHO
It is used together with permissive overreaching schemes by acting on the teleprotection (TPTx) signal.
The ECHO 67NQ signal only provides a programmable pulse. The ECHO function sends the teleprotection (TPTx)
signal with any of the following conditions:
 The ones corresponding to the permissive overreaching scheme.

 If TPRIx is received and no forward or reverse faults are detected.
 programmable for a minimum time (setting " ECHO delay time(ms)"), or
 the breaker is open (in this situation, it does not wait for the programmed time to elapse).
It is used together with permissive overreaching schemes in cases where one end of the line is open (Figure 105 end
B) or is a weak end (Figure 106 end B). In the event of a fault on the line near the weakly-fed or open end, the

User Manual 171
distance unit of this end of the line does not detect the fault. Hence, the trip will not be issued, nor will the permission
signal be sent to the other end of the line. Hence, since the permission signal will not be received, the strongly-fed
end of the line will not speed up its trip.
To speed up the trip at the strongly-fed end in the event of a fault at the opposite end, the Echo function returns the
TPRIx signal received to the remote terminal if it does not detect a fault forward or backwards, or if the circuit breaker
is open.
The resending of the TPRIx received (ECHO 67NQ) will be instantaneous if the circuit breaker is open and will suffer
a delay (EcActTmms) if there is a weak power supply. This delay makes it possible to cover situations in which there
is a higher fault detection time, or it start slightly later due to an unfavourable distribution of the fault current. This
delay is usually set to approximately 40ms.
“ECHO 67NQ” is a pulse that during “ECHO pulse time (ms)” (EcTmms), which is normally set to approximately 50
ms, thus assuring that the signal received is even recognised with different action times of the protection equipment
at ends of the lines and with different response times of the transmission equipment.
Figure 104 Echo Scheme and Weak Infeed

User Manual 172
Figure 105 Echo logic protection with breaker open in B
Figure 105 shows the ECHO Logic Sample, with the circuit breaker in B Open This scheme will be used to analyse
how the protection devices act in the event of faults F1 and F2 with the basic permissive overreaching scheme.
 Fault F1: Protection A detects the fault in its zone 1 and hence instantaneously trips and sends a permission
signal to B. End B is open so the fault is cleared.
 Fault F2: Protection A detects the fault in zone 2 and sends a permission signal to B. When the protection
device in B detects that the circuit breaker is open, it will resend the permission signal to protection A without
delay. When protection A detects the fault in zone 2 and having received the permission signal, it will speed up
its trip.
Figure 106 Echo and weak infeed example
Figure 106 shows the ECHO logic, and Weak infeed. This scheme will be used to analyse how the protection devices
act in the event of faults F1 and F2 with the basic permissive overreaching scheme.
 Fault F1: Protection A detects the fault in unit 1 and will hence trip instantaneously and send a permission signal
to B. The protection in B, being weakly fed, will not detect the fault, but as it receives the permission signal, it
will send back to A with the programmed delay, but A will be open. The circuit breaker at end B will remain
closed.
 Fault F2: Protection A detects the fault in unit 2 and sends a permission signal to B. The protection in B, being
weakly fed, will not detect the fault, but as it receives the permission signal, it will send back to A with the
programmed delay. When protection A sees the fault in unit 2 and has received the permission signal, it will
speed up its trip. The circuit breaker at end B will remain closed.
3.12.1.7 Weak infeed (27WI)

This is a complement to ECHO 67NQ, where if ECHO 67NQ conditions are met, with the circuit breaker closed and
undervoltage in at least one of the phases, a trip is produced.
The undervoltage unit associated to the weak infeed function has its own settings and is not dependent on the
undervoltage units.
The thresholds are 0.1V to 200V.

User Manual 173
If an unblocking scheme is used, the TPRIx signal is replaced by TPRIx & GSL.
If one end of the line is weakly fed (Figure 106 end B) with the echo logic, as seen in the previous section, the trip at
the strongly fed end is accelerated. However, the weakly fed end remains closed. This logic allows the opening of this
end of the line.
To detect the fault at the weak end, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
 TPRIx signal received (it will be sent to the strongly-fed end, as described in the ECHO function).
 The circuit breaker is closed.
 Undervoltage is detected in one of the phases (as a consequence of the fault). The settings recommended are
70%Vn for the voltage.
Figure 107 Protection in the weak infeed Logic, with End B Weakly Fed
Figure 107 shows the weak infeed logic, with end B weakly fed. This scheme will be used to analyse how the
protection devices act in the event of F1 faults with the basic permissive overreaching scheme.
weakly fed, will not detect the fault and when it receives the permission signal, it will send it to A after the set
time. When protection A sees the fault in unit 2 and has received the permission signal, it will speed up its trip.
When protection B fulfills the ECHO conditions and detects undervoltage (due to the existence of the fault), it
will give the trip command.
3.12.1.8 Inverse directional block

It delays the teleprotection trip for a number of cycles in order to allow the remote terminal time to clear the
permission signal (TPTx) following a change in the flow direction due to the opening of the breaker.
It is used in double circuit lines to prevent trips due to the change in the current flow which is caused when the circuit
breaker is opened at one end of the faulty line when this fault is cleared. The reversal of the current implies the
reversal of the protection device's directional elements, as well as the increase in the apparent distance to the fault.
The time between the repositioning of the distance elements and the functioning of the unit may give rise to a trip in
the healthy parallel line.
When the scheme is a blocking one, it keeps the blocking signal for a set time "Block delay time (ms)", blocking the
trip for a time after detecting a change in the fault's direction. When the scheme is permissive, it blocks the trip and
the emission of the permission for a set time after changing the direction in which it detects the fault (backwards to
forward).
The overcurrent unit 2 signal is used with a memorization time "Current Reversal Blocking(ms)" (RvATmms), which
enables the "Memory Inverted Current" signal to be used in the rest of the schemes (see Figure 90).
The following figures show the change in the current flow when the fault occurs and when circuit breaker K is opened
to clear this fault:
Inverse direction blocking with permissive schemes:
 When faults F occurs as can be seen in Figure 108.1, protection K will detect the fault in zone 1, J will either
detect it in 1 or 2 and H backwards. In this situation, K instantaneously opens the circuit breaker and sends the
permission signal to J and likewise, G sends the permission signal to H.
 When K opens, the current's flow is inverted as can be seen in Figure 108.2. In this new situation, G will detect
the fault backwards and H will detect it in zone 2. These conversions are not simultaneous or instantaneous.

User Manual 174
Hence, H could trip before G removes the permission signal. To prevent this trip, the teleprotection trip is
delayed for a number of cycles, to give the remote terminal time to remove the permission signal.
Figure 108 Change in the Current Flow When the Fault Occurs in a Double Circuit Line
Inverse direction blocking with blocking scheme:
 When the fault occurs as can be seen in Figure 107, protection K will detect the fault in zone 1, J will either
detect it in 1 or 2 and H backwards. When H detects the fault in its zone 4, it sends a blocking signal to G (or it
does not send the TPRIx signal, which is the same), preventing tripping due to acceleration in zone 2.
the fault backwards and H will detect it in zone 2. H would trip before receiving the blocking signal from G. To
prevent this, H will continue to detect the fault backwards, allowing time to receive the blocking signal.
It is recommended that the additional blocking time be set as follows:
Additional blocking time = operating time of the circuit breaker at the other end of the line (typically 3 cycles) + the
reset time of the communication channel (1 cycle) + the reset time of zone 2 of the relay at the other end of the line (1
cycle) = 5 cycles.
3.12.2 Z Teleprotection Schemes

High voltage line protection requires protection systems which are especially fast, selective and reliable with the aim of
not jeopardising the stability of the electrical system. To fulfil these requirements, it is necessary to use teleprotection
systems associated to the protection equipment installed in each end of the line. The protection device is equipped with a
teleprotection system for completely protecting the line with high-speed protection.
They are based upon the use of teleprotection signals between both end terminals of the line. The effect upon the output
relays’ operation is determined according to the signals given by the protection along with the signals given by the other
terminal.
From firmware version 6.0.8.0 and ICD version 8.1.0.4, the option of the phase-segregated teleprotection is included.
When the phase-segregated teleprotection is chosen, the teleprotection schemes are performed per phase. Moreover,
the setting "TPTx delay time (ms)" is included.

User Manual 175
 TPTx: teleprotection signal sent by a terminal.

 TPRIx: teleprotection signal received by a terminal.
 GSL: security channel loss signal (unblocking scheme).
 GSLRx: security channel loss signal received (unblocking scheme).
3.12.2.1 Introduction
3.12.2.1.1 Fault Detection Units
Teleprotection Z scheme will operate on the distance unit 21, Zone 1 and Zone 2 (forward), and zone 4 (backwards).
Mho and quad are both affected.
 Zone 1 (forward): Unit 21 zone 1 (PDIS1).

 Zone 2 (forward): Unit 21 zone 2 (PDIS2).
 Zone 4 (backwards): Unit 21 zone 4 (PDIS4).
3.12.2.1.2 Scheme Type

The schemes respond to two basic types:
 Blocking schemes: The signal received indicates that the fault is outside the protected zone. A relay can trip on
an overreaching zone if, after a definite time, the blocking signal has not been received.
 Permissive schemes: The signal received allows an instantaneous trip in the overreaching zone. The additional
ECHO, weak infeed and Current Reversal Blocking schemes can be used.
When selecting a particular scheme, it is useful to bear in mind the following characteristics for each of them: In the case
of an internal fault in the protected line and a communication channel fault in permissive schemes, protection is disabled
for tripping, whilst in blocking schemes, tripping is assured. However, in blocking schemes, if there is an external fault
and a communication channel fault, the device can trip.
If the communication system forms an integral part of the energy transport line, as in the case of carrier waves, it is best
to use the Current Reversal Blocking scheme, since internal faults may disturb or attenuate the carrier signal. Likewise, it
is best to use blocking schemes in weak infeed configurations as they are more reliable compared to permissive
schemes.
Finally, it should be mentioned that permissive schemes are faster than blocking schemes, given that the latter involve
slightly longer fault clear times, due to the security waiting time for receiving the potential blocking signal.
Several schemes are available:
 Step trip (none)

 Permissive overreaching (Overreaching POTT)
 Permissive underreaching (Underreaching PUTT)
 Directional blocking scheme
 Directional comparison unblocking scheme
Additionally, the following can be selected together with the schemes:

User Manual 176
 Direct transfer trip

 Echo
 Weak infeed
 Current Reversal Blocking
3.12.2.1.3 Flexible Units
In the case of the non-phase-segregated teleprotection, the signals that activate the sending of the teleprotection
between the different distance units can be configured for all the schemes. Two settings are included "Z Permissive Units
(1 bit)" and "Z Block Units (1 bit)" which enable both logic inputs to be carried with the pickups of the desired units. In this
way, the signals carried to the schemes can be made flexible.
The following logic inputs are configurable using flexible inputs. It is possible to connect any logic input to them:
 Faults forward ("Z Permissive Units (1 bit)").

 Faults backward ("Z Block Units (1 bit)").
Figure 109 and Figure 110 show the logic diagrams with the configurable logic inputs.
Figure 109 Permissive Logic Diagram
Figure 110 Inverse Directional Blocking Scheme
In the case of phase-segregated teleprotection, the permissive and block units have several selection options. One
signal per phase is activated.
 Z Permissive Units (3 bits).

 Predefined. Correspond to Zone 2
 Zone 3.
 Zone 5
 Z Block Units (3 bits).
 Predefined. Correspond to Zone 4
 Zona 3.
 Zona 5

User Manual 177
Figure 111 Permissive logic Diagram phase A, phase-segregated teleprotection
Figure 112 Inverse Directional Blocking Scheme, phase A, phase-segregated teleprotection
3.12.2.1.4 Input / output signals

The following signals are used in the schemes:
 TPTx_21. Teleprotection signal sent by a terminal. In the case of phase-segregated teleprotection there is one
signal per phase.
 TPRIx_21. Teleprotection input received by a terminal. In the case of phase-segregated teleprotection there is
one signal per phase.
 TPRx_21. Follows the TPRIx_21 input to become activated, but memorises the input during the set time “TPRx
Drop out time (ms)” (RsRTPTmms) to deactivate itself. If this setting is equal to zero, then TPRx21 coincides
with the input TPRIx 21. TPRx is used in the teleprotection schemes. In the case of phase-segregated
teleprotection there is one signal per phase.

User Manual 178
 GSLRx_21. Line security signal loss. Indicates that the data channel established between the two teleprotection
devices is inactive.
Figure 113 Teleprotection Reception
Figure 115 Phase A phase-segregated teleprotection reception
Figure 116 Phase A phase-segregated teleprotection, TPTx Block Scheme
3.12.2.1.5 Three terminal lines

In the case of three terminal lines, the signals taken into account are the signals received from each terminal.
Figure 117 Teleprotection reception in three terminal lines
Permissive Schemes

User Manual 179
Blocking Schemes
In the case of phase-segregated teleprotection there is one signal per phase.

Figure 118 Teleprotection reception in 3 terminal lines, phase A, phase-segregated teleprotection.
Permissive Schemes, phase A
Blocking Schemes, phase A
3.12.2.1.6 Settings and signals

The settings for selecting the protection schemes are:
 Scheme type: Selects the type of scheme. Allows you to select between:
 Step Trip (0)
 Overreaching POTT(1)
 Underreaching PUTT(2)
 Direct.comp. block(3)
 Direct.comp. unbl.(4)
 TPRx Drop out time (ms). Memorization time of the teleprotection received signal (TPRx).
 Block delay time (ms). Additional waiting time for the block signal.
 GSL Minimum time (ms). Minimum security signal loss time to allow trips.
 GSL Maximum time (ms). Maximum time during which the trip permission for loss of security signal is enabled.
 GSL Drop out time (ms). Drop out time following the recovery of the security channel.
 ECHO enabled. Enables the ECHO function.
 ECHO pulse time (ms). The duration of the ECHO signal pulse.
 ECHO Blocking time (ms). Time after the deactivation of the signal Z_FW (Z Permissive Units) during which it is
considered as being active.
 ECHO delay time (ms). The time during which the conditions for the activation of the ECHO signal must be met.
 Current Reversal Blocking. Enables trip blocking for a time after seeing a change in the fault's direction.
(Reversal direction memorisation).
 Current rev pickup t. (ms). Reversal direction memorization time.
 Weak Infeed Enabled. Enables the weak infeed function.
 Weak infeed Threshold (V). Voltage threshold to consider weak infeed.

User Manual 180
received.
received.
received.
received.
 TP Trip Block. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the teleprotection trip.
 TPTx Blocking input. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the blocking of the TPTX signal
transmission.
 ECHO Start value. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates ECHO start for teleprotection schemes.
 Block ECHO (logic input). Selects the signal which, when active, indicates ECHO blocking for teleprotection
schemes.
 Z Permissive Units (1 bit). Allows the selection of an alternative pickup signal for zone 2: selects the signal
which when active, indicates the activation of the Z pickup signal used in permissive units. If this signal is
configured, Z functions are not taken into account. Only in the non-phase-segregated protection.
 Z Block Units (1 bit). Allows the selection of an alternative pickup signal for backwards zone: selects the signal
which when active, indicates the activation of the Z pickup signal used in blocking units. If this signal is
configured, Z functions are not taken into account. Only in the non-phase-segregated protection.
 Weak Infeed Blocking. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the blocking of the weak infeed scheme.
 Reclose permission. Indicates whether each trip type can be reclosed or not, in accordance with the recloser's
 TPTx Delay time (ms). TPTx signal delay time.
 Phase-segregated teleprotection. Enables the phase-segregated teleprotection.
 TPRx_21 line 1A. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates that the line 1's phase A teleprotection signal
has been received. Only in phase-segregated teleprotection.
 TPRx_21 line 1B. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates that the line 1's phase B teleprotection signal
 TPRx_21 line 1C. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates that the line 1's phase C teleprotection signal
 TPRx_21 line 2A. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates that the line 2's phase A teleprotection signal
 TPRx_21 line 2B. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates that the line 2's phase B teleprotection signal
 TPRx_21 line 2C. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates that the line 2's phase C teleprotection signal
 Z Permissive Units (3 bits). It allows to select an alternative zone to zone 2. It selects the zone, whose start,
causes the activation of the permissive units. It is only used when the teleprotection is phase-segregated.
 Predefined (0). It correspond to Zone 2.
 Zone 3 (1)

User Manual 181
 Zone 5 (2)
 Z Block Units (3 bits). It allows to select an alternative zone to zone 4. It selects the zone, whose start, causes
the activation of the block units. It is only used when the teleprotection is phase-segregated.
 Predefined (0). It correspond to Zone 4
 Zone 3 (1)
 Zone 5 (2)
Table 105 Teleprotection scheme settings

Step Trip (0)
Overreaching POTT (1)
SchTyp Scheme type 0 4 1 Underreaching PUTT (2) enum
Direct. comp. block. (3)
Direct. comp. unbl.(4)
RsRTPTmms TPRx Drop out time (ms) 0 4 1 int32
BlkTmms Block delay time (ms) 0 1000 10 int32
LoGMinTmms GSL Minimum time (ms) 0 1000 10 int32
LoGMaxTmms GSL Maximum time (ms) 0 400 10 int32
LoGRepTmms GSL Drop out time (ms) 0 400 10 int32
EcEna ECHO enabled 0 400 10 NO / YES enum
EcTmms ECHO pulse time (ms) 0 1 1 int32
EcBlkTmms ECHO Blocking time (ms) 0 10000 10 int32
EcActTmms ECHO delay time (ms) 0 1000 10 int32
RvAEna Current Reversal Blocking 0 200 10 NO / YES enum
RvATmms Current rev pickup t. (ms) 0 1 1 int32
WIEna Weak Infeed Enabled 0 10000 10 NO / YES enum
WeiVal Weak Infeed Threshold (V) 0 1 1 float
LogInRTP1 TPRx _21 line 1 0,1 200 0,01 int32
LogInRTP2 TPRx _21 line 2 int32
LogInPSG1 GSLRx_21 line 1 int32
LogInPSG2 GSLRx_21 line 2 int32
LogInBl TP Trip Block int32
LogInETPBl TPTx Blocking input int32
LogInECOSt ECHO Start value int32
LogInECOBl Block ECHO int32
LogInAlU Z Permissive Units int32
LogInBlU Z Block Units int32
LogInWIBl Weak Infeed Blocking int32
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (1P) (1)
Reclose 1 (3P) (2
ReclPerm Reclose permission 0 1 1 enum
Reclose 2-3-4 (4)
Reclose1(1P)-2-3-4 (5)
Reclose1(3P)-2-3-4 (6)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (7)
DlETPTmms TPTx Delay time (ms) 0 1000 10 int32
NO – 1 bit (0)
enum
SegTpc Segregated teleprotection YES - 3 bits (1)
LogInRTP1A TPRx_21 line 1A int32
LogInRTP1B TPRx_21 line 1B int32
LogInRTP1C TPRx_21 line 1C int32
LogInRTP2A TPRx_21 line 2A int32
LogInRTP2B TPRx_21 line 2B int32
LogInRTP2C TPRx_21 line 2C int32
Predefined (0)
Zone 3 (1) enum
PmsAIU Z Permissive Units (3 bits) Zone 5 (2)
Predefined (0)
Zone 3 (1) enum
BlkBIU Z Block Units (3 bits) Zone 5 (2)

User Manual 182
It has independent settings and outputs:
 Node PROT/ZPSCH1
 There are no commands
 Outputs: Table 106 shows the function's output data:
 TPRx Z L1. Indicates that the line 1 teleprotection signal has been received.
 TPRx Z L2. Indicates that the line 2 teleprotection signal has been received.
 GSR Z L1. Indicates that the line 1 security signal loss has been received.
 GSR Z L2. Indicates that the line 2 security signal loss has been received.
 TPTx Z. Indicates that the teleprotection signal has been activated.
 ECHO Z. Indicates that the ECHO signal has been activated.
 STOP Z. The directional blocking scheme indicates that there is a fault but that it is not backwards. It is used
to indicate that TPTx is not being sent.
 27WI Z Trip Weak infeed trip. Indicates that the weak infeed conditions have been met during the configured
time.
 27WI Z Phase X. Weak infeed trip. Indicates that the weak infeed conditions have been met during the
configured time. There are independent signals for each phase.
 Teleprotection Z Trip. Indicates that the teleprotection has tripped.
 Weak Infeed Phase Z. Indicates that the weak infeed conditions have been met in at least one phase.
 Permissive Z Activation. Indicates that the permissive units have been activated.
 Block Inverted Current Z. Indicates that current inversion block has been activated.
 Memory Inverted Current Z: Current inversion block memorized. Indicates that current inversion block
 85_L1_END_perm_GSL_Z. End of permission due to security signal loss in line 1.
 85_L2_END_perm_GSL_Z. End of permission due to security signal loss in line 2.
 Teleprotection Z status. Indicates whether or not the teleprotection function is enabled. If the "Scheme type"
setting is selected as "Step Trip", it means that teleprotection is disabled. Any other option means that it is
enabled.
 ECHO Z Status. Indicates whether or not the ECHO Z function is enabled.
 Weak infeed Z status. Indicates whether or not the weak infeed function is enabled.
 TPRx Z L1A. Indicates that the line 1 phase A teleprotection signal has been received.
 TPRx Z L1B. Indicates that the line 1 phase B teleprotection signal has been received.
 TPRx Z L1C. Indicates that the line 1 phase C teleprotection signal has been received.
 TPRx Z L2A. Indicates that the line 2 phase A teleprotection signal has been received.
 TPRx Z L2B. Indicates that the line 2 phase B teleprotection signal has been received.
 TPRx Z L2C. Indicates that the line 2 phase C teleprotection signal has been received.
 TPTx Z_A. Indicates that the teleprotection phase A signal has been activated.
 TPTx Z_B. Indicates that the teleprotection phase B signal has been activated.
 TPTx Z_C. Indicates that the teleprotection phase C signal has been activated.
 ECHO Z_A. Indicates that the ECHO phase A signal has been activated.
 ECHO Z_B. Indicates that the ECHO phase A signal has been activated.
 ECHO Z_C. Indicates that the ECHO phase A signal has been activated.
 STOP Z_A. The directional blocking scheme indicates that there is a fault but that it is not backwards. It is
used to indicate that TPTx phase A is not being sent.
 STOP Z_B. The directional blocking scheme indicates that there is a fault but that it is not backwards. It is
used to indicate that TPTx phase B is not being sent.
 STOP Z_C. The directional blocking scheme indicates that there is a fault but that it is not backwards. It is
used to indicate that TPTx phase C is not being sent.

User Manual 183
 Teleprotección Trip Z_A. Indicates that a teleprotection phase A has tripped.

 Teleprotección Trip Z_B. Indicates that a teleprotection phase B has tripped.
 Teleprotección Trip Z_C. Indicates that a teleprotection phase C has tripped.
 Permissive U activation A. Indicates that the permissive units for phase A have been activated.
 Permissive U activation B. Indicates that the permissive units for phase B have been activated.
 Permissive U activation C. Indicates that the permissive units for phase C have been activated.
 Block invertion current A. Indicates that current A inversion block has been activated.
 Block invertion current B. Indicates that current B inversion block has been activated.
 Block invertion current C. Indicates that current C inversion block has been activated.
 Memory invertion current A. Current A inversion block memorized. Indicates that current A inversion block
 Memory invertion current B. Current B inversion block memorized. Indicates that current B inversion block
 Memory invertion current C. Current C inversion block memorized. Indicates that current C inversion block

User Manual 184
Table 106 Teleprotection schemes signals

TPRx Z L1 ProRx stVal
TPRx Z L2 ProRx2 stVal
GSR Z L1 GSL1Rx stVal
GSR Z L2 GSL2Rx stVal
TPTx Z ProTx stVal
ECHO Z Echo stVal
STOP Z STOPTx stVal
27WI Z Phase A WeakInF phsA
27WI Z Phase B WeakInF phsB
27WI Z Phase C WeakInF phsC
27WI Z Trip WeakInF stVal
Teleprotection Z Trip Op stVal
Weak Infeed Phase Z StrWeakInF stVal
Permissive Z Activation OpPerUnit stVal
Block Inverted Current Z RvABlk stVal
Memory Inverted Current Z MBlkInvDir stVal
85_L1_END_perm_GSL_Z GSL1End stVal
85_L2_END_perm_GSL_Z GSL2End stVal
Teleprotection Z status TpSt stVal
ECHO Z Status EchoSt stVal
Weak infeed Z status WeiOpSt stVal
TPRx Z L1A ProRxA stVal
TPRx Z L1B ProRxB stVal
TPRx Z L1C ProRxC stVal
TPRx Z L2A ProRx2A stVal
TPRx Z L2B ProRx2B stVal
TPRx Z L2C ProRx2C stVal
TPTx Z_A ProTxA stVal
TPTx Z_B ProTxB stVal
TPTx Z_C ProTxC stVal
ECHO Z_A EchoA stVal
ECHO Z_B EchoB stVal
ECHO Z_C EchoC stVal
STOP Z_A STOPTxA stVal
STOP Z_B STOPTxB stVal
STOP Z_C STOPTxC stVal
Teleprotection Trip Z_A TpcTripA stVal
Teleprotection Trip Z_B TpcTripB stVal
Teleprotection Trip Z_C TpcTripC stVal
Permissive U activation A OpPerUnitA stVal
Permissive U activation B OpPerUnitB stVal
Permissive U activation C OpPerUnitC stVal
Block invertion current A RvABlkA stVal
Block invertion current B RvABlkB stVal
Block invertion current C RvABlkC stVal
Memory invertion current A MBlkInvDirA stVal
Memory invertion current B MBlkInvDirB stVal
Memory invertion current C MBlkInvDirC stVal

User Manual 185
3.12.2.2 Permissive underreaching

It causes an instantaneous teleprotection trip upon the reception of the teleprotection signal (TPRIx), together with
the pick up of zone 2, as long as the reverse memorization of zone 4 is not activated (21 memory inverted current). It
is used to accelerate the trips at one end with the other indicates this.
This scheme is based on the idea that at least one of the protection devices at one end of the line will see the fault in
zone 1. If a terminal sees the fault in zone 1 and the other one sees it in zone 2, the fault can be considered as being
inside the line between both devices, in the section of the line close to the terminal which sees it in zone 1.
The terminal that sees the fault in zone 1, besides setting off an instantaneous trip, sends the trip permission signal
(TPTx) to the other end while zone 1 is activated. The terminal which detects the fault in zone 2 generates an
instantaneous trip with the reception of the teleprotection signal (TPRIx) together with the activation of a unit in zone
2 as long as zone 4 is not activated.
Figure 120 Permissive Underreaching Logic Diagram
In the case of phase-segregated teleprotection, a TPTx of the faulted phase will be sent. For producing the
teleprotection trip of one phase, the TPRx of this phase and the corresponding permissive unit has to be activated. In
addition, it the does not have to see the fault backwards in that phase (Z Block units).
There is one signal per phase.
 TPTx_A: Fault AN, AB, CA.

 TPTx_B: Fault BN, AB, BC.
 TPTx_C: Fault CN, BC, CA

User Manual 186
Figure 121 Permissive Underreaching Logic Diagram, phase A, phase-segregated teleprotection
Figure 122 and Figure 109 show the permissive underreaching protection scheme. This figure is used to analyse how
Figure 122 Fault examples
III
II
Protección Protección
x1 u1
x2 u1 x1 u2
x3 u3
A B
F1 F2 I F3
II
III
 Fault F1: Protection A sees the fault in zone 1, causing an instantaneous trip and sending a permission signal to
protection B. Protection B sees the fault in zone 2 and will set off a high-speed trip when it sees the fault in zone
2 and will receive protection A's permission command.

User Manual 187
 Fault F3: None of the protection devices will trip instantaneously. Protection A sees the fault in zone 2 but B
does not see the fault in the line to protect, not sending the permission signal to protection A. Hence, A's action
in zone 2 will take place in zone 2 time.
Inverse direction block: signal "Memory Inverted Current" can be eliminated from the logic by disabling this function.
In this case, "Memory Inverted Current" would be set permanently to 0.
In lines with more than two terminals, to apply this scheme, it has to be ensured that in the event on any fault in any
point in the line, at least the protection of one of the ends detects it in zone 1.
The scheme is applied to three-terminal lines by carrying an OR signal to the three of them from the TPRx of the
other two ends (See Figure 93).
3.12.2.3 Permissive overreaching

It produces an instantaneous teleprotection trip upon the reception of the teleprotection signal (TPRx), together with
the pick up of zone 2, as long as the memorized reverse zone is not activated (Memory Inverted Current).
In this protection scheme, a fault is considered internal to the line if both terminals see the fault in zone 2. An
instantaneous trip is caused if the teleprotection signal is received, together with activation of a unit in zone 2 as long
as the memorised zone 4 is not activated.
The teleprotection signal is sent upon the activation of the zone 2 units, without the detection of a reverse fault
(Memory Inverted Current).
Figure 123 Permissive Overreaching Logic Diagram
teleprotection trip of one phase, the TPRx of this phase and the corresponding permissive unit has to be activated. In
addition, it the does not have to see the fault backwards in that phase (Z Block units).
 TPTx_A: Fault AN, AB, CA.

 TPTx_B: Fault BN, AB, BC.
 TPTx_C: Fault CN, BC, CA.

User Manual 188
Figure 124 Permissive Overreaching Logic Diagram, phase A, phase-segregated teleprotection
Figure 123 and Figure 109 show the permissive overreaching protection scheme. This figure is used to analyse how
 Fault F1: Protection A sees the fault in zone 1 (PDIS1), causing an instantaneous trip and sending a permission
signal to protection B, given that it sees the fault in zone 2 (PDIS2) (zone 2 includes zone 1). Protection B trips
instantaneously when it sees the fault in zone 2 and receives a permission order from protection A. Protection B
will also send a permission signal to protection A but it has already instantaneously tripped in zone 1.
 Fault F3: Protection A sees the fault in zone 2 and sends the permission signal to B, which sees the fault
backwards. When A does not receive the permission signal from B, zone 2's action will take place in zone 2
time. Protection B receives the permission signal from A, but when it sees the fault backwards, it will not trip.
Any fault in zone 3 (PDIS3) will be eliminated in zone 3 time.
3.12.2.4 Directional unblocking

The directional unblocking scheme is used in overreaching schemes. Together with the TPRx signal, the channel
loss signal (GSLRx) is received.
In usual conditions, the signal GSLRx has the same value as the TPRx signal. Thus, if the TPRx signal is activated,
GSLRx is also activated. If both signals are deactivated there is not fault and the guard channel signal is not lost.
If the overreaching zone 2 (PDIS2) acts, the security signal works as an unblocking signal.
An instantaneous teleprotection trip will be issued by the zone 2 activation:
 If the unblock signals TPRx and GSLRx are received or

User Manual 189
 When the device only receives the GSLRx signal, the timers start. When the “GSL minimum time (ms)”
(LoGMinTmms) delay is over without the reception of the TPRx signal, a trip is issued. Once the “GSL
maximum time (ms)” has elapsed, no trip is enabled. Once the loss off channel signal is deactivated again a
third timer starts. When the “GSL drop out time (ms)” delay is over the previous logic is newly applied.
The directional unblocking scheme does not allow phase-segregated teleprotection.

User Manual 190
Figure 127 TPTx and Trip Signal Scheme
The figures show the directional unblocking protection scheme. This figure is used to analyse how the protection
devices will act in the event of faults in F1, F2 and F3:
Figure 128 Directional Unblocking Protection scheme
N.B.: The signals received in the directional blocking (GSLRx and TPRx) can only be received with the values (active,
active), (active, inactive) or (inactive, inactive). They can never be (inactive, active) because the transmitter/receiver
that sends the signals, when there is communication and receives TPR gives the signals GSR and TPR and when
there is no communication, gives GSR but not TPR.
The GSLRx signal is active in 2 cases:
 When the security signal is lost or

 When TPRx is received. In this case, it is converted into a non-blocking signal. It behaves in the same way as in
the case of overreaching.
The GSLRx signal is deactivated when there is communication and there is no TPRx.
Table 107 GSLRx and TPRIx Values in Directional Unblocking
GSLRx TPRIx TRIP Remark

0 0 0 Guard channel is not lost and there is not fault.
Guard channel is not lost and there is a fault. GSLRx signal becomes a non-blocking signal (GSLRx =
1 1 1
1).
Guard channel is not lost and we do not know if there is a fault.
Time
1 0 When signal loss of guard channel is activated it opens a time window during which it can produce
window
GSLRx shot if the signal remains active for the programmed time (TPSG) without reception of TPRIx
0 1 It is not possible because if we have TPRIx, it is because there is communication

User Manual 191
Analysis is made of how the protection devices will act in the event of faults in F1, F2 and F3:
 Fault F1: Protection A sees the fault in zone 1, causing an instantaneous trip and changing the security signal to
an unblocking signal given that it sees the fault in zone 2 (zone 2 includes zone 1). Protection B sees the fault in
zone 2 and when it receives the unblocking signal from A, it will speed up the trip. If the security channel is lost,
when protection B's zone 2 is activated, it will speed up its trip if it receives the channel loss signal for the time
programmed for "security signal loss".
 Fault F3: Protection A sees the fault in zone 2 but does not speed up its trip given that protection B sees the
fault in zone 4 and therefore will not change the security signal for an unblocking signal.
3.12.2.5 Directional blocking

The TPTx blocking signal is sent if a backwards fault is detected (Memory Inverted Current).
A stop channel signal (STOP Z) is activated if a forward fault is detected (zone 1 or zone 2) and it is maintained
during “Block delay time (ms)” (BlkTmms), without the detection of a fault in zone 4 (Z4_MEM).
If the channel interruption signal (STOP Z) is activated and the signal TPRx is not received, the signal "Teleprotection
Z Trip" is activated.
If the input “TPTx Blocking input” is activated the signal TPRx is not sent. Furthermore, if the “TP Trip Block” input is
activated, the signal "Teleprotection Z Trip" is blocked.
Figure 129 Directional Blocking Scheme
The blocking time is an additional delay time to give time for the blocking signal to be received and is programmable
by the user. The transmission time must be as low as possible with the aim of reducing this delay to a minimum.
teleprotection trip of one phase, the TPRx of this phase does not have to be activated. In addition, the STOP signal
and the permissive units of this phase have to be activated.
 The signals corresponding to phase A, are activated with the faults AN, AB, CA.
 The signals corresponding to phase B, are activated with the faults BN, AB, BC.
 The signals corresponding to phase C, are activated with the faults CN, BC, CA.

User Manual 192
Figure 130 Directional Blocking Scheme, phase A, phase-segregated teleprotection
The Figure 109 and Figure 110 show the directional blocking protection scheme. This scheme is used to analyse how
 Fault F1: Protection A detects the fault in zone 1 causing an instantaneous trip. Protection B detects the fault in
zone 2 and once the blocking time has elapsed, it will trip given that a blocking command is not received from A
since A does not detect the fault in zone 4.
 Fault F3: Protection A detects the fault in zone 2 but does not cause a fast trip given that protection B sees the
fault in zone 4 and will therefore send a blocking signal to A.
Figure 131 Directional blocking example
Care must be taken with the coordination of the blocking unit backwards (for example, B's zone 4) of each end with
the overreaching unit of the other end (A's zone 2), these being set so that the reach of the reverse unit is always
greater than the overreach's.
Figure 132 Coordinating the Reverse Blocking Unit
This scheme has the advantage of not being sensitive to noise in the communication channel and has the
disadvantage of possibly causing untimely trips if the communication channel is lost.
The blocking scheme is usually used in long lines when the teleprotection signal is transmitted via the protected line
by the carrier wave and the diminishing of the signal transmitted at the point of fault can be so severe that reception
at the other end of the line cannot always be ensured.

User Manual 193
3.12.2.6 ECHO
It is used together with permissive overreaching schemes by acting on the teleprotection (TPTx) signal.
The ECHO Z signal only provides a programmable pulse. The ECHO function sends the teleprotection (TPTx) signal
with any of the following conditions:
 The ones corresponding to the permissive overreaching scheme.

 If TPRIx is received and no forward or reverse faults are detected.
 programmable for a minimum time (setting " ECHO delay time(ms)"), or
 the breaker is open (in this situation, it does not wait for the programmed time to elapse).
Figure 133 Echo and weak infeed scheme

User Manual 194
Figure 134 Weak infeed scheme signals
In the case of phase-segregated teleprotection, one TPRx will be received per phase, also activating one ECHO per
phase.
Figure 135. Echo and weak infeed scheme, phase A, phase-segregated teleprotection

User Manual 195
It is used together with permissive overreaching schemes in cases where one end of the line is open (Figure 105 end
B) or is a weak end (Figure 106 end B). In the event of a fault on the line near the weakly-fed or open end, the
distance unit of this end of the line does not detect the fault. Hence, the trip will not be issued, nor will the permission
signal be sent to the other end of the line. Hence, since the permission signal will not be received, the strongly-fed
end of the line will not speed up its trip.
To speed up the trip at the strongly-fed end in the event of a fault at the opposite end, the Echo function returns the
TPRIx signal received to the remote terminal if it does not detect a fault forward or backwards, or if the circuit breaker
is open.
The resending of the TPRIx received (ECHO Z) will be instantaneous if the circuit breaker is open and will suffer a
delay (EcActTmms) if there is a weak power supply. This delay makes it possible to cover situations in which there is
a higher fault detection time, or it start slightly later due to an unfavourable distribution of the fault current. This delay
is usually set to approximately 40ms.
"ECHO Z" is a pulse that during "ECHO pulse time (ms)" (EcTmms), which is normally set to approximately 50 ms,
thus assuring that the signal received is even recognised with different action times of the protection equipment at
ends of the lines and with different response times of the transmission equipment.
Figure 136 Echo logic protection with breaker open in B
Figure 134 shows the ECHO Logic Sample, with the circuit breaker in B Open This scheme will be used to analyse
how the protection devices act in the event of faults F1 and F2 with the basic permissive overreaching scheme.
 Fault F1: Protection A detects the fault in its zone 1 and hence instantaneously trips and sends a permission
signal to B. End B is open so the fault is cleared.
 Fault F2: Protection A detects the fault in zone 2 and sends a permission signal to B. When the protection
device in B detects that the circuit breaker is open, it will resend the permission signal to protection A without
delay. When protection A detects the fault in zone 2 and having received the permission signal, it will speed up
its trip.
Figure 137 Echo and weak infeed example
Figure 134 shows the ECHO logic, and Weak infeed. This scheme will be used to analyse how the protection devices
act in the event of faults F1 and F2 with the basic permissive overreaching scheme.
 Fault F1: Protection A detects the fault in unit 1 and will hence trip instantaneously and send a permission signal
to B. The protection in B, being weakly fed, will not detect the fault, but as it receives the permission signal, it
will send back to A with the programmed delay, but A will be open. The circuit breaker at end B will remain
closed.
weakly fed, will not detect the fault, but as it receives the permission signal, it will send back to A with the
programmed delay. When protection A sees the fault in unit 2 and has received the permission signal, it will
speed up its trip. The circuit breaker at end B will remain closed.

User Manual 196
3.12.2.7 Weak infeed (27WI)

This is a complement to ECHO Z, where if ECHO Z conditions are met, with the circuit breaker closed and
undervoltage in at least one of the phases, a trip is produced.
The undervoltage unit associated to the weak infeed function has its own settings and is not dependent on the
undervoltage units.
The thresholds are 0.1V to 200V.
If an unblocking scheme is used, the TPRIx signal is replaced by TPRIx & GSL.
If one end of the line is weakly fed (Figure 106 end B) with the echo logic, as seen in the previous section, the trip at
the strongly fed end is accelerated. However, the weakly fed end remains closed. This logic allows the opening of this
end of the line.
To detect the fault at the weak end, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
 TPRIx signal received (it will be sent to the strongly-fed end, as described in the ECHO function).
 The circuit breaker is closed.
 Undervoltage is detected in one of the phases (as a consequence of the fault). The settings recommended are
70%Vr for the voltage.
Figure 138 Protection in the Weak Infeed Logic, with End B Weakly Fed
Figure 107 shows the weak infeed logic, with end B weakly fed. This scheme will be used to analyse how the
protection devices act in the event of F1 faults with the basic permissive overreaching scheme.
 Fault F1: Protection A detects the fault in zone 2 and sends a permission signal to B. The protection in B, being
Weak Infeed, will not detect the fault and when it receives the permission signal, it will send it to A after the set
time. When protection A sees the fault in zone 2 and has received the permission signal, it will speed up its trip.
When protection B fulfills the ECHO conditions and detects undervoltage (due to the existence of the fault), it
will give the trip command.
3.12.2.8 Inverse directional block

It delays the teleprotection trip for a number of cycles in order to allow the remote terminal time to clear the
permission signal (TPTx) following a change in the flow direction due to the opening of the breaker.
It is used in double circuit lines to prevent trips due to the change in the current flow which is caused when the circuit
breaker is opened at one end of the faulty line when this fault is cleared. The reversal of the current implies the
reversal of the protection device's directional elements, as well as the increase in the apparent distance to the fault.
The time between the repositioning of the distance elements and the functioning of the unit may give rise to a trip in
the healthy parallel line.
When the scheme is a blocking onee, it keeps the blocking signal for a set time "Block delay time (ms)”, blocking the
trip for a time after detecting a change in the fault's direction. When the scheme is permissive, it blocks the trip and
the emission of the permission for a set time after changing the direction in which it detects the fault (backwards to
forward).
The zone 4 signal is used with a memorization time "Current rev pickup t (ms)" (RvATmms), which enables the
"Memory Inverted Current" signal to be used in the rest of the schemes.

User Manual 197
In the case of phase-segregated teleprotection, the signal used for the blocking will depend on what is set in "Z Block
Units (3 bits)”, activating a signal per phase.
 The signals corresponding to phase A, are activated with the faults AN, AB, CA.
 The signals corresponding to phase B, are activated with the faults BN, AB, BC.
 The signals corresponding to phase C, are activated with the faults CN, BC, CA.
The following figures show the change in the current flow when the fault occurs and when circuit breaker K is opened
to clear this fault:
Figure 139 Change in the Current Flow When the Fault Occurs in a Double Circuit Line
Inverse direction blocking with permissive schemes:
 When faults F occurs as can be seen in Figure 108.1, protection K will detect the fault in zone 1, J will either
detect it in 1 or 2 and H backwards. In this situation, K instantaneously opens the circuit breaker and sends the
permission signal to J and likewise, G sends the permission signal to H.
the fault backwards and H will detect it in zone 2. These conversions are not simultaneous or instantaneous.
Hence, H could trip before G removes the permission signal. To prevent this trip, the teleprotection trip is
delayed for a number of cycles, to give the remote terminal time to remove the permission signal.
Inverse direction blocking with blocking scheme:
 When the fault occurs as can be seen in Figure 107, protection K will detect the fault in zone 1, J will either
detect it in 1 or 2 and H backwards. When H detects the fault in its zone 4, it sends a blocking signal to G (or it
does not send the TPRIx signal, which is the same), preventing tripping due to acceleration in zone 2.
the fault backwards and H will detect it in zone 2. H would trip before receiving the blocking signal from G. To
prevent this, H will continue to detect the fault backwards, allowing time to receive the blocking signal.
It is recommended that the additional blocking time be set as follows:
Additional blocking time = operating time of the circuit breaker at the other end of the line (typically 3 cycles) + the
reset time of the communication channel (1 cycle) + the reset time of zone 2 of the relay at the other end of the line (1
cycle) = 5 cycles.

User Manual 198
3.12.3 Direct trip

This additional teleprotection scheme causes a single-pole or three-pole trip upon the reception of the teleprotection
signal, regardless of the status of the protection functions.
In order to operate correctly, it must be enabled. Furthermore, a digital input must be programmed as a direct trip,
otherwise it is like being disabled.
The reception signals associated to the direct trip are:
 Direct trip pole A, B or C: Causes an external single-pole trip in the corresponding pole.
 Direct trip pole ABC: Causes the command to open as well as an external three-pole trip.
Any digital signal can be used as an output signal for signalling a direct trip to the other extreme, either via the
programming of the digital outputs or via the programmable logics.
If a trip is received by two or more poles, it is considered to be a three-pole trip.
A particular feature of the scheme is the direct trip, in which the input signals are generic but unit 1's signals zone
used as the output signals.
The settings for the configuration of this unit are shown in Table 110.
 Enabled: Enables the direct trip function:

 Direct trip - Pole A. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the reception of the pole A direct trip.
 Direct trip - Pole B. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the reception of the pole B direct trip.
 Direct trip - Pole C. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the reception of the pole C direct trip.
 Direct trip - 3 Pole ABC. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the reception of the pole ABC direct
trip.
This unit's settings and outputs are as follows:
 PROT/ZPDTS1 logical node

 No commands are available.
 Direct Trip Signal A. Indicates that the pole A direct trip signal has been received.
 Direct Trip Signal B. Indicates that the pole B direct trip signal has been received.
 Direct Trip Signal C. Indicates that the pole C direct trip signal has been received.
 Direct Trip Signal ABC. Indicates that the pole ABC direct trip signal has been received.
 Direct Trip Status. Indicates the function’s status.

User Manual 199
Table 108 Direct trip settings

DTEna Enabled NO / YES
LogInDTA Direct trip - pole A int32
LogInDTB Direct trip - pole B int32
LogInDTC Direct trip - pole C int32
LogInDT Direct trip - 3 pole ABC int32
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (1P) (1)
Reclose 1 (3P) (2
ReclPerm Reclose permission 0 15 enum
Reclose 2-3-4 (4)
Reclose1(1P)-2-3-4 (5)
Reclose1(3P)-2-3-4 (6)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (7)
Table 109 Direct trip outputs

Direct Trip Signal A DTTRx phsA
Direct Trip Signal B DTTRx phsB
Direct Trip Signal C DTTRx phsC
Direct Trip Signal ABC DTTRx general
Direct Trip Status StEna stVal
Figure 140 Direct Trip Scheme
3.12.4 External trip

This function allows you to program any signal as an external trip. It can be one pole or three poles trip. It does not
have enabled setting, it is enough the configuration of any of the logical inputs.
It also provides a setting that performs a mask that allows it to produce a general trip. In the case the general trip is
not allowed, it can be used to start the recloser or the breaker failure (50BF) by external cause. There is another
setting for this unit to indicate if it can be reclosed, if it is allowed, that is, it works as the rest of the trips.
Receiving two poles trips it generates three pole trip.
 External trip - pole A. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates that there is an external A pole trip.
 External trip - pole B. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates that there is an external B pole trip.
 External trip - pole C. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates that there is an external C pole trip.
 External trip - 3 pole. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates that there is an external three-pole trip.

User Manual 200
This unit's settings and outputs are in the PROT/ZPEXT1 logical node:
 Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables (see Table 110).
 No commands are available.
 External trip pole A. Indicates the activation of an external A pole trip.
 External trip pole B. Indicates the activation of an external B pole trip.
 External trip pole C. Indicates the activation of an external C pole trip.
 External trip 3 pole. Indicates the activation of an external three-pole trip.
 External trip 1 pole. Indicates the activation of an external single-pole trip.
 External trip Status. Indicates the function’s status.
Table 110 External trip settings

LogInExTA External trip - pole A int32
LogInExTB External trip - pole B int32
LogInExTC External trip - pole C int32
LogInExABC External trip - 3 pole int32
NO (0)
Reclose 1 (1P) (1)
Reclose 1 (3P) (2
ReclPerm Reclose permission 0 15 enum
Reclose 2-3-4 (4)
Reclose1(1P)-2-3-4 (5)
Reclose1(3P)-2-3-4 (6)
Reclose 1-2-3-4 (7)
Table 111 External trip outputs

External trip pole A ExtOp phsA
External trip pole B ExtOp phsB
External trip pole C ExtOp phsC
External trip 3 pole ExtOp general
External trip 1 pole ExtMOp general
External trip Status StEna stVal
3.12.5 Teleprotection serial communication

A serial channel is selected to be used for teleprotection communications between the two terminals of the line. It is
the same for 67NQ and distance protection.
The communication between the devices uses a private protocol.
Up to 16 digital signals can be sent.
Used as transmitter, the device sends the signals programmed in the communication node (ITPC).
Used as receiver, the device has all the received signals, in the positions “Teleprotection signal 1”, “Teleprotection
signal 2”, up to “Teleprotection signal 16”. All these signals can be used in the teleprotection schemes.
For example, the signal “ETP 67NQ” can be assigned to the “Digital 1” setting of the ITCP node. The status of “ETP
67NQ” is sent in the first position of the 16 transmitted signals.
The other device receives this signal as “Teleprotection signal 1”, which can be used as the receipt of the remote
protection signal. This setting is the logical input “TPRx_21 line 1”.
The settings of the communication´s channel are:

User Manual 201
 Port Number. When the port exists in the device, the options are:
 Disabled. The communication is disabled.
 COM 1. The communication is enabled in the port COM1.
 COM 2. The communication is enabled in the port COM2.
 Comm speed (bauds). It refers to communication speed in the selected port. The options are between 19200 and
115200 bauds.
 Parity: It refers to an additional bit used in each character to detect transmission errors. It is selected among
"None", "Even" and "Odd".
 Number of Stop bits: Number of bits sent at the end of each character.
 Digital 1: It refers to the signal sent in the first position of the message. It can be selected among all the available
digital signals of the device. It is the “Teleprotection signal 1” in the receiver device.
 Digital x: where x is from 1 to 16. It refers to the signal sent in the “x” position of the message. It can be selected
among all the available digital signals of the device. It is the “Teleprotection signal x” in the receiver device.
This function has settings and signals:
 Node PROT/ITPC1
 Settings. There is a setting group. See Table 112.
 It has no logical input.
 It has no command
 Outputs: Table 113 shows the function’s output data:
 Teleprotection comms failure: It indicates there is a communication failure.
 Teleprot comms config alarm: It indicates a failure in the selection of the communication port. It is activated
when the selected port doesn´t exist or it´s occupied.
 Teleprotection signal 1: It refers to the signal received in the first position of the communication message.
 Teleprotection signal x: where x is from 2 to 16. It refers to the signal received in the position x of the
communication message.
Table 112. Teleprotection communication setting

Disabled(0)
Port Port Number COM1(1) enum
COM2 (2)
19200(6)
38400(7)
VelTrans Comm speed (bauds) enum
57600(8)
115200(9)
Parity Parity None(0) / Even(1) / Odd(2) enum
Stopbit Number of Stop bits 1 2 1 int32
LogInDig1 Digital 1 int32
…same from 2 to 15
LogInDig16 Digital 16 int32

User Manual 202
Table 113. Teleprotection communication signals

general (stVal
Teleprotection comms failure LosSig
in Ed2)
Teleprot comms config alarm TelCfgAlm general
Teleprotection signal 1 TelDig1 general
… same from 2 to 15
Teleprotection signal 16 TelDig16 general
3.12.6 Trip logic

Each protection unit has a mask that allows it to produce a general trip:
 If a unit trips during a specific recloser status (blocked, in security t, etc.) and the corresponding mask is set to
“YES”, the trip is sent to the general trip output.
 If the mask is set to “NO”, the trip is produced but the "direct trip" signal is not received. In this way, the recloser
is independent of any trips used for signalling.
 If the recloser is out of service, all the units programmed to produce a general trip will issue a trip.
In the event of a specific trip failing to activate the “general trip”, the fault report is not generated.
If a trip is produced at the same time as another trip which activates the general trip, all the trips are reflected in the
fault report: those which go to GT and those which do not.
The picks ups are affected in the same way as with each unit's trips. Each of the relay’s pickups generates a signal.
This signal passes through the trip mask filter and is included in an OR in order to generate a "General pick up"
signal.
3.12.6.1 Single pole Trip

Depending on the fault, it allows one pole trips, that is, the open command is given to one pole.
ZPMPT node allows the enabled of the monopolar trip. The available settings are:
 Enabled. It allows one pole trips. If it is disabled, all trips will be 3 poles trips.
 Force three pole. Selects the signal which, when active, forces all the trip to be three poles.
 Single Pole Trip 67NQ11. Allows single pole trips for 67NQ remote protection scheme.
 Single Pole Trip Weak Infeed11. It allows single pole trips for Weak Infeed in the Z remote protection scheme Z,
or in Z and 67NQ.
Table 114. Single Pole Trip settings

MPTEna Enabled NO / YES Boolean
LogInFoTP Force three pole int32
SPlTr Single Pole Trip 67NQ NO / YES Booleano
NO (0)
SPlTrWei YES only Z (1) enum
Single Pole Trip Weak Infeed YES Z and 67NQ (2)
The output signals are:
 Single-phase tripping Status. It indicates that the Single Pole Trip is activated.
 Force 3 Pole trip. It indicates that the Force three pole input is activated.
 Single phase 67NQ status. It indicates that the Single Pole Trip for 67NQ remote protection scheme is activated.
 Single phase WI status. It indicates that the Single Pole Trip for 67NQ remote protection scheme is activated.
11
Avaliable from firmware version 6.0.8.0 and ICD version 8.1.0.4

User Manual 203
Table 115. Single Pole Trip outputs

Single-phase tripping Status StEna general (stVal in Ed2)
Force 3 Pole trip FoTP general
Single phase 67NQ status SPlSt stVal
Single phase WI status WISt stVal
Single Pole Trip is provoked when the following conditions are fulfilled:
 Single Pole Trip must be enabled.

 Force three pole input must not be deactivated.
 A single pole trip must happen. It can be:
 Zone 1 Single pole trip.
 Zone 2 Single pole trip accelerated by teleprotection. The zone 2 time delay trips are always three
pole.
 Single pole external trip.
 When the recloser is enabled, it must be in standby and the Reclose mode must be one of the single pole
recloser (1 pole, 1P/3P o Dependent).
When the recloser is disabled by setting, it doesn´t affect and single Pole Trip is generated when the other conditions
are fulfilled. In that case, a reclose of an external device is allowed.
The three poles trip is generated with all the trips that are not single pole.
3.12.6.2 General trip mask

It is independent for each of the protection units.
Indicates if this unit produces a general trip or not. The protection functions can be enabled or disabled and can
trigger a trip and/or a pickup independently of which units are to open the breaker. The general trip signal is sent to
the breaker and is configured by means of this mask.
In order, upon tripping, for a unit to activate the general trip, it must meet (See Figure 141):
 Be enabled.
 Have its general trip mask set to YES.
 If the recloser is enabled, the unit must not be blocked by the trip permission mask.
Each protection unit has an independent setting which is used to enable or disable its general trip. Its reference is
"GenTrip" and allows the options “NO / YES”.
Table 116 General trip (in each protection node)

GenTrip General trip YES/NO

User Manual 204
Figure 141 General trip scheme
DIGITAL SIGNAL
79 in service
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.

DIGITAL SIGNAL with 79 blocked
79 blocked
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.

DIGITAL SIGNAL with 79 in standby
79 in stand-by
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.
with 79 in time t
DIGITAL SIGNAL Following manual closure
79 in time following Manual
Closure
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.
DIGITAL INPUT with 79 in recalim t 1
79 in TIME t 1
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.

DIGITAL INPUT with 79 in TIME t 2
79 in TIME t 2
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.

DIGITAL INPUT with 79 in TIME t 3
79 in TIME t 3
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.

DIGITAL INPUT with 79 in time t 4
79 in TIME t 4
DIGITAL INPUT
51-1 Trip
AJ 51-1 -> D.G.
DIGITAL INPUT
General trip
DIGITAL INPUT
51-2 Trip
AJ 51-2->D.G.
………………………….
DIGITAL INPUT
Unit X Trip
AJ X->D.G.
3.12.6.3 Trip permission masks

They are independent for each of the protection units and are configured in the protection nodes.
This mask is used to select which trips are associated to the “general trip” (with the recloser in service), depending on the
status of the recloser.
Independently of these settings, the protection units pickup and trip, activating their corresponding signals.
The unit that is to produce the trip (activate the general trip signal) can be selected by programming 4 trip masks peer
unit and which are active in the following moments:
 Standby (supervising or reset).

 Reclaim time following manual closure.
 Reclaim time following reclosure 1, 2, 3 or 4.
 Recloser blocked (external or internal block).
If the recloser is out of service, these masks have no effect, and thus all the units programmed to produce a general trip
will issue a trip.
Each protection unit has independent masks. If a unit trips during a specific recloser status (blocked, in security t, etc.)
and the corresponding mask is set to “YES”, the trip is sent to the general trip output. If the mask is set to “NO”, the trip is
produced but the "direct trip" signal is not received.
Reclosure block. When selected, the trip of this unit blocks the recloser. Detailed description in the chapter “Post-trip
reclosure permission mask”.
Each protection unit has an independent setting which is used to enable or disable the unit’s permissions. The reference
is “TripPerm”. The setting is configured as a bit field where each bit corresponds to a selection, indicating the integer
value:

User Manual 205
Bit meaning (1) Bit Value

Reclosure block 0 NO / YES
Trip permission 79 standby 1 NO / YES
Trip permission 79 blocked 2 NO / YES
Permission for trip in reclaim time following reclosure 1 3 NO / YES
Permission for trip in reclaim time following manual closure 7 NO / YES
An example of use with trip permissions in standby and following reclosures would be the decimal value 122 (01111010
in binary), broken down into:
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
The maximum permitted value with all permissions enabled is 255 (11111111 in binary).
Table 117 Trip permission after reclosing (each protection node)

TripPerm Trip Permission by reeng. 0 8191 1 int32
3.13 CT SUPERVISION
If the event of neutral current in the 4th transformer, a fault may be detected in at least one of the relay input channels
(adaptation transformer + internal circuitry). The absolute value of three times the zero sequence current (calculated using
the phase currents) is compared with the current measured at the transformer, taking the phase (RTF) and neutral (RTN)
transformation ratios into account. None of the phases must exceed 1.5 times the rated current.
The unit activates a “CT monitoring alarm signal” when the following conditions are met.
 The measurements are outside the range:

|Ia + Ib + Ic | ∙ RTF
0.8 < < 1.3
|IN | ∙ RTN
 The measurement ratios meet:
|Ia + Ib + Ic | ∙ RTF − |IN | ∙ RTN
> 0.2
RTF
 |Ia+Ib+Ic-IN|/3>>10%·max(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|)+5%·Irated
 The measurement of 3 current phases is less than 1.5 times the rated current.
The settings for the configuration of the current transformer monitoring are shown in Table 118.
 Enabled: Enables the CT monitoring function.

Table 118 CT monitoring settings

CTSpvEna Enabled NO / YES enum
 PROT/CCTS1 node
 Settings. There are 6 settings tables.
 There are no logical inputs or commands.

User Manual 206

 CT Supervision Status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
 CT Supervision. Indicates that the CT monitoring conditions have been met.
Table 119 CT monitoring outputs

CT Supervision Status StEna stVal
CT Supervision CTSpv general
3.14 VT SUPERVISION
The negative and zero sequence voltages are compared with the rated voltage, generating alarm signals.
 Vn>10%Vn Supervision: it is active when V0 voltage is greater than the 10% of the rated voltage.
 V2>10%Vn Supervision: it is active when V2 voltage is greater than the 10% of the rated voltage.
It has no settings nor commands:
 Node GEN/LLN0
Table 120 VT supervision outputs

Vn>10%Vn Supervision VnSpv stVal
V2>10%Vn Supervision V2Spv stVal

User Manual 207
BREAKER
4. BREAKER
4.1 BREAKER LOGICS
4.1.1 Breaker status

The breaker unit uses the PROT/XCBR1 and PROT/XCBR2 logical nodes (if there is more than one breaker). The
settings used for each breaker are:
 Configuration type: Indicates the breaker configuration scheme. It can be set to “Single” or "Breaker and a Half".
Available only in the XCBR1.
 Breaker type: Indicates the type of breaker employed:
 1 or 2 DI.General Status. Only one input is used for the status of the three poles.
 3 or 6 DI.Per Pole. An independent input is used for the status of each of the three poles.
 Pole failure time (ms): Indicates the time (ms) during which the difference between the type a and type b inputs
must be detected in the breaker status in order for the failure to be registered. Although the setting is unique, it
affects the three poles.
 52a input: If the breaker type is "1 or 2 DI.General Status", it indicates the breaker status.
 52a-Pole A: If the breaker type is "3 or 6 DI.Per Pole", it indicates the phase A breaker status.
 52a-Pole B: The same as phase A, but for B.
 52a-Pole C: The same as phase A, but for C.
 52b input: If the breaker type is "1 or 2 DI.General Status", it indicates the breaker status.
 52b-Pole A: If the breaker type is "3 or 6 DI.Per Pole", it indicates the phase A breaker status.
 52b-Pole B: The same as phase A, but for B.
 52b-Pole C: The same as phase A, but for C.
 Open blocking: When active, it blocks the manual breaker open commands. The trips are not blocked.
 Close blocking: When active, it blocks the breaker closure commands.
 Breaker open command input: When active, it generates a breaker open command.
 Close command input: When active, it generates a breaker closure command.
 52 Blocking input: When active, it indicates the breaker is blocked. It is used in 50BF, open pole detector and
recloser.
 Trip sealed: Allows the open commands to be enabled. When it is enabled, the open command is maintained
after the cause of the trip has disappeared and until the breaker is detected as open.
 Close sealed: Allows the closure commands to be enabled. When it is enabled, the closure command is
maintained after the cause of the closure has disappeared and until the breaker is detected as closed.
 52 Supervision: Allows breaker status supervision function.
 Sync. Delay Time (s). This is the maximum time waited before the synchronism grants permission before a
manual closure. If closure permission is granted before the conclusion of this time, a closure command is issued.
On the other hand, if this time elapsed without permission being granted, the closure commnad is not
executed.12
 Synchrocheck supervision13. Indicates whether the manual closure is to be monitored with synchronism. If it´s
set “YES”, the manual close permission must be activated to generate the close command .
 Synchrocheck type13. Indicates whether the synchronism is internal or external.
12
Available from firmware version 5.19.15.7 and ICD version 6.3.0.0.
13

User Manual 208
BREAKER
 External syncro. Permission13. Logical external synchronism permission logic. Selects the signal which, when
active, indicates the existence of permission for synchronism.
 Min.time general trip(ms)14. Indicates the minimum duration time of the general trip signals per pole and global;
independently if the signal that causes the trip is deactivated before this time.
Table 121 Breaker status settings

BrNum Configuration type Single / Breaker and a Half enum
1 or 2 DI.General Status
BrTyp 52 Status detection enum
3 or 6 DI.Per Pole
FaBrTmms Pole failure time (ms) 0 10000 10 Int32
LogIn52a1 52a input Int32
LogIn52a1A 52a-Pole A Int32
LogIn52a1B 52a-Pole B Int32
LogIn52a1C 52a-Pole C Int32
LogIn52b1 52b input Int32
LogIn52b1A 52b-Pole A Int32
LogIn52b1B 52b-Pole B Int32
LogIn52b1C 52b-Pole C Int32
LogInOpBl Open blocking Int32
LogInClBl Close blocking Int32
LogIn52Op Breaker open command input Int32
LogIn52Cl Close command input Int32
LogInBlBr 52 Blocking input Int32
TrLck Trip sealed NO / YES Boolean
ClLck Close sealed NO / YES Boolean
SupEna 52 Supervision NO / YES Boolean
SyWaTms Sync. Delay Time (s) 0 600 0.01 float
VSynEna Synchrocheck supervision NO/YES Boolean
SynTyp Synchrocheck type Internal/External enum
LogInExSy External sync. Permission Int32
GTTmms Min.time general trip(ms)14 0 150 10 Int32
Breaker status via digital input
The status of the general breaker and by pole is determined with the status of digital inputs and breaker type setting.
Used to determine the status of the breaker without uncertainty and employed in functions that require the breaker’s
status to be known, such as the opening and closure sealing logic, the recloser, etc.
The 52b status inputs take precedence over the 52a status inputs, i.e., if 52b status inputs have been configured, the
breaker status is determined by means of these inputs, independently of the status of the 52a inputs.
Depending on the breaker type setting, the functioning is:
 1 or 2 DI.General Status. The general 52b Status input is used for the breaker status. If it is not configured, the
general 52a Status input is used. The phase breaker status matches the general.
 3 or 6 DI.Per Pole. The independent phases 52b Status inputs are used for the breaker status. If they are not
configured, the independent phases 52a Status inputs are used. The general breaker status is generated from
the phases, taking into account the following:
 Closed general status, if all the phases are closed.
 Open general status, if at least one of the phases is open.
Table 122 shows this function’s outputs.
 52_1 Closed (Simple Log.). Indicates the breaker's general status, in accordance with the status of the digital
inputs.
 52_1 X Closed (Simple Log.). Indicates the status of each of the breaker's phases, in accordance with the status
of the digital inputs. Where "X" indicates the pole (A, B or C).
14

User Manual 209
BREAKER
Breaker status monitoring
The status of each pole (open, closed) is determined in accordance with a combination of N/O and N/C inputs. If
inconsistencies are detected between the N/O and the N/C inputs after the failure time (”Pole failure time (ms)”), a failure
is signalled and no other action is taken (relative to the discrepancy) until the anomaly is corrected. The functioning of
this unit is shown in Figure 142.
52 Supervision setting allows breaker state supervision function
 PROT/XCBR1 node
 PROT/XCBR2 node. Applies only in configurations with 2 switches
 Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables. For details see Table . The setting "Configuration type" is
only available in XCBR1, while the rest are on both nodes.
 There are associated commands:
 Pos. Switch opening or closure command.
 LOrdLc52Op. Local mode switch opening or closure command.
 LOrdMaBl. Locking or unlocking operations command for switch in local mode.
 BlkCls. Locking or unlocking switch closure operations command.
 52_1 Open: Indicates that the 52 is open. There are independent general and phase signals.
 52_1 Closed: Indicates that the 52 is closed. There are independent general and phase signals.
 52_1 Undetermined: Indicates that the 52 is undetermined. There are independent general and phase
signals.
 52_1 Failure: Indicates that the 52 has a failure. There are independent general and phase signals.
 Close Command - Breaker 1: Indicates that a closure command has been generated.
 Open Command - Breaker 1: Indicates that an opening command has been generated.
 Ph. X Open Command - Br1: Indicates that a Phase X opening command has been generated. X can
be A, B or C.
 Close Failure - Br1: Indicates that a failure has occurred in some closing switch pole because
maximum closing time has exceeded.
 Ph. X Close Failure- Br1: Indicates that a failure has occurred in closing switch X pole because
maximum closing time has exceeded. X can be A, B or C.
 Open Failure - Br1: Indicates that a failure has occurred in some opening switch pole because
maximum closing time has exceeded.
 Ph. X Open Failure- Br1: Indicates that a failure has occurred opening switch X pole because
maximum closing time has exceeded. X can be A, B or C.
 Breaker settings error: Indicates that breakers are not properly defined and it is activated in the
following situations:
 No consistency between the breakers and recloser setting: "Select 2 breakers"
 No consistency between the breakers and breaker setting: "Configuration type".
In Figure 142 the state switch logic diagram is displayed. Input signals to this scheme are:
 Enab, Logic 52_1: This input indicates the state 52 detection mode. Corresponds to XCBR "52 Status detection"
setting and allows the following values:
 "1 or 2 DI.General Status": There is only one digital input to indicate the switch status.
 "3 or 6 DI.Per Pole". There are three digital inputs to indicate the status of each phase.
 52a input: Indicates the switch a logic input. Applies to "52a input" setting. Active if the switch is closed.
 52b input: Indicates the switch b logic input. Applies to "52b input" setting. Active if the switch is open.
 52a Pole A: Indicates the phase A 'a logic' input. Applies to "52a-Pole A" Active if the pole is closed.
 52b Pole A: Indicates the phase A 'b logic' input. Applies to "52b-Pole A" Active if the pole is open.

User Manual 210
BREAKER
 52a Pole B: Indicates the phase B 'a logic' input. Applies to "52a-Pole B" Active if the pole is closed.
 52b Pole B: Indicates the phase B 'b logic' input. Applies to "52b-Pole B" Active if the pole is open.
 52a Pole C: Indicates the phase C 'a logic' input. Applies to "52a-Pole C" Active if the pole is closed.
 52b Pole C: Indicates the phase C 'b logic' input. Applies to "52b-Pole C" Active if the pole is open.
Figure 142 Breaker status.
SETTING
Enab. Logic 52_1 = 1 POLE / 4 STATUSES
Enab. Logic 52_1 = 3 POLES / 4 STATUSES
SETTING
DIGITAL INPUT POLE
FAILURE T
52a input
0
DIGITAL INPUT
52b input
SETTING
DIGITAL INPUT POLE DIGITAL SIGNAL
FAILURE T DIGITAL SIGNAL 52_1 Undetermined
52a-Pole A
52_1 phase A Undetermined
0
DIGITAL SIGNAL
52_1 phase A Open
DIGITAL SIGNAL
52_1 phase A Closed
DIGITAL SIGNAL
52_1 phase A Failure
DIGITAL INPUT
52b-Pole A
SETTING
DIGITAL INPUT POLE
FAILURE T DIGITAL SIGNAL
52a-Pole B
52_1 phase B Undetermined
0 DIGITAL SIGNAL
DIGITAL SIGNAL 52_1 Open
52_1 phase B Open
DIGITAL SIGNAL
52_1 phase B Closed
DIGITAL SIGNAL
52_1 phase B Failure
DIGITAL INPUT
52b-Pole B
SETTING DIGITAL SIGNAL

DIGITAL INPUT POLE 52_1 closed
FAILURE T DIGITAL SIGNAL
52a-Pole C
52_1 phase C Undetermined
0
DIGITAL SIGNAL
52_1 phase C Open
DIGITAL SIGNAL
52_1 phase C Closed
DIGITAL SIGNAL
DIGITAL SIGNAL 52_1 failure
DIGITAL INPUT 52_1 phase C Failure
52b-Pole C

User Manual 211
BREAKER
Table 122 Breaker status outputs
XCBR1 Signal XCBR2 Signal Data Attribute

52_1 Open 52_2 Open OpenBr general
52_1 Closed 52_2 Closed CloseBr general
52_1 Undetermined 52_2 Undetermined UndetBr general
52_1 Failure 52_2 Failure FailureBr general
52_1 Phase A Open 52_2 Phase A Open OpenBr phsA
52_1 Phase A Closed 52_2 Phase A Closed CloseBr phsA
52_1 Phase A Undetermined 52_2 Phase A Undetermined UndetBr phsA
52_1 Phase A Failure 52_2 Phase A Failure FailureBr phsA
52_1 Phase B Open 52_2 Phase B Open OpenBr phsB
52_1 Phase B Closed 52_2 Phase B Closed CloseBr phsB
52_1 Phase B Undetermined 52_2 Phase B Undetermined UndetBr phsB
52_1 Phase B Failure 52_2 Phase B Failure FailureBr phsB
52_1 Phase C Open 52_2 Phase C Open OpenBr phsC
52_1 Phase C Closed 52_2 Phase C Closed CloseBr phsC
52_1 Phase C Undetermined 52_2 Phase C Undetermined UndetBr phsC
52_1 Phase C Failure 52_2 Phase C Failure FailureBr phsC
52_1 Undetermined 52_2 Undetermined Pos stVal
52_1 Open 52_2 Open Pos OpenBr
52_1 Closed 52_2 Closed Pos CloseBr
52_1 Failure 52_2 Failure Pos FailureBr
52_1 Closed (Simple Log.) 52_2 Closed (Simple Log.) BrDISt general
52_1 A Closed (Simple Log.) 52_2 A Closed (Simple Log.) BrDISt phsA
52_1 B Closed (Simple Log.) 52_2 B Closed (Simple Log.) BrDISt phsB
52_1 C Closed (Simple Log.) 52_2 C Closed (Simple Log.) BrDISt phsC
Close Command - Breaker 1 Close Command - Breaker 2 OpCls general
Open Command - Breaker 1 Open Command - Breaker 2 OpOpn general
Ph. A Open Command - Br1 Ph. A Open Command - Br2 OpOpn phsA
Ph. B Open Command - Br1 Ph. B Open Command - Br2 OpOpn phsB
Ph. C Open Command - Br1 Ph. C Open Command - Br2 OpOpn phsC
Close Failure - Br1 Close Failure - Br2 ClsFailBr general
Ph. A Close Failure- Br1 Ph. A Close Failure- Br2 ClsFailBr phsA
Ph. B Close Failure- Br1 Ph. B Close Failure- Br2 ClsFailBr phsB
Ph. C Close Failure- Br1 Ph. C Close Failure- Br2 ClsFailBr phsC
Open Failure - Br1 Open Failure - Br2 OpenFailBr general
Ph. A Open Failure- Br1 Ph. A Open Failure- Br2 OpenFailBr phsA
Ph. B Open Failure- Br1 Ph. B Open Failure- Br2 OpenFailBr phsB
Ph. C Open Failure- Br1 Ph. C Open Failure- Br2 OpenFailBr phsC
Open Blocked - Br1 Open Blocked - Br1 BrBlk general
Closing Blocked - Br1 Closing Blocked - Br1 BrClBlk general
Breaker settings error Error general
4.1.2 Breaker failure and operating logic

The opening and closure failure time settings determine the time lapse between the issue of the corresponding command
and the reception of the breaker’s activity signal, on the understanding that the breaker has acted correctly. To the
contrary, the open failure and closure failure signals are generated and failure and general indications are issued.
This unit’s settings are grouped in PROT/RBFS1 (breaker 1) and (PROT/RBFS2) logical nodes:
 Open failure time (ms): If an open command is given, the breaker should be open before this time.
 Close failure time (ms): If a close command is given, the breaker should be closed before this time.
Table 122 shows the operating logic’s output Data, which are available in the PROT/XCBR nodes.
Table 123 Breaker status monitoring settings

OpTmms Open failure time (ms) 20 100000 1 Int32
ClTmms Close failure time (ms) 20 100000 1 Int32

User Manual 212
BREAKER
4.1.3 Locking logic

The trip and close commands can be locked with the breaker status, depending on the configuration of the trip sealing
and closure sealing settings. Figure 143 and Figure 144 show the sealed trip and closure schemes. The general trip
signals have a minimun time duration set in "Min.time general trip(ms)". 14
Figure 143 Trip logic scheme shows Trip logic scheme. The input signals of this scheme are:
 Trip Sealed 52-1: Setting that indicates whether trip will be sealed after completing trip conditions and manual
opening. Corresponds to XCBR setting "Trip sealed".
 General Trip: Corresponds to the signal "General trip" generated with any trip.
 Pole A (B,C) General Trip: Corresponds to the signals "Pole A General Trip", (B, C) generated with any phase
trip.
 Manual open command input**: Indicates that open command has been generated by the logic input "Open
Command - Breaker 1" or by user command.
 Manual Open blocking: Indicates that blocking command has been generated by the logic input "Open blocking"
or by user command.
 52a pole A: Enabled indicates that phase A is closed. Corresponds to the signal "52_1 A Closed (Simple Log.)".
 52a pole B: Enabled indicates that phase B is closed. Corresponds to the signal "52_1 B Closed (Simple Log.)".
 52a pole C: Enabled indicates that phase C is closed. Corresponds to the signal "52_1 C Closed (Simple Log.)".
Figure 143 Trip logic scheme

User Manual 213
BREAKER
Figure 144 shows Closure logic scheme. The input signals of this scheme are:
 General trip: Indicates the signal generated with any trip. It is shown in "General trip".
 Manual open command: Internal signal indicating that open command has been generated by the logic input
"Breaker open command input" or by user command, and is not blocked by the logic input "Open blocking"
neither by user command.
 Close sealed: Setting that indicates whether will be sealed after completing the close order. Corresponds to the
XCBR "Close sealed" setting.
 RECLOSURE Command**: Internal signal indicating an OR of the reclosure commands. They are displayed on
signals "52_1 Reclose Command" (switch reclosure) and "Reclosing Command F_RREC" (frequency reclosure).
It should not be blocked by the logic input "Close Blocked" neither by user command.
 Close command: Indicates the logic input "Close Command - Breaker" is enabled, a closure order has been
launched by user command or a close order coupling. Formerly sincrocheck's "Perm. Manual Close" must be
enabled and must not be blocked by the logic input "Close blocking" neither by user command.
 52_1 closed: Signal indicating that switch is closed. Corresponds to the "52_1 Closed (Simple Log.)" signal.
 52_1A closed: Signal indicating that phase A is closed. Corresponds to the "52_1 A Closed (Simple Log.)" signal.
 52_1B closed: Signal indicating that phase B is closed. Corresponds to the "52_1 B Closed (Simple Log.)" signal.
 52_1C closed: Signal indicating that phase C is closed. Corresponds to the "52_1 C Closed (Simple Log.)"
signal.
Figure 144 Closure logic scheme
4.1.4 Open pole detector

It determines the open pole or poles using the digital inputs, current and/or voltage measurement.
In order for a pole to be considered open, a combination of the following conditions must be met (depending on the
operation type setting):
 A phase’s breakers indicate that the phase is open (in the case of 1 ½ breaker, two are employed)
 The current is below the threshold set in the open pole due to current detection logic.
 The current and the voltage are below the threshold (according to the setting). In this case, if there is a fuse
failure the open pole due to voltage signal is not activated.
To determine the breaker’s status by digital input, the 52b (normally closed) of each phase is employed, when
configured. If the 52b is not configured, the 52a is used (normally open).

User Manual 214
BREAKER
If a single pole open is detected, the following functions can be blocked, if they are selected by settings:
 Neutral overcurrent, sensitive neutral and unbalance.

 Overvoltage V0 and V2.
There is a delay of one cycle before the reset of the 3PO output (three open pole). Therefore, there is also a one-cycle
delay in the change from 3PO to 1PO (1 open pole).
There is a delay of one cycle before the reset of the 1PO output (when the breaker closes).
Figure 145 shows Open pole detector scheme. The input signals of this scheme are:
 52_1A Closed: Signal indicating that phase A is closed. Corresponds to the "52_1 A Closed (Simple Log.)"
signal.
 52_1 Closed: Signal indicating that switch is closed. Corresponds to the "52_1 Closed (Simple Log.)" signal.
 52_1 Blocked: Internal signal indicating that switch is blocked by the breaker 1 logical input "Close blocking" or
by a blocking user command.
 52_2A Closed: Signal indicating that phase A is closed. Corresponds to the "52_2 A Closed (Simple Log.)"
signal.
 52_2 Closed: Signal indicating that switch is closed. Corresponds to the "52_2 Closed (Simple Log.)" signal.
 52_2 Blocked: Internal signal indicating that switch is blocked by the breaker 2 logical input "Close blocking" or
by a blocking user command.
 Configuration type = Breaker and a Half: Setting that allows to select switches configuration schemes.
Corresponds to the setting "Configuration type".
 Phase A Open ( I < ): Signal "Phase A Open ( I < )".
 DeadLine Phase A: Signal indicating that phase A is de-energized. Corresponds to "Deadline Phase A" signal.
And their equivalents for phases B and C.
Figure 145 Open pole detector scheme

User Manual 215
BREAKER
The settings for the configuration of the open pole detector are shown in Table 124 Open pole detector settings
 Enabled: Enables the open pole detector function.

 Operation type. Indicates the manner in which the open pole is detected:
 V and I. The voltage and current conditions must be met.
 I and 52. The current and 52 status input conditions must be met.
 V and I and 52. The voltage and current and 52 status input conditions must be met.
 V and I or 52. The voltage and current or the 52 status input conditions must be met.
 Only 52. The 52 status input conditions must be met.
 Voltage threshold. Indicates the voltage value below which the phase is considered as broken.
 Current threshold. Indicates the current value below which the phase is considered as open.
 Neutral and Unbalance Units Block. Indicates whether the unbalance and neutral units are to be blocked upon
the detection of an open pole.
 Blocking Input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the open pole detector function.
Table 124 Open pole detector settings
Name IEC 61850 Setting Minimum Maximum Step Remarks Type

OPDEna Enabled NO / YES enum
V and I (1)
I and 52 (2)
Optype Operation type V and I and 52 (3) enum
V and I or 52 (4)
Only 52 (5)
OpValV Voltage threshold (V) 10,0 165,0 0,1 floating
OpValI Current threshold (A) 0,01 0,5 0,01 floating
UnbUnBl Neutral and Unbalance Units Block NO / YES Boolean
 PROT/POPD1 node
 Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function block and unblocking. Only acts if the unit is enabled.
 Open Pole Status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
 Pole A Open. Indicates that the open pole conditions have been met in phase A.
 Pole B Open. Indicates that the open pole conditions have been met in phase B.
 Pole C Open. Indicates that the open pole conditions have been met in phase C.
 1PO- One Pole Open. Indicates that there is only one pole open (A, B or C).
 2PO- Two Pole Open. Indicates that there are two poles open.
 3PO- Three Pole Open. Indicates that there are three poles open.
 PO-Some Pole Open. Indicates that at least one pole is open, but not all three.
 Phase A Open ( I < ). Indicates that the phase A current is below the threshold.
 Phase B open ( I < ). Indicates that the phase B current is below the threshold.
 Phase C open ( I < ). Indicates that the phase C current is below the threshold.
 Deadline Phase A. Indicates that pole A is de-energized.
 Deadline Phase B. Indicates that pole B is de-energized.
 Deadline Phase C. Indicates that pole C is de-energized.

User Manual 216
BREAKER
 Deadline Phase ABC. Indicates that the three poles are de-energized.
Table 125 Open pole detector outputs

Open Pole Status StEna stVal
Pole A Open OpenPole phsA
Pole B Open OpenPole phsB
Pole C Open OpenPole phsC
1PO- One Pole Open OneOpenPole general
2PO- Two Pole Open TwoOpenPole general
3PO- Three Pole Open ThreeOpenPole general
PO-Some Pole Open OpenPole general
Phase A Open ( I < ) OpenPhs phsA
Phase B Open ( I < ) OpenPhs phsB
Phase C Open ( I < ) OpenPhs phsC
Deadline Phase A DeadLine phsA
Deadline Phase B DeadLine phsB
Deadline Phase C DeadLine phsC
Deadline Phase ABC DeadLine general
4.1.4.1 Open pole due to current

This is used to detect the breaker status with the current measurement. Using the half- and full-cycle DFT
measurements (the lower of the two), it is determined whether the current is below a minimum noise threshold in at
least one of the phases (see Figure 146)
If the open pole detection is activated in at least one of the phases, the phases overcurrent instantaneous units are
reset.
The current threshold is indicated in the open pole detector (PROT/POPD).
The output signals are in the PROT/POPD node (see Table 125):
 Phase A Open ( I < ). Indicates that the phase A current is below the threshold.
 Phase B open ( I < ). Indicates that the phase B current is below the threshold.
 Phase C open ( I < ). Indicates that the phase C current is below the threshold.
Figure 146 Open pole due to current scheme
ANALOGUE INPUT
DIGITAL SIGNAL
IA (min (dft,dft ½)) +
< Phase A Open ( I < )
SETTING -
Current threshold (A)
ANALOGUE INPUT
DIGITAL SIGNAL
IB (min (dft,dft ½)) +
-
< Phase B Open ( I < )
DIGITAL SIGNAL
ANALOGUE INPUT +
< Phase C Open ( I < )
IC (min (dft,dft ½)) -
4.1.4.2 Dead or de-energized line

It detects a line’s disconnected phases. If a phase’s voltage and current levels simultaneously drop below the voltage
and current thresholds, this phase is considered dead. In such cases, the following signal is generated for each
phase: "Deadline Phase x", in which x is A, B or C. Figure 147 shows a diagram of the dead line. The voltage and
current thresholds are as indicated in the open pole detector (PROT/POPD).
The output signals are in the PROT/POPD node (see Table 125):

User Manual 217
BREAKER
 Deadline Phase A. Indicates that pole A is de-energized.

 Deadline Phase B. Indicates that pole B is de-energized.
 Deadline Phase C. Indicates that pole C is de-energized.
 Deadline Phase ABC. Indicates that the three poles are de-energized.
Figure 147 Dead line scheme
4.1.5 Pole discordance

If any of the poles are detected as having a status different to that of the other poles during a configurable period of time,
the pole discordance signal is generated. A differentiation is made between single open pole discordance and two open
pole discordance. A trip can be generated or the action can be limited to signalling. It allows a selection to be made
between two modes of operation (see Figure 148 and Figure 149).
Input signals of this scheme are:
 52_1 failure: Indicates that 52 is in fault because "Pole failure time (ms)" time has been exceeded. Corresponds
to "52_1 Failure" signal.
 52_1 phase A open: Signal indicating that switch is closed. Corresponds to the "52_1 A Closed (Simple Log.)"
signal deactivated.
 52_1 phase B open: Signal indicating that switch is closed. Corresponds to the "52_1 B Closed (Simple Log.)"
signal deactivated.
 52_1 phase C open: Signal indicating that switch is closed. Corresponds to the "52_1 C Closed (Simple Log.)"
signal deactivated.
Equivalent signals are used in switch 2.

User Manual 218
BREAKER
Figure 148 Mode 1 pole discordance
Figure 149 Mode 2 pole discordance
 Enabled: Enables the open pole detector function.

 Operation type. Indicates the unit’s operation type.
 M1: Signaling
 M1: Signal and Trip
 M2: Signaling
 M2: Signal and Trip
 1 pole open time (ms). Time for the discordance activation with 1 open pole.
 2 pole open time (ms). Time for the discordance activation with 2 open poles.
Table 126 Pole discordance settings

PDEna Enabled NO / YES enum
M1: Signaling
M1: Signal and Trip
M2: Signaling
M2: Signal and Trip
PTmms1 1 pole open time (ms 100 60000 10 Int32
PTmms2 2 pole open time (ms 100 60000 10 Int32

User Manual 219
BREAKER
 Node:
 PROT/RPLD1 for Breaker 1.
 PROT/RPLD2 for Breaker 2.
 Settings and logical inputs. There are 6 settings tables.
 Commands:
 “DOrdBlk”: Function block and unblocking. Only acts if the unit is enabled.
 Outputs: Table 127 Pole discordance outputs shows the function’s output data.
 Pole Discordance Status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
 52_1 Start Discordance. Indicates that the function has started.
 52_1 Trip Discordance. Indicates that the function has tripped.
 52_1 Discordance open 1P. Indicates that there is discordance with only one open pole.
 52_1 Discordance open 2P. Indicates that there is discordance with two open poles.
Table 127 Pole discordance outputs

Pole Discordance Status StEna stVal
52_1 Start Discordance StrPDBr1 general
52_1 Trip Discordance OpPDBr1 general
52_1 Discordance open 1P OneOpenBr1 general
52_1 Discordance open 2P TwoOpenBr1 general
4.2 BREAKER OPERATION SUPERVISION
It monitors the breaker’s operations after the trip and closure commands. In addition to signals, the counters generated by
these functions are shown in the statistical data.
In breaker and a half configurations two breakers are supervised:
 In models, where there is only one current input, ki2 and electrical supervisions are only performed on breaker 1.
In breaker 2 only mechanical operations are supervised. See Table 128 (breaker 1) and Tabla 129 (breaker 2)
for settings and Table 130 and Table 131 for signals.
 In models, where there are two current inputs, ki2 and electrical supervisions are performed on both breakers.
See Table 128 and Table 130 for both breakers.
The settings for the configuration of this unit are shown in Table 128 (breaker 1) and Tabla 129 (breaker 2):
 ki2 calculation type. Indicates the calculation type between kI2*t, kI2 and kI.
 ki2 time (ms). Indicates the timeout following the trip for the measurement of the ki1 calculation current.
 Alarm value ki2. Indicates the ki2 summation threshold which, when exceeded, generates a “ki2 exceeded”
signal.
 Initial value ki2. Indicates the initial value of the ki2 summation when a reset command is received.
 Trips exceeded window (min). Time window in minutes for the excessive number of trips counter.
 Maximum number of trips. Maximum number of trips permitted in the set time window.
 Mechanical opening T (ms). Indicates the maximum time as of the opening command until the detection of the
open pole by the digital input status.
 Mechanical closing T (ms). Indicates the maximum time as of the closure command until the detection of the
closed pole by the digital input status.
 Electrical opening T (ms). Indicates the maximum time as of the opening command until the detection of the
absence of current in the phase.

User Manual 220
BREAKER
 Electrical closing T (ms). Indicates the maximum time as of the closure command until the detection of the
presence of current in the phase.
 Inactivity time (days). Indicates the maximum number of days without breaker activity.
 Opening dispersion T (ms). Indicates the maximum dispersion time between two poles upon opening.
 Closing dispersion T (ms). Indicates the maximum dispersion time between two poles upon closing.
There are independent settings and outputs:
 Node
 PROT/CBOU1 for Breaker 1.
 PROT/CBOU2 for Breaker 2.
 Settings. There are 6 settings tables. See Table 128 and Tabla 129.
 Outputs: Table 130 shows the function’s output data. The meaning of each signal is detailed in the function
explanation.
Table 128 Operation monitoring settings (All settings)

Ki2 (0)
KIType ki2 calculation type 0 2 1 KI (1) enum
KI2t (2)
KITmms ki2 time (ms) 0 100 10 Int32
KIAlarm Alarm value ki2 0 100000 1 Int32
KIInit Initial value ki2 0 100000 1 Int32
ExTrTmm Trips exceeded window (min) 1 60 1 Int32
ExTrNum Maximum number of trips 0 500 1 Int32
OpMeTmms Mechanical opening T (ms) 0 5000 1 Int32
ClMeTmms Mechanical closing T (ms) 0 5000 1 Int32
OpElTmms Electrical opening T (ms) 0 5000 1 Int32
ClElTmms Electrical closing T (ms) 0 5000 1 Int32
NoOpDays Inactivity time (days) 0 10000 1 Int32
OpDisTmms Opening dispersion T (ms) 0 1000 1 Int32
ClDisTmms Closing dispersion T (ms) 0 1000 1 Int32
MaskEna Enable Events record 0 1 1 NO / YES Boolean
Tabla 129 Operation monitoring settings in Breaker 2 (models with one current input)

ExTrTmm Trips exceeded window (min) 1 60 1 Int32
ExTrNum Maximum number of trips 0 500 1 Int32
OpMeTmms Mechanical opening T (ms) 0 5000 1 Int32
ClMeTmms Mechanical closing T (ms) 0 5000 1 Int32
NoOpDays Inactivity time (days) 0 10000 1 Int32
OpDisTmms Opening dispersion T (ms) 0 1000 1 Int32
ClDisTmms Closing dispersion T (ms) 0 1000 1 Int32
MaskEna Enable Events record 0 1 1 NO / YES Boolean

User Manual 221
BREAKER
Table 130 Breaker monitoring signals

Phase A ki2 exceeded KI2 phsA
Phase B ki2 exceeded KI2 phsB
Phase C ki2 exceeded KI2 phsC
ki2 exceeded KI2 general
Maximum ki2 exceeded MaxKI2 general
Pole A mechan.time exceeded MechTmExc phsA
Pole B mechan.time exceeded MechTmExc phsB
Pole C mechan.time exceeded MechTmExc phsC
Pole A electric time exceeded ElecTmExc phsA
Pole B electric time exceeded ElecTmExc phsB
Pole C electric time exceeded ElecTmExc phsC
Pole A inactivity time exceeded NoOpTmExc phsA
Pole B inactivity time exceeded NoOpTmExc phsB
Pole C inactivity time exceeded NoOpTmExc phsC
AB dispersion time exceeded DispTmExc (DiTmExcAB in Ed2) phsAB (general in Ed2)
BC dispersion time exceeded DispTmExc (DiTmExcBC in Ed2) phsBC (general in Ed2)
CA dispersion time exceeded DispTmExc (DiTmExcCA in Ed2) phsCA (general in Ed2)
Pole A excessive nbr trips PolTrExc phsA
Pole B excessive nbr trips PolTrExc phsB
Pole C excessive nbr trips PolTrExc phsC
Excessive nbr trips PolTrExc general
Table 131 Monitoring signals in Breaker 2 (models with one current input)

Pole A mechan.time exceeded MechTmExc phsA
Pole B mechan.time exceeded MechTmExc phsB
Pole C mechan.time exceeded MechTmExc phsC
Pole A inactivity time exceeded NoOpTmExc phsA
Pole B inactivity time exceeded NoOpTmExc phsB
Pole C inactivity time exceeded NoOpTmExc phsC
AB dispersion time exceeded DispTmExc (DiTmExcAB in Ed2) phsAB (general in Ed2)
BC dispersion time exceeded DispTmExc (DiTmExcBC in Ed2) phsBC (general in Ed2)
CA dispersion time exceeded DispTmExc (DiTmExcCA in Ed2) phsCA (general in Ed2)
Pole A excessive nbr trips PolTrExc phsA
Pole B excessive nbr trips PolTrExc phsB
Pole C excessive nbr trips PolTrExc phsC
Excessive nbr trips PolTrExc general
kI2 sum:
After a trip, the kI2 counter increases in accordance with the selected setting. The value of each phase’s current is
calculated in primary (VT ratio), as kA primary. There are a total of 3 counters (one for each phase). Additionally15, it is
available a counter of maximun kI2, where in each opening the maximum value of the three phases is used to calculate the
ki2.
If it exceeds the set threshold (the treatment is pole to pole), a “Phase X Ki2 exceeded” signal is generated. While in this
situation, the corresponding signal is sent to control. The signals are:
 Phase X ki2 exceeded. Where X is the phase. It is independent for each phase.
 ki2 exceeded. One for all the phases.
 Maxki2 exceeded. Activated when the counter of maximun kI2 exceeds the set threshold.
In order to calculate the pole wear, the type of calculation wanted can be programmed from among kI2*t, kI2 and kI.
 If Ki2 is chosen, the kA2 are calculated with I as the current measured after exceeding the set timeout following the trip.
 If kI is chosen, only the sum of the currents in kA is calculated, with I as the current measured after exceeding the set
timeout following the trip.
 If Ki2 *t is chosen, the Ki2 /100 value is accumulated every 10ms, with I as the current measured after exceeding the set
timeout following the trip. The accumulation terminates when I<0.05 A.
15
Available from version 5.24.16.1 of firmware and 7.0.0.0 of ICD.

User Manual 222
BREAKER
Excessive number of trips:
It counts the trips produced in the time, generating a signal when the number of trips is higher than the programmed number
during the programmed time and changes to a definite trip. The time period is reset upon a manual closure. The counter
may be reset to the initial value at any moment by means of a command. The signals are:
 Pole X excessive nbr trips. Independent for each phase

 Excessive nbr trips. One for all the phases.
Open counter:
There are independent open and trip counters for each phase:
 The trip commands generated by the protection are considered trips.

 A breaker's changes from closed to open (including manual and trip openings) are considered openings.
There are 6 counters: 3 trip counters and 3 open counters. There is a reset command for each counter.
Closure counters:
There are independent closure counters for each phase. A breaker's changes from open to close are considered closures.
There is a reset command for each counter.
Operating time for electric opening and closure by pole:
They count the time elapsed from the command sent to the breaker unto its electric operation, measured with the current:
 Trip time: The time elapsed from the open command until the detection of the absence of power.
 Closure time: The time elapsed from the closure command until the detection of the presence of power.
The open pole detector current threshold is used.
These times are compared with the threshold settings. Events are generated per pole when the thresholds are exceeded
“Pole X electric time exceeded”:
 If the time elapsed from the open command exceeds the setting “Electrical opening T (ms)”
 If the time elapsed from the closure command exceeds the setting “Electrical closing T (ms)”
Mechanical opening and closure operating time per pole:
They count the time elapsed from the command sent to the breaker unto its mechanical operation, detected in the digital
inputs status:
 Trip time: Indicates the time elapsed as of the opening command until the detection of the open pole by the digital input
status.
 Closure time: Indicates the time elapsed as of the closure command until the detection of the closed pole by the digital
input status.
“Pole X mechan.time exceeded”:
 If the time elapsed from the open command exceeds the setting “Mechanical opening T (ms)”
 If the time elapsed from the closure command exceeds the setting “Mechanical closing T (ms)”
Opening and closure dispersion time for each pole pair:
They count the difference between the opening and closure times for every two poles. There are opening/closure counters
for pole pairs AB, BC and CA. The breaker status is determined by means of the digital input status.
“XY dispersion time exceeded”:
 During the opening, a comparison is made with the "Opening dispersion T (ms)" setting.
 During the closure, a comparison is made with the "Closing dispersion T (ms)" setting.

User Manual 223
BREAKER
Days of breaker inactivity without status change:
The days elapsed, since the last opening or closure of the breaker, are counted for each pole. Complete fractions of 24
hours since the last action are considered. Partial periods of 24 hours are not accumulated, i.e., if 2 days and 20 hours have
passed since the last action, the counter will indicate 2 days. If at this point the time count is reset to zero, the 20 hours
would be lost.
These counters are compared with the “Inactivity Time (days)” setting and an event is generated per pole in the event of it
being exceeded "Pole X inactivity time exceeded".
Last interrupted current:
The current value upon the trip is indicated per pole.
Maximum interrupted current:
The maximum current value measured at the moment of the trip is indicated per pole. The three poles can be reset to zero
using the reset command.
Overcurrent levels:
Indicates the time in seconds during which each phase's current is within each of the following ranges (with In as the set
rated current):
 Seconds with the current between 2 and 5 times In

 Seconds with the current between 5 and 12.5 times In
 Seconds with the current between 12.5 and 20 times In
 Seconds with the current greater than 20 In
There are 12 counters (4 for each phase).
4.3 TRIP AND CLOSE CIRCUITS SUPERVISION
It monitors the circuits by pole, detecting any discontinuity with the breaker open and closed. It requires the assignment of
the monitoring inputs (the breaker circuit with open and closed breaker, the closure circuit with open and closed breaker). It
is activated 20 seconds after the detection of the fault and remains active while the fault persists.
Up to six trip circuits and three closure circuits can be monitored, using the number of digital inputs required.
Figure 150 Closure circuit monitoring Figure 150 shows an example of the wiring for the monitoring of the closure circuit.
The wiring for the trip circuit is similar.
When the breaker is closed, the “52a” contact is also closed. If there is continuity in the circuit, the input programmed as
“Close circuit 52 closed” is detected as closed. If there is no continuity, it is detected as open (circuit failure).
When the breaker is open, the “52b” contact is also closed. If there is continuity in the circuit, the input programmed as
“Close circuit 52 open” is detected as closed. If there is no continuity, it is detected as open (circuit failure).
The “closing coil failure” or “trip coil failure” signals are activated 20 seconds after the fault is detected, in the event of the
fault persisting upon the conclusion of this period.

User Manual 224
BREAKER
Figure 150 Closure circuit monitoring
The settings for the configuration of this unit are shown in Table 132:
 Trip circuit enabled: Enables the monitoring of the trip circuits.
 Close circuit enabled: Enables the monitoring of the closure circuits.
 Close circuit 52 open - X. Indicates the signal used to monitor the closure circuit with the breaker open.
 Close circuit 52 closed - X. Indicates the signal used to monitor the closure circuit with the breaker closed.
 Open circuit 52 open - X. Indicates the signal used to monitor the trip circuit with the breaker open.
 Open circuit 52 closed - X. Indicates the signal used to monitor the trip circuit with the breaker closed.
 Node.
 PROT/RBCS1: breaker1's circuit supervision.
 PROT/RBCS2: breaker 2's circuit supervision.
 X trip coil failure. Indicates that there has been failure in the pole X trip coil.
 X closing coil failure. Indicates that there has been failure in the pole X closure coil.
 1 trip circuit failure. Indicates that there has been failure in the trip coil of pole A1, B1 or C1.
 2 trip circuit failure. Indicates that there has been failure in the trip coil of pole A2, B2 or C2.
 1 closing circuit failure. Indicates that there has been failure in the closure coil of pole A1, B1 or C1.
 2 closing circuit failure. Indicates that there has been failure in the closure coil of pole A2, B2 or C2.

User Manual 225
BREAKER
Table 132 Circuit supervision settings

TCEna Trip circuit enabled Boolean
CCEna Close circuit enabled Boolean
LogInCCOA1 Close circuit 52 open - A1 Int32
LogInCCOB1 Close circuit 52 open - B1 Int32
LogInCCOC1 Close circuit 52 open - C1 Int32
LogInCCOA2 Close circuit 52 open - A2 Int32
LogInCCOB2 Close circuit 52 open - B2 Int32
LogInCCOC2 Close circuit 52 open - C2 Int32
LogInCCCA1 Close circuit 52 closed - A1 Int32
LogInCCCB1 Close circuit 52 closed - B1 Int32
LogInCCCC1 Close circuit 52 closed - C1 Int32
LogInCCCA2 Close circuit 52 closed - A2 Int32
LogInCCCB2 Close circuit 52 closed - B2 Int32
LogInCCCC2 Close circuit 52 closed - C2 Int32
LogInTCOA1 Open circuit 52 open - A1 Int32
LogInTCOB1 Open circuit 52 open - B1 Int32
LogInTCOC1 Open circuit 52 open - C1 Int32
LogInTCOA2 Open circuit 52 open - A2 Int32
LogInTCOB2 Open circuit 52 open - B2 Int32
LogInTCOC2 Open circuit 52 open - C2 Int32
LogInTCCA1 Open circuit 52 closed - A1 Int32
LogInTCCB1 Open circuit 52 closed - B1 Int32
LogInTCCC1 Open circuit 52 closed - C1 Int32
LogInTCCA2 Open circuit 52 closed - A2 Int32
LogInTCCB2 Open circuit 52 closed - B2 Int32
LogInTCCC2 Open circuit 52 closed - C2 Int32
Table 133 Coil monitoring outputs
RBCS1 Signals RBCS2 Signals Data Attribute

A1 trip coil failure A1 trip coil failure Br2 FailTC1 phsA
B1 trip coil failure B1 trip coil failure Br2 FailTC1 phsB
C1 trip coil failure C1 trip coil failure Br2 FailTC1 phsC
A2 trip coil failure A2 trip coil failure Br2 FailTC2 phsA
B2 trip coil failure B2 trip coil failure Br2 FailTC2 phsB
C2 trip coil failure C2 trip coil failure Br2 FailTC2 phsC
A1 closing coil failure A1 closing coil failure Br2 FailCC1 phsA
B1 closing coil failure B1 closing coil failure Br2 FailCC1 phsB
C1 closing coil failure C1 closing coil failure Br2 FailCC1 phsC
A2 closing coil failure A2 closing coil failure Br2 FailCC2 phsA
B2 closing coil failure B2 closing coil failure Br2 FailCC2 phsB
C2 closing coil failure C2 closing coil failure Br2 FailCC2 phsC
1 trip circuit failure 1 trip circuit failure Br2 FailTC1 general
2 trip circuit failure 2 trip circuit failure Br2 FailTC2 general
1 closing circuit failure 1 closing circuit failure Br2 FailCC1 general
2 closing circuit failure 2 closing circuit failure Br2 FailCC2 general

User Manual 226
DISCONNECTOR
5. DISCONNECTOR
The disconnector unit uses the PROT/XSWI1 logical node. The settings used are:
 Disconnector type: Indicates the type of disconnector employed:

 1 or 2 DI.General Status. Only one input is used for the status of the three poles.
 3 or 6 DI.Per Pole. An independent input is used for the status of each of the three poles.
 89a input: If the disconnector type is "1 or 2 DI.General Status", it indicates the disconnector status.
 89a-Pole A: If the disconnector type is "3 or 6 DI.Per Pole", it indicates the phase A disconnector status.
 89a-Pole B: The same as phase A, but for B.
 89a-Pole C: The same as phase A, but for C.
 89b input: If the disconnector type is "1 or 2 DI.General Status", it indicates the disconnector status.
 89b-Pole A: If the disconnector type is "3 or 6 DI.Per Pole", it indicates the phase A disconnector status.
 89b-Pole B: The same as phase A, but for B.
 89b-Pole C: The same as phase A, but for C.
 Enable Events record: Allows the generation of protection events associated to the function. If set to “NO”,
the function’s protection events are not generated. If set to “YES”, the function’s specific mask is
contemplated.
Table 134 Disconnector status settings

1 or 2 DI.General Status
BrTyp Disconnector type enum
3 or 6 DI.Per Pole
LogIn89a1 89a general status Int32
LogIn89a1A 89a Pole A status Int32
LogIn89a1B 89a Pole B status Int32
LogIn89a1C 89a Pole C status Int32
LogIn89b1 89b general status Int32
LogIn89b1A 89b Pole A status Int32
LogIn89b1B 89b Pole B status Int32
LogIn89b1C 89b Pole C status Int32
Disconnector status
The status of the general disconnector and by pole is determined with the status of digital inputs and disconnector type
setting. Used to determine the status of the disconnector without uncertainty and employed in functions that require the
disconnector’s status to be known, such as the stub bus protection, etc.
The 89b status inputs take precedence over the 89a status inputs, i.e., if 89b status inputs have been configured, the
disconnector status is determined by means of these inputs, independently of the status of the 89a inputs.
Depending on the disconnector type setting, the functioning is:
 1 or 2 DI.General Status. The "89b general status" input is used for the disconnector status. If it is not configured,
the "89a general status" input is used. The phase disconnector status matches the general.
 3 or 6 DI.Per Pole. The independent "89b Pole X status" inputs are used for the disconnector status. If they are
not configured, the "89a Pole X status" inputs are used, where "X" indicates the pole (A, B or C). The general
disconnector status is generated from the phases, taking into account the following:
 Closed general status, if all the phases are closed.
 Open general status, if at least one of the phases is open.
Table 135 shows this function’s outputs.
 Disconnector 1 Status (DI). Indicates the disconnector's general status, in accordance with the status of the
digital inputs.

User Manual 227
DISCONNECTOR
 Disconnector 1 X Status (DI). Indicates the status of each of the disconnector's phases, in accordance with the
status of the digital inputs. Where "X" indicates the pole (A, B or C).
Table 135 Disconnector status outputs
XSWI1 Signal Data Attribute

Disconnector 1 Status (DI) StEna general
Disconnector 1 A Status (DI) StEna phsA
Disconnector 1 B Status (DI) StEna phsB
Disconnector 1 C Status (DI) StEna phsC

User Manual 228
AUTOMATISMS 
6. AUTOMATISMS
The close command of the breaker can be manual close command or automatic (recloser):
 Three poles close command can be monitored by synchronism; while one pole close commands are not monitored by
synchronism
 Manual close command can be monitored by synchronism
6.1 SYNCHRONISM
The synchronism function or “Synchrocheck” waits for the appropriate conditions established in the settings, to determine
breaker closure, both manual and automatic.
Two voltage signals from the two sides of the breaker, which we will call side A and side B, are compared.
Side A corresponds to the voltage input selected with the setting “Side A Phase Select”. This setting selects the analogue
input used. The selection between ground to phase and phase to phase voltages is made with the setting “Operating
Voltages” of the node TVTR. With this setting a compensation factor is applied to equalize the module and the angle of the
two voltages compared (side A and side B).
Side B corresponds to the analogue voltage input connected to the synchronism voltage terminals.
Table 136 shows the settings of this function for undervoltage and synchronism:
 Enabled. Indicates whether the function is enabled or not. When enabled, the function tests the synchronism conditions.
When disabled, manual closure permission is granted, but automatic permission is refused.
 Side A phase Select: selectable between A/AB, B/BC or C/CA, corresponding to the measurement of the selected
voltage transformer. A/AB for transformer 10, B/BC for transformer 11 and C/CA for transformer 12.
 Compensation factor (Vs1): the factor by which the module is multiplied in order to equalize the voltages.
 Compensation angle (Vs1): the factor to be added to the angle in order to equalize the voltages.
 A-Side Voltage presence (V): the voltage measured in side A must exceed this value in order to consider that there is
voltage on that side of the breaker.
 A-Side Lack of Voltage (V): the voltage measured in side A must be lower than this value in order to consider that there
is an absence of voltage on that side of the breaker. It must be at least 5% less than Voltage presence.
 B-Side Voltage presence (V): the voltage measured in side B must exceed this value in order to consider that there is
voltage on that side of the breaker.
 B-Side Lack of Voltage (V): the voltage measured in side B must be lower than this value in order to consider that there
is an absence of voltage on that side of the breaker. It must be at least 5% less than Voltage presence.
 Autoreclose condition. Indicates the conditions for granting reclosing permission with undervoltage:
 Without permission: under no circumstances will the function grant undervoltage permission
 Not A and Yes B: there must be an absence of voltage on side A and presence of voltage on side B in order for the
function to grant undervoltage permission.
 Yes A and Not B: there must be an absence of voltage on side B and presence of voltage on side A in order for the
 Not A and Not B: there must be an absence of voltage on both sides of the breaker in order for the function to grant
undervoltage permission.
 Not A or Not B: there must be an absence of voltage on one of the sides of the breaker in order for the function to
grant undervoltage permission.
 A xor B: there must be voltage presence on one side of the breaker and an absence on the other in order for the
 Not A: there must be an absence of voltage on side A in order for the function to grant undervoltage permission.
 Not B: there must be an absence of voltage on side B in order for the function to grant undervoltage permission.
 Manual closing condition. Indicates the conditions for granting manual closing permission with undervoltage:
 Without permission: under no circumstances will the function grant undervoltage permission

User Manual 229
AUTOMATISMS 
 Not A and Yes B: there must be an absence of voltage on side A and presence of voltage on side B in order for the
 Yes A and Not B: there must be an absence of voltage on side B and presence of voltage on side A in order for the
 Not A and Not B: there must be an absence of voltage on both sides of the breaker in order for the function to grant
undervoltage permission.
 Not A or Not B: there must be an absence of voltage on one of the sides of the breaker in order for the function to
grant undervoltage permission.
 A xor B: there must be voltage presence on one side of the breaker and an absence on the other in order for the
 Not A: there must be an absence of voltage on side A in order for the function to grant undervoltage permission.
 Not B: there must be an absence of voltage on side B in order for the function to grant undervoltage permission.
 Enabling of synchrocheck with reclosure:
 None: under no circumstances will the function grant synchronism permission.
 No compensation: comparisons between angles, modules and frequencies are taken into account to grant
permission if the set conditions are met during the programmed time
 With compensation: in addition to the module and frequency comparisons, breaker close time is taken into account.
See Figure 151.
 Zero compensation: a specific case of enabling with compensation and also taking into account that closure
permission will be granted when the angle difference is 0°. See Figure 151.
 Always.16 The function grants synchronism permission with present of voltage on both sides of the breaker.
 Enabling of synchrocheck with manual closure:
 None: under no circumstances will the function grant synchronism permission.
 No compensation: comparisons between angles, modules and frequencies are taken into account to grant
permission if the set conditions are met during the programmed time
 With compensation: in addition to the module and frequency comparisons, breaker closure time is taken into
account. See Figure 151.
 Zero compensation: a specific case of enabling with compensation and also taking into account that closure
permission will be granted when the argument difference is 0°. See Figure 151.
 Always.16 The function grants synchronism permission with present of voltage on both sides of the breaker.
 Breaker close time (s): taken into account when calculating the angle difference and providing that the enabling "with
compensation" has been programmed. In this case, the frequency slip is taken into account to compensate for this time.
 Voltage difference (V): the difference between the voltage modules on side A and side B must be less than this value in
order for permission to be granted.
 Frequency difference (Hz): the difference between the frequencies on side A and side B must be less than this value in
order for permission to be granted.
 Angle difference (º): the difference between the voltage angles on side A and side B must be less than this value in order
for permission to be granted.
 Slip threshold (Hz): if the difference between the frequencies in side A and side B is greater than this value there is
frequency slip. Otherwise, it is not considered frequency slip.17
 Sync.Time Man.closing(ms): the time during which the conditions for the granting of permission for closure must be met.
 Sync. Time Autoreclose(ms): the time during which the conditions for the granting of permission for reclosure must be
met.
 Blocking input: logic input which, when active, blocks the function. When blocked, manual closure permission is granted,
but automatic permission is refused.
 Close blocking: logic input which, when active, blocks the breaker close permission (manual and automatic).
 Fuse failure signal: fuse failure logic input which, when active, blocks the breaker close permission (manual and recloser)
16
Available since firmware version 6.0.18.0 and ICD 8.1.0.0
17

User Manual 230
AUTOMATISMS 
 A-Side Maximum V. (V)16. To fulfill the synchronism, the side A voltage must be greater than the “A-Side Voltage
presence (V)” setting and below the "A-Side Maximum V" setting. If they are set to the same value, the "A-Side Maximum
V" is considered 200V.
 B-Side Maximum V. (V)16. To fulfill the synchronism, the side B voltage must be greater than the “B-Side Voltage
presence (V)” setting and below the "B-Side Maximum V" setting. If they are set to the same value, the "B-Side Maximum
V" is considered 200V.
 A-Side V aux18. It selects the voltage that replaces the synchronization voltage on the A side when the logic input "Side
A-V switch" is activated. The options are:
 Not apply. The option is disabled.
 Vline. It selects the voltage input selected with the setting “Side A Phase Select”.
 Vs1. It selects the voltage input connected to the synchronism voltage terminals Vs1.
 Side A-V switch.18 Logic input which, when active, replaces the line voltage from side A with the one selected in "A-Side
V aux". When the voltage is switched, the compensation factors to be used are those corresponding to the selected
voltage. The signal " A Side V aux selected " is also activated.
 B-Side V aux. 18 It selects the voltage that replaces the synchronization voltage on the B side when the logic input " Side
B-V switch" is activated. The options are:
 Not apply. The option is disabled.
 Vline. It selects the voltage input selected with the setting “Side A Phase Select”.
 Side B-V switch.18 Logic input which, when active, replaces the line voltage from side B with the one selected in "B-Side
V aux". When the voltage is switched, the compensation factors to be used are those corresponding to the selected
voltage. The signal “B Side I1 V aux selected" is also activated.
The synchronism function can be disabled by means of a setting (“NO”). By means of a “fuse failure” or a “breaker closure
permission block” digital input both manual and automatic permission are refused.
When disabled, manual closure permission is granted but not automatic closure permission. In order to give closure
permission when enabled, the function contemplates the conditions that grant undervoltage permission or synchronism
permission. If any of them grants permission, closure permission is granted. Manual and automatic closure permissions are
analysed independently.
 Undervoltage:
 When disabled undervoltage permission is refused.
 When enabled, undervoltage conditions are analysed. If undervoltage permission is granted, closure permission is
granted, independently of synchronism conditions.
 Synchronism: when undervoltage permission is not granted, synchronism conditions are analysed.
 When disabled synchronism permission is refused.
 When enabled, synchronism conditions are analysed. .
6.1.1 Undervoltage permission

Permission is granted if there is voltage on one or on both sides of the breaker. In order to verify whether there is no
voltage present on one side of the breaker, the voltage measured is checked to see whether it is lower than the
programmed value (see Table 136).
The detection of the presence or the absence of voltage is always done in all the phases. However, the analysis of the
conditions for granting or refusing breaker close permission is only carried out if the function is enabled.
6.1.2 Synchronism permission

Synchronism permission is given when following conditions indicated by the corresponding setting are simultaneously
fulfilled during a programmable time. These conditions are based on the comparison of voltage modules, phases and
18

User Manual 231
AUTOMATISMS 
frequency on both sides of the breaker. The analysis is performed whenever there is voltage on both sides of the breaker
and it is below the maximum voltage setting.
Figure 151 Synchronism check with compensation
If “Sync. Enabled” is selected “with compensation”, the frequency slip is used to compensate the breaker closing time:
ϕUB (with compensation) =ϕUB + ωslip·TCB
∆ϕ with compensation =ϕUB (with compensation) -ϕUA
In which:
Frequency slip ∆f=fB-fA (Hz)
Slip speed ωslip=∆f·360º (º/s)
Breaker closure time TCB (s)
To consider the slip frequency difference must exceed the "Slip threshold (Hz)" setting.
If this angle difference decreases when the “Sync. Enabled” is set with compensation and closure in 0º, the condition for
granting permission will be:
|∆ϕ with compensation|=0
If the angle difference is increasing, the following must be met:
|∆ϕ with compensation|<angle difference setting
When the “Sync. Enabled” is set with compensation, in order for permission to be granted the difference must be around
0º, the following must be met:
|∆ϕ with compensation|<angle difference setting
Synchronism function measurements available in the unit status:
 Module, angle, frequency of the voltage on side A.

 Module, angle, frequency of the voltage on side B.
 The difference between the module, angle, frequency of the voltage on side A and side B. They are only
available when the voltage presence conditions are met on both sides.
The function has independent settings, commands and outputs:
 Node: PROT/RSYN1
 Settings and logical inputs: There are 6 settings tables. See Table 136.
 Commands:
 DOrdSyBlk1: Function block and unblocking. Only acts when the function is enabled.
 DOrdPeBlk1: Close permission block and unblock. Only acts when the function is enabled.

User Manual 232
AUTOMATISMS 
Table 136 Synchronism settings

SynEna Enabled NO/YES enum
SiASel Side A Phase Select A/AB, B/BC, C/CA enum
CoModVs1 Compensation factor (Vs1) 0.1 3 0.01 float
CoArgVs1 Compensation angle (Vs1) 0 330 30 float
PrVSiA A-Side Voltage presence (V) 10 200 0.1 float
AbVSiA A-Side Lack of Voltage (V) 10 200 0.1 float
BrClTmms1 Closing time (ms) 0 100000 10 float
None
No compensation
SyWReEna1 Sync. Enabled (AR) Zero compensation enum
With compensation
Always
None
No compensation
SyWMaClEna1 Sync. Enabled (Close) Zero compensation enum
With compensation
Always
SyDifV1 Voltage difference (V) 0 90 0.1 float
SyDifF1 Frequency difference(Hz) 0.01 5 0.01 float
SyDifA1 Angle difference (º) 0 360 1 float
SlThr Slip threshold (Hz) 0.01 0.5 0.01 float
ReTmms1 Sync. Time (Autoreclose) 0 100000 10 float
MaClTmms1 Sync.Time (Man.closing) 0 100000 10 float
PrVSiB1 B-Side Voltage presence (V) 10 200 0.1 float
AbVSiB1 B-Side Lack of Voltage (V) 10 200 0.1 float
Without permission
Not A and Yes B
Yes A and Not B
Not A and Not B
ClCond1 Manual closing condition enum
Not A or Not B
A xor B
Not A
Not B
Without permission
Not A and Yes B
Yes A and Not B
Not A and Not B
ReCond1 Autoreclose condition enum
Not A or Not B
A xor B
Not A
Not B
LogInBlSy1 Blocking input Int32
LogInBlCl1 Close blocking Int32
LogInRFF Fuse failure signal Int32
MaxVSiA19 A-Side Maximum V. (V) 10 200 0.1 float
MaxVSiB19 B-Side Maximum V. (V) 10 200 0.1 float
Not apply
Vline
AuxVSiA A-Side V aux. enum
Vs1
Vs2
LogInSwA Side A-V switch Int32
Not apply
Vline
AuxVSiB B-Side V aux. enum
Vs1
Vs2
LogInSwB Side B-V switch Int32
Synchrocheck function signals (see Table 137).
 Enable Synchro Breaker 1: Indicates whether the function is enabled or not.
19

User Manual 233
AUTOMATISMS 
 V presence Va/Vab side A: indicates if the voltage on the phase A/AB of side A is greater than the setting “A-
Side Voltage presence (V)”
 V presence Vb/Vbc side A: indicates if the voltage on the phase B/BC of side A is greater than the setting “A-
Side Voltage presence (V)”.
 V presence Vc/Vca side A: indicates if the voltage on the phase C/CA of side A is greater than the setting “A-
Side Voltage presence (V)”.
 V presence ABC side A: indicates if the voltage of the three phases of side A is greater than the setting “A-Side
Voltage presence (V)”.
 V presence side B B1: indicates if the voltage on the side B is greater than the setting “B-Side Voltage presence
(V)”.
 No Voltage Va/Vab side B: indicates if the voltage on the phase A/AB of side A is less than the setting “A-Side
 No Voltage Vb/Vbc side B: indicates if the voltage on the phase B/BC of side A is greater than the setting “A-Side
 No Voltage Vc/Vca side B: indicates if the voltage on the phase C/CA of side A is greater than the setting “A-Side
 No Voltage ABC side A: indicates if the voltage of the three phases of side A is less than the setting “A-Side
 No Voltage side B B1: indicates if the voltage on the side B is less than the setting “B-Side Voltage presence
(V)”.
 A Side Maximun V exceeded 20: It indicates that the voltage on the A side is geater than the setting “A-Side
Maximum V. (V)”.
 B Side I1 Maximun V exceeded20: It indicates that the voltage on the B side is geater than the setting “B-Side
Maximum V. (V)”.
 A Side V aux selected 20. It indicates that the auxiliary voltage on the A side has been selected. This auxiliary
voltage will be used as the side A voltage of the synchronism unit.
 B Side I1 V aux selected 20. It indicates that the auxiliary voltage Vs1 on the B side has been selected. This
auxiliary voltage will be used as the side B voltage of the synchronism unit.
For the following signals, it is necessary that voltage presence is detected on both sides of the breaker:
 Positive slip Breaker 1: it is active if the frequency on the side B is also greater than that on side A by more than
the setting.
 Negative slip Breaker 1: it is active if the frequency on the side A is also greater than that on side B by more
than the setting.
 Underfrequency side B B1: it is active if the frequency difference of both sides exceeds the setting value and the
frequency on side A is greater than that on side B.
 Overfrequency side B B1: it is active if the frequency difference of both sides exceeds the setting value and the
frequency on side B is greater than that on side A.
 Delay without comp. side B 1: when the difference between the angles exceeds the setting value and is greater
on side A than on side B.
 Adv. without comp.side B B1: when the difference between the angles exceeds the setting value and is greater
on side B than on side A.
 Delay with comp. side B 1: when the difference between the angles, calculated by taking into account breaker
closure time, exceeds the setting value and is greater on side A than on side B.
 Advance with comp. side B 1: when the difference between the angles, calculated by taking into account
breaker closure time, exceeds the setting value and is greater on side B than on side A.
 Over Module side B B1: when the voltage difference is greater than the programmed setting and the voltage in
B is greater than in A.
 Under Module side B B1: when the voltage difference is greater than the programmed setting and the voltage in
A is greater than in B.
20
Disponible desde la versión 6.0.18.2 de firmware y 8.2.0.0 de ICD

User Manual 234
AUTOMATISMS 
 Perm. without comp. B1: indicates that differences in voltage, angle and frequencies are lower than the
corresponding settings.
 Perm. with comp. B1: when the necessary conditions related to the voltage, angle argument and frequencies
differences are given, taking into account the breaker closure time for calculating the angle argument difference.
 Perm. Manual Close V B1: Manual closure permission for voltage checks. It´s active when the undervoltage
conditions are met.
 Permission Recloser V B1: Reclosure permission for voltage checks. It´s active when the undervoltage
conditions are met.
 Perm. Manual Close B1: closure permission for undervoltage or for synchronism. It is active, due to compliance
with the undervoltage conditions or the synchronism conditions. If the function is disabled, manual closure
permission will also be signalled.
 Perm. Reclose Br 1: reclosure permission for undervoltage or synchronism, so that the recloser decides on the
automatic closure of the breaker. It is actived, due to compliance with the undervoltage conditions or the
synchronism conditions.
Table 137 Synchronism function outputs for breaker 1
Signal Data Atribute

Positive Slip Breaker 1 PosSlipBr1 stVal
Negative Slip Breaker 1 NegSlipBr1 stVal
Underfrequency side B B1 UFSideBBr1 stVal
Overfrequency side B B1 OFSideBBr1 stVal
Delay without comp. side B 1 DBNSlipBr1 stVal
Adv. without comp.side B B1 ABNSlipBr1 stVal
Delay with comp. side B B1 DBSlipBr1 stVal
Advance with comp. side B 1 ABSlipBr1 stVal
Over Module side B B1 OAbsBBr1 stVal
Under Module side B B1 UAbsBBr1 stVal
Perm. without comp. B1 PNoSlipBr1 stVal
Perm. with comp. B1 PSlip0Br1 stVal
Perm. Manual Close B1 PMCBr1 stVal
Perm. Close Recloser Br 1 PRecBr1 stVal
Perm. Manual Close V B1 PMClVChBr1 stVal
Permission Recloser V B1 PRecVChBr1 stVal
Permission with compens. 1 PSlipBr1 stVal
Enable Synchro Breaker 1 EnaBr1 stVal
V presence Va/Vab side A SAVPres phsA
V presence Vb/Vbc side A SAVPres phsB
V presence Vc/Vca side A SAVPres phsC
V presence ABC side A SAVPres general
No Voltage Va/Vab side A SAVAbs phsA
No Voltage Vb/Vbc side A SAVAbs phsB
No Voltage Vc/Vca side A SAVAbs phsC
No Voltage ABC side A SAVAbs general
Voltage presence side A SAPres stVal
No Voltage side A SAAbs stVal
V presence side B B1 SBVPresBr1 stVal
No Voltage side B B1 SBVAbsBr1 stVal
A Side Maximun V exceeded20 SAVExc stVal
B Side I1 Maximun V exceeded20 SBVExcBr1 stVal
A Side V aux selected20 AuxASel stVal
B Side I1 V aux selected20 AuxVs1Sel stVal
6.1.3 Two breakers application

It is available an independent synchronism function for a second breaker.
As in the first breaker, this unit has function to check the presence of voltage on both sides of the breaker, and the test of
the synchronism conditions to give close permission.
The side A voltage is the same for both synchronisms, so the same voltage and settings are used (“Side A phase
Select”, “Compensation factor (Vs1)” and “Compensation angle (Vs1)”).

User Manual 235
AUTOMATISMS 
The side B voltage is the Vs2 (V synchronism 2).
When “Side A-Vs1 selection” signal is activated, the side A voltage corresponds to the analogue voltage input connected
to the synchronism voltage terminals (Vs1) and side B voltage to the Vs2 (V synchronism 2).
For breaker and a half applications, with closing sequence reclosing "Brk1 then Brk2" or " Brk2 then Brk1" the setting
"Autoreclose condition" depends on the state of the breaker, so that if the first breaker of the sequence is blocked, the
second breaker uses the first breaker´s setting . For example, with "Brk1 then Brk2" if breaker 1 is blocked , it will not be
close command of that breaker, so the "Autoreclose condition" of the second breaker ( RSYN2 ) will use the setting of
the first breaker ( RSYN1 ).
The function has independent settings, commands and outputs for the second breaker. The meaning of these data is the
same as the first breaker.
 Node: PROT/SECRSYN1
 Settings and logical inputs: There are 6 settings tables. See Table 139.
 Outputs: Table 138 shows the function’s output data. They are similar to the first breaker, but for the second.
Table 138 Synchronism function outputs for breaker 2

Positive Slip Breaker 2 PosSlipBr2 stVal
Negative Slip Breaker 2 NegSlipBr2 stVal
Underfrequency side B B2 UFSideBBr2 stVal
Overfrequency side B B2 OFSideBBr2 stVal
Delay without comp. side B 2 DBNSlipBr2 stVal
Adv. without comp. side B B2 ABNSlipBr2 stVal
Delay with comp. side B B2 DBSlipBr2 stVal
Advance with comp. side B 2 ABSlipBr2 stVal
Over Module side B B 2 OAbsBBr2 stVal
Under Module side B B2 UAbsBBr2 stVal
Perm. without comp. B2 PNoSlipBr2 stVal
Perm. with comp.B2 PSlip0Br2 stVal
Perm. Manual Close B2 PMCBr2 stVal
Perm. Close Recloser B2 PRecBr2 stVal
Perm. Manual Close V B 2 PMClVChBr2 stVal
Perm. Recloser V B2 PRecVChBr2 stVal
Permission with compens. 2 PSlipBr2 general
Enable Synchro Breaker 2 EnaBr2 general (stVal in Ed2)
Voltage presence side B B2 SBVPresBr2 general (stVal in Ed2)
No Voltage side B B2 SBVAbsBr2 general (stVal in Ed2)
B Side I2 Maximun V exceeded20 SBVExc2 stVal
B Side I2 V aux selected20 AuxVs2Sel stVal

User Manual 236
AUTOMATISMS 
Table 139 Synchronism settings for breaker 2

SynEna Enabled NO/YES enum
CoModVs2 Compensation factor (Vs1) 0.1 3 0.01 float
CoArgVs2 Compensation angle (Vs1) 0 330 30 float
BrClTmms2 Closing time (ms) 0 10000 10 float
No, Without compensation,
With compensation (0º),
SyWReEna2 Sync. Enabled (AR) enum
With compensation
Always
No, Without compensation,
With compensation (0º),
WMaClEna2 Sync. Enabled (Close) enum
With compensation
Always
SyDifV2 Voltage difference (V) 0 90 0.1 float
SyDifF2 Frequency difference(Hz) 0.01 2 0.01 float
SyDifA2 Angle difference (º) 0 360 1 float
SlThr Slip threshold (Hz) 0.01 0.5 0.01 float
MaClTmms2 Sync. Time (Autoreclose) 0 10000 10 float
ReTmms2 Sync.Time (Man.closing) 0 10000 10 float
PrVSiB2 B-Side Voltage presence(V) 0 200 0.1 float
AbVSiB2 B-Side Lack of Voltage (V) 0 200 0.1 float
Without permission
Not A and Yes B
Yes A and Not B
Not A and Not B
ClCond2 Manual closing condition enum
Not A or Not B
A xor B
Not A
Not B
Without permission
Not A and Yes B
Yes A and Not B
Not A and Not B
ReCond2 Autoreclose condition enum
Not A or Not B
A xor B
Not A
Not B
LogInBlSy2 Blocking input Int32
LogInBlCl2 Close blocking Int32
LogInRFF Fuse failure signal Int32
MaxVSiB221 B-Side Maximum V. (V) 10 200 0.1 float
Not apply
Vline
AuxVSiB B-Side V aux. enum
Vs1
Vs2
LogInSwB Side B-V switch Int32
21

User Manual 237
AUTOMATISMS 
6.1.4 Application auxiliary voltage

Two examples of application and use of auxiliary voltages according to configuration are shown.
Double busbar configuration

Figure 152 Double busbar
In double busbar configuration, there is only one breaker and the synchronism unit 1 (RSYN1) is used.
The side A voltage is independent of the disconnectors, but the side B voltage depends on the disconnector. When 89_1
is closed, Vs1 is used, but when it is opened Vs2 is used. It affects the voltage (module and argument) and frequency
used in the synchronism function. The settings could be:
 A-Side V aux: Not apply

 Side A-V switch: Not asigned
 B-Side V aux: Vs2
 Side B-V switch: disconnector Status 89_1 opened
The synchronism function (undervoltage and synchronism) depends on the disconnector status:
 Disconnector Status 89_1 closed. The voltage selected on the A side is compared with the voltage of the input
Vs1.
 Disconnector Status 89_1 opened. The voltage selected on the A side is compared with the voltage of the input
Vs2.

User Manual 238
AUTOMATISMS 
52 ½ Configuration
Figure 153 52 ½
In 52 ½busbar configuration, there are two breakers and both units of synchronism unit 1 are used (RSYN1 and
SEC/RSYN).
With the disconnector closed, the synchronism units use:
 RSYN1. It compares side A voltage with Vs1.

 SEC/RSYN1. It compares side A voltage with Vs2.
With the disconnector open, both synchronism units compare Vs1 with Vs2.
The settings could be:
 RSYN1
 A-Side V aux: Vs1
 Side A-V switch: disconnector Status 89_1 opened
 B-Side V aux: Vs2
 Side B-V switch: disconnector Status 89_1 opened
 SEC/RSYN1
 B-Side V aux. Not apply
 Side B-V switch. Not asigned

User Manual 239
AUTOMATISMS 
6.2 RECLOSER
The unit allows up to 4 reclosures to be effected. The first one can be single-pole or three-pole, but the next 3 must be three-
pole. In order to make the recloser as useful as possible, the number of reclosures allowed is programmable (0 is not
permitted).
There are different close times for each of the closures and for the first single-pole or three-pole.
The recloser is put into service – out of service by means of a setting. Only when enabled by setting can it be put into
service-out of service by means of a command via communications or the keyboard.
Programmable reclaim time following manual closure and following automatic closure.
The 4 closure counters (total, first, second and third closures) are stored in non-volatile memory and can be viewed in the
console and on the display. These counters can be set to 0 by command or by the keyboard.
The closure cycle can be started either by the unit's own protection trips or by external trips from other protections.
The main recloser statuses are:
 Supervising status.
This is the normal status, during which the recloser “monitors” for the occurrence of any trips. If any trip occurs, the
recloser is activated.
 Ongoing cycle status.

The status of the recloser while activated, from the first trip up to the closure of the breaker and the elapse of the reclaim
time (successful reclosure), or until all the programmed reclosures have been unsuccessfully executed. In the first case,
the recloser switches to “supervising” and, in the second, to “definitive trip”.
 Definitive trip status.

The recloser’s final situation once it has run all the programmed attempts and the breaker remains open due to the
existence of a permanent fault. It only leaves this status when the breaker is closed manually.
 Internal block status.

The status is reached as a result of different causes. The reclosure cycle cannot be started nor can the termination of the
cycle be provoked if the cycle is running. It is cancelled by a breaker closure.
Definitions:
 Reclosable units.
These units are capable of initiating the reclosure process. By default, they are overcurrent or distance units. The non-
reclosable units are those whose trips do not initiate the reclosure cycle (voltage, frequency, power units, etc). There is
an input “External trip” that can be one pole or three poles.
 Trips permitted following reclosure.

Each of the units that are blocked during the reclaim time following each reclosure are programmed by means of "YES"
or "NO".
6.2.1 Settings, signals and commands

The general settings used in the recloser (PROT/ZRREC node) are (see Table 140):

 Reclose mode. Indicates the reclose mode between:
 1 Pole. It allows a single closure only if the first trip is single-pole. In any other case, it gives a definitive trip.
 3 Pole. It allows as many closures as there are programmed in the number of closures before giving the final
trip. It forces all trips to be three-pole.

User Manual 240
AUTOMATISMS 
 1P/3P. It allows as many closures as there are programmed in the number of closures before giving the final
trip. The first closure will be single-pole if the first trip was single-pole and three-pole if it was three-pole. All
other closures of the cycle will be three-pole.
 Dependent. If the first trip is single-pole, it allows as many closures as there are programmed in the number
of closures before giving the final trip; while if the first trip is three-pole, it only allows one closure.
 Configurable:22 The Reclose mode is selected with the logical inputs or commands: “Enable/Disable 1P
mode” and “Enable/Disable 3P mode”. When no option is selected, the recloser is blocked.
 Reclose number. Indicates the maximum number allowed before the issue of the definitive trip.
 3 Pole Reclose 1 time (s). This is the timeout following the first three-pole trip until the recloser issues a closure
command
 1 Pole Reclose 1 time (s). This is the timeout following the first single-pole trip until the recloser issues a closure
command
 Reclose 2 time (s). This is the timeout following the three-pole trip until the recloser issues the second closure
command
 Reclose 3 time (s). This is the timeout following the three-pole trip until the recloser issues the third closure
command
 Reclose 4 time (s). This is the timeout following the three-pole trip until the recloser issues the fourth closure
command
 Time after man. closing(s). Reclaim time following manual closure. The time following the manual closure of the
breaker, during which the existence of a protection trip is monitored. In such a case, a definitive trip is triggered
instead of a change to supervising status.
 Reclaim time Ph-Ph (s). Reclaim time following automatic closure following three-pole trip. This is the time
following the automatic closure of the breaker due to a three-pole trip, during which the existence of a protection
trip is monitored. In such a case, the cycle is continued instead of a change to supervising status.
 Reclaim time ground (s). Reclaim time following automatic closure following single-pole trip. This is the time
following the automatic closure of the breaker due to a single-pole trip, during which the existence of a
protection trip is monitored. In such a case, the cycle is continued instead of a change to supervising status.
 Incomplete sequence. Indicates whether the incomplete sequence function is enabled or not.
 Incomplete sequence T (s). Indicates the maximum time for the completion of the reclosure process.
 79 Blocking level input. Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the recloser. The recloser must be
enabled by setting; on the other hand this input is not available.
 79 Blocking pulse input. Selects the signal which, when there is a status change from deactivated to activated,
blocks the recloser. The recloser must be enabled by setting; on the other hand this input is not available. Since
firmware version 5.18.15.5, if recloser is blocked by pulse, when the input is set “Not assigned”, the recloser is
unblocked.
 79 Unblock pulse input. Selects the signal which, when there is a status change from deactivated to activated,
unblocks the recloser. The recloser must be enabled by setting; on the other hand this input is not available.
 Pause+Reset AR time input. Selects the signal which, when active, restarts the closure time.
 Pause input. Selects the signal which, when active, stops the closure time.
 Autoreclose sequence reset. Selects the signal which, when active, restarts the closure process. If the breaker
is open, “Recloser Lock 52 open” is activated and waits for it to be closed. If it is close, “Recloser Lock manual
closing” is activated. In any case, once closed, it waits for the reclaim time following manual closure to return to
supervising status.
 On line pulse input. Selects the signal which, when there is a status change from deactivated to activated, the
recloser goes to “On service”. The recloser must be enabled by setting; on the other hand this input is not
available.
 Out of line pulse input. Selects the signal which, when there is a status change from deactivated to activated,
the recloser goes to “Out of service”. The recloser must be enabled by setting; on the other hand this input is
not available. Since firmware version 5.18.15.5, if recloser is Out of line by pulse, when the input is set “Not
assigned”, the recloser is On line.
 Enable 1P mode22. Selects the signal which, when there is a status change from deactivated to activated,
enables the 1P mode, when the setting “Reclose mode” is "Configurable". The recloser mode will be:
22

User Manual 241
AUTOMATISMS 
 "1 Pole" when the 3P mode is not selected

 "1P/3P" when the 3P mode is not selected
 Disable 1P mode 22. Selects the signal which, when there is a status change from deactivated to activated,
disable the 1P mode, when the setting “Reclose mode” is "Configurable". The recloser mode will be:
 "3 Pole" when the 3P mode is selected
 "Blocked" when the 3P mode is not selected
 Enable 3P mode 22. Selects the signal which, when there is a status change from deactivated to activated,
enables the 3P mode, when the setting “Reclose mode” is "Configurable". The recloser mode will be:
 "3 Pole" when the 1P mode is not selected
 "1P/3P " when the 1P mode is selected
 Disable 3P mode 22. Selects the signal which, when there is a status change from deactivated to activated,
disable the 3P mode, when the setting “Reclose mode” is "Configurable". The recloser mode will be:
 "1 Pole" when the 1P mode is selected
 "Blocked" when the 1P mode is not selected
Table 140 General recloser settings

RecEna Enabled 0 1 1 NO/YES Enum
1 Pole
3 Pole
RecTyp Reclose mode 0 3 1 1P/3P Enum
Dependent
Configurable
UseCyc Reclose number 1 4 1 Int32
Rec1PhTms 3 Pole Reclose 1 time (s) 0,05 600 0,01 float
Rec2PhTms Reclose 2 time (s) 1 600 1 float
Rec1GTms 1 Pole Reclose 1 time (s) 0,05 600 0,01 float
PReSe3Tms Reclaim time Ph-Ph (s) 1 600 1 float
PReSe1Tms Reclaim time ground (s) 1 600 1 float
MaClSeTms Time after man. closing(s) 1 600 1 float
BlInSecEna Incomplete sequence 0 1 1 NO/YES enum
BlInSecTms Incomplete sequence T (s) 1 600 1 float
LogInReLB 79 Blocking level input Int32
LogInRePB 79 Blocking pulse input Int32
LogInRePUb 79 Unblock pulse input Int32
LogInTmRst Pause+Reset AR time input Int32
LogInTmPau Pause input Int32
LogInRst Autoreclose sequence reset Int32
LogInRPOn On line pulse input Int32
LogInRPOff Out of line pulse input Int32
LogIn1POn Enable 1P mode Int32
LogIn1POff Disable 1P mode Int32
LogIn3POn Enable 3P mode Int32
LogIn3POff Disable 3P mode Int32
MaskEna Enable Events Record 0 1 1 NO/YES Boolean
The general settings used for the supervising for synchronism (PROT/RLSS1 node) are (see Table 141):
 Synchrocheck type. Indicates whether the synchronism is internal or external.

 Check 3 pole first reclose. Three-phase closure 1 monitoring. Indicates whether the first closure is to be
monitored with synchronism.
 Check rest of autorecloses. Monitoring remaining closures. Indicates whether the closures other than the first
are to be monitored with synchronism.

User Manual 242
AUTOMATISMS 
 Sync. Delay Time (s). Synchronism timeout. This is the maximum time waited before the synchronism grants
permission before a three-phase closure. If closure permission is granted before the conclusion of this time, a
closure command is issued. On the other hand, if this time elapsed without permission being granted, a
definitive trip is triggered.
 External syncro. Permission. Logical external synchronism permission logic. Selects the signal which, when
Table 141 Monitoring by synchronism settings

Rec1SyEna Check 3pole first reclose NO/YES Boolean
RecSyEna Check rest of autorecloses NO/YES Boolean
SyWaTms Sync. Delay Time (s) 0.05 600 0.01 float
LogInExSy External syncro. Permission Int32
The settings used for the monitoring by reference voltage (PROT/RVRS1 node) are (see Table 142):

 Delay time (s). This is the time, following the opening of the breaker that is waited for the activation of the
reference voltage signal to allow the reclosure. It is used to wait for the activation of an external signal before
allowing a reclosure. E.g., to wait for the line voltage to disappear following a trip (e.g., if there were motors or
batteries connected) before reconnecting the line.
 Minimum time (s). This is the minimum time during which the vref signal must be seen to be active in order to
consider the existence of reference voltage.
 Reference Voltage input. Logical Vref input. Selects the signal which, when active, indicates the existence of
reference voltage (Vref).
Table 142 Monitoring by Vref settings

VrefEna Enabled NO/YES enum
VrefWaTms Delay time (s) 0.05 600 0.01 float
VrefMinTms Minimum time (s) 0.05 600 0.01 float
LogInVref Reference Voltage input Int32
Table 143 shows the output signal of the monitoring by reference voltage (PROT/RVRS1 node):
 Presence of Vref. Indicates the presence of reference voltage.

 Blocked without Vref. Indicates blocking by absence of reference voltage.
Table 143 Monitoring by Vref outputs

Presence of Vref PresVref general
Blocked without Vref BlkVref general
The setting used for blocking a closure due to a failure in the breaker’s coils (PROT/RTCS1 node) is (see Table 144):
 Block by Coil failure. Indicates whether the recloser blocking by failure in the breaker’s coils is enabled or not.
Table 144 Closure block settings

ClBlTCF Block by Coil failure NO/YES Boolean
Signals
The recloser’s output signals are in the PROT/ZRREC1 node and are shown in Table 145 and Table 146.

User Manual 243
AUTOMATISMS 
The general recloser signals are:
 Recloser in service. Indicates whether it is enabled and not locked by an external blocking input. Internal
blocking signals don´t affect this signal. When the recloser is disabled by setting, the recloser´s signals don´t
activate.
 Recloser in standby. Indicates that it is in standby or supervising.
 Recloser Blocked. Indicates that it is locked. If the recloser is out of service, this signal is activated. If the
recloser is on line, this signal is activated by internal and external block.
 Definitive trip. Indicates that it is in the definitive trip. It´s activated by maximum reclose number or a trip with the
recloser blocked.
 Definitive Trip+Ext blocked. Indicates that it is in definitive trip and external block. It includes trips with the
recloser out of service or blocked.
 Reclose command. Automatic breaker closure command.
 79 in progress. Active from the moment the breaker is opened by a trip until the monitoring or definitive trip
status is reached.
 Reclosing 1 in progress. During the closure cycle 1. As of the opening of the breaker by the first trip or until
supervising is reached following the reclaim time or trip which leads to it being blocked (by Definitive T.) or a
new cycle is produced.
 Reclosing 1 1P in progress. During the closure cycle 1, if only one pole is open by a single-pole trip.
 Reclosing 1 3P in progress. During the closure cycle 1, the three poles are open by a three-pole trip.
 Reclosing 2 in progress. During the closure cycle 2. As of the opening of the breaker by a three-pole trip during
the reclaim time following the first reclosure until the closure command is given or the block is produced.
the reclaim time following the second reclosure until the closure command is given or the block is produced.
the reclaim time following the second reclosure until the closure command is given or the block is produced.
 Safety time. Following the closure of the breaker, the reclaim time is counted until supervising is entered or a
new closure cycle is initiated.
 Safety time manual closing. Following the automatic closure of the breaker, the reclaim time is counted until
supervising is entered or a new closure cycle is initiated.
 Safety time reclosing. Following the manual closure of the breaker, the reclaim time is counted until supervising
is entered or a new closure cycle is initiated.
 Safety time 1st reclosing. Following the closure of the breaker by the first closure, the reclaim time is counted
until supervising is entered, a new closure cycle is initiated or the definitive trip is triggered.
 Safety time 2nd reclosing. Following the closure of the breaker by the second closure, the reclaim time is
counted until supervising is entered, a new closure cycle is initiated or the definitive trip is triggered.
 Safety time 3rd reclosing. Following the closure of the breaker by the third closure, the reclaim time is counted
under supervising is entered or the definitive trip is triggered.
 Safety time 4th reclosing. Following the closure of the breaker by the fourth closure, the reclaim time is counted
under supervising is entered or the definitive trip is triggered.
 Presence of Vref. Indicates the presence of reference voltage.
 Recloser paused. Indicates that the recloser is in pause in the closure time counter.
 Reclosing Started. Indicates that the reclosure process has started.
 Reclosing 1 Started. Indicates that the first reclosure process has started.
 Reclosing 2 Started. Indicates that the second reclosure process has started.
 Reclosing 3 Started. Indicates that the third reclosure process has started.
 Reclosing 4 Started. Indicates that the fourth reclosure process has started.
 Successful Reclosing. Indicates that the reclosure process was completed successfully.
 Breaker Reclosing ongoing. Indicates that the breaker is reclosing.
 Prepare 3 pole trip. Indicates that the following trips will be three-pole.

User Manual 244
AUTOMATISMS 
 If the recloser is enabled by setting, it happens when:

 The Autoreclose mode is 3 Poles
 The Autoreclose mode is 1P/3P or Dependent 3 Poles and the first trip has happened.
 The recloser is blocked
 The recloser is paused by absence of Vref
 The fault has changed from single-pole to three-pole.
 If the recloser is disabled by setting, it happens when:
 The “Single Pole Trip” is disabled by setting (node ZPMPT)
 The input “Force three pole” is activated
 Pole trip allowed. Indicates that single-pole trip is allowed. It happens if the Autoreclose mode is 1 Pole, 1P/3P
or Dependent and the recloser is “in standby”.
 Last pole trip. Indicates the last trip has been single-pole.
 Evolving fault. Indicates the fault has evolved from single-pole to three-pole
 Mode 1P Enabled.22 Indicates that selected reclose type allows 1P reclose.
 Mode 3P Enabled.22 Indicates that selected reclose type allows 3P reclose.
Table 145 General recloser outputs

Recloser in service Auto (RecSt in Ed2) general
Recloser in standby RestST general
RecCyc (RecCycOn in
79 in progress general
Ed2)
Successful Reclosing RecOK general
Definitive Trip DefTrip general
Reclose Command OpCls general
Recloser Blocked Blk (RecBlk in Ed2) general
Reclosing 1 in progress RecCyc1 general
Reclosing 1 1P in progress RecCycMon1 general
Reclosing 1 3P in progress RecCycTr1 general
Safety time SecTime general
Safety time manual closing ManClSecT general
Safety time reclosing RecSecT general
Safety time 1st reclosing Rec1SecT general
Safety time 2nd reclosing Rec2SecT general
Safety time 3rd reclosing Rec3SecT general
Safety time 4th reclosing Rec4SecT general
Recloser paused Pause general
Reclosing Started RecPrIn general
Reclosing 1 Started RecPrIn1 general
Definitive Trip+Ext blocked DefTripBlk general
Breaker Reclosing ongoing BrRec general
Prepare 3 pole trip Op3pol general
Pole trip allowed EnaPol general
Last pole trip OpPol general
Evolving fault EvOp general
Mode 1P Enabled Rec1PEn general
Mode 3P Enabled Rec3PEn general
The recloser blocking signals are:
 79 Internal Block. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to any cause.
 79 Block Definitive Trip. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to a definitive trip.
 79 Block 52 open. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to a manual opening.

User Manual 245
AUTOMATISMS 
 79 Block Trip Exceeded. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to an excessive number of trips.
 79 Block switch on fault. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to a switch onto fault, i.e., a trip is
produced during the reclaim time following a manual closure.
 79 Block 3P trip. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to a three-pole trip, in the single-pole modes.
Recloser Lock No Syncrocheck. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to the absence of
syncrcheck.
 79 Block without Vref. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to the absence of vref.
 79 Block Pole discordance. If the discordance function acts, the reclosure cycle is blocked.
 79 Block Close Failure. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to the close failure. Related to the
breaker monitoring.
 79 Block opening Failure. Indicates that the recloser is in internal block due to the open failure. Related to the
breaker monitoring.
 79 External Block. Indicates that the recloser is in external block due to any cause.
 79 External Block Comms. Indicates that the recloser is in external block due to command.
 79 External Block Input. Indicates that the recloser is in external block due to logical input.
 79 Block Start failure. Indicates that the recloser is blocked due to reclosing start failure.
 79 Block A Start failure. Indicates that the recloser is blocked due to pole A reclosing start failure.
 79 Block B Start failure. Indicates that the recloser is blocked due to pole B reclosing start failure.
 79 Block C Start failure. Indicates that the recloser is blocked due to pole C reclosing start failure.
 79 Block End of cycle. Indicates that the recloser is blocked due to the end of the reclosing cycle.
 79 Block manual closing. Indicates that the recloser is blocked due to manual reclosing.
 79 Block Trip In Safety time. Indicates that the recloser is blocked due to a trip in safety time.
 79 Block Incomplete sequence. Indicates that the recloser is blocked because the sequence time is exceeded.
 79 Block TC Failure. Indicates that the recloser is blocked due to breaker circuit supervision failure.
Table 146 Recloser block outputs

79 Internal Block BlkInt general
79 Block Definitive Trip BlkIntDeTr general
79 Block 52 open BlkIntOpBr general
79 Block Trip Exceeded BlkInExcTr general
79 Block switch on fault BlkIntSOF general
79 Block 3P trip BlkInt3PTr general
79 Block No Syncronism BlkINoSync general
79 Block without Vref BlkINoVref general
79 Block Pole discordance BlkIPoleD general
79 Block Close failure BlkIClFail general
79 Block opening failure BlkIOpFail general
79 External Block BlkExt general
79 External Block Comms BlkExtComs general
79 External Block Input BlkExtDI general
79 Block Start failure BlkIntInFa general
79 Block A Start failure BlkIAInFa general
79 Block B Start failure BlkIBInFa general
79 Block C Start failure BlkICInFa general
79 Block End of cycle BlkICyEnd general
79 Block manual closing BlkIManCl general
79 Block Trip In Safety time BlkITrMaSe general
79 Block Incomplete sequence BlkInSec general
79 Block TC Failure BlkClsTrip general
Commands

User Manual 246
AUTOMATISMS 
The recloser commands are in the node PROT/ZRREC1:
 "DOrdReEn" . It enables/Disables the recloser. This command only operates, when the recloser is enabled by
setting. It is maintained at shutdown.
 "DOrdReclEn" It enables/Disables the recloser in local mode. This command only operates, when the recloser
is enabled by setting and in local mode. It is maintained at shutdown.
 BlkRec. It blocks/unblocks the recloser. It is not maintained at shutdown.
 "DOrdRecIni". It resets the recloser counters.
 "1P mode".22 It enables/disables the 1P mode, when the setting “Reclose mode” is "Configurable". With these
commands the recloser mode can be 1 P, 1P/3P or blocked.
 "3P mode".22 It enables/disables the 3P mode, when the setting “Reclose mode” is "Configurable". With these
commands the recloser mode can be 3 P, 1P/3P or blocked.
6.2.1.1 Reclosure counters

There are independent reclosure counters for the first (single-pole and three-pole), second, third, fourth reclosures
and for the totals.
They are stored in a non-volatile memory and displayed in the statistical data (communications and display).
These counters can be set to 0 by command.
6.2.1.2 Excessive number of trips

It allows the number of trips within the time to be limited.
A signal is generated the trip limit is exceeded (“Reclose number” setting) within a set time (“Trips exceeded window
(min)” setting in the CBOU node).
It sets recloser to “Internal block”, signalling “Excessive nbr trips” and “Definitive trip”.
6.2.2 General operation

After a certain period following the introduction of voltage (or after resetting), the recloser enters in one of the states:
 If the recloser is enabled:

 Supervising status when the breaker is closed (passing through manual closure) or
 Manual Opening (manual opening block) if the breaker is open.
 If the recloser is disabled or there is a block signal, the reclosure cycle is not launched and it remains in the
blocked status
Figure 154 Recloser initialization
It remains in the Manual Opening and Definitive Trip statuses until the breaker is closed manually.
Following the closure:
 If the breaker does not open during the block (or reclaim) time, it goes to Supervising status.
 If there is a manual opening, it enters Manual Opening Block.
 If there is an opening by a protection, it enters Definitive Trip Block.

User Manual 247
AUTOMATISMS 
If the protection acts but the breaker does not open (or the trip remains active) during the programmed time, it enters
internal block due to opening failure and the corresponding signal is activated. It leaves this status following a manual
opening, a breaker closure command or a reset.
The Supervising (or standby) status is maintained until:
 There is a manual opening.

 The protection acts and opens the breaker, initiating the cycle when applicable.
The cycle consists of 1 to 3 reclosures.
During each cycle a programmed time is observed and the breaker closes. If the breaker does not trip due to a protection
within the reclaim time, the Supervising (standby) status is entered. If it does, the following closure is initiated. If this was
the last, the Definitive Trip is initiated.
If, following the action of the protection, the breaker does not open in the preset time or the relay continues to trip, the
internal block begins to operate. If, following a closure and while the safety time is being counted, there is a manual
opening. In this case, it enters Manual Opening Block and exits the cycle.
If, while the reclosure time is being counted, a manual closure is produced, the recloser aborts the reclosure cycle and
enters “Manual closure”. Following the corresponding reclaim time, it returns to standby.
If, once closed, a reset is received, it also enters manual closure.
The action of the external block prevents the cycle from being entered, or the exit from any ongoing cycle. If the breaker
opens while the block is in effect, it enters Definitive Trip block.
If the synchrocheck function is enabled and the synchrocheck monitoring setting is set to “YES”, this function must issue
closure permission in order for the closure relay to be activated.
The figures below show the sequence of events for a reclosure which has been programmed for three reclosure attempts
(TR1, TR2 and TR3, respectively), with a reclaim time of Tsec, for different situations:
a.- Successful first reclosure.
Once the Supervising status has been reached, a new trip causes a new cycle to begin and reclosure 1 is started once
more, as shown below:

User Manual 248
AUTOMATISMS 
b.- Successful second reclosure.
c.- Successful third reclosure.
d.- Changes to definitive trip after exhausting the number of programmed reclosures.
e.- Changes to definitive trip due to a trip during the reclaim time following a manual closure.

User Manual 249
AUTOMATISMS 
6.2.3 Post-trip reclosure permission mask

They are independent for each of the protection units and are configured in the protection nodes.
The enabling of the corresponding R1, R2 and R3 post-trip reclosure permission mask is checked with each trip. If they
are not enabled, the reclosure cycle is interrupted.
In the event of simultaneous trips (before the opening of the breaker), the units with reclosure permission are taken into
account in order start the reclosure cycle.
Additionally, the trips which force the recloser to enter a block are also checked.
If consecutive trips are produced in different units, the relay reviews the tripped units’ masks and allows as many
reclosures as correspond to the minimum number allowed for the units involved.
That is, if the minimum number of reclosures is set to 3, reclosures 1, 2 and 3 are allowed.
Once the number of permitted cycles has been exceeded, a new trip causes the recloser to enter “Definitive trip block”.
Reclosable trips
These are trips that are capable of initiating the reclosure cycle is programmed accordingly. In general, they are trips
corresponding to the overcurrent and distance units, as well as the external trip inputs.
Each trip’s programming options are:
 Reclosure following a trip set to “YES”

In order to allow reclosure following a specific trip type, the reclosure permission settings must be set to “YES”.
If various units issue a trip command during a fault and at least one of the tripped units has reclosure permission, the
reclosure cycle is initiated, unless one of the units is set to produce a 79 block.
 Reclosure following a trip set to “NO”

If, in the event of simultaneous trips, reclosure is not to be produced by a specific unit but rather the units with permission
are to have precedence, i.e., the reclosure cycle is to be initiated.
Likewise, there are various unit block inputs (for status and for pulses), thus making it possible to transfer any signal that
is to be used to avoid the reclosure to this input.
Non-reclosable trips
If a non-reclosable trip is produced (27, 59, 59N, 81, 81R), the reclosure unit will not launch the reclosure sequence for
this cause and, depending on whether the reclosure block mask has been set to “YES”, it will force the recloser to enter
the definitive trip status.
If the trip does not open the breaker (because it has not given rise to the general trip), the recloser will remain in its
current status.
Non-reclosable unit’s can be made to produce a reclosure by means of the connection to the trip output corresponding to
the “Configurable autoreclose” input.
Recloser block due to trip
This is used when a specific unit is not to produce a reclosure following a trip and when this unit is to prevail over those
with permissions in the event of simultaneous trips.
If this mask is not used, two units may trip simultaneously and the recloser may reclose due to one of the units being
reclosable.
In the event of the non-reclosable unit tripping on its own, the breaker will open and remain in a blocked status.
In addition to these masks, the relay has logic inputs that allow the recloser to be blocked. Through the logical
assignment of internal signals to these inputs, the user can modify the operation of the recloser.
Each protection unit has an independent setting which is used to enable or disable this unit’s reclosure due to trip
permissions. The reference is “ReC1Perm”. The setting is configured as a menu of options.
The PacFactory has a drop-down menu showing the possible combinations. These options are different between the
distance units that generates single-pole trip and the units that only produces three-pole trip:

User Manual 250
AUTOMATISMS 
Table 147 Options of reclosure permissions following trip (tripolar units)
Data Reference
0 NO None reclose is allowed
1 Reclose 1 Only the first reclose is allowed.
2 Reclose 2 Only the second reclose is allowed.
3 Reclose 1-2 The first and second recloses are allowed.
4 Reclose 3 Only the thrird reclose is allowed.
5 Reclose 1-3 The first and thrird recloses are allowed.
6 Reclose 2-3 The second and thrird recloses are allowed.
7 Reclose 1-2-3 All recloses are allowed
8 Reclose 4 Only the fourth reclose is allowed.
9 Reclose 1-4 The first and fourth recloses are allowed.
10 Reclose 2-4 The second and fourth recloses are allowed.
11 Reclose 1-2-4 The first, second and fourth recloses are allowed.
12 Reclose 3-4 The thrird and fourth recloses are allowed.
13 Reclose 1-3-4 The first, thrird and fourth recloses are allowed.
14 Reclose 2-3-4 The second, thrird and fourth recloses are allowed.
15 Reclose 1-2-3-4 All recloses are allowed
Table 148 Options of reclosure permissions following trip (distance units with one pole trip)
Data Reference
0 NO None reclose is allowed after a trip of the unit
1 Reclose 1 (1P) Only the first reclose is allowed after a one pole trip of that unit
2 Reclose 1 (3P) Only the first reclose is allowed after a three poles trip of that unit
3 Reclose 1 (1P/3P) Only the first reclose is allowed after a trip of that unit
4 Reclose 2-3-4 The second, third and fourth recloses are allowed
5 Reclose1(1P)-2-3-4 The first (if it is one pole),the second, third and fourth recloses are allowed
6 Reclose1(3P)-2-3-4 The first (if it is three poles), the second, third and fourth recloses are allowed
7 Reclose 1-2-3-4 All recloses are allowed
Table 149 Options of reclosure permissions following trip (distance units with three poles trip)
Data Reference
0 NO None reclose is allowed after a trip of the unit
2 Reclose 1 (3P) Only the first reclose is allowed after a trip of that unit
4 Reclose 2-3-4 The second, third and fourth recloses are allowed after a trip of that unit
7 Reclose 1-2-3-4 All recloses are allowed after a trip of that unit
Table 150 Reclosure permissions following trip (in each protection node)

ReclPerm Reclosure permission 0 255 1 Int32

User Manual 251
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 155 Recloser start

User Manual 252
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 156 Example of trip and reclosure permission operation

User Manual 253
AUTOMATISMS 
6.2.4 Fault type selection

Depending on which unit has provoked the initiation of the reclosure process, the reclosure time to elapse before the
generation of the reclosure signal, as well as the reclaim time following the reclosure, is selected.
Internal Trips
Depending on the type of trip produced, there are 2 types of reclosure:
 Reclosure following a single-pole trip. This trip is produced by distance zone 1 and teleprotection unit.
 Reclosure following a three-pole trip (the rest).
If a single-pole trip evolves to a three-pole trip before the reclosing, the times are restarted in accordance with the three-
pole trip.
External trips
Includes the following signals:
 DPE - External protection trip: Can be single-pole or three-pole.

 DPR-Reclosable programmable trip. An internal signal which is wired for logics and whose activation allows the
reclosure cycle to be initiated.
Upon the opening of the breaker and once it has been determined whether the fault is single-pole or three-pole, a
reclosure time that is programmed in accordance with the chosen setting is launched.
6.2.5 Breaker open timeout

Once the relay has tripped (activation of the general trip), the recloser waits during the opening failure time, till the
breaker opens (by contact) and the trip disappears. If the breaker does not open upon the conclusion of this time,
“opening failure block” is entered.
If during this programmed period of time the breaker opens, the ongoing cycle is initiated and the “79CC-Ongoing cycle”
signal is activated.
This signal will remain active until the cycle terminates upon its completion and a standby or block status is entered.
If the 52 NO and NC inputs are programmed, the 52b (NC) will be taken into consideration to detect the opening. If only
the 52a (NO) input is programmed, this signal at zero will be used as an open status.
6.2.6 Number of reclosures available

The total number of reclosures can be selected by settings.
The reclosures which are to be possible following the tripping of a specific unit can also be selected.
The enabling of the corresponding R1, R2, R3 and R4 permission mask is checked with each trip. If they are not
enabled, the reclosure cycle is interrupted.
In the event of simultaneous trips (before the opening of 52), the units with reclosure permission are taken into account in
order start the reclosure cycle.
Additionally, the trips which force the recloser to enter a block are also checked.
If consecutive trips are produced in different units, the relay reviews the tripped units’ masks and allows as many
reclosures as correspond to the minimum number allowed for the units involved. That is, if the minimum number of
reclosures is set to 3, reclosures 1, 2 and 3 are allowed.
Once the number of permitted cycles has been exceeded, a new trip causes the recloser to enter “Definitive trip block”.
All the trips (reclosable, non-reclosable and block) are checked up to the moment in which the breaker opens.
Any block trips which appear are sent directly to a blocked recloser.
If there are only reclosable trips, the reclosure cycle is begun with the time of the first reclosable produced by the trip.

User Manual 254
AUTOMATISMS 
Examples of operation.
The total number of reclosure cycles is set to 2 and Autoreclose mode to Dependent.
Example 1:
 Unit 50 trips (three-pole trip with reclosure available in all except the first one). Recloser does not reclose as the
reclosure permission is not allowed in CC1. Recloser would enter “Internal Block-Definitive Trip”
Example 2:
 52 is closed and reclaim time following manual closure is initiated.

 Unit 51N trips (with R1, R2 and R3 reclosure permission for three-pole trips). 79 recloses with “Three-pole
Reclose 1 time (s)”.
 With 52 closed, and while “Reclaim time Ph-Ph (s)” is running, unit 50 trips (with R2 and R3 reclosure
permission) Reclosure R2 is not performed because the first trips has been three-pole. Recloser would enter
“Internal Block-Definitive Trip”
Example 3:
 In standby, Zone 1 single-pole trips (with R1 reclosure permission for single-pole trips). 79 recloses with “single-
pole Reclose 1 time (s)”.
 With 52 closed, and while “Reclaim time ground (s)” is running, a three-pole trip happens (with R2 and R3
reclosure permission for three-pole trips). 79 recloses with “Reclose 2 time (s)”.
 With 52 closed, and while “Reclaim time ground (s)” is running, a three-pole trip happens (with R2 and R3
reclosure permission for three-pole trips). 79 recloses with “Reclose 3 time (s)”.
 With 52 closed, and while “Reclaim time ground (s)” is running, a three-pole trip. 79 recloses with “Reclose 3
time (s)”. Recloser does not reclose because the maximum reclosure number is exceeded. Recloser would
enter “Internal Block-Definitive Trip”
Example 4:
 While in standby, a 50 trip with R1 permission is produced and, before 52 opens, another 50N with R2
permission, programmed without blocking, trip is produced.
 In this case, the 50 trip would take precedence, provoking the reclosure cycle.
Example 5:
 While in standby, a 50 trip with R1 permission is produced and, before 52 opens, another 50N programmed with
blocking trip is produced.
 In this case, when the 50N trip is produced and the breaker opens, the reclosure cycle would be interrupted and
“Internal Block-Definitive Trip” would be entered.
6.2.7 Reference voltage monitoring

This is used to wait for the activation of an external signal before allowing a reclosure. For example, to wait for the
disappearance of the line voltage following a trip (if there were motors or batteries connected to the line) or for a specific
network condition (power fluctuations, etc).
This monitoring is equivalent to a pause signal that halts the reclosure cycle during the VREF timeout.
It operates as follows:
 Once the breaker has opened and the trip has dropped out, the reclosure cycle is initiated and the reclosure
time is launched.
 In the absence of VREF, “VREF timeout” is launched, during which the VREF signal should be activated to
allow the continuation of the reclosure process.
 If the VREF signal does not appear prior to the elapse of this time, the internal 79 block due to absence of
VREF” status is entered.
 This status is cancelled by means of a closure or following the activation of the recloser reset input.

User Manual 255
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 157 Reference voltage monitoring scheme
6.2.8 Re-initiation of reclosure time

The digital “Pause with reclosure reinitiation” input is used to reset the reclosure time counter to zero.
When the “Pause with reclosure reinitiation” input is activated, the recloser time counter (dead time) is reset to zero and
the 79 is halted until this input is cleared.
When this input is deactivated, the reclosure time count is restarted.
6.2.9 Pausing of reclosure time

The digital “Pause input” input is used to pause the reclosure time counter.
When this input is activated, the reclosure time counter (dead time) is halted until this input is cleared.
When this input is deactivated, the reclosure time count continues.
Figure 158 Reclosure time with pause and restart scheme
6.2.10 Incomplete sequence block

The two pause inputs can be used to wait for a certain signal, although the cycle can be extended indefinitely. It is thus
important to prevent the recloser from remaining permanently in the current cycle.

User Manual 256
AUTOMATISMS 
This timed is used to check that the recloser has exceeded a defined time without issuing a closure command nor
becoming blocked or resetting, thus causing the recloser to enter a block by incomplete sequence status.
Figure 159 Block by incomplete sequence scheme
6.2.11 Synchronism monitoring

It only applies to three-pole trips. If the trip is single-pole, the synchronism is not checked before reclosure command.
After a three-pole trip, if a specific reclosure is set to “monitored by synchronism” and once the reclosure time has
elapsed, there is a maximum timeout equivalent to the “Sync. Delay Time (s)” setting in which the “synchronism
permission” signal is to activate. Upon the issue of the synchronism permission the reclosure command is activated.
If synchronism permission is not activated, the “Block due to lack of synchronism” status is entered.
The first and the rest of the reclosures can be set to monitoring by synchronism by means of a setting. This allows the
first reclosures to be carried out quickly and without the need to check for synchronism, in the case of specific faults, and
normal reclosures for the rest.
Settings can be used to establish whether the synchronism is to check the relay’s functioning or that or an external input.
There is a setting within the synchronism unit to enable monitoring by synchronism for the recloser and for manual
closing. As they are independent settings, by disabling function 25 it is possible to monitor the reclosure with the external
synchronism input.
If the setting “Synchrocheck type” is internal, the recloser waits the permission signal is activated. If the setting is
external, the recloser waits the activation of the “External syncro. Permission” input.
6.2.12 Closure block by trip circuit monitoring

If the closure block by trip circuit monitoring is set to “YES”, when the reclosure command is activated while the trip
circuit monitoring logic’s “trip circuit failure” signal, the closure command is not received and "Internal block due to failure
in the SPV trip circuit" is signalled.
This status is cancelled by the manual closure of the breaker following the elapse of the reclaim time.
6.2.13 52 closure timeout

Once the relay has issued a reclosure command (Activation of the 79 output-reclosure command), the breaker should
close during the closure failure timeout (by contact), If the breaker has not closed upon the conclusion of the timeout, "79
block due to closure failure" s entered and the reclosure command is deactivated. If there is a trip during that time, the
reclose command is cancelled and a definitive trip is generated.
This status is cancelled by means of a manual closure.
If the 52 NO and NC inputs are programmed, the 52b (NC) will be taken into consideration to detect the closure.
If only the 52b (NC) is programmed, this denied signal will be used.

User Manual 257
AUTOMATISMS 
6.2.14 Recloser statuses

During its operation, the recloser enters through various statuses that are grouped together as stables and transitory.
6.2.14.1 Stable statuses

The "Recloser" function has 5 stable statuses, i.e., statuses in which it can remain indefinitely until something occurs
to cancel the status. They are:
 Out of service.
 Supervising, standby or reset.
 Manual opening.
 Internal block. Includes the Definitive trip.
 External block.
 Reclosure successful
6.2.14.1.1 Out of service

It will be placed out of service by settings (Enabled “NO”).
If it is in service, it can be placed out of service by pressing the R key on the keyboard or by means of a command or
logical input.
This status is exited when the function is enabled by a setting or command (R key or command or logical input). The
transitory manual closure setting is entered if the breaker is closed at this time. If the breaker is open, internal block
(due to manual opening) is entered.
The functioning is similar when the relay lights and the reclosure setting is set to “YES”.
6.2.14.1.2 Supervising or standby

This is the normal status, during which the recloser “monitors” for the occurrence of any trips. If any trips occur,
the recloser is activated.
This status is entered:
 Whenever the breaker is closed for a period that exceeds the reclaim time (following a manual closure or
following a trip).
 If the breaker is closed and in the external block status, when the block signal is cleared.
This status is exited:
 By the action of the protection and the subsequent opening of the breaker. If reclosure is to follow, the
cycle is initiated. If not, Definitive trip is entered.
 Due to the manual opening of the breaker. Manual Opening is entered.
6.2.14.1.3 Manual opening

This status is entered by a manual opening command (by command, contact or other causes, but not by a trip).
This status is cancelled when the 52 is closed manually (by command, contact, etc., by not by reclosure).

User Manual 258
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 160 Manual opening
6.2.14.1.4 Internal block

There is a general internal block status with different signalling, in accordance with the cause. This status is
entered as result of different causes:
 Opening failure
 Closure failure
 Manual opening
 Three-phase Trip
 Definitive trip
 Incomplete sequence
The reclosure cycle is not started in this status. The cycle is abandoned if it has already been started and
Definitive Trip is signalled if the breaker has opened as a result of a protection trip.
This status is cancelled by the closure of the breaker following the elapse of the reclaim time.
In all cases, a generic “internal block” signal is activated, in addition to a specific signal identifying the cause of
the block. In those cases where the block status occurs after a trip and the opening of the 52, “definitive trip block”
is also indicated.

User Manual 259
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 161 Block scheme
Internal block as a result of an opening fault
This status is entered if, following the elapse of the breaker fault time after a trip, the breaker remains closed.
This status is cancelled when the breaker opens. The opening failure time is the same as that of the opening fault
with contact function.
Figure 162 Opening failure block scheme
DGITAL SIGNAL
General trip Time
DIGITAL SIGNAL S RECLAIM T

OPENING
52 DIGITAL SIGNAL
Phase A open command Recloser Lock opening failure
0
DIGITAL SIGNAL R
52_1 A Closed (Simple Log.)

User Manual 260
AUTOMATISMS 
Internal block as a result of a closure failure
This status is entered of any of the following conditions are met:
 If the breaker remains open following the elapse of the breaker closure failure time after a closure
command. “Definitive trip” is also signalled.
 If the trip circuit failure block is enabled. If, when activating the closure command, the command activates
the trip and closure circuits’ monitoring logic’s "trip circuit failure” signal, the closure command is not
issued and “closure command blocked" is signalled. Following the elapse of the closure failure time, the
block by closure failure status is entered.
This status is cancelled by the manual closure of the breaker following the elapse of the reclaim time.
Internal block by open breaker (manual opening)
This status is entered by a manual opening or by means of a breaker command when the 79 is in standby or in a
current cycle.
It is cancelled by a manual breaker closure. The transitory Manual Closure status is entered.
Definitive trip
This status is activated following a trip that fails to produce a reclosure due to a 79 block or for having reached the
end of the cycle with the fault intact:
 A trip is produced within a period that is shorter than the reclaim time following a manual breaker closure.
 A trip is produced in a period that is shorter than the reclaim time following the last reclosure.
 A protection trip is produced while the block status is active.
 A protection trip is produced while the recloser is out of service.
 An excessive number of trips are produced within a defined time.
 The recloser does not issue a closure command due a voltage monitoring failure (synchronism).
 The recloser issues a closure command and the recloser does not close in the closure failure time.
 The recloser does not issue a closure command due to an interlock (for example, a trip circuit failure) and
the recloser does not close in the closure failure time.
 The voltage presence conditions are not met during a current cycle.
 If a trip does not produce a reclosure due the programming of a block (with the block taking precedence
over other functions with permissions) or the absence of the programming of a reclosure (unless there is
another function with reclosure permission trips simultaneously).
 A switch onto fault function trip following a manual closure.
 By incomplete sequence.
This status is cancelled by one of the following causes.
 Manual breaker closure, following which the transitory MC (Manual Closure) status is activated.
 Reception of recloser’s reset input.

User Manual 261
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 163 Internal block statuses diagram
Incomplete sequence block.
See the “Incomplete sequence block” section.
6.2.14.1.5 External block

This status is activated by:
 Activation of the recloser’s logical block input.

 Reception of a block command. There are block and unblock commands.
No cycles are started while the block is active and any cycles which had already been started are terminated.
“internal 79 block”, “external 79 block by communication” or “external 79 block by input” is signalled. “Definitive
trip + Trip & extern.block” is also signalled if the breaker has been opened by a protection trip (general trip) or by
an external protection.
6.2.14.1.6 Successful reclosure

Successful reclosure is signalled when, following the issue of a closure command and the closure of the three 52
poles, the reclaim time elapses without a new trip being produced.
The “successful reclosure” signal is activated and remains so until the relay trips once again.
6.2.14.2 Transitory statuses

Transitory statues are those statuses in which the system cannot remain for longer than a specific time.

User Manual 262
AUTOMATISMS 
6.2.14.2.1 Manual closure

This status is activated as a result of a manual breaker closure or by means of a command (not be reclosure),
independently of whether a cycle is in progress. It maximum duration is equivalent to the reclaim time following
manual closure.
This status is cancelled by one of the following causes:
 Due to the manual opening of the breaker. An internal block due to manual opening is activated.
 Due to the action of the protection. An internal block due to definitive trip is activated.
 Following the elapse of the safety time. Standby is activated.
 Due to the activation of the external block input or block command. An external block is activated.
 Due to the action of the protection following an opening failure (52 does not open or the unit remains
tripped). An internal block due to an opening fault is activated.
Figure 164 Reclaim time following manual closure
6.2.14.2.2 First closure. Phase 1: Timed.

This is reached at the start of the cycle. Its maximum duration is equivalent to the first closure time. If monitoring
by synchronism is activated, the synchronism timeout is added, if there is no synchronism upon the termination of
the reclosure time count. There are different settings for the first single-pole and three-pole reclosing.
At the same time as the closure time count, the monitoring by VREF (during a maximum “VREF timeout” period)
and by synchronism.
This is cancelled by:
 Manual breaker closure. “Internal block” is activated and “Temporary block by manual closure” is
signalled.
 Following the elapse of the reclosure time. Phase 2 of the closure is entered.
 Activation of the external block input. “External block” is activated.
 Failure to meet the reference voltage (VREF) monitoring conditions. An internal block is activated and
Internal block due to absence of VREF and Definitive trip is signalled.
 Failure to meet the synchronism monitoring conditions. An internal block is activated and Internal block
due to synchronism fault and Definitive trip is signalled.

User Manual 263
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 165 Reclosure line scheme
Figure 166 Opening timeout scheme

User Manual 264
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 167 Reclosure timeout scheme
6.2.14.2.3 First closure. Phase 2: closure command.

This is reached once the first closure timed is complied with. It activates the closure command and increments the
closures meter.
It is cancelled:
 Because the breaker has closed in the permitted time. Phase 3 entered.
 Because the permitted time has elapsed without the closure of the breaker. An internal block is activated
and “Internal block due to closure failure” and “Definitive trip” is signalled. The relay’s Breaker failure due
to contact signal is also activated.
6.2.14.2.4 First closure. Phase 3: breaker closure.

This is reached following the closure command issued in phase 2 when the breaker has closed. It maximum
duration is equivalent to the reclaim time following automatic closure. It deactivates the closure signal.
It is cancelled:
 Due to the manual opening of the breaker. “Internal block” is activated and “Internal block by manual
opening” is signalled.
 Due to a protection trip. The second reclosure process is entered, phase 1.
 Because the block time has elapsed without the opening of the breaker. Standby is activated.
A low current permanent fault may cause tripping following the elapse of the safety period. To avoid, in the event
of all the reclosures being first reclosures and no definitive trip is produced, the automatic extension of the timeout
due the pick up of a unit capable of producing a reclosable general trip in standby (“Trip permission with 79 in
standby” set to “YES”) until reset or a trip is produced.

User Manual 265
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 168 Closure scheme
Figure 169 Timeout following closure scheme
6.2.14.2.5 Second closure

This is reached as a result of protection trip in the timeout following the closure originated by the first closure. Its
functioning (phases, activated relays, etc.) is the same as that of the first closure.
6.2.14.2.6 Third closure

This is reached as a result of protection trip in the timeout following the closure originated by the second closure.
Its functioning (phases, activated relays, etc.) is the same as that of the first closure.
6.2.14.2.7 Ongoing cycle

The status of the recloser while activated, from the first trip and the opening of the breaker up to the closure of the
breaker and the elapse of the safety period (successful reclosure), or until all the programmed reclosures have
been unsuccessfully executed. In the first case, the recloser switches to “supervising” and, in the second, to
“definitive trip”
If, during the operating cycle, a manual order (or command) is given to the circuit breaker, the recloser suspends
the cycle and switches "internal block due to manual opening" or "manual closure".
These same applies if a reset signal is received.

User Manual 266
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 170 Ongoing cycle scheme
6.2.15 Application with two breakers

When having a double breaker configuration, both breakers trip at the same time. With this function, the recloser
operation mode with the two breakers can be selected between:
 Both breakers reclose simultaneously.

 Combine the closings following a programmed sequence.
 Automatically, only closes one of the breakers.
In any of those cases, once the security time has passed, both breakers must be closed in order to finish the reclosing
successfully.
After a single phase trip, the recloser waits for the opening of only one pole in both breakers. If more than one pole
opens, it blocks and signalizes definitive trip. If the tripped pole does not open in both breakers, after waiting a time, it
blocks by open failure. To begin the process, both breakers have to open.
If both breakers open correctly, the reclosing cycle begins after the time set, to close the breaker selected with the
closing sequence. If a single phase fault is detected, it can evolve to a three phase fault during the ongoing cycle. At this
moment, a new three phase reclosing waiting time begins to give closing permission. If, when giving a reclosing
permission, the breaker is open or tripped, it blocks.
The recloser considers that a breaker is blocked, if a manual opening has been made or if it is blocked by a digital input
or setting. In this case, it does not operate, and will only be able to operate the other breaker if the setting "Permit closure
52_x with 52_y blocked" says so.
With manual closing of a breaker, the recloser is blocked by manual closing , counting the safety time after manual
closing.
The "Closing sequence" defines how the recloser acts:
 Brk1. The reclose cycle only generates close command for breaker 1.
 Generates open command on both breakers and wait for them to open. If any of them is not open,then it will
block by open failure and not continue reclosure cycle.
 Generates close command for breaker 1 and waits for closure (with or without synchronism). Breaker 2 is not
closed.
 Brk2. The reclose cycle only generates close command for breaker 2.It is same as above, but breakers are
exchanged.
 Brk1 and Brk2. The reclose cycle generates close command for both breakers simultaneously.
 Generates open command on both breakers and wait for them to open. If any of them is not open,then it will
block by open failure and not continue reclosure cycle.
 Generates close command for both breakers and wait for closure (with or without separate synchronism) to
pass safety time. If one of them gives closure failure, the setting value Block by Br1 Close Fail is checked
 NO:The closing sequence continues considering only the other breaker
 YES: Recloser is locked and it will block by close failure.
 If either closed, it starts counting recloser safety time.
 If recloser safety time ends up without trips and breaker is closed, it returns to standby.
 If new protection trip is produced, a new closing sequence is started
 If an excessive number of trips are produced in any breaker, then it will block and not continue reclosure
cycle
 Brk1 then Brk2. The reclose cycle generates close command for breaker 1. When the reclose cycle has finished
successfully (Successful Reclosing), the breaker 2 close command is generated, once the sequence time since
the breaker 1 close command has finished

User Manual 267
AUTOMATISMS 
 Generates open command on both breakers and wait for them to open. If any of them is not open, then it will
block by open failure and not continue reclosure cycle
 Generates close command for breaker 1 and waits for closure (with or without synchronism). When recloser
safety time ends up without trips and breaker 1 is closed (Successful Reclosing), the breaker 2 close
command is generated. If one of them gives closure failure, the setting value Block by Br1 Close Fail is
checked
 NO: Closing sequence continues considering only the breaker 2 checking synchronism 2.
 If an excessive number of trips are produced in any breaker, then it will block and not continue reclosure
cycle
 Brk2 then Brk1. The reclose cycle generates close command for breaker 2. When the reclose cycle has finished
successfully (Successful Reclosing), the breaker 1 close command is generated, once the sequence time since
the breaker 2 close command has finished. It is same as above, but breakers are exchanged.
 Brk1 - Brk2. The reclose cycle generates close command for breaker 1. When the breaker 1 has closed, the
sequence time starts. When the sequence time finishes without a new trip, the breaker 2 close command is
generated. If during sequence time with the breaker 1 closed, there is a trip, the next reclose cycle starts until the
maximum allowed reclosure by setting. The sequence is the following:
 Generates open command on both breakers and wait for them to open. If any of them is not open,
then it will block by open failure and not continue reclosure cycle
 Generates close command for breaker 1 and waits for closure (with or without synchronism). When
the breaker 1 is closed, the sequence time starts. When the sequence time finishes without a new trip,
the breaker 2 close command is generated. If breaker 1 gives closure failure, the setting value Block
by Br1 Close Fail is checked
 NO: Closing sequence continues considering only the breaker 2 checking synchronism 2.
 If an excessive number of trips are produced in any breaker, then it will block and not continue
reclosure cycle
 Brk2 - Brk1. The reclose cycle generates close command for breaker 2. When the breaker 1 has closed, the
sequence time starts. When the sequence time finishes without a new trip, the breaker 2 close command is
generated. It is same as Brk1 - Brk2, but breakers are exchanged.
If the close sequence is "Brk1 then Brk2" or " Brk1 - Brk2" and breaker 1 is blocked or in manual opening, the breaker 2
close condition (ReCond2) uses the first breaker´s setting (ReCond1). In case of "Brk2 then Brk1" or " Brk2 - Brk1" and
breaker 2 is blocked or in manual opening, the breaker 1 close condition (ReCond1) uses the second breaker´s setting
(ReCond2).
It has independent settings and outputs (logical node PROT/SECRREC)
Table 151 shows the settings of this function:
 Select 2 breakers
It allows operating with two breakers (“YES”). In that case, follows the settings detailed bellow to include a second
breaker in the closing scheme.
 Closing sequence
Definition of the breaker or breakers that will reclose automatically. In the case of having to reclose two breakers,
it can be done simultaneously or following a sequence.
 Sequence time (ms):

Time passed between the first breaker reclosing order and the second, following the aforementioned closing
sequence. Used only by the "Brk1 then Brk2" and "Brk2 then Brk1" sequences .
 Block by Br2 Close Fail

When set to “YES”, it blocks the recloser if there is closing failure in the breaker 1.
When set to “NO”, when there is breaker 1 close failure, it allows following the sequence selected for closing the
breaker 2.
 Block by Br1 Close Fail

User Manual 268
AUTOMATISMS 
When set to “YES”, it blocks the recloser if there is closing failure in the breaker 2.
When set to “NO”, when there is breaker 2 close failure, it allows following the sequence selected for closing the
breaker 1
 Br1 Permission if 2 blocked

When set to “YES”, it allows the closing of the breaker 1, if the breaker 2 is blocked.
When set to “NO”, it does not allow the closing of the breaker 1, if the breaker 2 is blocked.
 Br2 Permission if 1 blocked

When set to “YES”, it allows the closing of the breaker 2, if the breaker 1 is blocked.
When set to “NO”, it does not allow the closing of the breaker 2, if the breaker 1 is blocked.
 52_1 reclosing block

Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the closing of the breaker 1.
 52_2 reclosing block

Selects the signal which, when active, blocks the closing of the breaker 2.
 Enable Events record

Allows the generation of protection events associated to the function. If set to “NO”, the function’s protection
events are not generated. If set to “YES”, the function’s specific mask is contemplated.
Table 151 Two breaker recloser settings

SelBr2 Select 2 breakers NO/YES Boolean
Brk1 (0)
Brk2 (1)
Brk1 and Brk2 (2)
ClSec Closing sequence Brk1 then Brk2 (3) enum
Brk2 then Brk1 (4)
Brk1 - Brk2 (5)
Brk2 - Brk1 (6)
SecTmms Sequence time (ms): 50 600000 10 Int32
BlkF1 Block by Br2 Close Fail NO/YES Boolean
BlkF2 Block by Br1 Close Fail NO/YES Boolean
Cl1Br2LcEna Br1 Permission if 2 blocked NO/YES Boolean
Cl2Br1LcEna Br2 Permission if 1 blocked NO/YES Boolean
BlkBr1 52_1 reclosing block Int32
BlkBr2 52_2 reclosing block Int32
MaskEna Enable Events record NO/YES Boolean
Table 152 shows the outputs of the breaker 1:
 Reset sequence.
It stops the closing sequence and is activated in the following situations:
 The recloser is in standby.

 The recloser is blocked. Also if there is a closing failure in any of the breakers.
 Start of each of the ongoing cycles.
 Signals of the breaker 1:
 52_1 Reclose Command: Breaker 1 reclosing activation order.
 52_1 closure failure: Breaker 1 closure failure activation.
 The breaker 1 is not closed, after the closing time.
 52_1 Manual opening: Breaker 1 manual opening activation signal.

User Manual 269
AUTOMATISMS 
 The opening of the breaker is detected without initializing the recloser cycle. Once the opening is detected,
waits two cycles before signalling manual opening. This time avoids the opening by an external trip.
 52_1 blocked. Breaker 1 blocking status, caused by the setting “52_1 reclosing lock”, the internal signal
“Operations Locked - Br.1” or the manual opening of the breaker.
 52_1 Successful Reclosing: Breaker 1 reclosing activation order state..Breaker 1 has properly completed its
reclosing cycle.
 Signals of the breaker 2:
 52_2 Reclose Command: Breaker 2 reclosing activation order.
 52_2 closure failure: Breaker 2 closure failure activation.
 The breaker 1 is not closed, after the closing time.
 52_2 Manual opening: Breaker 2 manual opening activation signal.
 The opening of the breaker is detected without initializing the recloser cycle. Once the opening is detected,
waits two cycles before signalling manual opening. This time avoids the opening by an external trip.
 52_2 blocked. Breaker 2 blocking status, caused by the setting “52_2 reclosing lock”, the internal signal
“Operations Locked - Br.2” or the manual opening of the breaker.
 52_2 Successful Reclosing: Breaker 2 reclosing activation order state..Breaker 2 has properly completed its
reclosing cycle.
Table 152 Two breaker recloser outputs (breaker 1)

Reset sequence ReSec general
52_1 Reclose Command RecOrdBrk1 general
52_1 closure failure RecFailBr1 general
52_1 Manual opening ManOpen1 general
52_1 blocked BlkBrk1 general
52_1 Successful Reclosing RecOK1 general
52_2 Reclose Command RecOrdBrk2 general
52_2 closure failure RecFailBr2 general
52_2 Manual opening ManOpen2 general
52_2 blocked BlkBrk2 general
52_2 Successful Reclosing RecOK2 general
Figura 171 Breakers` blocking type

User Manual 270
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 172. Autoreclose sequence with 2 breakers
6.3 FREQUENCY RECLOSER
The unit, following a minimum frequency trip and in the case of the function having been enabled and not locked, will only
attempt one reclosure.
The logical input “Restoration trip (start)” must be activated, to start the reclosing.
When the trip occurs, the 79f-breaker closure lock signal is activated and the period programmed as the “definite trip
timeout” is observed. If the minimum frequency condition is set to “NO” or if the frequency is higher than the minimum
programmed value during the programmed “closure time”, a closure command is issued to the breaker. If the minimum
voltage condition is set to “YES” and is not met, the definitive trip is activated.
The 79f-breaker closure block will remain active until the reclosure or definitive trip conditions are met.
If the “Enab. maximum reset time” is set to “YES” and the programmed “maximum reset time (s)” elapses without the
reclosure conditions having been met, an internal block due to failure to meet conditions (with definitive trip) is activated. If
the setting is set to “NO”, the reclosure conditions are waited for indefinitely.
A “reclaim time” is observed following the closure. If a new minimum frequency trip occurs during this period, it moves to
internal block with definitive trip.
The frequency recloser’s general operation is shown in Figure 173 to Figure 180.
The settings used in this unit are shown in Table 153:

 Minimum F supervi. enabled. Indicates whether the minimum frequency monitoring is enabled or not.
 Minimum F for closing (Hz) Indicates the minimum frequency above which reset permission is given.
 Reposition time (s). Indicates the time during which the reset conditions must be met in order for the reset
command to be issued.

User Manual 271
AUTOMATISMS 
 After close safety time(s). Indicates the timeout following a reset command. No trips must be produced during
this time in order for the reclosure to be considered as successful. If a trip is produced, an end of cycle block is
activated.
 Reset maximum time Enable. Indicates whether the maximum reset time limit is enabled.
 Reset maximum time (s). Indicates the maximum timeout in which the reset conditions are to be met. To the
contrary, a block due to the absence of reset conditions is generated.
 Minimum V supervi. enabled. Indicates whether the minimum voltage monitoring is enabled or not.
 Reclose Minimum Voltage. Indicates the minimum voltage above which reset permission is given.
 Synchrocheck supervision. Indicates whether the synchronism conditions check is enabled or not.
 F restoration blocking. Logic input, which selects the signal which, when active, blocks the frequency recloser.
 Restoration trip (start). Logic input, which selects the signal which, when active, indicates that a reclosable trip
has been produced.
 f restoration reset input. Logic input, which selects the signal which, when active, resets the frequency recloser.
 Synchrocheck type.23 Indicates whether the synchronism is internal or external.
 External syncro. Permission.23 Logical external synchronism permission logic. Selects the signal which, when
Table 153 Frequency recloser settings

FRecEna Enabled NO (0) / YES (1) enum
FminEna Minimum F supervi. enabled NO (0) / YES (1) enum
FminVal Minimum F for closing (Hz) 40 70 0.1 float
RepTms Reposition time (s) 1 3600 1 Int32
SegTms After close safety time(s) 1 600 1 float
ReTmLiEna Reset maximum time Enable NO (0) / YES (1) enum
MaxReTms Reset maximum time (s) 0 86400 1 Int32
VRecEna Minimum V supervi. enabled NO (0) / YES (1) enum
VrecVal Reclose Minimum Voltage 0 200 0.1 float
VSynEna Synchrocheck supervision NO (0) / YES (1) enum
LogInBlk F restoration blocking 1 Int32
LogInTr Restoration trip (start) 1 Int32
LogInRst f restoration reset input 1 Int32
MaskEna Enable Events Record 0 1 1 Boolean
LogInExSy External syncro. Permission Int32
 PROT/FRREC1 node
 Settings. There are 6 settings tables. See Table 153.
 There are no commands
 Start reclosing F_RREC. Indicates the start of the reclosing cycle (Figure 174). It begins with the trip and
finishes with a successful reclosing or recloser blocked or the activation of the “f restoration reset input”.
 In progress F_RREC. It is active since the breaker is open by a trip until a successful reclosing or recloser
blocked or the activation of the “f restoration reset input” (Figure 180).
 Successful Reclosing F_RREC. Indicates a Successful reclosing (Figure 178). The safety time after closing
has finished and the breaker has not open, there is no trip and the “f restoration reset input” is desactivated.
23

User Manual 272
AUTOMATISMS 
 Recloser Safety time F_RREC. After a reclosing, the safety time is ongoing before the recloser goes to
standby or Finally Interlock (Figure 178).
 Block End Cycle F_RREC. Indicates the breaker is open or a trip has happened during the safety time
(Figure 178).
 Block closure failure F_RREC. Indicates the recloser is in internal block, caused by a close failure (breaker
supervision). See Figure 178.
 Block opening failure F_RREC. . Indicates the recloser is in internal block, caused by an open failure
(breaker supervision). See Figure 175.
 Block reset cond. F_RREC. After the breaker opening, the recloser is waitng during the “Reset maximum
time (s)” that the reposition conditions are met. If the maximum time is enabled, when the time finishs without
close command, the recloser is blocked by absence reset conditions. See Figure 177.
 Reclosing Permission F_RREC. Indicates the reposition conditions are met (Figure 176).
 Reclosing Command F_RREC. Close command after all the setting conditions are met (Figure 176).
 Reclosing Blocked F_RREC. Indicates the recloser is blocked by setting, internal or external causes (Figure
179).
 Definitive Trip F_RREC. Definitive trip when the recloser is blocked by absence of reposition conditions, end
of cycle or close failure (Figure 179).
 Close Blocked F_RREC. Activated during the closure time (Figure 177).
 In standby F_RREC. Activated when the recloser is standby
Table 154 Frequency recloser outputs

Start reclosing F_RREC RecInit stVal
In progress F_RREC RecCyc (RecCycOn in Ed2) stVal (general in Ed2)
Successful Reclosing F_RREC ClOK stVal
Recloser Safety time F_RREC SecTime stVal
Block End Cycle F_RREC BlkCycEnd stVal
Block closure failure F_RREC BlkIClFail stVal
Block opening failure F_RREC BlkIOpFail stVal
Block reset cond. F_RREC BlkINoCond stVal
Reclosing Permission F_RREC Fperm stVal
Reclosing Command F_RREC FClOrd stVal
Reclosing Blocked F_RREC FRecBlk stVal
Definitive Trip F_RREC DefTrip general
Close Blocked F_RREC BrClBlk stVal
In standby F_RREC RestST stVal
Figure 173 Trip with reset scheme

User Manual 273
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 174 Process start scheme
Figure 175 Opening timeout scheme
Figure 176 Reset permission scheme

User Manual 274
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 177 Reset command scheme
Figure 178 Reset timeout scheme

User Manual 275
AUTOMATISMS 
Figure 179 Start scheme
Figure 180 Frequency recloser signals

User Manual 276
BREAKER AND A HALF CONFIGURATION 
7. BREAKER AND A HALF CONFIGURATION

The model ZT1 is specific for breaker and a half configurations.
The current inputs are independent for every breaker. There are two inputs for every phase.
The analog input 7 can be selected with the setting "Current 7 type" of the node TCIN:
 Ipol. The analog input 7 is used as polarization current.

 In2. The analog input 7 is used as Parallel line Neutral current 2.
The polarity of the phases of each of the breaker can be selected as incoming / outgoing, with the settings of the node TCIN:
 Local End polarity Br1. It selects the polarity (incoming / outgoing) of the currents IA1, IB1, IC1.
 Local End polarity Br2. It selects the polarity (incoming / outgoing) of the currents IA2, IB2, IC2.
Available analog inputs in model ZT1 are:

Model T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12
ZT1 I A1 I B1 I C1 I A2 I B2 I C2 In2/Ipol Vs2 Vs1 VA VB VC
In topology 52 ½, the total phase current is calculated as the sum of the current of each breaker, taking into account the polarity.
If incoming it´s sum, if outgoing it´s subtraction.
Br1 incoming Br1 incoming Br1 outgoing Br1 outgoing

Br2 incoming Br2 outgoing Br2 incoming Br2 outgoing
Ia = Ia1 + Ia2 Ia = Ia1 - Ia2 Ia = -Ia1 + Ia2 Ia = -Ia1 - Ia2
Ib = Ib1 + Ib2 Ib = Ib1 - Ib2 Ib = -Ib1 + Ib2 Ib = -Ib1 - Ib2
Ic = Ic1 + Ic2 Ic = Ic1 - Ic2 Ic = -Ic1 + Ic2 Ic = -Ic1 - Ic2
As neutral current, the zero sequence is used (3·I0).
The calculations for sequences are performed with total currents.
7.1 PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
The following points indicate the functions affected by the configuration 52 ½.
The breaker status follows the criteria:
 To consider closed, simply one of the breaker is closed

 To consider open, both breakers must be open.

User Manual 277
Table 155 Available functions
ZT1
Distance functions
Quadrilateral Characteristic (5 zones) 
Mho Characteristic (5 zones) 
21 High Speed 
Zone 1 Extension 
Double Lines  (Nota 2)
Lines with Series Compensation 
CVT: Lines with Capacitive Voltage Transformers 
Common protection functions
SOFT Switch onto fault 
27 Undervoltage 
59 Overvoltage 
59N Zero sequence overvoltage 
47 V2 overvoltage protection 
Minimun voltage 
Frequency (81M/m) 
Frequency rate of change (81R) 
3x50/51 (67) Solo fasor
50N/51N (67N) Solo I0
50G/51G. Grounding overcurrent  (Nota 1)
46TOC (67Q), 46IOC(67Q) 
46FA Broken conductor 
50CSC Second harmonic restraint Solo fases
37 Undercurrent 
49 Thermal image  (Nota 3)
32 Power units 
Stub bus differential 
Teleprotection
Teleprotection (21) 
Teleprotection (67/67Q) 
Monitoring Units
68LE Load encroachment 
68FF Fuse failure 
78 Power Swing 
Fault locator 
Breaker Monitoring
k12 breaker monitoring per pole 
Closing and trip circuit monitoring 
Excessive number of trips 
Open pole / Faulted line detector 
Breaker status logic 
Pole discordance 
50BF breaker failure two breakers
50BF breaker failure (Single-pole/Three-pole) 
Low load breaker failure 
Automatisms two breakers
Synchronism 
Recloser (Single-pole/Three-pole) 
Frequency recloser 
Note 1: Available if the analog input 7 is used as polarization current.
Note 2: Available if the analog input 7 is used as Parallel line Neutral current 2.
Note 3: The phase unit is always available and the neutral is available when the analog input 7 is used as polarization
current

User Manual 278
Table 155 shows the available functions. Some of them that depends on the analog 7 type.
 Neutral overcurrent. It always uses the zero sequence.

 Directional. If the polarization current is not available, the I polarization is not allowed.
 Distance units. If In2 current is not available, current compensation is not used, independently of the value of the
setting "Km Module".
 The calculations for sequences are performed with total currents.
 Grounding overcurrent. It´s only available when analog input 7 is configured us polarization current.
 Neutral 50BF is not available.
 Breaker logic. It uses both breakers independently.
7.1.1 Distance functions

Phase measurements used are the sum of the current phasor of each breaker for both fundamental and harmonics.
If In2 current is not available, current compensation is not used, so the calculations of the characteristics don´t take into
account the settings of the 5 zones:
 Km Module. Indicates the mutual compensation factor module of the parallel lines.
 Km Angle (º). Indicates the parallel lines mutual compensation factor angle.
The signals used in each phase of the Mho characteristic are:
Table 156 Mho characteristic signals
Unit Sop (Operation signal) Spol (Polarization signal)

AN [ Ia + 3·I0  knx ] (|ZxGF|ZxAº) – Va Va1: current or memorized
BN [ Ib + 3·I0  knx ] (|ZxGF|ZxAº) – Vb Vb1: current or memorized
CN [ Ic + 3·I0  knx ] (|ZxGF|ZxAº) – Vc Vc1: current or memorized
AB Iab  (|ZxF|ZxAº) – Vab Vab1: current or memorized
BC Ibc  (|ZxF|ZxAº) – Vbc Vbc1: current or memorized
CA Ica  (|ZxF|ZxAº) – Vca Vca1: current or memorized
The signals used in each phase of the quadrilateral characteristic are:

Table 157 quadrilateral characteristic signals
Unit Ieq Vpol Ipol

AN [ Ia + 3·I0  k0x ] Va 3I0, 3I2 or Max(3I0, 3i2)
BN [ Ib + 3·I0  k0x ] Vb 3I0, 3I2·a or Max(3I0, 3I2·a)
CN [ Ic + 3·I0  k0x ] Vc 3I0, 3I2· a2 or Max(3I0, 3I2·a2)
AB Iab Vab I2· a2 or Iab
BC Ibc Vbc I2 or Ibc
CA Ica Vca I2· a or Ica
If In2 current is not available, current compensation is not used, the the calculations of SIR for CVT is:
Table 158 Calculating the SIR for Different Units
SIR for single phase faults SIR for single phase-phase faults
(Vnom/((Ia + 3·I0kn1 )·Z1)) - 1 (Unom/(Iab·Z1)) - 1
(Vnom/((Ib + 3·I0kn1 )·Z1)) - 1 (Unom/(Ibc·Z1)) - 1
(Vnom/((Ic + 3·I0kn1 )·Z1)) - 1 (Unom/(Ica·Z1)) - 1
7.1.2 General protection functions

Phase measurements used are the sum of the current phasor of each breaker for both fundamental and harmonics.
As neutral current, the zero sequence is used (3·I0).

User Manual 279
Phase overcurrent.
The measure can only be phasor.
Neutral overcurrent.
It uses the zero sequence (3·I0). The measure can only be phasor.
If the polarization current is not available, the I polarization is not allowed.
Watt-metric and I*cos() / I*sin() directional always use 3·I0.
Grounding overcurrent.
It´s only available when analog input 7 is configured us polarization current.
Second and fifth harmonic block
It´s only available when analog input 7 is configured us polarization current; because it´s used to block Grounding
overcurrent.
Thermal image.
It´s only available for phase.
The neutral unit is available when analog input 7 is configured us polarization current.
Stub bus differential.
It´s only available in 52 ½ models.
The operation is indicated by the "Stub bus" in chapter "Protection functions".
7.1.3 Breaker
The breaker status uses both breakers:
 To consider closed, simply one of the breaker is closed

 To consider open, both breakers must be open.
Breaker logic uses both breakers independently (see chapter "Breaker") with nodes:
 Breaker status. Nodes XCBR1 and XCBR2

 Inputs based breaker failure. Nodes RBFS1 and RBFS2.
 Pole discordance. Nodes RPLD1 and RPLD2.
 Breaker operation supervision. Nodes CBOU1 and CBOU2.
7.1.3.1 Breaker failure (50BF)

The operation is indicated by the "Breaker failure" in chapter "Protection functions".
The function is performed independently on each of the breakers.
Neutral 50BF is not available.
There are independent functions (settings, signals, commnads…) for every breaker. The nodes are:
 Node PROT/FRBRF1. The function uses the measures of the current transformers 1, 2 y 3 (Ia1, Ib1, Ic1).
 Node PROT/FRBRF2. The function uses the measures of the current transformers 4, 5 y 6 (Ia2, Ib2, Ic2).
7.1.3.2 Open pole detector

The operation is indicated by the "Open pole detector" in chapter "Breaker".
It uses the sum of the current phasor of each breaker.
To consider open, both breakers must be open.

User Manual 280
The signals generated by this function are used in other protection functions:
 Distance mho and quadrilateral CharacteristicS

 21 High Speed zone
 Phase selector
 Directional
 Mho and quadrilateral supervision
 Load encroachment
 Power swing
7.1.3.3 Dead or de-energized line

Dead line analysis is performed for each of the breaker24. The settings are common for both breaker and are
indicated in the dead line function. Table 159 shows the available signals.
Table 159 Dead line signals per breaker
Signal Data Atributte

A1 open phase (I <) OpnPhs1 phsA
B1 open phase (I <) OpnPhs1 phsB
C1 open phase (I <) OpnPhs1 phsC
A2 open phase (I <) OpnPhs2 phsA
B2 open phase (I <) OpnPhs2 phsB
C2 open phase (I <) OpnPhs2 phsC
7.1.4 Breaker and a half supervision

It is used to avoid
It is used to avoid nuisance tripping on near faults but outside the area to be protected.
In external faults with large current flow, one of the current transformers can saturate without providing line current to the
fault and in this case:
 There is phase current with any direction (as measured current is spurious ) and voltage close to zero , which
can generate a trip of the distance unit
 If the fault is biphasic, homopolar current appears due to saturation and can act neutral directional units
An output signal is available.
 Node: PROT/BHPTRC1
 Output: Table 160 shows the signals of this function.
 Block by External Fault: It´s activated when an external fault to protect the area, which can cause false
alarms is detected.
Table 160 52 ½ supervision
Signal Data Atributte

Block by External Fault ExFIBI general
Phase currents of the two breakers are compared (IA1 and IA2, IB1 and IB2, IC1 and IC2).
An external fault is considered when, at least at some phase, the current of the two breakers exceed 3 times the rated
current in rms value.
If the currents are in phase, the fault is internal; while if the current are in opposite phase (continuous current) the fault is
external. There are several factors that make the currents are not exactly in phase in internal faults and not in opposite
phase in external faulat, the following angular criteria is applied:
24
From firmware version 6.0.8.0 and ICD version 8.1.0.20

User Manual 281
Figura 181. Angular criteria for external faults
The signal "Block by External Fault" is activated when in some phase the following conditions are met:
 The current at the same phase of the two breakers exceeds 3 times the nominal current in rms value
 The angle difference between the same phase of the two breakers is between 110º and 250º.
In this situation the following units are blocked:
 Distance units, programmed as forward, which have involved the phase that indicates external fault. And for
zone 1 all units programmed as forward are blocked.
 Neutral directional programmed as forward is blocked

User Manual 282
FAULT LOCATOR 
8. FAULT LOCATOR
The fault locator for single and double lines processes the information collected in relation to each fault and calculates the
estimated distance to the point in which the fault has occurred, as well as the fault resistance.
The initial data necessary in order to arrive at the final calculation is:
 Sample by sample values of the voltage and current signals collected in the moment in which the fault is produced.
 The impedance parameters of the line in which the fault has occurred.
 Length of the line.
 The Voltage transformers and Current transformers transformation ratios of the bay that captured the fault.
The result is the distance to the fault in km or miles, together with the fault resistance and a locator exit code.
The node corresponding to the fault locator is PROT/RFLO.
All the settings are in primary values.
The settings necessary for the operation of the distance calculation algorithm are as follows (see Table 161):
 Enabled. Indicates whether the locator is enabled or not.

 Line length (Kms or miles). Indicates the length of the protected line.
 Z1 Imp. (Ohm p.u.length). The line’s positive sequence impedance module by unit length.
 Z1 angle (º). The line’s positive sequence impedance angle.
 Z0 Imp.(Ohm p.u.length). The line’s zero sequence impedance module per unit length.
 Z0 angle (º). The line’s zero sequence impedance angle.
 Y1(1/ohm p.u.length)*10e-9. Imaginary part of the line’s positive sequence admittance.
 Y0(1/ohm p.u.length)*10e-9. Imaginary part of the line’s zero sequence admittance.
 Z1 Local Source (Ohm). Local source positive sequence impedance module.
 Z1 Local Source angle (º). Local source positive sequence impedance angle.
 Z0 Local Source (Ohm). Local source zero impedance module. This setting only applies when the relay is set to receive
phase to phase voltages and the fault locator is enabled. The relay internally calculates the zero sequence voltage from
the zero sequence current (I0=IN/3) and the settled local source zero sequence impedance. With this value and with the
phase to phase voltages is able to calculate the single phase voltages and execute the calculation like the normal case.
 Z0 Local Source angle (º). Local source zero sequence impedance angle. This setting only applies when the relay is set
to receive phase to phase voltages.
 Z1 Remote Source (ohm). Remote source positive sequence impedance module.
 Z1 Remote Source angle (º). Remote source positive sequence impedance angle.
 Z1eq Parallel (Ohm). Positive sequence impedance module in parallel with the line.
 Z1eq Parallel Angle (º). Positive sequence impedance angle in parallel with the line.
 Phase current sens. (A). Minimum variation threshold in the phase current (in primary value) for the detection of the fault.
 Ground current sens. (A). Minimum variation threshold in the neutral current (in primary value) for the detection of the
fault.
 Voltage sensitivity (V). Minimum variation threshold in the voltage (in primary value) for the detection of the fault.
 Locator output permanent. Indicates whether the distance measurement is maintained until the next fault (set to “YES”)
or only the seconds indicated in the “Locator output duration(s)” setting (set to “NO”).
 Locator output duration(s). Distance measurement maintenance time (s).
 Line type. Allows the user to select between single line or double line.
 Z0M Mutual(Ohm p.u.length). Mutual impedance module, by unit length. This setting only applies when the relay is set to
double lines.
 Z0M Mutual angle (º). Mutual impedance angle. This setting only applies when the relay is set to double lines.

User Manual 283
FAULT LOCATOR 
 Filter enabled. If set to “YES” and if the fault point is detected during the ten cycles following a breaker closure, the
neutral current is checked to see whether is exceeds the “I Minimum after close (A)” setting. If it is, inrush is considered
to exist and prefault current values equal to zero are employed in order to avoid the inrush distortion in these
measurements. The neutral current is also checked to see whether it exceeds the “Ground maximum current (A)” setting.
If it is set to “NO”, neither the inrush nor the neutral current are measured.
 I Minimum after close (A). Current threshold (in primary value) for the detection of inrush. Only used if the filter setting is
enabled. If a switch on to fault is detected (by the status of the breaker) during the first 10 cycles, single – phase ground
faults that do not go beyond the INmin threshold are blocked. If it is set to 4999A all the faults (single – phase and
polyphase) are blocked. A possible use is when there is a great distortion in the shape of a wave after a closing. For
example, in the case of a distribution with a lot of transformers hanging from the line, the breaker closing will cause a
high inrush that can make the low current earth faults calculation results distorted. With the I0min threshold the earth
fault calculation is filtered, the I0of which must be lower than this threshold.
 Ground maximum current (A). Threshold (in primary value) indicating the system’s maximum neutral current under
normal conditions. It is only used if the filter setting is enabled.
Ohm p.u indicates ohms per unit of length. For a line length of 100 km and a line impedance of 100 ohm, the setting in ohm
p.u is calculated as follows:
Ohm p.u = Line impedance / line length = 100 ohm /100km = 1 ohm p.u,
If the impedances are available in secondary values, these can be converted to primary values with the following formula:
𝑉_𝑇𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠_𝑅𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜
𝑍𝑃𝑟𝑖𝑚𝑎𝑟𝑦 = 𝑍𝑆𝑒𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑑𝑎𝑟𝑦
𝐼_𝑇𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠_𝑅𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜
There are independent settings:
 PROT/RFLO node:
 Settings: There are 6 settings tables. For details see Table 146.
Table 161 Locator settings

LocEna Enabled Boolean
LinLenKm (LinLenkm in Ed2) Line length (Kms or miles) 0.1 5000 0.1 float
Z1Mod Z1 Imp. (Ohm p.u.length) 0.0001 300 0.0001 float
Z1Ang Z1 angle (º) 15 90 0.1 float
Z0Mod Z0 Imp.(Ohm p.u.length) 0.01 300 0.01 float
Z0Ang Z0 angle (º) 15 90 0.1 float
Y1 Y1(1/ohm p.u.length)*10e-9 0 50000 0.1 float
Y0 Y0(1/Ohm p.u.length)*10e-9 0 50000 0.1 float
Z1LMod Z1 Local Source (Ohm) 0.01 20000 0.01 float
Z1LAng Z1 Local Source angle (º) 15 90 0.1 float
Z0LMod Z0 Local Source (Ohm) 0.0001 300 0.0001 float
Z0LAng Z0 Local Source angle (º) 15 90 0.1 float
Z1RMod Z1 Remote Source (Ohm) 0.01 20000 0.01 float
Z1RAng Z1 Remote Source angle(º) 15 90 0.1 float
Z1mMod Z1eq Parallel (Ohm) 0.01 20000 0.01 float
Z1mAng Z1eq Parallel angle (º) 15 90 0.1 float
PhsASens Phase current sens. (A) 10 100000 0.1 float
NeuSens Ground current sens. (A) 10 100000 0.1 float
PhsVSens Voltage sensitivity (V) 10 100000 0.1 float
PlsTms Locator output duration(s) 0 7200 1 Int32
PlsFEna Locator output permanent 0 1 1 Boolean
Linetype Line type 0 1 1 Single /Double enum
ZmMod Z0M Mutual(Ohm p.u.length) 0.0001 300 0.0001 float
ZmAng Z0M Mutual angle (º) 15 90 0.1 float
FilEna Filter enabled 0 1 1 Boolean
IminAfCl I Minimum after close (A) 0 5000 0.1 float
NMaxVal Ground maximum current (A) 0 5000 0.1 float
MaskEna Enable Events Record 0 1 1 Boolean
From firmware version 5.20.15.8 and ICD version 6.3.0.0, the angle range is 15-90º. In previous versions it was 0-360º.

User Manual 284
FAULT LOCATOR 
If any of the following parameters is unknown, the recommended values are:
Admittances (Y1,Y0): 0
Source impedance (Z1R, Z1S):
Module: 20000
Argument: 45º
Parallel impedance (Z1eq):
Module: 20000
Argument: 45º
Sensitivities:
I = 50% pick up 51 (A)
I0 = 50% pick up 51N (A)
V = 5% nominal voltage (V)
8.1 LOCATOR OPERATION
The process that follows the locator’s algorithm can be summarized in 4 steps, which are explained below:
 Fault instant detection

 Pre-fault and post-fault filtering
 Determination of the fault type
 Localization algorithm
8.1.1 Fault detection

Once the protection has picked up, the fault detection algorithm starts processing the analogue signals received in
search of the exact instant in which a fault has been produced. This search is made by comparing samples from
consecutive cycles.
8.1.2 Pre-fault and post-fault filtering

The distance calculation algorithm uses the fundamental components of the voltage and current waves. The filtering
extracts the components from the signals stored at the pick up.
The collected signals are processed by a digital filter which provides the fundamental voltage and current components. A
cosine filter is used for this stage.
8.1.3 Determination of the fault type

Before launching the distance calculation algorithm in conjunction with the pre-fault and fault measurements calculated in
the previous step, the fault type must be defined.
The locator includes an algorithm that determines which phases have been affected by the fault. The algorithm is based
on the well-known Girgis method for distance relays. This procedure, which analyses the different magnitudes of change
between the pre-fault and post-fault situations in the current’s fundamental component, has demonstrated enviable
precision in its results.
8.1.4 Distance calculation

The distance calculation algorithm has been developed for single (see Figure 182) and double lines.

User Manual 285
FAULT LOCATOR 
When a fault happens in a line corresponding to our relay, the information gathered by the locator, placed at one extreme
of the line, is reduced to the voltage and current values.
The data necessary to fully determine the system are obtained from the situation existing in the instant immediately
preceding the fault and in the situation of the fault itself.
8.1.4.1 Filtered by the maximum neutral current level

(cross country faults)
In cross country faults (simultaneous faults in different lines or in the same line, e.g. AN in the protected line and BN
in the adjacent line), the zero sequence current level detected in the system is superior to the maximum zero
sequence current level for single phase faults.
In these situations, the protection locates the fault but indicates that the “Ground maximum current (A)” setting has
been exceeded, as in these situations the voltages are distorted by the lack of the adjacent line fault and can cause
erroneous calculations in the fault distance.
This mode is only operative if the “Filter enabled” setting is active. In this case, the result of the localization will be
displayed in the fault report, although in the control measurements it will be reported as invalid.
Figure 182 Line topology
8.2 PRESENTATION OF THE RESULTS
The presentation of the results is carried out in several ways:
 By display. In the “Fault reports” submenu.

 In the faults report.
 In a control measurement. It remains active during the programmed time or until another fault is produced.
In addition to the distance calculated, the fault resistance and the locator exit code are provided both in the display and in
the fault report. The locator exit codes are shown below:
 LOCATED: The fault has been located.

 LITTLE PREFAULT/ LITTLE PRE: There are few pre-fault cycles, pre-fault cycles <3 cycles.
 LITTLE POSTFAULT/ LITTLE POST: There are few post-fault cycles.
 TRUNC: The fault has been processed but the localization algorithm has been truncated because the high
number of iterations.

User Manual 286
FAULT LOCATOR 
 IN>I: The neutral current (IN) is greater than the set maximum neutral current.
 IN<I: The neutral current (IN) is lower than the set minimum neutral current following closure.
 NOT FAULT: The fault instant has not been detected.
 OUT OF LINE: The calculated distance is out of the set line length. If the calculated distance is greater than
150% of the line length, the distance value is not shown.
 NOT ENABLED: The locator is not enabled.
 NEGATIVE DISTANCE: The distance calculated is negative. In this case, the distance value is not displayed.
 NOT LOCATED: The locator algorithm has not run.
For example, a locator result indicating the LITTLE PRE/IN>I/OUT OF LINE code should be interpreted as follows:
The location algorithm does not have sufficient pre-fault cycles and therefore considers that the fault sample is in the cycle in
which the digital pick up was produced. Furthermore, the neutral current in the system has exceeded the current value set in
the “Ground maximum current (A)” setting (this check is only carried out when the “Filter enabled” setting is set to “YES”). By
exceeding this value, the distance calculation may be erroneous. Therefore, although it is shown in the fault report it is
marked as an invalid control measure. Finally, the distance calculation has returned a value in excess of the value
established in the “Line length” setting. If this result is between 100% and 150% of the line length, it will be displayed. If it is
greater, the distance will appear as NOT CALCULATED.
The distance is always calculated but it will not be sent to the dispatching centre (61850 nor Procome) if one of the blockings
codes of the locator is activated. In the fault report, the distance is always included with the locator exit code.
The locator blocking causes are:
 Not enough cycles (< 2.5 cycles). In this case, no calculation is done.
 Ineutral is below the setting “I Minimum after close (A)” (resistive or distant fault). In this case the calculation is
done, but it is not sent to the dispatching centre.
 Ineutral is above the setting “Ground maximum current (A)” (possible cross country fault). In this case the
calculation is done, but it is not sent to the dispatching centre.
 General block by switch onto fault. In this case the calculation is done, but it is not sent to the dispatching
centre.
8.3 CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE
The model used in the example is a single distribution line.
The capacity values of the positive, negative and zero sequences are zero, so that these values do not affect the reach.
Line parameters, in primary values, are the following:
Current and voltage transformers:
Current transformation ratio (CT): 3000/1
Voltage transformation ratio (VT): 360000/100
Line parameters
Line length: 20km
Positive sequence resistance: 0.0315 Ω/km
Positive sequence inductance: 0.312 Ω/km
Zero sequence resistance: 0.269 Ω/km
Zero sequence inductance: 0.766 Ω/km
Local Source parameters:
Impedance: 6Ω
Angle: 84.2º

User Manual 287
FAULT LOCATOR 
FOR A LINE WITH THE FEATURES DESCRIBED ABOVE, FAULT LOCATOR COULD BE SET AS FOLLOWS:
Setting Value
Enabled YES
Line length 20
Z1 Imp. (ohm p.u. length) 0.314
Z1 angle (º) 84.2
Z0 Imp. (ohm p.u. length) 0.81
Z0 angle (º) 70.6
Y1 (1/ohm p.u. length)*10e-9 0
Y0 (1/ohm p.u. length)*10e-9 0
Z1 Local Source (ohm) 6
Z1 Local Source Angle.(º) 84.2
Z1 Remote Source (ohm) 20000
Z1 Remote Source Angle (º) 45
Z1eq Parallel (ohm) 20000
Z1eq Parallel Angle. (º) 45
Phase Current sensitivity (A) 40% PhaseOverCurr.Setting * CT
Ground Current sensitivity (A) 40% GroundOverCurr.Setting* GCT
Voltage sensitivity (V) 5% Vrated * VT
Locator output duration(s) 7200
Locator output permanent YES
Line type Simple
Filter enabled NO
Enable Events Record YES
WHERE:
PhaseOverCurr.Setting: Starting threshold of the phase overcurrent units.
GroundOverCurr.Setting: Starting threshold of the ground overcurrent units.
Vrated: Rated Voltage
CT: Phase current ratio.
GCT: Ground current ratio
VT: Phase voltage ratio.

User Manual 288
MONITORING 
9. MONITORING
9.1 EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY MONITORING
This function checks if the external supply voltage is within the set range. It generates two signals:
 Auxiliary power supply greater than maximum threshold. If the supply voltage exceeds the set maximum
threshold.
 Auxiliary power supply lower than minimum threshold. If the supply voltage is below the set minimum threshold.
The settings for configuring the external power supply monitoring (Table 162):
 Enabled: Enables the external power supply monitoring function.

 Minimum threshold. Indicates the minimum power supply voltage threshold, below which an alarm is issued.
 Maximum threshold. Indicates the maximum power supply voltage threshold, above which an alarm is issued.
Table 162 External power supply monitoring settings

SupSpvEna Enabled NO (0) / YES (1) enum
LoSuppV Minimum threshold 10 280 1 float
HiSuppV Maximum threshold 10 280 1 float
MaskEna Enable Events record NO (0) / YES (1) Boolean
There are two independent functions with settings, commands and outputs:
 Node:
 PROT/CESS1 for power supply 1
 PROT/CESS2 for power supply 2 (only in devices with redundant power supply)
 Settings. There are 6 settings tables. For details see Table 162.
 There are no logical inputs or commands
 Vcc Supervision Status. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
 HH Infeed. Indicates that the power supply has exceeded the maximum threshold.
 LL Infeed. Indicates that the power supply is below the minimum threshold.
 Measurement. The external power supply values are available in the node GEN/LLN0 (see Table 164)
Table 163 Power supply monitoring outputs
Signal (CESS1) Signal (CESS2: redundant power supply) Data Attribute

Vcc Supervision Status Vcc 2 Supervision Status StEna stVal
HH Infeed HH Infeed 2 OverVcc general
LL Infeed LL Infeed 2 UnderVcc general
Table 164 Power supply measurement
Measurement Data Attribute

Power supply Psup net
Power supply2 Psup2 net

User Manual 289
MONITORING 
9.2 TEMPERATURE MONITORING
This function checks if the temperature is within the set range. It generates two signals:
 Temperature greater than maximum threshold. If the temperature exceeds the set maximum threshold.
 Temperature lower than minimum threshold. If the temperature is below the set minimum threshold.
The settings for configuring the external power supply monitoring (Table 162):
 Enabled: Enables the temperature monitoring function.

 Minimum temperature (ºC). Indicates the minimum temperature threshold, below which an alarm is issued.
 Maximum temperature (ºC). Indicates the maximum temperature threshold, above which an alarm is issued.
Table 165 Temperature monitoring settings

TmpSpvEna Enabled NO (0) / YES (1) enum
LoTmpVal Minimum temperature (ºC) -40 0 1 float
HiTmpVal Maximum temperature (ºC) 50 100 1 float
 PROT/CTSU1 node
 Settings. There are 6 settings tables. For details see Table 165.
 Outputs: Measurement. The temperature value is available (see Table 167)
 Table 166 shows the function’s output data.
 Enabled. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
 Temperature greater than maximum threshold. Indicates that the temperature has exceeded the maximum
threshold.
 Temperature lower than minimum threshold. Indicates that the temperature is below the minimum threshold.
 Measurement. The temperature value is available (see Table 167)
Table 166 Temperature monitoring outputs

Enabled StEna stVal
Power supply greater than maximum OverTemp general
Power supply lower than minimum UnderTemp general
Table 167 Temperature measurement

Temperature Temp net
9.3 DIS BLOCKING BY LACK OF VAUX
If enabled, it checks that the external power supply exceeds the battery failure threshold, generating an alarm signal when it
is below the threshold.
In devices with redundant power supply, every power supply generates an independent DFFA signal. With the setting
"Power Supply" a general DFFA signal in generated.

User Manual 290
MONITORING 
The settings for configuring the battery failure monitoring (Table 168)
 Enabled: Enables the battery failure monitoring function.

 Power Supply: In devices with redundant power supply, selects which power supply generates the DFFA signal:
 PS1. Only Power supply 1 generates DFFA
 PS2. Only Power supply 2 generates DFFA
 PS1 or PS2. Weak Infeed DFFA1 or DFF2 indicates DFFA
 PS1 and PS2. Both power supplies must indicate DFFA.
Table 168 Battery failure monitoring settings

SupSpvEna Enabled NO (0) / YES (1) enum
PS1
PS2
SrcSpv Power Supply enum
PS1 or PS2
PS1 and PS2
There are independent settings and outputs:
 PROT/CSUS1 node
 Settings. There are 6 settings tables. See Table 168.
 Enabled. It is active when enabled and not blocked.
 Weak Infeed DFFA. Indicates that the external power supply is below the minimum threshold as indicated in
the setting "Power supply".
 Weak Infeed DFFA1. Indicates that the external power supply 1 is below the minimum threshold.
 Weak Infeed DFFA2. Indicates that the external power supply 2 is below the minimum threshold.
Table 169 Battery failure monitoring outputs

Enabled StEna stVal
Weak Infeed DFFA DFFA general
Weak Infeed DFFA1 DFFA1 general
Weak Infeed DFFA2 DFFA2 general
9.4 INTERNAL BATTERY FAILURE MONITORING
The internal battery used for data maintenance is checked to ensure that it does not fall below a security level.
There are independent outputs:
 GEN/LPHD1 node
 It does not use settings.
 There are no logical inputs or commands.
 Internal battery failure. Indicates that the internal battery level is below the minimum threshold.
 Measurement. The battery value is available (see Table 171)

User Manual 291
MONITORING 
Table 170 Internal battery failure outputs

Battery failure BatAlm general
Table 171 Internal battery measurement

internal battery IntBat net
9.5 UNIT CHECKS
The unit continually checks the various incorporated elements and cards. If an error is detected in any of the elements or
cards, an alarm is generated. If the error affects the unit’s operation, a critical error is generated, which in addition to the
signal acts on :
 Colour front LED. Non-configurable status LED, which indicates the unit’s general status. If the LED is green, it
indicates that everything is correct, while if it is red it indicates a critical error in the unit.
 CPU Relay. Non-configurable 3-contact relay, which indicates the unit’s general status. If the LED is active
(common terminal – NO), it indicates that everything is correct, while if it is deactivated (common terminal– NC) it
indicates a critical error in the unit. If the unit is switched off, the relay is deactivated.
 The unit's alarm signals are to be found in the LPHD node. The available signals indicate faults in the card
check, in the communications between the cards, in the unit’s configuration, etc.:
 Critical hardware error. Indicates that a critical error has been produced. In addition to this signal, the cause that
produced the signal will be indicated.
 CPU error. Indicates that the check has detected an error in the CPU. It generates critical error signal.
 Analogue error. Indicates an error in transformers card. It generates critical error signal.
 I/O micro error. Indicates an error in the I/O cards’ micro.
 Analogue connection error. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the communications between the CPU
and the transformers card. It generates critical error signal.
 I/O connection error. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the communication between the CPU and an I/O
card. It generates critical error signal. Additionally, it will indicate the card which has suffered the failure:
 Error card address x. Indicates that there is a communication error with the card with the address x.
 Front connection error. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the communications between the CPU and
the unit’s front card. It generates critical error signal.
 Shared analogue memory error. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the Data exchange memory between
the CPU and the transformers card. It generates critical error signal.
 Error shared I/O memory. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the Data exchange memory between the
CPU and the I/O cards. It generates critical error signal.
 RTC clock error. Indicates that the check has detected an error in the real time clock.
 Continuous component monitoring alarm. Indicates that an error in the continuous measurement monitoring has
been detected in the transformers card.
 Alarm settings. Indicates that errors have been detected in the storage of the unit’s settings. It generates critical
error signal.
 FW Alarm. Indicates that the relay firmware versions are incompatible.
 Memory check alarm. Indicates that errors have been detected in the checking of the unit’s memory. It generates
critical error signal.
 Converter check alarm. Indicates that errors have been detected in the transformers card AD converter. It
generates critical error signal.
 Converter voltage level alarm. Indicates that errors have been detected in the transformers card reference
voltages. It generates critical error signal.

User Manual 292
MONITORING 
 Relay activation alarm. Indicates that an error has been detected in the activation of at least one of the I/O cards’
relays. It generates critical error signal.
 I/O configuration error. Indicates that the configuration of the I/O cards does not coincide with the unit’s correct
configuration. It generates critical error signal.
 General Vdc error. Indicates a failure in the internal power supply levels. It generates critical error signal.
 Frequency configuration error. This is not a unit failure, but rather a configuration failure. Indicates that the
frequency measurement of the signals being injected into the unit do not match the set measurement, that is, the
unit is configured as 50Hz and the signals which are being injected are greater than 55Hz; or that the unit is
configured as 60 Hz and the signals being injected are less than 55 Hz.
 Internal battery failure. Indicates that the data storage battery is below the security levels and that the data may
be lost at shutdown.
 Version compatibility error. Indicates that the versions of the unit's firmware are not correct.
 Time setting configuration alarm. Indicates that there is an error in the configuration of the unit’s time setting.
 For each I/O card there is are 5 signals, indicating:
 Status OK. Indicates that the card is configured correctly and without errors.
 Configured & No_detected. Indicates that the card is configured by the user, but not detected in the unit. This
may be because it is not assembled or because it has an error. Equivalent to the current communication
error.
 Different configuration. The type indicated by the user and the type detected by the unit do not coincide.
 No_configured & detected. Indicates that card that has not been configured by the user has been detected in
an address.
 Internal card error. A card check error has been received (includes relay check).
 ICD error. Indicates the last ICD received by the device was wrong and it was refused by the device. Once
activated, this signal is deactivated when a correct ICD is received.
 Power supply 1 OFF. Indicates that the power supply 1 is turned off. It is only available in devices with redundant
power supply.
 Power supply 2 OFF. Indicates that the power supply 2 is turned off. It is only available in devices with redundant
power supply.

User Manual 293
MONITORING 
Table 172 Checking signals

Critical hardware error HwCrAlm stVal
CPU error CPUAlm stVal
Analogue error AnaAlm stVal
I/O micro error ESAlm stVal
Analogue connection error AnaComAlm stVal
I/O connection error ESComAlm stVal
Front connection error MMIComAlm stVal
Shared analogue memory error AnDPMAlm stVal
Shared I/O memory error ESDPMAlm stVal
RTC clock error RTCAlm stVal
Continuous component monitoring alarm Harm0Alm stVal
Alarm settings SettingAlm stVal
Firmware alarm FwAlm stVal
Memory check alarm MemAlm stVal
Converter check alarm ADCAlm stVal
Converter voltage level alarm VRefAlm stVal
Relay activation alarm DOAlm stVal
I/O configuration error IOCnfError stVal
Card address error 1 GGIO1Alm stVal
Same as rest of I/O up to 8
Card address error x (x from 2 to 8) GGIOxAlm stVal
General Vdc error VccError stVal
Frequency configuration error FrConfAl stVal
Internal battery failure BatAlm stVal
Version compatibility error VerAlm stVal
Time setting configuration alarm HSetAlm stVal
ICD error FailICD stVal
Card 1 ok GGIO1Ok stVal
Card 1 ConfiguredYNo_detected GGIO1Nodet stVal
Card 1 Different configuration GGIO1Dif stVal
Card 1 No_configured Y Detected GGIO1NConf stVal
Card 1 Internal card error GGIO1HwErr stVal
Same as rest of I/O up to 8
Front ok FRONTOk stVal
Front Configured Y No_detected FRONTNodet stVal
Different front configuration FRONTDif stVal
Front No_configured Y Detected FRONTNConf stVal
Front Internal card error FRONTHwErr stVal
Power supply 1 OFF FailSup1 stVal
Power supply 2 OFF FailSup2 stVal

User Manual 294
CONFIGURATION 
10. CONFIGURATION
10.1 CID
10.1.1 Data Storage

The unit has a CID file that follows the format defined in section 6 of the IEC 61850 standard. It is available via the
following path by FTP “SCL/validated”, in which all the unit’s configuration information is saved, either structured in nodes
that follow the IEC 61850 format or in private parts.
10.1.2 Updating CID

There are different ways to change the settings. They are listed below:
 Using MMS in IEC 61850

 Using local display
 Using the pacFactory (PC tool)
 By sending the CID by FTP to the “SCL/notvalidated” directory
Independently of the form used from among those listed above, the changes to the affected setting are stored in the
unit’s CID file.
CONFIGURATIONS USING ED1:

On devices with IEC61850 Edition 1 configurations, when any setting is changed, the paramRev field in the node in
which the new setting has been written, as well as the LLN0 node of the Logical Device to which the node belongs,
are updated in the CID file.
The format of the paramRev data is as follows:
XXX year.month.day.time.minute.second [paramRev origin text]
 Where “XXX” is an integer counter that is incremented each time paramRev is updated by a setting
change.
 "paramRev origin text“depends on the origin of the setting change:
Origin of settings change paramRev text origin

MMS IEC 61850 client BROWSER IP
Local display USER DISPLAY
pacFactory USER TOOL
New CID CID UPDATE
In the case of “New CID”, only those settings in the CID sent to the unit and which are out of range will be updated in
paramRev.
10.2 GENERAL
Two nodes are used for the general configuration of the unit
 GEN/LLN0. Includes the unit’s generic configuration settings

 PROT/LLN0. Includes the protection units’ generic configuration settings

User Manual 295
CONFIGURATION 
The settings available in the GEN/LLN0 node are shown in protection events mask enablind. Allows the generation of
protection events associated to the function. If set to "NO", the function's protection events are not generated. If set to
"YES", the function's specific mask is contemplated:
 Language. Indicates the unit’s language. Affects the display, reports, etc.
 Functional key block. It allows the functional key to be blocked. When blocked commands with functional key are
not allowed.
 Functional keys (remote). It allows key commands with the device in remote mode.
 Leds Blocking. Allows the activation of the LEDs to be blocked.
 Blocking allowed by command. It allows blocking the reception of block/unblock protection commands.
 Reset Digital Output. Indicates the logic input that, when activated, reset all the digital outputs.
 The supported IRIG-B formats are B002, B003, B006, B007 and IEEE1344. It select whether the year is taken
into account in the synchronization by IRIG. The options are:
 “UTC without year”. The year is not taken into account and all the formats are admitted.
 “UTC with year”. With formats B006, B007 and IEE1344 the year is not taken into account. It cannot be used
with formats B002 and B003 because they set the year to zero value.
 “Local without year”. The year is not taken into account. All the formats are admitted.
 “Local with year”. With formats B006, B007 and IEE1344 the year is not taken into account. It cannot be
used with formats B002 and B003 because they set the year to zero value.
 Local/remote selection. Indicates the logic input that, when activated,changes the device between local/remote.
 Erase records. Indicates the logic input that, when activated, deletes the unit’s report queues. Affects protection
events, faults, disturbance reports, historical measurement reports, etc.
 Remote/ Local type. It indicates how the unit will behave when it has to block the commands it is sent. See
17.2.1
 Flicker Enable. Enables the digital inputs’ swing supervising function.See 10.4.3
 Block full records. When set to "NO", queues are circular, when the maximun number of registers is fullfiled, the
oldest one is erased. If sets to "YES", when the maximun number of registers is fullfiled, the queue is blocked
and no more registers are stored. It affects protection events, faults, disturbance reports, historical measurement
reports.
Table 173 General settings

Lang Language Spanish (0) / English (1) Boolean
BlkFKeys Functional keys blocking NO (0) / YES (1) Boolean
FKeysRem Functional keys (remote) Boolean
BlkFrCom Leds Blocking NO (0) / YES (1) Boolean
LogInReDO Blocking allowed by command Int32
BlkComm Reset Digital Outputs Boolean
UTC without year /
UTC with year /
IrgType IRIG-B002 format enum
Local without year /
Local with year
LogInLR Local/remote selection Int32
LogInDelRe Erase records Int32
Not treated (0)
Iberdrola (1)
LRmode Remote/Local Type 0 3 1 enum
Exclusive (2)
No HMI (3)
FlickerEna Flicker Enabled 0 1 1 NO (0) / YES (1) enum
MaskEna Enable Events Record NO (0) / YES (1) Boolean
BlkFRec Block full records NO (0) / SI (1) Boolean

User Manual 296
CONFIGURATION 
The settings available in the PROT/LLN0 node are shown in protection events mask enabling. Allows the generation of
protection events associated to the function. If set to "NO", the function's protection events are not generated. If set to
"YES", the function's specific mask is contemplated:
 Relay ON. Indicates whether the relay in service or not. If it is out of service, the protection functions do not act.
 Phase order. Selects the phase sequence ABC/CBA. Affects the direct and inverse sequences and, therefore,
the functions that use them. To check whether the order corresponds to wiring, check that the values expected
for the indicated configuration are obtained in the sequence measurements and that the phase current
arguments (as seen in the status screen) match selected sequence.
 Select Setting group 1. Indicates the logic input which, when activated, selects the settings table 1 as active.
 Fault reports (Prim./sec.). Select the measurements of the display fault reports between primary and secondary.
Table 174 General protection settings

OnLine Relay ON NO (0) / YES (1) Boolean
PhsOrd Phase order ABC (0) /CBA (1) enum
LogInSet1 Select Setting group 1 Int32
LogInSet6 Setting change table 6 Int32
FaRepTy Fault reports (Prim./sec.) Secondary (0) / Primary (1) enum
10.3 FRECUENCY, MEASUREMENT AND TRANSFORMERS
The current and voltage transformers are configured in independent nodes, in which the units’ rated values, transformation
ratios and frequencies are indicated.
10.3.1 Current
Two PROT/TCTR nodes are used for the transformation ratios and PROT/TCIN for rated currents.
The settings used for the configuration of the current transformers ratios, which are used to provide primary
measurements, are (see Table 175):
 Phase current ratio. Indicates the phase current transformation ratio.

 Neutral current ratio. Indicates the neutral current transformation ratio.
 Polarization current. Indicates the polarization current transformation ratio.
The settings used for configuring the rated currents are (see Table 176):
 I rated phases. Selects the value of the rated phase current.

 I rated neutral. Selects the value of the rated neutral current.
 3I0-IN measurement type. Selects the neutral measurement from between the measurement calculated
for the phase currents and the transformer measurement.

User Manual 297
CONFIGURATION 
Table 175 Current transformation ratios

PhsRat Phase current ratio 1 10000 0.1 float
GndRat Neutral current ratio 1 10000 0.1 float
PolARat Polarization current 1 10000 0.1 float
Table 176 Rated currents

PhsInom I rated phases 1A (1)/ 5A (2) enum
GndInom I rated neutral 1A (1)/ 5A (2) enum
SelI0 3I0-IN measurement type Calculated (0)/Trafo (1) enum
10.3.2 Frequency and voltage

The PROT/TVTR node is used for the voltage and rated voltage transformation ratios (see Table 177).
 Phase transformation ratio. Indicates the phase voltage transformation ratio.

 Rated phase-earth V (V sec). Selects the rated voltage.
 Voltage phases used. Selects the voltage phases used in the protection functions. Different phase
combinations (both earth to phase and phase to phase) can be selected:
 None. No voltage is enabled
 A. Earth-phase voltage only operates in phase A
 B. Earth-phase voltage only operates in phase B
 A-B. Earth-phase voltages operate in phases A and B
 C. Earth-phase voltage only operates in phase C
 A-C. Earth-phase voltages operate in phases A and C
 B-C. Earth-phase voltages operate in phases B and C
 A-B-C. The three earth-phase voltage operate
 Frequency. Selects the unit’s rated operating frequency 50Hz or 60Hz
 VN transformation ratio. Indicates the neutral voltage transformer ratio.
 Synchro I voltage ratio. Indicates synchronism 1 voltage transformer ratio.
 Synchro II voltage ratio. Indicates synchronism 2 voltage transformer ratio. Only in devices with two
synchronism voltages.
Table 177 Voltage characteristics

VRat Phase transformation ratio 1 10000 0.1 float
VRtg Rated phase-earth V (V sec) 40 200 0.1 float
VSel Voltage phases used 0 8 1 enum
HzRtg (HzVal in Ed2) Frequency 50Hz (0) /60Hz (1) enum
VNRat VN transformation ratio 1 10000 0.1 float
VsRat1 Synchro I voltage ratio 1 10000 0.1 float
VsRat2 Synchro II voltage ratio 1 10000 0.1 float
10.3.3 Power and energy

The PROT/MPWE node, which indicates the conditions for the power calculation, is used (see Table 178):
 Change sign P. Indicates if the sign change in the real power calculation is enabled.
 Change sign Q. Indicates if the sign change in the reactive calculation is enabled.
 Real energy constant. Indicates the real energy impulse factor, i.e., the number of kWh by virtue of which
the counter is incremented by one unit.
 Reactive energy constant. Indicates the reactive energy impulse factor, i.e., the number of kWh by virtue
of which the counter is incremented by one unit.

User Manual 298
CONFIGURATION 
The energy counters value is available in the PROT/MMTR node, with the data:
 Positive real energy counter: SupWh.

 Negative real energy counter: DmdWh.
 Positive reactive energy counter: SupVArh.
 Negative reactive energy counter: DmdVArh.
Table 178 Power characteristics

PSiCh Sign change P NO (0) / YES (1) float
QSiCh Sign change Q NO (0) / YES (1) float
CorWh Constant real power (kWh) 1 1000 1 enum
CorVArh Constant reactive power 1 1000 1 enum
10.4 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
The unit can host a variable number of input-output cards variable (from 1 to 7). Each card is configured with an internal
address from 2 to 7. The power supply is assigned address 1, which is not configurable.
Each card is represented in the IEC 61850 data model as an instance of the GGIO node in the Logical Device called “GEN”.
Each GGIO has the internal address of the physical card as an instance. Thus, for example, if a unit has two input-output
cards with internal addresses 1 and 4, the GEN/GGIO1 and GEN/GGIO4 nodes will exist in the data model.
The number of digital input settings and signals present in each GGIO depends on the type of card used. Continuing the
example, if the card with the internal address 1 has 6 digital inputs and 4 digital outputs, the GGIO1 node will have 6 digital
input signals and 4 digital output signals, as well as the settings corresponding to each digital input and output available.
The data model associated to the GGIOs is common to all and has 32 digital inputs and 16 digital outputs. Nevertheless, in
each card only the data associated with its own inputs and outputs are updated.
For each GGIO there is a boolean setting called MaskEna (event record enabled). If set to “YES”, the activation/deactivation
of the digital inputs and outputs will generate protection events. To the contrary, they will not be stored as event records.
10.4.1 Inputs
There are 2 settings available for each digital input:
 DIxTmms: Digital input time x (ms). This is a software filter for the activation/deactivation of digital inputs.
It indicates the milliseconds (range 0 to 100 ms25) which a digital input must be seen to be active in order
to be considered active. In order to calculate an input's total activation time, the input’s hardware filter
delay – which is approximately 1ms – must be added to this time.
 DIxType: Digital input type x. Defines whether the input is to be interpreted as active when it is seen as
closed (NO) or when it is seen as open (NC)
Each digital input has an associated digital signal indicating its status (see Table 179). Each GGIO indicates the status of
all its digital inputs (up to 32).
Table 179 Digital input signals

Digital input 1 Ind1 stVal
Remaining inputs
25
From firmware version 5.20.15.8 and ICD version 6.3.0.0. In previous versions the maximun was 20ms

User Manual 299
CONFIGURATION 
10.4.2 Outputs
There are 3 settings available for each digital output:
 DOxSig: Assignment digital output x. Assigns the activation of the digital output. There are several
assignment possibilities:
 Signals: They can be signals generated by the unit (trips, logics, hw check, digital inputs and outputs)
 Commands: All of the commands available in the unit can be directly programmed to a physical output
 DOxTmms: Digital output time x (ms). The output activation time defines the minimum operational time of
each physical output following activation (in milliseconds). The range is 0.05 to 5000 ms. The output
remains active in accordance with this time setting or the duration of the associated signal, whichever is
greater.
 DOxTyp: Digital output type. Each output’s type is defined from among the options:
 “Not”. The output follows the assigned signal, i.e., the output is activate when the signal is active.
When the signal is deactivated, the output will deactivate if the digital output time has elapsed. To the
contrary, the output will remain active until this time elapses.
 “Stored”. Once activated, the output remains active until the relay deactivation command is issued,
with the signal assigned to the output deactivated. The command can be issued by the action of a
digital input programmed as “Local reset”, a command or by keyboard/display.
 “Trip”. Once activated, the output remains active until the following conditions are met: the signal
assigned to the output is deactivated and the breaker is open.
 “Close”. Once activated, the output remains active until the following conditions are met: the signal
assigned to the output is deactivated and the breaker is closed.
Each digital input has an associated digital signal indicating its status (see
Table 181
Table 181). Each GGIO indicates the status of all its digital outputs (up to 16).
Table 180 Input/output settings

OscTms Input oscillation time (s) 1 60 1 Int32
Nchanges Number of changes 0 255 1 Int32
DI1Tmms Digital Input Time 1 (ms) 0 100 1 Int32
DI1Type Digital Input Type 1 NO (0) / NC (1) enum
DI2Tmms Digital Input Time 2 (ms) 0 100 1 Int32
DI2Type Digital Input Type 2 NO (0) / NC (1) enum
Remaining inputs DI3x, DI4x..
DO1Sig Digital Output Assignment 1 Int32
DO1Tmms Minimum Output Time 1 (ms) 0 5000 1 Int32
DO1Ty Digital Output Type 1 enum
DO2Sig Digital Output Assignment 2 enum
DO2Tmms Minimum Output Time 2 (ms) 0 5000 1 enum
DO2Ty Digital Output Type 2 Int32
Remaining inputs DI3x, DI4x..
Table 181 Digital output signals

Digital output 1 SPCSO1 stVal
Remaining outputs

User Manual 300
CONFIGURATION 
10.4.3 Treatment of digital input flicker

Flicker consists of a fast and continuous change of a digital input, usually associated with a failure in the input’s contact.
The function allows a control to be performed to disable the flickering digital inputs or signals in order to prevent them
from interfering with the control system, as a disabled digital does not generate status changes.
The supervising of the swing in the digital inputs or the supervising of the flicker is conducted in accordance with certain
user-configurable settings.
On the one hand, there is a general setting that allows this function to be enabled or disabled. If this setting is disabled,
not flicker treatment is performed.
General setting for the configuration of the flicker treatment (Table 182):
 FlickerEna: Enables the digital inputs’ swing supervising function.
Table 182 General flicker treatment setting

FlickerEna Flicker enabled 0 1 1 NO (0) / YES (1) enum
 GEN/LLN0 node
Once the general flicker setting has been enabled (Table 182), there are two more setting per card for treating the
swing. They are “OscTms” and “Nchanges” which can be seen in Table 180:
 OscTms: The time between changes in the same direction in order for a signal to be deemed to be swinging.
When a signal is swinging a swinging signal is produced. The unit is seconds.
 Nchanges: The number of changes that must be produced in a swinging signal in order for the signal to become
invalid and cease from sending changes. If this setting is set to zero, it disables the swing treatment for this card,
i.e., the flicker treatment is not performed for this card.
 GEN/GGIOx node, in which x depends on the card’s internal address (see section 10.4)
Once a signal has been detected as swinging, it becomes questionable and oscillatory.
If this situation continues and the number of set changes (“Nchanges” setting) is exceed, the signal becomes invalid and
oscillatory. It ceases to send the changes and sends the signal's last known valid status.
When the time difference between two changes is greater than the inputs’ swing time (“OscTms” setting), the signal
changes to valid.
10.5 LEDS
10.5.1 Via GEN/IHMI node

The LEDs are programmed within the IHMI node located in the “GEN” Logical Device. There are 2 settings available for
each LED:
 LexSig: Assignment led x. Assigns the activation of LED x using any of the signals generated by the unit
 LExTyp: LED type x. It can be programmed as “not” and “stored”. In the first case, the activation of the LED
follows the activation of the signal programmed in the setting described above. If it is programmed as “stored”,
the LED’s activation will remain even if the signal that provoked its activation drops out, until the signal
programmed in the LogInReLed setting available in the IHMI node is activated.
There is a general setting for all the LEDs that indicates the logic signal used to switch of the LEDs:
 LED reset. Selects the signal which, when active, switches off the LEDs.
The LEDs are updated every 200ms. Thus, for the correct activation of the LEDs, the assigned signal must remain active
for at least 150 ms. To the contrary, the LED cannot be activated.

User Manual 301
CONFIGURATION 
Table 183 LED settings

LogInReLed LED reset Int32
Le1Sig Led 1 assignment 0 20 1 Int32
Le1Ty Led 1 type Not (0) /Stored (1) enum
Le2Sig Led 2 assignment 0 20 1 Int32
Le2Ty Led 2 type Not (0) /Stored (1) enum
Remaining LEDs up to 19
10.5.2 Via CTRL/IHMI node

If the unit, in addition to the “GEN” Logical Device’s IHMI node defined in the previous section, has an IHMI node located
in “CTRL” Logical Device, the unit’s treatment in relation to the configuration of the LEDs differs as follows:
 The parameterization of the assignment of LEDs is carried out by the settings present in the CTRL/IHMI
node.
 The parameterization of the LEDs type is carried out by the settings present in the CTRL/IHMI node.
The settings present in this node are detailed below
InRef1 Led 1 assignment - - - InRef
LEDSe1 Led 1 type Not (0) /Stored (1) enum
InRef2 Led 2 assignment - - - InRef
LEDSe2 Led 2 type Not (0) /Stored (1) enum
Remaining LEDs up to 19
There are 2 settings available for each LED:
 InRefx: Assignment led x. Assings the activation of LED x using any of the signals generated by the unit.
The assignment is carried out by means of a character string (see next section “Configuration with InRef”)
 LEDSex: LED type x. It can be programmed as “not” and “stored”. In the first case, the activation of the
LED follows the activation of the signal programmed in the setting described above. If it is programmed as
“stored”, the LED’s activation will remain even if the signal that provoked its activation drops out, until the
signal programmed in the LogInReLed setting available in the GEN/IHMI node (defined in the previous
section) is activated.
10.6 CONFIGURATION WITH INREF
The InRef type settings are programmed by a string of characters in which the reference of the IEC 61850 object containing
the value to be employed as an input is indicated. The following format, as defined in the part 7.2 of the IEC 61850 standard,
is employed:
LDName/LNName.DataObjectName[.SubDataObjectName[. ...]].DataAttributeName
For example,
 In order to program InRef1 with the GGIO1 input signal 1, the reference to be written in the InRef is:
GEN/GGIO1.Ind1.stVal
 In order to program the PTOC 1 phase A trip, the reference is:
PROT/PTOC1.Op.phsA
10.7 GENERIC COMMAND
Generic commands are available within the Logical Device "GEN" on the ordGGIO1 node, which will be active for 100msg.
The commnad are the following:

User Manual 302
CONFIGURATION 
 SPCS01, Generic command 1

 ………..
Are available signals associated with these generic commands, which will be available in logic, output, etc.
Generic command 1 activation Ind1 stVal
--------- stVal
Generic command 1 desactivation Ind17 stVal
--------- stVal
10.8 NAMES
The PROT/LPHD node is used for the general configuration of the units’ names and the installation.
Short names are used for the generation of the disturbance recorder and fault file names.
The settings for this node are shown in Table 184:
 Installation name: Full name of the installation.

 Short name of the installation. Short name of the installation. Limited to 10 characters, this is used in the
generation of disturbance recorder and fault files. Neither spaces nor commas are permitted in the name.
 Relay name. Full name of the relay.
 Short relay name. Short name of the installation. Limited to 10 characters, this is used in the generation of
disturbance recorder and fault files. Neither spaces nor commas are permitted in the name.
 Name of breaker 1. Full name of breaker 1.
 Name of breaker 2. Full name of breaker 1.
Table 184 Name settings

InstNam Installation name String
InstShNam Short name of the installation 10 characters String
RelNam Relay name. String
RelShNam Short relay name 10 characters String
BkrNam1 Name of breaker 1 String
BkrNam2 Name of breaker 2 String
10.9 IPRV NODES CONFIGURATION
10.9.1 General IPRV settings

The device has several settings (included in the GEN/genIPRV logical node) to set certain operating modes.
These settings are considered special and they are configurable via an IEC 61850 connection or sending the CID file
after editing the values from pacFactory tool (menu Settings -> IPRV). They do not appear in the display or section
pacFactory protection settings.
The settings included in this logical node are:
 LocalTim: Allows to force sending local time in IEC 61850 timestamps. It is important to know that this is not
normative because IEC 61850 standard defines that the timestamps must be sent in UTC format. However, with

User Manual 303
CONFIGURATION 
this option the device is adapted to systems that only use local time. The default value is 0, which indicates the
use of UTC. The value 1 indicates the use of local time.
 MaxConn: Sets the maximum number of IEC 61850 connections that are accepted. Limited to a maximum value
of 16.
 AplicTms: Defines the disconnection timeout at the application level. After this time (in seconds) without receiving
any IEC 61850 messages the server automatically closes the connection.
 TipoServ: Defines some operation modes of the device.
 Value 0: Default operation mode.
 Value 1: Special operation mode that includes:
 Enable IP checking to validate a new ICD/CID file. If the IP address indicated in the communications
section of the ICD/CID file does not match the address of the device the file is not validated. If the IP
address of the device is changed once the file has been validated, the IEC 61850 server is disabled
and waits for the change of the IP address of the device with the one in the file or to receive a new
CID file with the correct IP.
 When a command is received, the value that the device saves in "orIdent" attribute is the IP address
from which the command was sent, regardless of the value that the client sent in the message.
 AuthReq: Allows activating the password authentication in the establishment of IEC 61850 connection. The
password received is checked against the one assigned to the user “user61850”.
 The default password for this user is: user61850.
 DevGoose: Selects the Ethernet port for GOOSE messages. Any online change of this value requires the reset
of the device and therefore the signal ResetDev is activated.
 Eth1: GOOSE publication and reception enabled on interface ETH1.
 Eth2: GOOSE publication and reception enabled on interface ETH2.
 Both (Eth1): Reception on both interfaces (ETH1 and ETH2). Publication is sent by only one
configurable interface for each GOOSE. By default port ETH1.
 Both (Eth2): Reception on both interfaces (ETH1 and ETH2). Publication is sent by only one
configurable interface for each GOOSE. By default port ETH2.
 NoGsVlan: Defines the use of the VLAN tag in GOOSE messages. Any change in this value causes the
activation of the signal ResetDev. Default value is 0.
 Value 0: GOOSE messages are sent with VLAN TAG and are received with or without VLAN TAG.
 Value 1: GOOSE messages are sent and received only without VLAN TAG.
 IprvMod: Sets the access level to reports, commands and logs from the different IP addresses configured in the
IPRV logical nodes defined in the following paragraph:
 Permissive: By default all IP addresses not configured in the IPRV logical nodes have access to
reports, commands and logs. The IP addresses included in the IPRV logical nodes will have the
configured access level.
 Restrictive: Only IP addresses configured in the IPRV logical nodes have access to reports,
commands and logs. The access level is configured individually for each IP address. Other IP
addresses do not have access.
 IprvConn: The value 1 limits the IEC 61850 connections only to IP addresses configured on IPRV logical nodes
and any connection from other IP address will be rejected. The value 0 allows the connection from any IP
address.
Only the settings that indicate the activation of the signal ResetDev require a restart of the device to be effective.
10.9.2 IEC 61850 clients IPRV settings

There are 8 instances of this logical node (GEN/IPRVx) to configure the level access to reports, commands and logs of
up to 8 IEC 61850 clients. Each client is identify by its IP address. The available settings for each logical node are:
 Addr: IP address of the client.

 EnaRpt: Enumerated value to configure the access level to reports from the defined IP address.
 [0] All: Allows access to all reports.

User Manual 304
CONFIGURATION 
 [1] Yes: Allows access only to the reports defined in RptNam fields.
 [2] No: Not allowed access to any report.
 CmdEna: Boolean setting that with value 1 allows the execution of commands from the defined IP address.
 EnaLog: Enumerated value to configure the access level to logs from the defined IP address.
 [0] Read only: Only read access to the logs.
 [1] Read/write: Read and write access to the logs.
The signal GEN/IPRVx.St.stVal indicates whether the address configured on that node is in communication with the
device. In case of multiple connections from the same IP, the signal is 0 when all are closed.
These settings are considered special and they are configurable via an IEC 61850 connection or sending the CID file
after editing the values from pacFactory tool (menu Settings -> IPRV). They do not appear in the display or section
pacFactory protection settings.
10.10 MEASUREMENT’S RANGE AUTOMATIC CONFIGURATION
Measures logical nodes which have the AdRanMea setting have the possibility of the automatic configuration of the
measures ranges (with value 1 in the AdRanMea setting).
AdRanMea settings in different logical nodes are independent. Each logical node can be configured independently.
Only de ranges of measures with a sAddress value are calculated.
If the value of AdRanMea setting is 1, the range configuration cannot be modified via IEC 61850 protocol.
The values that are automatically calculated are:
Measures:
 rangeC.hhLim.f
 rangeC.hLim.f
 rangeC.lLim.f
 rangeC.llLim.f
 rangeC.min.f
 rangeC.max.f
Angles:
 rangeAngC.hhLim.f
 rangeAngC.hLim.f
 rangeAngC.lLim.f
 rangeAngC.llLim.f
 rangeAngC.min.f
 rangeAngC.max.f
The calculation is made based on the values of scale range and transformation ratio of each measure as follows:
 Signed measures:
 max: scale range * transformation ratio
 min: - (scale range * transformation ratio)
 Unsigned measures
 max: scale range * transformation ratio
 min: 0
And the value of the factor configured in the multiplier attribute is applied:
 If multiplier > 0 it is divided by 10 multiplier

User Manual 305
CONFIGURATION 
 If multiplier < 0 it is multiplied by 10 multiplier

In both cases the limits are configured as:
 hLim = max
 hhLim = max
 lLim = max * 4 / 5
 llLim = max * 4 / 5
The rest of the configuration values of each measurement (db, SIUnits, multiplier, dbAng, limDb) are not modified.

User Manual 306
SYNCHRONIZATION
11. SYNCHRONIZATION
Several synchronization sources are permitted, with the following priority:
 IEEE158826
 IRIG-B
 SNTP
 Communication protocols
 pacFactory (see specific user manual)
 Local display
In case of active synchronization with any of the sources, the sources of lower priority are blocked. Some examples:
 If there is synchronization by IEEE1588v2, synchronization for any other cause is not permitted. In order to
consider the absence of IEEE1588v2 synchronization and to allow other sources, 1.5 minutes must elapse
without synchronization:
 When disabled by setting
 When you lose IEEE 1588v2 communication through the port (synchronization does not arrive)
 When it loses traceability or precision (the master is not synchronized)
 If there is synchronization by IRIG, synchronization for any other cause is not permitted. In order to consider the
absence of IRIG synchronization and to allow other sources, 1.5 minutes must elapse without the reception of
correct IRIG frames.
 If there SNTP synchronization, the synchronization of protocols is not permitted, nor pacFactory nor display.
However, if IRIG synchronization is received, the SNTP is blocked and IRIG is synchronized.
 Synchronization by pacFactory and by display have the same priority and can be run simultaneously.
11.1 GENERAL SETTINGS
The unit’s data model has a GEN/LTIM node for the configuring the summer/winter time change. The node has the following
settings (see Table 185):
 Offset Local Time-UTC (min): Offset Local Time-UTC (min). A setting that indicates the number of minutes by
which the time setting must be put forward/put back when changing between summer/winter time. Range
between -720 and 720 minutes (-12 to + 12 hours)
 Summer-winter time change enabled: Time change enabled. A boolean setting that allows the time setting to be
changed
 Summer Calendar Pattern: Summer Calendar Pattern. Three selectable values:
 Last of month: Last week, refers to the weekday set in WkDayD
 First of month: First week, refers to the weekday set in WkDayD
 Second of month: Second week, refers to the weekday set in WkDayD
 Third of month: Third week, refers to the weekday set in WkDayD
 Fourth of month: Fourth week, refers to the weekday set in WkDayD
 Day of month: Selects the day of the month indicated in DayD
 Day Week Summer: Indicates the day of the week for the change to summer time (Monday.. Sunday)
 Month Summer: Indicates the month in which the change to summer time occurs (January.. December)
 Day Summer: Indicates the day in which the change to summer time occurs (1.. 31)
 Time Summer: Indicates the time at which the time changes to summer time
 Minute Summer: Indicates the minute (within the time set on HrD) when the time changes to summer time
26
Available from firmware version 6.0.18.0
User Manual 307
SYNCHRONIZATION
 Winter Calendar Pattern: Winter Calendar Pattern. Equivalent to OccD but from winter to summer
 Day Week Winter: Indicates the day of the week for the change to winter time (Monday.. Sunday)
 Month Winter: Indicates the month in which the change to winter time occurs (January.. December)
 Day Winter: Indicates the day in which the change to winter time occurs (1.. 31)
 Time Winter: Indicates the time at which the time changes to winter time
 Minute Winter: Indicates the minute (within the time set on HrS) when the time changes to winter time
 Not Synchro Time (min): Timeout to activate synchronization alarm.
Table 185 Synchronization settings

TmOfsTmm Offset Local Time-UTC (min) -720 720 1 Int32
TmUseDT Summer-winter time change enabled NO (0) / YES (1) Boolean
OccD Summer Calendar Pattern 0 2 1 enum
WkDayD Day Week Summer 0 6 1 enum
MthD Month Summer 1 12 1 enum
DayD Day Summer 1 31 1 Int32
HrD Time Summer 0 23 1 Int32
MnD Minute Summer 0 59 1 Int32
OccS Winter Calendar Pattern 0 2 1 enum
WkDayS Day Week Winter 0 6 1 enum
Mths Month Winter 1 12 1 enum
DayS Day Winter 1 31 1 Int32
HrS Time Winter 0 23 1 Int32
MnS Minute Winter 0 59 1 Int32
SyncAlmTm Not Synchro Time (min) 1 1440 1 Int32
There are signals indicating the synchronization source (Table 186):
 Synchronization by IEEE1588: Active when the device is synchronized by IEEE1588. It is maintained activated
for 90 seconds after an IEEE1588 synchronization.
 Synchronization by IRIG-B: Active when the device is synchronized by IRIG-B. It is maintained activated for 90
seconds after an IRIG-B synchronization.
 SNTP synchronization: Active when the device is synchronized by SNTP. It is maintained activated the period
defined by not synchro timeout SNTP setting (ValTm) after an SNTP synchronization.
 Synchronization by protocols: Active if the last synchronization was been received by communications protocols.
 Synchronization by display: Active if the last synchronization was been received by the front keyboard.
 Synchronization by console: Active if the last synchronization has been received from the PacFactory console.
 Device not synchronized: Synchronization alarm. Active if a valid synchronization (IRIG-B, SNTP or protocols)
has not been received during the timeout configured by the not synchro time setting (SyncAlmTm).
 Daylight saving time: Active if the local time has summer correction.
Table 186 Synchronization source

Synchronization by IEEE1588 SyncPTP stVal
Synchronization by IRIG-B SyncIRIGB stVal
Synchronization by SNTP SyncSNTP stVal
Synchronization by protocols SyncProt stVal
Synchronization by display SyncDispl stVal
Synchronization by console SyncCons stVal
Device not synchronized SyncAlm stVal
Daylight saving time TmDT stVal

User Manual 308
SYNCHRONIZATION
11.2 IEEE 1588V2
The IEEE Std 1588-2008, also known as IEEE 1588v2 or PTPv2, offers a good solution for clock synchronization in
distributed systems with high accuracy requirements. It works through Ethernet networks and achieves accuracy in the
submicrosecond range.
The IEDs support IEEE 1588v2 as well as the IEEE C37.238-2011, which specifies a common profile for the use of the IEEE
1588v2 in power system protection, control, automation, and data communication applications utilizing an Ethernet
communications architecture.
The most important features described in C37.238 are the following:
 The PTP over IEEE 802.3 transport mapping, specified in Annex F of IEEE 1588v2, shall be the only transport
mechanism in all IEEE C37.238 devices used in a substation system.
 The peer delay request mechanism specified in 11.4 of IEEE 1588v2 shall be the only path delay measurement
mechanism in operation when this profile is deployed.
11.2.1 Settings
There are 3 settings to set up IEEE 1588v2. They all belong to the GEN/LTMS logical node described in 1.4.1.
 Main Time Source: The string “1588” must be set up in this setting in order to enable 1588v2.
 PTP interface: This setting specifies the interface in which the IED will listen to IEEE 1588v2 messages.
 PTP delay mechanism: This settings specifies which delay Mechanism to use: peer to peer (P2P) or end to end
(E2E) delay mechanism.
11.3 IRIG-B
The device is equipped with an input for synchronization by GPS, using IRIG-B time codes (consult chapter 2 for more
details about the input).
The supported IRIG-B formats are B002, B003, B006, B007 and IEEE1344. The configuration is with the IrgType setting in
the GEN\LLN0 logical node (General configuration). The different options are (depending on whether the GPS send UTC or
local time):
 “UTC without year”. The year is not taken into account and all the formats are admitted.
 “UTC with year”. With formats B006, B007 and IEE1344 the year is not taken into account. It cannot be used
 “Local without year”. The year is not taken into account. All the formats are admitted.
 “Local with year”. With formats B006, B007 and IEE1344 the year is not taken into account. It cannot be used
11.4 SNTP
The SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) settings are included in the LTMS logical node.
Note: There is an optional configuration mode with the SNTP-IP value in the communications section of the ICD file, which is
maintained for backward compatibility with previous configuration files. The IED only uses that option if no configuration is
included in the LTMS node. The recommended configuration option is the LTMS node settings.

User Manual 309
SYNCHRONIZATION
11.4.1 Settings
The SNTP settings are in the GEN/LTMS logical node:
 Main Time Source: IP address of the main NTP server. Broadcast addresses are not allowed. Value 0.0.0.0
disables the main source.
 Secondary Time Source: IP address of the secondary NTP server. Broadcast addresses are not allowed. Value
0.0.0.0 disables the secondary source.
 Not Synchro time SNTP (min): Elapsed time in which it has not been received any correct SNTP response (the
checked fields are detailed below) from any of the sources configured for SNTP synchronization to consider the
SNTP as not synchronized. Range value is 1 to 1440 min.
 SNTP Polling Time (seg): Time interval between synchronization requests to the NTP servers. Range value is 10
to 3600 seconds. If the configured time is less than the real polling communication process (requests and retries
in case of failure) the synchronization active request will finish normally and a new polling timer will be started.
 SNTP Time delay Unicast message (seg): Waiting time for the response to an unicast synchronization request. If
no response is received in that time interval a unicast request retry cycle will be started. Range value is 1 to 60
seg.
 Retry number: Number of unicast request retries in case there is no response from the NTP server to a request.
If the configured number of retries finishes without response with the main source the device tries to synchronize
with the secondary source. If the configured number of retries finishes without response with the secondary
source that synchronization process is finished and the device waits the polling period to send a new request.
Range value is 0 to 9.
 PTP interface: This setting specifies the interface in which the IED will listen to IEEE 1588v2 messages.
 PTP delay mechanism: This settings specifies which delay Mechanism to use: peer to peer (P2P) or end to end
(E2E) delay mechanism.
Table 187 SNTP settings LTMS node

TmSrcSet1 Main Time Source IP address VisString255
TmSrcSet2 Secondary Time Source IP address VisString255
ValTm Not Synchro timeout SNTP (min) 1 1440 1 Int32
PollTms SNTP Polling Time (seg) 10 3600 1 Int32
EspTms SNTP Time delay Unicast message (seg) 1 60 1 Int32
NRetry Retry number 0 9 1 Int32
PTPIface PTP Interface 1 2 1 Eth1/Eth2 enum
PTPDelM PTP delay mechanism 0 1 1 P2P / E2P enum
The following values are checked in the synchronization responses to consider them valid and apply the time to the
internal clock:
 Message length.
 Flags mode: Server.
 Flags version number: NTP version 4.
 Flags leap indicator: Different from 3.
From Ingepac EF version 6.1.18.5 the following checks are also implemented:
 Flags version number: NTP version 3 or 4.

 Valid stratum value: Between 1 and 15.

User Manual 310
SYNCHRONIZATION
The following diagram details the synchronization process:
11.5 QUALITY FLAGS IEC 61850
In the IEC 61850 data there are quality flags which detail the validity of the time in a timestamp sent by communications.
These are the used quality flags:
 Clock Not Syncronized: It has the same value as the synchronization failure alarm.
 Leap Second: It has the value received from the synchronization source.
 Clock Failure: It has the failure in the internal RTC clock.

User Manual 311
DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS 
12. DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS

The information generated by the unit is stored in xml format files, except the format of the oscillography, which is stored in
comtrade format.
12.1 STATUS REPORT
The status report indicates the current status of the protection, showing instantaneous values. This report is updated
approximately every 1 second.
The information available in the status message is:
 Version. Indicates the unit version:

 CPU: Shows the CPU’s main firmware version.
 CPU2: Displays the firmware version of the FPGA and interface with I/O modules.
 OTHER: Displays the analogue card's firmware and I/O modules.
 General. Displays the unit’s general data:
 Relay date and time. Within the <Date> tag, the date (Date) and time (Time) are shown.
 Active table. Within the <Setting Group> tag, the active table number is shown.
 Measurements: Within the Measurements tag, the unit’s measurements are shown. The measurements
correspond to the fundamental frequency.
 <Analog>: Type, module and angle of each of the unit’s 12 transformers.
 <Sequence>: Direct, inverse and zero sequences of currents and voltages (module and angle).
 <Power>: Total real, reactive and apparent power.
 <Frequency>. Frequency value.
 <Battery> External power supply battery voltage.
 <InternalBattery> Internal battery voltage for maintenance of Data.
 <Maximeter>. Indicates the maximeter value for each current and voltage phase. It has a “Reset” button.
 <Thermal>. Phase and neutral thermal image value. It also has a “Reset” button.
 <Temperature> Indicates the unit’s temperature.
 The LD models show information of:
 Differential current. Indicates the fundamental value of the three phases.
 Restraint current. Indicates the Restraint current of the three phases.
 2° harmonic differential current. Indicates the value of the three phases.
 End measures. For each end, indicates the fundamental and 2° harmonic of the total currents (module
and angle) of the three phases.
 Total current. Indicates the total current of the three phases. Only in 52 ½ configurations.
 Input and output status. The status of the digital inputs and outputs is indicated in each of the cards available in
the unit. Each card is distinguished by its address, indicated in GGIO1 to GGIO8.
 Digital inputs. Ind1.stVal to Ind32.stVal indicate “Y” if enabled and “N” if not. There are as many values as
there are inputs in the card.
 Digital outputs. SPCSO1.stVal to SPCSO16.stVal indicate “Y” if enabled and “N” if not. There are as many
values as there are outputs in the card.
 Protection units. Indicates the current status of each of the functions: enabled, pick up, trip and last trip. In each
of the functions the data available in each node are indicated.
 Status. In <StEna.stVal>, the function is indicated as active and not blocked with “Y”. “N” is used to indicate
that the function is not enabled or blocked or in operation
 Pick up. Indicates in <Str> whether the unit is picked up “Y” or not “N”. The data depends on the unit, for
example, for phase A it would be Str.phsA.

User Manual 312
 Activation. Indicates in <Op> whether the unit is tripped “Y” or not “N”. The data depends on the unit, for
example, for phase A it would be Str.phsA.
 Last trip. Indicated within <l>. “Y” is used to indicate if the last trip was due to this cause, whilst "N" is used to
indicate otherwise.
 Recloser status: Indicates the current status of the recloser. The signals are in <RREC1>. “Y” is used to indicate
active signals, whereas "N" is used to indicate inactive signals. The available signals and their references are
indicated in the recloser section. These include:
 in service/blocked.
 in stand-by.
 ongoing cycle, indicating the closure cycle that is currently active.
 definitive trip.
 internal block, distinguishing different causes.
 External block.
 “Put Into Service and “Put Out of Service” buttons
 Frequency recloser status: Indicates the current status of the frequency recloser. The signals are in <FRREC1>.
“Y” is used to indicate active signals, whereas "N" is used to indicate inactive signals. The available signals and
their references are indicated in the frequency recloser section.
 Synchronism check unit status. The general status of the synchronism is displayed in RSYN1 and the presence
of voltage in RVRS1. “Y” is used indicated active signals and "N" for inactive signals. The available signals and
their references are indicated in the synchronism section.
 Protection status. With the “PROT” data in LLN0, “Y” indicates whether the relay is in service, “N” indicates if the
relay is out of service.
 General status. Indicated in LLN0 with the “GEN” data, in which the following is indicated:
 Unit hw status. Indicating if there is failure "Y" or "N".
 Local/remote mode. Indicating if it is local, "Y" or "N".
 Events pending dispatch. Indicating if there is an event pending dispatch, "Y" or "N".
 Failure in IRIG synchronization. Indicating if there is failure, "Y" or "N".
 V2 and Vn voltage monitoring. Indicating if there is failure, "Y" or "N".
 Check on internal communication between cards. Indicating if there is failure, "Y" or "N".
 Open pole logic status. Shown in POPD1, indicating:
 StEna.stVal. Indicates whether the function is enabled, “Y” or “N”.
 OpenPole. For each pole and general, indicating whether open “Y” or closed “N”
 Number of open poles. One (OneOpPole), two (TwoOpPole), three (ThreeOpPol) or at least one (OpenPole)
 Broken conductor. Indicating whether the phase is broken for each of the poles, “Y” or “N”.
 Deal line. Indicating whether there is a dead line for each of the poles, “Y” or “N”.
 Breaker status. Shown in XCBR, indicating:
 BrDISt. For each pole and general, the status of the associated digital input: closed “Y”, open “N”.
 CloseOrdBr. For each pole and general, the status of the closure command: active “Y”, inactive “N”.
 OpenOrdBr. For each pole and general, the status of the opening command: active “Y”, inactive “N”.
 ClsFailBr. For each pole and general, indicating whether there has been a failure in the closure command,
“Y” or “N”
 OpenFailBr. For each pole and general, indicating whether there has been a failure in the opening command,
“Y” or “N”
 Breaker monitoring status. Shown in CBOU1, indicating the value of the ki2 sum for each pole.
 Monitoring units.
 CCTS1. CT monitoring. There is function enabled data (StEna.stVal) and CT monitoring activation data
(CTSpv.general)
 CTSU1. Temperature monitoring. There is a function enabling data (StEna.stVal) and an indication of the
temperature above (OverTemp) and below (UnderTemp) the threshold.

User Manual 313
 CESS1. External power supply monitoring. Indication of external power supply above (OverVcc) or below
(UnderVcc) the threshold. Also indicates whether the function is enabled or not (StEna.stVal).
 CSUS1. Indicates battery failure status (DFFA), if it is activated “Y" or deactivated “N”.
The status data are displayed on the PacFactory console and in the unit's display:
 PacFactory. All the status message information is displayed, grouped in tabs according to the information:
 General. The date, active table, versions and measurements are displayed.
 I/O. The digital inputs and outputs are displayed.
 Enabled. Indicates whether the units are operative (enabled and not blocked) or not.
 Protection status. The status of the protection units is displayed, i.e., if they are picked up and/or tripped.
 Breaker and monitoring. The breaker, breaker monitoring and circuits statuses are displayed.
 Recloser and synchronism. The status of the recloser and synchronism units is displayed.
 Check. The results of the various checks that are carried out in the unit are displayed.
 Display. Grouped into several screens and displaying:
 General: Date and active table.
 Transformer measurements and configuration.
 Current and voltage maximeters.
 I/O. The digital inputs and outputs are displayed.
Figure 183 PacFactory status screen

User Manual 314
12.2 PRIMARY MEASUREMENTS REPORT
This report indicates the measurement transformers’ primary measurements, applying the transformer ratio. The maximeter
information is used for the maximeter reports.
The information available in the measurements message is:
 Distance. In the <Distance> tag, indicating the distance of the last fault.
 Currents. Within the <Currents> tag, showing the rms current measurements in primary:
 Earth-phase.
 The module and angle of each phase, neutral and sensitive neutral.
 The average current module of the three phases.
 THD of each phase, neutral and sensitive neutral.
 Thermal image <Thermal>. Value of phase and neutral thermal image.
 Sequences <Sequence>. Current sequences module (I0, I1, I2)
 Voltages Within the <Voltage> tag, showing the rms voltage measurements in primary:
 Earth-phase.
 The module and angle of each phase and neutral.
 The average voltage module of the three phases.
 THD of each phase and neutral.
 Phase-phase <Phase>.
 Phase pair module (AB, BC and CA) and average.
 Sequences. Voltage sequences module (V0, V1, V2)
 Frequency. Frequency value.
 Powers. Within the <Power> tag, showing the rms measurements for each phase and total:
 Real power. Per phase and total.
 Reactive power. Per phase and total.
 Apparent power. Per phase and total.
 Power factor <Power Factor>. Per phase and average.
 Energy counters <Energy>. There is a reset button for the energy counters.
 Last reset command date
 Positive and negative real energy counter value
 Positive and negative reactive energy counter value
 Maximeters. Shows the maximum value and the date on which it was produced. There is a reset button for the
maximeter.
 Current. For each phase.
 Voltage. For each phase.
 Real power. For phase and total.
 Reactive power. For phase and total.
 Apparent power. For phase and total.

User Manual 315
Figure 184 PacFactory measurements screen
12.3 FAULT REPORT
The fault reports include information about the unit’s data during the fault, as well as the active settings during the fault. The
last 20 faults are stored in a non-volatile memory.
The name of the file uses the standard IEEE C37.232-2007, using the fields:
Start Date, Start Time, Time Code, Station Identifier, Device Identifier, Company Name
For example, “100626, 46702262,+2h30t,Substation,Rele1,Ingeteam”, which means:
 Start Date: Trip date with a 2-character format for the year, the month and the day. For example, 26/june/2010 would be
100626.
 Start Time: Indicates the milliseconds as of 00:00 of the day, that is, milliseconds as of midnight.
 Time Code: Indicates the time zone amplitude sign, and can indicate minutes if necessary. For example, “t +2” indicates
time zone 2, while “+2 h30t” indicates that the time zone is 2 hours 30 minutes.
 Station Identifier. Indicates the substation name. The installation’s short name (InsShNam) from the “PROT/LPHD1”
node is used"
 Device Identifier. Indicates the unit’s name. The relay’s short name (RelShNam) from the “PROT/LPHD1” node is used"
 Company Name. Indicates the name of unit’s manufacturer, in this case, Ingeteam.
The information available in the fault is:
 Date and time: <Fecha>. Indicates the date as a string in the “dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss.ms” format, i.e., “23/04/09
10_41_30_256”. There are three dates available
 Start of the fault (first unit picked up): <Inicio>
 Trip (first unit tripped): <Disparo>.
 End of fault (when the trip signal disappears): <Fin>
 Configuration: <Config>. Indicates the configuration of each of the 12 transformers: type and scale range.
 Pre-fault and fault. Indicates the values measured before the fault and upon the fault. They are grouped into “Pre-fault”
and “Fault”, and the same data is available in both cases:

User Manual 316
 Transformer measurements <Analog>. It indicates the measurement in the module and the angle of each
transformer.
 Sequences. Indicates the measurements in the module and the angle of the current sequences (I0, I1 and I2) and
the voltage (V0, V1 and V2).
 Powers. Indicates the measurements of the total real, reactive and apparent powers.
 The LD models show information of:
 Differential current. Indicates the fundamental value of the three phases.
 Restraint current. Indicates the Restraint current of the three phases
 2° harmonic differential current. Indicates the value of the three phases.
 End measures. For each end, indicates the fundamental and 2° harmonic of the total currents (module
and angle) of the three phases.
 Distance to fault.
 Frequency in the moment of the fault.
 Thermal image upon trip. The thermal image is indicated as a % of phases and neutral.
 Fault max. Maximum values of the current channels and I0 during the fault.
 Breaker. Indicates breaker monitoring data upon the fault.
 Open current. For each phase, indicates the current value upon the trip.
 Sigma ki. For each phase, indicates the sigma ki2 value.
 Num. reclose. Number of recloser performances.
 Fault and trip type <Tipo/Type>: Summary of the fault with the 3-letter code formed by combinations of the characters A,
B, C, N, NS and G (if tripped by a phase, neutral, sensitive neutral or ground), RTP (teleprotection), IF (phase
overcurrent), IN (neutral overcurrent), D (current unbalance), VO (zero-sequence overvoltage), HV (overvoltage), LV
(undervoltage), RTP (teleprotection), DT (transferred trip), DP (pole discordance), IT (thermal image). Example: AC is a
two-phase fault in phases A and C.
 Fault type: Indicates the pick up type.
 Trip type: Indicates the trip type.
 Details of units. Indicates the picked up and tripped units. Indicates whether the unit is active “Y” or not “N” for each
logical node available in the unit.
 Pick up. Indicates in <Str> whether the unit is picked up “Y” or not “N”. The data depends on the unit, for example,
for phase A it would be Str.phsA.
 Activation. Indicates in <Op> whether the unit is tripped “Y” or not “N”. The data depends on the unit, for example,
for phase A it would be Str.phsA.
 Active settings. Active settings in the moment of the fault. Indicates the setting file name. It can be accessed to consult
the settings.
Figure 185 PacFactory fault screen

User Manual 317
12.4 INCIDENT REPORT
The unit stores in a queue of 1000 non-simultaneous protection events in a non-volatile memory. Each protection event is
recorded with its date and time, as well as the current and voltage measurements of all the transformers and the frequency.
The protection events can be masked individually, so that only protection events configured by the user are generated.
These enablings are available in the GEN/RSUC node.
The information available in each record is:
 Date: With millisecond precision.

 Information. Within the <Inf> tag the protection event signal number and its status 0 (Deactivation) / 1
(Activation) are indicated. Each protection event record can have up to 16 simultaneous signals.
 Measurements. The trafo measurements at the time of the protection event (module and angle) and frequency
measurement are shown for each of the unit’s transformers.
 The LD models show information of:
 Differential current. Indicates the fundamental value of the three phases.
 Restraint current. Indicates the Restraint current of the three phases
 2° harmonic differential current. Indicates the value of the three phases.
Figure 186 Example of protection event record
<Reg Fecha="15-06-10 21:50:38:792">

<Inf Sen="8426" Status="1"/>
<Inf Sen="8433" Status="0"/>
<Med>
<T1 Mod="0.00" Arg="0.00"/>
<T2 Mod="0.00" Arg="0.00"/>
<T3 Mod="0.00" Arg="0.00"/>
<T4 Mod="0.00" Arg="0.00"/>
<T5 Mod="0.00" Arg="0.00"/>
<T6 Mod="0.00" Arg="38.10"/>
<T7 Mod="31.68" Arg="58.53"/>
<T8 Mod="99.94" Arg="-62.01"/>
<T9 Mod="99.95" Arg="178.00"/>
<T10 Mod="31.67" Arg="58.54"/>
<T11 Mod="99.98" Arg="-62.02"/>
<T12 Mod="99.94" Arg="178.00"/>
<FRE Hz="50.00"/>
</Med>
</Reg>
Figure 187 PacFactory protection event screen

User Manual 318
12.5 HISTORICAL MEASUREMENT REPORT
The unit saves a queue of historical measurement reports in the non-volatile memory. Depending on the registered
measurements, 4000 or 1000 registers are available.
Each record includes the maximum, minimum and average currents of each measurement, calculated within a
programmable time window, detected during a programmable recording period. The measurements are secondary.
The historical measurement report is grouped into records in which the first corresponds to the oldest and the last to most
recent, so that when the file is opened, the first item we see is the oldest.
The format of this file for each record is:
 Record number
 Date: With second precision: Day and Time
 Measurements: Maximum/minimum/average magnitude values:
The settings employed by this unit are in the PROT/MHRE node:
 Sample time window. Indicates the time in minutes during which the average is calculated
 Record interval. Indicates the time in minutes in which each record is created
 Start time. Indicates the time after which the historical measurement record is started
 End time. Indicating the time up to which the historical measurements record is carried out
 Calendar mask. Indicates whether the historical measurements record is created every day (YES) or if it is only
created on the days indicated in the day selection mask.
 Day selection. It indicated, for each day of the week, whether the record was created.
 Register mode27. Selects between standard or extended:
 Standard. It saves 4000 registers, with máximum, mínimum and average of the mean currents and voltages,
real, reactive and apparent power, frequency and external power supply.
 Extended. Extended number of measures. It saves 1000 registers, with máximum, mínimum and average of
the phase and neutral currents, phase voltages, current and voltage sequences, real, reactive and apparent
power, power factor and the result of 10 measurements data logics AutGGIO.AnIn.
The units of the measurements are:
 Current. The units are secondary amps.

 Voltage. The units are secondary volts.
 Real power. The units are secondary watts.
 Reactive power. The units are secondary VAR.
 Apparent power. The units are secondary VA.
 Frequency. Units are Hz.
 External power supply. The units are volts.
27
Available from firmware version 5.19.15.7 and ICD version 6.3.0.0. Previous versions is fixed “Standard”.

User Manual 319
Table 188 Historical measurement settings

SmTmm Sample time window 1 15 1 minutes uint32
RegIntTmm Record interval 1 1440 minutes uint32
StH Start time 0 23 1 uint32
EndH End time 0 23 1 uint32
DayEna Calendar mask YES/NO Boolean
SunEna Selection Sunday YES/NO Boolean
MonEna Selection Monday YES/NO Boolean
TueEna Selection Tuesday YES/NO Boolean
WedEna Selection Wednesday YES/NO Boolean
ThuEna Selection Thursday YES/NO Boolean
FriEna Selection Friday YES/NO Boolean
SatEna Selection Saturday YES/NO Boolean
RegType Register mode Standard / Extended Boolean
Figure 188 Example of records
<REG Num="0" Day="18/04/10" Time="00:00:37">
<I_A Max="0.000" Min="0.000" Media="0.000"/>
<V_V Max="0.000" Min="0.000" Media="0.000"/>
<P_W Max="0.00" Min="0.00" Media="0.00"/>
<Q_VAR Max="0.00" Min="0.00" Media="0.00"/>
<S_VA Max="0.00" Min="0.00" Media="0.00"/>
<f_Hz Max="0.000" Min="0.000" Media="0.000"/>
<Batery_V Max="120.51" Min="120.51" Media="120.51"/>
</REG>
12.6 STATISTICAL DATA REPORT
Displays the statistical data calculated in the unit: currents, action times and counters. It has reset buttons.
The values available are:
 The current statistics are grouped in the <Current> tag and include:
 <ki2> Ki2 accumulated by each of the 3 phases. Each phase can be independently reset to the initial value.
 <Cut> Opened current. Indicates the last (Last) and maximum (Maximum) open current per phase
 <Time> Indicates the time in seconds during which the current has been within specific ranges.
 From 2 to 5 times In
 From 5 to 12.5 times In
 From 12.5 to 20 times In
 From 20 to 40 times In
 The counters are grouped in the <Counters> tag and include:
 <Reclose> Reclosure counter. Indicates the number of reclosures effected, separating them according to
first, second, third and fourth reclosure. There is a command for resetting the counter.
 <Openings>. Opening counter for each of the 3 phases, includes trips and manual openings. There are
commands for resetting each phase's counter and a global counter for all the phases.
 <Trip>. Trip counter for each of the 3 phases. There are commands for resetting each phase's counter and a
global counter for all the phases.

User Manual 320
 <Close>. Closure counter for each of the 3 phases. There are commands for resetting each phase's counter
and a global counter for all the phases.
 The timers are grouped in the <Timers> tag and include:
 <Opening>. Indicates the electric (Electrical) and mechanical (Mechanical) opening times in milliseconds per
phase and the dispersion for each pair of phases.
 <Close>. Indicates the electric (Electrical) and mechanical (Mechanical) closure times in milliseconds per
phase and the dispersion for each pair of phases.
 <Inactivity> Indicates the days of breaker inactivity for each phase.
 Models with two breakers, current, counters and times are independent for each breaker.
 There is a command for the complete reset of each breaker: opening, trip and close counters, ki2, cut current
and times. The reclose counter is not reset.
Figure 189 PacFactory statistics screen
12.7 MAXIMETER/MINIMETER REPORT
Displays the maximum and minimum values integrated in the time. It has buttons to individually reset the maximeters and/or
minimeters.
The Data displayed are:
 Each phase’s current

 Each phase’s voltage
 Real power per phase and total
 Reactive power per phase and total
 Apparent power per phase and total
 Frequency
 External battery measurement

User Manual 321
Figure 190 PacFactory maximeter/minimeter screen
12.8 OSCILLOGRAPHY
The oscillography is stored in binary comtrade format. There is a CFG config file and a DAT data file for each.
For additional information see on “IEEE Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange (COMTRADE) for Power
Systems”.
It allows 16 analogue signals:
 12 analogue inputs from the transformers (current and voltages)

 4 frequency measurements28 (V phase B, V synchronism, frequency 2Va-Vb-Vc, V synchronism 228)
 External battery used as the power supply of the equipment
 LD models show the differential and restraint currents of the three phases.
It allows up to 15028 digital signals, selected among all the signal of the equipment.
The trigger signals are selected among the registered signals, when the set “Trigger Signal” is set to “YES”. If it is set to
“NO”, that signal is registered but does not start the oscillography.
The length is set in cycles (Total Duration), from 20 up to 420 cycles (8,4 seconds for 50Hz and 7 seconds for 60Hz).
Pre-fault duration (cycles) indicates the pre-fault cycles that are stored in each disturbance recorder prior to the trigger,
being able to vary between 1 and 415 cycles.
The number of samples can be selected among 16, 24, 36, 48, 72 or 144. Depending on the device and ICD used, the
number of the samples per cycle is different to adapt to the different devices. The relationship between them is shown in the
following table
28
Available since firmware version 6.0.18.2 and ICD 8.2.0.0. Up to that version there are 100 digital signals and 3 frequencies

User Manual 322
Ajuste Equipos Sampled values Sampled values

Setting29
equivalente convencional 80/ciclo 96/ciclo
Full 144 144 80 96
1 de 2 72 72 40 48
1 de 3 48 48 40 32
1 de 4 36 36 20 24
1 de 6 24 24 20 16
1 de 9 16 16 20 16
The continuous mode allows increasing the length if at the end of the register there is a trigger signal activated. In that case,
the register continues the number of cycles set in the “Total Duration (cycles)”, checking again the trigger signals at the end
of the new register. The total register is limited to 5Mb or 3 times the setting “Total Duration (cycles)” (the most restrictive of
both).
In order for the trigger signal to act, it has to change the status, that is, it has to pass from deactivated to activated. If one
trigger signal is continuously activated, it does not start, nor extend the oscillography register.
The digital signals set to “NO” in the “Trigger signal” setting are displayed, but do not start, nor extend the oscillography
register.
The oscillography allows to display signals that do not start the register. For example, the protection trip signal can initialize
an oscillography register, where the start signals are displayed. Table 189 shows an example of an oscillography
configuration, with 11 digital signals registered but only three signals start the register (General trip, 51 trip and GGIO1
Digital input 1). At the end of the register, if one of these three signals, continues activated, the oscillography is extended the
cycles set in “Total Duration (cycles)”; otherwise the oscillography is finished.
Table 189 Oscillography configuration example
Settings Value
Recorded signal 01 General trip
Trigger Signal 01 YES
Recorded signal 02 General start
Trigger Signal 02 NO
Recorded signal 03 51 start
Recorded signal 04 51 trip
Señal registrada oscilo 05 IOC1 Trip phase A
Recorded signal 06 IOC1 Trip phase B
Recorded signal 07 IOC1 Trip phase C
Recorded signal 08 IOC1 Start phase A
Recorded signal 09 IOC1 Start phase B
Recorded signal 10 IOC1 Start phase C
Recorded signal 11 GGIO1Digital input 1
10Mb of non volatile memory is available to store oscillography registers. The total number of registers depends on the
settings. Table 190 shows some examples of the capacity (with the continuous mode set to “NO”), where the most influential
settings are the length and the number of samples.
29
Available since ICD version 8.1.0.18

User Manual 323
Table 190 Oscillography capacity
Total Duration Number of Number of digital

Number of oscillographys
(cycles) samples/cycle signals
420 144 100 3
420 144 32 3
420 36 100 13
420 36 32 15
50 144 100 27
50 144 32 32
50 36 100 98
50 36 32 121
20 144 100 34
20 144 32 78
20 36 100 206
20 36 32 271
20 16 100 350
20 16 32 499
The settings employed by this unit are in the PROT/RDRE node:
 Total Duration (cycles). Indicates the total duration of disturbance recorder (in cycles).
 Pre-fault duration (cycles). Indicates the pre-fault cycles that are stored in each disturbance recorder
 Number of samples/cycle. Indicates the samples per cycle stored in the disturbance recorder.
 Recorded signal X. Indicates the signal that is stored in record position X. If programmed as -1, no signals are
recorded.
 Trigger X signal. If the signal is configured, it indicates whether it provokes a disturbance recorder pick up (1) or
not (0). If set to “No”, it is only displayed.
The trigger and recorded signals are repeated up to 100 possible signals.
Table 191 Oscillography settings

OscCyc Total Duration (cycles) 20 420 1 cycles Int32
PreCyc Prefault duration (cycles) 1 415 1 cycles Int32
NuSaCy Number of samples/cycle enum
OscReg1 Recorded signal 1 Int32
OscTrg1 Trigger 1 signal 0 1 1 YES/NO Boolean
OscReg2 Recorded signal 2 Int32
OscTrg2 Trigger 2 signal 0 1 1 YES/NO Boolean
Recorded signal and trigger up to
0 1 1 YES/NO Boolean
15028
The disturbance record configuration file (CFG) contains the general disturbance recorder information (Figure 191):
 Total number of analogue and digital channels available in the disturbance recorder.
 Analogue channel data: bay, identification, measurements scaled and limits.
 Digital input data: bay and identification.
 Sample data: signal frequency, sampling frequency, number of the last sample.
 Disturbance recorder start and end dates.
 Data file format
The disturbance recorder data file (DAT) includes the information captured in the disturbance recorder, with the following
available for each sample:
 Sample number
 Sample time
 Analogue samples values
 Digital signals values

User Manual 324
The name of the file uses the standard IEEE C37.232-2007, using the fields:
Start Date, Start Time, Time Code, Station Identifier, Device Identifier, Company Name
For example, “20100626, 46702262,+2h30t,Substation,Rele1,Ingeteam”, which means:
 Start Date: Trip date with a 4-character format for the year, the month and the day. For example, 26/june/2010
would be 20100626.
 Start Time: Indicates the milliseconds since 00:00 of the day, that is, milliseconds since midnight.
 Time Code: Indicates the time zone amplitude sign, and can indicate minutes if necessary. For example, “t +2”
indicates time zone 2, while “+2 h30t” indicates that the time zone is 2 hours 30 minutes.
 Station Identifier. Indicates the substation name. The installation’s short name (InsShNam) from the
“PROT/LPHD1” node is used".
 Device Identifier. Indicates the unit’s name. The relay’s short name (RelShNam) from the “PROT/LPHD1” node is
used".
 Company Name. Indicates the name of unit’s manufacturer, in this case, Ingeteam.
Figure 191 Configuration file

USB ACCESS 
13. USB ACCESS

The unit can be accessed via the front USB to retrieve reports and CID from the device and to load a new CID or a firmware
update.
The USB port can be configured from the local HMI (Menu: Password -> USB Configuration).
The configuration options are:
 Without password: No password is needed.

 With password: The local HMI password must be entered before any USB operation.
 Disabled: The USB port is disabled.
13.1 DOWNLOADING REPORTS
When a pendrive is inserted, the following appears in the front above the current screen, indicating that the device has been
detected:
USB Detected
The unit’s reports are automatically dumped onto the pendrive.
While the data is being downloaded, the following appears in the front above the current screen:
USB Detected
Downloading data
Just in case there is a CID, an ICD or and IID in the pendrive, the user will be asked for a confirmation to load this file i nto
the unit.
WANT TO START
THE CID UPDATE
CANCEL
ACCEPT
PRESS ENTER: RUN

OPTION
If accepted, the following appears on the screen:
USB Detected
Downloading data
If canceled, downloading is assumed to be complete, and the following appears on the screen for 5 seconds:
REMOVE THE
USB DEVICE

User Manual 326
USB ACCESS 
As of this moment, the pendrive can be removed.
Only the reports existent in the unit at the time of the download will appear in the pendrive, with the data structure:
 Root with the short installation and relay name (PROT/LPHD node), and the iedName, separated by “_”·, i.e.,
“Instalacion_Rele_iedName”
 COMTRADE. This directory contains the disturbance recorders generated in the unit
 FAULT RECORDS. This directory contains the fault records generated in the unit.
 The rest of the unit’s reports are dependent on the root:
 Maximetro.xml
 Sucesos.xml
 Informe_Estadisticos.xml
 Registro.xml
 CID
For detailed information about these reports, see Chapter 10, “DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS
”.
Figure 192 USB Tree
13.2 LOADING CID
When a pendrive is inserted into the front USB port, a check is run to see if an ICD exists. If there is an ICD, it is copied into
the directory “public/SCL/notvalidated” in order that it may be operative in the unit.
During the search for the ICD, the existence of a file with an ICD, icd, CID, cid, IID or iid extension is checked. There is not a
established filename as only the extension is checked.
If there is more than one file with one of the indicated extensions, the ICD is considered invalid and not ICD is captured.
13.3 LOADING FIREWALL CONFIGURATION
When a pendrive is inserted into the front USB port, a check is run to see if a firewall configuration file exists. In that case, it
is copied into the directory “public/SCL/notvalidated” in order that it may be operative in the unit.
During the search, the existence of a file with “fwc” extension is checked. There is not a established filename as only the
extension is checked.
If there is more than one file with one of the indicated extensions, the file is considered invalid and not captured.

User Manual 327
USB ACCESS 
13.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE
For firmware update via USB, a USB flash drive must be inserted in the front USB port, with a "FW" directory with a valid
firmware file.
In the local display, the user will be prompted for a confirmation to start the update. It is very important that during the
process of updating firmware the device is not turned off since in that case the device could become unusable.
After the update the device will restart automatically and the result of the update can be consulted either in the device
versions screen or in the latest updates screen (consult display section).
13.5 USB ENABLING
To increase the security of the device, the USB port can be disabled, preventing access to the device via USB. With the
USB disabled, ICD and firmware loading and data download of the equipment are not allowed.
USB enable / disable can only be performed from the display (consult display section). It is done from the Password screen.
The setting will have 3 possible values:
 Disabled: USB is not available.

 With Password: USB processing is available but you need to enter the password of the settings menu.
 Without Password: USB processing is available without the need to enter a password.

User Manual 328
FTP ACCESS
14. FTP ACCESS

The public user for ftp access is as follows:
 User: ftpuser
 Password: ftpuser
From firmware version 5.25.16.1 the device implements a sFTP access for secure connections as follows:
 User: sftpuser
 Password: sftpuser
The passwords can be modified from the local display or from the software tool pacFactory.
These user profiles allows direct access to the following directorys and files:
Config directory:
 config/SYSTEM_LOG: Text files with system information.

 CIDupdates.log: Log of events of the CID files received.
 swupdates.log: Log of events of the firmware upddates.
 System.log: Los of system information events.
 Versions.log: Versions of the device.
 ftp.log: Log of events of the FTP access (available from firmware version 5.25.16.1)
 config/VALIDATION_TRACES: Text files with the received CIDs validation information.

 log_lib850.log: Log of events related with the IEC 61850 parser.
 validation_traces.log: Los of events of general parser.
LD directory:
 LD/PROT/COMTRADE: Oscilografy files in Comtrade format.

 LD/PROT/FAULT_RECORDS: Fault report files.
 LD/PROT/FAULT_SETTINGS: Settings files associated with fault reports.
SCL directory:
 SCL/NotValidated: Directory to copy the new CID file to configure the device.
 SCL/Validated: Directory with the active CID configuracion file (read only).
The user for ftp firmware update is as follows:
 User: ftpUpdat
 Password: ftpUpdat
With this user you can access the directory "downloads" where a valid firmware file should be copied. Once the file is copied the
update will start automatically.
It is very important that during the process of updating firmware the device is not turned off since in that case the device could
become unusable.
After the update the device will restart automatically and the result of the update can be consulted either in the device versions
screen or in the latest updates screen (consult display section).

User Manual 329
FTP ACCESS
14.1 ACCESS CONTROL
From firmware version 5.25.16.1 the device incorporates a failed access management so that, in the event of 5 consecutive
attempts to establish a connection with a wrong password, the access to the user is blocked for 10 minutes.
The goal is to make it harder for attacks called "brute-force attacks" to recover a key by testing all possible combinations
until it finds the one that allows access.
There is a signal on GEN/LLN0 indicating the activation of this block of the FTP access.
 AccAlm: FTP access alarm. Active when access control is blocking a user.
In addition, all accesses are registered in a log file located in the \ config \ SYSTEM_LOG folder called ftp.log.
In this file, the accesses of any FTP client are recorded, indicating the source IP address and the date and time. Any
uploads or downloads of files are also recorded.

User Manual 330
MAPPING THE UNIT’S SIGNALS, MEASUREMENTS AND
METERS
15. MAPPING THE UNIT’S SIGNALS, MEASUREMENTS AND

METERS
All the signals (trips, logics, hw check, digital inputs-outputs, etc.), measurements and meters that are generated in the unit are
identified by a number that appears in the sAddress of each of these elements.
15.1 SIGNALS
The distribution of the unit’s signals is effected using four numbers as a base: 0, 8192, 16384, 24576. All the unit’s signals
are divided into four types, taking these four digits as references:
15.1.1 Type A signals

This type of signal refers to all those signals with sAddress identification numbers between digits 0 and 8191.
These signals include digital inputs and Goose signals.
 Digital Inputs
 Identification number between 0 and 287.
Example: sAddr="S,0,5,0;TX1:GGIO1.Digital input 6,TX2:GGIO1.Digital Input
6,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of digital input number six from the first card in
the ICD sAddress.
 GEN/GGIO node
 Goose Signals
 In turn, the Goose signals are divided into RIO modules and LGOS nodes.
 RIO modules
Example: sAddr="GS,0,288,0;TX1:RIO1.St,TX2:RIO1.St,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first signal from the first RIO module in the
ICD sAddress.
 GEN/RIO node
 LGOS nodes
Example: sAddr="GS,0,608,0;TX1:LGOS1.St,TX2:LGOS1.St,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.1"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first signal from the first LGOS node in the
ICD sAddress.
 GEN/LGOS node
Therefore, the distribution of these signals based on their identification number is as follows:

User Manual 331
METERS
Table 192 Type A signal mapping
DIGITAL
INPUTS
(0 - 287)
GOOSE
SIGNALS
(288 - 1695)
The number of this type of signal reserved in the unit is 1696.
15.1.2 Type B signals

This type of signal includes type B protection signals, fast protection logic signals and fast control logic signals.
 Type B protection signals

Example: sAddr="S,0,9091,0;TX1:TOC1 Phase trip,TX2:TOC1 Phase Trip,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of a type B protection signal in the ICD
sAddress.
 PROT node
 Fast protection logics
Example: sAddr="PS,0,9216,0;TX1:Protection logic 1,TX2:Protection logic 1,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.0"
 n the example, we can see the identification number of the first protection logic in the ICD sAddress.
 GEN/pGGIO node
 Fast control logics
Example: sAddr="LS,0,9344,0;TX1:Fst logic 1,TX2:Fast logic 1,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first fast control logic in the ICD sAddress.
 CTRL/AutGGIO2 node
 Additional type B protection signals
 PROT node

User Manual 332
METERS
Table 193.Type B signal mapping
PROTECTION SIGNALS
TYPE B
(8192 - 9215)
FAST PROTECTION LOGIC

SIGNALS
(9216 - 9343)
FAST CONTROL LOGIC

SIGNALS
.
(9344 - 9471)
ADDITIONAL
PROTECTION SIGNALS
TYPE B
(9472 -10367)
15.1.3 Type C signals

These signals include the type C protection signals.
 Type C protection signals

Example: sAddr="S,0,16384,0;TX1:Recloser in service,TX2:,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first type C protection signal in the ICD
sAddress.
 PROT node

User Manual 333
METERS
Table 194.Type C signal mapping
TYPE C
PROTECTION
SIGNALS
(16384 -
16799)
15.1.4 Type D signals

This type of signal refers to all those signals with sAddress identification numbers between digits 24576 and higher.
This type of signal includes the type D protection signals, the communication failure signals for all the bays that are
connected to the unit, the slow logic control signals and signals resulting from orders.
 Type D protection signals

Example: sAddr="S,0,24576,0;TX1:Relay in service,TX2:OnLine,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first type D protection signal in the ICD
sAddress.
 PROT node
 Communication failure control signals
 Slow control logics
Example: sAddr="LS,0,25120,0;TX1:Slow logic 1,TX2:Slow logic 1,AC:1.2,ED:1.1,AD:0.0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first slow control logic in the ICD
sAddress.
 Signals resulting from orders
 Example: sAddr=" RS,0,26908,4;TX1:CSWI4 opClsOr,TX2:,AC:3.7.8.4,ED:1.1.1.1,AD:0.0.0.0"

User Manual 334
METERS
Table 195 Type D signal mapping
TYPE D PROTECTION SIGNALS

(24576 - 24991)
CONTROL SIGNALS (COM FAILURE)

(24992 - 25119)
SLOW LOGIC CONTROL SIGNALS

(25120 - 26399)
SIGNALS RESULTING FROM

ORDERS
(26400 - 26911)
15.2 MEASUREMENTS
All the unit's measurements are divided into four types:
 Protection measurements.
Example: sAddr="M,0,124,1;TX1:I average,TX2: AVERAGE I"
In the example, we can see the identification number of a protection measurement in the ICD sAddress.
 Additional measurements: Identification number between 744 and 948.
 PROT node
 Goose Measurements
Example: sAddr="GM,0,300,0"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first Goose measurement in the ICD sAddress.
 GEN/LGOS node
 Measurements resulting from logics
Example: sAddr="LM,0,556,0;TX1:Logic measurement 1,TX2:Logic analog 1"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first logic measurement in the ICD sAddress.

User Manual 335
METERS
 Measurements resulting from analogical input boards

Example: sAddr="M,0,688,0;TX1:Measure 1,TX2:Measure 1"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first measurement in the ICD sAddress.
 GEN/GGIO node
Therefore, the distribution of these measurements based on their identification number is as follows:
Table 196 Measurement mapping
PROTECTION MEASUREMENTS
(0 - 299)
GOOSE MEASUREMENTS
(300 - 555)
MEASURERMENTS RESULTING FROM CONTROL LOGICS

(556 - 687)
MEASURERMENTS RESULTING FROM ANALOGICAL

INPUT BOARDS
(688 - 743)
ADDITIONAL
PROTECTION MEASUREMENTS
(744 - 948)
The number of measurements reserved in the unit is 949.
15.3 COUNTERS
All the unit's counters are divided into two types:
 Protection counters
Example: sAddr="C,0,0;TX1:Active energy out,TX2:Active Energy Out"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first protection counter in the ICD sAddress.
 Additional protection counters: Identification number between 150 and 176.
 PROT node
 Counters resulting from logics

User Manual 336
METERS

Example: sAddr="LC,0,32;TX1:Logic counter 1,TX2:Logic counter 1"
In the example, we can see the identification number of the first logic counter in the ICD sAddress.
Therefore, the distribution of these counters based on their identification number is as follows:
Table 197 Counter mapping
PROTECTION COUNTERS
(0 - 31)
COUNTERS RESULTING FROM CONTROL LOGICS

(32 - 149)
ADDITIONAL
PROTECTION COUNTERS
(150 - 176)
The number of counters reserved in the unit is 177.

User Manual 337
LOGICS
16. LOGICS
This document explains the operating mode of the logics generation tool of logic devices.
The EF family’s logics are fragments of executable code generated by the user using a PC tool, both in text and graphic
formats. These logics can be defined in an IED’s data model (using iedFactory) or in a particular instance (using
substationFactory or the pacFactory settings tool).
There are two different types of logics: control logics and protection logics.
In this chapter the device logics are defined and an introduction to the configuration options is presented. For more details about
the logics configuration consult the user manual of the software configuration tool (pacFactory / energyFactorySuite).
16.1 CONTROL LOGICS
The logics can be used to customize the behaviour of an IED. For example, automatism can be added or calculations
between different magnitudes can be carried out.
The logics are run in two different tasks, each with different priorities: one for fast logics and one for slow logics.
The running time for the fast logics is 2 milliseconds. The running time for the slow logics is approximately 10 milliseconds,
although given that this is a lower priority task it may occasionally be affected by other higher priority tasks.
Each configured logic must be included in one of these two tasks, in accordance with the manner in which they are to be run
– fast logics or slow logics.
To edit a control logic from substationFactory, the user must select the corresponding IED and click on the editor icon. To
edit the control logic from pacFactory, click on the "Logics" option in the “Configuration” menu or in the side menu.
The logics are defined in program blocks called POU (program organization unit). Two of the languages defined in the IEC-
61131-3 standard are offered for the creation of each POU: one textual (ST) and one graphic (FBD).
The POUs can be defined at different levels, both in the model and in an instantiation: at the IED level, at the logical device
(LD) level or at the logical node (LN) level.
There are three types of POU, as defined in the IEC-61131-3 standard: PROGRAM, FUNCTION_BLOCK and FUNCTION.
The programs are the senior hierarchy POUs, with each one corresponding to a task to be run on the device. Each
PROGRAM can refer to several FUNCTION_BLOCK and FUNCTION. In turn, a FUNCTION_BLOCK can refer to one or
more FUNCTION.
At the IED level, two PROGRAM corresponding to the two above tasks are automatically defined: one for the fast logics
(FastLog) and the other for the slow logics (SlowLog). These PROGRAM cannot be deleted nor can their names be
modified. New PROGRAM cannot be created at any level, either.
All the new signals, measurements and counters that are created in the data model must be assigned a number that
appears in the sAddress of each of these elements.
The range values are:
 Fast control logics signals: Value between 9344 and 9471.

 Slow control logics signals: Value between 25120 and 26399.
 Measurements: Value between 556 and 687.
 Counters: Value between 32 and 149.

User Manual 338
LOGICS
16.2 PROTECTION LOGICS
The various protection functions can be configured by means of settings associated to the unit’s internal signals, vg
enablings or blocks. The protection functions treat these signals as inputs, although they do not modify their value. In order
to assign them a value, the protection logics are used.
The protection logics have two main differences in relation to the control logics:
 The result of a protection logic is always a Boolean value, to be assigned in one of the protection function's
settings.
 The protection logic editor has been simplified to facilitate the programming of this type of logic.
The number of available logics is defined by the unit’s data model.
Each logic signal has a value obtained from an associated logic. These logics are fragments of code created in one of the
two possible languages - ST (text) or FBD (graphic). The corresponding language must be selected when a logic
corresponding to a signal is edited for the first time.
Each protection logic is independent from the rest and need not be included in a POU in order to be run. When a protection
logic is saved in the editor, an attempt is made to compile the information. If no error is found, a call to the logic in question is
automatically generated so that the logic is run when a CID (configured IED description) message is sent to the device or
sent from pacFactory.
The protection logics are run every 2 milliseconds, as are the fast control logics.
To edit a protection logic from substationFactory, the user must select the corresponding logic signal and click on the editor
icon. This icon has three statuses to indicate the status of the corresponding logic:
Icon Logic statuses:
No logic has been edited for this signal. The value of the signal will be 0
(false).
Logic edited and ready to be run.
Logic edited, but with errors. Logic will not be run.
The following image shows a detail of the expander with four signals with logic signals of different statuses:
Details of the expander with protection logic signals
To edit a protection logic from pacFactory, click on the "Protection Logics" option in the “Configuration” menu or in the side
menu.
A screen with a list of the available protection logic signals, along with the logic’s status icon and an access button for each
logic’s editor, will be shown.

User Manual 339
LOGICS
Details of the protection logics list in pacFactory
16.3 DATABASE SIGNALS
All of the IED’s database signals, measurements, meters and commands can be accessed as readings from the logics (the
data model’s basic data with valid sAddress). There is a set of data within this database that can be modified from the
control logics:
Signal type Description
Critical signals Digital signals that can be modified from the fast task (FastLog)
Digital signals that can be modified from the slow task
Non-critical signals
(SlowLog)
Measurements Floating point data that can be modified from both tasks
Meters Whole numbers that can modified from both tasks
Commands Commands can only be generated from the slow task (SlowLog)
Both the data’s value and its quality can be accessed. If data is modifiable from the logic, the same will apply to the value
and the quality.
The data that can be modified from the logic may be preset in the unit's data model or they can be configured in the
engineering phase.
Only the status of the signal to which the logic in question is associated can be modified from the protection logics.

User Manual 340
IEC 61850 COMMANDS
17. IEC 61850 COMMANDS
17.1 RUNNING IEC 61850 COMMANDS
Commands can be issued for controllable elements (elements whose functional constraint is “CO”) that may
belong to different Data classes (detailed in IEC 61850-7-3). Control class model implemented by the IED are:
 Controllable single point (SPC)

 Controllable double point (DPC)
 Controllable enumerated status (ENC)
The device implements the following services defined by IEC 61850 standard:
 Select (Sel) / SelectWithValue (SelVal)

 Cancel
 Operate (Oper)
 CommandTermination (CmdTerm)
The structure required to operate the command has the following fields:
 CtlVal. Command value. The type will be different, in accordance with element’s the CDC (Common
Data Class).
 Origin. It includes information about the origin of the command, divided into two fields:
 orCat. Origin category. Indicates the type of origin that issues the command (local, substation,
remote command, etc.)
 orIdent. Octect string that allows the identification of the command origin.
 CtlNum. It is the sequence number of the command.
 T: The timestamp when the command was generated.
 Test: It defines whether the control service request is going to be used with test purposes or not.
 Check: Delimits the kind of checkup that must be performed to the command before running it.
Because the Ingepac EF device implements edition 2 of the IEC61850 standard but maintains compatibility with
the existing configurations of edition 1, the differences in the data used to track orders are explained below:
In addition to informing of the changes in the status signals of the elements on which the commands are to
be run, the reports also provide information on the changes in the status of the two data associated with
the command process itself: OpOpnOr and OpClsOr.
These data have four possible statuses:
Table 198 OpOpnOr and OpClsOr statuses
Value Explanation enum

STANDBY Command in standby 0
IN PROGRESS Command in process 1
SUCCESSFUL Command run successfully 2
UNSUCCESSFUL Failure in running of command 3
For opening commands in general, OpClsOr remains in STANDBY, the sequence for OpOpnOr would be
STANDBY - IN PROGRESS - SUCCESSFUL / UNSUCCESSFUL – STANDBY. In the case of a closure
command, OpOpnOr would remain in standby and OpClsOr would continue the complete sequence. If the
command’s CtlModel indicates that the command has normal security, no return information is available
from the device and, therefore, the sequence would be STANDBY - IN PROGRESS – STANDY.
User Manual 341
CONFIGURACIONES USING ED2:
In the second edition of IEC61850 standard, three new data elements are defined in order to follow the
command process: opOk, OpRcvd and tOpOk. These new elements have a new functional constraint,
“OR”.
OpRcvd is activated upon the reception of a command and deactivated about 10 milliseconds later.
OpOk is activated at the same time as the command pulse (the pulse that will afterwards be transmitted to
a digital output, for example) and tOpOk shows the timestamp when opOk was activated.
OpOk and OpRcvd may be set as RS signals, editing their sAddr in the CID using the configuration tool.
In this way, their values will be refreshed in the internal database and will be available for internal logics.
In addition to these elements, it is also possible to generate a series of indications, through signals from
the database, to provide complementary information on the return of the orders.
In the logical nodes where it is necessary to have this return information of the controls, the normative
class has been extended defining the following data objects with CDC = "ACT", which in turn includes the
optional data "originSrc".
 OpOpnPrg / OpClsPrg: Execution of opening and closing controls (order in progress).

 OpOpnFail / OpClsFail: Failure of opening and closing controls (command failure).
The configuration for the use of these return signals is done through the configuration tool, through the
sAddr field of the command itself. However, the return signals have an RS type sAddr.
In both configurations, upon completion of an order execution, part 7-2 of the IEC 61850 standard defines the
possible reasons for termination. The following table lists the AddCause values used by the device:
Table 199 AddCause considered
Value Cause Explanation enum

Unknown Unknown cause Command not successful due to unknown causes 0
Not-Supported Not configured 1
Blocked-by-switching- Not successful since one of the downstream Loc switches like in CSWI has
Blocked by hierarchy 2
hierarchy the value TRUE
Select-failed Selection failure Cancelled due to an unsuccessful selection (select service) 3
Control action is aborted due to invalid switch position (Pos in XCBR or
Invalid-position Invalid position 4
XSWI)
Position-reached Position reached Switch is already in the intended position (Pos in XCBR or XSWI) 5
Parameter-change-in- Parameter change in
Control action is blocked due to running parameter change 6
execution execution
Control action is blocked, because the LN (CSWI or XCBR/XSWI) is in a
Blocked-by-Mode 8
mode (Mod) which does not allow any switching
Blocked-by- Block signal Control action is blocked due to interlocking of switching devices (in CILO
10
interlocking activated attribute EnaOpn.stVal=“FALSE” or EnaCls.stVal=“FALSE”
Command-already-in- Command in Control service or cancel is rejected, because control action is already
12
execution execution running
Health signal Control action is blocked due to some internal event that prevents a
Blocked-by-health 13
activated successful operation (Health)
Control action is blocked, because another control action in a domain (for
1-of-n-control 1 of n block example, substation) is already running (in any XCBR or XSWI, the 14
DPC.stSeld=“TRUE”).
Abortion-by-cancel Command cancelled Control action is aborted due to cancel service 15
Time-limit-over Time exceeded Control action is terminated due to exceed of some time limit 16
Object not selected Object not selected Control action is rejected, since object is not selected 18
Object-already- Object already Select action is not executed, because the addressed object is already
19
selected selected selected
Abortion-by- Abortion by Control action is aborted due to the loss of connection with the client that
23
communication-loss communication loss issued the control
None Command accepted Control action successfully executed 25
Inconsistent- Inconsistent
The parameters between successive control services are not consistent 26
parameters parameters
Locked-by-other- Locked by other
Another client has already reserved the objet 27
client client

User Manual 342
On the other hand, the operating mode of a specific command is defined by the ctlModel configuration parameter
associated with that command, according to the following table:
Table 200 Possible ctlModel
Value Explanation enum

The object is not controllable, only the services that apply to a status object are supported. The
status-only 0
attribute ctlVal does not exist.
direct-with-normal-
Direct control with normal security according to IEC 61850-7-2. 1
security
sbo-with-normal-security SBO control with normal security according to IEC 61850-7-2. 2
direct-with-enhanced-
Direct control with enhanced security according to IEC 61850-7-2. 3
security
sbo-with-enhanced-
SBO control with enhanced security according to IEC 61850-7-2. 4
security
Other configuration parameters that determine the progress of the command are:
 PulseConfig. This data structure defines the command’s output pulse type (pulse, duration, pulse
train). The command is not terminated until the last pulse ends.
 OperTimeOut. Maximum switching time, after which, failure occurs if the command has not been
successfully executed.
 sboTimeout. The time during which the command selection remains activated.
In the following sections, the operation process of a command depending on the ctlModel is described in detail.

User Manual 343
17.1.1 DIRECT_WITH_NORMAL_SECURITY (1)
If the command’s ctlModel is DIRECT_WITH_NORMAL_SECURITY (1), the process to follow will be as shown in
the following figure:
Figure 193 Direct command process with normal security
IEC 61850 Client IEC 61850 Process

Server
Operate
Checkup for
operation
Origin, blocks…
Operate
Response
Upon receiving a request to run a command by an Operate Request, the device analyses the validity of the
request, checking the client’s authorization and any possible blocks, and responds positively or negatively by an
Operate Response to the client. If the response is positive, the command is sent to the device.
17.1.2 SBO_WITH_NORMAL_SECURITY (2)
If the command’s ctlModel is SBO_WITH_NORMAL_SECURITY (2), the process is similar, but including a
selection prior to execution:
Figure 194 Command process with select before operate and normal security

Server
Select
Checkup for
selection
Origin,
selection…
Select
Response
Operate Checkup for

operation
Origin, blocks…
Operate
Response

User Manual 344
In this case, after receiving a selection request the selection's permission is checked and, when applicable, a
positive response is sent. At that moment a timer starts. This timer will cancel the selection after the sboTimeOut
timeout ends. If an operate request is received before the conclusion of the timeout, the same process as
described for the direct commands with normal security is followed.
If the selection is not accepted, the response will be negative and the process is concluded.
17.1.3 DIRECT_WITH_ENHANCED_SECURITY (3)

When the command’s ctlModel is DIRECT_WITH_ENHANCED_SECURITY (3), the process starts exactly as the
direct commands with normal security, as shown in the diagram below:
Figure 195 Direct command process with enhanced security

Server
Operate
Checkup for
operation
Origin, blocks…
Operate
Response
Command
Termination
After sending the operate request to the device, the return information of the element on which the command is
executed is expected, so that the device can inform the client throught a Command Termination if the operation
has been successfully executed.
If the device’s return information is received before the conclusion of the operTimeout (the maximum execution
time) and the position requested has been reached, the IED then sends to the client a positive Command
Termination.
If the operTimeout time is exceeded without having received the information from the device, or if it is received but
the position requested has not been reached, the Command Termination will be negative. In this case, the cause
of the failure of the command will be included in the AddCause field.
17.1.4 SBO_WITH_ENHANCED_SECURITY (4)
The ctlModel SBO_WITH_ENHANCED_SECURITY (4) includes, in addition to the enhanced security process of
the commands modelled as DIRECT_WITH_ENHANCED_SECURITY, the SelectWithValue service in order to
select the command before operate. In this way, it is verified that the value sent in the selection process is the
same as the one sent during the execution. The scheme to be followed is:

User Manual 345
Figure 196 Command process with select before operate and enhanced security
IEC 61850 Client 61850 Server Process

Select
Checkup for
selection
Origin,
Select selection…
Response
Operate
Checkup for
operation
Operate Origin, blocks…
Response
Command
Terminationn
Similarly to direct orders with enhanced security, if the order fails, the cause of the failure is reported in the
AddCause field.

User Manual 346
17.2 COMMAND BLOCKS
The commands sent to the device can be blocked for different reasons in which the execution cannot be allowed.
In part 7-2, of the IEC 61850 standard, the possible reasons for failure of a command are detailed.
The following subsections describe the different blocks implemented by the device.
IMPORTANT NOTE: The order of these sections matches exactly with the order of blocking verification
that the IED follows. So once a block is applied, the command will not prosper and next blocks will not be
checked.
17.2.1 Command blocks by inconsistent parameters

The parameters of the command are checked to ensure that there have been no changes to them.
This block only affects commands with ctlModel SBO_WITH_ENHANCED_SECURITY (4) that are performed
through the SelectWithValue service.
The reason for command failure when this block is generated is "inconsistent parameters" (AddCause = 26).
17.2.2 Command blocks by switching hierarchy

The next possible cause of locking a command is switching hierarchy blocking (AddCause = 2). The IED
implements a hierarchy of commands that implies the blocking of the orders according to their origin and the
configuration of the device.
In the standard IEC 61850, part 7-3, it is defined the possible origins of a command that are affected by
blockages due to the switching hierarchy.
 "not-supported": Only accepted in the mode that the order hierarchy is not handled.
 "remote-control": corresponds to a remote origin.
 "station-control" or "maintenance": corresponds to a console.
 "bay-control": corresponds to a console at bay / local level or to the display.
 "automatic-bay", "automatic-static" or "automatic-remote". By default, orders sent by
IEC61850 with these origins are allowed, except for the modes that strictly check the local
origin of the order (LRMode, Edition 2 and Exclusive Edition 2).
Under the section "Command blocks by interlocking" it is explained the particular operation
for these origins in H automation architectures.
 "process": Commands with this origin are not accepted in any case. The process source is
reserved for changes in the state of control elements that do not come from commands. If
there is a change in a signal associated with a command but the change of state has not
been a consequence of an order, but a spontaneous change, the order orCat will be written
to "PROCESS".
The "Remote/Local Type" setting determines how the device will behave at the moment of blocking the
commands by hierarchy. It is found in the data model as "GEN/LLN0.LRmode" or in the display under
"General configuration: Remote / Local Type". The following values are available:
Table 201. Available values for LRMode
LRmode Numeric Value

Not treated 0
Iberdrola 1
Exclusive 2
No HMI 3
ExclusiveBR 4
Edition2 5
ExclusiveEd2 6

User Manual 347

Depending on the mode selected, it can be taken into account the status of the signals
GEN/LLN0.RemCtlBlk (remote control signal status) and GEN/LLN0.Lockey (HMI signal status).
To interpret the tables in the next sections with edition 1 configurations, it is necessary to consider the first
columns according to the following relation:
 Loc = RemCtlBlk
 LocSta = Lockey
In any case, for these configurations, as the data model specific to ICD Ed2 is required, any LRMode
associated with Edition 2 is not available.

Depending on the mode selected, the MltLev setting of the LLN0 of the logical device GEN can be taken
into account, as well as the status of the Loc and LocSta signals.
MltLev is a boolean setting that can be found in the data model in "GEN/LLN0.MltLev", and indicates if
more than one level (Originator) has the switching authority. This setting only applies to Edition2 and
ExclusiveEd2 modes.
Loc is a boolean status signal ("GEN/LLN0.Loc.stVal"). It shows the local status, which is unique for the
device, so all the Loc signals show always the same status (the standard defines this signal in several
nodes with configured commands). To be able to modify this state, we have two options:
 Sending a command on the RemCtlBlk ("GEN/LLN0.RemCltBlk") element. This way, every

Loc signal will be set to the same value as "GEN/LLN0.RemCltBlk.stVal".
 Configuring the LogInLR setting ("GEN/LLN0.LogInLR") to a valid signal reference, so that
this signal status stablishes the value of every Loc. It is important to note that this setting
predominates over sending the command to the RemCtlBlk element explained in the
previous point. Therefore, when this setting is configured the command over the RemCtlBlk
element is not allowed.
LocSta is a boolean status signal ("GEN/LLN0.LocSta.stVal"). Its status shows if station or remote origins
are accepted, and as in the case of Loc, it is unique for the device although it may exist in several logical
nodes. To modify the status of LocSta, a command on the controllable LocSta element
"GEN/LLN0.LocSta" can be issued. Every LocSta element in the device will show the same status value.
The operating characteristics of each of the LRmode values are detailed in the following points:
 LRMode: Not treated
No switching hierarchy blocking on commands is applied. It is the only mode that allows commands
from the "not-supported" origin.
 LRMode: Iberdrola
The status of Loc and LocSta signals is taken into account. The following tables show for each
combination whether the order is blocked or allowed, depending on the origin of the order.
Table 202. Command blocks by switching hierarchy on mode "Iberdrola"
Loc LocSta Bay Station Remote

(1) (1) allowed blocked blocked
(1) (0) allowed allowed blocked
(0) (1) blocked blocked allowed

User Manual 348
Table 203. Command blocks by switching hierarchy for RemCtlBlk on mode "Iberdrola"

Table 204. Command blocks by switching hierarchy for LocSta on mode "Iberdrola"

(0) (1) blocked blocked blocked
 LRMode: Exclusive
This mode of operation implies that when activating the status of the RemCtlBlk (associated with Loc),
the activation of the value of the LocSta signal is automatically generated. Deactivation is independent.
The status of Loc and LocSta signals is taken into account in this mode.
Because the activation of the RemCtlBlk signal triggers the activation of the LocSta, in the "Exclusive"
LRMode, it is not possible to reach the Loc = 1 and LocSta = 0 state from the table’s origins. It is only
possible to reach this value after a LRMode change or using "automatic" origin, however, the behavior
is exactly the same as for Loc = 1 and LocSta = 1.
Table 205. Command blocks by switching hierarchy on mode "Exclusive"

(0) (0) blocked allowed blocked
Table 206. Command blocks by switching hierarchy for RemCtlBlk on mode "Exclusive"

Table 207. Command blocks by switching hierarchy for LocSta on mode "Exclusive"

 LRMode: No HMI
Only the status of the Loc signal is taken into account. The following table shows for each combination
whether the command is blocked or allowed, depending on the origin.

User Manual 349
Table 208. Command blocks by switching hierarchy on mode "No HMI"
Loc Bay Station Remote

(1) allowed blocked blocked
(0) blocked allowed allowed
Table 209. Command blocks by switching hierarchy for RemCtlBlk on mode "No HMI"
Loc Bay Station Remote

* The LocSta table has not been included because is not used in this mode. As clarification, it is only
possible to modify it from Station origin.
 LRMode: ExclusiveBR
This is a particular case of the "Exclusive" LRMode mode. This LRMode differs in that the LocSta
variable is not activated automatically when the RemCtlBlk is activated and it is possible to modify the
LocSta if the equipment is in local mode (Loc = 1) from the same origin (bay-control).
The following tables show for each combination whether the order is blocked or allowed, depending on
the origin of the order.
Table 210. Command blocks by switching hierarchy on mode "ExclusiveBR"

Table 211. Command blocks by switching hierarchy for RemCtlBlk on mode "ExclusiveBR"

Table 212. Command blocks by switching hierarchy for LocSta on mode "ExclusiveBR"

 LRMode: Edition2
Only for Edition 2 configurations. If LRMode is "Edition2", the normative hierarchies of commands
described in Part 7-4 of Edition 2 of IEC61850 standard (Annex B) apply.
This implies that the local origin of the command is considered strictly, so that if Loc = 1, no command
(nor selection) from IEC61850 communications is accepted regardless of what is indicated in the origin
field (even if it is a bay-level console and commands with 'bay-control' origin). Therefore, when the
equipment is in local mode (Loc = 1) only commands sent from display or logic are accepted.

User Manual 350
In this mode, the MltLev setting of the LLN0 of the logical device GEN, as well as the status of Loc and
LocSta signals, is used to determine if a command is required to be blocked by switching hierarchy.
The following table shows for each combination whether the command is blocked or allowed,
depending on the origin. This table affects all orders, including RemCtlBlk and LocSta.
Table 213. Command blocks by switching hierarchy on mode "Edition2"
MltLev Loc LocSta Bay Station Remote

(0) (1) (1) allowed* blocked blocked
(0) (0) (1) blocked allowed blocked
(0) (0) (0) blocked blocked allowed

(1) (0) (1) allowed* allowed blocked
(1) (0) (0) allowed* allowed allowed
* The local origin is checked strictly: Only display or logics.
 LRMode: ExclusiveEd2
Only for Edition 2 configurations. If the LRMode is set to "ExclusiveEd2", the command switching
hierarchy blocks are the same as in the "Edition2" case, except for the commands over the LocSta and
RemCtlBlk.
When operating a command on these two elements, the verification of the local origin is not strict, that
is, commands received from IEC61850 communications with origin 'bay-control' or 'automatic' sources
are allowed.
The following tables show the behavior of the switching hierarchy blocks on these two orders:
Table 214. Command blocks by switching hierarchy for RemCtlBlk on mode "ExclusiveEd2"

NOTE: MtlLev is not included as it does not modify the table.
Table 215. Command blocks by switching hierarchy for LocSta on mode "ExclusiveEd2"
MltLev Loc LocSta Bay Station Remote

(0) (1) (1) blocked blocked blocked

(1) (0) (1) allowed allowed blocked
(1) (0) (0) allowed allowed blocked
For all other commands, the local origin check remains strict, as detailed in the LRMode "Edition2"
mode.

User Manual 351
17.2.2.1 Exceptions to switching hierarchy blocks

Any order sent from the logics or from the pacFactory tool is not affected by switching hierarchy blocks.
In protection commands, hierarchy locks are the same as those in control commands, with the exception
of the following commands, that are never blocked by switching hierarchy.
 Reset commands for statistical data

 Reset commands for maximeter and minimeters
 Reset commands for energy counters
 Reset commands for queues
 Reset commands for LEDs and relays
 Battery connection/disconnection commands
In the LLN0 node of the logical device GEN the FKeysRem setting is defined. When is set to '1', it allows any
order given from the device’s display without any hierarchical blocking.
Additionally, with the configuration tool it is possible to set (in the sAddress), for each command of type SPC
and DPC, if the switching hierarchy blocks shall be avoided. It can be choosen whether this affects the
opening command, the closing command, or both.
17.2.3 Command 1 of n blocks

It ensures that multiple orders are not executed simultaneously. If a second command is received before the first
command is completed, the error is indicated as "1 of n" block (AddCause = 14).
17.2.4 Command blocks by mode (Mod/Beh)

This block is performed depending on whether the test bit of the received command is activated or not, and based on the
Beh status of the logic node. It has to be taken into account that the mode block is not checked in the case of making
commands over the Mod element. In case of blocking, the order is rejected with "blocked by mode" reason (AddCause =
8).
Table 216. Blocks by mode (Mod/Beh)
Command Test Bit Beh=On(1) Beh=Test(3) Beh=Off(5)

0 Allowed BLOCKED_BY_MODE BLOCKED_BY_MODE
1 BLOCKED_BY_MODE Allowed BLOCKED_BY_MODE
The IED contemplates 3 possible Beh / Mod values: 1: ON / 3: TEST / 5: OFF.
When the Beh is Off this block also applies to the selection of the command. As the test bit is not sent in the selection
request, it can not be checked in the other cases. The value Off is only defined in those logical nodes that it makes sense
to disable the node (for example protection functions).
Only with Edition2 configurations, to determine the Beh status of the logical node on which the command is executed,
different levels of hierarchy are defined:
 Mod of the own logical node.

 Mod of the LLN0 of the logical device to which the logical node belongs.
 Mod of the LLN0 of the logical device defined in the GrRef.
The GrRef setting is defined in the Edition2 of the standard and allows to relate a logical device to depend on a higher
hierarchy logical device. Its data type is objRef and it is found in the LLN0. The format to be used is the own logical
device concatenated to the IEDname of the installation.
The following table details the calculation of Beh of a logical node according to the different levels of hierarchy. The
GrRef can have an empty value and therefore considered unconfigured (NC):

User Manual 352
Table 217. Calculation of Beh according to hierarchy
GrRef LD LDMode LNMode LNBeh

LLN0.Mod LLN0.Mod LN.Mod  LN.Beh
On / NC On On  On
On / NC On Test  Test
On / NC On Off  Off
On / NC Test On  Test
On / NC Test Test  Test
On / NC Test Off  Off
Test On On  Test
Test On Test  Test
Test On Off  Off
Test Test On  Test
Test Test Test  Test
Test Test Off  Off
NOTE: Mod / Beh to Off is not accepted in LLN0 nodes.
17.2.5 Command blocks by Heatlh

The possibility of blocking commands based on a selectable alarm signal via the configuration tool (in a sAddress field) is
available. If this alarm signal is activated, the command will be blocked by "Blocked by Health" reason (AddCause = 13).
It is possible to set a different configuration for each command.
17.2.6 Command blocks by Interlocking

In IEC61850 Edition 2 configurations, the blocks by interlocking (EnaOpn/EnaCls) are only checked if the command is
issued with the “interlock-check” bit activated. If not, the command will not be checked against this blocking conditions.
On the other hand, in edition 1 configurations or other protocols different than IEC61850, the block by interlocking is
always checked.
The standard defines that the signals of the CILO logical nodes shall be used, but using the configuration tool it is
allowed to select these or any other signal in a generic way to perform the interlocking block. Signals can be set for both
the opening and closing blocks. The reason for the failure associated with this type of block is the "blocked by
Interlocking" (AddCause = 10).
In addition, within interlocking blocks, there is a check for installations in H automation architectures. This configuration is
performed using the configuration tool (automation signal sAddress field). When this signal is configured, the following
logic is followed:
 Automation signal activated:

 Only commands whose origin is "automatic" are accepted.
 Automation signal deactivated:
 Commands whose origin is "automatic" will be blocked.
For this section it is important to take into account the order followed to check the blocks, so that for example, with
LRMode configured to Edition2, and with the IED in local mode, automatic orders will be blocked by switching hierarchy
before reaching this kind of block.
17.2.7 Commands blocks due to invalid/reached position

The IED allows configuring blocks on commands based on the status of the item on which the order is intended and
taking into account whether an opening or closing is sent.
These blocks are configured through the configuration tool (in a sAddress field) indicating the desired operating mode for
each command.

User Manual 353
The commands will be blocked in accordance with the following table:

Table 218 Blocks in accordance with the command mode
Estado invalido /
Open status Close status
desconocido
Open Close Open Close Open Close
Command Mode 0 / -1 ALLOWED ALLOWED ALLOWED ALLOWED ALLOWED ALLOWED
Command Mode 1 BLOCK (1) ALLOWED ALLOWED BLOCK (1) BLOCK (2) BLOCK (2)
Command Mode 2 BLOCK (1) ALLOWED ALLOWED BLOCK (1) ALLOWED BLOCK (2)
Command Mode 3 ALLOWED ALLOWED ALLOWED BLOCK (1) ALLOWED BLOCK (2)
Thus, the blocks marked with (1) are blocks by "position reached" (AddCause = 5) and those marked with (2) are by
"invalid position" (AddCause = 4).
17.3 COMMANDS FOR OTHER POSITIONS
The configuration of these commands is related to the protocol by which they are propagated.
When the command is configured as a command of another device or UCL, the order will be sent to the corresponding
device behaving as a direct order with normal security (ctlModel = 1). The check of return information, pulseConfig, timeouts
and blocks must be performed on the device to which the order belongs.
17.4 COMMAND SADDRESS
Through the sAddress fields of each command the behavior explained in some of the previous sections can be modified.
The method for modifying the sAddress fields must always be the configuration tool. Manually changing these values can
cause errors and malfunction of the associated command.
Indicatively, the sAddress of a command has the following format:
sAddr = " a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,i,j,k,l,m,n,o,p,q,r,s;TX1:Language 1 text,TX2: Language 2 text "
 a:= O (letter corresponding to the command) / LO (Letters corresponding to the command logics)
 b:= Command UCL number. Maximum 4 characters.
Value 0 is used to select internal Ucl.
 c:= Command number. Maximum 4 characters.

Number of the first associated internal command. Each control element has two internal commands associated.
The first corresponds to the “ON” command (ctlVal = 1) and the second to the “OFF” command (ctlVal = 0). The
sAddress value has to be configured always as the number of the first command, which corresponds to the “ON”.
 d:= Enabling off/aperture signal number (EnaOpn). Maximum 5 characters.

Only if configured: It is the number of the signal that allows or blocks the OFF/aperture command, in case of it is
activated or deactivated respectively.
 e:= Enabling on/close signal number (EnaCls). Maximum 5 characters.

Only if configured: It is the number of the signal that allows or blocks the ON/close command, in case of it is
activated or deactivated respectively.
 f:= Expected status inverted. (1 character)

When set to 1 indicates that the expected status of the signal associated with the command is inverted.
 g:= Health signal number. Maximum 5 characters.

Only if configured: It is the number of the alarm signal that is used to block the order. If the alarm signal is not
active, the remaining locks are checked.

User Manual 354
 h:= Command Mode. It accepts four possible values (0-3)

Depending on this field, the commands will be blocked for "invalid position" or "position reached". The absence of
this field or a -1 value, assumes the same operation as that corresponds to a 0 value.
The table with the explanation of each mode can be found in the corresponding blocks section.
 i:= H automation signal number. Maximum 5 characters.

Only if configured: If it is a valid signal number, the status of the signal is checked to know if the equipment is in
automatic or not:
 If signal value is '1', H automation is activated, so command requests over this element from any
origin that is not “automatic” will be blocked
 If signal value is '0', H automation is not activated, so command requests over this element from any
“automatic” origin will be blocked
 j:= UCL number of the enabling off/aperture signal (field d). Maximum 4 characters.
The value 0 is used to refer to internal ucl. If it is empty the ucl number of the command is used.
 k:= UCL number of the enabling on/close signal (field e). Maximum 4 characters.
 l:= UCL number of the H automation signal (field i). Maximum 4 characters.
 m:= Disable block by switching hierarchy (ON/close). 1 character.

Setting this field to value 1 disables blocks per switching hierarchy for the ON command.
 n:= Disable block by switching hierarchy (OFF/aperture). 1 character.

Setting this field to value 1 disables blocks per switching hierarchy for the OFF command.
 o:= UCL number of the H automation signal (field i). Maximum 4 characters.
 p: RS signal associated with return of command (only Ed2): opOpnPrg. Maximum 5 characters.
 q: RS signal associated with return of command (only Ed2): opClsPrg. Maximum 5 characters.
 r: RS signal associated with return of command (only Ed2): opOpnFail. Maximum 5 characters.
 s: RS signal associated with return of command (only Ed2): opClsFail. Maximum 5 characters.
The UCL associated to the four return signals of commands Ed2 is the UCL of the command itself.
 TX1:= Command text language1. Maximum 16 characters.
 TX2:= Command text language2. Maximum 16 characters.

User Manual 355
RIO MODULES
18. RIO MODULES
18.1 CONFIGURATION
The RIO modules are configured using the RIOGGIO logic nodes A maximum of 8 nodes of this type is contemplated.
Each node has series of attributes that allow us to select the RIO modules with which we are to communicate and to
configure the outputs to be published:
Table 219 RIO module configuration attributes in Edition 1
ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION
The RIO number to which we want to associate the current node. It is a configurable
NumRIO.setVal
value between 0 and 99.
The RIO module to which we want to associate. It can accept the 1 (12 inputs / 4
TypeRIO.setVal outputs) or 2 (8 inputs / 2 outputs). The value 0 is reserved to indicate that the node is
not configured.
InRef1.setRef IEC 61850 reference to the RIO module’s first output.
InRef2.setRef IEC 61850 reference to the RIO module’s second output.
InRef3.setRef IEC 61850 reference to the RIO module’s third output.
InRef4.setRef IEC 61850 reference to the RIO module’s fourth output.
Table 220 RIO module configuration attributes in Edition 2
The RIO number to which we want to associate the current node. It is a configurable
NumRIO.setVal
value between 0 and 99.
The RIO module to which we want to associate. It can accept the 1 (12 inputs / 4
TypeRIO.setVal outputs) or 2 (8 inputs / 2 outputs). The value 0 is reserved to indicate that the node is
not configured.
InRef1.setSrcRef IEC 61850 reference to the RIO module’s first output.
InRef2.setSrcRef IEC 61850 reference to the RIO module’s second output.
InRef3.setSrcRef IEC 61850 reference to the RIO module’s third output.
InRef4.setSrcRef IEC 61850 reference to the RIO module’s fourth output.
18.2 OPERATION
When we have configured a RIOGGIO logical node correctly, the expected performance in the different attributes is as
follows:

User Manual 356
RIO MODULES
Table 221 Operation of RIO module attributes
Status of the communication with the associated RIO module. The value 1 indicates
St.stVal
that it is correct.
Indicates that the configured RIO type does not match that which is being received.
CfgErr.stVal This value is only displayed in IEC 61850, it has no associated signal in the internal
data base.
Ind[1..17].stVal The values received from the RIO module.
The values sent to the RIO module. The value always coincides with the signals
SPSCO[1..4].stVal
configured in the InRefs in the same index.
Both the elements received and the communication status has associated signals with fixed position in the internal
database. The signals are distributed as follows:
Table 222 Internal signals associated with RIO modules
LOGICAL NODE ELEMENT ASSOCIATED INTERNAL SIGNALS
Communication status 288

RIOGGIO1
Values received in command From 289 to 305.

RIOGGIO2

RIOGGIO3

RIOGGIO4

RIOGGIO5

RIOGGIO6

RIOGGIO7

RIOGGIO8

User Manual 357
CHANGES REQUIRING THE REBOOTING OF THE DEVICE
19. CHANGES REQUIRING THE REBOOTING OF THE DEVICE

The modification of the value of certain attributes requires the resetting of the device in order for the modification to have effect.
In order to inform of the need to manually reset of the device, the ResetDev.stVal signal has been defined within the GEN
node’s LLN0. In some cases, it is enough to send a new ICD / CID file.
For standard IEC61850 Ed1 configurations only, after a change on LGOS logical node subscription settings, the server does not
require a reset only if the LGOS was completely configured when the server started. In other case, the change of any of the
settings will activate the reset required signal.
The following table details the possible causes to activate this signal:
Table 223 Setting changes that require the manual reset of the device
LOGICAL NODE ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION DEACTIVATION WITH ICD FILE

The multicast reception MAC associated
MAC.setVal YES
to the goose
GoCBRef.setRef Goose control block reference YES

LGOS – Applies only
on IEC61850 Ed1
configurations. GoDatSetRef.setRef Dataset reference YES
(Only if not
completely GoID.setVal Goose identifier YES
configured at start-
up)
ConfRev.setVal Configuration revision YES
LGOS data attribute assigned to one

InRef_.intAddr YES
goose data value
RIO module Type. Involves modifying the

RIOGGIO TypeRIO.setVal YES
structure of the goose.
Network interface associated to the

genIPRV DevGoose.setVal YES
Goose messages.
genIPRV NoGsVlan.setVal VLAN use in Goose messages YES
YES, it is also deactivated after the

LLN0 IRMod.setVal InRefs mode
modification of an InRef data
Change of the I/O cards configuration
- Commercial code from the local HMI (change in the NO
commercial code)

User Manual 358
RECEPTION GOOSES 
20. RECEPTION GOOSES

The IEC 61850 server is conforming to IEC 61850 Edition 2.
For the details of the IEC 61850 interface implementation consult the following documents for the Ingepac EF family:
 PICS: Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement for the IEC 61850 interface
 PIXIT: Protocol Implementation eXtra Information for Testing for the IEC 61850 interface
 TICS: Technical Issues Implementation Conformance Statement
The Ingepac EF family maintains compatibility with the existing ICDs developed following Edition 1. The last point of this section
describes the GOOSEs subscription for that case. The remaining points refer to functionalities associated with Edition 2
configurations.
20.1 GOOSE SUBSCRIPTION
According to IEC 61850 Edition 2 the GOOSE subscription is configured using the Inputs-ExtRef elements in the CID file.
The Inputs section defines all external signals that will be received via GOOSE messages from other IEDs. In this section,
each ExtRef element references to one external item and the intAddr element makes the binding of the external signal to an
IED internal configured data.
The CID file of an IED with configured GOOSE subscriptions contains several IED sections. The IED section of the server
device itself and IED sections from each of the IEDs sending GOOSE messages to which the device is subscribed.
These external IED sections only contain the data model needed for the subscription to reduce the size of the CID file.
LGOS logical node is used to monitor GOOSE subscriptions. There are 32 instances of LGOS logical node, which allow
monitoring up to 32 GOOSE subscriptions.
The only configuration value in the LGOS logical node is the GoCBRef (Reference to the subscribed GOOSE control block).
The monitored values are:
 NdsCom:
 Subscription needs commissioning. When true, the received GOOSE message does not conform the
current subscription configuration; either the dataSetRef is wrong, the data set members, the
configuration revision number, ...
 St:
 If true, the GOOSE subscription is active, other is inactive
 SimSt:
 If true, subscribed GOOSE messages with the simulation bit set are being received and accepted
 LastStNum:
 Last state number received
 ConfRevNum:
 Expected configuration revision number of the GOOSE messages
 RxConfRevNum:
 Configuration revision number of the received GOOSE messages

User Manual 359
The St and SimSt data are mapped to the internal database to be used in for example logics or local display. The other
values are only available through the IEC 61850 communication.
The factory CID file contains 2 logical nodes (GOOGGIO1 and GOOGGIO2) with available data for the internal binding of
the received values.
Each of these logical nodes contains:
 32 boolean signals (Ind1 to Ind32 data)

 4 dbpos signals (DPSInd1 to DPSInd4 data)
 4 float values (AnIn1 to AnIn4 data)
In models with the "Extended control" option the IED data model can be extended with more logical nodes in the control
logical device for internal binding of the data received in GOOSE messages.
For more information about the GOOSE subscription configuration process consult the software tool manual
(energyFactorySuite/pacFactory).
20.2 GOOSE SIMULATION
The device implements the GOOSE simulation mode defined in the IEC 61850 Edition 2.
This mode allows the simulation of any GOOSE that is present in the communication network so that two GOOSES with the
same information data will be present at the same moment, the real one without the simulation bit active and the simulated
one with the simulation bit active. If the subscriber is in simulation mode, once it has received the first simulation GOOSE its
values will be used instead of the values of the original GOOSE.
Therefore, if the device is in simulation mode, it still accepts 'original' GOOSE messages, and only discards the 'original'
GOOSE messages for those GOOSEs which are simulated.
Simulation mode is enabled with the controllable data "Sim" included in the LPHD logical node in the GEN logical device.
In each LGOS logical node, used to monitor GOOSE subscription, the SimSt status shows with TRUE value that subscribed
GOOSE messages with the simulation bit set are being received and accepted.
When the subscriber is not in simulation mode (GEN/LPHD.Sim.stVal=false) the simulated GOOSEs are ignored. The
device keep on using the "real" GOOSE messages.
When the subscriber is in simulation mode (GEN/LPHD.Sim.stVal=true) the simulated GOOSEs are used for operational
purposes. The device ignore the "real" GOOSE messages after a first simulated one has been received. The corresponding
LGOS.SimSt is set when the first simulated message is received and only cleared when LPHD.Sim.stVal is set to false.
Once the device has received a simulated message for one of the subscribed GOOSE messages, it will not process the real
one until the simulation mode of the device (LPHD.Sim.stVal) is set to false.
The following state machine, from IEC 61850 TISSUES data base (num. 1151), displays the different states and illustrates
the supervision of GOOSE subscription with regards to LGOS.St and LGOS.SimSt

User Manual 360
stm LGOS
[LPHD.Sim.stVal==FALSE]
Initial
LPHD.Sim.stVal
== TRUE
[y] [n]
subscription normal
goose as long as no
[LPHD.Sim.stVal == TRUE] subscribtion normal [normal GOOSE message received] w ait for normal GOOSE
w ait for normal or [TAL expired] simulated GOOSE
goose
simulated GOOSE receiv ed
[LPHD.Sim.stVal == FALSE] [TAL expired] SimSt.stVal = FALSE
SimSt.stVal = FALSE St.stVal = FALSE
SimSt.stVal = FALSE SimSt.stVal = FALSE
St.stVal = TRUE
St.stVal = FALSE [normal GOOSE received] St.stVal = TRUE
[LPHD.Sim.stVal==FALSE]
[simulated GOOSE received] [LPHD.Sim.stVal == FALSE]
[simulated GOOSE received]
w ait for Simulated

subscription simulated [TAL expired] GOOSE
GOOSE
[simulated GOOSE received] SimSt.stVal = TRUE
SimSt.stVal = TRUE St.stVal = FALSE
St.stVal = TRUE
It is possible to enable a GOOSE transmission simulation mode with the "TestEna" and "LogInTest" setpoints, included in
GEN\LPHD logical node:
 TestEna: If this setpoint is TRUE enables the GOOSE transmission simulation mode
 LogInTest: This setpoint allows to configure a signal which, when active, enables the GOOSE transmission
simulation mode
In this mode all the GOOSEs transmitted by the device have the simulation field with TRUE value and the mode is indicated
in the status data GEN\LPHD.TestSt.
The following logic for the two configuration setpoints is used:
 TestEna=FALSE : TestSt=FALSE
 TestEna=TRUE and LogInTest=(not configured) : TestSt=TRUE
 TestEna=TRUE and LogInTest=(Signal data with value=TRUE) : TestSt=TRUE
 TestEna=TRUE and LogInTest=(Signal data with value=FALSE) : TestSt=FALSE
20.3 TEST MODE
The device implements the Test mode defined in the IEC 61850 Edition 2.

User Manual 361
Switching between the modes (Mod.stVal) only happen as a result of an operator command to the data object Mod.
The values of Mod and Beh that are used are:
 On:
 The application represented by the LN works.
 All communication services work and get updated values.
 Control commands with test bit will be rejected with AddCause "Blocked-by-mode".
 Test:
 The application represented by the LN works.
 All communication services work and get updated values.
 Data objects will be transmitted with quality “test”.
 Control commands with test bit will be accepted only by LNs in “test” mode.
 Off:
 The application represented by the LN doesn’t work.
 No process output is possible. No control command should be acknowledged (negative response).
 Data objects will be transmitted with quality “invalid”.
 Only the data object Mod and Beh should be accessible by the services.
On-blocked and test/blocked values are not supported.
20.3.1 Logical devices management hierarchy

Logical devices or LD, are used to represent a group of typical automation, protection or other functions. The functions
are defined as logical nodes contained and managed in logical devices. The hierarchy determines how the mode (e.g.
On, Off, Test …) of these functions and sub-functions is managed, so that a change in the value of the mode at higher
level influences the lower levels.
LLN0 of the logical devices that can be configured with a hierarchy contains a setting data named GrRef whose type is
objRef.
In order to configure a hierarchy the format of the GrRef value must be set with the name of the higher level logical
device concatenated to the IEDname of the installation. It is also possible that it is not configured.
The device implements the hierarchy on these logical devices:
 CTRL: Control functions (only present in devices with "Extended control")

 GEN: General functions
 PROT: Protection functions
GEN is considered the main logical node and its LLN0 logical node does not have the GrRef setting. CTRL and PROT
logical devices can be configured with a hierarchy.
So the typical hierarchy configuration is to assign the GEN logical device as higher level of CTRL and PROT. In this
case, the functions of CTRL and PROT logical devices are considered sub-functions of the GEN logical node and if the
mode of the GEN logical device is modified (GEN/LLN0.Mod) it will affect the CTRL and PROT logical devices also.
The mode of the LNs in any logical device may be changed individually with its own Mod, or globally by means of LLN0
of each logical device. Only changes in GEN/LLN0.Mod will affect the other logical devices that are configured as lower
level in the hierarchy.
For more details about how hierarchy affects commands behaviour, consult on this manual the "Command Blocks:
Commands blocks by mode (Mod/Beh)" section.

User Manual 362
20.4 SERVICE TRACKING
Service tracking is represented by the logical node LTRK and is defined as the function in charge of recording the
parameters values used by any service defined in IEC 61850-7-2 (after a service execution). It is thus possible to read,
report or log these values for system behavior analysis.
The trigger option for these data is "data-update", so it has to be configured in the associated control block if, for example, it
is included in a report.
Service type values tracked by Ingepac EF:
 16 - SelectActiveSG
 17 - SelectEditSG
 19 - ConfirmEditSGValues
 24 - SetBRCBValues
 26 - SetURCBValues
 34 - SetGoCBValues
 43 - Select
 44 - SelectWithValue
 45 - Cancel
 46 - Operate
 47 - CommandTermination
 54 - InternalChange
Service error implemented values:
 0 - no-error
 1 - instance-not-available
 2 - instance-in-use
 3 - access-violation
 4 - access-not-allowed-in-current-state
 5 - parameter-value-inappropriate
 6 - parameter-value-inconsistent
 7 - class-not-supported
 8 - instance-locked-by-other-client
 9 - control-must-be-selected
 10 - type-conflict
 11 - failed-due-to-communications-constraint
 12 - failed-due-to-server-constraint
The logical node LTRK contains data classes with functional constraint FC=SR needed for track the previously defined
services. The following common attributes are included in all services:
 objRef: Reference of the object that is being tracked: either a control block that is being accessed or a control
object that is being controlled.
 serviceType: Type of the tracked service.
 errorCode: Error associated to the service that is specified by serviceType; value no-error for successful service.

User Manual 363
 originatorID: Originator of the service. In general, the IP address of the client.

 t: TimeStamp of the completion of the service.
 d: Description
The following specific data objects are and included in the LTRK logical node:
Command service tracking:
Each enumerated has its own particular EncTrk, in which the ctlVal matches with the enumerated type defined for the
controllable object.
The index at the end may be incremented (For example EncTrk2) to define different instances.
 SpcTrk: Control service tracking for controllable single point.

 DpcTrk: Control service tracking for controllable double point.
 EncTrk1: Control service tracking for enumerated controllable. Mod (OFF)
 EncTrk2: Control service tracking for enumerated controllable. Mod (Test)
 Associated services:
 Select, SelectWithValue, Cancel, Operate
 Specific attributes (in addition to common attributes):

 ctlVal
 origin
 ctlNum
 T
 Test
 Check
 respAddCause
Unbuffered report service tracking:
The IED generates a tracking register when a SetURCBValues is done over the following attributes: rptID, rptEna, datSet,
optFlds, bufTm, trgOps, intPd and resv, what is according to IEC 61850-7-2 Subclause 15.3.2.3.1.
The change of other attributes associated to a URCB like confRev, gi, etc. will not generate a tracking register.
The attributes RptEna and Resv of the URCB instances are tracked at loss of association with the Client, with ServiceType =
InternalChange, with “127.0.0.1” as content of the originatorID field.
 UrcbTrk: Access service tracking for unbuffered report control block.

 SetURCBValues

 rptID
 rptEna
 resv
 datSet
 confRev
 optFlds

User Manual 364
 bufTm
 sqNum
 trgOps
 intgPd
 gi
 owner
Buffered report service tracking:
The IED generates a tracking register when a SetBRCBValues is done over the following attributes: rptID, rptEna, datSet,
optFlds, bufTm, trgOps, intPd, purgeBuf, entryID, and resvTms, what is according to IEC 61850-7-2 Subclause 15.3.2.2.1.
The setting of other attributes associated to a BRCB like confRev, gi, etc. will not generate a tracking register.
The attributes RptEna and ResvTms of the control block are tracked at loss of association with the Client with ServiceType =
InternalChange, with “127.0.0.1” as content of the originatorID field.
 BrcbTrk: Access service tracking for buffered report control block.

 SetBRCBValues

 rptID
 rptEna
 datSet
 confRev
 optFlds
 bufTm
 sqNum
 trgOps
 intgPd
 gi
 purgeBuf
 entryID
 timeOfEntry
 resvTms
 owner
Goose service tracking:
 GocbTrk: Access service tracking for goose control block.

 SetGoCBValues

 goEna
 goID
 datSet
 confRev
 ndsCom
 dstAddress
 minTime
 maxTime
 fixedOffs

User Manual 365
Settings service tracking
 SgcbTrk: Access service tracking for setting group control block.

 SelectActiveSG
 SelectEditSG
 ConfirmEditSGValues

 numOfSG
 actSG
 editSG
 cnfEdit
 lActTm
 resvTms
20.5 SUBSTITUTION MODEL
It allows to establish individually the values of some data that are sent through the protocol IEC61850.
Usually, input from the process or the result of the calculation from a function provides the value of a data (in that case, the
source is called "process"). In case of substitution model, the value of the data may be provided by an operator making use
of an IEC 61850 client.
Substitution model is available for the following common data classes:
 SPS (Single Point Status)

 DPS (Double Point Status)
 INS (Integer Status)
 SPC (Single Point Control)
 DPC (Double Point Control)
 MV (Measured Value)
 CMV (Complex Measured Value)
The IEC 61850 standard does not define the substitution model for other classes like ACT (Protection activation
information), ACD (Directional protection activation information), VSS (Visible String Status) or any of the settings classes.
Data classes that allow substitution have an attribute "subEna". If it is set to TRUE, the value of the data used for the IEC
61850 communications is the value configured in the following attribute (depending on the data type):
 Value:
 subVal: SPS, DPS, INS, SPC, DPC
 subMag: MV
 subCVal: CMV
 Quality: The attribute "subQ" is the value used to substitute the data attribute q. When subEna is true, the source
quality bit substituted is always set.
On measurement data substitution, the value is checked against the configuration of the measure (max, min, db …) so the
substituted value is affected by such configuration.
It is the responsibility of the client application, in particular in the case of multiple attributes to be substituted, to set the
relevant substitution values before enabling substitution, as well as, disable substitution on all substituted values.
The substituted values only apply to the IEC 61850 communication values. These means that the substituted values are not
used in the logics or protection functions of the device.

User Manual 366
There are several data with a special behavior for which the substitution of the value affects to the behaviour of the
IEC61850 server:
 BlkGoose.stVal: It allows blocking the transmission of all gooses.

 TestSt.stVal: It allows enabling the simulation bit in transmitted gooses.
 Sim.stVal: It allows activating the simulation mode.
Also defined in the substitution model, it is available the attribute "subID". When the substitution is activated, the device
automatically sets the subId to the IP address of the client device that activated the substitution. After this moment, the client
can write any other string to identify itself. Later when substitution is deactivated, the value is modified to a fixed empty
string. In conclusion, this attribute can be only modified after setting subEna to true.
20.6 EDITION1 SUBSCRIPTION. LGOS MODEL.
Only for ICD configured as Ed1: This model makes it possible to configure and supervise the complete status of each
reception goose within a single logical node.
Each goose subscription is associated with one LGOS logical node wich contains the configuration for that subscription, so
there can be as many subscriptions as LGOS logical nodes in the data model. The factory CID file contains up to 32 LGOS
logical nodes that allow the subcription to up to 32 goose messages.
To use the received data in the goose message they must be mapped to LGOS data. Each LGOS has:
 17 boolean signals (Ind1 to Ind17 data)

 4 dbpos signals (DPSInd1 to DPSInd4 data)
 8 float values (AnIn1 to AnIn8 data)
20.6.1 Configuration values

Used to establish the desired subscription parameters for each goose.
To create a subscription it must be configured:
 Configuration data of the Goose message to subscribe.

 Data assignment: Each data from the received Goose message can be assigned to one data in the LGOS
logical node in which the received value will be copied.
Table 224 LGOS model configuration values
ConfRev.setVal Must match the value received in the goose.
GoCBRef.setRef The goose reference to which we subscribe.
GoDatSetRef.setRef The reference of the dataset to which we subscribe.
GoID.setVal The identifier of the goose to which we subscribe.
The reference to the signal in which the goose element established by the InRef index
InRef[..].intAddr
is received. It must be a mapped signal within the goose signals range.
MAC.setVal The multicast MAC to which we subscribe.

User Manual 367
These values, apart from the “intAddr” for the internal data assignement, must be the same ones received in the Goose
message.
The data mapping is configured with the InRef data (InRef1 to InRef34). The InRef index indicates the reception goose
data position associated with that InRef (InRef1 associated to first goose data, InRef2 associated to second goose data,
etc.)
In the InRefx.intAddr attibute must be configured the LGOS data in which the value will be copied. The value must be:
 Boolean signals: Indx.stVal / Indx.q

 Dbpos signals: DPSIndx.stVal / DPSIndx.q
 Float values: AnInx.mag.f / AnInx.q
If in the Goose message the qualities of the data are also received they must be assigned to a “q” data of one of the
LGOS node data, like the rest of the Goose data.
To configure this assignment the user must know the format of the data of the Goose message because the selected
data in the LGOS node to copy the received value must have the same format.
Each LGOS logical node in the the factory CID data model has 34 InRef data so the device can subscribe to Gooses with
up to 34 elements.
For example if the configured value is InRef3.intAddr = Ind2.stVal this means that the third value in the received goose
(that must be a boolean value) will be copied to the LGOSx.Ind2.stVal data.
The software tool allows configuring these goose subscritpions manually or automatically (for more information consult
the pacFactory software tool manual).
20.6.2 Supervision values

They indicate information about the status of the goose subscription at all times. The status signal conditions the
updating of the rest of the Data. If the status is incorrect, the rest of the signals will not be updated with the values
received.
Table 225 LGOS model supervision values
St.stVal Subscription status. Value “1” indicates that the subscription was successful.
Sim.stVal Activated when the subscription is received in test mode.
NdsCom.stVal Activated when the subscription has the “Needs Commissioning” flag activated.
LastStNum.stVal The last status number received.
ConfRevNum.stVal The configuration revision received.
Note: Only the St data is mapped to the internal database to be used in for example logics or local display. The other
values are only available through the IEC 61850 communication.
20.6.3 Checked values

The following values are checked to decide if the goose message is valid:

User Manual 368
 TAL (Time Allowed to Live) not zero

 MAC multicast
 Dataset
 GoCBRef
 GoID
It is also checked that the types of each goose data mach the types of the LGOS data in which they will be copied.

User Manual 369
TCP/IP NEWORK CONFIGURATION
21. TCP/IP NEWORK CONFIGURATION
21.1 DESCRIPTION
In the device has a front Ethernet interface and may have up to two rear Ethernet interfaces. Each of which can be
configured to belong to the network that the user wants, as seen in the figure below:
 ETH0, frontal Ethernet.

 ETH1, rear Ethernet.
 ETH2, rear Ethernet.
The rear ethernets can be selected from one of the following options (see commercial code):
 Independent port
 Redundancy module configurable between PRP, HSR and Switch mode
 Link failover redundancy (both ethernet ports used)
The configuration of each network can be made:
 From the device Display (see section of the display).

 From PacFactory configuration tool (see user manual pacFactory).
The device has signals to indicate the link status of each of the ethernet ports in the LPHD1 node of the logical device GEN:
Table 226. Link status signals
Señal Dato Atributo

Link Ethernet 0 Eth0Link stVal
Link Ethernet 1 Eth1ALink stVal
Link Ethernet 1 redundant Eth1BLink stVal
Link Ethernet 2 Eth2ALink stVal
Link Ethernet 2 redundant Eth2BLink stVal
Redundant Link indications are only used in the case of redundant communications. In non-redundant communications, the
link indications are shown in the Eth1ALink and Eth2ALink data.

User Manual 370
In the link failover redundancy the link indications are shown in the Eth1ALink and Eth1BLink data.
21.2 COMMUNICATIONS REDUNDANCY
The device has several options of physical communications redundancy divided into two hardware solutions:
 PRP / HSR / Switch mode (Options O and P of the commercial code)

 Link redundancy (Options I, J and K of the commercial code)
When the device has the PRP/HSR/Switch mode module, the user can configure any of the three options or consult the
configured option from the local display (Initial menu - Communications - Configuration PRP / HSR / Sw) or from the web
server of the device (Maintenance menu - Communications - IP network configuration).
21.2.1 PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL (PRP)

The PRP (Parallel Redundancy Protocol) is a redundancy communication protocol defined in the IEC 62439-3 standard
and it is one of the redundancy mechanism recommended in IEC 61850 networks.
In the PRP protocol the device use two redundant ethernet ports and the protocol is based on the simultaneous
transmission and reception of data via both independent ports.
In PRP solutions two independent ethernet networks are used. Each device is attached to both networks and sends and
receives all the frames over both LANs simultaneously, consumes the first frame and discards the duplicate. With this
mechanism PRP ensures zero-packet loss and zero recovery time upon single network failures.
The two LANs have no connection between them and are assumed to be fail-independent, both are identical in protocol
at the MAC-LLC level, but they can differ in performance and topology.
With the PRP protocol additional information called RCT (Redundancy Control Trailer) is added to the Ethernet frame at
the link layer in order to control redundancy. This information is transparent for devices that do not use PRP protocol and
it is used by PRP devices to discard the duplicate frames.
Devices without PRP can be connected to one of the redundant ethernet networks but in that case they only can
communicate with the devices connected to the same network. In order to enable redundancy in non-PRP devices an
external converter called RedBox (Redundancy Box) can be used.
21.2.2 HIGH-AVAILABILITY SEAMLESS REDUNDANCY (HSR)

The HSR is a redundancy communication protocol defined in the IEC 62439-3 standard and it is one of the redundancy
mechanism recommended in IEC 61850 networks.
In the HSR protocol the device use two redundant ethernet ports and the protocol is based on the simultaneous
transmission and reception of data via both independent ports.
In the HSR networks no external switches are used, instead each device has two ring ports, and all the devices are
connected in a ring topology, with one port of the device connected to the previous device and the other connected to the
following device.
For each frame to send, the device sends it duplicated over both ports. So one frame travels in the ring in the clockwise
direction and the other frame travels in counter-clockwise direction. Each direction is treated as a separate network. So if
there is a failure in one point of the network, the frames reach the destination using the other direction in the ring. With
this mechanism HSR ensures zero-packet loss and zero recovery time upon single network failure.
An HSR tag is placed at the beginning of each frame to allow early identification of frames. With this tag each device can
identify the HSR tagged traffic and reject the duplicated frames coming from the both ports of a device and the frames
circulating in the ring. When a device receives a frame directed to it or that it sent, the frame is discarded and it is not
forwarded again in the ring. The frame is also discarded if it is a frame that it already sent in the same direction (i.e.
multicast frames).
Devices within the ring are restricted to be HSR-capable IEDs. In order to enable redundancy in non-HSR devices an
external converter called RedBox (Redundancy Box) can be used.

User Manual 371
21.2.3 SWITCH MODE

In the switch mode both ethernet ports act as an unmanaged switch forwarding the network traffic.
The recommended network topology is a ring solution with external managed switches to control the loop with the RSTP
protocol in the ring because the IED integrated switch does not implement that control. It is very important that the
external switches have the RSTP protocol enabled because otherwise the loop topology can cause communication
problems in the network. In case of link-up or link-down the communication can be temporary interrupted before the ring
reconfiguration.
21.2.4 LINK FAILOVER REDUNDANCY

With the link failover redundancy the device uses two ethernet ports for a redundant communication.
In this redundancy mode the device communicates by one of the ethernet ports and if there is a link failure in that port,
switches to the redundant port if the link status of that port is active.
If the link status of the passive port returns to normal, the communication is maintained in the active port and the devices
only change the active port in case of link failure.
In this redundancy, unlike the case of PRP redundancy, it should not be used two independent ethernet networks. The
two Ethernet ports of the equipment must be connected to different network switches, but must belong to the same
network, so that the switches should be connected at some point in the network.
This switching is almost instantaneous, allowing even Gooses redundancy without loss or minimal loss (1 repetition).
Regarding communications with IEC 61850 clients, depending on the ring reconfiguration time communications, we even
could not lose the connection or the open session.
The device has link failover redundancy status signals in the logical node LPHD1 of the GEN logic device, to indicate
which of the two channels is active and to indicate possible failures in the redundancy.
Table 227. Link failover redundacy status signals
Señal Dato Atributo

Channel A active Ethernet 1 Eth1Ast stVal
Channel B active Ethernet 1 Eth1Bst stVal
Ethernet redundancy Alarm EthRAlm stVal
21.3 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS ABOUT NETWORK CONFIGURATION
When configuring the network of the device it must be taken into account the following considerations:
 Basic concepta about networks:

 The format of the IP address or mask have the dotted decimal notation. The checks are performed according
to this standard.
 Addresses ending in 0 correspond to networks, not devices. For example : 192.168.200.0
 Addresses ending in 255 correspond to broadcast messages. For example : 192.168.200.255
 All network traffic for an IP address that is not included in the configured networks, will be redirected to the
default gateway configured.
 It is not allowed the IP address or mask 0.0.0.0.
 It is not allowed the IP address or mask 255.255.255.255.

User Manual 372
 From version 5.25.16.1 of firmware it is possible to configure several IP addresses in the same ethernet
interface. For previous versions it is not allowed.
 Gateways configuration:
 There can be only one default Gateway in the devices and it will be associated to a specific Ethernet
interface.
 If a Gateway is configurec, the static routes for the ethernet traffic will be determined by up to 10 groups or
three parameters:
 IP address of the network or destination host. This IP address indicates the network or the device
you want to connect to.
 Network mask or destination host mask.
 Gateway IP address. It must be in the same net segment than the IP address configured in that
ethernet port; because in another way the device will not access to the gateway.
 If the IP address of the network or destination host or the mask of the network or destination host are not
configured, the default values are:
 IP address: 0.0.0.0, it will be all the networks or default gateway.
 Network Mask: 255.255.255.255, it will be all networks or default gateway.
 The configuration of gateways can only be done from the Display.
 When changing the IP address, the gateways that are no longer accessible by the new IP will be
removed permanently.
 The IP change command keeps the mask that was associated with that Ethernet interface.
 Do not configure two different Ethernet interfaces within the same network segment. When you
configure two interfaces within the same network segment, the device will use only one of them.
21.4 GOOSES
GOOSE messages (IEC 61850 peer-to-peer communications) are not on the TCP/IP layer, they are Ethernet packets and
are configured at the MAC level.
The devices subscribes to multicast MAC addresses for receiving messages and transmit to a specific Multicast MAC
address.
Ethernet interface ETH0 is not ready to receive / transmit packets GOOSE.
21.5 FIREWALL
From firmware version 5.25.16.1 the device incorporates a firewall functionality through which any port in TCP/IP
communications (eg PING, FTP, sFTP, HTTP, etc.) can be blocked.
The firewall function can be enabled or disabled independently for each of the network interfaces. In case of link failover
redundancy interfaces, only the ETH1 interface shall be configured for both rear Ethernets.
Each TCP or UDP port can be configured as "closed" or "opened". When the firewall function is enabled on a network
interface by default all TCP ports are closed and those that want to be left opened must be configured. And in the case of
configuring a port as open the IP addresses from which the port will be accessible can be configured or leave it open for any
IP address.
Configuration is done from the pacFactory / energyFactorySuite software tool. Refer to the user manual of the tool for more
details on the configuration.

User Manual 373
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN DEVICES 
22. COMMUNICATION BETWEEN DEVICES

This section gives a general description of the communications features for teleprotection schemes and the connections needed
in the devices. It only applies to MD and ZT models with teleprotection. The general features are summarised below:
 1 or 2 ports that can be selected:

 GOF, POF, RS232C, RS485
 Single-mode optical fibre with the following options:
 ST or LC type connectors.
 Scope from 20 to 120km.
 IEEE C37.94 (multi-mode OF). ST connector.
With IEEE C37.94, the port must be configured with the settings:
 Comm speed (bauds). 38400 bauds.

 Parity: "Even".
 Number of Stop bits: "1".
22.1 DIRECT CONNECTION (POINT-TO-POINT)
Direct connection (without a telecommunications network) between the ends can be achieved via RS-232, RS-485, multi-
mode optical fibre or single-mode optical fibre. The conditions of possible noise and interference and the distances
supported are limitations which incline towards choosing Optical Fibre.
This type of connection always involves joining the transmission channel (Tx) of one end to the reception end (Rx) of the
other.
Ingepac EF devices must have the correct interfaces to permit this type of connection. The options are contained in the
commercial code (see section "Model Encoding").
The connection options via optical fibre are explained below.
22.1.1 Multimode Optical Fibre

The possible options are as follows:
Permitted Maximum
Cable Type Wavelength Connector
attenuation distance
Multi-mode glass optical fibre:
62.5/125 µm 11db 2km 820nm ST
50 /125 µm 9dB
Multi-mode optical fibre:
V-Pin connector
200Μm HCS (silicone) 22dB 1.9 km 660nm
(HP standard)
1Mm plastic 24.7db 115 m
22.1.2 Single-mode optical fibre

The possible options are as follows:
Permitted Maximum Minimum

Cable type Wavelength Connector
attenuation distance distance
Single-mode optical fibre LC duplex
30db 60 Km 1 Km 1310nm, Laser
9/125 nm ST
Single-mode optic fibre LC duplex
40db 120 Km 20 Km 1550nm, Laser
9/125 nm ST
N.B.:
It is highly recommended that you use attenuators if you are going to connect single-mode optical fibre cables
shorter than the length indicated as the minimum distance. Attenuators should be placed at the transmitter
output (connector Tx).

User Manual 374
22.2 CONNECTION WITH COMMUNICATIONS DEVICES (MULTIPLEXER)
Connections via a telecommunications network are made using communications devices which permit the connection of
Ingepac EF devices to the network, establishing a virtual link between them. These devices are called multiplexers (MUX) or
Pulse Code Multiplexers (PCM). They use standard protocols such as:
 IEEE-C37.94 (Optical Fibre Interface)

 UIT-G.703 (Galvanical Interface)
22.2.1 IEEE-C37.94 Interface

This interface offers the possibility of using up to twelve 64 Kbs channels each. If a device needs to send at a higher
speed (always Nx64), N channels of the ones available will need to be occupied. It provides a connection via multi-mode
optical fibre.
The port used with this communication must be configured with 38400 baud, even parity and 1 stop bit.
There are different user options for this interface:
 Direct connection to a MUX device which uses this standard.

 Connection to an external optocoupler device (C37.94 optical to G.703 electrical interface converter).
From the perspective of Ingepac EF, the two cases are identical and no special adjustment needs to be made.
In the second case, information will be needed to adapt the optocoupler device. The section gives a practical example of
using external converter devices.
The characteristics of multi-mode optical fibre for this connection are as follows:
Permitted Maximum
Cable type Wavelength Connector
attenuation distance
Multi-mode glass optical fibre:
62.5/125 µm 13db 2km 850nm ST
50/125 µm 9dB
22.3 EXAMPLE OF CONNECTING A C37.94 - G.703 CONVERTER
This section describes how to connect an Ingepac EF device to a multiplexer using an external C37.94 to G.703 converter.
This optocouplers or converter devices can be used to connect to MUX for access to SDH and PDH networks.
The G.703 standard has different interfaces: E0 (64Kbs), E1 (2Mb), etc. Hence, there are different C37.94 to G703
converters for converting to E0, to non-structured E1, to structured E1, etc.
22.3.1 C37.94 - G.703 E1 2Mb Converter.

This example indicates the steps for installing the 21-219, C37.94 to structured G.703 E1 converter.
As a general rule, connect the Tx transmission line of the Ingepac EF-LD device to the Rx reception line of the device
and vice versa. In 21-219 devices, you can use two C37.94 channels, but in this example, we will limit ourselves to using
Channel 0.

User Manual 375
In this device, the part of the G.703 E1 2Mb interface consists of two BNC 75 Ohm connectors for connection to the
MUXs. If two 21-219 converters are to be connected to each other, output Tx of one must go to input Rx of the other and
vice versa.
Configuring the clock source for G.703 synchronisation.
There are different alternatives for defining the master clock used in the G.703 standard:
 Network’s master clock.

SDH networks have a precise master clock for keeping a system quite safe with a very low error rate. In this case,
21-219 converter devices can be synchronised with the network’s master clock. To do this, the MUXs must be
configured so that re-synchronisation and a telegram format compatible with the G.704 standard is permitted.
In terms of the 21-219 converters, the external clock source must be configured for synchronisation in both
devices. To do this, there is a rotational switch on the front of the 21-219 which allows you to select the clock
source, amongst other items. In this case, the switch must be set to “0”, which is the default configuration.
 Master clock of one of the 21-219 devices.

The internal clock of one of the 21-219 devices can be used as the master clock. This option is applicable to a
test phase, in which the converters are connected to each other with a crossed G.703 connection (without
multiplexers).
To achieve this, the internal clock source in only one of the 21-219 devices must be configured so that there is
only one master clock. In this case, the rotational switch must be set to position “1”.

User Manual 376
The other 21-219 devices must be configured with the external clock option as indicated in the previous section.
Also, this option must be applied when the network does not provide such a precise clock (e.g. PDH networks)
and the multiplexers are configured so that they do not interfere with synchronisation (functioning in transparent
mode).
22.3.2 C37.94 - G.703 E0 Converter.

For the converter to the G703 E0 (64Kbs) standard, 21-216, the steps are practically the same. In this case, the G.703
interface is an RJ45 codirectional port. Twisted pair cables must be used. If you want to connect the two 21-216 devices
to each other, a specific crossed cable must be made.
The list of pins in the RJ45 port is as follows:
RJ45 pin Signal

1 Tx + (TIP-out)
2 Tx - (RING-out)
4 Rx + (TIP-in)
5 Rx - (RING-out)
Case Mesh

User Manual 377
KEYBOARD AND GRAPHIC DISPLAY 
23. KEYBOARD AND GRAPHIC DISPLAY
23.1 GENERAL OPERATION
23.1.1 Display structure

The screens are grouped into the following types:
 Graphic pages. Only available in models featuring "extended monitoring functions".

 I/O pages
 Secuence of Events (SOE)
 Protection events pages
 Alarm pages. Only available in models featuring "extended monitoring functions".
 Device status pages
 Fault pages. Not available in CDx models.
 Measurements pages. Only available in CD1 y CD2 models
 Grouping of other screens
Each display type has its own treatment.
There are also menu pages (which include the protection, control and general settings, such as the date and time,
password, FW versions, etc.), which are treated differently to those mentioned above.
23.1.2 Organization of the pages

The pages are organized into screen types, whose order of presentation is configurable using an external tool. The tool
also enables the unit’s start page to be assigned. The keys “(Left), (Right)” allow the user to scroll through the
different screen types defined as main screens. The screens can be scrolled in both directions: upon reaching the last
screen type the display returns to the first screen, and vice-versa.
By clicking on the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys in any screen, the screens belonging to the same type are shown. The I/O,
SOE, and fault pages are presented in a preconfigured order. However, in the graphic and alarm screens the
presentation order is defined using an external tool.
If, when in any screen belonging to specific type, we press “(Left), (Right)”, the following screen type is displayed
whilst the screen position remains within the type in question. Thus, when scrolling through the screen types the last
screen types selected when exiting a specific type are shown.
If no keys are pressed within a period greater than 5 minutes, the unit returns to the start page and the first page of each
type is selected.
By pressing on <ESC> from any screen we return to the start page, whilst the current page of each screen type is
maintained.
There is a special screen type called “Menu to Other Screens” that contains an index of screens not considered
important enough to have been defined as main screens and which enables access to the same. This screen is
configurable via a PC tool.
By pressing <MENU> from within any screen, the first page of the settings menus is displayed.
The possibility of multi-language is available.

User Manual 378
Device with IP protection covers
If the unit is fitted with an IP protection cover, only certain buttons will be accessible from the front, depending on the
model in question:
 Preset Keys (1/2 chassis – 5U and 19” chassis – 4U)

The only keys available are I, O, SEL, INF and DES.
The INF button allows the different screens to be displayed in a circular mode, whilst the order is configurable via a PC
tool.
 Functional Keys (1/2 chassis – 5U and 19” chassis – 4U)

The only keys available are I, O, F1, F2, F3, F4, F5 and the DOT key.
The DOT button allows the different screens to be displayed in a circular mode, whilst the order is configurable via a PC
tool.
23.1.3 Treatment of the functional keys

The functional keys are configured with the PC tool, with the control and associated status being configured for each key.
In addition there is a check box to reverse the status of the signal associated with the functional key. This option only
applies to Boolean (not double) signals.
The possible values of the status signal associated to the functional key and its corresponding representation via the
LEDs are:
 Not configured: the 2 LEDs OFF.

 Unknown Status: the 2 LEDs OFF.
 OFF Status: upper LED OFF and lower LED ON.
 ON Status: upper LED ON and lower LED OFF.
 Invalid Status: the 2 LEDs ON.
The functional keys have 3 operating modes configurable by setting “GEN/LLN0/FbuttType”:
 “Functional keys” Mode:

 By pressing the key, the associated item is selected and the corresponding LED or LEDs blink.
 Once the item has been selected, the associated command can be executed by pressing the “I” or “O” keys.
 Once the above-mentioned key has been pressed, the unit executes the command and the lit LED or LEDs
cease to blink.
 Once a command has been executed, the status of the associated LED or LEDs is updated. In case of a
failure, a window indicating the cause of the failure will appear in the display.
 “Command 52 + Functional” Mode:

 By pressing the key, the associated item is selected and the corresponding LED or LEDs blink.
 Once the item is selected, depending on its status one of this windows is shown:
 ON Status: displays the confirmation window for the OFF command.
 OFF Status: displays the confirmation window for the ON command.
 Unknown / Undetermined Status: Displays the confirmation window for the two possible ON and
OFF commands. With the " (Up) or  (Down)" keys the desired command is selected and with the
 (Enter) key the command confirmation window appears. With the "ESC" key to exit the selection
screen.
 Once a command has been executed, the status of the associated LED or LEDs is updated. In case of a
failure, a window indicating the cause of the failure will appear in the display.

User Manual 379
 “Command Confirmation” Mode:

 The operation is the same as the "Functional Keys" mode but with the particularity that every time the user
executes an command (I / O buttons) a confirmation message will appear on the display (pressing the
ENTER key executes the command and Pressing ESC cancels).
This mode will be applied for both the graphical screens commands and the functional key commands
(contemplating that we can be in any of the display screens)
NOTE 1: To change this setting from the display, the settings menu is accessed and in the initial menu select the
'general settings' menu and press the ENTER key. Within this node, the setting is 'Command Type'. The 'With
confitmation' option is selected and the settings are validated.
NOTE 2: When a function key has not a configured signal but it has a configured command the 2 LEDs remain OFF until
the function key is pressed. At that moment the 2 LEDs start blinking.

User Manual 380
23.1.4 Graphics pages

The maximum number of graphic screens is 9.
Use the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys to switch from one group of graphic screens to another.
The order of the “live points” that have commands and the sequence of the graphic screens can be modified using the
PC tool.
Figure 1 Single Line diagram Figure 2 Single Line diagram with indication of non-run command
The treatment of controls WITH Preset Keys:
 To run a command, we must first select the item to be sent. To do so, and once we have selected the
screen containing the item to be sent, we must press “SEL”. The symbol of the item that has been
configured to priority 1 and which has an associated command will appear and begin to flash.
 By pressing “SEL” we scroll through the different “live points” with commands, in accordance with the
preset order.
 Once the item to be sent has been selected, the process is as follows:
 Press the key “I” for the following commands: close, in service, automatic, remote control, etc.
 Press the key “O” for the following commands: open, out of order, manual, local, etc.
 By pressing the key “DES” (if the item has maintenance configured), the command will be run, in
accordance with the item's status – if it is set to maintenance, the command will be “remove
maintenance”, if it is not in maintenance, the command will be “set to maintenance”.
If the command fails or if it can not be run due to a block, a small screen indicating the reason for the
failure will be displayed. This indication appears for 5 seconds, during which no operations can be carried
out on the item.
 If the command is successful, no additional screen will be shown and the item's status will be refreshed.
 If it is in the control selection, only the “SEL”, <ESC> and “I, O, DES” keys are allowed.

User Manual 381
The treatment of controls WITHOUT Preset Keys:
 To run a command, we must first select the item to be sent. To do so, and once we have selected the
screen containing the item to be sent, we must press  (Enter). The symbol of the item that has been
configured to priority 1 and which has an associated command will appear and begin to flash.
 By pressing the “(Left), (Right)” keys, we scroll through the different “live points” with commands, in
accordance with the preset order.
 Once the item to be sent has been selected, the process is as follows:
 Press the key “I” for the following commands: close, in services, automatic, remote control, etc.
 Press the key “O” for the following commands: open, out of order, manual, local, etc.
 If the command fails or if it can not be run due to a block, a small screen indicating the reason for the
failure will be displayed. This indication appears for 5 seconds, during which no operations can be carried
out on the item.
 If the command is successful, no additional screen will be shown and the item's status will be refreshed to
show "normal".
 If it is in the control selection, only the <ESC>, (Left), (Right) and “I, O” keys are allowed.
By pressing <ESC>, we exit the control selection, as we also do if we refrain from pressing any keys for a period of more
than “10 sec”.
The measurements are displayed with the number of decimal points and digits preset with the configuration tool. The
possible situations that are covered when viewing a measurement are:
 Invalid: An '*' is placed in front of the measurement, there is no associated flashing. E.g.: * 25.3
 Outside range: '####' is displayed without flashing when the measurement’s value exceeds the maximum
value for the specified nº of digits and decimal points. E.g.: measurement value = 100 and number of
digits = 2.
 Alarm: An 'A' is displayed in front of the measurement, with flashing, when the measurement exceeds the
set range. There is an upper and a lower limit. E.g.: If an alarm is activated when the upper limit is greater
than 200 A, the measurement will be displayed as follows: A 202.
Each of the measurements displayed in the graphic screens can be configured so that their values are referred to the
primary or the secondary.

User Manual 382
23.1.5 I/O pages

The device may be equipped with different types of cards, which are distinguished by the combination of inputs and
outputs grouped in 2 columns. Each card’s information is grouped in a page.
A text indicating the type of card, the address of the module assigned by HW and an indication of the current page
number/number of total pages, which is the same as that of the card, is displayed at the top of the screen.
An indication of a card failure is shown in the lower part of the screen. If the circle is filled, the card is in failure, whereas
if it is empty, the card is functioning correctly (Figure 1 I/O Screen).The order of this type of screen is defined by the
different card’s addresses – the card with the lowest address is displayed first and the pages can be scrolled using the “
(Up),  (Down)” keys.
The digital I/O data are listed in 2 columns. Each column contains a graphic symbol (a circle), followed by the input or
output text and the corresponding number of terminals:
The digital signals are displayed as an empty circle, when disabled, or a filled circle, when enabled. In the event of an
invalid signal, an empty circle with a cross is displayed to represent a disabled status and a filled circle with an inverted
cross is displayed to represent an enabled status (Figure 2 I/O Screen with card failure).
Figure 1 I/O Screen Figure 2 I/O Screen with card failure

User Manual 383
23.1.6 Event pages

The event screens display a chronological record of all the changes that take place in the signals that have been
configured as events in the display.
Each event’s presentation includes the date and time to the millisecond, a 29 character text and a 7 character acronym.
The texts to be displayed, as well as the signals’ identification, are set in attributes of the CID and may be modified using
an external tool.
The screen order is defined chronologically. Their display order goes from the newest to the oldest. Within each screen,
the most recent are shown at the top of the page and the oldest at the bottom.
We can scroll through the pages using the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys, going from the last page to the first, and vice-versa.
The page order runs from the first page, which has the most recent events, to the last page, which has the oldest events.
The “ (Down)” key is used to scroll from the first page to the following in increasing order, whereas the “ (Up)” key is
used to scroll from the last page to the previous pages.
Only the last 160 events are displayed in these pages.
The total number of pages and the number of the page currently displayed, as well as the number of events in the
display, is shown in the last row.
Treatment:
When accessing this screen for the first time, the most recent events are displayed. The “ (Down)” and “ (Up)” arrows
are used to scroll through the pages, as indicated above.
If new changes are registered whilst we are viewing the 1st page of this type of screen, the Display is refreshed
accordingly and the older changes are moved downwards.
When viewing any page other than the 1st page if new changes are registered, the Display will not be refreshed and the
previous data is shown. In such a case, a flashing, inverted video “NEW CHANGES” message is shown at the top of the
page.
This indication is cleared when the most recent changes are viewed. To do so, we must go to the first screen.
Figure 3 Event Screen

User Manual 384
23.1.7 Protection event pages

The protection event screens display a chronological record of all the changes that take place in the signals that have
been set as such. Each protection event’s presentation includes the date and time to the millisecond, a 29 character text
and a 7 character acronym.
The texts to be displayed are defined in attributes of the CID. Signals are identified as protection events by means of the
corresponding enabling function in the corresponding settings node and by configuring the event masks. They can be
modified using the PC tool.
Figure 4 Protection event Screen
The screen order is defined chronologically. Their display order goes from the most recent to the oldest. Within each
screen, the most recent are shown at the top of the page and the oldest at the bottom (Figure 4 Protection event
Screen). If the protection event list is empty, a text indicating that the protection event queue is empty will appear.
We can scroll through the pages using the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys, going from the last page to the first, and vice-versa.
The page order runs from the first page, which has the most recent protection events, to the last page, which has the
oldest protection events. The “ (Down)” key is used to scroll from the first page to the following in increasing order,
whereas the “ (Up)” key is used to scroll from the last page to the previous pages.
Only the last 160 protection events are displayed in these pages.
The  (Enter) key is used to select the first protection event from the screen being viewed, whilst the “ (Up),  (Down)”
keys are used to scroll to the next protection event, with the following treatments:
 If, whilst at the bottom of the page, we press “ (Down)”, we are taken to the next page with the first
selected protection event, unless we are already viewing the last page, which case the display will not be
changed.
 If we are in the protection event selected and we press “ (Up)” key, we are taken to the previous page,
although the last protection event remains activated, unless we are in the first page and in which case the
display will remain unchanged.
Once this protection event has been selected, we can press  (Enter) to view the page with the measurements
associated to the protection event. Use the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys to switch from one page to another if there is more
than one measurements page per protection event. These pages are browsed in a cyclical manner, going from the first to
the last, and vice-versa, as corresponds.
Use <ESC> to exit the screen displaying the measurements associated to the protection event. Within the protection
events’ screen, the change is deselected by clicking on <ESC> once again.
The total number of pages and the number of the page is currently displayed, as well as the number of protection events
in the display’s queue, is shown in the last row.
Treatment:

User Manual 385
When accessing this screen for the first time, the most recent protection events are displayed.
The “ (Down)” and “ (Up)” arrows are used to scroll through the pages, as indicated above
If the appearance of new protection events is detected, a flashing, inverted video “NEW INC” (new protection event)
message is shown at the top of the page.
This indication is cleared when the latest protection events are viewed. To do so, no protection events must be selected
and we must go to the first screen. Once we have arrived at this screen, if we scroll back the first screen with the most
recent protection events to have been registered will be displayed.
23.1.8 Alarm pages

These screens emulate an alarm panel, displaying each alarm as a rectangle with a text inside. The page format is set
and includes 2 columns containing 6 rectangles each. There will be a maximum of 15 alarm pages, i.e., a maximum of
180 alarms.
2 lines of 12 characters can be displayed within each rectangle. Each alarm’s texts, identification and the number of
alarms are configured using an external tool.
When in standby status, the text is displayed in a normal video with white background and, when enabled, in an inverted
video with a dark background.
When the alarm changes status, the signal’s text begins to flash and appears and disappears within the new status.
If the signal is invalid, the text will be displayed with a cross covering the entire rectangle. If the signal does not exist, the
corresponding alarm's gap will be displayed.
Use the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys to switch from page to another.
Individual acknowledgements of receipt are not issued for the alarms. Instead, it is possible to issue acknowledgement
for all the alarms displayed in the page that is being viewed. To do so, we must press  (Enter) in an active alarm page
and the following message will appear in a small screen:
Confirm receipt of all alarms of the page?
If we then press <ESC>, the message is cleared and no acknowledgment of the alarms is issued. If we press  (Enter),
the message disappears and an acknowledgment is issued for all the alarms displayed on the page.
An indication of the total pages and the number of the page displayed will appear at the top of the page.
Figure 5 Alarm panel

User Manual 386
23.1.9 Device status pages

The device status displays may differ depending on the model. Values may be referred to the primary or secondary.
NOTE: The measurements correspond to the fundamental frequency.
The different screens depending on the model samples of the device:
23.1.9.1 MDx, CDx, ZTx, CBx and BFx Models

There are 3 pages which describe the device status.
 Screen 1:
 Relay date and time.
 Frequency value.
 Type, module and angle of each of the unit’s 12 transformers.
 Screen 2:
 Direct, inverse and zero sequences of currents and voltages (module and angle).
 Total real, reactive and apparent power.
 Screen 3:
 Active table number (not available in CDx models).
 External power supply battery voltage.
 Phase and neutral thermal image value (only for MDx models).
 Restricted Earth value (only for MD0, MD2, TDx and LDx models).
 Maximeter value for each current and voltage phase (not available in CD0 model).
 Device temperature.
 Measures reactive power (only for CB model).
NOTE: The CD0 model only has a single screen with the following information:

Figure 6 Device Status page 1, page 2 and page 3

User Manual 387
23.1.9.2 TDx Models

 Screen 1:
 Screen 2:
 Maximeter value for each current phase of each winding
 Maximeter value for each current and voltage in TD0 model
 Screen 3:
 Active table number (not available in CDx models).
 Phase and neutral thermal image value (only for MDx models).
 Restricted Earth value (only for MD0, MD2, TDx and LDx models).
 Maximeter value for each current and voltage phase (not available in CD0 model).
 Measures reactive power (only for CB model).
 Measurements screen (4)
 Differential measures
 Restraint measures
 Differential 2º harmonics measures.
 Restricted Earth values.
 Measurements screen (5)
 Direct, inverse and zero sequences of currents (module and angle) of each winding.
 Direct, inverse and zero sequences of voltages (module and angle) in TD0 model.
Figure 7 Device Status page 1, page 2 and page 3

User Manual 388
Figure 8 Device Status page 4 and page 5
23.1.9.3 LDx Models

 Measurements Screen 1:
 Measurements screen 2
 Direct, inverse and zero sequences of currents and voltages (module and angle).
 Measurements Screen 3:
 Active table number.
 Phase and neutral thermal image value.
 Maximeter value for each current and voltage phase.
 Measurements screen (4) (Figure 8)
 Differential measures
 Restraint measures
 Differential 2º harmonics measures
 Terminal Measurements screen (5)
 Synchronized measurements all terminals.
NOTE: The LD3 model does not have voltages and power.

User Manual 389
23.1.10 Fault pages

These pages display the last 20 fault reports filed by the protection.
These screens are divided into two levels. The first level displays a list of the most recent faults, as well as the fault
number and the fault trip date for each case (Figure 10 Fault list). The total number of pages and the number of the page
being displayed is shown at the top, whilst the number of faults stored in the unit is shown in the last row.
If the fault list is empty, a text indicating that the fault queue is empty will appear (Figure 9 Empty fault list).
The faults are ordered from the most recent or latest (Fault nº 1) to the oldest.
Figure 9 Empty fault list Figure 10 Fault list
The second level displays all the information related to the fault, organized in several pages. The page is displayed with
the number of the fault being displayed, as well as an indication of the number of the current page and the total number
of pages per fault.
Use the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys to navigate through the first level screen. The page scroll is cyclical - when the end of
the page is reached we are taken to the next first level page and we are taken from the first page to the last page and
vice-versa in accordance with the key we press.
By pressing  (Enter), we access the second level of the selected fault. Use the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys to move
between the second level screens pertaining to a single fault. Use <ESC> to return to the first level page.
The values can refer to the primary or to the secondary. It is allowed to enable / disable the treatment to automatically
display the last fault on the display from the Configuration / Settings section of the display configuration tool.
Each screen’s content will be displayed as follows:
The contents of each screen may differ depending on the model, then the different possibilities:
23.1.10.1 MD, ZT, BC, BF and PB Models

There are 4 screens with data for each fault:
 Start Screen, which includes fault’s data.

 Date and time: Indicates the date in the “dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss.ms” format. There are three dates:
 Start of the fault (first unit picked up).
 Trip (first unit tripped).
 End of fault (when the trip signal disappears).

User Manual 390
 Frequency in the moment of the fault.

 Pick up and trip types: Summary of the fault with the 3-letter code formed by combinations of the
characters A, B, C, N, NS and G (if tripped by a phase, neutral, sensitive neutral or ground), RTP
(teleprotection), IF (phase overcurrent), IN (neutral overcurrent), D (current unbalance), VO (zero-
sequence overvoltage), HV (overvoltage), LV (undervoltage), RTP (teleprotection), DT (transferred
trip), DP (pole discordance), IT (thermal image). Example: AC is a two-phase fault in phases A and C.
 Pick up type.
 Trip type.
 Distance: distance to the fault.
 Rf: resistance fault.
 LOC: locator code.
 Thermal image upon trip. The thermal image is indicated as a % of phases and neutral.
 Breaker. Indicates breaker monitoring data upon the fault:
 Open current. For each phase, indicates the current value upon the trip.
 Sigma ki. For each phase, indicates the sigma ki2 value.
 Fault screen, with the text “Fault information (I)”.
Figure 11 2nd level Fault Screens, page 1 and page 2
 Pre-fault and fault. Indicates the values measured before the fault and upon the fault. This screen
displays the following values:
 Transformer measurements <Trafos>. It indicates the measurement in the module and the
angle of each transformer.
 Restricted Earth value.
 Fault screen, with the text “Fault information (II)”.
 Sequences. Indicates the measurements in the module and the angle of the current
sequences (I0, I1 and I2) and the voltage (V0, V1 and V2).
 Power. Indicates the measurements of the total real, reactive and apparent powers.
 Tripped units screen, displays the picked up and the tripped units.

User Manual 391
Figure 12 2nd level Fault Screens, page 3 and page 4
NOTE: only the first 7 picked up and tripped units are displayed. If the number is greater than 7, a text appears at the
bottom of the screen indicating that there are more picked up units.
23.1.10.2 TDx Models

 Start Screen, which includes fault’s data.

characters A, B, C, N, NS and G (if tripped by a phase, neutral, sensitive neutral or ground), DIF
(differential), RG (restricted earth), IF (phase overcurrent), IN (neutral overcurrent), D (current
unbalance), VO (zero-sequence overvoltage), HV (overvoltage), LV (undervoltage), v/f (overexcitation
v/f), IT (thermal image). Example: AC is a two-phase fault in phases A and C.
 Pick up type.
 Trip type.
 Thermal image upon trip. The thermal image is indicated as a % of phases and neutral of each
winding.
 Fault screen, with the text “Fault information (I)”

 Breaker. Indicates breakers monitoring data upon the fault of each winding:

 Transformer measurements <Trafos>. It indicates the measurement in the module and the
angle of each transformer.

User Manual 392
Figure 13 2nd level Fault Screens, page 1, page 2 and page 3
 Fault screen, with the text “Fault information (III)”.

 Differential current measure
 Restraint current measure
 Fault screen, with the text “Fault information (IV)”.
sequences (I0, I1 and I2) of each winding.
 Sequences. Indicates the measurements in the module and the angle of the voltage (V0,
V1 and V2) in TD0 model.
Figure 14 2nd level Fault Screens, page 4, page 5 and page 6

User Manual 393
23.1.10.3 LDx Models

 0Start Screen, which includes fault’s data.

characters A, B, C, N, NS and G (if tripped by a phase, neutral, sensitive neutral or ground), DIF
(differential), RG (restricted earth), IF (phase overcurrent), IN (neutral overcurrent), D (current
unbalance), VO (zero-sequence overvoltage), HV (overvoltage), LV (undervoltage), v/f (overexcitation
v/f), IT (thermal image). Example: AC is a two-phase fault in phases A and C.
 Pick up type.
 Trip type.
 Distance: distance to the fault.
 Rf: resistance fault.
 LOC: locator code.
 Thermal image upon trip. The thermal image is indicated as a % of phases and neutral.
 Breaker. Indicates breaker monitoring data upon the fault:
 Fault screen, with the text “Fault information (I)”

displays the Transformer measurements <Trafos>. It indicates the measurement in the module and
the angle of each transformer.
sequences (I0, I1 and I2) and the voltage (V0, V1 and V2).
 Fault screen, with the text “Fault information (III)”.
displays the following values: Differential current measure and Restraint current measure.
 Restricted Earth value.

User Manual 394
23.1.11 Measurement pages

There are 5 screens displaying the unit’s rms measurements referred to the primary (not available for devices without
measure module, for example CD0).
NOTE: Certain wiring diagrams have invalid measurements that do not exist. They are represented by “---“.
 Measurements screen (I)

 Module and angle of each of the unit’s 8 transformers and phase to phase voltages.
 Measurements screen (II)
 Direct, inverse and zero sequences of currents and voltages (module).
 Frequency.
 Measurements screen (III)
 Power by real and reactive phase and apparent rms.
 Power factor per phase.
 Measurements screen (IV)
 Total real, reactive and apparent rms power.
 Total power factor.
 Real and Reactive Energy.
 Measurements screen (V)
 The harmonic distortion (%) of the 8 transformers’ measurements.
Figure 15 Screen 1 Figure 16 Screen 2 Figure 17 Screen 3

User Manual 395
Figure 18 Screen 4 Figure 19 Screen5
23.1.12 Menu to other screens page

This screen allows an access menu for the other types of screen that have not been given the consideration of main
screens to be displayed. We can group little-used screens within this screen and thus reduce the size of the main loop,
making the movement between those screens that are considered the most important quicker.
The content of this screen is set using the external configuration tool. Screens that are included in the main screen list
cannot be included in this menu.
The image below shows the following types of screen grouped in this screen: Events and Faults.
Figure 20 Other screens

User Manual 396
23.1.13 Shortcut menu page

This screen appears when we press “R”.
It contains those commands that can be given to the unit without having to enter a Password. The commands will vary in
accordance with the unit’s family.
Some examples are given below.

 Recloser command.
 Bank automatism command (for unit’s with a capacitor bank).
 .....
By pressing “R”, this page appears showing the first selected command. By clicking on the “ (Up),  (Down)” keys we
can move between the commands. By pressing “ (Enter)”, the selected command is run.
Figure 21 Quick access menu

User Manual 397
23.2 CONTROL AND PROTECTION MENUS PAGES
23.2.1 Operation of the menus

These screens enable us to view and modify the control and protection settings values. They consist of several levels of
menus and sub-menus.
23.2.1.1 Access to settings Menus

By pressing <MENU> from any of the other types of screen, a screen such as the one shown in Figure 22 Password
request screen will appear and request that a password be entered.
Figure 22 Password request screen
We can access the menu pages with either viewing or modification permissions.
If we enter the correct password and press  (Enter), we will have permission to change settings. The “♦” symbol will
appear in the bottom left of the screen, as will the text “CHANGE SETTINGS”. However, if we press <ESC>, we will
only be permitted to consult the settings. Further more, a text indicating “VIEW SETTINGS” will be shown. The
<ESC> key will function even when some of the password’s numbers have been entered.
For more information, consult the point 4.2 of the Password Management section in this manual.
23.2.1.2 General operation

We can access the start menu screen by pressing <MENU> from any of the other pages described in the preceding
paragraphs. To exit the menus pages from the start page we must press <MENU> or <ESC>.
To move from a menu to a submenu we must select the menu that we want to explore and press  (Enter). To return
to the previous menu, we must press <ESC>. The <MENU> key enables us to return to the start menu from any
submenu.
The  (Up),  (Down) keys can be used to change a menu's active line. If all the menu’s options can be displayed on
the screen, only the active line is changed when we change line. On the other hand, if not all of the menu’s options
can be displayed on the screen at the same time and the cursor is situated over the first or the last of the screen's
menus, the menu will scroll up or down, in accordance with the key used.
An indication of the number of the item selected from the total number of items in the menu on the screen currently
displayed is shown in the bottom right of the screen.
In the settings screens when a node does not exist in the cid an '*' before the text is displayed, indicating that the
node is disabled.

User Manual 398
The display change active table indicated by the following "(A)" the active table at that time.
Figure 23 Initial Settings Menu
23.2.1.3 Settings change operation

By pressing  (Enter) on an item from a settings menu screen that has no submenus, the settings changes screen
will appear (Figure 24). This screen displays the data corresponding to the first 6 settings. The selected setting can
be modified using  (Up),  (Down).
If all the node’s settings can be displayed on the screen, only the selected setting is changed when we change
setting. On the other hand, if not all of the menu’s options can be displayed on the screen at the same time and the
cursor is situated over the first or the last of the screen's settings, the settings will scroll up or down, in accordance
with the key used. To return to the menu screen, we must press <ESC>.
If the node is disabled, it is not allowed to modify settings and the display of the settings would be similar to the one
you have when entering the settings only mode. In the last row the text "DISABLED NODE" is displayed.
The following data can be seen on this screen:
 The following will appear at the top of the screen:

 Description of the settings node.
 Name of the settings node in IEC 61850.
 Current table (for settings which have the possibility of multiple tables).
 The number of the selected setting and the total number of the node’s settings.
 There are 3 lines for each setting, indicating the following:
 Description of the setting.
 Name of the setting in IEC 61850 and its corresponding value.
 New value of the setting. When this screen is accessed for the first time, the current value and the
new value coincide.
 The “VALIDATE PARAMETERS?” text appears in the last line. When selected and after pressing 
(Enter), all the changes to the screen's settings are validated. Until we press  (Enter) with the last line
selected the changed settings will not be validated.
 WARNING: If the user only has viewing permissions, the last line will not appear on the settings change
screens.

User Manual 399
Figure 24 Settings change screen Figure 25 Setting Validated Screen
By pressing <ESC> after modifying a setting in the page, a confirmation message indicating that the user is about
exit without saving the settings in the CID appears:
Exit without changing settings?
Thus, by pressing  (Enter) we exit the screen and all the changes made so far in that menu are cleared. If we press
<ESC> when the message appears, we remain where we were.
By pressing  (Enter) after having modified one of the page's settings, another window appears. At this point, the
user has 2 options:
 Wait until the CID modification process is completed with the new settings. At this point there are 3
possible situations:
 If the modification is carried out successfully, a “Changing the settings OK” text will appear (Figure
25).
 If an error occurs during the CID modification process, an “Error in changing settings” text will appear.
 If a time out failure occurs whilst saving the modified settings, a “Time out in changing settings "
message will appear.
 Press  (Enter) and return to the settings change screen without the assurance of having modified the
CID.
23.2.1.4 Settings Types

By pressing  (Enter) on one of the items that enables settings to be changed (the settings are text strings only be
displayed), and providing that the user has modification permissions, one of different types of small window will
appear:
23.2.1.4.1 Option Type

By pressing  (Enter) on a setting of this type, a small window (Figure 26) displaying the following data appears:
 Setting name in IEC 61850.

 Setting description.
 Current setting value.

User Manual 400
 New value of the setting. When this screen is accessed for the first time, the current value and the new
value coincide.
 The number of the current option from among the options available
Using the  (Up),  (Down) keys, we can move through the different options in a circular manner, that is, when we
reach the last option we are returned to the first option. The selection option is chosen by pressing  (Enter). To
exit without selecting, press <ESC>.
Figure 26 Small screen for modifying OPTION type setting
23.2.1.4.2 Numeric Type

These can be changed using the numeric keys. The number is validated by pressing  (Enter), whilst <ESC> is
used to cancel and start again. The following data is displayed in each small window:
 Setting name in IEC 61850.

 Setting description.
 Current setting value.
 The setting’s new value. This field, which is empty, is where the value of the new setting entered via the
keyboard will be displayed.
 Maximum setting value.
 Minimum setting value.
 Setting step or increase.
The desired value is entered directly. The digits are entered from left to right. For example, to enter the number
2345, we must successively press 2, 3, 4, 5,  (Enter).
The entered value is checked in order to ensure that it meets the maximum, minimum and step restrictions.
Should it fail to meet any of these restrictions, the “INVALID VALUE” text is shown. This text disappears when a
number key is pressed.
There are 2 possibilities within this type, depending on the number, decimal or integer format.
Decimal: See Figure 27.
Integer: There are some integer type settings whose value is a signal number. In such cases, the “NOT
DEFINED” text (Figure 29) indicates that this setting has no associated signal. If we wish to associate a signal, we
must enter the desired signal number with numeric keypad and press  (Enter).

User Manual 401
Figure 27 Small screen for modifying Figure 28 Small screen for modifying Figure 29 Small screen for modifying
DECIMAL type setting INTEGER type setting INTEGER type setting
23.2.1.4.3 Date Type

Equivalent to a numeric, although the numeric data entered are successively allocated in blocks of two to Day,
month, year, hour, minute, second. When the seconds have been entered, no further data can be entered until we
have press  (Enter) or <ESC> (the latter key deletes the data entered. If no data has been entered, we exit the
settings modification). The format displayed on the screen is: Day/Month/Year Hour:Min:sec
2 digits must always be entered for year, month and date. This means that in order to enter “1” we must enter
“01”.
If the user enters an incorrect value, the last character entered can be deleted with the “” (Left) key.
To exit without saving any changes, press <ESC>.
Once the correct data have been entered, press  (Enter) to check that the values entered are valid. In the event
of an error, an “INCORRECT DATE” text will be shown. If the data are valid, no windows will be shown.

User Manual 402
Figure 30 Unit date and time setting screen
23.2.2 Password management

23.2.2.1 Changing the Settings Menu Password
The password may contain between 4 and 8 digits. The password is 1357 by default.
When we press a numeric key within the password screen, each keystroke will be considered part of the password
and will be indicated in the display with “*”. When we have entered between 4 and 8 characters and pressed "Enter",
the data entered will be validated against the unit’s password. If the password entered is incorrect, a warning text will
be displayed.
Pressing <ESC> enables us to access the settings menus with viewing only permissions. If we enter the correct
password we will be able to view and modify. <ESC> will function even when certain of the password’s numbers have
been entered, i.e., if we press <ESC> while we are entering the password we will access the menu with viewing only
permission.
The user can change the password, providing that he or she knows the former password.
You will be asked to type the password twice before changing it. The password numbers will appear hidden as they
are entered (the “*” will appear for each number entered). Once the first password has been entered, press  (Enter)
and enter the second password. Once the second password has been entered, press  (Enter) and the password will
be changed (providing the two passwords entered are the same). As with the numbers, they are entered from left to
right.

User Manual 403
Figure 31 Password modification screen
23.2.2.2 Changing FTP and SFTP Passwords

The FTP or SFTP password modification screen is accessed via the settings menu. This screen shows a virtual
keyboard with numbers from 0 to 9, the alphabet in uppercase and in lowercase.
Operation
 We must use the  (Up),  (Down),  (Left) and  (Right) keys to navigate around the virtual
keyboard, whilst  (Enter) is used to confirm the selected keyboard field.
 We must enter the old password and select the "Validate" field before finally pressing  (Enter).
 We must then enter the new password and select the "Validate" field before finally pressing 
(Enter).
 A small window showing the result of the password modification (OK or the cause of the failure)
will be displayed.
If the user enters an incorrect value, must leave and enter the screen and start again.
Figure 32 FTP Password modification screen

User Manual 404
23.2.2.3 Commands management

23.2.2.3.1 Commands from the keyboard
There is a new settings menu within the Password screen to set the handling of commands from the keyboard.
These settings can only be changed from the display. There are 2 settings:
 Enabling key request to execute a command.

 Maximum time in which the entered password is valid, after this time you must enter the password again
(time in seconds).
Operation:
In graphic displays when you press the select key command the small screen that will ask the key display, after
entering the correct password will have some time to execute orders. After this time, the execution of orders will
not be allowed. The function keys have the same function.
The key settings menu and commands execution is the same, if you access the settings menu with the correct
password will be able to execute commands from the function keys without re-enter the password.
On the other hand, if you accessed the settings menu but only with permission from view settings, if you want to
run a command from the function keys will have to enter the password, same operation as if they were in a main
menu screen.
23.2.2.3.2 PacFactory commands

From firmware version 6.1.18.5, the device implements the possibility of receiving remote control commands from
the pacFactory software tool as an alternative control channel to the telecontrol center.
The device considers the origin of these commands as "Remote" and applies the configured Local / Remote
command hierarchy.
For security reasons this functionality is disabled in the factory configuration and can only be enabled or disabled
from the local HMI of the device. It is not possible to modify the configuration by communications or from the
pacFactory configuration tool.
The function is configured by the setting "pacFactory Commands" ("YES": enabled / "NO": disabled).
If the device has this functionality enabled, the pacFactory configuration tool will detect it at the beginning of the
communication and enable an access to the command window in the "Tools -> Sending commands" menu.

User Manual 405
23.3 NETWORK CONFIGURATION
From the display it is possible to view and modify the network parameters of the equipment. For this there are a series
Network configuration menus.
Figure 33 Figure 34
The previous figures show 2 examples of possible situations:
 Figure 33 shows that the equipment has a network configuration with the 3 independent and enabled interfaces.
 Figure 34 shows that the device has a network configuration of ETH1 and ETH2 in Link Redundancy mode, and
ETH1 has been disabled.
23.3.1 Ethernet Configuration

 Ethernets Viewing
When accessing the data of an interface from the main menu of network configuration, a screen similar to Figure
35 will be displayed, where the list of ips is presented, and 2 additional menus: Create new ips and enable or
disable the interface It is showing.
Figure 36 shows how the network interface, IP address, netmask, MAC address, and status link parameters are
displayed on the display, indicating whether the network cable is connected.
Depending on the configuration of the back ethernets the representation of some data of these interfaces varies:
ETH2 link: When a device is configured as a switch or link redundancy in the Network configuration screen on the
ETH2 interface line, the text of Switch or Link Redundancy. The network parameters are the same as the ETH1
interface except the link. For this reason, the ETH2 link status is displayed on the ETH1 screen.

User Manual 406
Figure 35 Figure 36 Figure 37
 Ips Editing
From the display screen (Figure 36) and having permissions to change settings by pressing the  (Enter) key, the
screen in Figure 38 shows the current data and a second row where you can enter the new values. Use the 
(Up),  (Down) keys to navigate the IP and MASK fields in a circular way, that is, when you reach the last, you
return to the first one.
Figure 38 Ethernet parameters setting changes screen
To exit, press <ESC>.
Only the IP and MASK fields can be modified. If you want to change any of these fields, you must activate the
special mode keypad to do this, press the <MENU> key. For more information, consult the point 1.2.1 in this
manual.
of an error, a small screen displaying the cause of the error will be shown.
 Ips Removing

User Manual 407
From the ip display screen (Figure 36
 Creating new ips

Once on this screen (Figure 39) you can use the following keys:
 For information on how to enter the numbers, refer to the Functioning of the menus in this manual.
 The  (Left) key is used to delete the last entered value.
 The  (Up) and  (Down) keys to move between the IP line and the MASK line.
 The <ESC> key is used to exit the previous menu.
 The  (Enter) key is used to apply the change.
Figure 39 Figure 40
 Disabling / Enabling Ethernets

Once on this screen (Figure 41Figure 39) you can use the following keys:
 The  (Up),  (Down) and  (Left) keys to change the setting value.
 The <ESC> key is used to exit the previous menu.
 The  (Enter) key is used to apply the change.

User Manual 408
Figure 41 Figure 42
When an ethernet is disabled, all ips associated with that interface will be deleted. The DISABLED text will appear
in the Network Setup menu. If we access the menu of this interface will be shown the screen of Figure 43, with
the ip 0.0.0.0.
If you want to enable again, change the setting to YES and then edit the IP1 to add the desired ip and mask
 Network configuration screen when there is a failure in the display configuration.

When there is a fault in the configuration of the display, there is the possibility to see the network configuration of
the equipment, pressing the  (Enter) key alternates the display of the error message and the screen with the
network configuration. The network configuration screen is shown below.
Figure 43
 Restore factory settings

At the end of the Network Configuration menu there is an option to restore the factory settings of the ethernets.

User Manual 409
23.3.2 Gateway Configuration

From the display it is also possible to view, add, modify and delete the gateways that are configured on the device. Up to
10 gateways can be configured, ONLY 1 of which can be a default gateway.
The following figures show the screens with the different interfaces for the unit’s network and gateways. We can see that
a default gateway with IP address 192.169.183.4 and a gateway with IP address 192.168.183.1 have been configured.
The remaining gateways have not been configured.
 Viewing a Gateway
If we select Gateway 2 and press  (Enter), the following screen appears (Figure 45) showing the Gateway’s data
values and a legend at the bottom with the different options available to the user.
Figure 44 Network Configuration Figure 45 Gateway display screen Figure 46 Default Gateway edition screen
If we select Gateway 1 and press  (Enter), the default gateway screen appears (Figure 46).
 Editing or creating a Gateway

If we press  (Enter) in the Gateway configuration screen and we have permission to change settings (having
entered the correct password into the password screen), the Gateway edition and creation screen will appear with
the current data and a second row into which the new values can be entered.
The following situations may arise when configuring a Gateway:
 Gateway Not Configured

 To add a default Gateway, we only have to complete the GATEWAY field (the Gateway IP address)
and press  (Enter). If not, an error will occur.
 To add a Gateway with a specific network destination, we must complete the 3 fields and press 
(Enter). If not, an error will occur.
 Gateway Configured
 To edit a default Gateway (Figure 46), we only have to modify the GATEWAY field (the Gateway’s IP
address) and, once the desired value has been entered, press  (Enter) for the change to become
effective.
 To edit a Gateway with a specific network destination, we change the desired parameter(s) and press
 (Enter). Any parameters that are not modified will retain the current values.
To add a new Gateway, select a non-configured gateway, for example Gateway 3, and press  (Enter).
This screen shows the values of the Gateway’s 3 fields as non-configured. In such a case, we can only exit or edit
(add) the Gateway. By pressing  (Enter) again, the Gateway edition/creation screen will be displayed.

User Manual 410
The  (Up),  (Down) keys are used to move between destination IP address, destination network mask and the
Gateway IP address fields in a circular manner. This is not possible in the default Gateway, which has a single
editable field.
To exit without saving any changes, press <ESC>.
If we want to enter the Gateway with the destination IP 10.15.1.6, Gateway mask 255.255.255.255 and Gateway
IP address 192.168.182.252, you must activate the special mode keypad to do this, press the <MENU> key. For
more information, consult the point 1.2.1 in this manual.
of an error, a small screen displaying the cause of the error will be shown.
The screen will display the new configuration and the new Gateway introduced.
NOTE: If a default Gateway is configured, the last Gateway will ALWAYS be displayed, even if more gateways
with a specific network destination are added.
Figure 47 Gateway parameters setting changes screen
 Deleting a Gateway
If we press the “” (Left) key in the Gateway configuration screen and we have permission to change settings
(having entered the correct password into the password screen), the Gateway that is being displayed will be
deleted.

User Manual 411
23.4 OTHER SCREENS
23.4.1 Contrast setting

To access the contrast setting screen we must press “0” and “9” at the same time in a screen that is not within the unit's
settings menu. Once we have pressed these two keys, the following image will appear in the display:
Figure 48 Contrast setting screen
If we then press  (Up) the contrast’s intensity will increase, and if we press  (Down), the intensity will decrease. To exit
this screen, press  (Enter).
23.4.2 USB treatment

When the user inserts a USB key, a small window will appear in the display indicating that a USB device has been
detected and the USB treatment will begin.
Figure 49 USB detected Figure 50 Remove the USB device

User Manual 412
Once the treatment has terminated, the following window will appear in the display indicating that we can remove the
USB device.
NOTE: If the USB device is not removed within 5 seconds, the small screen will disappear and the display will return to
the previous screen.
Added a new menu of settings in the Password screen to set the USB treatment, this setting can only be changed from
the display. The setting will have 3 possible values:
 Disabled: The USB treatment is not available.

 With password: The USB treatment is available but needs the introduction of the key settings menu.
 Without password: The USB treatment is available without having to enter the password.
23.4.3 System Information

In this menu the information concerning Product Information and detailed version of the device.
The content of each submenu is:
 Product information: commercial computer code and the serial number of the CPU is displayed.
 Device versions:
 Versions of the CPU and the various cards forming equipment are displayed.
 Micros expansion boards versions (CPU and HMI).
 Logic and CID versions.
 Last updates: last 18 updates are shown, for each update there is a record with the following data:
 Date and time of the update.
 Filename update.
 Result of the update.
 Last CIDs loaded: The display will show the latest cids loaded from the device boots where the following
information is displayed:
 Date and time.
 Cid name.
 Result validation.

User Manual 413
23.4.4 CID validation

Messages relating to the receipt and processing of a new CID on the device are displayed in a small window, the
operation is as follows:
 After a new CID give the device a small window indicating that you are validating the CID is displayed.
Throughout the process of validation when any key is pressed, the window disappears and you can access the
different menus display.
 Once the validation process resulting CID (CID Validated / CID unvalidated) is indicated in a new window, which
will remain on the display until you press any key or two minutes have elapsed.
Messages received new setting display is visualized between the windows and the window CID validating the result.
23.4.5 Security Logs

Are available which record user actions from the keyboard / display, such as:
 if the password setting menu or the key is modified FTP

 If the password is correct or incorrect
 Whether to enable / disable Enabling Ethernet ports
 If there is a change in the network configuration
23.4.6 Test Screens

There are 2 test screens on your device for digital outputs and programmable LEDs. To enter these screens need to
have entered the correct password to enter the settings menu.
The output test screen is in the Setup menu of GGIO cards. It defines the different cards and display equipment shown to
modify the time setting output activation.
Once access to one of the cards all outputs and the corresponding connection is. To activate the desired output is only
necessary to select and press  (Enter).
Pressing  (Up) or  (Down), keys allow to select different outputs. To return to the previous menu, press the '<ESC>
key.

User Manual 414
Figure 51 Digital Output Test Figure 52 GGIO1 Test Figure 53 Leds Test
The LED screen test is in the I/O/Leds configuration menu.
To activate the desired LED is only necessary to select and press  (Enter) key. Pressing  (Up) or  (Down), keys allow
to select different led. To return to the previous menu, press the '<ESC> key.
23.4.7 Other Communications Menu Screens

The following submenus are available within the Communications menu:
 Network Configuration: mentioned in its corresponding section.
 PRP / HSR / Sw configuration: the ethernet corresponding to PRP, HSR or switch is configured (only available
in models with redundancy module PRP/HSR/Switch mode).
 Process Bus: shows the information of ethernets 3 and 4 if they are available (only available in models with
sampled values subscriptions).
 Communications protocols: a series of slave / server and master protocols are available depending on the
model of the equipment.

User Manual 415
WEB APPLICATION 
24. WEB APPLICATION
24.1 INTRODUCTION
This document describes the features and capabilities of the Web Application, which is supplied within the firmware and
allows to set up and monitor the target IED.
The Web Application has been built in order to be responsive, HTML5 and CSS3 compliant and as lightweight as possible. It
is supported by the following browsers and versions:
 Google Chrome version 40.0.2214 or higher.

 Mozilla Firefox version 35.0.1 or higher.
 Internet Explorer version 10 or higher.
24.2 WEB APPLICATION LOGIN
First, the IP address of the IED must be entered into the browser's address bar in order to load the login page, i.e.:
http://100.0.0.1.
24.2.1 Login
The login page needs a username and its password to login.
There are two users defined by default: a management user and a read-only user. The main difference between them is
that management user is able to modify parameters while read-only user is not. However, when a user with management
permissions logs in, it is asked whether he would like to login with management permissions or with read-only
permissions.
When a management user tries to login, if there is already a management user logged in, the new user will be asked
whether to log in as read-only user or throw away already logged user.
Once the login has been successful the web page starts to load several tabs described below.

Manual de usuario 416
WEB APPLICATION 
24.3 TABS
The main tabs are the following:
 Reports
 Settings
 Maintenance
 SW/Configuration
 Logout
24.3.1 Reports
The following subtabs are displayed in this tab:
 Status
 Events
24.3.1.1 Status
In the Status tab real-time information about measures and signals is shown. It is possible to read this information
periodically or each time the read button is clicked.
In the Measurements menu, the main measures taken in the secondary are shown.
In the Signals menu, the most important signals regarding IED status, protection units, input and outputs status, etc. are
shown.

WEB APPLICATION 

WEB APPLICATION 
24.3.1.2 Events
In this tab, the list of events recorded by the IED can be displayed and a compressed file with all the events can be
downloaded.

WEB APPLICATION 
24.3.2 Settings
In this tab, it is possible to read and change the settings of the IED.
The settings are arranged in menus regarding their functionality and they are read from the IED according to these
menus. At the bottom of the page there are three buttons in order to read settings, erase changes and send changes to
the IED.
The settings are displayed as tables where the first column is the description of the setting, the second column is its
value in the IED and the last column is its value in the web. The background color of each setting's row changes
according to its value. If the value in the IED and the value in the web do not match the background will turn into yellow.
On the other hand, if the value in the web is not valid the background will turn into red.
In addition, it is possible to change the active table and view the value of each setting for every table.

WEB APPLICATION 
24.3.3 Maintenance
This tab contains the following tabs:
 Communications
 Users
24.3.3.1 Communications
The following menus are available:
 Synchronization. It is possible to synchronize the IED with the desired date and time.
 IP Network configuration. It allows to configure the IED's IP addresses and static routes configuration
 IP Network Tools. It is possible to execute a ping command from the IED and view IED's actual IP
configuration and routing tables.

WEB APPLICATION 
24.3.3.2 Users
In this tab, detailed information about current active sessions logged into the web is shown.
Additionally, it is possible to change username and password.
24.3.4 SW/Configuration
The SW/Configuration tab contains the following tabs:
 Configuration
24.3.4.1 Configuration
In this tab it is possible to load the configuration file.

WEB APPLICATION 
24.3.5 Logout
This tab is to end the session in the web.

DNP PROTOCOL 
25. DNP PROTOCOL
25.1 INTRODUCTION
The device provides a DNP interface to act as RTU and to communicate with a DNP master (for example a remote control
station).
The communication can be selected for a serial line or via Ethernet, using encapsulation by means of the TCP/IP protocol.
Below are described the following topics:
 Protocol configuration settings

 Protocol configuration tables for digital signals, measurements, counters and commands (which are configured
with the software configuration tool)
 Implemented Device Profile and object table.
25.2 CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
The protocol has the following configuration settings:
 Enable protocol:
 Yes
 No
 Slave address: DNP slave address of the device. Value between 0 and 65532.
 Master address: DNP master address of the master device. Value between 0 and 65532.
 Port Number: This setting enables the selection between the available communication channels:
 Disable
 COM1
 COM2
 COM3
 COM4
 COM5
 COM6
 Ethernet 1
 Ethernet2
 Comm speed (bauds): This setting enables the selection of the serial baud rate.
 600 baud
 1200 baud
 2400 baud
 4800 baud
 9600 baud
 19200 baud
 38400 baud
 57600 baud

DNP PROTOCOL 
 Parity: Enables the selection of the parity type to be used in transmission. The recommended default value is 0
(without parity), as indicated by the DNP protocol.
 None
 Even
 Odd
 Number of Stop bits: Enables the selection of the number of stop bits.
 1 Bit
 2 Bit
 Communication control: Enables de selection of the communication control type.
 Normal
 Fixed + DCD
 RTS
 RTS+CTS
 RTS+CTS+DCD
 RS485
 Min. respond delay (ms): Waiting time for the activation of the RTS and the transmission of a message after the
reception of a message. Value between 0 and 1000.
 CTS max delay (ms): Waiting time for the CTS activation after the RTS activation. Value between 0 and 1000.
 Carrier stabilization (ms): Waiting time for the transmission of the message after the CTS detection in order to
allow the carrier stabilization. Value between 0 and 1000.
 RTS drop-off time (ms): Waiting time for the RTS deactivation after the message last byte transmission.
 ACK delay time(ms): Timeout for Link Confirm. Value between 0 and 1000.
 Need time delay (m): Waiting time in minutes that must elapse before the validity of the clock is checked after
receiving a synchronization or start up message. If it is invalid, synchronization is requested to the master.
Value between 0 and 10.
 Permission to synchronize: Synchronization permission from control centre.
 Yes
 No
It is used to configure the synchronization source when there are several available.
 Local time offset (h): Local offset for the time.

 Communication fail T.(min): Waiting time in minutes without receiving any valid measure before indicate
communication failure. Value between 0 and 10000 minutes.
 Data link confirm: Indicates if confirm is requested at the connection level. The value must be set to NO for
TCP/IP.
 NO
 YES
 Max. App Fragment Size: Maximum number of bytes in an application message. Value between 512 and 3072.
 Freeze time counters: : Indicates if the counters are frozen with or without time. Only acts when zero variation is
requested.
 NO
 YES
 Default Status: Indicates whether the digital signal objects, measurements and counters are sent with status or
without status in messages sent in response to requests in which variation is not specified. Also valid for
responses to class 0 requests. The bits have the following meanings:

DNP PROTOCOL 
Bit Value
0 Send all with status
1 Send digitals with status
2 Send measurements with status
3 Send counters with status
4 Send frozen counters with status
 Bin. output status default: Indicates whether the reply message to a class 0 data request also includes the
object corresponding to the binary outputs with status.
 NO
 YES
 Analog output status def.: Indicates whether the reply message to a class 0 data request also includes the
object corresponding to the analog outputs with status.
 NO
 YES
 Frozen Counters status def.: Indicates whether the reply message to a class 0 data request also includes the
object corresponding to the frozen counters with status.
 NO
 SI
 Analog input bits default: Indicates the default value for the "Var" field in the analog objects when no variation is
requested.
 16 Bits
 32 Bits
 Short floating point
 Normalized: Indicates the analog format.
 Secondary.
 Normalized.
 Primary. (Not operative in the current version, if used, the device configures Normalized)
 Counter bits default: Indicates the default value for the "Var" field in the counter objects when no variation is
requested.
 16 Bits
 32 Bits
 Enable unsolicited: Enables the use of unsolicited responses with class 1, 2 o 3.
 NO
 YES
 Enable collision avoidance: Enables the collision avoidance detection with DCD method.
 NO
 YES
 Fixed Unsolicited T.out (ms): Fixed waiting time before transmitting an unsolicited response. Value between 0
and 5000.
 Variable Unsolicited T.out (ms): Variable waiting time additional to the previous setting of fixed time. The value
options are :

DNP PROTOCOL 
Setting Value Time in ms

0 255
1 127
2 63
3 31
4 15
5 7
6 3
7 1
 Unsolicited Repeat T.out (s): Waiting time in seconds before a retransmission of an unsolicited response when
there is not a link or application acknowledge to the previous message. Value between 0 and 630 seconds.
 Max.number rep. without solic.: Maximum number of retransmission of an unsolicited response. Value between
0 and 65535. Infinite for value 0.
 Special operations: Enables the activation of certain operational characteristics.
Bit Bit indication at 1

0 Dispatch of current counters with OBJ = 21
1 Reserve
2 Dispatch of unsolicited responses up to the IIN included each 10 seconds
3 Reserve
4 Reserve
5 Reserve
6 Restart message not sent on start up
 Change wait time (s): Waiting time for the SOE in the internal queue before processing the events. It is only
necessary if there are data from different IEDs in order to sort them chronologically.
 TCP Listen Port: TCP port used as server.
 Reply SA Timeout (ms): Time, in milliseconds, to detect communication failures while Secure Authentication
enabled.
 Aggressive Mode: Use of Aggressive Mode.
 Session Key interval: The session key change timeout used to determine when the session keys are invalid.
 Session Key Count: The session key count determines the number of ASDUs transmitted in either direction
since last key change.
 Max.Error Count: Authentication error once Maximum Error Count is exceeded.
 MAC Algorithm: The HMAC algorithm used.
 Unsolicited react. delay (s): The waiting time to retry again the maximum number of retries an unsolicited
message. Value between 0 and 3600 seconds. Zero does not apply.
 Command selection time (ms): The waiting time to abort the selection command. Value between 100 and 15000
miliseconds. Default 15000.
 Max command wait time (ms): The maximum time waiting the protocol to the result of the command before
responding to the master. If expired is indicated “Not supported” Default 0.
 Enable T.correct.buf.events: True value performs the correction date all still digital events queues when the first
syncrhronization is received. The device does not answer with digital events since the first synchronization.
Default No.
The configuration settings for the first DNP are in the GEN\DNPITCP1 node IEC 61850 data model, as detailed in
the following table:

DNP PROTOCOL 
Table 228 DNP protocol settings

ProtEna Enable protocol NO/YES Boolean
Slave Slave address 0 65532 1 Int32
Master Master address 0 65532 1 Int32
Disable
COM1
COM2
COM3
Port Port Number COM4 Enum
COM5
COM6
Ethernet 1
Ethernet2
600 baud
1200 baud
2400 baud
4800 baud
Speed Comm speed (bauds) Enum
9600 baud
19200 baud
38400 baud
57600 baud
Parity Parity None, Even, Odd Enum
Stopbit Number of Stop bits 1Bit, 2 Bit Enum
Normal
Fixed + DCD
RTS
RtsType Communication control Enum
RTS+CTS
RTS+CTS+DCD
RS485
RtsTmms Min. respond delay(ms) 0 1000 10 Int32
CtsTmms CTS max delay (ms) 0 1000 10 Int32
CarTmms Carrier stabilization (ms) 0 1000 10 Int32
RtsOffTmms RTS drop-off time (ms) 0 1000 1 Int32
AckTmms ACK delay time(ms) 100 10000 10 Int32
SynDl Need time delay(m) 0 10 1 Int32
SynEna Permission to synchronize NO/YES Boolean
SynOfs Local time offset(h) -12 12 1 Int32
ComFailTm Communication fail T.(min) 0 10000 1 Int32
LinkAck Data link confirm NO/YES Boolean
MaxAppSize Max. App Fragment Size 512 3072 256 Int32
FrzCnt Freeze time counters NO/YES Boolean
StDefault Default status 0 31 1 Meaning of bits (1) Int32
BinOutSt Bin. output status default NO/YES Boolean
AnOutSt Analog output status def. NO/YES Boolean
FrCntSt Frozen Counters status def. NO/YES Boolean
16 Bits
AnInBits Analog input bits default 32 Bits Enum
Short floating point
Primary, Normalized
Normalized Normalized Enum
Secondary
CntBits Counter bits default 16 Bits, 32 Bits Enum
UnSolEna Enable unsolicited NO/YES Boolean
CollEna Enable collision avoidance NO/YES Boolean
FixedTmms Fixed Unsolicit.Timeout (ms) 0 5000 10 Int32
255, 127, 63, 31, 15,
VarTmms Var. Unsolicit. Timeout (ms) Enum
7, 3, 1
UnSolTmms Unsolicit. Repeat T.out (s) 0 630 1 Int32
UnSolMaxR Max.number rep. without solic. 0 65535 1 Int32
SpecialBeh Special operations 0 255 1 Int32
CambTms Change wait time (s) 0 20 1 Int32
TcpPort TCP Listen Port 0 65535 1 Int32
ReacTms Unsolicited react. delay (s) 0 3600 1 Int32
TselecTmms Command selection time (ms) 100 15000 10 Int32
TOWaitTmms Max command wait time (ms) 0 1000 10 Int32
FixSynEna Enable T.correct.buf.events 0 1 1 Boolean

DNP PROTOCOL 
Where:
Meaning of bits (1) Bit Value
Send all with status 0 YES/NO
Send digitals with status 1 YES/NO
Send measurements with status 2 YES/NO
Send counters with status 3 YES/NO
Send frozen counters with status 4 YES/NO
25.3 TABLES
There are 4 tables to configure the list of digital status (binary inputs), analogs, counters and commands.
25.3.1 Digital status table

For each element the following fields must be configured*:
 Type: Type of signal.

 Simple.
 DNP Signal: Signal number with respect to the DNP protocol. Values from 0 to 4093. It should start at 0
and gaps are not allowed.
 CIN: Signal incidence code:
 SP Value change in simple signaling
 InternalIED: IED of the signal. Value 0 corresponds to the device itself.
 Internal ID: Internal signal number that identifies the element inside the device.
 Class: Default class assigned to the signal. With value 0 the signal does not cause changes.
 Class 0
 Class 1
 Class 2
 Class 3
 Time: Time format for changes.
 Without time
 Absolute time
 Relative time
 Inverted: Indicates if the signal status is inverted. By default is not inverted.
 Not inverted
 Inverted
*The protocol configurator allows other non-operational options in this version.
25.3.2 Analog values table

For each element the following fields must be configured:
 DNP signal: DNP analog number. Values between 0 and 1023. Gaps are allowed.
 Internal IED: IED of the analog value. Value 0 corresponds to the device itself.
 Internal ID: Internal analog number that identifies the element inside the device. Selectable from a list.
 Class: Class assigned to the analog value. With value 0 the analog value does not cause events.
 Class 0

DNP PROTOCOL 
 Class 1
 Class 2
 Class 3
 Dead band: Absolute variation value to cause an event. Values between 0 and 10000. It is applied over
the value stored in 16 bits.
 Dec: Number of decimal places for the analog value when the setting “Normalizado” is set to Primary or
Secondary. (Factor of 10 raised to the number of decimal). Values between 0 to 4. At value 0, the value is
sent without modifications.
 Limit scale: Full scale used when the setting “Normalizado” takes the Normalized value. It is the value that
causes 32767 to be sent in DNP.
 The deadband is defined as the value that the analog value must vary to be sent as a event. It is always
applied on the current value of the measure to be sent.
When the analog values are to be sent, the current value is compared to the last sent value and if the difference is
greater than the DeadBand the current value is transmitted. A zero value does not generate any events.
25.3.3 Counters table
 DNP signal: DNP counter number. Values between 0 and 63. Gaps are allowed.
 Internal IED: IED of the counter value. Value 0 corresponds to the device itself.
 Internal ID: Internal counter number that identifies the element inside the device. Selectable from a list.
 Class: Class assigned to the counter. With value 0 the counter value does not cause changes.
 Class 0
 Class 1
 Class 2
 Class 3
 Dead band: Absolute variation value to cause an event. Values between 0 and 10000.
25.3.4 Commands table

Fields that are expected to be received in the DNP command message:
 DNP command: DNP command number. Values between 0 and 255.

 Op type: DNP command value.
 TRIP
 CLOSE
 Latch ON
 Latch OFF
 Pulse ON
 Pulse OFF (deprecated)

DNP PROTOCOL 
 Comand type:
 All. All types supported.
 SBO. Only Selec Before Operate supported.
 DO. OnlyDirect operate supported.
Order configuration fields on the device itself:
 Internal IED: IED of the command. Value 0 corresponds to the device itself.
 Internal ID: Internal counter number that identifies the element inside the device. Selectable from a list.
The internal value is affected by the next field.
 ON_OFF: Internal command value. Use to select Internal ID.
 ON
 OFF
 Origin:
 Bay Control
 Station Control
 Remote Control
 Automatic Bay
 Automatic Station
 Automatic Remote
 Maintenance
 Process
Only one command is accepted in each message, count = 1. The On Time and Off Time fields are not used.

DNP PROTOCOL 
25.4 DEVICE PROFILE
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT

Vendor Name: INGETEAM S.A.
Device Name: INGEPAC EF
Highest DNP Level Supported:
Device Function:
For Requests Level 3
 Master  Slave
For Responses Level 3
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete list is
described in the attached table):
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):
Transmitted 292 Transmitted 1024< >3072( configurable)
Received 292 Received 1024
Maximum Data Link Re-tries:
Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:
 None
 None
 Fixed at 1
 Configurable, range ____ to ____
 Configurable, range __ to __
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:
 Never
 Always
 Sometimes
 Configurable
Requires Application Layer Confirmation:
 When reporting Event Data
 When sending multi-fragment responses
Timeouts while waiting for:
Data Link Confirm  None  Fixed at _________  Variable  Configurable
Complete Appl. Fragment  None  Fixed at _________  Variable  Configurable
Application Confirm  None  Fixed at __10 sg____  Variable  Configurable
Complete Appl. Response  None  Fixed at _________  Variable  Configurable
Others
Sends/Executes Control Operations:
WRITE Binary Outputs  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
SELECT/OPERATE  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE – NO ACK Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Count > 1  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Pulse On  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Pulse Off  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Latch On  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Latch Off  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Queue  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Clear Queue  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Reports Binary Input Change Events when no specific variation

Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events when no
requested:
specific variation requested:
 Never
 Never
 Only time-tagged
 Binary Input Change With Time
 Only non-time-tagged
 Binary Input Change With Relative Time
 Configurable to send both, one or the other (attach
 Configurable (attach explanation)
explanation)
Sends Unsolicited Responses:
 Never Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:
 Configurable (attach explanation)  Never
 Only certain objects  When Device Restarts
 Sometimes (attach explanation)  When Status Flags Change
 ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED
Function codes supported
Supports Collision Avoidance: Configurable Collision Avoidance Detection Method: DCD
Counters Roll Over at:
Default Counter Object/Variation:
 No Counters Reported
 No Counters Reported
 Configurable (attach explanation)
 Configurable (attach explanation)
 16 Bits
 Default Object _________
 32 Bits
Default Variation ______
 Other Value _____________
 Point-by-point list attached
 Point-by-point list attached
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:  Yes  No

DNP PROTOCOL 
25.4.1 OBJECT TABLE

REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
(slave must parse) (master must parse)
Func Func
Qual Codes Qual Codes
Obj Var Description Codes Codes
(hex) (hex)
(dec) (dec)
1 0 Binary Input – All Variations 1,22 00,01,06
1 1 Binary Input 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
1 2 Binary Input with Status 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
2 0 Binary Input Change - All Variations 1 06,07,08
2 1 Binary Input Change without Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
2 2 Binary Input Change with Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
2 3 Binary Input Change with Relative Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
10 0 Binary Output - All Variations 1 00,01,06
10 2 Binary Output Status 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
Echo of
12 1 Control Relay Output Block 3, 4, 5, 6 17, 28 129
request
1, 7, 8, 9,
20 0 Binary Counter - All Variations 00,01,06
10,22
1, 7, 8, 9,
20 1 32-Bit Binary Counter 00,01,06 129 00,01
10
1, 7, 8, 9,
20 2 16-Bit Binary Counter 00,01,06 129 00,01
10
20 3 32-Bit Delta Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
20 4 16-Bit Delta Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
20 5 32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
20 6 16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
20 7 32-Bit Delta Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
20 8 16-Bit Delta Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 0 Frozen Counters - All Variations 1, 22 00,01,06
21 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 3 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 4 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 5 32-Bit Frozen Counter with Time of Freeze 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
21 6 16-Bit Frozen Counter with Time of Freeze 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter with Time of
21 7 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
Freeze
16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter with Time of
21 8 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
Freeze
21 9 32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 10 16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 11 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 12 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
22 0 Counter Change Event – All Variations 1 06,07,08
22 1 32-Bit Counter Change Event without Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
22 2 16-Bit Counter Change Event without Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28

32-Bit Delta Counter Change Event without
22 3 1 06, 07, 08 129 28
Time
16-Bit Delta Counter Change Event without
22 4 1 06, 07, 08 129 28
Time
23 0 Frozen Counter Events – All Variations 1 06, 07, 08 129
23 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event without Time 1 06, 07, 08 129 28
23 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event without Time 1 06, 07, 08 129 28
32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event without
23 3 1 06, 07, 08 129 28
Time
16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event without
23 4 1 06, 07, 08 129 28
Time
30 0 Analog Input - All Variations 1, 22 00,01,06
30 1 32-Bit Analog Input 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
30 2 16-Bit Analog Input 1 00,01,06 129 00,01

DNP PROTOCOL 
REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
(slave must parse) (master must parse)
Func Func
Qual Codes Qual Codes
Obj Var Description Codes Codes
(hex) (hex)
(dec) (dec)
30 3 32-Bit Analog Input without flag 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
30 4 16-Bit Analog Input without flag 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
30 5 Analog Input — Single-prec flt-pt with flag 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
32 0 Analog Change Event - All Variations 1 06,07,08
32 1 32-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
32 2 16-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
Analog Input Event — Single-prec flt-pt
32 5 1 06,07,08 129,130 28
without time
07,
2
quantity=1
50 1 Time and Date
07,
1 129 07, quantity=1
quantity=1
51 1 Time and Date CTO 129 07, quantity=1
51 2 Unsynchronized Time and Date CTO 129 07, quantity=1
52 2 Time Delay Fine 129 07, quantity=1
60 1 Class 0 Data 1 06
1 06,07,08
60 2 Class 1 Data
20, 21,22 06
1 06,07,08
60 3 Class 2 Data
20, 21, 22 06
1 06,07,08
60 4 Class 3 Data
20, 21, 22 06
1 00, 01 129 00
80 1 Internal Indications
2 00, index=7
No Object 13, 14
No Object 23

IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL 
26. IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
26.1 INTRODUCTION
The device provides an IEC 60870-5-103 interface to act as RTU and to communicate with a IEC 60870-5-103 master (for
example a remote control station).

 Protocol configuration tables for digital signals, measurements and commands (which are configured with the
software configuration tool)
Depending on the model, the device has the following settings:
 Yes
 No
 Slave address: Slave address of the device. Value between 1 and 254.
 COM1
 COM2
 COM3
 COM4
 COM5
 COM6
 600 baud
 1200 baud
 2400 baud
 4800 baud
 9600 baud
 19200 baud
 38400 baud
 57600 baud
 Parity: Enables the selection of the parity type to be used in transmission.
 None
 Even
 Odd
 Number of Stop bits: Enables the selection of the number of stop bits.
 1 Bit
 2 Bit
 Communication control: Enables de selection of the communication control type.
 Normal
 Fixed + DCD

 RTS
 RTS+CTS
 RTS+CTS+DCD
 RS485
 Min. respond delay (ms): Waiting time for the activation of the RTS and the transmission of a message after the
 CTS max delay (ms): Waiting time for the CTS activation after the RTS activation. Value between 0 and 1000.
 RTS drop-off time (ms): Waiting time for the RTS deactivation after the message last byte transmission.
 Yes
 No
It is used to select the synchronization source when there are several available.
 Communication fail T.(min): Waiting time in minutes without receiving any valid measure before indicate
communication failure. Value between 0 and 10000.
 VDEW Compatible: A “No” value allows the use of private data range.
 No
 Yes
Compatible mode (Yes):
Digital control signals that are sent are those configured with a compatible Funtion Type. The zero value in the
table indicates Funtion Type = Compatible. The other signals do not appear.
The user is responsible for selecting the digital signals of the device in accordance to the IEC 60870-5-103
standard.
Analog measurements are at most the first nine measures configured in the table. The Function Type and
Information Number to use (144, 145, 146 o 148) depends on the number of configured measures. 1, 2, 4 or 9
measures in the measurements table respectively. In the last case the ASDU 9 is used instead of ASDU 3. The
user is responsible for selecting the device measures in accordance with IEC 60870-5-103.
Only the compatible commands are processed, those which in the table are configured by Function type = 0. The
user is responsible for selecting them according to IEC 60870-5-103.
Private mode (No):
All programmed control signals are sent.
The measures are sent with the Function Type field equal to "TYP in measurands ASDU" and Information
Number field equal to "INF in measuransds ASDU".
Supported commands are all that are programmed in the table.
 Function type: Value used to describe the type of protection equipment used.
 distance protection ( 128 )
 overcurrent protection ( 160 )
 transformer differential protection ( 176 )
 line differential protection ( 192 )
 TYP in measurands ASDU: This setting only applies when the adjustment VDEW is set to No. Indicates the
Function Type that is used in measurands ASDU.
 INF in measurands ASDU: The setting only applies when the adjustment VDEW is set to not. The field indicates
the Information Number used in measurands ASDU.

 Transformation ratio: Transformation ratio applied in the measurands.

 Secundary
 Primary
The configuration settings for the IEC 60870-5-103 are in the GEN\103ITCP1 node IEC 61850 data model, as detailed in the
following table:
Table 229 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol settings

Slave Slave address 1 254 1 Int32
COM1
COM2
COM3
Port Port Number Enum
COM4
COM5
COM6
600 baud
1200 baud
2400 baud
4800 baud
Speed Comm speed (bauds) Enum
9600 baud
19200 baud
38400 baud
57600 baud
None
Parity Parity Even Enum
Odd
1Bit
Stopbit Number of Stop bits Enum
2 Bit
Normal
Fixed + DCD
RTS
RtsType Communication control Enum
RTS+CTS
RTS+CTS+DCD
RS485
RtsTmms Min. respond delay(ms) 0 1000 10 Int32
CtsTmms CTS max delay (ms) 0 1000 10 Int32
CarTmms Carrier stabilization (ms) 0 1000 10 Int32
RtsOffTmms RTS drop-off time (ms) 0 1000 1 Int32
CambTms Change wait time (s) 0 20 1 Int32
VDEW VDEW Compatible NO/YES Boolean
distance protection
overcurrent -
protection
transformer -
FunTyp Function type Enum
differential
protection-
line differential
protection
FunTypMed TYP in measurands ASDU 0 255 1 Int32
InfMed INF in measurands ASDU 0 255 1 Int32
RT Transformation ratio Secundary/Primary Boolean
26.3 TABLES
There are 3 tables to configure the list of digital signals, measurements and commands.
26.3.1 Digital signals table

Each digital signal device is identified in the IEC60870-5-103 protocol by the pair of fields Function Type and Information
Number.

For each element the following fields must be configured with the software configuration tool:
 Function type: Function type field of the signal. In the case that the signal belongs to the compatible
range, (128, 160, 176 o 192), it should be configured a value of 0. The following values are not allowed:
129, 144, 145, 161, 177, 193, 208, 209, 224, 225, 240, 241, 254, 255.
 Information number: Information Number for the signal.
 Internal IED: IED of the signal value. Value 0 corresponds to the device itself.
 Internal ID: Internal signal number that identifies the element inside the device. In the case that the signal
belongs to the compatible range, the user is responsible for selecting the digital signals of the device in
accordance to the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
 General interrogation: When selected it indicates that the information is included in the general
interrogation (GI). For these Information Numbers both status changes (OFF to ON and ON to OFF) are
transmitted spontaneously. For the others Information Numbers only the status OFF to ON are
transmitted.
 Inverted: Indicates if the signal status is inverted. By default is not inverted
26.3.2 Measurements table

 Measure number: Measure position inside the ASDU. The first position is zero.
 Internal IED: IED of the signal value. Value 0 corresponds to the device itself.
 Internal ID: Internal measure number that identifies the element inside the device. In the case that the
measure belongs to the compatible range, the user is responsible for selecting the measure of the device
in accordance to the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
 Límit scale: Real positive measurement value corresponding to 4095 internal units. If the value is zero and
the transformation ratio setting indicates secondary, the database limit scale is applied to the measure. If
the value is zero and transformation ratio setting indicates primary, the database limit scale is applied to
the measure multiplied by the transformation ratio.

 Function type: Function Type field for the signal. In the case that the signal belongs to the compatible
range, (128, 160, 176 o 192), it should be configured a value of 0.
 Information number: Information Number for the signal.
 DCO: ON/OFF value of the command.
 IED interno: IED of the command value. Value 0 corresponds to the device itself
 Internal ID: Internal command number that identifies the element inside the device. In the case that the
command belongs to the compatible range, the user is responsible for selecting the command of the
device in accordance to the IEC 60870-5-103 standard
 Origin: Command origin. Allowed values:
 Bay Control
 Station Control
 Remote Control
 Automatic Bay
 Maintenance
 Process

SLAVE PROCOME PROTOCOL 
27. SLAVE PROCOME PROTOCOL
27.1 INTRODUCTION
The device provides a Procome interface to act as RTU and to communicate with a Procome master (for example a remote
control station).
The communication can be selected for a serial line or via Ethernet, using encapsulation by means of the TCP/IP protocol.

 Protocol configuration tables for digital signals, measurements, counters and commands (which are configured
with the software configuration tool)
 Disable
 COM1
 COM2
 COM3
 COM4
 COM5
 COM6
 Ethernet 1
 Ethernet 2
 Procome address: Procome slave address of the device. Value between 0 and 254.
 300 baud
 600 baud
 1200 baud
 2400 baud
 4800 baud
 9600 baud
 19200 baud
 38400 baud
 57600 baud
 115200 baud
 Parity: Enables the selection of the parity type to be used in transmission.
 Without parity
 Even
 Odd
 Number of Stop bits: Value between 1 and 2.

User Manual 439
 CTS wait time (ms): Waiting time for the CTS activation after the RTS activation. Value between 0 and 10000.
 RTS activation time (ms): Waiting time for the activation of the RTS and the transmission of a message after the
 RTS drop out time (ms): Waiting time for the RTS deactivation after the message last byte transmission.
 Channel Type: Enables de selection of the communication control type.
 Standard
 RTS Control
 By Phone
 Yes
 No
It is used to configure the synchronization source when there are several available.
 TCP Listen Port: TCP port used as server.
The configuration settings for the first PROCOME are in the GEN\ITCP1 node IEC 61850 data model, as detailed in
the following table:
Table 230 Slave Procome protocol settings
Ste
Data Setting Mín. Max. Remarks Type
p
Disable
COM1
COM2
COM3
Port Port Number COM4 Enum
COM5
COM6
Ethernet 1
Ethernet 2
DirEnl Procome Address 0 254 1 Uint32
300 baud
600 baud
1200 baud
2400 baud
4800 baud
VelTrans Speed (Bauds) Enum
9600 baud
19200 baud
38400 baud
57600 baud
115200 baud
Parity Parity None / Even / Odd Enum
Stopbit Number of Stop Bits 1 2 1 Uint32
PorTmms Carrier stabilization (ms) 0 1000 10 Uint32
ActCtsTmms CTS wait time (ms) 0 10000 5 Uint32
ActRtsTmms RTS activation time (ms) 0 5000 10 Uint32
DesRtsTmms RTS drop out time (ms) 0 5000 1 Uint32
Standard
TipoCan Channel type RTS Control Enum
By Phone
CambTms Change wait time (s) 0 20 1 Uint32
SynEna Permission to synchronize NO/YES Enum
TcpPort TCP Listen Port 0 65535 1 Uint32

User Manual 440
27.3 TABLES
There are 4 tables to configure the list of digital status (binary inputs), analogs, counters and commands.
27.3.1 Digital status table

 Remte Signal, (nP): Procome signal number. Values between 0 and 1023.
 IED, (UCL): IED of the signal. Value 0 corresponds to the device itself.
 Internal signal, (nUCL): Internal signal number that identifies the element inside the device.
 Inverted, (Inv): Indicates if the signal status is inverted. By default is not inverted.
 Not inverted (0)
 Inverted (1)
 Reference 61850 of signal.
27.3.2 Analog values table

 Remote Measure, (nP): number of measure Procome. Values between 0 and 255. Gaps are allowed.
 Internal IED, (UCL): IED of the analog value. Value 0 corresponds to the device itself.
 Internal ID, (nUCL): Internal analog number that identifies the element inside the device.
 Reference 61850 of measure.
27.3.3 Counters table

 Remote counter, (nP): Procome counter number. Values between 0 and 255. Gaps are allowed.
 Internal IED, (UCL): IED of the counter value. Value 0 corresponds to the device itself.
 Internal ID, (nUCL): Internal counter number that identifies the element inside the device.
 Reference 61850 of counter.

 Remote command, (nP): Procome command number. Values between 0 and 1023.
 Internal IED: IED of the command. Value 0 corresponds to the device itself.
 Internal ID, (nUCL): Internal command number that identifies the element inside the device. The value of
the Internal command ON corresponds to the number of even order and the value to be the odd OFF
 Source (origen):
 Station Control
 Remote Control
NOTE: If the 'source' field does not exist in the file, it takes as default Control Station.
 Reference 61850 of command.

User Manual 441
MODBUS MASTER PROTOCOL 
28. MODBUS MASTER PROTOCOL
28.1 INTRODUCTION
The Modbus master protocol allows communication with control and/or protection and measuring devices.
Currently, the device has only asynchronous serial communication, with a start bit, 8 bits of data and configurable parity and
stop bits.
The protocol allows the database to update with digital signals, measurements and counters. It also allows to send
commands. For some type of devices it allows to send synchronization messages and request for signal changes or events.
A configuration table, generated with a software tool dedicated to this effect, will indicate the number of information elements
of each type that each equipment has, as well as its address according to the Modbus RTU protocol.
The following are detailed:

 Data types that can be requested/written from/to slave devices
 Modbus functions that are implemented in the protocol
 Types of RTU to communicate with
 Configuration software tool
 Modbus messages supported
 No
 Yes
 Port Number: It allows to set the communication channel between the available serial COMs.
 COM1
 COM2
 COM3
 COM4
 COM5
 COM6
 Comm speed (bauds): It allows to select the serial transmission speed.
 600 baud
 1200 baud
 2400 baud
 4800 baud
 9600 baud
 19200 baud
 38400 baud
 57600 baud

User Manual 442
 Parity: It allows to select the type of parity to be used in the transmission.

 None
 Even
 Odd
 Number of stop bits:
 1 Bit
 2 Bit
 Communication control: It allows to select the type of communication channel.
 RS232_FO
 RS485
 RTS activation delay Time (ms): Minimum waiting time to activate the RTS and start the transmission. Value between 0
and 5000.
 CTS max delay (ms): How much time the device will wait to activate the CTS after the activation of the RTS. Value
between 0 and 10000.
 Carrier stabilization (ms): Waiting time to start the transmission, once CTS has been detected, in order to stabilize the
carrier. Value between 0 and 5000
 RTS dropoff time (ms): This is the time that the RTS signal keeps activated after the transmission of the last byte. Value
between 0 and 5000.
 Respond delay time (ms): Maximum time that the master waits to receive the slave response. Value between 10 and
30000.
 Inter request time (ms): The time between two request cycles of the master device. Value between 10 and 30000.
 Transmission retries number: Indicates the number of data request retries the master device does, if it does not receive
any response from the slave device at a given time (Respond delay time). Value between 0 and 10.
Table 231 Modbus Master protocol settings

COM1
COM2
COM3
Port Port Number Enum
COM4
COM5
COM6
600 baud
1200 baud
2400 baud
4800 baud
BaudRate Comm speed (bauds) Enum
9600 baud
19200 baud
38400 baud
57600 baud
Stopbit Number of stop bits 1 Bit / 2 Bit Enum
RS232_FO
ChType Communication control Enum
RS485
ActRtsTmms RTS activation delay Time (ms) 0 5000 10 int32
ActCtsTmms CTS max delay (ms) 0 10000 10 int32
CarTmms Carrier stabilization (ms) 0 5000 10 int32
DesRtsTmms RTS dropoff time (ms) 0 5000 10 int32
RespTmms Respond delay time (ms) 10 30000 10 int32
IntgcTmms Inter request time (min) 10 30000 10 int32
RetryNumb Transmission retries number 0 10 1 Int32

User Manual 443
28.3 DATA TYPES
The protocol allows the master device to read signals, measurements and counters from the slave devices. It also allows
sending commands to the devices. In addition it allows to request signal changes and synchronization for the next devices:
PL300 and TCP-IH.
Different types and formats of signals, measurements and counters are supported. The device configuration will indicate the
data and formats to be requested for each slave.
28.3.1 Digital signals

The Modbus master has the following signal types:
Table 232 Digital signal types
Type Description Remarks

1 Relay status Status of relays bit by bit
4 Digital signal (16 signals/WORD) Digital inputs as 16-bit registers, 16 signals in each word
Similar to type 1 and 14 but to read the information of one
5 Device status
single byte: Fast read of a byte.
12 Digital signal (1 signal/WORD) Digital inputs as 16-bit registers. One digital input per word
14 Input status Digital inputs bit by bit
Type 14 can only be used for RTU type 5.
28.3.2 Measurements
The Modbus master has the following measurement types:
Table 233 Measurement types

2 Measurement For reading measurements with F03/F04 functions
7 Additional measurement For reading measurements with F03 function
Type 7 can only be used for RTU type 5.
The Modbus master has the following measurement formats:
Table 234 Measurement format types
Format Description Remarks
0 8 bits, unsigned Measurements in 8-bit unsigned format
1 8 bits, signed Measurements in 8-bit signed format
6 Float point Measurements in floating format
10 Procome Measurements in Procome format in accounts
11 15 bits plus sign Measurements in 16-bit signed format with sign in the higher bit

User Manual 444
28.3.3 Counters
Table 235 Counter types
3 Counter Counter reading
The following counter formats are supported

Table 236 Counter format types
Format Description Remarks
0 8 bits, unsigned Counters in 8-bit unsigned format
1 8 bits, signed Counters in 8-bit signed format
6 Float point Counters in floating format
Counters in 32-bit floating format:

7 Float point / 1000
The value is sent divided by 1000
28.3.4 Commands
The Modbus functions implemented in the device for the execution of commands are F05 and F16. Only one type of
function can be used for each device.
The information related to the Modbus functions is in the sections of Implemented functions and RTU types of this
manual.
28.3.5 Request of events to Ingeteam Power Technology

devices
Currently, the request of events or signal changes it is only implemented for PL300 and TCP-IH. This request may be
enabled from the “Modbus master configurator”.
28.3.6 Synchronization
Currently, the synchronization it is only implemented for PL300 and TCP-IH.
28.4 IMPLEMENTED FUNCTIONS
The Modbus master functions that may be used for requesting and writing data in the slave devices are the following:

User Manual 445
Table 237 Implemented Modbus functions
Function Code Description

01 Read Coils
02 Read Discrete Inputs
03 Read Holding Registers
04 Read Input Registers
05 Write single coil
07 Read exception status
16 Write multiple registers
The Modbus master will use these functions taking into account the type and database of the device configured in the
“Modbus master configurator”
28.5 RTU TYPES
The following table shows the type of devices currently considered in the Modbus master and the Modbus functions used for
each type:
Table 238 Characteristics of RTU types
RTU types Signal changes/Events Data request Command execution Synchronization
F01
1 NO F05 NO
F04
F01
3 NO F16 NO
F03
F02
F03
4 NO F05 NO
F04
F07
F01
F02
5 NO F16 NO
F03
F04
F01
10 YES F16 YES
F03
14 NO F04 NOT IMPLEMENTED NO
 RTU type 1: It supports reading digital outputs bit by bit, reading registers and writing digital outputs bit by bit
 F01: Function for reading digital outputs bit by bit
 F04: Function for reading registers
 F05: Function for writing digital outputs bit by bit
 RTU type 3: It supports reading digital outputs bit by bit, reading registers and writing multiple registers
 F16: Function for writing multiple registers
 RTU type 4: It supports reading digital inputs bit by bit, reading registers and exception states and writing digital outputs
bit by bit
 F02: Function for reading digital inputs bit by bit
 F07: Function for reading exception states
 F05: Function for writing digital outputs bit by bit

User Manual 446
 RTU type 5: It supports reading outputs and digital inputs bit by bit, reading registers and writing multiple registers
 F02: Function for reading digital inputs bit by bit
 F16: Function for reading multiple registers
 RTU type 10: It supports reading digital outputs bit by bit, reading registers and writing multiple registers
 F16: Function for reading multiple registers
The request of events and synchronization is currently only implemented for PL300 and TCP-IH.
 F03: Function for event requests
 F16: Function for synchronizing
 RTU type 14: It supports reading registers
28.6 SW CONFIGURATION TOOL
The Modbus master protocol is configured using the “Modbus master configurator” available in the PacFactory configuration
SW and EFS tools. This tool generates a configuration file that is sent to the device.
28.6.1 Fields to be configured

The tool has different tabs that are filled based on what is going to be integrated. Each tab has several fields.
 IED
 Modbus address
Address of the slave device (1 - 128). It is the value of the Modbus address of the device to communicate with.
 Internal address
Address of the slave device in the internal database. Its value is between 1 and 32. All the elements that are
requested from the device will be mapped on this address of the master database.
 RTU type
This field can take the following values: 1, 3, 4, 5, 10 and 14. The characteristics of each of these values are
given in the RTU Types section of this manual. It shows the functions used for each type of device.
 Sync RTU
Enables sending synchronization to the slave device. It is only implemented for RTU type 10 (TCP-IH or PL300).
To enable synchronization, the Sync RTU flag is activated. Once enabled, the following screen appears:

User Manual 447
The synchronization address of the device is indicated in the Sync address field.
PL300 = 240 and TCP-IH = 240.
Sync adjust (ftrans) is the time in ms that will be added to the synchronization time to correct possible drifts.
 Events request
It enables the request of signal changes of the slave device. It is only supported for RTU type 10 (PL300 or TCP-
IH).
Once enabled, the following screen appears:
In the Event address field, the signal change start address for the given device is indicated. PL300 = 20480 and
TCP-IH = 1664.

User Manual 448
 Endianness
It can take two values: Big Endian and Little Endian. Default value: Big endian.
It indicates the way in which the slave equipment sends the data.
Examples:
 Big endian
Description Floating data
Decimal value 212.5
Hexadecimal value 43 54 80 00
Data sent by communications 43 54 80 00
 Little endian
Description Floating data
212.5
Decimal value
 Digital signals
 Modbus address
Modbus address of the slave device. It can take values between 1 and 128.
 Modbus signal
Initial memory address of the signal to be read in the slave device database.
 Type
Type of signal to be read. See the “Digital signals” section of this manual.
 No. of registers
It is the number of signals or the number of registers to be read, depending on the type of signal.
Relay status, Device status or Input status: number of signals.

User Manual 449
Digital signal (16 signals / WORD) or Digital signal (1 signal / WORD): number of registers.
 Internal ID
It indicates the first position in the master internal communication database on which these signals will be
mapped. The automatic assignment must be used by clicking on the button highlighted in red in the image, Set
internal IDs
 Measurements
 Modbus address
 Modbus measurement
First memory address of the measurement to be read in the slave device database.
 Type
Type of measurement to be read. See the “Measurements” section of this manual.
 Format
Format of the measurement to be read. See the “Measurements” section of this manual.
 Swapping
Possible values: No swap, Byte Word swap, Byte swap and Word swap. Default value: No swap.
It indicates the order in which the slave device sends data greater than one byte. Usually used for measurements
and / or 32bit counters.
Examples:
 No swap
Description Integer data
Decimal value 70000
This is the most usual option.

User Manual 450
 Byte Word swap
Decimal value 70000
 Byte swap
Decimal value 70000
 Word swap
Decimal value 70000
 No. of elements
It is the number of measurements to be read from the “Modbus measurement” field.
 Scale factor
The measurement value in the internal database is the value read multiplied by the scale factor.
By double-clicking on this field, it appears a screen for the scale factor configuration for this measurement.

User Manual 451
 Internal ID
It indicates the first position in the master internal communication database, where these measurements will be
mapped. The automatic assignment must be used by clicking on the button highlighted in red in the image, Set
internal IDs.
 Counters
 Modbus address
 Modbus counter
Initial memory address of the counters to be read in the slave device database.
 Format
Format of the counters to be read. See the “Counters” section of this manual.
 Swapping
Possible values: No swap, Byte Word swap, Byte swap and Word swap. Default value: No swap.
It indicates the order in which the slave device sends data greater than one byte. Usually used for measurements
and / or 32 bit counters.
Examples:

User Manual 452
 No swap
Decimal value 120000
Hexadecimal value 00 01 D4 C0
Data sent by communications 00 01 D4 C0
This is the most usual option.
 Byte Word swap
Data sent by communications C0 D4 01 00
 Byte swap
Data sent by communications 01 00 C0 D4
 Word swap
Data sent by communications D4 C0 00 01
 No. of elements
It is the number of counters to be read from the “Modbus counter” field.

User Manual 453
 Scale factor
The counter value in the internal database is the value read, multiplied by the scale factor.
By double-clicking on this field, it appears a screen for the scale factor configuration for that counter.
 Internal ID
It indicates the first position in the master internal communication database where these counters will be mapped.
The automatic assignment must be used by clicking on the button highlighted in red in the image, Set internal IDs.
 Commands
 Modbus address
 Command No.
Number of command in the master internal database (0-3071).
 Modbus command
Modbus address for the command to be executed.
 Value
Value to be written on the Modbus command field.

User Manual 454
28.6.2 Configuration example

Database of the device to be integrated:
 Big endian
 Events request: No
 Synchronization: No
 Signals to be read
 From address 0
 Number of signals: 2
 Type: Digital outputs
 Measurements to read
 From address 0
 Number of measurements: 2
 Format: 16-bit unsigned
 Swapping: No swap
 Scale factors
 Measurement 0: 0.1
 From address 40
 Format: 16-bit signed
 Scale factors
 From address 66
 Scale factors
 Measurement 0: 1
 From address 500
 Format: 32-bit signed
 Scale factors
 From address 530
 Format: float
 Scale factors
 Counters to read
 From address 60

User Manual 455
 Number of counters: 4
 Scale factors
 Counter 0: 0.001
 Counter 1: 0.001
 Counter 2: 0.001
 Counter 3: 0.001
 Commands to execute
 Number of command 0
 Address: 0
 Value: 255
With this configuration, digital output 1 is activated.
 Address: 1
 Value: 255
With this configuration, digital output 2 is activated.
 Address: 0
 Value: 0
With this configuration, digital output 1 is deactivated.
 Address: 1
 Value: 0
With this configuration, digital output 2 is deactivated.
Database configuration:
 IED
 Digital signals
 Measurements

User Manual 456
 Counters
 Commands
28.7 SERIAL MESSAGES
The format of the serial communication messages used by the Modbus Master protocol is shown below, with the functions
used by the device as an example.
28.7.1 Format
 Master request:
 Remote address - 1 byte
 Function code - 1 byte
 Data - variable number of bytes
 CRC - 2 byte
 Slave response:

User Manual 457
 Data – variable number of bytes

 CRC - 2 byte
Remote address: Modbus address (Value between 1 and 128). Broadcast messages (address 0) are not allowed.
Function code: If it is > 127 (bit MSB to 1) it means that the remote has not performed the required function and will
answer with an error code.
CRC: LSB is sent first, followed by the MSB.
CRC generator (polynomial): x16 + x15 + x2 +1
28.7.2 Examples
 Function code 01 – Read n output bits
 Example:
 Remote address: 1
 Request of 12 output bits, from output 3 to 14 (All of these bits are activated)
Table 239 Request
Description Bytes Example (Hex)
Remote address 1 0x01
Function code 1 0x01
0x00
Starting address 2
0x03 Start reading on digital output 3
0x00
Number of digital outputs 2
0x0C Reading of 12 digital outputs
CRC 2 xx xx
Table 240 Response
0x02
Byte count 1
2 bytes
0x0F
Outputs status 2
0xFF
CRC 2 xx xx
 In the request response, the LSB of the Outputs status byte contains the value of the first output (output 3). The
rest of the bytes are sent in lowest to highest order. If the number of bits requested is not a multiple of 8, the byte
will be filled with zeros.
 Function code 02 – Read n input bits
 Request and response frames are identical to the function 01.
 Function code 03 – Read n output words

User Manual 458
 To read digital signals, measurements and counters.

 Example:
 Address: 0400h - Data: 00AAh
 Address: 0401h - Data: 00FFh
Table 241 Request
0x04
Starting address 2
0x00
0x00
Number of registers (words) 2
0x02
CRC 2 xx xx
Table 242 Response
0x04
Byte count 1
2 registers = 4 bytes
0x00
Register value 1 2
0xAA Value in address 0x400
0x00
Register value 2 2
0xFF Value in address 0x401
CRC 2 xx xx
 Function code 04 – Read n input words

 For reading digital signals, measurements and counters.
 Function code 05 – One-bit writing
 For writing a bit to ON or OFF.
 Example:
 Writing command number 24 to 1

User Manual 459
Table 243 Request
0x00
Command number 2
0x18
0xFF
Output value 2
0x00 Writing to 1
CRC 2 xx xx
Table 244 Response
0x00
Command number 2
0x18
0xFF
Output value 2
0x00 Writing to 1
CRC 2 xx xx
 Function code 07 – Read exception status

 Quick reading of a byte.
 Example:
Table 245 Request
CRC 2 xx xx
Table 246 Response
Output data 1 0x6D
CRC 2 xx xx

User Manual 460
 Function code 16 – Write multiple registers

Writing of values on the device.
Example:
Table 247 Request
0x00
Starting address 2
0x80
0x00
0x01
0x02
Byte count 1
1 register = 2 bytes
0x00
Register value 2
0x18 Number of command to execute
CRC 2 xx xx
Table 248 Response
0x00
Starting address 2
0x80
0x00
0x01
CRC 2 xx xx

User Manual 461
MODBUS SLAVE PROTOCOL
29. MODBUS SLAVE PROTOCOL

Available since 6.2.19.0 version of firmware and 8.3.0.5 of CID.
29.1 INTRODUCTION
The device has a Modbus slave protocol which can communicate with a telecontrol station or with any system that works as
a master.
The device has two types of communication:
 RTU (Remote terminal unit): Asynchronous serial communication, with a start bit, 8 bits of data and configurable parity
and stop bits.
 TCP/IP: Uses a TCP/IP network connecting through the registered port 502.
The protocol allows sending digital signals, measurements and counters to the master. It also allows the synchronization of
the device and the execution of commands.
A configuration table, generated with a software tool dedicated to this effect, will indicate the number of information elements
that the equipment has.
The following are detailed:

 Protocol profile
 Control processes
 Equipment address map
 Data format
 Configuration software tool
 Modbus messages supported (serial and TCP/IP)
 No
 Yes
 Modbus address: Modbus address of the slave device. Value between 1 and 128.
 Port number: It allows to set the communication channel
 COM1
 COM2
 COM3
 COM4
 COM5
 COM6
 Ethernet
 TCP listen port: It allows to set a number of network port to communicate via TCP/IP. Value between 0 and 65535.
Default value 502.
 Comm speed(bauds): It allows to set the speed of the serial transmission

User Manual
462
 600 baud
 1200 baud
 2400 baud
 4800 baud
 9600 baud
 19200 baud
 38400 baud
 57600 baud
 Parity: It allows to select the type of parity to use in the transmission
 None
 Even
 Odd
 Number of stop bits:
 1Bit
 2Bit
 Communication control: It allows to select the type of communication channel
 RS232_FO
 RS485
 RTS activation delay time (ms): Minimum waiting time to activate the RTS and start the transmission. Value between 0
and 5000.
 CTS max delay (ms): How much time the device will wait to activate the CTS after the activation of the RTS. Value
between 0 and 10000.
 Carrier stabilization (ms): Waiting time to start the transmission, once CTS has been detected, in order to stabilize the
carrier. Value between 0 and 5000.
 RTS dropoff time (ms): This is the time that the RTS signal keeps activated after the transmission of the last byte. Value
between 0 and 5000.
 Change wait time (s): Waiting time in queue of the changes configured in the protocol tables before starting their
treatment. It only makes sense if signals from different IEDs are configured for their previous chronological ordering.
 Request for changes: It allows to set if the master device makes the request for changes to the slave equipment
 No
 Yes
 Data transmission type: It allows to set the order of the data to be transmitted
 Big endian
 Little endian
 Permission to synchronize: It allows to set if the master device makes the synchronization of the slave equipment
 No
 Yes
 Server IP address: It filters the possible connections available in the slave device configuring an IP. Possible values in
the IP address range. The value 255.255.255.255 allows connecting to any available connection

User Manual
463
Table 249. Modbus slave protocol settings
Data Setting Min. Max. Step Possible values Type

DirEnl Modbus address 1 128 1 int32
COM1
COM2
COM3
Port Port number COM4 Enum
COM5
COM6
Ethernet
TcpPort TCP listen port 0 65535 1 int32
600 baud
1200 baud
2400 baud
4800 baud
BaudRate Comm speed (bauds) Enum
9600 baud
19200 baud
38400 baud
57600 baud
Stopbit Number of stop bits 1Bit / 2 Bit Enum
RS232_FO
ChType Communication control Enum
RS485
ActRtsTmms RTS activation delay time (ms) 0 5000 10 int32
ActCtsTmms CTS max delay (ms) 0 10000 10 int32
CarTmms Carrier stabilization (ms) 0 5000 10 int32
DesRtsTmms RTS dropoff time (ms) 0 5000 10 int32
EspColTms Change wait time (s) 0 20 1 int32
SolicChgs Request for changes NO/YES Boolean
Big endian
Endianness Data transmission type Enum
Little endian
SynEna Permission to synchronize NO/YES Boolean
IPRTU Server IP address 0 65535 1 IP

User Manual
464
29.3 PROTOCOL PROFILE
29.3.1 Implemented functions in Modbus RTU

The implemented functions for serial communication are shown below:
Function
Description Use
Code
This function code is used to read contiguous

01 Read Coils
status of signals in a remote device
This function code is used to read contiguous
02 Read Discrete Inputs
status of signals in a remote device
This function code is used to read the contents
03 Read Holding Registers of a contiguous block of registers in a remote
device
This function code is used to read the contents
04 Read Input Registers of a contiguous block of registers in a remote
device
This function code is used to write a single
05 Write Single Coil
output to either ON or OFF in a remote device
Writes a single register in a remote device (it is
06 Write Single Register
used to execute commands)
15 Write Multiple Coils
output to either ON or OFF in a remote device
Writes a single register in a remote device (it is
16 Write Multiple Registers
used to execute commands)
29.3.2 Implemented functions in Modbus TCP/IP

The implemented functions for TCP/IP communication are shown below:
Function
Description Use
Code
This function code is used to read

01 Read Coils contiguous status of signals in a remote
device
This function code is used to read
02 Read Discrete Inputs contiguous status of signals in a remote
device
This function code is used to read the
03 Read Holding Registers contents of a contiguous block of registers in
a remote device
This function code is used to read the
04 Read Input Registers contents of a contiguous block of registers in
a remote device
05 Write Single Coil output to either ON or OFF in a remote
device
Writes a single register in a remote device (it
06 Write Single Register
is used to execute commands)
15 Write Multiple Coils output to either ON or OFF in a remote
device
Writes a single register in a remote device (it
16 Write Multiple Registers
is used to execute commands)

User Manual
465
29.3.3 Exception codes

The protocol has the following exception codes:
Function Description Meaning

Code
The function code received in the query is
01 Illegal function
unknown by the server
The data address received in the query is
02 Illegal data address
not an allowable address for the server
A value contained in the query data field is

03 Illegal data value
not an allowable value for server
The server is processing other task. The
06 Server device busy client should retransmit the message later
when the server is free
29.4 CONTROL PROCESSES
29.4.1 Request for equipment status

Two functions can be used:
 Function 03
 Reading a register on 0000h address (see "Equipment address map" section of this manual). The device
respond is a byte with the LOCAL/REMOTE STATE of the device.
 Function 04
 It works the same way as Function F03.
29.4.2 Request for digital signals

The following functions can be used:
 Function 01
 Reading boolean data.
 Function 02
 Reading boolean data.
 Function 03
 Reading registers.
 Function 04

Address range:
 Digital signals: 0400h - 0480h
29.4.3 Request for measurements and counters

 Function 03

User Manual
466
 Function 04

Address range:
 Integer measurements: Address range 0480h - 0580h

 Counters: Address range 0580h - 0680h
 Floating type measurements: Address range 0700h - 0900h
29.4.4 Request for digital signal changes

The master device can get the information of all digital signal changes of the slave device, with the instant of time in
which they have happened. The process to do it is the following:
 Reading the address 0680h gets the number of changes to send by the slave device
 To obtain the information of the changes, reading the quantity of "number of changes x 5" on address 0682h is
needed. Reading range 0682h - 06FFh.
 The maximum quantity of registers that can be read is 125. This is the same as reading 25 changes since the
information of a digital signal change is stored in 5 registers. The number of registers to be read must be multiple
of 5.
 Signal change structure format:
Number
MSB LSB
of Address
(Most Signifant Byte) (Least Significant Byte)
change (n)
0682h e v E V Bits and Signal number Signal number
0683h Milliseconds Milliseconds
n=1 0684h Hours Minutes
0685h Month Day of the week and day of the month
0686h --- Year
1 < n < 25 … … …
06FBh e v E V Bits and Signal number Signal number
06FCh Milliseconds Milliseconds
n = 25 06FDh Hours Minutes
06FEh Month Day of the week and day of the month
06FFh --- Year
 Signal number: It is stored in the first byte of the information of a digital signal change and in the first four bits
of the next byte.
 V Bit: Validity of the signal after its change (0: valid / 1: invalid)
 E Bit: State of the signal after its change (0 / 1)
 v Bit: It indicates if the signal change is due to a change in the validity V (0 / 1)
 e Bit: It indicates if the signal change is due to a change in the state E (0 / 1)
 Milliseconds: It is stored in the second register of the information of a signal change. Range of values 0 -
59999.
 Minutes: It is stored in the first byte of the third register of the information of a signal change. Range of values
0 - 59.
 Hours: It is stored in the second byte of the third register of the information of a signal change. Range of
values 0 - 23.
 Day of the month: It is stored in the first byte of the fourth register of the information of a signal change. Its
value is registered in the first five bits of that byte. Range of values 1 - 31.
 Day of the week: It is stored in the first byte of the fourth register of the information of a signal change. Its
value is registered in the last three bits of that byte. Range of values 1 - 7.
 Month: It is stored in the second byte of the fourth register of the information of a signal change. Range of
values 1 - 12.

User Manual
467
 Year: It is stored in the fifth register of the information of a signal change. Range of values 0 - 99.
 Writing the value 0 in address 0681h the last signal changes sent are validated. This means that the signal
changes of the device are considered as sent.
 If the signal changes are not validated, the device will consider that they have not been sent.
 If the device had more signal changes it will indicate it in the address 0680h and the master station could request
them repeating the process
 To read all the signal changes of the device, the process must continue until the reading of the address 0680h
indicates value 0
The requests are made with functions F03 and F04 and the writings with function F16.
29.4.5 Requesting data via memory map

The data of the configured addresses can be read in a single request. The addresses can be non-consecutive.
Functioning:
 The configured addresses must be written using function F16. Range of the writing area 0180h - 01FCh
 The data of the configured addresses must be read using function F03 or F04. Range of the reading area 0100h
- 017Ch
 Up to 124 registers can be read and written
 The configured addresses must be in the range 0400h - 0680h and 0700h - 0900h
 To read the data of the configured addresses, the following must be taken into account:
 The position in the reading area from which to request the data, must be the same as the position in the
writing area where the configured addresses have been written
 Example:
 For a writing in address 0185h the reading has to be in address 0105h.
 Writing
 Writing address: 0185h
 Position in the writing area: 0185h - 0180h(initial address) = 0005h
 Reading
 The reading address must be: 0105h
 Position in the reading area: 0105h - 0100h(initial address) = 0005h
 The number of registers to be requested must be equal to the number of registers that add up the data of the
configured addresses
 Example:
 For a writing in address 0185h of the address 0400h, 0486h and 0581h the number of registers to be
requested must be 4.
 It must be ask for a register for the signals, another for the measurements of integer type and two registers
for the counters.
 Writing
 Writing address: 0185h
 Addresses configured:
 0400h: First word of digital signals
 0486h: Seventh measurement of integer type
 0581h: Second counter
 Reading
 Reading address: 0105h
 The number of registers to request must be 4:
 0400h: Occupies a register (G9)
 0486h: Occupies a register (G10)
 0581h: Occupies two registers (G11)
 See section "Equipment address map" and "Data format" for G9, G10 and G11.

User Manual
468
29.4.6 Synchronization
To synchronize the device it must be written with the function F16 the following information in the address 00F0h:
MSB LSB
Address
(Most Signifant Byte) (Least Significant Byte)
00F0h Milliseconds Milliseconds
00F1h Hours Minutes
00F2h Month Day
00F3h - Year
 To synchronize the device the four words must always be written. The partial writing of some data is not
allowed, it is always necessary to write the whole structure
 It is possible to read the address 00F0h to get the current time of the equipment. Any register can be read as
long as the range does not exceed the address 00F3h. For reading, functions F03 or F04 must be used
29.4.7 Command execution

 Function F05
 It allows the execution of commands to OFF and ON in the slave device database.
 For an OFF command it must be sent the number of command to execute and the operation value field to
0x0000.
 For an ON command it must be sent the number of command to execute and the operation value field to
0xFF00.
 Function F06
 It allows the execution of commands to ON in the slave device database.
 It must be written the number of command to execute in the address 0080h.
 Function F15
 It allows the execution of commands to OFF and ON in the slave device database.
 For an OFF command it must be sent the number of command to execute, the number of coils to be forced to
one and the operation value field to 0.
 For an ON command it must be sent the number of command to execute, the number of coils to be forced to
one and the operation value field to 1.
 It is only allowed the writing of one coil.
 Function F16
 It allows the execution of commands to ON in the slave device database.
 It must be written the number of command to execute in the address 0080h.
 It is only allowed the writing of one register.
Range of number of command to execute: 0 - 511

User Manual
469
29.5 EQUIPMENT ADDRESS MAP
Distribution of the equipment address map:

Register Memory
Description Length (words)
address(hex) zone
Identification of the equipment
0000 Device status 1 G1
Command address (*)
0080 Number of command to be executed 1 G2
System date
00F0 Milliseconds 1 G3
00F1 Hours and minutes 1 G4
00F2 Month and day 1 G5
00F3 Year 1 G6
User map
0100 User map values 124 G7
0180 User map addresses 124 G8
Reading zone
0400 Digital signal states 128 G9
0480 Measurements 256 G10
0580 Counters 256 G11
Digital signal changes zone
0680 Number of changes to be sent 1 G12
0681 Validation of sent changes (*) 1 G13
0682 Digital signal changes reading zone 125 G14
Reading zone
0700 Measurement 512 G15
Free memory zone
0900 Free
0HF Free
(*) Only for writing
The values of the Memory zone column are explained in the "Data format" section.

User Manual
470
29.6 DATA FORMAT
Data format depending on the memory zone (see section "Equipment address map"):
Memory
Format Description
zone
READING AREA OF THE DEVICE MODE
In the bit 0 LOCAL/REMOTE STATE of the device is indicated
G1 16 bits Value 0: REMOTE STATE
Value 1: LOCAL
Size of the area: A register (word)
WRITING AREA OF THE NUMBER OF COMMAND TO BE EXECUTED IN THE
SLAVE DEVICE DATABASE
G2 16 bits
Range of values: 0 - 511
MILLISECONDS READING AREA
G3 Unsigned 16 bits Range of values: 0 - 59999
READING AREA OF MINUTES AND HOURS
- Minutes: 0 to 7 bits
G4 16 bits
- Hours: 8 to 15 bits
READING AREA OF THE DAY OF THE WEEK AND MONTH
- Day: 0 to 7 bits
G5
16 bits - Month: 8 to 15 bits
READING AREA OF THE YEAR
- Year: 0 to 7 bits
G6 16 bits Range of values: 0 - 99
- It is not used: 8 to 15 bits
READING AREA OF THE VALUES OF THE CONFIGURED DATA ADDRESSES
- The unsigned 16 bits format is used for reading signals
16 bits - The signed 16 bits format is used for reading integer measurements
G7
Unsigned 32 bits - The unsigned 32 bits format is used for reading counters
Float - The Float format is used for reading floating type measurements
Size of the area: 124 registers (words)
WRITING AREA OF THE CONFIGURED ADDRESSES
G8 16 bits Range of values: 0400h - 0680h and 0700h - 0900h
READING AREA OF SIGNALS
G9 16 bits Compacted bits. A bit to 0 value means signal deactivated and to value 1 activated
READING AREA OF INTEGER MEASUREMENTS
G10 Signed 16 bits
READING AREA OF COUNTERS
G11 Unsigned 32 bits
READING AREA OF SIGNAL CHANGES TO BE SENT
G12 16 bits
WRITING AREA OF VALUE 0 TO VALIDATE THE SIGNAL CHANGES THAT HAS
G13 16 bits BEEN SENT
SIGNAL CHANGES INFORMATION AREA
G14
Unsigned 16 bits For more information go to the section "Request for digital signal changes"
Size of the area: 125 registers (word)
READING AREA OF FLOATING TYPE MEASUREMENTS
G15 Float

User Manual
471
29.7 CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE TOOL
The Modbus slave protocol is configured with the "Modbus Slave Configurator" available in the PacFactory configuration SW
and the EFS tools. This tool generates a configuration file that is sent to the device.
29.7.1 Fields to be configured

 Digital signals
 Modbus address
The number of the signal in the Modbus slave database. Range of values 0 - 2047.
 Internal IED
The address of the remote device from which read the signals. Range of values 0 - 32. The value 0 is the address
of the device itself.
 Internal ID
The number of the signal in the slave device database. It must be selected by clicking on button and choosing
the signal to be read. This signal will be mapped to the position indicated by Modbus address.
 Description
It doesn´t need to be configured. The own tool does it.
 IEC-61850 ref
 Inverted
 It allows to invert the value of the signal.
 Measurements
 Modbus address
The number of the measurement in the Modbus slave database. Range of values 0 - 255.
 Internal IED
The address of the remote device from which read the measurements. Range of values 0 - 32. The value 0 is the
address of the device itself.
 Internal ID
The number of the measurement in the slave device database. It must be selected by clicking on button and
choosing the measurement to be read. This measurement will be mapped to the position indicated by Modbus
address.

User Manual
472
 Description
 It doesn´t need to be configured. The own tool does it.
 IEC-61850 ref
 It doesn´t need to be configured. The own tool does it.
 Counters
 Modbus address
The number of the counter in the Modbus slave database. Range of values 0 - 127.
 Internal IED
The address of the remote device from which read the counters. Range of values 0 - 32. The value 0 is the
 Internal ID
The number of the counter in the slave device database. It must be selected by clicking on button and
choosing the counter to be read. This counter will be mapped to the position indicated by Modbus address.
 Description
 IEC-61850 ref
 Commands
 There are two options for the execution of commands depending on the function that is used (go to the section
"Command execution" for more detail): Commands to ON and to OFF/ON.
 The default configuration allows executing ON commands only.
 COMMANDS TO ON:
 Command
Number of the command in the Modbus slave database. Range of values: 0 - 511.
 Internal IED
The address of the remote device in which execute the commands. Range of values 0 - 32. The value 0 is the
 Internal ID
The number of the command in the slave device database. It must be selected by clicking on button and
choosing the command to execute. The execution of this command is a consequence of the activation of the
command number that appears in the field Command.

User Manual
473
 Description
 IEC-61850 ref
 ON/OFF
 Origin
It is the origin from where the commands are executed.
 COMMANDS TO ON AND OFF:

To execute commands to OFF the option in the "Modbus Slave Configurator" must to be enabled.
To do this, go to the "View" menu, click on "Options…" and the following image appears:
Enabling "Show OFF command" option in Modbus Slave and clicking on OK the following image where
commands to ON and OFF are configured is shown:

User Manual
474
 Command
Number of the command in the Modbus slave database. Range of values: 0 - 511.
 Internal IED
The address of the remote device in which execute the commands. Range of values 0 - 32. The value 0 is the
 Internal ID(ON)
choosing the command to execute. The execution of this command is a consequence of the activation of the
command number that appears in field Command.
 Description (ON)
 IEC-61850 ref (ON)

 ON/OFF (ON)
 Internal ID(OFF)
choosing the command to execute. The execution of this command is a consequence of the deactivation of the
command number that appears in field Command.
 Description (OFF)
 IEC-61850 ref (OFF)

 ON/OFF (OFF)
 Origin
It is the origin from where the commands are executed.
29.7.2 Configuration example

Below is an example of a Modbus slave database. This database contains elements which the master device can read or
in which can write.
Elements of the Modbus slave database:
 10 digital signals
 5 measurements
 5 counters
 4 commands
Database configuration:

User Manual
475
 Digital signals
 This configuration allows the access to:

 The state of eight digital inputs of the input/output board 1 of the device, which value is stored in the first eight
positions of the Modbus slave signal database.
 The state of two digital inputs of the input/output board 2 of the device, storing the state of the first input in the
position 15 of the Modbus slave signal database and the state of the second input in the position 31.
 Measurements
 This configuration allows the access to:

 Five logical measurements of the device, whose value is stored in the positions 0,3,7,8 and 9 of the Modbus
slave measurements database.
 Counters
 This configuration allows the access to:

 Five logical counters of the device, whose value is stored in the positions 0, 5, 10, 15 and 20 of the Modbus
slave counters database.

User Manual
476
 Commands
 This configuration allows:

 Activate the digital output 1 of the input/output board 1 of the device, activating the command number 0 of the
Modbus slave database.
 Activate the digital output 1 of the input/output board 2 of the device, activating the command number 10 of
the Modbus slave database.
 Activate the digital output 2 of the input/output board 2 of the device, deactivating the command 10 of the
29.8 SERIAL MESSAGES
The format of the serial communication messages used by the Modbus slave protocol is shown below, with the functions
used by the device as an example.
29.8.1 Format
 Master request:
 CRC - 2 byte
 Slave response:
 CRC - 2 byte

Remote address: Modbus address (Value between 1 and 128). Broadcast messages (address 0) are not allowed.
Function code: If it is > 127 (bit MSB to 1) it means that the remote device has not performed the required function and
will answer with an error code.
CRC: LSB is sent first, followed by the MSB.
29.8.2 Examples
 Function code 01 – Read coils
 For reading boolean data.

User Manual
477
 Example:
 Request of 12 output bits, from output 3 to 14 (All of these bits are activated)
Table 250. Request
Address of the first digital 0x00

2
output 0x03
0x00
Number of digital outputs 2
0x0C
CRC 2 xx xx
Table 3. Response

Number of bytes to store
the state of the digital 1 0x02
outputs
0xFF (LSB)
Digital outputs value 2
0x0F (MSB)
CRC 2 xx xx
 In the request response, the LSB of the Digital outputs value contains the value of the first output (output 3). The
rest of the bytes are sent in lowest to highest order. If the number of bits requested is not a multiple of 8, the byte
will be filled with zeros.
 Function code 02 – Read discrete inputs
 For reading boolean data.
 Function code 03 – Read holding registers
 Example:
 Address: 0400h - Data: 00AAh
 Address: 0401h - Data: 00FFh

User Manual
478
Table 4. Request
0x04
Starting address 2
0x00
0x00
0x02
CRC 2 xx xx
Table 5. Response
Byte count 1 0x04
0x00
Register value 1 2
0xAA
0x00
Register value 2 2
0xFF
CRC 2 xx xx
 Function code 04 – Read input registers

 Function code 05 – Write single coil
 Example:
Table 6. Request
0x00
Command number 2
0x18
0xFF
Writing to 1 2
0x00
CRC 2 xx xx

User Manual
479
Table 7. Response
0x00
Command number 2
0x18
0xFF
Writing to 1 2
0x00
CRC 2 xx xx
 Function code 06 – Write single register

For writing a single register.
Example:
Table 8. Request
0x00
Register address 2
0x80
0x00
Number of command to execute 2
0x18
CRC 2 xx xx
Table 9. Response
0x00
Register address 2
0x80
0x00
0x18
CRC 2 xx xx
 Function code 15 – Write multiple coils

 Example:

User Manual
480
Table 10. Response
Function code 1 0x0F
0x00
Number of command 2
0x18
Number of bits to 0x00
2
be forced 0x01
Byte count 1 0x01
Command value 1 0x01
CRC 2 xx xx
Table 11. Request
Function code 1 0x0F
0x00
Number of command 2
0x18
0x00
Number of forced bits 2
0x01
CRC 2 xx xx
 Function code 16 – Write multiple registers

For writing a single register.
Example:
Table 12. Request
0x00
Register address 2
0x80
Number of registers to be 0x00
2
written (words) 0x01
Byte count 1 0x02
0x00
0x18
CRC 2 xx xx

User Manual
481
Table 13. Response
0x00
Starting address 2
0x80
Number of written registers 0x00
2
(words) 0x01
CRC 2 xx xx
29.9 TCP/IP MESSAGES
29.9.1 Format
The message contains the following elements:
 Header
 It contains the following fields:
Length
Fields Description Client Server
(bytes)
Identification of a
Recopied by the
Transaction Modbus Initialized by the
2 server from the
identifier request/response client
received request
transaction
Recopied by the
Protocol It takes value 0 for Initialized by the
2 server from the
identifier Modbus protocol client
received request
Number of following Initialized by the Initialized by the

Length 2
bytes client (request) server (response)
Recopied by the
Identification of the Initialized by the
Unit identifier 1 server from the
connected slave device client
received request
 This fields are transmitted by communications as Big Endian.

 Function code
 Function code of the request/response. Size: 1 byte. If it is > 127 (bit MSB to 1) it means that the remote has not
performed the required function and will answer with an error code.
 Data
TCP/IP complete message:
Transaction Protocol
Length Unit identifier Function code Data
identifier identifier
(2 bytes) (1 byte) (1 byte) (n bytes)
(2 bytes) (2 bytes)
All the messages are sent via TCP to registered port 502.
 Master request:
 Transaction Id. - Unique per transaction or 0x00

User Manual
482
 Protocol Id. - Always 0

 Length - Number of bytes of Unity Id. + Function code + Data
 Unity Id. - Possible values: 0x00,0xFF or remote device number
 Function code
 Data - Number of variable bytes
 Slave response:
 Transaction Id. - Copy of the value received from the master device
 Protocol Id. - Copy of the value received from the master device
 Length - Number of bytes of Unity Id. + Function code + Data
 Unity Id. - Copy of the value received from the master device
 Function code
 Data - Number of variable bytes
29.9.2 Examples
The types of message are the same as the serial ones. The address map of the device and the way to treat it is the same as
explained before, only changes the structure of the message to send/receive.

User Manual
483
CURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS
30. CURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS
30.1 CEI 255-4 / BS142 CURVES
Enclosed below are the groups of curves, according to BS142, which correspond to the following types:
 Inverse or Normal Inverse Characteristic.

 Very Inverse Characteristic.
 Extremely Inverse Characteristic.
 User Curve.
These curves comply with the general formula
k tr
T  M  TRECAIDA  M 
 2
 I  1  I  1
I  I 
 0  0
In which:
 T : trip time (sec)

 TDROP : drop time (sec)
 M: multiplier (“time dial”). Valid range 0.025 to 1.5, in steps of 0.005
 I: Measured current
 Io: Pickup current setting
 K, , tr: constants which depend on the type of curve:
Inverse /
Constants Short inverse Long inverse Very inverse Extreme. inverse MIEspecial
Normal inverse
K 0.14 0.05 120 13.50 80.00 2.60
 0.02 0.04 1 1.00 2.00 1.00
tr 9.7 0.5 120 43.2 58.2 21.2
The following represent the curves which correspond to indexes 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9 and 1.0 for
each type of characteristic. Bear in mind that there are another 9 curves between each of the two curves illustrated, except
between 0.05 and 0.1, between which there are another 4.
For the values of I/Io greater than 40, the trip time is the correspond time of I/Io=40.

User Manual
484
Inverse or normal inverse curve
k tr
 2
 I  1  I  1
I  I 
 0  0
K = 0,14,  = 0,02 tr = 9.7
Theoretical values given by the formula:
M\I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 0.485 0.517 0.647 1.109 7.170 3.669 1.916 1.331 0.860 0.501 0.378 0.315 0.214 0.149 0.113 0.091
0.06 0.582 0.621 0.776 1.330 8.604 4.402 2.299 1.597 1.032 0.602 0.454 0.378 0.257 0.178 0.136 0.110
0.07 0.679 0.724 0.905 1.552 10.038 5.136 2.683 1.863 1.204 0.702 0.530 0.441 0.300 0.208 0.159 0.128
0.08 0.776 0.828 1.035 1.774 11.472 5.870 3.066 2.129 1.376 0.802 0.606 0.504 0.342 0.238 0.181 0.146
0.09 0.873 0.931 1.164 1.995 12.906 6.604 3.449 2.395 1.547 0.903 0.681 0.567 0.385 0.267 0.204 0.165
0.10 0.970 1.035 1.293 2.217 14.340 7.337 3.832 2.661 1.719 1.003 0.757 0.630 0.428 0.297 0.227 0.183
0.11 1.067 1.138 1.423 2.439 15.774 8.071 4.216 2.927 1.891 1.103 0.833 0.693 0.471 0.327 0.249 0.201
0.12 1.164 1.242 1.552 2.661 17.208 8.805 4.599 3.193 2.063 1.203 0.908 0.756 0.514 0.356 0.272 0.219
0.13 1.261 1.345 1.681 2.882 18.642 9.539 4.982 3.459 2.235 1.304 0.984 0.819 0.556 0.386 0.295 0.238
0.14 1.358 1.449 1.811 3.104 20.076 10.272 5.365 3.725 2.407 1.404 1.060 0.882 0.599 0.416 0.317 0.256
0.15 1.455 1.552 1.940 3.326 21.510 11.006 5.749 3.992 2.579 1.504 1.135 0.945 0.642 0.446 0.340 0.274
0.16 1.552 1.655 2.069 3.547 22.944 11.740 6.132 4.258 2.751 1.605 1.211 1.008 0.685 0.475 0.363 0.293
0.17 1.649 1.759 2.199 3.769 24.378 12.474 6.515 4.524 2.923 1.705 1.287 1.071 0.728 0.505 0.385 0.311
0.18 1.746 1.862 2.328 3.991 25.812 13.207 6.898 4.790 3.095 1.805 1.363 1.134 0.770 0.535 0.408 0.329
0.19 1.843 1.966 2.457 4.213 27.246 13.941 7.282 5.056 3.267 1.906 1.438 1.197 0.813 0.564 0.431 0.347
0.20 1.940 2.069 2.587 4.434 28.680 14.675 7.665 5.322 3.439 2.006 1.514 1.260 0.856 0.594 0.453 0.366
0.25 2.425 2.587 3.233 5.543 35.850 18.344 9.581 6.653 4.299 2.507 1.892 1.575 1.070 0.743 0.567 0.457
0.30 2.910 3.104 3.880 6.651 43.021 22.012 11.497 7.983 5.158 3.009 2.271 1.891 1.284 0.891 0.680 0.549
0.35 3.395 3.621 4.527 7.760 50.191 25.681 13.413 9.314 6.018 3.510 2.649 2.206 1.498 1.040 0.794 0.640
0.40 3.880 4.139 5.173 8.869 57.361 29.350 15.329 10.644 6.878 4.012 3.028 2.521 1.712 1.188 0.907 0.731
0.45 4.365 4.656 5.820 9.977 64.531 33.018 17.246 11.975 7.737 4.513 3.406 2.836 1.926 1.337 1.020 0.823
0.50 4.850 5.173 6.467 11.086 71.701 36.687 19.162 13.305 8.597 5.015 3.785 3.151 2.140 1.485 1.134 0.914
0.55 5.335 5.691 7.113 12.194 78.871 40.356 21.078 14.636 9.457 5.516 4.163 3.466 2.354 1.634 1.247 1.006
0.60 5.820 6.208 7.760 13.303 86.041 44.025 22.994 15.966 10.317 6.017 4.542 3.781 2.568 1.782 1.360 1.097
0.65 6.305 6.725 8.407 14.411 93.211 47.693 24.910 17.297 11.176 6.519 4.920 4.096 2.782 1.931 1.474 1.188
0.70 6.790 7.243 9.053 15.520 100.381 51.362 26.827 18.627 12.036 7.020 5.299 4.411 2.996 2.079 1.587 1.280
0.75 7.275 7.760 9.700 16.629 107.551 55.031 28.743 19.958 12.896 7.522 5.677 4.726 3.210 2.228 1.701 1.371
0.80 7.760 8.277 10.347 17.737 114.721 58.700 30.659 21.288 13.755 8.023 6.056 5.042 3.424 2.376 1.814 1.463
0.85 8.245 8.795 10.993 18.846 121.891 62.368 32.575 22.619 14.615 8.525 6.434 5.357 3.638 2.525 1.927 1.554
0.90 8.730 9.312 11.640 19.954 129.062 66.037 34.491 23.949 15.475 9.026 6.813 5.672 3.852 2.674 2.041 1.646
0.95 9.215 9.829 12.287 21.063 136.232 69.706 36.408 25.280 16.335 9.528 7.191 5.987 4.066 2.822 2.154 1.737
1.00 9.700 10.347 12.933 22.171 143.402 73.374 38.324 26.611 17.194 10.029 7.570 6.302 4.280 2.971 2.267 1.828
1.05 10.185 10.864 13.580 23.280 150.572 77.043 40.240 27.941 18.054 10.530 7.948 6.617 4.494 3.119 2.381 1.920

User Manual
485

User Manual
486
Long duration curve (IEC)
k tr
 2
 I  1  I  1
I  I 
 0
@Fig.160.png-H:61,65-W:103,7@ @Fig.161.png-H:62,2-W:145,75@
 0
K = 120,  = 1 tr = 120
M\I/Io 0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 6.000 6.400 8.000 13.714 120.000 60.000 30.000 20.000 12.000 6.000 4.000 3.000 1.500 0.667 0.316 0.154
0.06 7.200 7.680 9.600 16.457 144.000 72.000 36.000 24.000 14.400 7.200 4.800 3.600 1.800 0.800 0.379 0.185
0.07 8.400 8.960 11.200 19.200 168.000 84.000 42.000 28.000 16.800 8.400 5.600 4.200 2.100 0.933 0.442 0.215
0.08 9.600 10.240 12.800 21.943 192.000 96.000 48.000 32.000 19.200 9.600 6.400 4.800 2.400 1.067 0.505 0.246
0.09 10.800 11.520 14.400 24.686 216.000 108.000 54.000 36.000 21.600 10.800 7.200 5.400 2.700 1.200 0.568 0.277
0.10 12.000 12.800 16.000 27.429 240.000 120.000 60.000 40.000 24.000 12.000 8.000 6.000 3.000 1.333 0.632 0.308
0.11 13.200 14.080 17.600 30.171 264.000 132.000 66.000 44.000 26.400 13.200 8.800 6.600 3.300 1.467 0.695 0.338
0.12 14.400 15.360 19.200 32.914 288.000 144.000 72.000 48.000 28.800 14.400 9.600 7.200 3.600 1.600 0.758 0.369
0.13 15.600 16.640 20.800 35.657 312.000 156.000 78.000 52.000 31.200 15.600 10.400 7.800 3.900 1.733 0.821 0.400
0.14 16.800 17.920 22.400 38.400 336.000 168.000 84.000 56.000 33.600 16.800 11.200 8.400 4.200 1.867 0.884 0.431
0.15 18.000 19.200 24.000 41.143 360.000 180.000 90.000 60.000 36.000 18.000 12.000 9.000 4.500 2.000 0.947 0.462
0.16 19.200 20.480 25.600 43.886 384.000 192.000 96.000 64.000 38.400 19.200 12.800 9.600 4.800 2.133 1.011 0.492
0.17 20.400 21.760 27.200 46.629 408.000 204.000 102.000 68.000 40.800 20.400 13.600 10.200 5.100 2.267 1.074 0.523
0.18 21.600 23.040 28.800 49.371 432.000 216.000 108.000 72.000 43.200 21.600 14.400 10.800 5.400 2.400 1.137 0.554
0.19 22.800 24.320 30.400 52.114 456.000 228.000 114.000 76.000 45.600 22.800 15.200 11.400 5.700 2.533 1.200 0.585
0.20 24.000 25.600 32.000 54.857 480.001 240.000 120.000 80.000 48.000 24.000 16.000 12.000 6.000 2.667 1.263 0.615
0.25 30.000 32.000 40.000 68.571 600.001 300.000 150.000 100.000 60.000 30.000 20.000 15.000 7.500 3.333 1.579 0.769
0.30 36.000 38.400 48.000 82.286 720.001 360.000 180.000 120.000 72.000 36.000 24.000 18.000 9.000 4.000 1.895 0.923
0.35 42.000 44.800 56.000 96.000 840.001 420.000 210.000 140.000 84.000 42.000 28.000 21.000 10.500 4.667 2.211 1.077
0.40 48.000 51.200 64.000 109.714 960.001 480.000 240.000 160.000 96.000 48.000 32.000 24.000 12.000 5.333 2.526 1.231
0.45 54.000 57.600 72.000 123.429 1080.001 540.000 270.000 180.000 108.000 54.000 36.000 27.000 13.500 6.000 2.842 1.385
0.50 60.000 64.000 80.000 137.143 1200.001 600.000 300.000 200.000 120.000 60.000 40.000 30.000 15.000 6.667 3.158 1.538
0.55 66.000 70.400 88.000 150.857 1320.001 660.000 330.000 220.000 132.000 66.000 44.000 33.000 16.500 7.333 3.474 1.692
0.60 72.000 76.800 96.000 164.571 1440.002 720.000 360.000 240.000 144.000 72.000 48.000 36.000 18.000 8.000 3.789 1.846
0.65 78.000 83.200 104.000 178.286 1560.002 780.000 390.000 260.000 156.000 78.000 52.000 39.000 19.500 8.667 4.105 2.000
0.70 84.000 89.600 112.000 192.000 1680.002 840.000 420.000 280.000 168.000 84.000 56.000 42.000 21.000 9.333 4.421 2.154
0.75 90.000 96.000 120.000 205.714 1800.002 900.000 450.000 300.000 180.000 90.000 60.000 45.000 22.500 10.000 4.737 2.308
0.80 96.000 102.400 128.000 219.429 1920.002 960.000 480.000 320.000 192.000 96.000 64.000 48.000 24.000 10.667 5.053 2.462
0.85 102.000 108.800 136.000 233.143 2040.002 1020.000 510.000 340.000 204.000 102.000 68.000 51.000 25.500 11.333 5.368 2.615
0.90 108.000 115.200 144.000 246.857 2160.002 1080.000 540.000 360.000 216.000 108.000 72.000 54.000 27.000 12.000 5.684 2.769
0.95 114.000 121.600 152.000 260.571 2280.003 1140.000 570.000 380.000 228.000 114.000 76.000 57.000 28.500 12.667 6.000 2.923
1.00 120.000 128.000 160.000 274.286 2400.003 1200.000 600.000 400.000 240.000 120.000 80.000 60.000 30.000 13.333 6.316 3.077
1.05 126.000 134.400 168.000 288.000 2520.003 1260.000 630.000 420.000 252.000 126.000 84.000 63.000 31.500 14.000 6.632 3.231

User Manual
487

User Manual
488
Short duration curve IEC
k tr
 2
 I  1  I  1
I  I 
 0  0
K = 0.05,  = 0.04 tr = 0.5
M\I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 0.025 0.027 0.033 0.057 1.280 0.655 0.342 0.237 0.153 0.089 0.067 0.056 0.038 0.026 0.020 0.016
0.06 0.030 0.032 0.040 0.069 1.536 0.785 0.410 0.284 0.183 0.107 0.080 0.067 0.045 0.031 0.024 0.019
0.07 0.035 0.037 0.047 0.080 1.792 0.916 0.478 0.332 0.214 0.124 0.094 0.078 0.053 0.036 0.027 0.022
0.08 0.040 0.043 0.053 0.091 2.048 1.047 0.546 0.379 0.245 0.142 0.107 0.089 0.060 0.041 0.031 0.025
0.09 0.045 0.048 0.060 0.103 2.304 1.178 0.615 0.427 0.275 0.160 0.121 0.100 0.068 0.047 0.035 0.028
0.10 0.050 0.053 0.067 0.114 2.559 1.309 0.683 0.474 0.306 0.178 0.134 0.111 0.075 0.052 0.039 0.031
0.11 0.055 0.059 0.073 0.126 2.815 1.440 0.751 0.521 0.336 0.196 0.147 0.122 0.083 0.057 0.043 0.035
0.12 0.060 0.064 0.080 0.137 3.071 1.571 0.820 0.569 0.367 0.213 0.161 0.134 0.090 0.062 0.047 0.038
0.13 0.065 0.069 0.087 0.149 3.327 1.702 0.888 0.616 0.398 0.231 0.174 0.145 0.098 0.067 0.051 0.041
0.14 0.070 0.075 0.093 0.160 3.583 1.833 0.956 0.664 0.428 0.249 0.188 0.156 0.105 0.073 0.055 0.044
0.15 0.075 0.080 0.100 0.171 3.839 1.964 1.025 0.711 0.459 0.267 0.201 0.167 0.113 0.078 0.059 0.047
0.16 0.080 0.085 0.107 0.183 4.095 2.094 1.093 0.758 0.489 0.285 0.214 0.178 0.120 0.083 0.063 0.050
0.17 0.085 0.091 0.113 0.194 4.351 2.225 1.161 0.806 0.520 0.302 0.228 0.189 0.128 0.088 0.067 0.053
0.18 0.090 0.096 0.120 0.206 4.607 2.356 1.230 0.853 0.550 0.320 0.241 0.200 0.135 0.093 0.071 0.057
0.19 0.095 0.101 0.127 0.217 4.863 2.487 1.298 0.900 0.581 0.338 0.254 0.211 0.143 0.098 0.075 0.060
0.20 0.100 0.107 0.133 0.229 5.119 2.618 1.366 0.948 0.612 0.356 0.268 0.223 0.150 0.104 0.079 0.063
0.25 0.125 0.133 0.167 0.286 6.399 3.273 1.708 1.185 0.764 0.445 0.335 0.278 0.188 0.130 0.098 0.079
0.30 0.150 0.160 0.200 0.343 7.678 3.927 2.049 1.422 0.917 0.534 0.402 0.334 0.226 0.155 0.118 0.094
0.35 0.175 0.187 0.233 0.400 8.958 4.582 2.391 1.659 1.070 0.622 0.469 0.390 0.263 0.181 0.137 0.110
0.40 0.200 0.213 0.267 0.457 10.238 5.236 2.732 1.896 1.223 0.711 0.536 0.445 0.301 0.207 0.157 0.126
0.45 0.225 0.240 0.300 0.514 11.518 5.891 3.074 2.133 1.376 0.800 0.603 0.501 0.338 0.233 0.177 0.142
0.50 0.250 0.267 0.333 0.571 12.797 6.545 3.416 2.370 1.529 0.889 0.670 0.556 0.376 0.259 0.196 0.157
0.55 0.275 0.293 0.367 0.629 14.077 7.200 3.757 2.607 1.682 0.978 0.737 0.612 0.414 0.285 0.216 0.173
0.60 0.300 0.320 0.400 0.686 15.357 7.854 4.099 2.844 1.835 1.067 0.804 0.668 0.451 0.311 0.236 0.189
0.65 0.325 0.347 0.433 0.743 16.637 8.509 4.440 3.081 1.988 1.156 0.871 0.723 0.489 0.337 0.255 0.204
0.70 0.350 0.373 0.467 0.800 17.916 9.163 4.782 3.318 2.141 1.245 0.938 0.779 0.526 0.363 0.275 0.220
0.75 0.375 0.400 0.500 0.857 19.196 9.818 5.123 3.555 2.293 1.334 1.005 0.835 0.564 0.389 0.295 0.236
0.80 0.400 0.427 0.533 0.914 20.476 10.472 5.465 3.792 2.446 1.423 1.071 0.890 0.602 0.415 0.314 0.252
0.85 0.425 0.453 0.567 0.971 21.756 11.127 5.806 4.029 2.599 1.512 1.138 0.946 0.639 0.441 0.334 0.267
0.90 0.450 0.480 0.600 1.029 23.035 11.781 6.148 4.265 2.752 1.601 1.205 1.002 0.677 0.466 0.353 0.283
0.95 0.475 0.507 0.633 1.086 24.315 12.436 6.489 4.502 2.905 1.690 1.272 1.057 0.714 0.492 0.373 0.299
1.00 0.500 0.533 0.667 1.143 25.595 13.090 6.831 4.739 3.058 1.778 1.339 1.113 0.752 0.518 0.393 0.314
1.05 0.525 0.560 0.700 1.200 26.875 13.745 7.173 4.976 3.211 1.867 1.406 1.169 0.790 0.544 0.412 0.330

User Manual
489

User Manual
490
Very inverse curve
k tr
 2
 I  1  I  1
I  I 
 0  0
K = 13,5,  = 1 tr = 43.2
M\I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 2.160 2.304 2.880 4.937 13.500 6.750 3.375 2.250 1.350 0.675 0.450 0.338 0.169 0.075 0.036 0.017
0.06 2.592 2.765 3.456 5.925 16.200 8.100 4.050 2.700 1.620 0.810 0.540 0.405 0.203 0.090 0.043 0.021
0.07 3.024 3.226 4.032 6.912 18.900 9.450 4.725 3.150 1.890 0.945 0.630 0.472 0.236 0.105 0.050 0.024
0.08 3.456 3.686 4.608 7.899 21.600 10.800 5.400 3.600 2.160 1.080 0.720 0.540 0.270 0.120 0.057 0.028
0.09 3.888 4.147 5.184 8.887 24.300 12.150 6.075 4.050 2.430 1.215 0.810 0.607 0.304 0.135 0.064 0.031
0.10 4.320 4.608 5.760 9.874 27.000 13.500 6.750 4.500 2.700 1.350 0.900 0.675 0.337 0.150 0.071 0.035
0.11 4.752 5.069 6.336 10.862 29.700 14.850 7.425 4.950 2.970 1.485 0.990 0.742 0.371 0.165 0.078 0.038
0.12 5.184 5.530 6.912 11.849 32.400 16.200 8.100 5.400 3.240 1.620 1.080 0.810 0.405 0.180 0.085 0.042
0.13 5.616 5.990 7.488 12.837 35.100 17.550 8.775 5.850 3.510 1.755 1.170 0.877 0.439 0.195 0.092 0.045
0.14 6.048 6.451 8.064 13.824 37.800 18.900 9.450 6.300 3.780 1.890 1.260 0.945 0.472 0.210 0.099 0.048
0.15 6.480 6.912 8.640 14.811 40.500 20.250 10.125 6.750 4.050 2.025 1.350 1.013 0.506 0.225 0.107 0.052
0.16 6.912 7.373 9.216 15.799 43.200 21.600 10.800 7.200 4.320 2.160 1.440 1.080 0.540 0.240 0.114 0.055
0.17 7.344 7.834 9.792 16.786 45.900 22.950 11.475 7.650 4.590 2.295 1.530 1.148 0.574 0.255 0.121 0.059
0.18 7.776 8.294 10.368 17.774 48.600 24.300 12.150 8.100 4.860 2.430 1.620 1.215 0.608 0.270 0.128 0.062
0.19 8.208 8.755 10.944 18.761 51.300 25.650 12.825 8.550 5.130 2.565 1.710 1.283 0.641 0.285 0.135 0.066
0.20 8.640 9.216 11.520 19.749 54.000 27.000 13.500 9.000 5.400 2.700 1.800 1.350 0.675 0.300 0.142 0.069
0.25 10.800 11.520 14.400 24.686 67.500 33.750 16.875 11.250 6.750 3.375 2.250 1.688 0.844 0.375 0.178 0.087
0.30 12.960 13.824 17.280 29.623 81.000 40.500 20.250 13.500 8.100 4.050 2.700 2.025 1.013 0.450 0.213 0.104
0.35 15.120 16.128 20.160 34.560 94.500 47.250 23.625 15.750 9.450 4.725 3.150 2.363 1.181 0.525 0.249 0.121
0.40 17.280 18.432 23.040 39.497 108.000 54.000 27.000 18.000 10.800 5.400 3.600 2.700 1.350 0.600 0.284 0.138
0.45 19.440 20.736 25.920 44.434 121.500 60.750 30.375 20.250 12.150 6.075 4.050 3.038 1.519 0.675 0.320 0.156
0.50 21.600 23.040 28.800 49.371 135.000 67.500 33.750 22.500 13.500 6.750 4.500 3.375 1.688 0.750 0.355 0.173
0.55 23.760 25.344 31.680 54.309 148.500 74.250 37.125 24.750 14.850 7.425 4.950 3.713 1.856 0.825 0.391 0.190
0.60 25.920 27.648 34.560 59.246 162.000 81.000 40.500 27.000 16.200 8.100 5.400 4.050 2.025 0.900 0.426 0.208
0.65 28.080 29.952 37.440 64.183 175.500 87.750 43.875 29.250 17.550 8.775 5.850 4.388 2.194 0.975 0.462 0.225
0.70 30.240 32.256 40.320 69.120 189.000 94.500 47.250 31.500 18.900 9.450 6.300 4.725 2.363 1.050 0.497 0.242
0.75 32.400 34.560 43.200 74.057 202.500 101.25 50.625 33.750 20.250 10.125 6.750 5.063 2.531 1.125 0.533 0.260
0.80 34.560 36.864 46.080 78.994 216.000 108.00 54.000 36.000 21.600 10.800 7.200 5.400 2.700 1.200 0.568 0.277
0.85 36.720 39.168 48.960 83.931 229.500 114.75 57.375 38.250 22.950 11.475 7.650 5.738 2.869 1.275 0.604 0.294
0.90 38.880 41.472 51.840 88.869 243.000 121.50 60.750 40.500 24.300 12.150 8.100 6.075 3.038 1.350 0.639 0.312
0.95 41.040 43.776 54.720 93.806 256.500 128.25 64.125 42.750 25.650 12.825 8.550 6.413 3.206 1.425 0.675 0.329
1.00 43.200 46.080 57.600 98.743 270.000 135.00 67.500 45.000 27.000 13.500 9.000 6.750 3.375 1.500 0.711 0.346
1.05 45.360 48.384 60.480 103.68 283.500 141.75 70.875 47.250 28.350 14.175 9.450 7.088 3.544 1.575 0.746 0.363

User Manual
491

User Manual
492
Extremely inverse curve
k tr
 2
 I  1  I  1
I  I 
 0  0
K = 80,  = 2 tr =58.2
M\I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 2.910 3.104 3.880 6.651 39.024 19.048 9.091 5.797 3.200 1.333 0.762 0.500 0.167 0.040 0.010 0.003
0.06 3.492 3.725 4.656 7.982 46.829 22.857 10.909 6.957 3.840 1.600 0.914 0.600 0.200 0.048 0.012 0.003
0.07 4.074 4.346 5.432 9.312 54.634 26.667 12.727 8.116 4.480 1.867 1.067 0.700 0.233 0.057 0.014 0.004
0.08 4.656 4.966 6.208 10.642 62.439 30.476 14.545 9.275 5.120 2.133 1.219 0.800 0.267 0.065 0.016 0.004
0.09 5.238 5.587 6.984 11.973 70.244 34.286 16.364 10.435 5.760 2.400 1.371 0.900 0.300 0.073 0.018 0.005
0.10 5.820 6.208 7.760 13.303 78.049 38.095 18.182 11.594 6.400 2.667 1.524 1.000 0.333 0.081 0.020 0.005
0.11 6.402 6.829 8.536 14.633 85.854 41.905 20.000 12.754 7.040 2.933 1.676 1.100 0.367 0.089 0.022 0.006
0.12 6.984 7.450 9.312 15.963 93.659 45.714 21.818 13.913 7.680 3.200 1.829 1.200 0.400 0.097 0.024 0.006
0.13 7.566 8.070 10.088 17.294 101.464 49.524 23.636 15.072 8.320 3.467 1.981 1.300 0.433 0.105 0.026 0.007
0.14 8.148 8.691 10.864 18.624 109.268 53.333 25.455 16.232 8.960 3.733 2.133 1.400 0.467 0.113 0.028 0.007
0.15 8.730 9.312 11.640 19.954 117.073 57.143 27.273 17.391 9.600 4.000 2.286 1.500 0.500 0.121 0.030 0.008
0.16 9.312 9.933 12.416 21.285 124.878 60.952 29.091 18.551 10.240 4.267 2.438 1.600 0.533 0.129 0.032 0.008
0.17 9.894 10.554 13.192 22.615 132.683 64.762 30.909 19.710 10.880 4.533 2.590 1.700 0.567 0.137 0.034 0.009
0.18 10.476 11.174 13.968 23.945 140.488 68.571 32.727 20.870 11.520 4.800 2.743 1.800 0.600 0.145 0.036 0.009
0.19 11.058 11.795 14.744 25.275 148.293 72.381 34.545 22.029 12.160 5.067 2.895 1.900 0.633 0.154 0.038 0.010
0.20 11.640 12.416 15.520 26.606 156.098 76.190 36.364 23.188 12.800 5.333 3.048 2.000 0.667 0.162 0.040 0.010
0.25 14.550 15.520 19.400 33.257 195.122 95.238 45.455 28.986 16.000 6.667 3.810 2.500 0.833 0.202 0.050 0.013
0.30 17.460 18.624 23.280 39.909 234.147 114.286 54.545 34.783 19.200 8.000 4.571 3.000 1.000 0.242 0.060 0.015
0.35 20.370 21.728 27.160 46.560 273.171 133.333 63.636 40.580 22.400 9.333 5.333 3.500 1.167 0.283 0.070 0.018
0.40 23.280 24.832 31.040 53.211 312.195 152.381 72.727 46.377 25.600 10.667 6.095 4.000 1.333 0.323 0.080 0.020
0.45 26.190 27.936 34.920 59.863 351.220 171.429 81.818 52.174 28.800 12.000 6.857 4.500 1.500 0.364 0.090 0.023
0.50 29.100 31.040 38.800 66.514 390.244 190.476 90.909 57.971 32.000 13.333 7.619 5.000 1.667 0.404 0.100 0.025
0.55 32.010 34.144 42.680 73.166 429.269 209.524 100.000 63.768 35.200 14.667 8.381 5.500 1.833 0.444 0.110 0.028
0.60 34.920 37.248 46.560 79.817 468.293 228.571 109.091 69.565 38.400 16.000 9.143 6.000 2.000 0.485 0.120 0.030
0.65 37.830 40.352 50.440 86.469 507.318 247.619 118.182 75.362 41.600 17.333 9.905 6.500 2.167 0.525 0.130 0.033
0.70 40.740 43.456 54.320 93.120 546.342 266.667 127.273 81.159 44.800 18.667 10.667 7.000 2.333 0.566 0.140 0.035
0.75 43.650 46.560 58.200 99.771 585.367 285.714 136.364 86.957 48.000 20.000 11.429 7.500 2.500 0.606 0.150 0.038
0.80 46.560 49.664 62.080 106.423 624.391 304.762 145.455 92.754 51.200 21.333 12.190 8.000 2.667 0.646 0.160 0.040
0.85 49.470 52.768 65.960 113.074 663.415 323.810 154.545 98.551 54.400 22.667 12.952 8.500 2.833 0.687 0.170 0.043
0.90 52.380 55.872 69.840 119.726 702.440 342.857 163.636 104.348 57.600 24.000 13.714 9.000 3.000 0.727 0.180 0.045
0.95 55.290 58.976 73.720 126.377 741.464 361.905 172.727 110.145 60.800 25.333 14.476 9.500 3.167 0.768 0.190 0.048
1.00 58.200 62.080 77.600 133.029 780.489 380.952 181.818 115.942 64.000 26.667 15.238 10.000 3.333 0.808 0.201 0.050
1.05 61.110 65.184 81.480 139.680 819.513 400.000 190.909 121.739 67.200 28.000 16.000 10.500 3.500 0.848 0.211 0.053

User Manual
493

User Manual
494
Very Inverse Special Curve
k tr
 2
 I  1  I  1
I  I 
 0
 0
K = 2,6 =1
M \
1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 4.00 5.00 7.00 10.00 12.00 15.00 20.00 30.00 40.00
I/Io
0.05 2.600 1.300 0.650 0.433 0.325 0.260 0.130 0.087 0.065 0.043 0.032 0.022 0.014 0.012 0.009 0.007 0.004 0.003
0.06 3.120 1.560 0.780 0.520 0.390 0.312 0.156 0.104 0.078 0.052 0.039 0.026 0.017 0.014 0.011 0.008 0.005 0.004
0.07 3.640 1.820 0.910 0.607 0.455 0.364 0.182 0.121 0.091 0.061 0.045 0.030 0.020 0.017 0.013 0.010 0.006 0.005
0.08 4.160 2.080 1.040 0.693 0.520 0.416 0.208 0.139 0.104 0.069 0.052 0.035 0.023 0.019 0.015 0.011 0.007 0.005
0.09 4.680 2.340 1.170 0.780 0.585 0.468 0.234 0.156 0.117 0.078 0.058 0.039 0.026 0.021 0.017 0.012 0.008 0.006
0.10 5.200 2.600 1.300 0.867 0.650 0.520 0.260 0.173 0.130 0.087 0.065 0.043 0.029 0.024 0.019 0.014 0.009 0.007
0.11 5.720 2.860 1.430 0.953 0.715 0.572 0.286 0.191 0.143 0.095 0.071 0.048 0.032 0.026 0.020 0.015 0.010 0.007
0.12 6.240 3.120 1.560 1.040 0.780 0.624 0.312 0.208 0.156 0.104 0.078 0.052 0.035 0.028 0.022 0.016 0.011 0.008
0.13 6.760 3.380 1.690 1.127 0.845 0.676 0.338 0.225 0.169 0.113 0.084 0.056 0.038 0.031 0.024 0.018 0.012 0.009
0.14 7.280 3.640 1.820 1.213 0.910 0.728 0.364 0.243 0.182 0.121 0.091 0.061 0.040 0.033 0.026 0.019 0.013 0.009
0.15 7.800 3.900 1.950 1.300 0.975 0.780 0.390 0.260 0.195 0.130 0.098 0.065 0.043 0.035 0.028 0.021 0.013 0.010
0.16 8.320 4.160 2.080 1.387 1.040 0.832 0.416 0.277 0.208 0.139 0.104 0.069 0.046 0.038 0.030 0.022 0.014 0.011
0.17 8.840 4.420 2.210 1.473 1.105 0.884 0.442 0.295 0.221 0.147 0.111 0.074 0.049 0.040 0.032 0.023 0.015 0.011
0.18 9.360 4.680 2.340 1.560 1.170 0.936 0.468 0.312 0.234 0.156 0.117 0.078 0.052 0.043 0.033 0.025 0.016 0.012
0.19 9.880 4.940 2.470 1.647 1.235 0.988 0.494 0.329 0.247 0.165 0.124 0.082 0.055 0.045 0.035 0.026 0.017 0.013
0.20 10.400 5.200 2.600 1.733 1.300 1.040 0.520 0.347 0.260 0.173 0.130 0.087 0.058 0.047 0.037 0.027 0.018 0.013
0.25 13.000 6.500 3.250 2.167 1.625 1.300 0.650 0.433 0.325 0.217 0.163 0.108 0.072 0.059 0.046 0.034 0.022 0.017
0.30 15.600 7.800 3.900 2.600 1.950 1.560 0.780 0.520 0.390 0.260 0.195 0.130 0.087 0.071 0.056 0.041 0.027 0.020
0.35 18.200 9.100 4.550 3.033 2.275 1.820 0.910 0.607 0.455 0.303 0.228 0.152 0.101 0.083 0.065 0.048 0.031 0.023
0.40 20.800 10.400 5.200 3.467 2.600 2.080 1.040 0.693 0.520 0.347 0.260 0.173 0.116 0.095 0.074 0.055 0.036 0.027
0.45 23.400 11.700 5.850 3.900 2.925 2.340 1.170 0.780 0.585 0.390 0.293 0.195 0.130 0.106 0.084 0.062 0.040 0.030
0.50 26.000 13.000 6.500 4.333 3.250 2.600 1.300 0.867 0.650 0.433 0.325 0.217 0.144 0.118 0.093 0.068 0.045 0.033
0.55 28.600 14.300 7.150 4.767 3.575 2.860 1.430 0.953 0.715 0.477 0.358 0.238 0.159 0.130 0.102 0.075 0.049 0.037
0.60 31.200 15.600 7.800 5.200 3.900 3.120 1.560 1.040 0.780 0.520 0.390 0.260 0.173 0.142 0.111 0.082 0.054 0.040
0.65 33.800 16.900 8.450 5.633 4.225 3.380 1.690 1.127 0.845 0.563 0.423 0.282 0.188 0.154 0.121 0.089 0.058 0.043
0.70 36.400 18.200 9.100 6.067 4.550 3.640 1.820 1.213 0.910 0.607 0.455 0.303 0.202 0.165 0.130 0.096 0.063 0.047
0.75 39.000 19.500 9.750 6.500 4.875 3.900 1.950 1.300 0.975 0.650 0.488 0.325 0.217 0.177 0.139 0.103 0.067 0.050
0.80 41.600 20.800 10.400 6.933 5.200 4.160 2.080 1.387 1.040 0.693 0.520 0.347 0.231 0.189 0.149 0.109 0.072 0.053
0.85 44.200 22.100 11.050 7.367 5.525 4.420 2.210 1.473 1.105 0.737 0.553 0.368 0.246 0.201 0.158 0.116 0.076 0.057
0.90 46.800 23.400 11.700 7.800 5.850 4.680 2.340 1.560 1.170 0.780 0.585 0.390 0.260 0.213 0.167 0.123 0.081 0.060
0.95 49.400 24.700 12.350 8.233 6.175 4.940 2.470 1.647 1.235 0.823 0.618 0.412 0.274 0.225 0.176 0.130 0.085 0.063
1.00 52.000 26.000 13.000 8.667 6.500 5.200 2.600 1.733 1.300 0.867 0.650 0.433 0.289 0.236 0.186 0.137 0.090 0.067
1.05 54.600 27.300 13.650 9.100 6.825 5.460 2.730 1.820 1.365 0.910 0.683 0.455 0.303 0.248 0.195 0.144 0.094 0.070

User Manual
495

User Manual
496
30.2 ANSI CURVES
Enclosed below are the groups of curves, according to ANSI, which correspond to the following types:
 Normal Inverse Characteristic.

 Very Inverse Characteristic.
 Extremely Inverse Characteristic.
 Moderately Inverse Characteristic.
T  M   A  
B D E tr
  TRECAIDA  M 
   C
I 2 3
 I   I  C  I  C  2
 I  1
 0  I  I  I 
  0   0    0
in which:

 M : multiplier (“time dial”). Valid range 0.05 to 30.0, in steps of 0.1
 A, B, C, D, E, tr: constants which depend on the type of curve:
Constants Inverse character. Very inverse Extreme. inverse Moder. inverse

A 0.0274 0.0615 0.0399 0.1735
B 2.2614 0.7989 0.2294 0.6791
C 0.3000 0.3400 0.5000 0.8000
D -4.1899 -0.2840 3.0094 -0.0800
E 9.1272 4.0505 0.7222 0.1271
tr 0.99 4.678 6.008 1.2
each type of characteristic. Take into account that between every two curves differentiated in 1.0 there are another 9 curves.
For the values of I/Io greater than 40, the trip time is the correspond time of I/Io=40.
Ingeteam Technology S.A.

User Manual 497
Normal inverse curve
T  M   A  
B D E tr
  I  C 2 3
 I   I  C  I  C  2
 I  1
 0  I  I  I 
  0   0    0
@Fig.174.png-H:54,7-W:250@ @Fig.175.png-H:61,65-W:143,4@
A = 0.0274, B = 2.2614, C = 0.3000, D = -4.1899, E = 9.1272 tr = 0.99
M \
0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
I/Io
0.5 0.495 0.528 0.660 1.131 8.614 7.067 4.944 3.613 2.142 0.883 0.523 0.377 0.203 0.113 0.066 0.041
1.0 0.990 1.056 1.320 2.263 17.229 14.134 9.888 7.226 4.284 1.766 1.047 0.754 0.407 0.226 0.133 0.082
2.0 1.980 2.112 2.640 4.526 34.457 28.268 19.775 14.452 8.568 3.531 2.094 1.508 0.814 0.452 0.265 0.164
3.0 2.970 3.168 3.960 6.789 51.686 42.402 29.663 21.678 12.853 5.297 3.140 2.262 1.220 0.678 0.398 0.246
4.0 3.960 4.224 5.280 9.051 68.915 56.536 39.550 28.904 17.137 7.062 4.187 3.016 1.627 0.904 0.530 0.327
5.0 4.950 5.280 6.600 11.314 86.144 70.670 49.438 36.131 21.421 8.828 5.234 3.770 2.034 1.130 0.663 0.409
6.0 5.940 6.336 7.920 13.577 103.372 84.804 59.325 43.357 25.705 10.594 6.281 4.524 2.441 1.356 0.796 0.491
7.0 6.930 7.392 9.240 15.840 120.601 98.938 69.213 50.583 29.989 12.359 7.328 5.277 2.848 1.582 0.928 0.573
8.0 7.920 8.448 10.560 18.103 137.830 113.072 79.100 57.809 34.274 14.125 8.374 6.031 3.254 1.808 1.061 0.655
9.0 8.910 9.504 11.880 20.366 155.059 127.206 88.988 65.035 38.558 15.890 9.421 6.785 3.661 2.034 1.193 0.737
10.0 9.900 10.560 13.200 22.629 172.287 141.340 98.875 72.261 42.842 17.656 10.468 7.539 4.068 2.260 1.326 0.818
11.0 10.890 11.616 14.520 24.891 189.516 155.474 108.763 79.487 47.126 19.422 11.515 8.293 4.475 2.486 1.458 0.900
12.0 11.880 12.672 15.840 27.154 206.745 169.608 118.650 86.713 51.410 21.187 12.562 9.047 4.881 2.712 1.591 0.982
13.0 12.870 13.728 17.160 29.417 223.974 183.742 128.538 93.939 55.694 22.953 13.608 9.801 5.288 2.938 1.724 1.064
14.0 13.860 14.784 18.480 31.680 241.202 197.876 138.425 101.165 59.979 24.719 14.655 10.555 5.695 3.164 1.856 1.146
15.0 14.850 15.840 19.800 33.943 258.431 212.010 148.313 108.392 64.263 26.484 15.702 11.309 6.102 3.390 1.989 1.228
16.0 15.840 16.896 21.120 36.206 275.660 226.144 158.200 115.618 68.547 28.250 16.749 12.063 6.509 3.616 2.121 1.310
17.0 16.830 17.952 22.440 38.469 292.889 240.278 168.088 122.844 72.831 30.015 17.796 12.817 6.915 3.842 2.254 1.391
18.0 17.820 19.008 23.760 40.731 310.117 254.412 177.975 130.070 77.115 31.781 18.842 13.571 7.322 4.068 2.387 1.473
19.0 18.810 20.064 25.080 42.994 327.346 268.546 187.863 137.296 81.400 33.547 19.889 14.324 7.729 4.294 2.519 1.555
20.0 19.800 21.120 26.400 45.257 344.575 282.680 197.750 144.522 85.684 35.312 20.936 15.078 8.136 4.520 2.652 1.637
21.0 20.790 22.176 27.720 47.520 361.803 296.814 207.638 151.748 89.968 37.078 21.983 15.832 8.543 4.746 2.784 1.719
22.0 21.780 23.232 29.040 49.783 379.032 310.948 217.525 158.974 94.252 38.843 23.030 16.586 8.949 4.972 2.917 1.801
23.0 22.770 24.288 30.360 52.046 396.261 325.082 227.413 166.200 98.536 40.609 24.076 17.340 9.356 5.198 3.050 1.883
24.0 23.760 25.344 31.680 54.309 413.490 339.216 237.300 173.426 102.821 42.375 25.123 18.094 9.763 5.424 3.182 1.964
25.0 24.750 26.400 33.000 56.571 430.718 353.350 247.188 180.653 107.105 44.140 26.170 18.848 10.170 5.650 3.315 2.046
26.0 25.740 27.456 34.320 58.834 447.947 367.484 257.075 187.879 111.389 45.906 27.217 19.602 10.576 5.876 3.447 2.128
27.0 26.730 28.512 35.640 61.097 465.176 381.618 266.963 195.105 115.673 47.671 28.264 20.356 10.983 6.102 3.580 2.210
28.0 27.720 29.568 36.960 63.360 482.405 395.752 276.850 202.331 119.957 49.437 29.310 21.110 11.390 6.328 3.713 2.292
29.0 28.710 30.624 38.280 65.623 499.633 409.886 286.738 209.557 124.242 51.203 30.357 21.864 11.797 6.554 3.845 2.374
30.0 29.700 31.680 39.600 67.886 516.862 424.020 296.625 216.783 128.526 52.968 31.404 22.618 12.204 6.780 3.978 2.455

User Manual 498

User Manual 499
Very inverse curve
T  M   A  
B D E tr
   C
I 2 3
 I   I  C  I  C  2
 I  1
 0  I  I  I 
  0   0    0
@Fig.176.png-H:54,7-W:250@ @Fig.177.png-H:61,65-W:143,4@
A = 0.0615, B = 0.7989, C = 0.3400, D = -0.2840, E = 4.0505 tr = 4.678
M \
0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
I/Io
0.5 2.339 2.495 3.119 5.346 5.970 4.924 3.487 2.582 1.567 0.663 0.386 0.268 0.130 0.073 0.051 0.041
1.0 4.678 4.990 6.237 10.693 11.940 9.848 6.975 5.164 3.134 1.325 0.772 0.537 0.260 0.146 0.102 0.082
2.0 9.356 9.980 12.475 21.385 23.881 19.696 13.949 10.327 6.268 2.650 1.545 1.074 0.520 0.291 0.204 0.163
3.0 14.034 14.970 18.712 32.078 35.821 29.544 20.924 15.491 9.402 3.976 2.317 1.611 0.780 0.437 0.306 0.245
4.0 18.712 19.959 24.949 42.770 47.762 39.393 27.898 20.655 12.537 5.301 3.090 2.148 1.040 0.583 0.408 0.326
5.0 23.390 24.949 31.187 53.463 59.702 49.241 34.873 25.819 15.671 6.626 3.862 2.685 1.299 0.728 0.510 0.408
6.0 28.068 29.939 37.424 64.155 71.642 59.089 41.848 30.982 18.805 7.951 4.635 3.221 1.559 0.874 0.612 0.489
7.0 32.746 34.929 43.661 74.848 83.583 68.937 48.822 36.146 21.939 9.276 5.407 3.758 1.819 1.020 0.714 0.571
8.0 37.424 39.919 49.899 85.541 95.523 78.785 55.797 41.310 25.073 10.602 6.179 4.295 2.079 1.165 0.815 0.652
9.0 42.102 44.909 56.136 96.233 107.464 88.633 62.771 46.474 28.207 11.927 6.952 4.832 2.339 1.311 0.917 0.734
10.0 46.780 49.899 62.373 106.926 119.404 98.481 69.746 51.637 31.341 13.252 7.724 5.369 2.599 1.457 1.019 0.815
11.0 51.458 54.889 68.611 117.618 131.344 108.330 76.721 56.801 34.475 14.577 8.497 5.906 2.859 1.602 1.121 0.897
12.0 56.136 59.878 74.848 128.311 143.285 118.178 83.695 61.965 37.610 15.902 9.269 6.443 3.119 1.748 1.223 0.978
13.0 60.814 64.868 81.085 139.003 155.225 128.026 90.670 67.128 40.744 17.228 10.041 6.980 3.379 1.893 1.325 1.060
14.0 65.492 69.858 87.323 149.696 167.165 137.874 97.645 72.292 43.878 18.553 10.814 7.517 3.638 2.039 1.427 1.141
15.0 70.170 74.848 93.560 160.389 179.106 147.722 104.619 77.456 47.012 19.878 11.586 8.054 3.898 2.185 1.529 1.223
16.0 74.848 79.838 99.797 171.081 191.046 157.570 111.594 82.620 50.146 21.203 12.359 8.591 4.158 2.330 1.631 1.304
17.0 79.526 84.828 106.035 181.774 202.987 167.419 118.568 87.783 53.280 22.528 13.131 9.127 4.418 2.476 1.733 1.386
18.0 84.204 89.818 112.272 192.466 214.927 177.267 125.543 92.947 56.414 23.853 13.904 9.664 4.678 2.622 1.835 1.468
19.0 88.882 94.807 118.509 203.159 226.867 187.115 132.518 98.111 59.549 25.179 14.676 10.201 4.938 2.767 1.937 1.549
20.0 93.560 99.797 124.747 213.851 238.808 196.963 139.492 103.275 62.683 26.504 15.448 10.738 5.198 2.913 2.039 1.631
21.0 98.238 104.787 130.984 224.544 250.748 206.811 146.467 108.438 65.817 27.829 16.221 11.275 5.458 3.059 2.141 1.712
22.0 102.916 109.777 137.221 235.237 262.689 216.659 153.441 113.602 68.951 29.154 16.993 11.812 5.718 3.204 2.243 1.794
23.0 107.594 114.767 143.459 245.929 274.629 226.507 160.416 118.766 72.085 30.479 17.766 12.349 5.977 3.350 2.344 1.875
24.0 112.272 119.757 149.696 256.622 286.569 236.356 167.391 123.930 75.219 31.805 18.538 12.886 6.237 3.496 2.446 1.957
25.0 116.950 124.747 155.933 267.314 298.510 246.204 174.365 129.093 78.353 33.130 19.310 13.423 6.497 3.641 2.548 2.038
26.0 121.628 129.737 162.171 278.007 310.450 256.052 181.340 134.257 81.487 34.455 20.083 13.960 6.757 3.787 2.650 2.120
27.0 126.306 134.726 168.408 288.699 322.391 265.900 188.314 139.421 84.622 35.780 20.855 14.497 7.017 3.933 2.752 2.201
28.0 130.984 139.716 174.645 299.392 334.331 275.748 195.289 144.584 87.756 37.105 21.628 15.034 7.277 4.078 2.854 2.283
29.0 135.662 144.706 180.883 310.085 346.271 285.596 202.264 149.748 90.890 38.431 22.400 15.570 7.537 4.224 2.956 2.364
30.0 140.340 149.696 187.120 320.777 358.212 295.444 209.238 154.912 94.024 39.756 23.173 16.107 7.797 4.370 3.058 2.446

User Manual 500

User Manual 501
Extremely inverse curve
T  M   A  
B D E tr
   C
I 2 3
 I   I  C  I  C   I  1
2
 0  I  I  I 
  0   0    0
A = 0.0399, B = 0.2294, C = 0.5000, D = 3.0094, E = 0.7222 tr = 6.008
M \
0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
I/Io
0.5 3.004 3.204 4.005 6.866 7.373 6.063 4.307 3.220 2.000 0.872 0.499 0.330 0.124 0.049 0.030 0.024
1.0 6.008 6.409 8.011 13.733 14.746 12.125 8.615 6.439 4.001 1.744 0.997 0.659 0.247 0.098 0.060 0.048
2.0 12.016 12.817 16.021 27.465 29.492 24.250 17.230 12.879 8.002 3.489 1.994 1.319 0.495 0.196 0.119 0.095
3.0 18.024 19.226 24.032 41.198 44.239 36.376 25.844 19.318 12.003 5.233 2.992 1.978 0.742 0.295 0.179 0.143
4.0 24.032 25.634 32.043 54.930 58.985 48.501 34.459 25.758 16.004 6.977 3.989 2.638 0.990 0.393 0.239 0.191
5.0 30.040 32.043 40.053 68.663 73.731 60.626 43.074 32.197 20.004 8.722 4.986 3.297 1.237 0.491 0.298 0.238
6.0 36.048 38.451 48.064 82.395 88.477 72.751 51.689 38.636 24.005 10.466 5.983 3.956 1.484 0.589 0.358 0.286
7.0 42.056 44.860 56.075 96.128 103.224 84.876 60.303 45.076 28.006 12.210 6.981 4.616 1.732 0.688 0.418 0.334
8.0 48.064 51.268 64.085 109.861 117.970 97.002 68.918 51.515 32.007 13.955 7.978 5.275 1.979 0.786 0.477 0.381
9.0 54.072 57.677 72.096 123.593 132.716 109.127 77.533 57.954 36.008 15.699 8.975 5.934 2.227 0.884 0.537 0.429
10.0 60.080 64.085 80.107 137.326 147.462 121.252 86.148 64.394 40.009 17.443 9.972 6.594 2.474 0.982 0.597 0.476
11.0 66.088 70.494 88.117 151.058 162.208 133.377 94.763 70.833 44.010 19.188 10.969 7.253 2.722 1.081 0.656 0.524
12.0 72.096 76.902 96.128 164.791 176.955 145.502 103.377 77.273 48.011 20.932 11.967 7.913 2.969 1.179 0.716 0.572
13.0 78.104 83.311 104.139 178.523 191.701 157.628 111.992 83.712 52.012 22.676 12.964 8.572 3.216 1.277 0.776 0.619
14.0 84.112 89.719 112.149 192.256 206.447 169.753 120.607 90.151 56.013 24.421 13.961 9.231 3.464 1.375 0.835 0.667
15.0 90.120 96.128 120.160 205.989 221.193 181.878 129.222 96.591 60.013 26.165 14.958 9.891 3.711 1.474 0.895 0.715
16.0 96.128 102.537 128.171 219.721 235.940 194.003 137.837 103.030 64.014 27.909 15.956 10.550 3.959 1.572 0.955 0.762
17.0 102.136 108.945 136.181 233.454 250.686 206.128 146.451 109.470 68.015 29.654 16.953 11.210 4.206 1.670 1.014 0.810
18.0 108.144 115.354 144.192 247.186 265.432 218.254 155.066 115.909 72.016 31.398 17.950 11.869 4.453 1.768 1.074 0.858
19.0 114.152 121.762 152.203 260.919 280.178 230.379 163.681 122.348 76.017 33.142 18.947 12.528 4.701 1.866 1.134 0.905
20.0 120.160 128.171 160.213 274.651 294.924 242.504 172.296 128.788 80.018 34.887 19.944 13.188 4.948 1.965 1.194 0.953
21.0 126.168 134.579 168.224 288.384 309.671 254.629 180.910 135.227 84.019 36.631 20.942 13.847 5.196 2.063 1.253 1.001
22.0 132.176 140.988 176.235 302.117 324.417 266.754 189.525 141.666 88.020 38.375 21.939 14.506 5.443 2.161 1.313 1.048
23.0 138.184 147.396 184.245 315.849 339.163 278.879 198.140 148.106 92.021 40.120 22.936 15.166 5.691 2.259 1.373 1.096
24.0 144.192 153.805 192.256 329.582 353.909 291.005 206.755 154.545 96.022 41.864 23.933 15.825 5.938 2.358 1.432 1.144
25.0 150.200 160.213 200.267 343.314 368.655 303.130 215.370 160.985 100.022 43.608 24.931 16.485 6.185 2.456 1.492 1.191
26.0 156.208 166.622 208.277 357.047 383.402 315.255 223.984 167.424 104.023 45.353 25.928 17.144 6.433 2.554 1.552 1.239
27.0 162.216 173.030 216.288 370.779 398.148 327.380 232.599 173.863 108.024 47.097 26.925 17.803 6.680 2.652 1.611 1.286
28.0 168.224 179.439 224.299 384.512 412.894 339.505 241.214 180.303 112.025 48.841 27.922 18.463 6.928 2.751 1.671 1.334
29.0 174.232 185.847 232.309 398.245 427.640 351.631 249.829 186.742 116.026 50.586 28.920 19.122 7.175 2.849 1.731 1.382
30.0 180.240 192.256 240.320 411.977 442.387 363.756 258.444 193.182 120.027 52.330 29.917 19.782 7.422 2.947 1.790 1.429

User Manual 502

User Manual 503
Moderately inverse curve
T  M   A  
B D E tr
   C
I 2  3
 I   I  C  I  C  2
 I  1
 0  I  I  I 
  0   0  
 0
A = 0.1735, B = 0.6791, C = 0.8000, D = -0.0800, E = 0.1271 tr = 1.2
M \
0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
I/Io
0.5 0.600 0.640 0.800 1.371 4.872 3.128 1.679 1.114 0.675 0.379 0.286 0.239 0.166 0.123 0.104 0.095
1.0 1.200 1.280 1.600 2.743 9.744 6.256 3.357 2.229 1.351 0.757 0.571 0.478 0.332 0.247 0.209 0.191
2.0 2.400 2.560 3.200 5.486 19.489 12.511 6.714 4.457 2.702 1.515 1.142 0.955 0.665 0.493 0.417 0.382
3.0 3.600 3.840 4.800 8.229 29.233 18.767 10.072 6.686 4.053 2.272 1.713 1.433 0.997 0.740 0.626 0.572
4.0 4.800 5.120 6.400 10.971 38.977 25.023 13.429 8.914 5.404 3.030 2.285 1.910 1.329 0.986 0.835 0.763
5.0 6.000 6.400 8.000 13.714 48.722 31.278 16.786 11.143 6.755 3.787 2.856 2.388 1.662 1.233 1.043 0.954
6.0 7.200 7.680 9.600 16.457 58.466 37.534 20.143 13.371 8.106 4.544 3.427 2.866 1.994 1.479 1.252 1.145
7.0 8.400 8.960 11.200 19.200 68.210 43.790 23.500 15.600 9.457 5.302 3.998 3.343 2.327 1.726 1.461 1.335
8.0 9.600 10.240 12.800 21.943 77.954 50.045 26.857 17.828 10.807 6.059 4.569 3.821 2.659 1.972 1.669 1.526
9.0 10.800 11.520 14.400 24.686 87.699 56.301 30.215 20.057 12.158 6.817 5.140 4.298 2.991 2.219 1.878 1.717
10.0 12.000 12.800 16.000 27.429 97.443 62.557 33.572 22.285 13.509 7.574 5.712 4.776 3.324 2.465 2.087 1.908
11.0 13.200 14.080 17.600 30.171 107.187 68.813 36.929 24.514 14.860 8.332 6.283 5.253 3.656 2.712 2.295 2.099
12.0 14.400 15.360 19.200 32.914 116.932 75.068 40.286 26.742 16.211 9.089 6.854 5.731 3.988 2.958 2.504 2.289
13.0 15.600 16.640 20.800 35.657 126.676 81.324 43.643 28.971 17.562 9.846 7.425 6.209 4.321 3.205 2.713 2.480
14.0 16.800 17.920 22.400 38.400 136.420 87.580 47.001 31.199 18.913 10.604 7.996 6.686 4.653 3.451 2.921 2.671
15.0 18.000 19.200 24.000 41.143 146.165 93.835 50.358 33.428 20.264 11.361 8.567 7.164 4.986 3.698 3.130 2.862
16.0 19.200 20.480 25.600 43.886 155.909 100.091 53.715 35.656 21.615 12.119 9.139 7.641 5.318 3.945 3.339 3.052
17.0 20.400 21.760 27.200 46.629 165.653 106.347 57.072 37.885 22.966 12.876 9.710 8.119 5.650 4.191 3.547 3.243
18.0 21.600 23.040 28.800 49.371 175.398 112.602 60.429 40.113 24.317 13.633 10.281 8.597 5.983 4.438 3.756 3.434
19.0 22.800 24.320 30.400 52.114 185.142 118.858 63.787 42.342 25.668 14.391 10.852 9.074 6.315 4.684 3.965 3.625
20.0 24.000 25.600 32.000 54.857 194.886 125.114 67.144 44.570 27.019 15.148 11.423 9.552 6.647 4.931 4.173 3.815
21.0 25.200 26.880 33.600 57.600 204.630 131.369 70.501 46.799 28.370 15.906 11.994 10.029 6.980 5.177 4.382 4.006
22.0 26.400 28.160 35.200 60.343 214.375 137.625 73.858 49.027 29.720 16.663 12.565 10.507 7.312 5.424 4.591 4.197
23.0 27.600 29.440 36.800 63.086 224.119 143.881 77.215 51.256 31.071 17.421 13.137 10.985 7.645 5.670 4.799 4.388
24.0 28.800 30.720 38.400 65.829 233.863 150.136 80.572 53.484 32.422 18.178 13.708 11.462 7.977 5.917 5.008 4.579
25.0 30.000 32.000 40.000 68.571 243.608 156.392 83.930 55.713 33.773 18.935 14.279 11.940 8.309 6.163 5.217 4.769
26.0 31.200 33.280 41.600 71.314 253.352 162.648 87.287 57.941 35.124 19.693 14.850 12.417 8.642 6.410 5.425 4.960
27.0 32.400 34.560 43.200 74.057 263.096 168.903 90.644 60.170 36.475 20.450 15.421 12.895 8.974 6.656 5.634 5.151
28.0 33.600 35.840 44.800 76.800 272.841 175.159 94.001 62.398 37.826 21.208 15.992 13.373 9.306 6.903 5.843 5.342
29.0 34.800 37.120 46.400 79.543 282.585 181.415 97.358 64.627 39.177 21.965 16.564 13.850 9.639 7.149 6.051 5.532
30.0 36.000 38.400 48.000 82.286 292.329 187.671 100.716 66.855 40.528 22.722 17.135 14.328 9.971 7.396 6.260 5.723

User Manual 504

User Manual 505
30.3 IEC 60255-151 CURVES30
Enclosed below are the groups of curves, according to IEC 60255-151, which correspond to the following types:
 IEEE Moderately Inverse

 IEEE Very Inverse
 IEEE Extremely Inverse
𝑘 𝑡𝑟
𝑇 = 𝑀[ 𝐼 𝛼
+ 𝑐] 𝑇𝐷𝑅𝑂𝑃 = 𝑀 [ 𝐼 2
]
( ) −1 1−( )
𝐼0 𝐼0
in which:

 M : multiplier (“time dial”). Valid range 0.025 to 15.0, in steps of 0.005
 K, , tr, c: constants which depend on the type of curve:
Constants IEEE Modertely Inverse IEEE Very Inverse IEEE Extremely Inverse
K 0.0515 19.61 28.2
 0.02 2 2
c 0.114 0.491 0.1217
tr 4.85 21.6 29.1
each type of characteristic. Bear in mind that there are another 9 curves between each of the two curves illustrated, except
between 0.05 and 0.1, between which there are another 4.
30
Avaliable from firmware version 6.0.8.2 and ICD version 8.2.0.0.

User Manual 506
IEEE Moderately Inverse curve
𝑘 𝑡𝑟
+ 𝑐] 𝑇𝑅𝐸𝐶𝐴𝐼𝐷𝐴 = 𝑀 [ 𝐼 2
]
( ) −1 1−( )
𝐼0 𝐼0
K = 0,0515,  = 0,02, c = 0,114, tr = 4,85
M\I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 0.243 0.259 0.323 0.554 2.643 1.355 0.711 0.495 0.322 0.190 0.145 0.122 0.084 0.060 0.047 0.039
0.06 0.291 0.310 0.388 0.665 3.172 1.626 0.853 0.594 0.386 0.228 0.174 0.146 0.101 0.072 0.057 0.047
0.340 0.362 0.453 0.776 3.701 1.897 0.995 0.693 0.451 0.266 0.203 0.170 0.118 0.084 0.066 0.055
0.07
0.08 0.388 0.414 0.517 0.887 4.229 2.168 1.137 0.792 0.515 0.304 0.232 0.195 0.135 0.097 0.076 0.063
0.09 0.437 0.466 0.582 0.998 4.758 2.439 1.279 0.891 0.580 0.342 0.261 0.219 0.152 0.109 0.085 0.071
0.485 0.517 0.647 1.109 5.287 2.711 1.421 0.990 0.644 0.380 0.290 0.243 0.169 0.121 0.095 0.079
0.10
0.11 0.534 0.569 0.711 1.219 5.815 2.982 1.563 1.089 0.708 0.418 0.319 0.268 0.186 0.133 0.104 0.087
0.12 0.582 0.621 0.776 1.330 6.344 3.253 1.705 1.188 0.773 0.456 0.348 0.292 0.203 0.145 0.114 0.094
0.631 0.673 0.841 1.441 6.872 3.524 1.848 1.287 0.837 0.494 0.377 0.316 0.219 0.157 0.123 0.102
0.13
0.14 0.679 0.724 0.905 1.552 7.401 3.795 1.990 1.386 0.901 0.532 0.406 0.341 0.236 0.169 0.133 0.110
0.15 0.728 0.776 0.970 1.663 7.930 4.066 2.132 1.485 0.966 0.570 0.435 0.365 0.253 0.181 0.142 0.118
0.776 0.828 1.035 1.774 8.458 4.337 2.274 1.584 1.030 0.609 0.464 0.389 0.270 0.193 0.152 0.126
0.16
0.17 0.825 0.879 1.099 1.885 8.987 4.608 2.416 1.683 1.095 0.647 0.493 0.413 0.287 0.205 0.161 0.134
0.18 0.873 0.931 1.164 1.995 9.516 4.879 2.558 1.783 1.159 0.685 0.522 0.438 0.304 0.217 0.171 0.142
0.922 0.983 1.229 2.106 10.044 5.150 2.700 1.882 1.223 0.723 0.551 0.462 0.321 0.229 0.180 0.149
0.19
0.20 0.970 1.035 1.293 2.217 10.573 5.421 2.842 1.981 1.288 0.761 0.580 0.486 0.338 0.241 0.190 0.157
0.25 1.213 1.293 1.617 2.771 13.216 6.776 3.553 2.476 1.610 0.951 0.725 0.608 0.422 0.302 0.237 0.197
1.455 1.552 1.940 3.326 15.860 8.132 4.263 2.971 1.932 1.141 0.870 0.730 0.506 0.362 0.284 0.236
0.30
0.35 1.698 1.811 2.263 3.880 18.503 9.487 4.974 3.466 2.254 1.331 1.015 0.851 0.591 0.422 0.332 0.275
0.40 1.940 2.069 2.587 4.434 21.146 10.842 5.685 3.961 2.576 1.521 1.159 0.973 0.675 0.483 0.379 0.315
2.183 2.328 2.910 4.989 23.789 12.197 6.395 4.456 2.898 1.711 1.304 1.094 0.760 0.543 0.427 0.354
0.45
0.50 2.425 2.587 3.233 5.543 26.433 13.553 7.106 4.951 3.220 1.902 1.449 1.216 0.844 0.603 0.474 0.393
0.55 2.668 2.845 3.557 6.097 29.076 14.908 7.816 5.447 3.541 2.092 1.594 1.338 0.929 0.664 0.521 0.433
2.910 3.104 3.880 6.651 31.719 16.263 8.527 5.942 3.863 2.282 1.739 1.459 1.013 0.724 0.569 0.472
0.60
0.65 3.153 3.363 4.203 7.206 34.362 17.618 9.238 6.437 4.185 2.472 1.884 1.581 1.097 0.784 0.616 0.511
0.70 3.395 3.621 4.527 7.760 37.006 18.974 9.948 6.932 4.507 2.662 2.029 1.703 1.182 0.845 0.664 0.551
3.638 3.880 4.850 8.314 39.649 20.329 10.659 7.427 4.829 2.852 2.174 1.824 1.266 0.905 0.711 0.590
0.75
0.80 3.880 4.139 5.173 8.869 42.292 21.684 11.369 7.922 5.151 3.043 2.319 1.946 1.351 0.965 0.758 0.629
0.85 4.123 4.397 5.497 9.423 44.935 23.040 12.080 8.417 5.473 3.233 2.464 2.067 1.435 1.026 0.806 0.669
4.365 4.656 5.820 9.977 47.579 24.395 12.790 8.913 5.795 3.423 2.609 2.189 1.519 1.086 0.853 0.708
0.90
0.95 4.608 4.915 6.143 10.531 50.222 25.750 13.501 9.408 6.117 3.613 2.754 2.311 1.604 1.146 0.901 0.747
1.00 4.850 5.173 6.467 11.086 52.865 27.105 14.212 9.903 6.439 3.803 2.899 2.432 1.688 1.207 0.948 0.787
1.05 5.093 5.432 6.790 11.640 55.509 28.461 14.922 10.398 6.761 3.993 3.044 2.554 1.773 1.267 0.995 0.826
1.5 7.275 7.760 9.700 16.629 79.298 40.658 21.317 14.854 9.659 5.705 4.348 3.648 2.532 1.810 1.422 1.180
2.5 12.125 12.933 16.167 27.714 132.163 67.763 35.529 24.757 16.098 9.508 7.246 6.081 4.221 3.017 2.370 1.967
4.0 19.400 20.693 25.867 44.343 211.461 108.421 56.847 39.611 25.756 15.213 11.594 9.729 6.753 4.827 3.792 3.146
6.0 29.100 31.040 38.800 66.514 317.192 162.632 85.270 59.417 38.634 22.819 17.391 14.593 10.130 7.241 5.688 4.720
10.0 48.500 51.733 64.667 110.857 528.653 271.053 142.117 99.029 64.390 38.032 28.986 24.322 16.883 12.068 9.481 7.866
15.0 72.750 77.600 97.000 166.286 792.979 406.580 213.175 148.543 96.585 57.049 43.479 36.483 25.325 18.101 14.221 11.799

User Manual 507

User Manual 508
IEEE Very Inverse curve
𝑘 𝑡𝑟
]
( ) −1 1−( )
𝐼0 𝐼0
K = 19,61,  = 2, c = 0,491, tr = 21,6
M\I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 1.080 1.152 1.440 2.469 9.590 4.694 2.253 1.446 0.809 0.351 0.211 0.147 0.065 0.034 0.027 0.025
0.06 1.296 1.382 1.728 2.962 11.508 5.632 2.704 1.735 0.971 0.422 0.254 0.177 0.078 0.041 0.032 0.030
1.512 1.613 2.016 3.456 13.427 6.571 3.154 2.024 1.133 0.492 0.296 0.206 0.092 0.048 0.038 0.035
0.07
0.08 1.728 1.843 2.304 3.950 15.345 7.510 3.605 2.313 1.294 0.562 0.338 0.235 0.105 0.055 0.043 0.040
0.09 1.944 2.074 2.592 4.443 17.263 8.448 4.055 2.602 1.456 0.632 0.380 0.265 0.118 0.062 0.049 0.045
2.160 2.304 2.880 4.937 19.181 9.387 4.506 2.891 1.618 0.703 0.423 0.294 0.131 0.069 0.054 0.050
0.10
0.11 2.376 2.534 3.168 5.431 21.099 10.326 4.957 3.180 1.780 0.773 0.465 0.324 0.144 0.076 0.059 0.055
0.12 2.592 2.765 3.456 5.925 23.017 11.265 5.407 3.469 1.941 0.843 0.507 0.353 0.157 0.083 0.065 0.060
2.808 2.995 3.744 6.418 24.935 12.203 5.858 3.758 2.103 0.914 0.549 0.382 0.170 0.090 0.070 0.065
0.13
0.14 3.024 3.226 4.032 6.912 26.853 13.142 6.308 4.048 2.265 0.984 0.592 0.412 0.183 0.096 0.076 0.070
0.15 3.240 3.456 4.320 7.406 28.771 14.081 6.759 4.337 2.427 1.054 0.634 0.441 0.196 0.103 0.081 0.075
3.456 3.686 4.608 7.899 30.689 15.020 7.209 4.626 2.589 1.124 0.676 0.471 0.209 0.110 0.086 0.081
0.16
0.17 3.672 3.917 4.896 8.393 32.607 15.958 7.660 4.915 2.750 1.195 0.718 0.500 0.222 0.117 0.092 0.086
0.18 3.888 4.147 5.184 8.887 34.525 16.897 8.111 5.204 2.912 1.265 0.761 0.530 0.235 0.124 0.097 0.091
4.104 4.378 5.472 9.381 36.444 17.836 8.561 5.493 3.074 1.335 0.803 0.559 0.249 0.131 0.103 0.096
0.19
0.20 4.320 4.608 5.760 9.874 38.362 18.774 9.012 5.782 3.236 1.406 0.845 0.588 0.262 0.138 0.108 0.101
0.25 5.400 5.760 7.200 12.343 47.952 23.468 11.265 7.228 4.045 1.757 1.057 0.736 0.327 0.172 0.135 0.126
6.480 6.912 8.640 14.811 57.542 28.162 13.518 8.673 4.854 2.108 1.268 0.883 0.392 0.207 0.162 0.151
0.30
0.35 7.560 8.064 10.080 17.280 67.133 32.855 15.771 10.119 5.663 2.460 1.479 1.030 0.458 0.241 0.189 0.176
0.40 8.640 9.216 11.520 19.749 76.723 37.549 18.024 11.565 6.472 2.811 1.690 1.177 0.523 0.276 0.216 0.201
9.720 10.368 12.960 22.217 86.314 42.242 20.277 13.010 7.281 3.162 1.902 1.324 0.589 0.310 0.243 0.226
0.45
0.50 10.800 11.520 14.400 24.686 95.904 46.936 22.530 14.456 8.090 3.514 2.113 1.471 0.654 0.345 0.270 0.252
0.55 11.880 12.672 15.840 27.154 105.494 51.630 24.783 15.901 8.898 3.865 2.324 1.618 0.719 0.379 0.297 0.277
12.960 13.824 17.280 29.623 115.085 56.323 27.036 17.347 9.707 4.217 2.536 1.765 0.785 0.413 0.324 0.302
0.60
0.65 14.040 14.976 18.720 32.091 124.675 61.017 29.288 18.792 10.516 4.568 2.747 1.912 0.850 0.448 0.351 0.327
0.70 15.120 16.128 20.160 34.560 134.266 65.710 31.541 20.238 11.325 4.919 2.958 2.060 0.916 0.482 0.378 0.352
16.200 17.280 21.600 37.029 143.856 70.404 33.794 21.683 12.134 5.271 3.170 2.207 0.981 0.517 0.405 0.377
0.75
0.80 17.280 18.432 23.040 39.497 153.446 75.098 36.047 23.129 12.943 5.622 3.381 2.354 1.046 0.551 0.432 0.403
0.85 18.360 19.584 24.480 41.966 163.037 79.791 38.300 24.575 13.752 5.974 3.592 2.501 1.112 0.586 0.459 0.428
19.440 20.736 25.920 44.434 172.627 84.485 40.553 26.020 14.561 6.325 3.804 2.648 1.177 0.620 0.486 0.453
0.90
0.95 20.520 21.888 27.360 46.903 182.218 89.178 42.806 27.466 15.370 6.676 4.015 2.795 1.243 0.655 0.513 0.478
1.00 21.600 23.040 28.800 49.371 191.808 93.872 45.059 28.911 16.179 7.028 4.226 2.942 1.308 0.689 0.540 0.503
1.05 22.680 24.192 30.240 51.840 201.398 98.566 47.312 30.357 16.988 7.379 4.438 3.089 1.373 0.724 0.567 0.528
1.5 32.400 34.560 43.200 74.057 287.712 140.808 67.589 43.367 24.269 10.542 6.339 4.413 1.962 1.034 0.810 0.755
2.5 54.000 57.600 72.000 123.429 479.520 234.680 112.648 72.278 40.448 17.569 10.566 7.356 3.270 1.723 1.350 1.258
4.0 86.400 92.160 115.200 197.486 767.232 375.488 180.237 115.645 64.716 28.111 16.905 11.769 5.232 2.756 2.161 2.013
6.0 129.600 138.240 172.800 296.229 1150.848 563.232 270.355 173.468 97.074 42.166 25.357 17.654 7.849 4.134 3.241 3.020
10.0 216.000 230.400 288.000 493.714 1918.081 938.720 450.592 289.113 161.790 70.277 42.262 29.423 13.081 6.891 5.401 5.033
15.0 324.000 345.600 432.000 740.571 2877.121 1408.079 675.888 433.669 242.685 105.415 63.394 44.134 19.621 10.336 8.102 7.549

User Manual 509

User Manual 510
IEEE Extremely Inverse curve
𝑘 𝑡𝑟
]
( ) −1 1−( )
𝐼0 𝐼0
K = 28,2,  = 2, c = 0,1217, tr = 29,1
M\I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 1.455 1.552 1.940 3.326 13.762 6.720 3.211 2.050 1.134 0.476 0.275 0.182 0.065 0.020 0.010 0.007
0.06 1.746 1.862 2.328 3.991 16.515 8.064 3.853 2.459 1.361 0.571 0.330 0.219 0.078 0.024 0.012 0.008
2.037 2.173 2.716 4.656 19.267 9.409 4.495 2.869 1.588 0.667 0.385 0.255 0.091 0.028 0.013 0.010
0.07
0.08 2.328 2.483 3.104 5.321 22.019 10.753 5.137 3.279 1.815 0.762 0.439 0.292 0.104 0.033 0.015 0.011
0.09 2.619 2.794 3.492 5.986 24.772 12.097 5.779 3.689 2.041 0.857 0.494 0.328 0.117 0.037 0.017 0.013
2.910 3.104 3.880 6.651 27.524 13.441 6.421 4.099 2.268 0.952 0.549 0.365 0.130 0.041 0.019 0.014
0.10
0.11 3.201 3.414 4.268 7.317 30.277 14.785 7.063 4.509 2.495 1.047 0.604 0.401 0.143 0.045 0.021 0.015
0.12 3.492 3.725 4.656 7.982 33.029 16.129 7.706 4.919 2.722 1.143 0.659 0.438 0.156 0.049 0.023 0.017
3.783 4.035 5.044 8.647 35.782 17.473 8.348 5.329 2.949 1.238 0.714 0.474 0.169 0.053 0.025 0.018
0.13
0.14 4.074 4.346 5.432 9.312 38.534 18.817 8.990 5.739 3.175 1.333 0.769 0.511 0.182 0.057 0.027 0.020
0.15 4.365 4.656 5.820 9.977 41.287 20.161 9.632 6.149 3.402 1.428 0.824 0.547 0.195 0.061 0.029 0.021
4.656 4.966 6.208 10.642 44.039 21.505 10.274 6.559 3.629 1.523 0.879 0.583 0.207 0.065 0.031 0.022
0.16
0.17 4.947 5.277 6.596 11.307 46.791 22.849 10.916 6.969 3.856 1.619 0.934 0.620 0.220 0.069 0.033 0.024
0.18 5.238 5.587 6.984 11.973 49.544 24.193 11.558 7.378 4.083 1.714 0.989 0.656 0.233 0.073 0.035 0.025
5.529 5.898 7.372 12.638 52.296 25.537 12.200 7.788 4.310 1.809 1.044 0.693 0.246 0.077 0.037 0.026
0.19
0.20 5.820 6.208 7.760 13.303 55.049 26.881 12.843 8.198 4.536 1.904 1.099 0.729 0.259 0.081 0.038 0.028
0.25 7.275 7.760 9.700 16.629 68.811 33.602 16.053 10.248 5.670 2.380 1.373 0.912 0.324 0.102 0.048 0.035
8.730 9.312 11.640 19.954 82.573 40.322 19.264 12.297 6.805 2.857 1.648 1.094 0.389 0.122 0.058 0.042
0.30
0.35 10.185 10.864 13.580 23.280 96.335 47.043 22.474 14.347 7.939 3.333 1.923 1.276 0.454 0.142 0.067 0.049
0.40 11.640 12.416 15.520 26.606 110.097 53.763 25.685 16.397 9.073 3.809 2.197 1.459 0.519 0.163 0.077 0.056
13.095 13.968 17.460 29.931 123.860 60.483 28.896 18.446 10.207 4.285 2.472 1.641 0.584 0.183 0.087 0.063
0.45
0.50 14.550 15.520 19.400 33.257 137.622 67.204 32.106 20.496 11.341 4.761 2.747 1.823 0.648 0.203 0.096 0.070
0.55 16.005 17.072 21.340 36.583 151.384 73.924 35.317 22.545 12.475 5.237 3.021 2.006 0.713 0.224 0.106 0.077
17.460 18.624 23.280 39.909 165.146 80.644 38.528 24.595 13.609 5.713 3.296 2.188 0.778 0.244 0.115 0.084
0.60
0.65 18.915 20.176 25.220 43.234 178.908 87.365 41.738 26.644 14.743 6.189 3.571 2.370 0.843 0.264 0.125 0.091
0.70 20.370 21.728 27.160 46.560 192.671 94.085 44.949 28.694 15.877 6.665 3.845 2.553 0.908 0.285 0.135 0.098
21.825 23.280 29.100 49.886 206.433 100.806 48.159 30.743 17.011 7.141 4.120 2.735 0.973 0.305 0.144 0.105
0.75
0.80 23.280 24.832 31.040 53.211 220.195 107.526 51.370 32.793 18.145 7.617 4.395 2.917 1.037 0.325 0.154 0.111
0.85 24.735 26.384 32.980 56.537 233.957 114.246 54.581 34.843 19.279 8.093 4.669 3.100 1.102 0.346 0.164 0.118
26.190 27.936 34.920 59.863 247.719 120.967 57.791 36.892 20.414 8.570 4.944 3.282 1.167 0.366 0.173 0.125
0.90
0.95 27.645 29.488 36.860 63.189 261.481 127.687 61.002 38.942 21.548 9.046 5.218 3.464 1.232 0.386 0.183 0.132
1.00 29.100 31.040 38.800 66.514 275.244 134.407 64.213 40.991 22.682 9.522 5.493 3.647 1.297 0.407 0.192 0.139
30.555 32.592 40.740 69.840 289.006 141.128 67.423 43.041 23.816 9.998 5.768 3.829 1.362 0.427 0.202 0.146
1.05
1.5 43.650 46.560 58.200 99.771 412.865 201.611 96.319 61.487 34.023 14.283 8.240 5.470 1.945 0.610 0.289 0.209
2.5 72.750 77.600 97.000 166.286 688.109 336.019 160.532 102.478 56.704 23.804 13.733 9.117 3.242 1.016 0.481 0.348
4.0 116.400 124.160 155.200 266.057 1100.975 537.630 256.850 163.965 90.727 38.087 21.973 14.587 5.187 1.626 0.770 0.557
6.0 174.600 186.240 232.800 399.086 1651.462 806.444 385.276 245.948 136.090 57.130 32.959 21.880 7.780 2.439 1.154 0.836
10.0 291.000 310.400 388.000 665.143 2752.437 1344.074 642.126 409.913 226.817 95.217 54.931 36.467 12.967 4.065 1.924 1.393
15.0 436.500 465.600 582.000 997.714 4128.655 2016.111 963.189 614.869 340.226 142.826 82.397 54.701 19.451 6.098 2.886 2.090

User Manual 511

User Manual 512
30.4 USER CURVES
The user can programme FOUR curves by entering the desired points into the “User curve 1” to “User curve 4” user curve
nodes.
The time corresponding to each I/Ia is programmed in seconds, with a minimum value of 0.020 seconds. These times
correspond to the curve of index 1, but as in curves IEC, the user can programme a time index between 0.05 and 1.09 in the
overcurrent protection settings.
It is not necessary to programme all the points on the curve, the unit will assign the time of the first programmed point to all
those I/Ia of a lower value and the last programmed time to all those of a higher I/Ia, that is to say, the graph will generally
start and finish with straight, horizontal lines. The points between the two programmed points will be calculated by the
console as a lineal interpolation.
I/Ia values for times which are superior to that which corresponds to an inferior I/Ia are not admitted, that is to say,
ascendant straight lines are not allowed.
The nodes for the configuration of the curves are:
 PROT/RUSC1 user curve 1

Each node uses 3 settings frames, into which the milliseconds of activation for each I/IAJ are entered, with a range of 20 to
600,000 milliseconds.
 Crv0 (Low Frame Curve). For setting (milliseconds) the activation times for 1.03 and 1.05 I/IAJ ratios.
 Crv1 (Medium Frame Curve). For setting (milliseconds) the activation times for 1.1 and 4 I/IAJ ratios, with steps
of 0.1.
 Crv1 (High Frame Curve). For setting (milliseconds) the activation times for 4 and 20 I/IAJ ratios, with steps of
0.5.
The programming carried out via PacFactory is done using the programming screen shown in Figure 197, in which:
 The times of the curves different points are entered (left table) and the curve’s graph is displayed (right table).
 Interpolate points of the curve and enter the known points. By clicking on “Calculate Curve Values”, the missing
values are calculated for the curve.
 Reset the curve values “Reset PC column”.
 “Save values”. Saves the values entered in order to send them to unit.
 “Close”. Returns to the general settings screen, from where they can be sent to the unit.

User Manual 513
Figure 197. User curve configuration screen
An example is shown below
I/Ia 2 4 8 12 15
T (s) 200 100 70 50 5

User Manual 514
MEASUREMENT LIST 
31. MEASUREMENT LIST

The following tables show the list of available measurements. If the model doesn´t have a function, the measurements of that
unit are no available.
Table 251. General measurements
Measurement Node Instance Data Attribute Refresh (ms)

VA MMXU 1 PhV phsA 100
VB MMXU 1 PhV phsB 100
VC MMXU 1 PhV phsC 100
VN MMXU 1 PhV neut 100
Average V MMXU 1 PhV net 100
VAB MMXU 1 PPV phsAB 100
VBC MMXU 1 PPV phsBC 100
VCA MMXU 1 PPV phsCA 100
Average U MMXU 1 PPV (PPVm in Ed2) net 100
IN MMXU 1 A neut 100
IA MMXU 1 A phsA 100
IB MMXU 1 A phsB 100
IC MMXU 1 A phsC 100
Average I MMXU 1 A net 100
Active Power P MMXU 1 TotW mag 100
Reactive Power Q MMXU 1 TotVAr mag 100
Power S MMXU 1 TotVA mag 100
Frequency MMXU 1 Hz net 2
Phase A Active Power MMXU 1 W phsA 100
Phase B Active Power MMXU 1 W phsB 100
Phase C Active Power MMXU 1 W phsC 100
Phase A Reactive Power MMXU 1 VAr phsA 100
Phase B Reactive Power MMXU 1 VAr phsB 100
Phase C Reactive Power MMXU 1 VAr phsC 100
Phase A S Power MMXU 1 VA phsA 100
Phase B S Power MMXU 1 VA phsB 100
Phase C S Power MMXU 1 VA phsC 100
Fault phase A Current MMXU 1 FltA phsA 1000
Fault phase B Current MMXU 1 FltA phsB 1000
Fault phase C Current MMXU 1 FltA phsC 1000
Fault Neutral Current MMXU 1 FltA neut 1000
Max. fault phase A Current MMXU 1 MaxFltA phsA 1000
Max. fault phase B Current MMXU 1 MaxFltA phsB 1000
Max. fault phase C Current MMXU 1 MaxFltA phsC 1000
Max. fault Neutral Current MMXU 1 MaxFltA neut 1000
Cosine phi rms phase A MMXU 1 PF phsA 100
Cosine phi rms phase B MMXU 1 PF phsB 100
Cosine phi rms phase C MMXU 1 PF phsC 100
Cosine phi rms average MMXU 1 PF net 100
Average Power Factor MMXU 1 TotPF mag 100

Tabla 252. Breaker 2 measurements (only models with two breakers)

IA2 MDIF 2 OpARem phsA 2
IB2 MDIF 2 OpARem phsB 2
IC2 MDIF 2 OpARem phsC 2
IA2 fundamental MDIF 2 FunARem phsA 2
IB2 fundamental MDIF 2 FunARem phsB 2
IC2 fundamental MDIF 2 FunARem phsC 2
Fault phase A2 Current MDIF 2 FltARem phsA 2
Fault phase B2 Current MDIF 2 FltARem phsB 2
Fault phase C2 Current MDIF 2 FltARem phsC 2
THD phase A2 Current MDIF 2 ThdARem phsA 2
THD phase B2 Current MDIF 2 ThdARem phsB 2
THD phase C2 Current MDIF 2 ThdARem phsC 2
Max. fault phase A2 Current MDIF 2 MaxFltARem phsA 1000
Max. fault phase B2 Current MDIF 2 MaxFltARem phsB 1000
Max. fault phase C2 Current MDIF 2 MaxFltARem phsC 1000
Table 253. Fundamental measurements

IA fundamental FUNMMXU 1 FunA phsA 100
IB fundamental FUNMMXU 1 FunA phsB 100
IC fundamental FUNMMXU 1 FunA phsC 100
IN fundamental FUNMMXU 1 FunA neut 100
VA fundamental FUNMMXU 1 FunPhV phsA 100
VB fundamental FUNMMXU 1 FunPhV phsB 100
VC fundamental FUNMMXU 1 FunPhV phsC 100
VN fundamental FUNMMXU 1 FunPhV neut 100
Cosine phi phase A (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunPF phsA 100
Cosine phi phase B (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunPF phsB 100
Cosine phi phase C (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunPF phsC 100
Cosine phi average (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunPF net 100
ACTIVE POWER P (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunTotW mag 100
REACTIVE POWER Q (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunTotVAr mag 100
POWER S (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunTotVA mag 100
Phase A Active P (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunW phsA 100
Phase B Active P (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunW phsB 100
Phase C Active P (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunW phsC 100
Phase A Reactive Q (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunVAr phsA 100
Phase B Reactive Q (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunVAr phsB 100
Phase C Reactive Q (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunVAr phsC 100
Phase A S (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunVA phsA 100
Phase B S (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunVA phsB 100
Phase C S (fund) FUNMMXU 1 FunVA phsC 100

Table 254. Instantaneous Fundamental measurements

Analog 1 PHSMMXU 1 OpPhasor1 phsA 100
Analog 2 PHSMMXU 1 OpPhasor2 phsB 100
Analog 3 PHSMMXU 1 OpPhasor3 phsC 100
Analog 4 PHSMMXU 1 OpPhasor4 neut 100
Analog 8 PHSMMXU 1 OpPhasor8 neut 100
Analog 12 PHSMMXU 1 OpPhasor12 net 100
Table 255. Energy counter

Active Energy Out MMTR 1 SupWh actVal 100
Active Energy In MMTR 1 DmdWh actVal 100
Reactive Energy Out MMTR 1 SupVArh actVal 100
Reactive Energy In MMTR 1 DmdVArh actVal 100
Table 256. Sequences

I0 MSQI 1 SeqA c1 2
V0 MSQI 1 SeqV c1 2
I1 MSQI 1 SeqA c2 2
V1 MSQI 1 SeqV c2 2
I2 MSQI 1 SeqA c3 2
V2 MSQI 1 SeqV c3 2
Table 257. Sequences 52 ½ (Only ZT1 and BF1)31

3I0 breaker 1 BH/PTRC 1 SeqA c1 2
3I0 breaker 2 BH/PTRC 1 SeqA C2 2
31
From firmware version 6.0.8.0 and ICD version 8.1.0.20

Table 258. THD

THD phase A Current MHAI 1 ThdA phsA 100
THD phase B Current MHAI 1 ThdA phsB 100
THD phase C Current MHAI 1 ThdA phsC 100
THD Neutral Current MHAI 1 ThdA neut 100
THD Average Current MHAI 1 ThdA net 100
THD phase A Voltage MHAI 1 ThdPhV phsA 100
THD phase B Voltage MHAI 1 ThdPhV phsB 100
THD phase C Voltage MHAI 1 ThdPhV phsC 100
THD Neutral Voltage MHAI 1 ThdPhV neut 100
THD Averagel Voltage MHAI 1 ThdPhV net 100
Table 259. Historic

Imax Historic phase A MSTA 1 MaxAmps phsA 1000
Imin Historic phase A MSTA 1 MinAmps phsA 1000
Imax Historic phase B MSTA 1 MaxAmps phsB 1000
Imin Historic phase B MSTA 1 MinAmps phsB 1000
Imax Historic phase C MSTA 1 MaxAmps phsC 1000
Imin Historic phase C MSTA 1 MinAmps phsC 1000
Vmax Historic phase A MSTA 1 MaxVolts phsA 1000
Vmin Historic phase A MSTA 1 MinVolts phsA 1000
Vmax Historic phase B MSTA 1 MaxVolts phsB 1000
Vmin Historic phase B MSTA 1 MinVolts phsB 1000
Vmax Historic phase C MSTA 1 MaxVolts phsC 1000
Vmin Historic phase C MSTA 1 MinVolts phsC 1000
VAmax Historic MSTA 1 MaxVA net 1000
VAmin Historic MSTA 1 MinVA net 1000
Wmax Historic MSTA 1 MaxW net 1000
Wmin Historic MSTA 1 MinW net 1000
VAr max Historic MSTA 1 MaxVAr net 1000
VAr min Historic MSTA 1 MinVAr net 1000
Table 260. Locator

Fault Distance RFLO 1 FltDiskm net 100
Table 261. Recloser

Total Reclose Counter ZRREC 1 RecCnt actVal 100
1st 3phase Reclose Counter ZRREC 1 Rec1P3Cnt actVal 100
Second Reclose Counter ZRREC 1 Rec2Cnt actVal 100
Third Reclose Counter ZRREC 1 Rec3Cnt actVal 100
Fourth Reclose Counter ZRREC 1 Rec4Cnt actVal 100

Table 262. Synchronism

V synchro RSYN 1 PhV net 100
Sychro Frequency RSYN 1 Hz mag 2
V synchro Diff RSYN 1 DifVClc mag 2
Ang synchro Diff RSYN 1 DifAngClc mag 2
Hz synchro Diff RSYN 1 DifHzClc mag 2
Table 263. Synchronism 2 (models with 2 synchronism units)

V synchro SECRSYN 1 PhV net 100
Sychro Frequency SECRSYN 1 Hz mag 2
V synchro Diff SECRSYN 1 DifVClc mag 2
Ang synchro Diff SECRSYN 1 DifAngClc mag 2
Hz synchro Diff SECRSYN 1 DifHzClc mag 2
Tabla 264. Thermal Image

Thermal Img. Phases PTTR 1 TmpRl mag 100
Thermal Img. Gr. GPTTR 1 TmpRl mag 100
Table 265. Breaker

Openings Counter B1 XCBR 1 OpCnt stVal 100
Max.Amp.Switch.ph.A B1 XCBR 1 MCut phsA 1000
Max.Amp.Switch.ph.B B1 XCBR 1 MCut phsB 1000
Max.Amp.Switch.ph.C B1 XCBR 1 MCut phsC 1000
Last Amp.Switch.ph.A B1 XCBR 1 LCut phsA 1000
Last .Amp.Switch.ph.B B1 XCBR 1 LCut phsB 1000
Last .Amp.Switch.ph.C B1 XCBR 1 LCut phsC 1000
Open Counter ph.A B1 XCBR 1 OpenCnt phsA 100
Open Counter ph.B B1 XCBR 1 OpenCnt phsB 100
Open Counter ph.C B1 XCBR 1 OpenCnt phsC 100
Trip Counter ph.A B1 XCBR 1 TripCnt phsA 100
Trip Counter ph.B B1 XCBR 1 TripCnt phsB 100
Trip Counter ph.C B1 XCBR 1 TripCnt phsC 100
Close Counter ph.A B1 XCBR 1 ClCnt phsA 100
Close Counter ph.B B1 XCBR 1 ClCnt phsB 100
Close Counter ph.C B1 XCBR 1 ClCnt phsC 100

Table 266. Breaker 2

Openings Counter B1 XCBR 2 OpCnt stVal 100
Max.Amp.Switch.ph.A B1 XCBR 2 MCut phsA 1000
Max.Amp.Switch.ph.B B1 XCBR 2 MCut phsB 1000
Max.Amp.Switch.ph.C B1 XCBR 2 MCut phsC 1000
Last Amp.Switch.ph.A B1 XCBR 2 LCut phsA 1000
Last .Amp.Switch.ph.B B1 XCBR 2 LCut phsB 1000
Last .Amp.Switch.ph.C B1 XCBR 2 LCut phsC 1000
Open Counter ph.A B1 XCBR 2 OpenCnt phsA 100
Open Counter ph.B B1 XCBR 2 OpenCnt phsB 100
Open Counter ph.C B1 XCBR 2 OpenCnt phsC 100
Trip Counter ph.A B1 XCBR 2 TripCnt phsA 100
Trip Counter ph.B B1 XCBR 2 TripCnt phsB 100
Trip Counter ph.C B1 XCBR 2 TripCnt phsC 100
Close Counter ph.A B1 XCBR 2 ClCnt phsA 100
Close Counter ph.B B1 XCBR 2 ClCnt phsB 100
Close Counter ph.C B1 XCBR 2 ClCnt phsC 100
Table 267. Breaker 1 - Operation supervision

Ki2 accumulated ph.A B1 CBOU 1 KI2A phsA 1000
Ki2 accumulated ph.B B1 CBOU 1 KI2A phsB 1000
Ki2 accumulated ph.C B1 CBOU 1 KI2A phsC 1000
Max.Ki2 accumulated B1 CBOU 1 MaxKI2A general 1000
T.electric opening Br.1 A32 CBOU 1 ElOpnTmsA mag 1000
T.electric opening Br.1 B32 CBOU 1 ElOpnTmsB mag 1000
32
T.electric opening Br.1 C CBOU 1 ElOpnTmsC mag 1000
T.mechanic opening Br.1 A32 CBOU 1 MeOpnTmsA mag 1000
32
T.mechanic opening Br.1 B CBOU 1 MeOpnTmsB mag 1000
T.mechanic opening Br.1 C32 CBOU 1 MeOpnTmsC mag 1000
32
T.opening dispersion Br.1 AB CBOU 1 DiOpnTmsAB mag 1000
T.opening dispersion Br.1 BC32 CBOU 1 DiOpnTmsBC mag 1000
T.opening dispersion Br.1 CA32 CBOU 1 DiOpnTmsCA mag 1000
32
T.electric closing Br.1 A CBOU 1 ElClsTmsA mag 1000
T.electric closing Br.1 B32 CBOU 1 ElClsTmsB mag 1000
32
T.electric closing Br.1 C CBOU 1 ElClsTmsC mag 1000
T.mechanic closing Br.1 A32 CBOU 1 MeClsTmsA mag 1000
32
T.mechanic closing Br.1 B CBOU 1 MeClsTmsB mag 1000
T.mechanic closing Br.1 C32 CBOU 1 MeClsTmsC mag 1000
32
T.closing dispersion Br.1 AB CBOU 1 DiClsTmsAB mag 1000
T.closing dispersion Br.1 BC32 CBOU 1 DiClsTmsBC mag 1000
T.closing dispersion Br.1 CA32 CBOU 1 DiClsTmsCA mag 1000
32
Inactive days Br.1 A CBOU 1 NoOpDayA mag 1000
Inactive days Br.1 B32 CBOU 1 NoOpDayB mag 1000
32
Inactive days Br.1 C CBOU 1 NoOpDayC mag 1000
32
Disponible desde la version 6.0.8.0 de firmware y 8.1.0.0 de ICD

Table 268. Breaker 2 - Operation supervision (only models with two breakers)

Ki2 accumulated ph.A B2 CBOU 2 KI2A phsA 1000
Ki2 accumulated ph.B B2 CBOU 2 KI2A phsB 1000
Ki2 accumulated ph.C B2 CBOU 2 KI2A phsC 1000
Max.Ki2 accumulated B2 CBOU 2 MaxKI2A general 1000
32
T.electric opening Br.2 A CBOU 2 ElOpnTmsA mag 1000
T.electric opening Br.2 B32 CBOU 2 ElOpnTmsB mag 1000
32
T.electric opening Br.2 C CBOU 2 ElOpnTmsC mag 1000
T.mechanic opening Br.2 A32 CBOU 2 MeOpnTmsA mag 1000
32
T.mechanic opening Br.2 B CBOU 2 MeOpnTmsB mag 1000
T.mechanic opening Br.2 C32 CBOU 2 MeOpnTmsC mag 1000
T.opening dispersion Br.2 AB32 CBOU 2 DiOpnTmsAB mag 1000
32
T.opening dispersion Br.2 BC CBOU 2 DiOpnTmsBC mag 1000
T.opening dispersion Br.2 CA32 CBOU 2 DiOpnTmsCA mag 1000
32
T.electric closing Br.2 A CBOU 2 ElClsTmsA mag 1000
T.electric closing Br.2 B32 CBOU 2 ElClsTmsB mag 1000
32
T.electric closing Br.2 C CBOU 2 ElClsTmsC mag 1000
T.mechanic closing Br.2 A32 CBOU 2 MeClsTmsA mag 1000
32
T.mechanic closing Br.2 B CBOU 2 MeClsTmsB mag 1000
T.mechanic closing Br.2 C32 CBOU 2 MeClsTmsC mag 1000
T.closing dispersion Br.2 AB32 CBOU 2 DiClsTmsAB mag 1000
32
T.closing dispersion Br.2 BC CBOU 2 DiClsTmsBC mag 1000
T.closing dispersion Br.2 CA32 CBOU 2 DiClsTmsCA mag 1000
32
Inactive days Br.2 A CBOU 2 NoOpDayA mag 1000
Inactive days Br.2 B32 CBOU 2 NoOpDayB mag 1000
32
Inactive days Br.2 C CBOU 2 NoOpDayC mag 1000
Table 269. Temperature

Temperature CTSU 1 Temp net 1000
Table 270. Power supply

Power Supply GENLLN0 1 PSup net 1000
Power Supply 2 GENLLN0 1 PSup2 net 1000
Table 271. Internal battery

Internal battery LPHD 1 IntBat net 1000

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 
32. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

The unit continually checks the various incorporated elements and cards. If an error is detected in any of the elements or
cards, an alarm is generated.
The available signals indicate faults in the card check, in the communications between the cards, in the unit’s configuration,
etc.
The detected errors are shown in:
 Status report
 Incident report
 Sequence of events (SOE)
 Digital outputs and CPU hardware alarm output.
 IHMI leds and status leds
The errors can be critical and non critical, depending on the effect they have in the device.
Critical errors
Critical hardware error. Indicates that a critical error has been produced. In addition to this signal, the cause that produced
the signal will be indicated.
If the error affects the unit’s operation, a critical error is generated, which in addition to the signal acts on:
 Colour front LED. Non-configurable status LED, which indicates the unit’s general status. If the LED is green, it
indicates that everything is correct, while if it is red it indicates a critical error in the unit.
 CPU Relay. Non-configurable 3-contact relay, which indicates the unit’s general status. If the LED is active
(common terminal – NO), it indicates that everything is correct, while if it is deactivated (common terminal– NC) it
indicates a critical error in the unit. If the unit is switched off, the relay is deactivated.
The causes that produce errors are:
 CPU error. Indicates that the check has detected an error in the CPU
 Analogue error. Indicates an error in transformers card.
 I/O micro error. Indicates an error in the I/O cards’ micro.
 Analogue connection error. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the communications between the CPU
and the transformers card.
 I/O connection error. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the communication between the CPU and an I/O
card. Additionally, it will indicate the card which has suffered the failure:
 Error card address x. Indicates that there is a communication error with the card with the address x.
 Front connection error. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the communications between the CPU and
the unit’s front card.
 Shared analogue memory error. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the Data exchange memory between
the CPU and the transformers card.
 Error shared I/O memory. Indicates that a fault has been produced in the Data exchange memory between the
CPU and the I/O cards.
 Alarm settings. Indicates that errors have been detected in the storage of the unit’s settings.
 FW Alarm. Indicates that the relay firmware versions are incompatible.
 Memory check alarm. Indicates that errors have been detected in the checking of the unit’s memory.
 Converter check alarm. Indicates that errors have been detected in the transformers card AD converter.
 Converter voltage level alarm. Indicates that errors have been detected in the transformers card reference
voltages..
 Relay activation alarm. Indicates that an error has been detected in the activation of at least one of the I/O cards’
relays.
 I/O configuration error. Indicates that the configuration of the I/O cards does not coincide with the unit’s correct
configuration.

 General Vdc error. Indicates a failure in the internal power supply levels.
 For each I/O card there is are 5 signals, indicating:
 Status OK. Indicates that the card is configured correctly and without errors
 Configured & No_detected. Indicates that the card is configured by the user, but not detected in the unit. This
may be because it is not assembled or because it has an error. Equivalent to the current communication
error.
 Different configuration. The type indicated by the user and the type detected by the unit do not coincide.
 No_configured & detected. Indicates that card that has not been configured by the user has been detected in
an address.
 Internal card error. A card check error has been received (includes relay check).
Non critical errors
These errors have a limited effect on the device.
 RTC clock error. Indicates that the check has detected an error in the real time clock.
 Continuous component monitoring alarm. Indicates that an error in the continuous measurement monitoring has
been detected in the transformers card.
 Frequency configuration error. This is not a unit failure, but rather a configuration failure. Indicates that the
frequency measurement of the signals being injected into the unit do not match the set measurement, that is, the
unit is configured as 50Hz and the signals which are being injected are greater than 55Hz; or that the unit is
configured as 60 Hz and the signals being injected are less than 55 Hz.
 Internal battery failure. Indicates that the data storage battery is below the security levels and that the data may
be lost at shutdown.
 Version compatibility error. Indicates that the versions of the unit's firmware are not correct.
 Time setting configuration alarm. Indicates that there is an error in the configuration of the unit’s time setting.
32.1 ERROR DETECTION
The error detection can be made by any of the indicated ways.
Status report:
Figure 198 shows the screen of the PacFactory that show the available check signals.
The example screen shows activation of critical error (HW error), generated by I/O configuration error (card 2 is not
detected). It also indicates Internal battery failure. On the other hand, it shows I/O card 1 is correct.
Incident reports and sequence of events:

The available check signals are shown in both messages.
Led and digital outputs:

The leds and digital output can be configured with any of the error signals
Status Led and critical error output:

Colour front LED and CPU relay are activated when a critical error is detected. They are not configurable.

Figure 198 Device checks screen
32.2 ERROR HANDLING PROCEDURE
The procedure will depend on the detected error and the device status.
 If the device is off, check that the power supply is correct. If the device is well supplied, contact the technical
service
 If the device is on but it shows failure, return to the events screen and check which type of error it is
 If critical error, with no specific indication, is shown and the error persists after turning the unit off and
on, contact the technical service.
 If converter or reference voltage error is shown. Check the Measurements, and if they are correct, turn
off and on the unit; if the error does not disappear, contact the technical service.
 If Clock error is shown, synchronize manually. If the error persists, contact the technical service.
 If error in the setting is shown, send the settings again. If error persists contact the technical service

PROTECTION DEVICES WITH SAMPLED VALUES
33. PROTECTION DEVICES WITH SAMPLED VALUES

These devices use the analog signals of frames Multicast Sampled Value (MSV).
It can be connected to merging units or electronic transformers that follow the standard IEC61850-9-2 or IEC61869-9.
The device can communicate with the Merging Units (MU), through two physical Ethernet interfaces RJ45 or fiber optic.
PRP/HSR redundancy and Link failover redundancy are available.
The measures can be captured from devices that follow the standard IEC61850-9-2LE or IEC61869-9.
The available measures and accuracy are determined by the accuracy of the external merging unit. This unit performs the
capture of the analog signals of lines and sends the sampled values for use in other devices.
Local measures captured directly through analog input current and / or voltage are allowed, so some of the measures may be
local and some sampled values. To operate correctly the measures must be synchronized by GPS.
The following figures show the board position acording to model encoding.
Figure 199 19” chassis and redundant communications
Figure 200 19” chassis and redundant power supply and communications

33.1 DEVICE MODELS
There are multifunction protection (MD), distance (ZT), differential transformer (TD), line differential (LD) and control with
measure (CD). The detailed functions included in every family are explained in the user manual of the family.
The device model code includes three additional characters at the end of the model encoding to select the sampled values
ports and the type of measures (see chapter 1).
In these devices, the housing must be Chassis 19" 4U and I/O board 6, 7 and 8 are not available.
Figure 201 Sampled values options
CONTROL
HOUSING
ANALOG
MODEL
COM1
COM2
COM3
COM4
COM5
COM6
ETH1
ETH2
ETH1
ETH2
I/O 1
I/O 2
I/O 3
I/O 4
I/O 5
I/O 6
I/O 7
I/O 8
INGEPAC EF XX MODEL INGEPAC EF- - A - A - A
MSV COMMUNICATION PORT (Sample values)

E GFO ETH-1
F RJ45 ETH-2
L LC
O GFO (ETH with PRP/HSR/Switch)
P RJ45 (ETH with PRP/HSR/Switch)
- Nada
LOCAL ANALOG MEASURES

No local measures -
Configurable (All/None local) D
33.2 MERGING UNIT DECLARATION
The ICD of the merging units from which the subscription will be made must be imported into the same installation as the
receiver to make the subscription.
For detailed information see the configuration chapter of sampled values transmitter.
33.3 SAMPLED VALUES SUBSCRIPTION
The sampled values subscription is performed according to the IEC61850 standard (edition 2).
The details of this functionality are:
 It is only allowed sampled values that comply with the IEC61869 or UCA standard, allowing up to 8 merging unit. All the
merging unit subscribed must use the same standard (IEC61869 or UCA). If it is subscribed to merging unit with different
standards, the CID is erased because the configuration is invalid.
 After sending a configuration file, the subscription and reception remain operative until the CID has been parsed and fully
validated. Then, the new subscription settings are loaded.
 The subscription is made with EC61850 edition 2 and can be used with edition 1.
33.3.1 Configuration
According to IEC 61850 edition 2, the MSV subscription uses the Inputs-ExtRef in the CID.
The Inputs section defines all external values that will be received from other computers. In this section each ExtRef
element refers to an external data and the element intAddr performs the mapping or association to a data of the device.
In the case of sampled values, the Inputs section is included in the logical node "PHSMMXU". This node has an
"OpPhasor" element associated with each analog measurement of the device. In this way, an external measurement,
received through sampled values, can be assigned to an internal measurement of the subscriber device.
The CID file of an IED with subscriptions to configured SMV messages contains several sections of IEDs. The section of
the IED itself and sections of each merging unit IEDs that publishes the MSV to which it is subscribed.
These sections of the external IEDs only contain the data model necessary to perform the subscription in order to reduce
the size of the CID file.

For more information about the MSV subscription configuration process, refer to the configuration software tool's user
manual (energyFactorySuite/pacFactory).
33.3.2 ADD-IN of subscription

The configuration tool has an Add-in that allows the subscription of sampled values in a guided way.
Figure 202 shows the selection of the configuration menu in the PacFactory.
Once the menu is selected, the sampled value configuration is selected (Figure 203) with the picture of subscription .
In the sampled values subscription nodes (LSVS), the merging unit used to recieve the samples values are selected (Figure
204).
The selection of the sampled values is made in the window "Trafo binding" and on it every analog channel is assigned with
the merging unit from which the samples are captured (Figure 205)
Figure 202 Subscription menu selection
Figure 203 Subscription configuration

Figure 204 Merging unit selection
Figure 205 Channel assignment
33.3.3 Monitoring
The LSVS logical node of the data model is used to monitor subscriptions to MSV messages. There are 8 instances of
LSVS logical nodes that allow to monitor up to 8 subscriptions to sampled values.
The configuration value in the LSVS logical node is the SvCBRef data (reference to the Sampled Values control block
subscribed). This reference must be filled out when doing the configuration of the subscription, additionally allows to be
modified in execution through an IEC 61850 client.
The values monitored in this logical node are:
 NdsCom: Subscription needs commissioning. When True, the received MSV message does not correspond to
the current subscription settings. Verify that the configuration revision is correct.
 St: When True, the subscription is active. Otherwise it is inactive.
 ConfRevNum: The expected configuration revision number in MSV messages.

 RxConfRevNum: The configuration revision number received in MSV messages.

All this data are mapped in the internal database of the device and can be used in logics of the device and in the local
display.
The assigned Boolean signals are listed in the following table:
Table 272. LSVS internal signals
LOGICAL NODE ELEMENT ASOCIATED INTERNAL SIGNAL

St (Subscription status) 24960
LSVS1
NdsCom (Needs commissioning) 24961
LSVS2
LSVS3
LSVS4
LSVS5
LSVS6
LSVS7
LSVS8
The integer signals are shown in the following table. Internally they are mapped to counters
Table 273. LSVS counters
LOGICAL NODE ELEMENT ASOCIATED INTERNAL COUNTER

ConfRevNum (ConfRev configured) 177
LSVS1
RxConfRevNum (ConfRev received) 178
LSVS2
LSVS3
LSVS4
LSVS5
LSVS6
LSVS7
LSVS8

33.4 CONFIGURABLE LOCAL MEASURES
The device code selection has different options for the local analog measures.
In the "-" option, all measures are received from mergin unit.
In the "D" option, the measures can be local or sampled values. The selection between both models is made with the
binary file loaded in the analog board. The options are:
 All measures received from local transformer.

 The signal "SV receiver device" is deactivated.
 The ICD must not include the LSVS node nor sampled values subscription; on the other hand, the ICD
will be marked as error and will be erased.
 The device´s version doesn´t include the SV board versions.
 All measures received from merging unit.

 The signal "SV receiver device" is activated.
 The ICD must include the LSVS node and sampled values subscription.
 The device´s version includes the SV board versions.

Parque Tecnológico de Bizkaia • Edificio 110
48170 Zamudio, Bizkaia, Spain
Tel + 34 944 039 600
Fax +34 944 039 345
technology@ingeteam.com
Ingeteam Power Technology, S.A.

www.ingeteam.com

UME INGEPAC EF ZT Eng PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

UME INGEPAC EF ZT Eng PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DISTANCE PROTECTION

© All rights reserved. No part of this

Ingeteam Power Technology reserves the

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

3.3.4 Series compensation ......................................................................................................................... 101

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

6.1 SYNCHRONISM......................................................................................................................................... 229

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

10.4.3 Treatment of digital input flicker ...................................................................................................... 301

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

17.1.2 SBO_WITH_NORMAL_SECURITY (2)........................................................................................... 344

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

23.1.5 I/O pages ......................................................................................................................................... 383

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

27.3.1 Digital status table ........................................................................................................................... 441

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

32. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE .............................................................................................. 522

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

1.1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Table 1 Functions depending on model

ZT0 ZT1 (52 ½)

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

1.2 MODEL ENCODING

EXTENDED CONTROL FUNCTIONS

POWER SUPPLY MODULE

REAR SERIAL COMMUNICATION PORTS

REAR ETHERNET COMMUNICATION PORTS

I/O BOARD CONFIGURATION

Note 1: Only selectable with extended control functions.

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

Model T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12

Figure 1 Board position according to model encoding 19” chassis

Figure 2 Board position according to model encoding ½ 19” chassis”

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

Figure 5 PRP Redundancy (2RJ45) Figure 6 PRP Redundancy (2RJ45 + 2LC)

1.3 USER INTERFACE

Local. The front board is equipped with:

 10-digit numerical keyboard with decimal point, plus R key

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

1.4.2 Power supply

Figure 10 Double power supply

1.4.3 Input/output cards

Figure 11 Module 11 digital inputs and 9 digital outputs

Figure 12 Module 16 digital inputs and 16 digital outputs

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

Figure 13 Module 16 digital inputs and 8 digital outputs

 Module 4 (Figure 14): Equipped with 32 digital inputs grouped as follows:

Figure 14 Module 32 inputs

Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8

Standard configuration of analogue inputs

Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8

Figure 16 Module with 16 digital inputs and 8 analogue inputs (4 isolated)

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

Figure 17 Module 8 inputs, 4 outputs (hbco) y 4 digital outputs

Figure 18 Module 8 inputs, 8 outputs

Figure 19 Module 8 inputs, 4 outputs (fast and hbco) y 4 digital outputs

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

1.4.4 Analogue inputs

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

1.4.4.1 Wiring diagrams

Figure 20 Wiring diagram Iphase, In, Ipol, Vphase, Vsyn

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

Figure 21 Wiring diagram Iphase, In, Vphase, Vsyn